Service Manual CS4002i-5002i-6002i PDF

[CONFIDENTIAL]
&6 4002i
&6 5002i
&6 6002i
PF-7100/7110/7120
DP-7100/7110
DF-7100/7110/7120
AK-7100/MT-730(B)/BF-730
JS-7100/PH-7A/PH-7C
PH-7100/PH-7120
FAX System 12
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in September 2019
Rev.9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
CONFIDENTIAL
FOR AUTHORIZED KYOCERA ENGINEERS ONLY. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE TO NON-AUTHORIZED PAR-
TIES.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BAT-

TERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste
officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE

INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires
municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Notation of products in the manual
For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed.
Product name Print speed 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia

TASKalfa 6002i 60 ppm ○ ○ ○ ○
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Revision history
Revision Date Pages Revised contents
1 28 June 2016 2-38 Added: IMPORTANT
2-43 Correction: (14-3) Setup setting at high altitude place
3-89 Correction: 2200 sheets paper (64 g/m2)→1750 sheets
2000 sheets paper (80 g/m2)→1500 sheets
4-20 Added: (3-3)Detaching and reattaching the secondary
transfer roller
4-134,4-135 Correction: Procedure in case of replacing
4-136,4-137 Added: (4-4)Detaching and reattaching the fuser
discharger unit
4-145 Correction: Procedure is revised
4-149 Correction: front PWB→Drum/Developer relay PWB
4-157 Added: Remove the IB-35
6-71 Added: Caution
6-124,6-125 Correction: Initial setting Warm Up/ Print
6-127 Added: U167 Correction
6-129 Added: U193
6-131 Added: How to directly start up U201
6-174 Correction: U253 Initial setting: 120V/ 220-240V model
6-278 Added: U952: Maintenance mode workflow preset list
6-279 Correction: U964: How to retrieve a log
7-437 to 7-442 Added: Connector troubleshooting
8-28 Correction: YC17:
Switchback motor→Eject reversing motor
8-37 YC32 A13 to A18 Not used
8-40,8-44 Correction:
YC7: Right cover switch→ Conveying open/close switch
8-43 Added: Container cooling fan motor
8-62,8-63 Correction: YC9 Voltage
9-1 Correction: (1)Repetitive defects gauge
2 9 August 2016 Cover Deletion: DP-7120
Contents Deletion: 2-2 (16),(17)
4-3 (6) (6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height
4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures
2-2 Correction: Installation procedures flow
2-43 Correction: (16),(17)
1. C,M,Y,K→K
*: C,M,Y,K→K
2-60 to 2-62 Deletion: Hook-and-loop fastener, Spacer
Correction: Procedures
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 3-18 Correction: fuser heater→fuser IH
4-4 Added: U469 (Replacing the maintenance kit)
4-5 Added: U469 (Primary transfer unit)
4-18 Correction: Added 1. U469 (Belt Initialize)
4-33,4-34 Added: (6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height
4-52 Correction: Procedures (workflow)
4-105,4-120 Added: IMPORTANT
4-132 Correction: Delete” Except Low-end model (100V, 220-
240V model)”
4-139 Deletion: Hook-and-loop fastener, Spacer
Procedures: After replacing the fuser discharger unit
4-149 Added: IMPORTANT
4-162 Correction: execute U026→ execute U026/ Flash
4-246 to 4-261 Added: 4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures
6-4, 6-129 Deletion: U193
Added: U197
6-6 Deletion: U469 Message
6-17,6-18 Correction: Service status page image
6-19 Correction:(29)→ (28)
6-21 Correction: (54)
Deletion: (59)
6-31 Deletion: U024 color table
6-38 Added: U034 *1: This is only factory inspection use.
6-71 Deletion: Sample Set
6-77,6-78 Deletion: U100 *1, *2, Set DC Auto Adj
6-82, 6-83 Correction: U101 Initial setting
6-96, 6-97 Correction: U107 Initial setting
6-98 to 6-100 Correction: U108 Initial setting
6-104 Added: U127 Method: Clear
6-111 to 6-114 Correction: U140 Initial setting
6-117 Correction: U155 Purpose
6-118 Correction: U156 Contents, Purpose
6-123 Correction: U161 Initial setting
6-127 Deletion: U167 Correction
6-129 Added: U127
6-139, 6-140 Deletion:
Setting: Normal/ AD (CMY, RGB, Full Color)
Setting: Print (Full Color)
6-212,6-213 Correction: U464 Mode contents
6-217 Correction: U469 Contents, Purpose, Error codes list
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 6-277 Deletion: Workflow SET UP: U469
7-73, 7-75, 7- Added: “Turn the drum heater on.”
77, 7-79 to 7-
81,7-83, to 7-85
9-3 Added: D4
9-7 Deletion: W1, W6
3 28 April 2017 Contents
1-2 Correction: Charging system
Added: *4
1-4 Correction: Operating System
1-5 Correction: Note
1-7 Correction: Large Capacity Feeder 1,750→1,650
1-10 Correction: (5-12)Weight Approx. 0.7 kg→Approx. 0.6
kg
1-20 Correction: Changed the figure
1-22 Correction: (1-18), (1-19)
1-24 Correction: 1-4 Module map
2-6 Correction: (2-3) bundled items
2-12 Correction: (2-9) parts name
2-30 Correction: Procedure 2
2-32 Added: Procedure 8
2-37 Correction: (12)Connecting the Power Cord
Added: (13)Turn the power on
2-42 Correction: (15-2) Procedure 1
2-77 Deletion: (9-1) In case installing the document table
2-85 Added: Caution
Correction: [ON]→[Mode1]
2-87,2-89,2-93 Correction: [ON]→[Mode1]
2-90 Correction: Parts item
2-92 Correction: Procedure
2-101 Correction: ProcedureProcedure 28
2-104 to 2-107 Added: (13) Attach the optional cable
3-4 Correction: Parts names
3-18 Added: Fuser high voltage PWB
3-25 Correction: NO.52, 54
3-30 Correction: NO.28, 29
3-42 Added: (1-7)Punch unit
3-72 Correction: Components parts
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 3-74 Deletion: 7. Toner conveying roller
3-87 Correction: Parts name
3-89 Correction: Components parts
3-91 Correction: 1,750→1,650, *1: Inch→Metric
specifications
4-1 Deletion: Caution, (4)
4-4,4-19,4-21 Added: Secondary transfer roller:setting after replacing
4-5 Correction: (1-1) added the retard roller
4-6 to 4-8 Correction: Procedures, figure
4-11,4-24 Correction: Changed the figure
4-14 Correction: Procedures, figure
4-15 Correction: Procedures 2, 3
4-16,4-23 Added: Note
4-26 Correction: AC Calibration→AC Calib/Calibration
(4-2)Procedures 4
4-28 Correction: figure
4-31 Correction: setting after replacing
4-37 to 4-40 Correction: (1-1)PF retard roller, Procedures
4-44,4-45 Correction: Procedures
4-54 Correction: 4-5
4-55,4-58,4-73 Correction: figure
4-56 Correction: Procedures 5
4-61 Correction: LSU rear cover→ISU rear cover
4-62 Added: (1-8)the lower left cover
4-66 Added: Procedures 5
4-70 Correction: Procedures 14
4-121,4-179 Correction: figure
4-135 Added: Note
4-136 Correction: Procedure (1)
4-145 Added: After replacing the fuser discharge needle
4-153 Correction: Procedures 18,19
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 4-160,4-161 Correction: Procedures
4-165 Added: Note
4-169 Correction: Procedures
4-205 Correction: Correction: Procedures 3,4
4-206 Correction: Correction: Procedure 7
4-208 Correction: Procedures 1:four screws→five screws
4-235,4-239 Correction: Procedures 2:waste toner box→PH tank
4-244 Added: 3.Each gears
4-245,4-247 Added: CH: Check feed count by U905
5-4,5-5 Correction: Procedures 1 to 9
6-4, Added: U193
6-9 Added: U000 Configuration List, LLU Report
6-10 Correction: figure (11)TonerLog
6-16 Correction: (11)TonerLog #
6-18,6-19 Correction: Service Status Page
6-20 Correction: (4),(5)
6-23 Added:(88)Software version of option language
6-34 Correction: U026 Purpose
6-35 Correction: U030 SB(CW),SB(CCW)
6-38 Added: U033 Note
6-40,6-60,6- Added: Note
63,6-67,6-68,6-
190
6-46 Correction: U037 Exit Cooling
6-52 Added: U053Method:Contents, Note
6-53 to 6-56 Correction: U053
6-57 Correction: U059 Contents,Purpose
Added: Note
6-65 Correction: U070 Main Scan (CIS) Setting range
Added: Note
6-69 Correction: U073 Size Setting range
6-71 Correction: U087 Initial Setting value 145→48
6-76 Correction: U099 original Area (mm)
6-85 to 6-87,6- Correction: Initial Setting value
90
6-96,6-97 Correction: U107 Contents,Purpose
Added:1st sheet CLN B/W
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 6-98 Correction: U108 Contents,Purpose
6-103 Correction: U119 Execute Contents
6-105 Added: U127 del Note
6-106 Added: U128 ON timing conversion table
6-112,6-115 Added: U140 Freq Mode
6-114 Correction: U140 Setting: Calibration
6-118 Deletion: U155 Method: Waste Toner: Near Full
Method: Calibration: Full
6-121,6-122 Correction: U159 Contents,Purpose
Container UnlockDisplays: Initial setting
Setting: Waste Box Setting
6-123,6-125,6- Added: U161: Ready Time Adjust
126
6-127 Correction: U167 Contents,Purpose
Added: Correction,Clear
6-129 Added: U193
6-147 Added: U222 Note SSFC
6-152 Correction: U237 Setting value
6-165 Added: U246 Shift Front HP / Shift Tail HP
6-174 Correction: U253 DBL(A3/Ledger)/DBL(B4)
6-198 to 6-200 Correction: U411 Method: DP FD(ChartB),DP
FD(ChartA)
6-214 Added: U464 Timing
6-215 Correction: U465 Contents: Laser Power
6-256 Correction: U671 RECOVERY FAX Storage,FAX Data
CLEAR,Change FAX Strage
6-265 Correction: U905 1000-sheet/3000-sheet→1000-sheet/
4000-sheet
6-279 Correction: U964 Contents
7-1 to 7-520 Correction: Change all pages
8-65 Added: Fuser high-voltage PWB
9-3 Added: K6 (100V model only)
9-4 Correction: R0 3000-sheet →4000-sheet
9-5 Correction: S3 Factory default setting:1→0
9-10 to 9-12 Deletion: (original)
9-13 Added: 12 Main scan direction diagonal image adjust-
ment
9-18 Correction: (5) Right cover switch→Conveying open/
close sensor
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 9-20 Correction: (7) Conveying cover switch→Right cover
switch
4 6 August 2017 1-2 Correction: Weight
3-22,3-24,3-26, Added: Toner motor rotation sensor K
9-17
4-244 Added: G <MP tray>
6-8,6-282 to 6- Added: U981Setting/Checking of predictive mainte-
288 nance alert data
6-57 Correction: U059 Initial setting value
6-122 Correction: U159 Waste Toner Level Setting range
6-127 Correction: U167 Contents/ Purpose
6-139 Added: U204 Parallel Coin Vender, Note
6-188,6-189 Added: U346 Fuser Power Mode
8-27,8-28,8- Correction: (3-3) Connector list
30,8-31
8-114,8-115 Correction: (10-2) Connector lists
9-3 Deletion: D4
9-11,9-12 Correction: U066,U067 Rotate
9-34 Correction: (9)Mailbox (MT-730(B)) wiring diagram
5 30 November 2017 2-60,2-61 Correction: Procedures
4-163 Added: Note
6-9 Deletion: U000 Configuration List
Added: Note
6-22 Correction: (55) Life counter (The second line)
6-39 Deletion: U034 LSU Out Top B/W
6-66 Correction: U071 Setting range Data variation
6-77 Correction: U099 Initial setting value
6-80 Correction: U100 Set Charger Freq Initial setting value
6-90 to 6-94 Correction: U106 Initial setting value
6-97 Correction: U107 Belt(B) Initial setting value
6-99 Correction: U108 Output B/W Initial setting value
6-107 Correction: U131 Manual Initial setting value
6-117 Correction: U147 Upper limit Initial setting value
6-125 Correction: U161 Warm Up Initial setting value
6-126 Correction: U161 Ready Time Adjust Initial setting value
6-215 Correction: U464 Time Interval Initial setting value
7-1 to 765 Correction: 7 Troubleshooting
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 18 July 2018 1-6,1-7,1-9 Correction: Dimension (W × D × H)
2-57,2-59 Deletion: *:NK-7100 only, (Except 120v model)
2-60 Correction: Hook-and-loop fastener B
(303LL0253_)→(303MX0202_)
2-108,6-229 to Correction: Destination code → Country Code
6-231 Country Code list
3-21 Correction: LED PWB Part. No.
3-26 Correction: Waste toner full sensor, Weight sensor Part.
No.
3-29 Correction: Fuser motor, Waste toner motor Part. No.
3-56 Correction: (2) Drive location 11
3-94 Correction: (4-1) Original paper feed section
DP feed roller→DP feed belt
4-18,4-25,4-31 Added: Note attaching the primary transfer unit, drum
unit, developer unit
4-94,4-97 Correction: Figure 146, 152
4-107 to 4-110 Correction: Detaching and reattaching the feed drive
unit Procedures
4-167 Added: Connect the FFC connector
4-200,4-201 Added: (6) Sensor
4-240 to 4-244 Added: (6-2) Detaching and reattaching the DF staple
unit
6-13 Added: (c) Detail of paper size 8D: A5E
6-23,6-24 Correction: (94), (96)
6-189 Correction: U346 Setting: Auto sleep
6-195 Correction: U407
7-69,7-72,7- Correction: 7. Troubleshooting
82,7-92,7-
119,7-147,7-
149,7-327,7-
329,7-332,7-
335,7-338,7-
348,7-368,7-
379,7-384 to 7-
386,7-425,7-
428,7-437,7-
438,7-515,7-
518,7-520,7-
524,7-527,7-
528,7-531,7-
532,7-534,7-
535,7-541,7-
542,7-546,7-
619 to 7-640
9-1 Correction: Figure
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 18 July 2019 7-447 Addition: F60X
8 26 August 2019 3-29 Correction: Part name
7-383 Correction: C7490
9 20 September 2019 6-10 to 6-11 Addition: Unit History Report
6-128,6-131 Addition: Mixed Size Mode
[CONFIDENTIAL]
This page is intentionally left blank.

[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

[CONFIDENTIAL]
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
This page is intentionally left blank.

[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
1 Specifications
1-1Detail Specifications ............................................................................................................. 1-1
(1)Common function ............................................................................................................. 1-1
(2)Copy Functions ................................................................................................................ 1-3
(3)Printer Functions .............................................................................................................. 1-4
(4)Scanner Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-5
(5)Option............................................................................................................................... 1-6
(5-1)Document Processor .......................................................................................... 1-6
(5-2)Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2) ............................................................................ 1-6
(5-3)Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet × 2)........................................................... 1-7
(5-4)Side Feeder (3000-sheet)................................................................................... 1-7
(5-5)Inner Finisher...................................................................................................... 1-7
(5-6)Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) .......................................................................... 1-8
(5-7)1000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................ 1-8
(5-8)4000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................................ 1-9
(5-9)Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) .......................................... 1-9
(5-10)Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher) .................................................................. 1-9
(5-11)Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher) ......................................................... 1-10
(5-12)Job Separator (JS) Tray ................................................................................. 1-10
(5-13)Banner Tray .................................................................................................... 1-11
(5-14)FAX System.................................................................................................... 1-11
1-2Part Names......................................................................................................................... 1-13
(1)Machine.......................................................................................................................... 1-13
(1-1)Exterior ............................................................................................................. 1-13
(1-2)Connectors/Interior ........................................................................................... 1-15
(1-3)With Optional Equipment Attached................................................................... 1-16
(1-4)FAX System...................................................................................................... 1-17
(1-5)Operation Panel Keys....................................................................................... 1-18
1-3Option configuration ........................................................................................................... 1-19
(1)Option............................................................................................................................. 1-20
(1-1)DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reverse Scan)"
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover" ........................................................ 1-21
(1-2)MT-730(B) "Mailbox"......................................................................................... 1-21
(1-3)DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher" ....................................................................... 1-21
(1-4)DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher" ....................................................................... 1-21
(1-5)BF-730 "Folding Unit " ...................................................................................... 1-21
(1-6)PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)" .......................................................... 1-21
(1-7)PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet×2)" ......................................... 1-21
(1-8)PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)" .............................................................. 1-21
(1-9)Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray" ....................................................................... 1-21
(1-10)DF-7100 "Inner Finisher" ................................................................................ 1-21
(1-11)PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit" .................................................... 1-22
(1-12)PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit" .............................................................. 1-22
(1-13)JS-7100 "Job Separator" ................................................................................ 1-22
(1-14)NK-7100, NK-7110 "Optional Numeric Keypad" ............................................. 1-22
(1-15)DT-730 (B) "Document Table" ........................................................................ 1-22
(1-16)Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder" ......................................................... 1-22
(1-17)FAX System 12 "FAX Kit" ............................................................................... 1-22
(1-18)IB-50 "Network Interface Kit" .......................................................................... 1-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-19)IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" ........................................................... 1-22

(1-20)IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" ........................................................... 1-22
(1-21)Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" ...................................... 1-23
(1-22)Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"............................................................. 1-23
(1-23)Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit" .......................................................... 1-23
(1-24)UG-33 "Thin Print Option"............................................................................... 1-23
(1-25)UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"...................................................................... 1-23
(1-26)Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" .......................................... 1-23
1-4Module map........................................................................................................................ 1-24
2 Installation
2-1Environment ......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2Installing the main unit.......................................................................................................... 2-2
(1)Unpacking and checking bundled items........................................................................... 2-3
(1-1)Main unit ............................................................................................................. 2-3
(2)Unpacking and checking bundled items(Enhancement devices)..................................... 2-4
(2-1)Paper Feeder (PF-7100)..................................................................................... 2-4
(2-2)Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110) ...................................................................... 2-5
(2-3)Side Feeder (PF-7120) ....................................................................................... 2-6
(2-4)Document Processor (DP-7100)......................................................................... 2-7
(2-5)Document Processor (DP-7110)......................................................................... 2-8
(2-6)Inner Finisher (DF-7100) .................................................................................... 2-9
(2-7)1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120)......................................................................... 2-10
(2-8)4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)........................................................................ 2-11
(2-9)Mailbox (MT-730(B))......................................................................................... 2-12
(2-10)Folding unit (BF-730) ...................................................................................... 2-13
(2-11)Punch unit (PH-7A / PH-7C / PH-7D) ............................................................. 2-14
(2-12)Punch Unit (PH-7100 / PH-7120 / PH-7130) .................................................. 2-15
(3)Notes on main unit transportation .................................................................................. 2-16
(4)Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame ................................................................ 2-17
(5)Release of lift plate stopper............................................................................................ 2-18
(6)Attaching the sub tray .................................................................................................... 2-19
(7)Affixing the operation panel sheet (220-240V models only)........................................... 2-19
(8)Optional unit installation ................................................................................................. 2-20
(9)Connecting the Interface Cable...................................................................................... 2-21
(10)Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only) ....................................................... 2-23
(11)Loading Paper.............................................................................................................. 2-25
(11-1)Precaution for Loading Paper ......................................................................... 2-25
(11-2)Set paper in the cassette ................................................................................ 2-26
(11-3)Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ......................................... 2-30
(11-4)Set paper in the large capacity feeder ............................................................ 2-33
(11-5)Set paper in the side feeder............................................................................ 2-35
(12)Connecting the Power Cord ......................................................................................... 2-37
(13)Turn the power on. ....................................................................................................... 2-37
(14)Setting up the Toner Container .................................................................................... 2-38
(15)Default Setting.............................................................................................................. 2-41
(15-1)Setting Date and Time .................................................................................... 2-41
(15-2)Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ........................................................ 2-42
(15-3)Paper size and media type setting.................................................................. 2-42
(16)Installing Software........................................................................................................ 2-43
(17)Setup setting at high altitude place .............................................................................. 2-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(18)Image adjustment......................................................................................................... 2-43

(18-1)Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464)...................... 2-43
(18-2)Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410).................... 2-43
(18-3)Output Maintenance report (Execute maintenance mode U000) ................... 2-44
(18-4)Clearing the counts (Execute maintenance mode U927) ............................... 2-44
(18-5)Setting the delivery date (Execute maintenance mode U278)........................ 2-44
(19)Exiting from the maintenance mode............................................................................. 2-45
(20)Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off) ..................................... 2-45
(21)Turn the power on again .............................................................................................. 2-46
2-3Installing the optional equipment ........................................................................................ 2-46
(1)SD/SDHC memory card ................................................................................................. 2-46
(2)Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50) ............................................................................ 2-48
(3)Wireless LAN interface (IB-51)....................................................................................... 2-48
(4)Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) (120V model standard) ................................................. 2-49
(5)Document table (DT-730(B)).......................................................................................... 2-53
(6)Numeric Keypad (NK-7100 / NK-7110).......................................................................... 2-57
(7)ID card reader ................................................................................................................ 2-60
(8)USB keyboard (120V /220-230V model only) ................................................................ 2-64
(9)Handset (100V model only)............................................................................................ 2-76
(10)Cassette heater............................................................................................................ 2-83
(10-1)In the case of main unit cassette .................................................................... 2-83
(10-2)In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ................................................................ 2-85
(10-3)In case of Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110) ................................................. 2-87
(10-4)In case of Side Feeder (PF-7120) .................................................................. 2-89
(11)Coin Vender (option for 100v model only).................................................................... 2-93
(12)Banner Tray ............................................................................................................... 2-101
(13)Attach the optional cable............................................................................................ 2-103
2-4About Optional Applications ............................................................................................. 2-107
2-5Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system ..................................................... 2-108
3 Machine Design
3-1Mechanical Configuration ..................................................................................................... 3-1
(1)Cross-section view ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3-2Extension device construction (option)................................................................................. 3-2
(1)Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100)..................................................................... 3-2
(2)Large capacity feeder cross-section view (PF-7110) ....................................................... 3-2
(3)Side feeder cross-section view (PF-7120) ....................................................................... 3-3
(4)Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100) ....................................................... 3-4
(5)Document processor cross-section view (DP-7110) ....................................................... 3-4
(6)Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-7100)................................................................... 3-5
(7)Inner Finisher cross-section view (DF-7100) ................................................................... 3-5
(8)4,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7110)......................................................... 3-6
(9)1,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120) ........................................................ 3-7
(10)Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B))........................................................................ 3-8
(11)Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730) ....................................................................... 3-9
(12)Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100) ................................................................ 3-10
3-3Paper conveying and Paper detection................................................................................ 3-11
(1)Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7100+DF-7100+PH-7110 ........................................................ 3-11
(2)Main unit+DP-7110+PF-7110+PF-7120+AK-7100+DF-7110+MT-730(B)+
BF-730+PH-7 .................................................................................................................... 3-12
(3)Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7110+AK-7100+DF-7120+PH-7 .............................................. 3-13
3-4Electric parts....................................................................................................................... 3-14
(1)Wire connection ............................................................................................................. 3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-1)(Machine rear side)........................................................................................... 3-14

(1-2)Backside of the shield box ................................................................................ 3-15
(2)Descriptions about the major PWBs .............................................................................. 3-16
(2-1)Main PWB......................................................................................................... 3-16
(2-2)Engine PWB ..................................................................................................... 3-16
(2-3)Main high-voltage PWB .................................................................................... 3-17
(2-4)Transfer high-voltage PWB............................................................................... 3-17
(2-5)Low power voltage PEB.................................................................................... 3-17
(2-6)IH PWB ............................................................................................................. 3-18
(2-7)Operation panel main PWB .............................................................................. 3-18
(2-8)Fuser high voltage PWB ................................................................................... 3-18
(3)Electric parts layout........................................................................................................ 3-19
(3-1)PWBs................................................................................................................ 3-19
(3-2)Part name table (PWB)..................................................................................... 3-21
(3-3)Sensors and Switches ...................................................................................... 3-22
(3-4)Part name table (Sensors and Switches) ......................................................... 3-25
(3-5)Motors............................................................................................................... 3-27
(3-6)Part name table (motor).................................................................................... 3-29
(3-7)Others ............................................................................................................... 3-30
(3-8)Part name table (other)..................................................................................... 3-32
3-5Electric parts (Optional unit) ............................................................................................... 3-33
(1)Electric parts layout........................................................................................................ 3-33
(1-1)Document Processor (DP-7100)....................................................................... 3-33
(1-2)Document Processor (DP-7110)....................................................................... 3-34
(1-3)Paper feeder (PF-7100).................................................................................... 3-36
(1-4)Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) ...................................................................... 3-37
(1-5)Side feeder (PF-7120) ...................................................................................... 3-39
(1-6)Inner Finisher (DF-7100) .................................................................................. 3-40
(1-7)Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) ............................................................ 3-41
(1-8)Attachment kit (AK-7100).................................................................................. 3-42
(1-9)4000-sheet finisher (DF-7110).......................................................................... 3-43
(1-10)1000-sheet finisher (DF-7120)........................................................................ 3-45
(1-11)Mailbox (MT-730(B))....................................................................................... 3-47
(1-12)Punch unit (PH-7) ........................................................................................... 3-48
(1-13)Folding unit (BF-730) ...................................................................................... 3-49
(1-14)Job separator (JS-7100) ................................................................................. 3-50
3-6Drive system....................................................................................................................... 3-51
(1)Consisting of unit drive................................................................................................... 3-51
(2)Drive location ................................................................................................................. 3-56
(3)Drive unit ........................................................................................................................ 3-57
(3-1)Feed drive unit .................................................................................................. 3-57
(3-2)Main drive unit .................................................................................................. 3-57
(3-3)Toner supply drive unit ..................................................................................... 3-58
(3-4)Fuser drive unit ................................................................................................. 3-58
3-7Mechanical construction ..................................................................................................... 3-59
(1)Paper feed and conveying section ................................................................................. 3-59
(1-1)Cassette feed section ....................................................................................... 3-59
(1-2)MP tray paper feed section............................................................................... 3-62
(1-3)Paper conveying section................................................................................... 3-64
(2)Optical section................................................................................................................ 3-66
(2-1)Image scanner section...................................................................................... 3-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-2)Laser scanner unit ............................................................................................ 3-69

(3)Developer section .......................................................................................................... 3-71
(3-1)Developer unit................................................................................................... 3-71
(4)Drum section .................................................................................................................. 3-73
(4-1)Main charger unit .............................................................................................. 3-73
(4-2)Cleaning............................................................................................................ 3-73
(5)Transfer and separation section..................................................................................... 3-75
(5-1)Primary transfer unit ......................................................................................... 3-75
(5-2)Secondary transfer roller unit............................................................................ 3-77
(6)Fuser section.................................................................................................................. 3-79
(6-1)Fuser unit.......................................................................................................... 3-79
(7)Exit feedshift section ...................................................................................................... 3-82
(7-1)Exit unit ............................................................................................................. 3-82
(7-2)Exit paper jam................................................................................................... 3-84
(8)Duplex conveying section .............................................................................................. 3-85
(8-1)Duplex conveying unit....................................................................................... 3-85
3-8Mechanical construction (option)........................................................................................ 3-87
(1)Paper feeder (PF-7100) ................................................................................................. 3-87
(2)Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) ................................................................................... 3-90
(2-1)Cassette section ............................................................................................... 3-90
(3)Side feeder (PF-7120).................................................................................................... 3-92
(4)Document Processor (DP-7100) .................................................................................... 3-94
(4-1)Original paper feed section............................................................................... 3-94
(4-2)Original conveying section and exit section ...................................................... 3-95
(4-3)Dual Reverse Scan........................................................................................... 3-98
(5)Document Processor(DP-7110) ..................................................................................... 3-99
(5-1)Original paper feed section............................................................................... 3-99
(5-2)Original conveying section and exit section .................................................... 3-100
(6)Inner Finisher (DF-7100).............................................................................................. 3-102
(6-1)Paper conveying section................................................................................. 3-102
(6-2)Bundle exit operation ...................................................................................... 3-105
(7)4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) .................................................................................... 3-107
(7-1)Paper entry and feedshift and DF tray B exit section ..................................... 3-107
(7-2)Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section ................................ 3-109
(7-3)Finishing section ............................................................................................. 3-109
(7-4)Relief drum operation ..................................................................................... 3-112
(8-1)Finishing section ............................................................................................. 3-116
(9)Mailbox (MT-730(B)) .................................................................................................... 3-121
(9-1)Operation of output to the mailbox tray........................................................... 3-123
(10)Punch unit (PH-7)....................................................................................................... 3-124
(11)Folding unit (BF-730) ................................................................................................. 3-126
(11-1)Paper folding operation (Center-folding, Tri-folding)..................................... 3-128
(11-2)Tri-folding position adjustment for the folding unit ........................................ 3-131
4 Maintenance
4-1Precautions for the maintenance.......................................................................................... 4-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1)Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 4-1

(2)Storage and handling of the drum.................................................................................... 4-1
(3)Storage of the toner container.......................................................................................... 4-1
4-2Maintenance parts ................................................................................................................ 4-2
(1)Maintenance kit ................................................................................................................ 4-2
(2)Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit............................ 4-3
4-3Maintenance parts replacement procedures ........................................................................ 4-5
(1)Cassette feed section....................................................................................................... 4-5
(1-1)Detaching and attaching the retard roller, the pickup roller and the feed roller. . 4-5
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner ................................................... 4-10
(2)MP tray feed section ...................................................................................................... 4-13
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the MP feed roller .................................................. 4-13
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the MP retard roller ................................................ 4-15
(3)Transfer section ............................................................................................................. 4-16
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the primary transfer unit ......................................... 4-16
(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer unit. ................................... 4-19
(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller .................................. 4-20
(4)Drum section .................................................................................................................. 4-22
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit.......................................................... 4-22
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit ..................................... 4-27
(5)Developer section .......................................................................................................... 4-29
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit .................................................. 4-29
(6)Fuser section.................................................................................................................. 4-33
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit .......................................................... 4-33
(6-2)Adjusting the fuser unit height (Trailing edge skew image adjustment)............ 4-35
(7)Others ............................................................................................................................ 4-37
(7-1)Detaching and reattaching the filter .................................................................. 4-37
4-4Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) ......................................................... 4-38
(1)Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ................................................................................................ 4-38
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller, PF pickup roller and
PF feed roller............................................................................................................ 4-38
(2)Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110) ................................................................................. 4-43
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller, PF pickup roller and
PF feed roller............................................................................................................ 4-43
(3)Side Feeder (PF-7120) .................................................................................................. 4-47
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF pickup roller and PF feed roller .................. 4-47
(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller................................................. 4-49
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup roller and DP feed roller. ................ 4-50
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller. ............................................... 4-51
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup roller and DP feed roller. ................ 4-52
(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller. ............................................... 4-54
4-5Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit............................................... 4-55
4-6Disassembly and Reassembly procedures ........................................................................ 4-56
(1)Exterior cover ................................................................................................................. 4-56
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the front cover........................................................ 4-56
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the front cover for maintenance ............................. 4-58
(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the inner cover ....................................................... 4-59
(1-4)Rear top cover .................................................................................................. 4-61
(1-5)Detaching and reattaching the rear bottom cover............................................. 4-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-6)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover................................................... 4-62

(1-7)Detaching and reattaching the ISU rear cover.................................................. 4-62
(1-8)Detaching and reattaching the top left cover/the rear left cover/
the lower left cover. .................................................................................................. 4-63
(1-9)Detaching and reattaching the right top cover .................................................. 4-65
(1-10)Detaching and reattaching the rear right top cover / rear right bottom cover . 4-65
(1-11)Detaching and reattaching the right cover Assy. ............................................ 4-67
(2)Optical section................................................................................................................ 4-74
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the LSU.................................................................. 4-74
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the lens unit ........................................................... 4-86
(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the lamp unit .......................................................... 4-90
(2-4)Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires................................................... 4-95
(3)Drive section ................................................................................................................ 4-103
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit ................................................ 4-103
(3-2)Detaching and attaching the main drive unit................................................... 4-105
(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the container motor.............................................. 4-111
(3-4)Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit.................................... 4-118
(3-5)Detaching and reattaching the fuser drive unit ............................................... 4-129
(4)Others .......................................................................................................................... 4-137
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the SSD ............................................................... 4-137
(4-2)Hard disk (HDD) ............................................................................................. 4-139
(4-3)Detaching and reattaching the lift motor ......................................................... 4-142
(4-4)Detaching and reattaching the fuser discharger unit ...................................... 4-146
(4-5)Detaching and reattaching the exit unit .......................................................... 4-148
(4-6)Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit....................................... 4-149
(4-7)Fan motor attachment direction ...................................................................... 4-164
(5)PWBs ........................................................................................................................... 4-165
(5-1)Detaching and attaching the engine PWB ...................................................... 4-165
(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the main PWB...................................................... 4-169
(5-3)Detaching and attaching the main high voltage PWB..................................... 4-174
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB ............................. 4-177
(5-5)Detaching and attaching the low voltage PWB............................................... 4-184
(5-6)Detaching and reattaching the IH PWB .......................................................... 4-189
(5-7)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB..................................... 4-195
(6)Sensor.......................................................................................................................... 4-200
(6-1)Attaching MP paper width sensor ................................................................... 4-200
4-7Disassembly and Reassembly procedures (Option) ........................................................ 4-202
(1)Paper Feeder (PF-7100) .............................................................................................. 4-202
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit................................................... 4-202
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ................................................... 4-203
(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB ......................................................... 4-205
(2)Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110) ............................................................................... 4-207
(3)Side Feeder (PF-7120) ................................................................................................ 4-214
(4)Document Processor (DP-7100) .................................................................................. 4-219
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the document processor ...................................... 4-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover................................................. 4-223

(4-3)Detaching and attaching the DP PWB............................................................ 4-224
(5)Document Processor (DP-7110) .................................................................................. 4-227
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the document processor ...................................... 4-227
(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover................................................. 4-231
(5-3)Detaching and attaching the DP PWB............................................................ 4-232
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the DPCIS............................................................ 4-234
(6)Inner Finisher (DF-7100).............................................................................................. 4-237
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the DF PWB......................................................... 4-237
(6-2)Detaching and reattaching the DF staple unit................................................. 4-240
(8)4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ................................................................................... 4-249
4-8Periodic maintenance Procedures.................................................................................... 4-253
(1)Main unit....................................................................................................................... 4-253
(2)Option........................................................................................................................... 4-255
(2-1)DP-7100.......................................................................................................... 4-255
(2-2)DP-7110.......................................................................................................... 4-257
(2-3)PF-7100 .......................................................................................................... 4-259
(2-4)PF-7110 .......................................................................................................... 4-260
(2-5)PF-7120 .......................................................................................................... 4-261
(2-6)AK-7100.......................................................................................................... 4-262
(2-7)DF-7100.......................................................................................................... 4-263
(2-8)DF-7110.......................................................................................................... 4-265
(2-9)DF-7120.......................................................................................................... 4-267
5 Firmware
5-1Firmware update................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode
6-1Maintenance mode ............................................................................................................... 6-1
(1)Executing method of the maintenance mode................................................................... 6-1
(2)Maintenance modes list .................................................................................................. 6-2
(2-1)Content of the maintenance mode...................................................................... 6-9
7 Troubleshooting
7-1Image formation problems.................................................................................................... 7-1
(1)Isolate the place of image failure ..................................................................................... 7-1
(2)Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side
through the mechanically reversed DP)7-2
(2-1)Abnormal image.................................................................................................. 7-5
(2-2)Colored background ........................................................................................... 7-6
(2-3)Black or color spots ............................................................................................ 7-8
(2-4)Blurred characters .............................................................................................. 7-9
(2-5)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
(Front side) ............................................................................................................... 7-10
(2-6)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
(Back side) ............................................................................................................... 7-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-7)Horizontal black streaks.................................................................................... 7-11

(2-8)Vertical streaks, band (black or color) .............................................................. 7-12
(2-9)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
(Front side) ............................................................................................................... 7-14
(2-10)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and
copy image (Back side) ............................................................................................ 7-14
(2-11)Vertical streaks, band (white) ......................................................................... 7-15
(2-12)moiré (front side)............................................................................................. 7-16
(2-13)moiré (back side) ............................................................................................ 7-16
(2-14)Missing entire image (White / Black) .............................................................. 7-17
(2-15)Image is dark partly or light............................................................................. 7-18
(2-16)Blurred image ................................................................................................. 7-18
(2-17)Image is missing partly ................................................................................... 7-19
(2-18)Color shift........................................................................................................ 7-20
(2-19)Skewed image ................................................................................................ 7-21
(2-20)Entire image is light ........................................................................................ 7-22
(3)Scanner Factors (Dual scan DP:When scanning the back side through DP) ................ 7-24
(3-1)Abnormal image................................................................................................ 7-27
(3-2)Colored background ......................................................................................... 7-28
(3-3)Black or color spots .......................................................................................... 7-29
(3-4)Mismatch between the center of the original and
the center of the copy image .................................................................................... 7-30
(3-7)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image 7-33
(3-8)Vertical streaks, band (white) ........................................................................... 7-34
(3-9)Moiré................................................................................................................. 7-35
(3-10)Missing entire image (White / Black) .............................................................. 7-35
(3-12)Blurred image ................................................................................................. 7-37
(3-14)Color shift........................................................................................................ 7-39
(3-15)Skewed image ................................................................................................ 7-39
(4)Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass) ................................................ 7-42
(4-1)Abnormal image................................................................................................ 7-44
(4-3)Black or color spots .......................................................................................... 7-47
(4-4)Blurred characters / Color Shift......................................................................... 7-48
(4-8)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image 7-52
(4-9)Vertical streaks, band (white) ........................................................................... 7-53
(4-10)Moiré............................................................................................................... 7-54
(4-11)No image comes out (White or Black) ............................................................ 7-54
(4-13)Blurred image ................................................................................................. 7-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4-15)Skewed image ................................................................................................ 7-61

(5)Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation) .................. 7-64
(5-1)Background appear .......................................................................................... 7-67
(5-2)Black spots (toner smudges) ............................................................................ 7-68
(5-3)Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots) .......................................... 7-69
(5-4)Blank image ...................................................................................................... 7-70
(5-6)Dirty reverse side.............................................................................................. 7-71
(5-7)Entire image is light .......................................................................................... 7-72
(5-8)Horizontal streaks or band (White, black) ......................................................... 7-74
(5-9)Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image
(variation of paper leading edge timing) ................................................................... 7-75
(5-10)Blurred characters .......................................................................................... 7-75
(5-11)Offset .............................................................................................................. 7-76
(5-12)Fusing failure .................................................................................................. 7-78
(5-13)Paper skew at the trailing edge ...................................................................... 7-79
(5-14)Uneven transfer .............................................................................................. 7-80
(5-15)Blurred image ................................................................................................. 7-81
(5-16)The vertical white streaks or bands appear on the image
when scanning the first or second side through DP ................................................. 7-81
(5-17)Vertical streaks, bands .................................................................................. 7-82
(6)Engine Factors (Image forming cause) .......................................................................... 7-84
(6-7)Blank image .................................................................................................... 7-102
(6-8)Toner dirt (Single color) .................................................................................. 7-104
(6-9)Periodic toner dirt (Single color) ..................................................................... 7-105
(6-10)Missing entire image (Solid image by a single color).................................... 7-106
(6-11)Horizontal streaks or band (White or single color) ........................................ 7-108
(6-12)Irregular horizontal white streaks, white spots.............................................. 7-110
(6-13)Horizontal uneven density ............................................................................ 7-111
(6-14)Image is missing partly ................................................................................. 7-112
(6-15)Offset ............................................................................................................ 7-113
(6-16)Gradation reproducibility is low..................................................................... 7-113
(6-17)Blurred image ............................................................................................... 7-114
(6-18)Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper
which is outside of the image area ......................................................................... 7-115
(6-19)Vertical streaks, bands ................................................................................. 7-116
(6-20)Vertical uneven density................................................................................. 7-117
(6-21)Vertical streaks, band (white) ....................................................................... 7-119
(6-22)Uneven halftone image................................................................................. 7-120
7-2Feeding/Conveying Failures............................................................................................. 7-121
(1)Prior standard check items........................................................................................... 7-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection.................................................... 7-122

(1-2)Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper..... 7-122
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases,
fusing failure or the paper curl................................................................................ 7-123
(1-4)Paper jam due to the guide............................................................................. 7-124
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette ...................... 7-124
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper ................................................................ 7-125
(1-7)Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys .......................................... 7-125
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor........................................................................... 7-126
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure .............................................. 7-126
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity ........................................................... 7-127
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment
(Papers inside the cassette are always damp.)...................................................... 7-127
(2)Paper misfeed detection .............................................................................................. 7-128
(2-1)Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................ 7-128
(2-2)Paper misfeed detection condition.................................................................. 7-129
(3)Jam Codes ................................................................................................................... 7-134
(4)Other Feeding/Conveying Failures .............................................................................. 7-289
(4-1)Paper creases (Fuser factor) .......................................................................... 7-290
(4-2)Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor) ............................................. 7-292
(4-3)(When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit
with the punch unit for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of
the paper leading edge being caught by the PH cutter receiving holes ................. 7-293
(4-4)Dog-ear........................................................................................................... 7-294
7-3Service call error/ System error ........................................................................................ 7-295
(1)Service call error/ System error.................................................................................... 7-296
(2)System Error (Fxxxx) ................................................................................................... 7-434
(3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ....................................................................................... 7-442
7-4FAX Related Errors ......................................................................................................... 7-448
(1)FAX Related Errors ..................................................................................................... 7-448
(1-1)The login fails with other than the ID card ...................................................... 7-448
(1-2)C0030: FAX PWB system error ...................................................................... 7-448
(1-3)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error.............................................. 7-449
(1-4)C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error .................................................. 7-449
(1-5)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error .................................. 7-450
(1-6)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error ............................................. 7-450
(1-7)C0920: FAX file system error.......................................................................... 7-451
(1-8)C0950: FAX job stay error .............................................................................. 7-451
(1-9)F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section .................................... 7-451
(1-10)The FAX cannot be sent ............................................................................... 7-452
(1-11)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished ........................... 7-452
(1-12)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted,
all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data ............................................................... 7-452
(2)Communication Errors ................................................................................................. 7-454
7-5Send Related Errors ......................................................................................................... 7-481
(1)Send Related Errors..................................................................................................... 7-481
(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear
even if changing the host name or the security software settings.......................... 7-481
(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear ......................................................... 7-481
(1-3)When scanning the original loaded on the contact glass to send,
the scanned data is automatically sent. ................................................................. 7-481
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2)Sending Errors (Error Codes) ...................................................................................... 7-483

(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes ............................................................................ 7-483
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes ............................................................................... 7-489
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes .............................................................................. 7-495
7-6Print Errors ....................................................................................................................... 7-498
(1)The paper loading message appears........................................................................... 7-499
(2)Orientation is different .................................................................................................. 7-500
(3)Paper is fed from the MP tray ...................................................................................... 7-501
(4)Garbled characters....................................................................................................... 7-501
(5)Paper is not fed from the MP tray ................................................................................ 7-502
(6)The same data is repeatedly printed out...................................................................... 7-502
(7)PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is
indicated on the printer properties ................................................................................... 7-502
(8)Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is indicated 7-503
(9)Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error..................... 7-503
(10)Print stops after printing several pages and locks up................................................. 7-503
(11)Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1) ............................................ 7-504
(18)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1)......................................... 7-508
(25)The printed image is partly missing............................................................................ 7-511
(26)'Paper Mismatch Error' appears ................................................................................. 7-511
7-7Error Messages ................................................................................................................ 7-512
(1)"Check the document processor" appears ................................................................... 7-512
(2)[The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2)
even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining
in the main unit ................................................................................................................ 7-513
(3)[The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4)
even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining
in the main unit ................................................................................................................ 7-514
(4)The cover open message appears after closing the front cover .................................. 7-515
(5)The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or
the maintenance front cover ............................................................................................ 7-515
(6)The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray ............... 7-516
(7)The message [Waste toner box is full] is wrongly displayed........................................ 7-516
(8)When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is
wrongly displayed ............................................................................................................ 7-517
(9)When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed 7-518
(10)The operation panel remains displaying 'Network device is starting'. ........................ 7-518
(11)The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed. ......... 7-519
(12)The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'............... 7-520
(13)Memory is full' is displayed at Scan to SMB............................................................... 7-521
(14)Check the toner container' is displayed while toner is available. ............................... 7-522
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7-8Abnormal Noise ................................................................................................................ 7-523

(1)Abnormal noise (Basic support) ................................................................................... 7-525
(2)Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section ................................................... 7-525
(3)Abnormal sound from the developer section................................................................ 7-526
(4)Abnormal sound from the document processor ........................................................... 7-526
(5)Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (squeal sounds) ................................................... 7-526
(6)Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit and exit unit (fluttering sounds) ......................... 7-527
(7)Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (cracking sounds) ................................................ 7-527
(8)Abnormal sound from the exit section.......................................................................... 7-527
(9)Fan rotating sounds are noisy...................................................................................... 7-528
(10)Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section ............................................... 7-528
(11)Abnormal sound from the machine front side ............................................................ 7-529
(12)Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section................................ 7-529
(13)Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section ................................... 7-530
(14)Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (fluttering sounds) ........................................... 7-530
(15)Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (cracking sounds)............................................ 7-530
(16)Abnormal sound from the fuser section ..................................................................... 7-530
(17)Abnormal sounds from the IH unit (buzzing sounds) ................................................. 7-531
(18)Abnormal sound from inside the machine.................................................................. 7-532
(19)The tooth skipping sound from the toner container drive section............................... 7-532
(22)Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds) ..................................... 7-533
(23)The drive sounds are noisy during printing ................................................................ 7-534
(24)The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound)......... 7-534
(25)Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds) ................... 7-534
(26)Abnormal sound from the waste toner forwarding unit............................................... 7-535
(27)Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (1) ........................................................... 7-535
(30)Abnormal sounds from the image scanning section .................................................. 7-536
(31)Abnormal sounds from the bridge unit (cracking sounds
when conveying the paper) ............................................................................................. 7-536
(32)The high frequency sounds are generated from the low voltage PWB
when entering into the sleep mode in the main unit with the optional NIC. ..................... 7-537
7-9Malfunction ....................................................................................................................... 7-538
(1)The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed ......................... 7-539
(2)The MP tray paper size is misdetected ........................................................................ 7-540
(3)The controller fan motor does not rotate ...................................................................... 7-541
(4)The developer fan motor does not rotate ..................................................................... 7-541
(5)The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch.................................. 7-542
(6)Toner falls over the paper conveying section............................................................... 7-543
(7)No display in the operation panel................................................................................. 7-544
(8)The operation panel remains displaying 'WELCOME' and does not change ............... 7-545
(9)No action by pressing the operation panel................................................................... 7-546
(10)The login fails with other than the ID card.................................................................. 7-546
(11)The original size on the original glass is misdetected. ............................................... 7-546
(12)The container cover is not opened although the toner container is not installed. ...... 7-547
(13)The FAX icon is not displayed on the operation panel
even if installing the FAX PWB........................................................................................ 7-547
(14)The operation panel does not display the finisher even if installing the finisher ........ 7-548
(15)The Job separator LED continuously turns on even if removing the paper
from the JS tray ............................................................................................................... 7-549
(16)Even if the paper feeder is installed, it is not displayed on the operation panel......... 7-550
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7-10Connector troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 7-551

7-11Others............................................................................................................................. 7-557
(1) ............... Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides7-557
(1-1)Adjusting the center position for the punch unit.............................................. 7-557
(1-2)Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray) ..... 7-558
(1-3)Adjusting the center line at U034.................................................................... 7-559
(2)Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110)....................... 7-560
8 PWBs
8-1PWB description ................................................................................................................... 8-1
(1)Main PWB ........................................................................................................................ 8-1
(1-1)Connector position.............................................................................................. 8-1
(1-2)PWB photograph ................................................................................................ 8-2
(1-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................... 8-2
(2)Engine PWB................................................................................................................... 8-10
(2-1)Connector position............................................................................................ 8-10
(2-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-10
(2-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-11
(3)Feed image PWB ........................................................................................................... 8-25
(3-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-25
(3-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-26
(4)Feed drive PWB ............................................................................................................. 8-37
(4-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-37
(4-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-38
(5)Drum/Developer relay PWB ........................................................................................... 8-44
(5-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-44
(5-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-45
(6)Main high-voltage PWB.................................................................................................. 8-47
(6-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-48
(6-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-49
(7)Transfer high-voltage PWB ............................................................................................ 8-50
(7-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-50
(7-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-51
(8)Low power voltage PEB ................................................................................................. 8-52
(8-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-53
(8-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-54
(9)Operation panel main PWB............................................................................................ 8-57
(9-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-57
(9-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-58
(10)IH PWB ........................................................................................................................ 8-63
(10-1)Connector position.......................................................................................... 8-63
(10-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................ 8-63
(10-3)Connector lists ................................................................................................ 8-64
(11)Fuser high voltage PWB .............................................................................................. 8-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

(11-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................ 8-65
(11-3)Connector lists ................................................................................................ 8-65
8-2PWB description (Option) ................................................................................................... 8-66
(1)PF PWB (PF-7100) ........................................................................................................ 8-66
(1-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-67
(1-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-68
(2)PF PWB (PF-7110) ........................................................................................................ 8-72
(2-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-72
(2-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-73
(3)PF PWB (PF-7120) ........................................................................................................ 8-77
(3-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-77
(3-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-78
(4)DP PWB (DP-7100) ....................................................................................................... 8-81
(4-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-81
(4-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-82
(5)DP PWB (DP-7110) ....................................................................................................... 8-86
(5-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-86
(5-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-87
(6)DP Interface PWB (for DP-7110) ................................................................................... 8-91
(6-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-91
(6-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-92
(7)DF PWB (DF-7100)........................................................................................................ 8-94
(7-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................. 8-94
(7-3)Connector lists .................................................................................................. 8-95
(8)PH PWB (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) .......................................................................... 8-101
(8-2)Connector lists ................................................................................................ 8-101
(9)DF PWB (DF-7110)...................................................................................................... 8-103
(9-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................ 8-103
(9-3)Connector lists ................................................................................................ 8-104
(10)MT PWB..................................................................................................................... 8-113
(10-1)Connector position........................................................................................ 8-113
(10-2)Connector lists .............................................................................................. 8-114
(11)BF PWB ..................................................................................................................... 8-116
(11-2)Connector lists .............................................................................................. 8-117
(12)PH PWB (PH-7) ......................................................................................................... 8-121
(12-2)Connector lists .............................................................................................. 8-122
(13)DF PWB (DF-7120).................................................................................................... 8-124
(13-2)PWB photograph .......................................................................................... 8-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(13-3)Connector lists .............................................................................................. 8-125
9 Appendixes
9-1Repetitive defects gauge ...................................................................................................... 9-1
9-2Environmental command...................................................................................................... 9-2
9-3Image adjustment procedure chart..................................................................................... 9-10
9-4Wiring diagram ................................................................................................................... 9-14
(1)Engine PWB / Drive PWB .............................................................................................. 9-14
(2)Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection......................... 9-15
(3)Feed image PWB (Front side)........................................................................................ 9-16
(4)Feed image PWB (Rear side) ........................................................................................ 9-17
(5)Feed drive PWB ............................................................................................................. 9-18
(6)Drum/Developer relay PWB ........................................................................................... 9-19
(7)LVU PWB / High voltage PWB....................................................................................... 9-20
(8)Fuser PWB..................................................................................................................... 9-21
(9)Operation panel PWB / Main PWB ................................................................................ 9-22
9-5Wiring diagram (Options connection) ................................................................................. 9-23
(1)Paper feeder connection ................................................................................................ 9-23
(2)Conveying unit / Document finisher connection ............................................................. 9-24
(3)Other Options connection .............................................................................................. 9-25
9-6Wiring diagram (Options).................................................................................................... 9-26
(1)Document processor (DP-7100) wiring diagram ............................................................ 9-26
(2)Document processor (DP-7110) wiring diagram ............................................................ 9-27
(3)Paper feeder (PF-7100) wiring diagram......................................................................... 9-28
(4)Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) wiring diagram ........................................................... 9-29
(5)Side feeder (PF-7120) wiring diagram ........................................................................... 9-30
(6)Finisher (DF-7100) wiring diagram................................................................................. 9-31
(7)Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) wiring diagram: DF-7100 only.......................... 9-32
(8)Finisher (DF-7110) wiring diagram................................................................................. 9-33
(9)Mailbox (MT-730(B)) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only ...................................................... 9-34
(10)Folder unit(BF-730) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only ...................................................... 9-35
(11)Punch unit (PH-7) wiring diagram: DF-7110/7120 only................................................ 9-36
(12)Finisher (DF-7120) wiring diagram............................................................................... 9-37
9-7Installation Guide................................................................................................................ 9-38
(1)PF-7100 ......................................................................................................................... 9-38
(2)PF-7110 ......................................................................................................................... 9-51
(3)PF-7120 ......................................................................................................................... 9-72
(4)DP-7100 ......................................................................................................................... 9-99
(5)DP-7110 ....................................................................................................................... 9-130
(6)DP-7120 ....................................................................................................................... 9-165
(7)DF-7100 ....................................................................................................................... 9-196
(8)DF-7110 ....................................................................................................................... 9-205
(9)DF-7120 ....................................................................................................................... 9-225
(10)AK-7100 ..................................................................................................................... 9-243
(11)MT-730(B) .................................................................................................................. 9-250
(12)BF-730 ....................................................................................................................... 9-265
(13)PH-7 A/B/C/D ............................................................................................................. 9-283
(14)PH-7100/7110/7120/7130 .......................................................................................... 9-305
(15)JS-7100...................................................................................................................... 9-322
(16)FAX System 12 .......................................................................................................... 9-326
(17)Printing-System 15..................................................................................................... 9-341
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1 Specifications
1-1 Detail Specifications
(1) Common function
Items Specifications
Product name 40 ppm model / 50 ppm model / 60 ppm model
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Multi Pur- Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
pose Tray
Media type Cassette Plain, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letter-
head, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Pur- Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,
pose Tray Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Coated,
Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Multi Pur- A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
pose Tray ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
lope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm), 1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 ×
470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" × 48")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm
Warm-up Time Power on 17 seconds or less
(23°C/73.4°F,
Low Power 15 seconds or less
60%)
Sleep 17 seconds or less
Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64g/m2) *1
500 sheets (80 g/m2) *1
Multi Pur- 165 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(64 g/m2)
pose Tray 150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(80 g/m2)
55 sheets (Larger size than A4/Letter, 64 g/m2)
50 sheets (Larger size than A4/Letter, 80 g/m2)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" ×
48"))(136 to 163 g/m2)
1-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
Output Tray Inner Tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Capacity
Job Separa- 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
tor
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Light source LED array
Scanning method Flat surface scanning by the CCD image sensor
Photoconductor a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Charging system Contact positive charge roller (MC) method
Developer system Touch down developing system
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container
Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method
Secondary: Transfer roller method
Separation system Small diameter curvature separation and discharge needle (Impressing DC volt-
age)
Cleaning system Drum Counter blade + friction roller cleaning system
Primary Fur brush cleaning + Pre-brush system
transfer
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Fusing system Sliding IH fuser system
Heat source: IH
Temperature excess increase protection devices: thermostat
Memory 4.0 GB
Large capacity storage SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az supported)
Hi-Speed USB: 4 (USB Flash memory slot)
Option eKUIO: 2*2
Fax: 2*3
Wireless LAN: 1*4
Operating Envi- Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
ronment
Humidity 10 to 80 %
Elevation 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H) 23.71" × 26.19" × 31.11"/ 602 × 665 × 790 mm
Weight Approx. 183 lbs./ Approx. 83 kg (without toner container)
Space Required (W × D) 36.23" × 26.19"/ 920 × 665 mm (Using multi purpose tray)
Power source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V AC 60 Hz 12 A
230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz 7.2 A
*1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
*2: When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
*3: When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
*4: Standard for North America territory
(2) Copy Functions

Copy Speed 40 ppm A4/Letter 40 sheets/min
model A4-R/Letter-R 28 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 20 sheets/min
B4 24 sheets/min
Legal 24 sheets/min
B5 40 sheets/min
B5-R 28 sheets/min
A5-R 20 sheets/min
A6-R 20 sheets/min
50 ppm A4/Letter 50 sheets/min
B4 30 sheets/min
Legal 30 sheets/min
B5 50 sheets/min
B5-R 35 sheets/min
A5-R 25 sheets/min
A6-R 25 sheets/min
60 ppm A4/Letter 60 sheets/min
B4 36 sheets/min
Legal 36 sheets/min
B5 60 sheets/min
B5-R 42 sheets/min
A5-R 30 sheets/min
A6-R 30 sheets/min
First Copy Black and 40 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
Time White 50 ppm model: 3.7 seconds or less
(A4, place on the 60 ppm model: 3.4 seconds or less
platen, feed from
Cassette)
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Fixed zoom rate: 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50%,
25%
Continuous Copy 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original Feed System Fixed
1-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3) Printer Functions

Printing Speed
40 ppm 12×18"/SRA3 20 sheets/min
model 12×18"/SRA3 25 sheets/min
50 ppm 12×18"/SRA3 30 sheets/min
model
Other than the above size, specifications are the same as those of Copy Speed.
60 ppm
model
First Print Time Black and 40 ppm model: 5.1 seconds or less
(A4) White 50 ppm model: 4.3 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 3.8 seconds or less
Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Operating System Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Win-
dows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS X v10.5 or
later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az supported)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-35 mounting)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL/PCL5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, Open XPS
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4) Scanner Functions

Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi, 400 dpi × 400 dpi, 200 dpi × 400 dpi, 300 dpi × 300 dpi, 200 dpi
× 200 dpi, 200 dpi × 100 dpi
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression/High compressive
PDF/OCR Text Recognition PDF(Option))
Scanning Speed*1 40 ppm 1-sided: B/W 100 images/min, Color 100 Images/min
(A4, 300 dpi, Image model 2-sided: B/W 180 Images/min, Color 180 Images/min
quality: Text/Photo 50 ppm
original)
model
60 ppm
model
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/ Windows Server 2003/ Windows Server 2008/ Windows Server 2008
R2/ Windows 7/ Windows 8/ Windows 8.1/ Windows 10/ Windows Server 2012/ Windows Server 2012 R2
*3 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/ Windows Server 2008/ Windows Server 2008 R2/ Windows 7/ Win-
dows 8/ Windows 8.1/ Windows 10/ Windows Server 2012/ Windows Server 2012 R2
1-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(5) Option
(5-1) Document Processor
Dual Reverse Scan Dual Scan
Type DP-7100 DP-7110
Document feed method Automatic feed
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Original size Maximum: A3/Ledger (297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized: 297 × 1,900 mm)
Minimum: A6-R/Statement-R (105 × 148 mm)
Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m2 1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2 2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2
Loading Capacity 140 sheets maximum 270 sheets maximum
(50 to 80 g/m2) *1 (50 to 80 g/m2) *1
Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46"/ 23.63" × 20.20" × 6.70"/
593 × 531 × 138.5 mm 600 × 513 × 170 mm
Weight Approx. 19.9 lbs./ Approx. 9 kg Approx. 32.0 lbs./ Approx. 14.5 kg
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.
(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2)

Paper Supply Method 1. Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 550(64 g/m2)×2 cassettes / 500(80g/m2)× 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
lope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
Dimension (W × D × H) 23.62" × 26.18" × 12.72" / 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm

Weight Approx. 50.8 lbs./ Approx. 23 kg
1-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet × 2)

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 1,650(64 g/m2)×2 cassettes / 1,500(80g/m2)× 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter

Dimension (W × D × H) 23.62" × 26.18" × 12.72" / 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm
(5-4) Side Feeder (3000-sheet)

Paper Supply Method Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3,500(64 g/m2)×1 cassettes / 3,000(80g/m2)× 1 cassettes)
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Dimension (W × D × H) 13.82" × 23.03" × 18.46" / 351 × 585 × 469 mm
Weight Approx. 58.5 lbs./ Approx. 26.5 kg
(5-5) Inner Finisher

Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size(80 g/m2) A3, B4, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
Finisher tray Envelope C4: 250 sheets
(Non-Stapling) A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive, 16K-R,
16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 500 sheets
Stapling Number of A3, B4, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
sheets to 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
limit
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom
Dimension (W × D × H) 27.36" × 20.99" × 8.69"/ 694.8 × 533.1 × 220.5 mm (When pulling the tray)
Weight 25.4 lbs. or less/ 11.5 kg or less
1-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher)

Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Paper Weight 52 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High Quality,
Custom
(5-7) 1000-sheet Finisher

Paper Tray A A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,
Size(80 g/m2) (When non- Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
Stapling) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
sheets to 12×18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
limit
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,
Dimension (W × D × H) 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"/ 548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm
Space Required (W × D) 26.23" × 24.36"/ 666 × 618.5 mm (with the tray pulled out)
1-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(5-8) 4000-sheet Finisher

Paper Size Tray A A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,
(80 g/m2) (When non- 8K, 16K-R: 1,500 sheets
Stapling) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 4,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter-
R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K,
ISO B5, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,Youkei 2: 200 sheets
Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)
sheets to 12×18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)
limit
65 sheets (75 to 90 g/m2)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick, Coated,
Custom
Dimension (W × D × H) 23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"/ 607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm

Weight Approx. 88.2 lbs./ Approx. 40 kg /
Space Required (W × D) 28.55" × 26.32"/ 725 × 668.5 mm (with the tray pulled out)
(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Paper Weight Paper weight: 45 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High Quality,
Custom
(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Paper Size(80 g/m2) A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets
A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R, Executive,
Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets
Dimension (W × D × H) 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"/ 510 × 400 × 470 mm /
1-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Folding pos- Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
sible size
Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Tri-folding A4-R, Letter-R
The number Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
of fold possi- 3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
bility 1 sheets (121 to 256 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch 16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)
Tri-folding 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)
Maximum Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more

Number for 6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
Storage 11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more
(80 g/m2)
Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
Tri-folding 1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more

Media type Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Tri-folding Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated,

(5-12) Job Separator (JS) Tray

Maximum Number for Storage 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-
R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm)
Dimension (W × D × H) 18.90" x 16.93" x 3.94"/ 480 x 430 x 100mm
1-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-13) Banner Tray

Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multi Purpose tray)
Paper width 210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper length Max. 1220.0 mm (48")
Media types: Heavy 2
Dimension (W × D × H) 15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"/ 400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm
(5-14) FAX System

FAX function
Intercommunication G3
Applicable line Subscriber telephone line
Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)
Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/
9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Error Correction ECM
Original size Max. width: Max. width: 297 mm/11", Max. length: 1,600 mm/63"
Number of originals to auto Max. 270 sheets (with optional document processor)
feed
Resolution Scan:
200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm)
200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
600 × 600 dpi
Print: 1200 × 1200 dpi
Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)
One Touch Key 1000 keys
Broadcast TX Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100 sta-
tions for i-Fax)
Substitute Memory Reception 7000 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Memory capacity for the image Standard memory (170MB) (for FAX transmission/reception)
accumulation
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Option Hand set, Multi port, internet FAX kit
1-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Network FAX functions

Hardware IBM PC-AT compatible computer
Interface 10 BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX, 1000 BASE-T
Operating system Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server
2012/R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10
Windows Server 2012
TX resolution Ultra fine (400 × 400dpi), Fine (200 × 200dpi), Normal (100 × 200dpi), 600 ×
600dpi
Original size Letter, Legal, Ledger (11 x 17), Statement, A3, A4,A5, Folio, B4, B5(JIS)
Time specified TX Time setting by Network FAX driver (within 24 hours, 1 minute increments)
Simultaneous output Possible output on the main unit at the same time as FAX TX
Sequential broadcast TX Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100 sta-
tions for i-Fax)
Job Accounting Register the login user name and password in the Network FAX driver setting
when [User] is set on the main unit.
Register the account ID in the Network FAX driver setting when [Job accounting] is
set on the main unit.
Cover Page It is possible to select format and create template in the Network FAX driver.
1-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1-2 Part Names

(1) Machine
(1-1) Exterior

Figure 1-1
1. Document Processor 13. Original Width Guides

2. Operation Panel 14. Slit glass
3. Power Switch 15. Job Separator Tray
4. Waste Toner Box Cover 16. Paper Stopper
5. Cassette 1 17. Inner Tray
6. Cassette 2 18. Handles
7. Main Power Switch 19. Front Cover
8. Multi Purpose Tray 20. Platen
9. USB Memory Slot 21. Original Size Indicator Plates
10. Original exit table
11. Original Stopper
12. Original Table
1-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Figure 1-2
22. Paper Length Guide 26. Multi Purpose Tray

23. Paper width guides 27. Paper Width Guides
24. Paper Width Adjusting Tab 28. Right Cover 1 Lever
25. Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose 29. Right Cover 1
Tray
1-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) Connectors/Interior

Figure 1-3
1. Option Interface Slot 5. Toner Container (Black)

2. Network Interface Connector 6. Toner Container Cover
3. USB port 7. Waste Toner Box
4. USB Interface Connector 8. Waste Toner Box Cover
1-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-3) With Optional Equipment Attached

Figure 1-4
1. Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray) 7. Cassette 4

2. Tray A 8. Cassette 5
3. Tray B 9. Finisher tray
4. Job Separator Tray 10. Platen cover
5. Folding unit 11. Control Section of the Finisher
6. Cassette 3
1-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-4) FAX System
Figure 1-5
1. LINE Connector (L2)

Once 2 FAX its are installed, the port 2 can be used.
Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
2. LINE Connector (L1)

Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
This connector is port 1.
3. TEL Connector (T1)

When using an optional handset or available telephone, connect it here.
1-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-5) Operation Panel Keys

Figure 1-6
1. [Home] key: Displays the Home screen.

2. [Numeric Keypad] key: Displays numeric keys on the touch panel.
3. Function Key: Various functions like Copy, Scan/application can be registered
4. [Job Separator] indicator: Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray.
5. [Accessibility Display] key: Display on the touch panel can be switched to the enlarged view in the [Copy]
screen or the [Send] screen.
6. [Status/Job Cancel] key: Display the Status/Job Cancel screen.
7. [System Menu/Counter] key: Display the System Menu screen.
8. [Reset] key: Return the settings to the default condition.
9. [Stop] key: Cancel or pause the job which is in progress.
10. [Start] key: Start copying, scanning operations or processing settings.
11. [Interrupt] key: Display the Interrupt Copy screen.
12. [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticate key users, or exit each user operation (Log out).
13. [Energy Saver] key: Make the main unit in Sleep Mode. Return from sleep mode if the main unit in sleep
mode.
14. [Attention] indicator: Light or blink when an error occurs and a job stops.
15. [Memory] indicator: Blink while the main unit access to the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory.
16. [Processing] indicator: Blink while printing or sending/receiving the data.
17. Touch Panel: Touch icons on this panel to configure each setting.
1-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1-3 Option configuration

The following options are available for this machine.
3/$7(1&29(5
'3 '3 7<3((
07%
3+$3+& 3+3+
3+' 3+
')
') %DQQHU*XLGH
3)
')
%) 3) 3)
Figure 1-7
*: *: If the following option is installed, fall prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120
1-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1) Option
.H\ERDUG+ROGHU
1.1. '7% )$;6\VWHP &DUG

$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ.LW%
,%
,%
6RIWZDUHRSWLRQ
,QWHUQHW)$;.LW$
'DWD6HFXULW\.LW(
8* ,%
8*
6FDQ([WHQVLRQ.LW$
86%.H\ERDUG
1-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"

DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reverse Scan)"
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"
Device that scan the originals automatically. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
When the document processor is not installed, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
(1-2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox"

This equipment separates the paper output tray destination to easily sort documents. Installing this option to add 7
output trays. When multiple computer users share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the
4000-Sheet Finisher.
(1-3) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher"

This equipment can stack high capacity paper and can offset each copy to sort. Sorted output documents can be stapled
or hole punched (optional).
(1-4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher"

(1-5) BF-730 "Folding Unit "

Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4000-Sheet
Finisher.
(1-6) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)"

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes.
(1-7) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet×2)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1500-sheet×2) capable of
holding up to 3000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
(1-8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3000-sheet) capable of holding up to
3000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
(1-9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"

This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded.
(1-10) DF-7100 "Inner Finisher"

1-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-11) PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Inner Finisher and possible to open the punch hole.
(1-12) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Document Finisher and is used to punch holes.
(1-13) JS-7100 "Job Separator"

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
(1-14) NK-7100, NK-7110 "Optional Numeric Keypad"

The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the optional numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not
appear on the touch panel.
(1-15) DT-730 (B) "Document Table"

Place original or other documents when using the machine.
(1-16) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder"

A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.
(1-17) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a
computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable
quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time
can be reduced.
(1-18) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. IB-50 supports
traditional protocols such as AppleTalk and Netware.
Only minimum functions of standard utility are supported.
(1-19) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and
11 g/b. IB-51 supports traditional protocols such as Apple Talk and Netware.
Only minimum functions of standard utility are supported.
IB-51 setup utility supports for Windows OS and Mac OS X.
(1-20) IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 65 Mbps) and
11 g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is supported.
1-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-21) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list.
(1-22) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"

Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be
added when the FAX Kit is installed.
(1-23) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved.
The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data can-
not be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
(1-24) UG-33 "Thin Print Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(1-25) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"

Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM
Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
(1-26) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"

This option enables the use of the OCR Text Recognition function in the applications of the machine.
1-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
1-4 Module map
Unit configuration of each model is as follows.
Module Specifications
40 ppm model 50 ppm model 60 ppm model
Cassette 1 CT-8550 (302ND9301_)
Legal paper supportive cassette as maximum size (common)
Cassette 2 CT-8560 (302ND9302_)
SRA3 paper supportive cassette as maximum size (common)
Primary feed PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP (302ND9421_)
Pickup/feed roller + retard roller system (common)
Conveying, PARTS RIGHT COVER ASSY SP (302ND94740_)
Duplex
Non-stack paper conveying path (common)
Primary transfer TR-6500 (302NK9303_)
Transfer belt + fur brush cleaning system (common)
Secondary PARTS ROLLER SECONDRY TRANSFER ASSY SP (302ND9418_)
transfer
Transfer roller method (common)
Drum DK-8550 (302ND9307_)
a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Developing 100V: DV-8550K(J)(302ND9J03_)
120V/220-240V: DV-8550K(302ND9303_)
Touch down developing
LSU LK-6500 (302NK9301_)
One polygon motor + +4 beam
Fuser FK-8550 (302ND9308_)
FK-8595IH (302ND9309_):220-230V
FK-8590IH (302ND9310_):100/120V
Sliding IH fuser pressures system (diameter 35 mm)
Exit PARTS EXIT UNIT SP (302ND9408_)
Feed-shift and exit conveying path (common)
1-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2 Installation
2-1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or less when the temperature is 90.5°F
(32.5°C).)
2. Humidity: 10 to 80%(But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
3. Power Source: 100V AC50/60Hz15A or more
AC110V60Hz15A or more
AC120V60Hz12A or more
AC220 to 240V50Hz7.2A or more
Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2%
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
It might be difficult to maintain the image quality depending on surrounding environmental conditions such as outside air.
Therefore, the following conditions are recommended to operate the machines as follows: Humidity: 36 to 65% Tem-
perature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight
Avoid locations with vibrations
Avoid locations with rapid temperature/humidity fluctuations
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
In the case of flooring materials where the installation site is susceptible to damage, there might be the possibility to
damage the flooring materials when installing / moving this product.
While this product is in use, there are some ozone generation and chemical substance emission, however, the amount is
a level that does not affect the human body.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Installation space
400 mm
(15-3/4")
300 mm 450 mm 1000 mm 100 mm

(11-13/16") (17-11/16") (39-3/8") (3-15/16")
Figure 2-1
2-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
2-2 Installing the main unit

Installation procedures
START
Unpacking and checking bundled items

Image adjustment
Maintenance mode workflow
Attaching the sub tray (Maintenance mode U952 )
Optional unit installation Setting the ID correction operation

(Maintenance mode U464)
Connecting the Interface Cable

Adjusting the halftone automatically
Connecting the FAX cable
(FAX installation only)
Output a Maintenance report
Loading Paper
Clearing the counts
Connecting the Power Cord (maintenance mode U927)
Setting the delivery date

Turn the power on (Maintenance mode U278)
Setting up the Toner Container Exiting from the maintenance mode
Default Setting Completion of installing the main unit
Installing Software
*: When setting up at high altitude

㸦Maintenance mode U952:
Execute/ HIGH ALTITUDE㸧
Developer bias adjustment

Primary transfer voltage adjustment

Setting the ID correction operation

*: *Initial setting time: approx. 2 minutes

Also, do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting.
2-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items

Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove the tapes and cushioning materials for packing from the main unit.
(1-1) Main unit
1
10
8
12
5 7
2 3
6
11
13
4 4
4
14 15
4 17 15 17
16
17 17
Figure 2-2
1. Outer case 7. Power cord 13. Bottom case

2. Front upper pad 8. Exit spacer 14. Left bottom pad
3. Rear upper pad 9. Right lower cover 15. Right bottom pad
4. Side stay 10. Inner Tray 16. Skid
5. Accessories box 11. Operation cover 17. Hinge
6. Size label 12. Main unit
Note: Make sure to install the main unit on a level surface.
2-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Unpacking and checking bundled items(Enhancement devices)

(2-1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
12
9 10
14
11
8
15
13
15
15
1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-3
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad
2-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)
12
9 10
14
11
8
15 13
15
15 1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-4
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad
2-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)
16
17
18
13
11
19
10
20
9 21
22
8 15 23
14 24 6
5
9
4
3 12
Figure 2-5
1. Outer case 10. Upper sheet 19. Screws (M4x8 P-tite)

2. Inner frame 11. Upper pad 20. Screws (M4x8 S-tite)
3. Bottom pad 12. Size label 21. Cover plate
4. Bottom cushioning material 13. Attachment A 22. Attachment B
5. Main unit 14. Guide film A 23. Spanner
6. Main unit cover 15. Guide film B* 24. Installation guide
7. Front right stay 16. Lock support plate A
8. Front left stay 17. Switch lever
9. Rear stay 18. Lock support plate B*
*: Not used in this model.
2-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-4) Document Processor (DP-7100)
16
17
18
7
12 13 14 15 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
Figure 2-6
1. Outer case 8. Rear left upper pad 15. Hinge cover right
2. Rear bottom pad 9. Rear right upper pad 16. Label
3. Front bottom pad 10. Front left upper pad 17. Screw
4. Document Processor 11. Front right upper pad 18. Screw
5. Vinyl sheet 12. DP cable cover front
6. Original mat holder 13. DP cable cover rear
7. Original mat 14. Hinge cover left
2-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9
10 10
16
10 10 17
11
18
12
19 20 21 15 13
14
8 4 3
7
Figure 2-7
1. Outer case 8. Original mat 15. Cleaning tool

2. Inner frame 9. DP relay PWB 16. Rear left upper pad
3. Rear bottom pad 10. Screw 17. Rear right upper pad
4. Front bottom pad 11. DP cable cover front 18. Front upper pad
5. Document Processor 12. DP cable cover rear 19. Angle control fitting
6. Vinyl sheet 13. Hinge cover left 20. Right fixing fitting
7. Original mat holder 14. Hinge cover right 21. Left fixing fitting
2-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)
11
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 2-8
1. Outer case 5. Bottom spacer 9. Tray

2. Front bottom pad 6. Inner Finisher 10. Cartridge
3. Rear bottom pad 7. Main unit cover 11. Screw
4. Right bottom pad 8. Top spacer
2-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-7) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120)

10
4
6 18
19
16 17 15
14
5
20 11
20 20 13
1 12
3
20
20 2 20
Figure 2-9
1. Skid 8. Outer case 15. Cartridge

2. Front bottom pad 9. Front upper pad 16. Screw (M4x8)
3. Rear bottom pad 10. Rear upper pad 17. Screw (M4x20*)
4. 1000-sheet Finisher 11. Right spacer 18. Connecting plate*
5. Left spacer 12. Main tray 19. Installation guide
6. Protection sheet 13. Inner pad 20. Hinge
7. Main unit cover 14. Connector cover*
2-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-8) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)

8
4
20 21
14
16 17 18 19
12
15
13
22 9
22 22
11
10
1 3
22
22 2 22
Figure 2-10
1. Skid 9. Right spacer 17. Screw (M4x20)

2. Front bottom pad 10. Main tray 18. Connector cover*
3. Rear bottom pad 11. Inner pad 19. Tray label*
4. 4,000-sheet Finisher 12. Ground plate* 20. Connecting plate
5. Main unit cover 13. Wire guide* 21. Installation guide
6. Outer case 14. Cartridge 22. Hinge
7. Front upper pad 15. Exit guide*
8. Rear upper pad 16. Screw (M4x8)
*: *: Not used in this model.
2-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-9) Mailbox (MT-730(B))

16
17
11
13 14 15
10
12
8
9
7
4 5
5 4
Figure 2-11
1. Mailbox 7. Center bottom pad 13. Upper front Cover

2. Outer case 8. Side spacer 14. Upper rear cover
3. Inner frame 9. Accessory case 15. Screw (M4x12)
4. Bottom pad A 10. Tray 16. Tray name label
5. Bottom pad B 11. Poly bag 17. Installation guide
6. Poly sheet 12. Poly bag
2-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-10) Folding unit (BF-730)

12
29
23 24 25 26 27 28
11
20
10
21
9 16
22 8 15
19 18 7
6
5
14
17 13
Figure 2-12
1. Outer case 11. Spacer E 21. Front side cover

2. Bottom spacer 12. Center-folding exit tray 22. Rear side cover
3. Spacer A 13. Spacer F 23. Pins
4. Spacer B 14. Front rail 24. Screw (M4x8)
5. Folding unit 15. Rear rail 25. Screw (M4x10)
6. Poly sheet 16. Guide 26. Screw (M3x12)
7. Top spacer 17. Spacer G 27. Lock plate
8. Spacer C 18. Output stock tray 28. Binding band
9. Center-folding bridge Unit 19. Spacer H 29. Installation guide
10. Spacer D 20. Paper Stopper
2-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-11) Punch unit (PH-7A / PH-7C / PH-7D)
6 7
8
Figure 2-13
1. Outer case 4. Upper pad 7. Drive unit Assy

2. Bottom pad 5. Punch PWB 8. Waste punch box
3. Punch unit 6. Waste punch box guide
2-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-12) Punch Unit (PH-7100 / PH-7120 / PH-7130)

11
10
5 4
3 1
Figure 2-14
1. Outer case 5. Front bottom pad 9. Waste punch box

2. Right bottom pad 6. Punch unit 10. Screw
3. Left bottom pad 7. Rear upper pad 11. Front right cover
4. Bottom pad 8. Upper pad
2-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Notes on main unit transportation

*: When transporting the main unit, lift the left and right handle of the lower part of the main unit (as marked by red cir-
cles) with four people as shown in the figure.
Do not hold the operation unit as it might be damaged.
Figure 2-15
*: When carrying the paper feeder (PF-7100/7110), please hold the specified position with two persons.
Figure 2-16
2-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame

1. Raise the triangle mark side of the optical lock cover (b) with a flat-blade screwdriver (a) and slide it in the direction
of the arrow to remove it.
2. Place it reversely and put the optical lock cover (b) into the aperture of the hook (c) to fit in the direction of the
arrow.
*: Service Call C3100 might occur if you forget to release.
1 a
2 b c
Figure 2-17
2-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Release of lift plate stopper
1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location.
*: When moving the machine, attach the lift plate stopper in original position.
Cassette 1
Figure 2-18
Cassette 2
Figure 2-19
2-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Attaching the sub tray

Attach the bundled sub tray to the inner tray.
*: The Sub Tray is not necessary when installing the DF-7100 (Inner Finisher).
*: The Sub Tray is not necessary when installing the AK-7100 (Attachment kit) for DF-7110 (4,000-sheets Finisher) or
DF-7120 (1,000-sheets Finisher).
Procedures
1. Slide the sub tray (a) and insert two protrusions (b) into two apertures (c) on the inner tray.
2. Insert the rib (d) into the aperture (e) of the inner tray and push it in until it locks.
*: Lift up the sub tray (a) to check it does not come off.
b c
a
d e
Figure 2-20
(7) Affixing the operation panel sheet (220-240V models only)

Affix the operation panel sheet (a) in the applicable language by aligning it to the positioning boss (c) on the operation
panel (b).
Figure 2-21
2-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Optional unit installation

Install necessary optional units in the main unit by referring to the installation procedures.
Product name Object Referring Instal-

lation guide
PF-7100(Paper Feeder) PF-7100
○
PF PF-7110(Large Capacity Feeder) PF-7110
PF-7120 (Side Feeder) ○ PF-7120
DP-7100 (Document Processor (Dual Reverse DP-7100
DP Scan)) ○
DP-7110 (Document Processor (Dual Scan)) DP-7110
DF-7100 (Inner Finisher) DF-7100
PH-7110 (Punch unit for DF-7100) PH-7100/7110/
7120/7130
AK-7100 (Conveying Unit) AK-7100
DF-7110 (4000-sheet Finisher) DF-7110
DF
MT-730(B) (Mailbox) MT-730(B)
○
BF-730 (Folding Unit) BF-730
PH-7 (Punch unit for DF-7110/7120) PH-7 A/B/C/D
DF-7120 (1,000-sheet Finisher) DF-7120
PH-7 (Punch unit for DF-7110/7120) PH-7 A/B/C/D
JOB JS-7100 (Job Separator Tray) JS-7100
SEPA
FAX FAX System 12 ○ FAX System 12
*:120V /220-240V specification only
*: In case if the optional paper feeder is not installed, attach the bundled right lower cover as shown below.
Procedures
1. Insert two protrusions (b) of the right lower cover (a) into the holes at the machine front side.
2. Insert the hook (c) to fix it.
c
a
b
Figure 2-22
2-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Connecting the Interface Cable
Connection Environ- Function Necessary Cable

ment
Connect a LAN cable to Printer/Scanner/Network LAN Cable
the main unit FAX (10Base-T, 100Base-TX or 1000Base-T)
Connect a USB cable Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/ USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Max.
to the main unit WIA) 5.0m long)
In the case of the LAN connection
1. Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
+8%
Figure 2-23
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
In the case of the USB connection
1. Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the rear side of the main unit.
+8%
Figure 2-24
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)

General FAX connection example
In the case of the general telephone line
a. Modular jack
a
+8%
Figure 2-25
ADSL
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the PHONE port of the splitter.
a. Modular jack d
b. ADSL modem
c. Splitter (PHONE port)
d. PC b
a c +8%
Figure 2-26
ISDN
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the analog port of the terminal adapter.
a. Modular jack
c
b. Terminal adapter
(Analog port)
c. PC
a
b +8%
Figure 2-27
2-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Modular cord connection

Connect a modular cord to the LINE connector of the main unit.
When using a commercially available telephone set, connect a modular cord to the TEL connector of the main unit.
a. Modular jack d
b. Modular jack (Phone)
c. Commercially available telephone
d. Modular jack (line2) *1
a
*1 when two FAX kits are installed
b
c
Figure 2-28
2-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)Loading Paper
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it in the procedures below.
Figure 2-29
Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
• Such paper may cause a jam.
• If paper is left under high temperature and high humidity after taking it out of the package, it may cause trouble with
paper absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag.
Also, seal the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
• If paper is left in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may discolor it.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cas-
settes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This may
cause poor image quality or malfunctions.
2-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-2) Set paper in the cassette

The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, etc.
The cassette can hold 550 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
1. Pull the cassette completely out of the main unit.
Figure 2-30
NOTE
Please do not pull out multiple cassettes at same time.
2. Adjust the position of the paper length guide.

1.Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.
Figure 2-31
2-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
NOTE
Please move the paper length guide to the left edge and then push it down in case to use Legal paper in Cassette 1
and 12x18" paper in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-32
3. Adjust the position of the paper width guides.

Figure 2-33
NOTE
Adjust the paper size guide in case if using SRA3, A3 or Leger paper in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-34
2-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Load paper.
1.Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2.Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-35
Note
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (Refer to 2-25)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size to use, the
paper may skew or become jammed.
5. Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
Figure 2-36
2-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-37
7. Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-38
2-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(11-3) Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes The following procedure is an example for the cassette 1.
Figure 2-39
2. Remove the envelope feed guide.

*: In case of the Post Cards, please go to Step 5.
Figure 2-40
3. In case to use the Envelope over the size of Envelope C5 (Width: 162mm), expand the lever of the envelope feed
guide.
Figure 2-41
2-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Attach the envelope feed guide as shown in the illustration.
Figure 2-42
5. Adjust the position of the paper length guide.
Figure 2-43
6. Adjust the position of the paper width guides.

Figure 2-44
2-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7. Load the envelope with the print side facing up.
Figure 2-45
8. Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
*: Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
Figure 2-46
9. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-47
2-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-4) Set paper in the large capacity feeder

The high capacity feeder can hold A4/Letter size plain paper, recycle paper or color paper.
The large capacity feeder can load 3,500 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
*: The following procedure is an example for the 3rd cassette.
Figure 2-48
2. Load paper.
Figure 2-49
Note
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
2-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Gently insert the cassette all the way.
Figure 2-50
3.Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-51
2-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-5) Set paper in the side feeder

The side feeder can load 3,500 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
Figure 2-52
2. Load paper.
Figure 2-53
Note
• Load the paper with the print side face down.
2-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3.Gently insert the cassette all the way.
Figure 2-54
4.Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-55
2-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(12)Connecting the Power Cord

1. Please connect the supplied power cord to the
main unit and connect the other side to the power
outlet.
*: Only use the power cord that comes with the main unit.
Figure 2-56
(13)Turn the power on.

Open the switch cover (a) and turn on the power switch (b).
ON
a b
Figure 2-57
2-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
(14)Setting up the Toner Container
Set up the toner container.

1. Open the front cover.
IMPORTANT
The container cover does not open when the power is turned off. Make sure to turn the power on to release the con-
tainer cover lock and then open the front cover.
Figure 2-58
2. Take out the new toner container.
Figure 2-59
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the part of dotted line by hands.
Figure 2-60
2-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Slightly tap the toner container.
5~ 5~
Figure 2-61
4. Shake the toner container.
5~ 5~
5~
Figure 2-62
5. Install the toner container.
CLICK!
Figure 2-63
2-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Close the toner container cover.
Figure 2-64
7. Close the front cover.
Figure 2-65
2-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(15)Default Setting
The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the main unit is turned on for the first time after the installation and pos-
sible to set necessary items. Also, it is possible to set from System Menu as shown below.
[System Menu /Counter] key

[System Menu/Counter] key
Figure 2-66
(15-1)Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the date and time of installation location.
1. Display the screen
[System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key
> [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
2. Configure the settings
[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
Items Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from
the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for
summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time of the installation location. If you perform Send as E-
mail, the date and time set in the main unit will be displayed on the header of
the mail.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),
Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in
A.D. (20XX)
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
2-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(15-2) Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

TCP/IP (IPv4) Settings
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
The default settings are as follows.
• TCP/IP: On
• DHCP: On
• Auto-IP: On
• IP Address: 0.0.0.0
• Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
• Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
Setting procedures
1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wired Network Set-
tings] > [TCP/IP Setting].
2. Select [IPv4] for setting.
3. Restart the network from System Menu, or turn off the power, wait at least 5 seconds and turn on the power SW.
When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].
When setting the static IP address

[DHCP]: Set to [Off].
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the address.
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
When setting Auto IP, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.
*: The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name 40 ppm 50 ppm 60 ppm

model model model
Login User Name 4000 5000 6000
Login Password 4000 5000 6000
(15-3) Paper size and media type setting

1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/
MP tray Settings].
2. Select [Cassette Setting] > [Cassette 1 (- 5) ] or [MP Tray Setting].
3. Select [Paper Size] and [Media Type] to set them.
2-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(16)Installing Software
Install appropriate software in your PC from the bundled DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC. (See the Operation
Guide supplied with the main unit)
(17)Setup setting at high altitude place

When setup is done at high altitude place, execute as follows.
Select maintenance mode U952 > [Execute] > [HIGH ALTITUDE] to execute the procedures below.
Procedures
1. Maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 to 2000m], [2001 to 3000m] or [3001 to 3500m].
2. Maintenance mode U140 > [AC Calib] > [Calibration] >
Type: 0 (default), K: ON > [Execute]
Press the [Start] key.
3. Maintenance mode U101 > [Force Execute] > [Execute]

4. Maintenance mode U464 > [Calib] > [Execute]

*: If the developer leak appears after setting the above.

Select maintenance mode U140 > [AC Calib] > [Magnification] to lower the values of K.
(18)Image adjustment
Execute the image adjustment in maintenance mode U952 (Maintenance mode workflow)
1. Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Input "952" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3. Select [Execute].
4. Select [Setup] to adjust the main unit and [EH Setup] to adjust the optional units.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the maintenance mode.
6. After transition, execute the following setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and terminate the workflow.
*: When not executing U952, enter the maintenance modes with the numeric keys in the following order to execute
each setting.
(18-1) Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464)

1.Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Calib].
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Calibration starts.
4.Press the [Stop] key.
(18-2) Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)

1.Input "410" using the numeric keys.
* :Display the execution information screen.
2-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
* :Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.

3.Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back and the
printed side facing down on the platen.
* :Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.
Figure 2-67
* :The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
5.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
* :The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
7.[Finish] appears after normal completion.
(18-3) Output Maintenance report (Execute maintenance mode U000)

2.Select [Maintenance] and press the [Start] key to output the maintenance report.
(18-4) Clearing the counts (Execute maintenance mode U927)

2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
(18-5) Setting the delivery date (Execute maintenance mode U278)

2.Select [Today].
3.Press the [Start] key to set the delivery date.
2-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(19)Exiting from the maintenance mode

*: The maintenance mode is exited.
(20)Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off)

1. Make sure that each indicator is not flashing, and then turn the power switch off.
Figure 2-68
2. Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

*: It takes a few minutes for power off.
2-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(21)Turn the power on again

1. Turn the power switch on.
*: Check the main power switch (a) is ON when the power is not turned on.
Figure 2-69
IMPORTANT
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more, and
then turn on the power switch.
2-3 Installing the optional equipment

(1) SD/SDHC memory card
Reading the SD/SDHC memory Card
The contents of the SD/SDHC memory card are read into the main unit after turning the power on.
SD/SDHC memory card installation

1. Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
*: Before inserting the memory card, make sure that the power switch is turned off.
2. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).
3. Release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the SD card cover (c).
b c
a
b
Figure 2-70
2-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).
SW
b
a
Figure 2-71
5. Reattach the covers.
Formatting an SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC card, you must first format it with the main unit.
*: Formatting will delete all existing data on the SD card.
If you have installed an application, do not format the SD card to avoid the removal of the application in the SD
card.
Format it with a PC or Prescribe command in advance.
2-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50)

(3) Wireless LAN interface (IB-51)
Procedures
2. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).
Figure 2-72
3. Insert the PWB unit (b) straight into the option slot (c).
4. Secure the PWB unit (b) with two screws (a)(M3x8) once removed.
a
a
b
Figure 2-73
*: Install it in the upper slot.
2-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) (120V model standard)
Bundled parts of Wireless LAN interface (IB-35)(1503RR0UN0)

• PWB unit1 pc
• Screw (M3x6)1 pc
Figure 2-74
Procedures
2. Remove a screw (a)(M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-75
2-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Open it if the DP is installed.

4. Remove 2 screws (a)(M3x8).
5. Remove the DP rear cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-76
6. Insert the FPC (b) of the PWB unit (a) into the aperture (c) of the shield box.
7. Connect the connector (d) to the connector (f) of the main PWB (e).
d
f
Figure 2-77
2-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Secure the PWB unit (b) with a screw (a)(M3x6).
Figure 2-78
9. Reattach the DP rear cover (b) with two screws (a)(M3x8).
Figure 2-79
2-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
10. Latch seven hooks (b) and attach the upper rear cover (a) with the screw (c)(M3x10).
Figure 2-80
2-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Document table (DT-730(B))
Bundled parts of Document table DT-730(B) (1902LC0UN2)

• Tray stay1 pc
• Tray mounting plate1 pc
• Tray cover1 pc
• Tray lower cover1 pc
• Tray fixing plate1 pc
• Sheet2 pc
• Pin2 pc
• Nut M42 pc
• Screw (M4x8 screw with the binding head)7 pc
Figure 2-81
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the right cover (a).
3. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-82
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-83
2-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-84
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-85
2-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
c
Figure 2-86
10. Attach the tray lower cover (a).

11. Secure the tray lower cover (a) by two pins (b).
B B
A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-87
2-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
12. Affix the two sheet (b) on the document table (a).
b
A
A
B
B A
B
B
Figure 2-88
2-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(6) Numeric Keypad (NK-7100 / NK-7110)
Numeric Keypad installation requires the following parts:

• Numeric Keypad NK-7100 (1903RT0UN0)1 pc
• Numeric Keypad NK-7110 (1903RT0US0): 120V model 1 pc
Bundled parts of Numeric Keypad NK-7100 (1903RT0UN0)

Bundled parts of Numeric Keypad NK-7110 (1903RT0US0)
• Numeric Keypad1 pc
• Numeric Keypad cover1 pc
• Screw (M3x8)2 pc
• Label 1 pc
Figure 2-89
Procedures
2. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) from the operation unit (a).
3. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the operation unit lid (d) in the direction of the arrow.
a c d
Figure 2-90
2-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
4. Connect the connector (b) of the numeric keypad (a) to the connector (c) of the operation unit.
b
a
Figure 2-91
5. Latch two hooks (b) on the cut-out (c) of the operation unit, and then attach the numeric keypad (a) with two screws
(d)(M3x8).
a
c
a d
d
Figure 2-92
6. Slid the cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and latch two hooks (b), and secure the screw (c)(M3x8) once
removed in step 2.
b a c
Figure 2-93
2-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
7. Affix the label (b) on the numeric keypad (a).
Figure 2-94
2-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(7) ID card reader
ID card reader holder installation requires the following parts

according to the shape of it:
• Label (Bundled in the main unit)1 pc

• Sponge *1 2 pcs
• Hook-and-loop fastener A (303LL0253_) 2 pcs
• Hook-and-loop fastener B (303MX0202_) 2 pcs
* 1: 100V specification only
Figure 2-95
Procedures
2. Pull up the operation unit (a).
3. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower hooks
(d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
Figure 2-96
2-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5

5. Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
6. Detach the exit upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-97
7. Affix the sponge (b) * 1 and a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to the holder part of the main unit (a).
8. Affix the card reader (d) aligning to the position of the affixed hook-and-loop fasteners (c).
a
b
c
c d
d
Figure 2-98
* 1: 100V specification only
2-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
9. Connect the USB connector (b) to the USB interface slot (c).
10. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (d) and hook it on the hook (e) of the main unit.
c
e b
d
a
Figure 2-99
11. Insert the exit upper cover (b) from the back side of the machine and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a)(M3X8).
*: Align the upper exit cover (b) to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-100
12. Affix a label (c) on the ISU front right cover (b) aligning it with the positioning mark (a).
b
a
c
Figure 2-101
2-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
13. Attach the ID card reader cover. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach
the ISU front right cover in the original position.
Figure 2-102
Activating Card Authentication

To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated website of your dealer or
service representative, and register the "Machine No." indicated on your machine and the "Product ID" indicated on
the License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key.
Refer to [Optional Application] when starting the trial. (Refer to 2-107)
2-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) USB keyboard (120V /220-230V model only)
USB keyboard installation requires the following parts:

• Keyboard holder 10 (1709AN0UN0) 1 pc
• USB Keyboard 1 pc
Bundled parts of Keyboard holder 10 (1709AN0UN0)

• Upper keyboard mounting bracket 1 pc
• Lower keyboard mounting bracket 1 pc
• Upper keyboard cover 1 pc
• Lower keyboard cover 1 pc
• Upper lid 1 pc
• Lower lid 1 pc
• Hook-and-loop fastener2 pairs
• Binding band1 pc
• Screws (M3x8 S-tite) *16 pc
• Screws (M3x8 S-tite Black)2 pc
Figure 2-103
• Screws (M3x8 P-tite)2 pc
• Screws (M4x8 S-tite)4 pc
• Screws (M4x14 S-tite) *22 pc
*1: 4 pc is used for this model.
*2: Not used in this model.
Procedures
2. Fix the upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the four screws
(a)(M3x8).
*: Attach it according to the position of the engraved mark B.
a
a
a
a
c
Figure 2-104
2-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

4. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
Figure 2-105
5. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) of the ISU rear cover (a).

6. Remove two screws (d)(M3x8) of the ISU left cover (c).
7. Lift up the left side of the ISU rear cover (a) and remove the ISU left cover (c).
d c
d
Figure 2-106
2-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Pull up the operation unit (a).

9. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower hooks
(d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
Figure 2-107

11. Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
12. Detach the exit upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
2-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-108
14. Release the hook (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b), and then remove the keyboard cover (d) by sliding it.
a
d
Figure 2-109
2-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
15. Pass the arm of attaching keyboard mounting bracket (a) through the machine aperture (b) and latch the hook (c)
to the aperture (d). Secure the keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (e)(M4×8).
e e
a
c
b d
Figure 2-110
16. Secure the lower keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (b)(M4x8).
b
b
a
Figure 2-111
2-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
17. Latch the hook (b) of the lower lid (a) in the hole (c) of the lower keyboard mounting plate and secure it with the
screw (d)(M3x8, black).
*: Attach it while the hooks come to the punch mark B.
b c b
a
d
Figure 2-112
18. Insert two positioning pins (b) of lower keyboard cover (a) into the holes (d) of the upper keyboard mounting plate
(c) and slide it to the rear.
19. Insert the lower keyboard cover (a) into three hooks (e) on the keyboard mounting plate (a) and two cutouts (f).
f
e
a
c d
b
Figure 2-113
2-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
20. Fix the lower keyboard mounting bracket (b) onto the upper keyboard mounting bracket (c) with two screws
(a)(M3x8 P-tite).
c
b
Figure 2-114
21. Insert the upper keyboard cover (a) into the upper keyboard mounting plate (b) to attach it.
Figure 2-115
2-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
22. Fix the Upper lid (b) to the lower keyboard mounting bracket (C) with the screw (a)(M3x8 Black).
b a
c
Figure 2-116
23. Affix a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to the concave (b) of the upper keyboard cover (a).
Figure 2-117
24. Place the keyboard (a) on the hook-and-loop fastener(b) and press it to fix.
2-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
25. Connect the USB cable (c) with the USB connector (d) on the main unit.
d
c
a b
Figure 2-118
26. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (a) and hook it on the hook (b) of the main unit.
b
Figure 2-119
2-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Note
In case the card reader (a) is already installed, remove the USB wire (b) of the card reader from the hook (c) of
the main unit. Bundle two of the excess USB wires and hook them on the hook (c) of the main unit again.
c
b
Figure 2-120
27. Push the USB cable (a) to between the ribs of main unit and secure it.
b a
b
Figure 2-121
2-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
28. Insert the upper exit cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a)(M3×8).
*: Align the cover to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-122
29. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach the ISU front right cover in the
original position.
Figure 2-123
2-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
30. Lift up the left side of ISU rear cover (a) and secure the left ISU cover (c) in original position with two screws
(d)(M3×8).
31. Reattach the screw (b)(M3×8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
d c
d
Figure 2-124
32. Latch two hooks (c) and reattach the left rear cover (b) in the original position with two screws (a)(M3x8).
b
c
Figure 2-125
2-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Handset (100V model only)
Handset installation requires the following parts:

• Handset (1909AG9JP0)1 pc
• Document table DT-5100 (1902LC0UN2)1 pc
Bundled parts of handset (1909AC9JP0)

• Handset1 pc
• Handset holder1 pc
• Handset mounting plate*11 pc
• Protection cover*11 pc
• Pin2 pc
• Telephone wire1 pc
• Modular cord1 pc
• Nut M42 pc
Figure 2-126
Bundled parts of Document table DT-730(B) (1902LC0UN2_)
• Tray stay1 pc
• Tray mounting plate1 pc
• Tray cover1 pc
• Tray lower cover1 pc
• Tray fixing plate1 pc
• Sheet*12 pc
• Pin2 pc
• Nut M42 pc
*: *1: Not used in this model.
Procedures
2. Remove the right cover (a).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-127
2-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-128
7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-129
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-130
2-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
Figure 2-131
2-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
10. Remove two pins (b) and two nuts (c) from the handset mounting plate (a).
11. Secure the original tray (d) with two pins and two nuts once removed.
b
b
A
A
B
A A
a B
A
B
c
d
c
Figure 2-132
12. Put two catches (c) at the backside of the handset holder (b) into two pins (a) and slide it toward you to fix it on the
document tray (d).
B
A
b A
A
B
A B
A
B
a B
Figure 2-133
2-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
13. Cut the separator cover (b) of the tray lower cover (a) with nippers (C), etc.
a
Figure 2-134
14. Attach the tray lower cover (a).

15. Secure the tray lower cover (a) by two pins (b).
A A
B B
A A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-135
2-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
16. Affix the sheet (b) on the left side of document table (a).
a
b
A
A
B
B A
A
B
B
Figure 2-136
17. Connect the telephone wire (a) to the handset (b) and handset holder (c).
B
A
Figure 2-137
18. Connect the modular cord (a) to the handset holder (b).
Figure 2-138
2-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
19. Connect one end of the connector (b) of the modular cord (a) to the machine right side (c).
a b
c
Figure 2-139
2-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)Cassette heater
(10-1) In the case of main unit cassette
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:
• Cassette heater 100 set (302ND9471_)1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 set (302ND9472_)
• Cassette heater 240 set (302ND9473_)
Bundled parts of cassette heater set for 100V/120V/240V.

• Cassette heater 1001 pc
• Cassette heater 120
• High temperature caution label1 pc
• Heater cover1 pc
• Screws (M3x8 screw with the binding head)2 pc
• Screws (M3x8 P-tite screw with the binding head)5 pc
Figure 2-140
Procedures
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
a
Figure 2-141
4. Turn over the lower cassette (a).
5. Secure the heater cover (c) included in the cassette heater set package at the bottom of the cassette with five
screws (b)(M3×8 P tight).
b
b
b
b
b
c a
Figure 2-142
2-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Insert the cassette heater (a) and put two protrusions (b) in two apertures (c) of the rear side plate.
7. Attach it with the screw (e)(M3×8) to the base (d).
b
e
b
d
Figure 2-143
8. Connect the heater connector (a) to the main unit side connector (b).
9. Put the cable (c) into the rib of the heater holder (d) and fix it.
b
ac
d
Figure 2-144
10. Reattach the parts in the original position.

11. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 (Cassette heater On/Off) to [Mode1].
*: In order to apply the setting value, exit the maintenance mode once, and perform the shutdown operation from the
normal screen, and turn off / on the power switch.
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(10-2) In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7100)

• Cassette heater 100 set (303RB9404_)1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 set (303RB9405_)

• Wire saddles4 pc
Procedures
Figure 2-145
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-146
4. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b)(M3x8).
5. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
*: Make sure the wire does not float.
c b
d b
Figure 2-147
2-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
Figure 2-148

IMPORTANT
2-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(10-3) In case of Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)

• Cassette heater 100 set (303RB9404_)1 pc

Figure 2-149
Procedures
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4. Pull out the right paper deck (c) and left paper deck (d) from the paper feeder (f).
a e
b
G
c f
Figure 2-150
5. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b)(M3x8).
6. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
7. Make sure the wire does not float.
b
c
b
Figure 2-151
2-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
Figure 2-152

IMPORTANT
2-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(10-4) In case of Side Feeder (PF-7120)

• Cassette heater 100 set (303RL9404_)1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 set (303RL9405_)
• Cassette heater 240 set (303RL9406_)

• Cassette heater 100 assembly1 pc
• Cassette heater 120 assembly
• Cassette heater 240 assembly
• Edge saddle1 pc
Figure 2-153
Procedures
(Side Feeder side)
2. Remove the connector of the paper feeder at the main unit side.
3. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the rear cover (b).
a
a
a
Figure 2-154
4. Pull out the cassette (a),
a
Figure 2-155
2-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
5. Release four bosses (a) and remove the right cover (b) while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
b a
a
a
Figure 2-156
6. Pass the heater cassette cable (a) through the aperture.

7. Insert the hook (d) of the cassette heater set (c) into two lancing (e) and secure it with two screws (M3×8) (f).
de
a
d
e
b
f
Figure 2-157
2-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Connect the connector (b) of cassette heater wire (a) to the connector (c) of the inlet cable.
9. Attach two wire saddles (d) and the edge saddles (e) and secure the wire.
10. Attach the right cover and the rear cover.
e
c
a
d
Figure 2-158
(Main unit side)
11. Remove two screws (a)(M3×8) and remove the cover plate (c) from the main unit paper feeder (b).
a
c
Figure 2-159
2-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
12. Connect the connector (b) of the heater outlet set (a) to the paper feeder side connector (c).
13. Attach to the heater outlet set (a) with two screws (d)(M3×8).
d
a
Figure 2-160
14. Connect the side feeder (a) to the main unit paper feeder (b) with the AC cord (c) and the connector wire (d).
a b
Figure 2-161
IMPORTANT
2-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(11)Coin Vender (option for 100v model only)
Coin vender installation requires the following parts:

• Coin Vender (1905H99JP0)1 pc
• Vendor relay wire (302NL4631_)1 pc
Bundled parts of Coin Vender (1905H99JP0)

• Vender wire1 pc
• Vender base1 pc
• Screws (M4x6)4 pc
Procedures
2. Attach the vender base (b) to coin vender (c) with four screws (a)(M4x6).
c
b
a
Figure 2-162
Figure 2-163
2-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Push down the lower rear cover (c), release the upper side rib, and release the lower hook (d) while lifting it up
slightly opened. After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
d 3
Figure 2-164

7. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
Figure 2-165
2-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

10. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (c) into the front side aperture (b) and widen it in the direction of the arrow to release
four hooks (d) and to remove the upper left cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
b
Figure 2-166
11. Pull out the lower cassette.

12. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8).
2-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
13. Lift up three hooks (c) and release them. Then remove the lower left cover (b).
c
b
c c c
a
a
b
a
Figure 2-167
14. Remove two screws (a) and remove the concealing lid (b).
a
b a
Figure 2-168
2-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
15. Pass the vendor wire (a) through the aperture (b).
16. Secure the vendor cable (a) with two screws (c) once removed in step 5.
a
b
c
Figure 2-169
17. Remove a screw (a) and attach to the earth terminal (b) of the vendor wire.
a
a
Figure 2-170
2-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18. Connect the connector (b) of the vendor relay wire (a) to the connector (d) (YC21) of the engine PWB (c).
a b
d
YC1
YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC40
YC39 YC33 YC23 20
1
YC9 YC27 YC34 YC21 YC22
Figure 2-171
2-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
19. Pass the vendor relay wire (a) through the wire saddle (b) and the edge saddle (c).
Figure 2-172
20. Remove four wire stoppers (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
21. Connect the connector (c) of the vendor relay wire to the vendor wire (d).
c a
Figure 2-173
2-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
22. Remove wire stopper (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
Figure 2-174
23. Reattach the left lower cover in the original position.

24. Reattach the left upper cover in the original position.
25. Reattach the rear left cover in the original position.
26. Reattach the rear lower cover in the original position.
27. Reattach the rear upper cover in the original position.
28. Connect the signal wire (a) of the coin vendor to the connector (b) of the vendor wire.
Figure 2-175
29. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(12)Banner Tray
Installation of banner tray requires the following parts:

• Banner Guide 10 (1203RP0UN0)1 pc
Bundled parts of Banner Guide 10 (1203RP0UN0)

• Tray base1 pc
• paper guide A1 pc
• paper guide B1 pc
• paper guide C1 pc
Figure 2-176
Procedures
1. Attach the paper guide A (b), the paper guide B (c) and the paper guide C (d) to the tray base (a).
d
b
c
Figure 2-177
2. Unlock the stopper (a) and move it outward.
a
Figure 2-178
3. Open the multi purpose tray (a).
Figure 2-179
2-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Put the banner tray (a) on the MP tray (b) and attach sliding in the direction of the arrow till locking.
b
Figure 2-180
2-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(13)Attach the optional cable.

The following parts are necessary in order to attach the optional cable.
• Key counter wire (302MV4609_)1 pc
• Wire saddle (7YZM610002++H01)5 pc
Procedures
2. After removing front side rib (c) and then remove the upper right cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-181
Figure 2-182
2-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4. Open the right cover.

6. Release the hook (b) and remove right rear upper cover (c).
c
b
Figure 2-183
7. Cut the split cover (b) of the upper right cover (a) with the nipper (c) etc.
b
a
Figure 2-184
2-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
8. Attach the wire saddle (a) x 5.
Figure 2-185
9. Pass the key counter wire (c) from the opening (b) of the right upper cover (a).
b a
Figure 2-186
2-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
10. Pass the key counter wire (a) through the wire guide (b) and reattach the right upper cover (c) to the original posi-
tion.
11. Pull out the key counter wire (a) without slack, and fix it at the wire saddle (d) in 5 positions.
b a
c
Figure 2-187
12. Pass the key counter wire (a) through the opening (b) of the shield box and fix it at the wire saddle (c) in 4 posi-
tions.
13. Connect the connector of the key counter wire (a) to the connector (f) (YC22) of the engine PWB (e).
c
f
d
a
YC1 YC29
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC6
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC39 YC23
YC33
YC9 YC10 YC34 YC22

YC4 YC27 YC21
Figure 2-188
2-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
2-4 About Optional Applications
application
Data Security Kit Internet FAX kit
Card Authentication Kit*1 Emulation upgrade kit
ThinPrint Option*1 OCR extension kit*1
*1: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
*: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
*: If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Use of an Application

Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. Login
with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name 40 ppm 50 ppm 60 ppm

model model model
Login User Name 4000 5000 6000
Login Password 4000 5000 6000
2. Select the desired application to start use and select [Activate].

*: You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] or [Details].
Items
Function
License
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
3. Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to
Step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
4. Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
NOTE
If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON. Icons of acti-
vated application are displayed in the Home screen.
2-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2-5 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system
1. Connect the power plug of the main unit to the

outlet and turn the power on.
4. Select [Country Code] and enter a country code using the numeric keys.
*: Refer to the following country code list.
6. Press the [Start] key to start data initialization.
*: Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
Country code list
country country
Destination Destination
code code
000 Japan 181 North America*2
156 Asian nations*1 007 South America*3
254 Taiwan 253 European nations*4
097 Korea 009 Australia
038 China 126 New Zealand*5
*1: Applied for Sales company competent Singapore, India, Thailand, Hong Kong.
*2: Applied for Sales company competent USA, Canada.
*3: Applied for Sales company competent Bolivia, Chile, Peru, Argentina, Brazil.
*4: Applied for Sales company competent Italy, Germany, Spain, U.K., Netherlands, Sweden, France,
Austria, Switzerland, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, Portugal, Ireland, Norway, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Turkey.
*5: Change the country code when selling in New Zealand. The country code to input is 126.
7. After completing installation, execute communication test to check if FAX normally operates.
IMPORTANT
Note the following points when installing the FAX system in the line via ISDN or PBX.
Check if the line to connect supports the V.34 (Super G3) FAX communication.
Especially, when communicating between extensions in PBX (private line via TDM), only 14400bps or 9600bps of
FAX communication speed is guaranteed and communication errors or TX/RX image failure may occur at V.34 com-
munication in such a line.
Corrective Measures
Set the following maintenance mode if the communication speed guaranteed on the line is 14400bps.
(Refer to 6-251) U633 [Enables or disables the V.34 communication]: Off
(Refer to 6-246) (U630 [Setting TX speed and RX speed]
2-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration
(1) Cross-section view
11
7 6
10
12
5 3
2
Original path / Paper path

Optical path / Paper path (Option)
Figure 3-1
1. Cassette feed section 7. Toner container

2. MP paper feed section 8. Drum unit
3. Paper conveying section 9. Transfer and separation section
4. Image scanner unit 10. Fuser section
5. Laser scanner unit 11. Feedshift/exit section
6. Developer unit 12. Duplex conveying section
3-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-2 Extension device construction (option)

(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100)
2
Paper path
Figure 3-2
1. Cassette feed section
(2) Large capacity feeder cross-section view (PF-7110)
2 3 1
Paper path
Figure 3-3
1. Right cassette paper feed section 3. Paper conveying section

2. Left cassette paper feed section
3-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Side feeder cross-section view (PF-7120)

1
Paper path
Figure 3-4
1. Cassette feed section
3-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(4) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100)

2
1
Original path
Figure 3-5
1. DP feed section 3. DP reversing/exit section

2. DP conveying section
(5) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7110)
2 1
Original path
Figure 3-6
1. DP feed section 3. DP exit section

2. DP conveying section
3-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-7100)

1
Paper path
Figure 3-7
1. Exit section 2. Paper conveying section
(7) Inner Finisher cross-section view (DF-7100)
2 3 5
Paper path
Figure 3-8
1. Exit section 4. Staple unit

2. Paper conveying section 5. Punch unit (Option)
3. Reversing section
3-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) 4,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7110)
4 2 1
Paper path
Figure 3-9
1. Punch unit 4. Exit section (tray B)

2. Paper conveying section 5. Exit section (tray A)
3. Staple unit
3-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) 1,000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120)

2 1
4
Paper path
Figure 3-10
1. Punch unit 3. Staple unit

2. Paper conveying section 4. Exit section (main tray)
3-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B))
Paper path
Figure 3-11
1. Paper conveying section 3. Exit section (upper tray: DF)

2. Exit section (mail tray)
3-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730)
4 3 2
Paper path
Figure 3-12
1. Paper conveying section 3. Paper folding section

2. Staple unit 4. Exit section
3-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(12)Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100)
Paper path
Figure 3-13
1. Exit section (tray)
3-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-3 Paper conveying and Paper detection

(1) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7100+DF-7100+PH-7110
T
A
H
I
C
Figure 3-14
3-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Main unit+DP-7110+PF-7110+PF-7120+AK-7100+DF-7110+MT-730(B)+BF-730+PH-

7
M
K
Q
J 66xx J
O
O O U
P
H
O
T F
A
H
B
R
I
E C
Figure 3-15
3-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7110+AK-7100+DF-7120+PH-7
N N
N U
N
H
T
A H
I
E C
Figure 3-16
[Paper jam] L. Inner Finisher

A. Paper jam at cassette 1 M. Paper jam at the document processor
B. Paper jam at cassette 2 N. Paper jam at the 1000-sheet finisher
C. Paper jam at 550-sheet×2 cassette 3 O. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(inner)
C. Paper jam at 1750-sheet×2 cassette 3 P. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(tray A)
D. Paper jam at 550-sheet×2 cassette 4 Q. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(tray B)
E. Paper jam at 1750-sheet×2 cassette 4 R. Paper jam at the folding unit
F. Paper jam at cassette 5 (Side feeder) S. Paper jam at the BF tray
G. Paper jam at the MP tray T. Paper jam at the conveying section
H. Paper jam at right cover 1 U. Paper jam at the duplex unit
I. Paper jam at right cover 2 V. Paper jam at the registration section
J. Paper jam at the bridge conveying section
K. Paper jam at the mailbox
3-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-4 Electric parts

(1) Wire connection
(1-1) (Machine rear side)
Figure 3-17
1. Main PWB 4. Feed image PWB

2. Engine PWB 5. Feed drive PWB
3. Main high-voltage PWB
3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) Backside of the shield box
Figure 3-18
6. Transfer high-voltage PWB

7. Low power voltage PEB
3-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs

(2-1) Main PWB
It controls the software for the interface and

image data processing, and the hardware
generating operation section.
Figure 3-19
(2-2) Engine PWB
It controls the hardware for the generation

of the high-voltage and the bias, the image
scanner unit, and the paper conveying sys-
tem.
Figure 3-20
3-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-3) Main high-voltage PWB
Output the main charger bias and the

developer bias.
Figure 3-21
(2-4) Transfer high-voltage PWB
Output the transfer bias, separation bias

and transfer cleaning bias.
Figure 3-22
(2-5) Low power voltage PEB
The input voltage (AC) from the AC power

supply is changed to DC such as 24V DC.
Figure 3-23
3-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-6) IH PWB
Controlling IH
Figure 3-24
(2-7) Operation panel main PWB
It consists of the wiring relay circuit for the

main PWB, the operation panel sub PWB
and the LCD.
Figure 3-25
(2-8) Fuser high voltage PWB
Output fuser high voltage
Figure 3-26
3-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Electric parts layout

(3-1) PWBs
Primary transfer unit
Developer unit
16
12
Laser scanner unit 13
Drum unit
14 22 15 1
20 8 2
18 Main unit
24
Fuser unit
IH unit
21 3
10
25 11 23
7
4
17 25
6 5
Front side of main unit / inside of main unit / back side of main unit
Figure 3-27
3-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1. Main PWB ............................................. Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC
and network and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire
hardware to control operation section.
2. Engine PWB.......................................... Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high volt-
age, bias output, image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser tem-
perature, etc.
3. Feed image PWB.................................. Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum
units, developer units, fuser drive section and exit drive section.
4. Feed drive PWB.................................... Consisting of the engine PWB, and relay circuit for the paper feed
drive section and paper conveying drive section.
5. Main high-voltage PWB ........................ Generating the main charger bias and the developer bias.
6. Low voltage PWB.................................. Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to
DC.
7. Transfer connect PWB .......................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for the
transfer PWB.
8. Transfer high-voltage PWB ................... Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer clean-
ing bias.
9. Transfer PWB........................................ Storing the drum unique data in an EEPROM. Wiring connection
PWB for the belt cleaning motor, belt thermistor and feed image
PWB.
10. Operation panel main PWB .................. It consists of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for the opera-
tion panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11. Operation panel sub PWB .................... Consisting of the LED indicator and the key switches.
12. APC PWB ............................................. Emitting and controlling the laser beam.
13. PD PWB................................................ Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.
14. LED PWB.............................................. Controlling the LED.
15. CCD PWB ............................................. Scanning the original image.
16. Developer PWB K ................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
17. Drum/Developer relay PWB.................. Consisting of the feed image PWB, the drum and wiring relay cir-
cuit with developer unit.
18. Drum PWB K......................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
19. Fuser PWB............................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit. Storing the
drum unique data in an EEPROM.
20. IH PWB ................................................. Controlling IH
21. NFC PWB ............................................. Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
22. RFID PWB ............................................ Reading the toner container information.
23. USB hub PWB ...................................... USB slot distribution.
24. KUIO relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for FAX PWB.
25. Fuser high voltage PWB ....................... Discharging the fuser heater belt.
3-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(3-2) Part name table (PWB)

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
1 PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 302NK9404_
Main PWB
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY EU SP 302NK9405_
2 Engine PWB PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP 302NK9406_
3 Feed image PWB PARTS PWB FEED IMAGE ASSY SP 302NK9408_
4 Feed drive PWB PARTS PWB FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302ND9428_
5 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN
Main high-voltage PWB 302NK9411_
SP
6 PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 100 SP 302ND9461_
Low power voltage PEB
PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 200 SP 302ND9462_
7 PARTS PWB TRANSFER CONNECT
Transfer connect PWB 302ND9429_
ASSY SP
8 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE TRANS-
Transfer high-voltage PWB 302NK9412_
FER SP
9 Transfer PWB TR-6500 302NK9303_
10 Operation panel main PWB PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP 302RH9403_
11 Operation panel sub PWB PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP 302RH9404_
12 APC PWB LK-6500 302NK9301_
13 PD PWB LK-6500 302NK9301_
14 LED PWB PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302V69308_
15 CCD PWB PARTS ISU ASSY H SP 302ND9311_
16 Developer PWB K DV-8550K 302ND9303_
17 PARTS PWB DRUM DLP CONNECT
Drum/Developer relay PWB 302NK9402_
ASSY SP
18 Drum PWB K DK-8550 302ND9307_
19 Fuser PWB FK-8550 302ND9308_
20 PARTS PWB IH 100 ASSY SP 302ND9430_
IH PWB
PARTS PWB IH 200 ASSY SP 302ND9431_
21 NFC PWB PARTS PWB NFC ASSY SP 302RH9405_
22 RFID PWB PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP 302NK9407_
23 USB hub PWB PARTS PWB USB HUB ASSY SP 302RH9402_
24 KUIO relay PWB PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP 302K99427_
25 PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE FUSER
Fuser high voltage PWB 302ND9469_
SP
3-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
(3-3) Sensors and Switches
23 Primary transfer unit
Developer unit
25
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
15 59 14
Fuser unit
IH unit
28
39
40
41
48
Main unit
46
38
52
53 24 11
27 37 36 42 45
44 26
51 43
29 55 34 16
7 9
47 4
57 21
17 49
32
58 1
8 3
35 12
54
6
19 30 5 2 33 50
56 10 18 31 22 13 20
Figure 3-28
3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1. Paper sensor 1...................................... Detecting presence of paper in the cassette 1.

2. Paper sensor 2...................................... Detecting presence of paper in the cassette 2.
3. Lower paper gauge sensor 1 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette 1.
4. Upper paper gauge sensor 1 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette 1.
5. Lower paper gauge sensor 2 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette 2.
6. Upper paper gauge sensor 2 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette 2.
7. Paper length sensor 1........................... Detecting the size of paper length in the cassette 1.
8. Paper length sensor 2........................... Detecting the size of paper length in the cassette 2.
9. Paper width sensor 1 ............................ Detecting the size of paper width in the cassette 1.
10. Paper width sensor 2 ............................ Detecting the size of paper width in the cassette 2.
11. DU sensor 1 .......................................... Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.
12. DU sensor 2 .......................................... Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.
13. Conveying sensor ................................. Detecting paper jam at the paper conveying section.
14. Original size sensor .............................. Detecting the original size
15. Home position sensor ........................... Detecting the position of the image scanner unit.
16. Rear ID sensor...................................... Measuring the toner density at the calibration.
17. Front ID sensor ..................................... Measuring the toner density at the calibration.
18. MP tray sensor...................................... Detecting the MP tray is pulled out.
19. MP conveying sensor............................ Detecting paper jam at the MP paper conveying section.
20. MP paper sensor................................... Detecting the presence of paper on the MP tray.
21. MP paper length sensor ........................ Detecting the size of paper length on the MP tray.
22. MP paper width sensor ......................... Detecting the size of paper width on the MP tray.
23. T/C sensor K ......................................... Detecting the toner density in the developer unit , storing the
developer individual data by EEPROM (Black)
24. Toner level sensor K ............................. Detecting toner level in the toner hopper (Black)
25. Belt thermistor....................................... Detecting the transfer belt temperature.
26. Belt release sensor ............................... Detecting the transfer belt release position.
27. Front belt rotation sensor ...................... Detecting the fuser rotation position
28. Rear belt rotation sensor....................... Detecting the fuser rotation position
29. Belt roll-up sensor ................................. Detecting the fuser belt roll-up
30. Retard sensor 1 .................................... Detecting the retard roller rotation of cassette 1
31. Retard sensor 2 .................................... Detecting the retard roller rotation of cassette 2
32. Lift upper limit sensor 1......................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the cassette 1 is
activated.
33. Lift upper limit sensor 2......................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the cassette 2 is
activated.
34. Registration sensor ............................... Controlling the timing to start the secondary paper feeding.
35. Weight sensor ....................................... Detecting the waste toner box weight
36. Fuser sensor ......................................... Detecting the paper jam at the fuser section.
37. Fuser pressure release sensor ............. Detecting the mode of the fuser pressure.
38. IH position sensor Detecting the IH core home position.
39. Fuser thermistor 1 (middle)................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (middle)
40. Fuser thermistor 2 (center) ................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (center)
41. Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) ..................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (edge)
42. Fuser thermistor 4 (press)..................... Detecting the press roller temperature.
43. Exit reversing sensor ............................ Detecting jam at the exit section.
44. Lower exit full sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
45. Upper exit full sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
46. JS sensor .............................................. Detecting the paper-full on the job separator or attachment kit.
47. Front cover sensor ................................ Detecting opening/closing of the front cover.
48. Original size timing sensor.................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
49. PF switch .............................................. Detecting the paper feeder.
50. Main Power Switch ............................... Main Power Switch
3-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
51. Power switch......................................... Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB
and the operation panel PWB, etc.
52. Conveying open/close sensor............... Detecting opening/closing of the conveying section.
53. Waste toner full sensor ......................... Detecting the waste toner box full.
54. Right cover switch................................. Blocking the 24 V power line when the right cover is open and
reset interlock switch.
55. Temperature/humidity sensor................ Detecting the temperature and humidity outside the main unit.
56. MP position sensor ............................... Detecting the MP lift plate position
57. Cassette sensor 1 ................................. Detecting the cassette 1.
58. Cassette sensor 2 ................................. Detecting the cassette 2.
59. Toner motor rotation sensor K............... Detecting toner motor K rotation
3-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-4) Part name table (Sensors and Switches)

1 Paper sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
2 Paper sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
3 Lower paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
4 Upper paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
5 Lower paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
6 Upper paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
7 Paper length sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
8 Paper length sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
9 Paper width sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
10 Paper width sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
11 DU sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
12 DU sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
13 Conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
14 Original size sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 302ND9480_
15 Home position sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
16 Rear ID sensor PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414_
17 Front ID sensor PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414_
18 MP tray sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
19 MP conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302K99458_
20 MP paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
21 MP paper length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
22 PARTS PWB PAPER SIZE SENSOR
MP paper width sensor 303R39405_
ASSY SP
23 T/C sensor K DV-8550K 302ND9303_
24 PARTS TONER HOPPER MONO
Toner level sensor K 302NK9403_
UNIT SP
25 Belt thermistor TR-6500 302NK9303_
26 Belt release sensor DR-6500 302NK9302_
27 Front belt rotation sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
28 Rear belt rotation sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
29 Belt roll-up sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9406_
30 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 1 302ND9432_
SP
34 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 2 302ND9432_
SP
32 Lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
33 Lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
34 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404_
3-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
35 Weight sensor PARTS PWB EDGE SENSOR ASSY 302K99421_
SP
36 Fuser sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
37 Fuser pressure release sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
38 IH position sensor FK-8595IH 302ND9309_
FK-8590IH 302ND9310_
39 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle) FK-8550 302ND9308_
40 Fuser thermistor 2 (center) FK-8550 302ND9308_
41 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) FK-8550 302ND9308_
42 Fuser thermistor 4 (press) FK-8550 302ND9308_
43 Exit reversing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
44 Lower exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
45 Upper exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
46 JS sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
47 Front cover sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
48 Original size timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
49 PF switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
50 Main Power Switch SW.SEESAW 7SC020403+++H01
51 Power switch PWB SWITCH ASSY 302NG0110_
52 Conveying open/close sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
53 Waste toner full sensor PARTS BOX WASTE MONO ASSY SP 302NK9401_
54 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
55 Temperature/humidity sensor PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP 302M29413_
56 MP position sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
57 Cassette sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
58 Cassette sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
59 Toner motor rotation sensor K PARTS TONER HOPPER MONO 302NK9403_
UNIT SP
3-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-5) Motors
15 Primary transfer unit
Developer unit
Laser scanner unit 4
Drum unit
8
9
20
Main unit
Fuser unit
IH unit
2
1 29
31
16
22
27 6
19 17
18 14
26 10
30 28
13
23 25 7 21 12 11 24
Figure 3-29
3-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1. IH core motor Drive the IH core.

2. Scanner motor ...................................... Drive the optical section.
3. Polygon motor....................................... Drive the polygon mirror.
4. LSU cleaning motor .............................. Driving the LSU dustproof glass cleaning mechanism.
5. Belt cleaning motor ............................... Driving the cleaning roller of the primary transfer belt.
6. Belt release motor................................. Driving to release the primary transfer belt.
7. MP lift motor.......................................... Operates the MP plate.
8. Container motor .................................... Drive the container
9. Toner motor K ....................................... Supplying toner to developer unit. (Black)
10. Drum motor K........................................ Driving of the drum unit. (Black)
11. Lift motor 1 ............................................ Activating the lift plate of the cassette 1
12. Lift motor 2 ............................................ Activating the lift plate of the cassette 2
13. Paper feed motor .................................. Drive the paper feed mechanism.
14. Developer K / Transfer belt motor ......... Driving the developer unit K and the transfer belt.
15. Vibration motor K .................................. Vibrating the developer unit K.
16. Fuser motor........................................... Drive the fuser section.
17. Fuser pressure release motor............... Driving the fuser pressure release.
18. Waste toner motor................................. Drive the waste toner mechanism.
19. Exit reversing motor .............................. Driving the exit section.
20. IH PWB fan motor ................................. Cooling the IH PWB.
21. Toner absorption fan motor Absorb scattering waste toner.
22. Controller fan motor .............................. Absorb scattering waste toner
23. Developer fan motor K Cooling the developer section.
24. Fuser edge fan motor............................ Cooling the edge of the fuser heater belt.
25. Power source fan motor........................ Cooling the power source PWB and high-voltage PWB.
26. Exit/IH front fan motor ........................... Cooling output paper/IH.
27. Exit/IH middle fan motor........................ Cooling output paper/IH.
28. Container right fan motor Cooling container/toner hopper.
29. Exit fan motor........................................ Cooling the exit section.
30. Vibration motor K Vibrating the waste toner duct K.
31. Container left fan motor Cooling container.
3-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-8
(3-6) Part name table (motor)

1 FK-8590IH 302ND9310_
IH core motor
FK-8595IH 302ND9309_
2 Scanner motor PARTS MOTOR ISU SP 302N29401_
3 Polygon motor LK-6500 302NK9301_
4 LSU cleaning motor LK-6500 302NK9301_
5 Belt cleaning motor TR-6500 302NK9303_
6 Belt release motor DR-6500 302NK9302_
7 MP lift motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY A SP 302ND9404_
8 Container motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W10 ASSY SP 302NK9410_
9 Toner motor K PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
10 PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11
Drum motor K 302ND94530
SET SP
11 Lift motor 1 MOTOR LIFT ASSY 302ND9448_
12 Lift motor 2 MOTOR LIFT ASSY 302ND9448_
13 Paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 ASSY SP 302ND94770
14 DR-6500
302NK9302_
Developer K / Transfer belt motor (PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 DRUM SET
(302ND9455_)
SP)
15 Vibration motor K DV-8550K 302ND9303_
16 Fuser motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 SET SP 302ND9491_
17 Fuser pressure release motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302ND9405_
18 Waste toner motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302ND9487_
19 Exit reversing motor PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449_
20 IH PWB fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING DLP 70 SP 302K99435_
21 Toner absorption fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302K99436_
22 Controller fan motor FAN BOX COOLING 302FZ4404_
23 Developer fan motor K FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
24 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY
Fuser edge fan motor 302ND9458_
SP
25 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302K09430_
26 Exit/IH front fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
27 Exit/IH middle fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
28 Container right fan motor FAN LSU 60-25 302GR4408_
29 Exit fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 15 SP 302ND9460_
30 Vibration motor K PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
31 Container left fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_
3-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3-7) Others
Developer unit
16
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
15,19 12 13 18 17
Fuser unit
IH unit
Main unit
23 7
9
11 1
2
3
20
10
4 5 6 8
Figure 3-30
3-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1. DU clutch 1 ........................................... Controlling drive of the duplex section.

2. DU clutch 2 ........................................... Controlling drive of the duplex section.
3. MP clutch .............................................. Control drive of the primary paper feed from the MP tray.
4. Registration clutch ................................ Control drive of the secondary paper feed from the cassette.
5. Paper feed clutch 1 ............................... Control drive of the primary paper feed from the cassette 1.
6. Paper feed clutch 2 ............................... Control drive of the primary paper feed from the cassette 2.
7. Developer clutch ................................... Control drive of the developer unit. (Black)
8. Vertical conveying clutch....................... Control drive of the conveying section from the MP tray.
9. Middle clutch ......................................... Control drive of the conveying section.
10. Cleaning solenoid ................................. Cleaning the ID sensor.
11. Container solenoid K............................. Releasing the container lock (Black).
12. Lower exit solenoid ............................... Operation of the feedshift guide.
13. Upper exit solenoid ............................... Operation of the feedshift guide.
14. HDD ...................................................... Hard disk (HDD)
15. LCD....................................................... Displaying the operation screen.
16. Eraser K ................................................ Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum.(Black)
17. Fuser thermostat................................... Prevention of the abnormal IH belt heating.
18. Speaker................................................. Generating the panel touch sound and error sound.
19. Touch Panel .......................................... Converting the operation position data.
20. Drum heater K....................................... Prevention of the drum surface condensation.
3-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-8) Part name table (other)

1 DU clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468_
2 DU clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468_
3 MP clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP 302ND9468_
4 Registration clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35 302RH4401_
5 Paper feed clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409_
6 Paper feed clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409_
7 Developer clutch DR-6500 302NK9302_
8 Vertical conveying clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302RH9409_
9 Middle clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35 302RH4401_
10 Cleaning solenoid PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302ND9414_
11 Container solenoid K SOLENOID JS 303NM4401_
12 Lower exit solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT 302K99438_
13 Upper exit solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT 302K99438_
14 HDD PARTS STORAGE DEVICE SP 302ND9318_
15 LCD PARTS LCD OPERATION SP 302RH9406_
16 Eraser K DK-8550 302ND9307_
17 Fuser thermostat FK-8550 302ND9308_
18 Speaker SPEAKER 302RH4507_
19 Touch panel PARTS TABLET OPERATION SP 302RH9407_
20 PARTS PWB DRUM HEATER ASSY
Drum heater K 302NK9409_
SP
3-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-5 Electric parts (Optional unit)

(1) Electric parts layout
17 2
13
16 19
15
1
8 7
9 11
4
3 12
14 6
10
18
Figure 3-31
1. DP PWB................................................ Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electri-
cal components.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor ........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the size of the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the size of the original length in the document proces-
sor.
7. DP feed sensor ..................................... Detecting the primary feed timing of the original in the document
processor.
8. DP registration sensor .......................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.
10. DP feedshift sensor............................... Detecting the position of the feedshift guide in the document pro-
cessor.
11. DP exit sensor....................................... Detecting paper output to the document processor.
12. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
3-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
13. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
14. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
15. DP lift motor .......................................... Drive the original paper feed lift plate of the document processor.
16. DP feed motor....................................... Drive the original feed section in the document processor.
17. DP conveying motor.............................. Drive the original conveying section in the document processor
18. DP feedshift motor ................................ Drive the original feedshift section in the document processor.
19. DP reversing motor ............................... Drive the original reversing section in the document processor.

18
21
17
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8
22
4 5
13 6
3
10
Figure 3-32
1. DP PWB................................................ Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electri-
cal components.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor ........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the size of the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the size of the original length in the document proces-
sor.
7. DP feed sensor ..................................... Detecting the primary feed timing of the original in the document
processor.
3-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Front page)
9. DP backside timing sensor ................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Back page)
10. DP exit sensor....................................... Detecting paper output to the document processor.
11. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
12. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
13. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
14. DPSHD PWB ........................................ Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
15. DPCIS ................................................... Scanning the backside original data in the document processor.
16. DP lift motor .......................................... Drive the original paper feed lift plate of the document processor.
17. DP feed motor....................................... Drive the original feed section in the document processor.
18. DP registration motor ............................ Drive the original registration section in the document processor.
19. DP conveying motor.............................. Drive the original conveying section in the document processor
20. DP exit motor ........................................ Drive the original exit section in the document processor.
21. DP drive fan motor ................................ Cool drive section in the document processor.
22. DPCIS fan motor................................... Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document Pro-
cessor (DP-7120)
3-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-3) Paper feeder (PF-7100)

1
26
11
9 19 17 22
5 15 24
6
10 3
27 12 2
8 21
13
7 23
18
20 4 25
14 16
28
Figure 3-33
1. PF PWB ................................................ Controlling drive of the electrical components in the PF.
2. PF right cover sensor............................ Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
3. PF paper sensor 1 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the upper cassette.
4. PF paper sensor 2 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the lower cassette.
5. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the upper cassette.
6. PF lower paper gauge sensor 1............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
7. PF upper paper gauge sensor 2 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
8. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the lower cassette.
9. PF paper width sensor 1 ....................... Detecting the paper width in the upper cassette.
10. PF paper width sensor 2 ....................... Detecting the paper width in the lower cassette.
11. PF paper length sensor 1...................... Detecting the paper length and presence of upper cassette.
12. PF paper length sensor 2...................... Detecting the paper length and presence of lower cassette.
13. PF retard sensor 1 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of upper cassette.
14. PF retard sensor 2 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of lower cassette.
15. PF conveying sensor 1 ......................... Detecting paper jam at the upper paper conveying section.
16. PF conveying sensor 2 ......................... Detecting paper jam at the lower paper conveying section.
17. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the upper cassette
is activated.
18. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the lower cassette
is activated.
19. PF lift motor 1........................................ Driving the lift plate of the upper cassette.
20. PF lift motor 2........................................ Driving the lift plate of the lower cassette.
21. PF feed motor ....................................... Drive the paper feed section.
22. PF feed clutch 1 .................................... Control drive of the primary paper feeding from the upper cas-
sette.
23. PF feed clutch 2 .................................... Control drive of the primary paper feeding from the lower cas-
sette.
24. PF conveying clutch 1........................... Control drive of paper conveying section from the upper cassette.
3-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
25. PF conveying clutch 2........................... Control drive of paper conveying section from the lower cassette.
26. PF cassette sensor 1 ............................ Detecting presence of the upper cassette.
27. PF cassette sensor 2 ............................ Detecting presence of the lower cassette.
28. PF cassette heater................................ Dehumidifying paper.
(1-4) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110)
1
19
14
4 21
20
16 11
18
7 22
8 17
10 24 12 2
13
5
15
3
6
9 23
25
Figure 3-34
2. PF right cover sensor............................ Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
3. PF paper sensor 1 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the right cassette.
4. PF paper sensor 2 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the left cassette.
5. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
6. PF lower paper gauge sensor 1............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
7. PF upper paper gauge sensor 2 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
8. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
9. PF retard sensor 1 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of right cassette.
10. PF retard sensor 2 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of left cassette.
11. PF horizontal conveying sensor............ Detecting paper jam at the horizontal paper conveying section.
12. PF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting paper jam at the vertical paper conveying section.
13. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the right cassette is
activated.
14. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 .................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the left cassette is
activated.
15. PF lift motor 1........................................ Driving the lift plate of the right cassette.
16. PF lift motor 2........................................ Driving the lift plate of the left cassette.
17. PF feed motor ....................................... Drive the paper feed section.
18. PF feed right clutch 1 ............................ Controlling drive of the primary paper feed from the right cassette.
3-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
19. PF feed left clutch 2 .............................. Controlling drive of the primary paper feed from the left cassette.
20. PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 .......... Control drive of the right horizontal paper conveying section.
21. PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 .......... Control drive of the right horizontal paper conveying section.
22. PF vertical conveying clutch ................. Control drive of the vertical paper conveying section.
23. PF cassette sensor 1 ............................ Detecting presence of the right cassette.
24. PF cassette sensor 2 ............................ Detecting presence of the left cassette.
3-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-5) Side feeder (PF-7120)
13 9
2
11
5
10 8
1
7
12
3
6
4
14
Figure 3-35

2. PF paper sensor ................................... Detecting presence of paper in the cassette.
3. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette.
4. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette.
5. PF lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when the lift plate of the cassette is acti-
vated.
6. PF lift lower limit sensor ........................ Detecting the lower limit when the lift plate of the cassette is acti-
vated.
7. PF lift motor........................................... Driving the lift plate of the cassette.
8. PF conveying motor .............................. Control drive of the paper conveying section.
9. PF feed clutch ....................................... Controlling drive of the primary paper feed from the cassette.
10. PF paper feed solenoid......................... Switching the paper feeding section.
11. PF feed sensor...................................... Detecting the paper jam at paper feeding section
12. PF cassette sensor ............................... Detecting the insertion of the cassette.
13. PF connection sensor ........................... Detecting the connection between PF and the main unit
3-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)
7
6
9 10
11
1 8
5 4
21 17
18 15 23
25 20
19
27
12 24
13
22
16
26
14 3 2
Figure 3-36
1. DF PWB ................................................ Control operation of each electrical components.
2. DF staple relay PWB............................. Relaying the staple unit control signals.
3. DF front cover sensor ........................... Blocking the 24 V power line when the right cover is open and
reset interlock switch.
4. DF paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting presence of paper at the paper entry section.
5. DF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting the adjusting DF plate front home position.
6. DF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting the adjusting DF plate rear home position.
7. DF adjusting sensor .............................. Detecting the paper guides home position.
8. DF bundle exit sensor ........................... Detecting the bundle exit unit position.
9. DF exit sensor....................................... Detecting presence of paper at the exit section.
10. DF paper press sensor 1 ...................... Detecting the bundle exit paper pressure.(Upper limit)
11. DF paper press sensor 2 ...................... Detecting the bundle exit paper pressure.(Lower limit)
12. DF paddle sensor.................................. Detecting the paddle home position.
13. DF tray sensor ...................................... Detecting lower limit of the exit tray.
14. DF slide sensor ..................................... Detecting the staple unit slide position.
15. DF paper entry motor............................ Drive of the entry roller.
16. DF middle motor ................................... Driving of the middle roller.
17. DF paddle motor ................................... Drive of the paper feed guides.
18. DF exit release motor............................ Drive of the bundle exit unit.
19. DF side registration motor 1.................. DF side registration motor 1
20. DF side registration motor 2.................. Drive of the DF rear adjusting plate.
21. DF exit motor ........................................ Drive of the exit roller.
22. DF tray motor ........................................ Ascending and descending drive of the exit tray.
23. DF slide motor....................................... Sliding drive of the staple unit.
24. DF staple unit........................................ Staple of paper.
25. DF paper press solenoid....................... Switching the bundle exit paper pressure.
3-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
26. DF connection sensor ........................... DF connection detection with the main unit (connection detec-
tion).
27. DF release LED .................................... Lighting up when releasing the inner finisher.
(1-7) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130)
2 6
3 1
7
9 10 4
Figure 3-37
1. PH PWB................................................ Controlling the electrical components of the punch unit

2. PH home position sensor...................... Detecting home position of the PH cam
3. PH pulse sensor.................................... Controlling the rotation of the PH cam
4. PH tank full sensor (Emitter) ................. Detecting the punch dust tank full.
5. PH tank full sensor (Receiver) .............. Detecting the punch dust tank full.
6. PH paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting presence of paper at the paper entry section.
7. PH tank set sensor................................ Detecting the presence of the punch dust tank.
8. PH motor............................................... Driving of the PH
9. PH solenoid........................................... Switching the punch holes.(Except 100 V model)
10. PH tank solenoid................................... Shifting the punch waste tank.
3-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-8) Attachment kit (AK-7100)
4
1 5
2 3
Figure 3-38
1. BR PWB................................................ Controlling drive of the electrical components in the Bridge.

2. BR cover sensor ................................... Detecting opening/closing of the bridge cover.
3. BR conveying sensor 1 ......................... Detecting paper conveyed in the bridge.(right side)
4. BR conveying sensor 2 ......................... Detecting paper conveyed in the bridge.(left side)
5. BR conveying motor.............................. Control drive of the paper conveying to the bridge.
6. BR job separator sensor ....................... Detecting paper output to the job separator.
3-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-9) 4000-sheet finisher (DF-7110)
24 39
41 26 23 32 27 36
47 30
49 29
48
31
45
16
25
3 40 13 44
28 14 11 12 42
34 10 17 7
37 35
8 18
5 43
38
22 6
15 9 33
2
46 19
1
4
21
20
Figure 3-39
3-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3. DF operation PWB ................................ Consisting of LEDs and keys.
4. DF front cover sensor ........................... Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
5. DF exit cover sensor ............................. Detecting opening/closing of the exit cover.
7. DF middle sensor.................................. Detecting presence of paper in the conveying section.
12. DF drum sensor .................................... Paper detection at the relief drum.
15. DF tray upper surface sensor 1 ............ Detecting front side of paper at the main tray.
17. DF tray sensor 1 ................................... Detecting home position of the exit tray.
19. DF tray sensor 3 ................................... Detecting middle position of the exit tray.
20. DF tray sensor 4 ................................... Detecting lower limit of the exit tray.
21. DF tray sensor 5 ................................... Detecting lower limit of the exit tray.(when the folding unit is
installed)
23. DF shift set sensor ................................ Detecting the shift guide home position.
24. DF shift release sensor ......................... Detecting the shift guide release position.
25. DF shift sensor 1................................... Detecting the front shift plate home position.
26. DF shift sensor2.................................... Detecting the rear shift plate home position.
27. DF sub exit sensor ................................ Detecting paper output to the tray B.
28. DF sub tray full sensor .......................... Detecting full that output to the tray B.
35. DF relief drum motor ............................. Drive of the relief drum.
39. DF shift release motor........................... Detecting the shift guide release position.
40. DF shift motor 1 .................................... Drive of the rear shift guide.
41. DF shift motor 2 .................................... Drive of the front shift guide.
42. DF Feedshift solenoid 1 ........................ Switching the feedshift guide.
45. DF exit clutch ........................................ Drive transmission of the exit roller.
47. DF exit fan motor 1 ............................... Cooling the exit paper.(rear) (not connected)
48. DF exit fan motor 2 ............................... Cooling the exit paper.(front) (not connected)
49. DF exit fan motor 3 ............................... Cooling the exit paper.(center) (not connected)
3-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-10) 1000-sheet finisher (DF-7120)

26
24
9
11 22
4
14 23
19
8 10
12 15
25
21
6 16 27
20
13 7
17
18 1
5
28 2
Figure 3-40
3-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3. DF front cover sensor ........................... Detecting opening/closing of the right cover.
4. DF top cover sensor.............................. Detecting opening/closing of the top cover.
6. DF middle sensor.................................. Detecting presence of paper in the conveying section.
16. DF tray sensor 2 ................................... Detecting middle position of the exit tray.
17. DF tray sensor 3 ................................... Detecting lower limit of the exit tray.
3-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-11) Mailbox (MT-730(B))
3
4 1
10
5
6
7
8
9
2
13
11
12
Figure 3-41
1. MT PWB................................................ Controlling electrical components of the mailbox.

2. MT cover sensor ................................... Detecting opening/closing of the mail box cover.
3. MT tray sensor 1 ................................... Detecting overflow of paper output to the tray 1.
10. MT tray exit sensor 1 (photo receptor) .. Detecting paper jam.
11. MT tray exit sensor 2 (photo emitter) .... Emitting LED pulses.
12. MT home position sensor...................... Controlling drive motor in the mailbox.
13. MT conveying motor ............................. Paper conveying drive of the mail box.
3-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-12) Punch unit (PH-7)
4
2
3
7 10
11
8
5
6 1
Figure 3-42
1. PH PWB................................................ Controlling the electrical components of the punch unit

2. PH home position sensor...................... Detecting home position of the PH cam
3. PH pulse sensor.................................... Controlling the rotation of the PH cam
4. PH slide sensor..................................... Detecting home position of the punch unit.
5. PH tank full sensor................................ Detecting the punch dust tank full.
6. PH paper edge sensor 1 ....................... Detecting the position of the front edge of paper.
7. PH paper edge sensor 2 ....................... Detecting the position of the front edge of paper.
8. PH tank set sensor................................ Detecting the presence of the punch dust tank.
9. PH motor............................................... Driving of the PH
10. PH slide motor ...................................... Driving of the punch unit.
11. PH solenoid........................................... Switching the punch holes.(Except 100 V model)
3-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-13) Folding unit (BF-730)
22 16
12
23
13
6 10
8
3 9
4
19
2 7 21
17
18
11 20 1
15
14
Figure 3-43
1. BF PWB ................................................ Controlling the electrical components of the folding unit.
2. BF tray sensor....................................... Detecting opening/closing of the BF tray.
3. BF left cover sensor .............................. Detecting opening/closing of the BF left cover.
4. BF paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
5. BF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting presence of paper on the BF bridge section.
6. BF paper sensor ................................... Detecting presence of paper on the folding unit.
7. BF adjusting sensor 1 ........................... Detecting home position of the lower BF moving plate.
8. BF adjusting sensor 2 ........................... Detecting home position of the upper BF moving plate.
9. BF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting home position of the BF side registration guide.
10. BF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting home position of the BF side registration guide.
11. BF blade sensor.................................... Detecting home position of the BF blade.
12. BF exit sensor ....................................... Detecting paper output to the BF tray.
13. BF tray full sensor ................................. Detecting paper full on the BF tray.
14. BF set sensor........................................ Detecting the folding unit.
15. BF main motor ...................................... Drive of the paper conveying in the holding unit.
16. BF paper entry motor ............................ Drive of the entry roller.
17. BF blade motor ..................................... Drive of the BF blade.
18. BF adjusting motor 1............................. Drive of the lower adjusting plate in the folding unit.
19. BF adjusting motor 2............................. Drive of the upper adjusting plate in the folding unit.
20. BF side registration motor 1.................. Detecting home position of the lower BF side registration guide.
21. BF side registration motor 2.................. Detecting home position of the upper BF side registration guide.
22. BF staple motor..................................... Drive of the BF staple.
23. BF feedshift solenoid ............................ Operation of the BF feedshift guide.
3-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-14) Job separator (JS-7100)
Figure 3-44
1. JS sensor .............................................. Detecting presence of paper on the job separator tray.
3-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-6 Drive system

(1) Consisting of unit drive
(1)Feed/conveying drive Toner motor K
Paper feed motor 1. Toner supply K
1. Paper feed roller
2. Paper feed roller (5)Fuser drive
3. MP paper feed roller Fuser motor
4. Vertical conveying roller 1. Fuser heater belt
5. Middle roller
6. registration roller Fuser pressure release motor
7. Secondary transfer roller 1. Fuser pressure release
8. DU conveying roller
(6)Container drive
(2)Drum drive K Container motor
Drum motor K 1. Toner container
1. Drum K
(3)Developer K / Transfer belt drive

Developer K / Transfer belt motor
1. Developer sleeve roller K
2. Transfer belt drive roller
Belt release motor

1. Transfer belt release
(4)Toner supply drive
3-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Feed/conveying drive
Secondary transfer roller
Registration roller left
Middle roller
Registration clutch
Paper feed motor
Middle clutch
Paper feed clutch 1
Vertical conveying clutch
Paper feed clutch 2
Paper feed roller
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Retard roller
Vertical conveying roller
Pickup roller
Cassette1
Cassette2
Figure 3-45
3-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
MP drive
MP paper feed roller
Paper feed motor
MP clutch
MP tray
MP lift motor
Figure 3-46
Drum drive
Drum motor K
Main drive unit
Drum K
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Drum unit K
Figure 3-47
3-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Developer drive
Sleeve roller K

࣋ࣝࢺ㞳㛫࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Developer clutch
Main drive unit
Developer unit K
Figure 3-48
Primary transfer drive
Primary transfer roller K
Main drive unit
Belt release motor
Belt cleaning motor

Transfer belt drive roller
Figure 3-49
3-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Fuser/ Exit/ Duplex drive
Exit reversing motor
Upper exit roller
Lower exit roller
Exit conveying roller
Fuser motor
Fuser pressure release motor
Fuser heater belt
Fuser press roller
Paper feed motor
Duplex clutch 2
Duplex clutch 1
DU conveying middle roller
DU conveying lower roller
DU registration roller
DU conveying upper roller
IH core motor
Figure 3-50
3-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(2) Drive location
9
8
7 11
10
6
Feed drive unit

1. Paper feed motor Fuser drive unit
2. Paper feed clutch 1 9. Fuser motor
3. Vertical conveying clutch 10. Fuser pressure release motor
4. Paper feed clutch 2
Toner supply drive unit
Main drive unit 11. Toner motor K
5. Drum motor K
6. Developer K / Transfer belt motor
7. Belt release motor
8. Container motor
3-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Drive unit

(3-1) Feed drive unit
Figure 3-51
(3-2) Main drive unit
Figure 3-52
3-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-3) Toner supply drive unit
Figure 3-53
(3-4) Fuser drive unit
Figure 3-54
3-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3-7 Mechanical construction

(1) Paper feed and conveying section
The paper feed and conveying section consists of the cassette paper feed section and the MP tray paper
feed section, and the paper conveying section conveying the fed paper to the transfer and separate sec-
tion.
(1-1) Cassette feed section

The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80 g/m2). The cassette forwards
paper by rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to the paper conveying section by rotating the paper feed
roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
[Components parts]
8 7 62 3 1 4
1. Paper feed roller
2. Pickup roller
3. Pickup holder
4. Retard roller
5. Retard holder 13
6. Friction pad
7. Lift plate 12 5 1
8. Paper width guides 23
6
9. Paper length guide 8 14
10. Cassette base 7
11. Paper width guide release 4
lever
12. Actuator (paper sensor)
12
13. Vertical conveying roller 5
14. Vertical conveying pulley
Figure 3-55
3-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9
8
10
3
12
8 1
7
2
12
11
4
13
2
14
1
4
Figure 3-56
3-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Feed drive PWB

Cassette sensor 2 YC5-B11
Cassette sensor 1 YC5-A1
Paper width sensor 1 YC5-A7
Paper width sensor 2 YC5-B3
Lower paper gauge sensor 1 YC5-A14
Upper paper gauge sensor 1 YC5-A11
YC5-A15
Lift motor 1
YC5-A16
Paper sensor 1 YC6-B9
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DU clutch 2 YC7-A3
Paper feed clutch 1 YC4-1
Lift upper limit sensor 1 YC6-B6
Vertical conveying clutch YC4-3
Paper feed clutch 2 YC4-5
PF lift upper limit sensor 2 YC6-B12
Paper sensor 2 YC6-12
Conveying sensor YC6-B3
YC5-B1
Lift motor 2
YC5-B2
Upper paper gauge sensor 2 YC5-B7
Lower paper gauge sensor 2 YC5-B10
Retard sensor 2 YC6-A10
Retard sensor 1 YC6-A7
YC5-A3
Paper length sensor 1 YC5-A5
YC5-A6
YC5-B13
Paper length sensor 2 YC5-B15
YC5-B16
Figure 3-57
3-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) MP tray paper feed section

The MP tray can load 150 sheets paper (80 g/m2). The paper on the MP tray is fed by rotating the MP
paper feed roller while lifting up the MP lift plate by the MP solenoid. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the
effect of the MP retard roller.
[Components parts] 3 1 6 9 5
1. MP paper feed roller
2. MP Retard roller
3. MP Retard guide
4. MP Retard holder
5. MP lift plate
6. MP friction pad
7. MP tray
8. MP frame
9. MP paper width guides
10. Actuator (MP paper sensor )
11. Sub tray
12. Actuator (MP paper length
sensor)
2 11
Figure 3-58
11
9
1
3
5 4
12
2 6 13
9 3
Figure 3-59
3-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
MP position sensor YC8-
MP clutch YC7-A5
MP paper sensor YC8-9
MP paper width sensor YC7-A8
MP paper length sensor YC7-A14
Feed Drive PWB
MP conveying sensor YC8-11

MP tray sensor YC7-A10
YC8-1
MP lift motor YC8-2
Figure 3-60
3-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-3) Paper conveying section

The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer and separation section when the paper is fed
from the cassette or the MP tray, or re-fed in the duplex print. The fed paper is conveyed to where it turns
the registration sensor on by the middle roller or the MP conveying roller, and then, conveyed to the trans-
fer and separation section by the registration front and rear rollers.
[Components parts]
1. Middle roller
2. Middle pulley 4 5
3. Registration guide sheet 3
4. Registration roller left 6
5. Registration roller right
6. Registration guide 7
7. Conveying frame 2
1
Figure 3-61
2
1
6
3
Figure 3-62
3-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Belt roll-up sensor YC7-B5
Registration clutch YC9-13
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Middle clutch YC6-A4
Registration sensor YC6-A2
DU sensor 2 YC7-B9
Feed drive PWB
Figure 3-63
3-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Optical section

The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning the original and the laser scanner
section to write the image.
(2-1) Image scanner section

The image on the original is exposed by the exposure lamp and that reflection light is scanned by the CCD
image sensor on the CCD PWB via three mirrors and the ISU lens to change the electric signal.
When using the document processor, the mirror unit A stops at the original scanning position (slit glass)
and scans the image from the original conveyed in the document processor.
8 5 9 3 6 1 12
8 16 7 15 2
Figure 3-64
[Components parts]
1. CCD 9. Exposure lamp
2. Scanner frame 10. Drive motor
3. Contact glass 11. Scanner wire
4. Original size indicator 12. Scanner wire drum
5. Slit glass 13. Original size sensor
6. ISU lens 14. Home position sensor
7. Mirror A 15. Mirror unit A
8. Mirror B 16. Mirror unit B
Figure 3-65
3-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5
4 14
9
7
3
13
10
11 6
1
2
12
Figure 3-66
3-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Home position sensor YC16-A12
YC16-A2
YC16-A3
Scanner motor
YC16-A4
YC16-A5
Original size timing sensor YC16-A6

Lens
Original size sensor YC16-10
CCD PWB YC36
LED PWB
Engine PWB
Figure 3-67
3-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Laser scanner unit

The charged drum surface is scanned by the laser emitted from the laser scanner units. The laser reflects
to the polygon mirrors by rotating the polygon motor so that the laser scans horizontally to the image. The
laser scanner unit has some lenses and mirrors, that adjust the diameter of the laser to focus the laser to
the drum surface. Also, the LSU cleaning motor operates to automatically clean the LSU glass.
[Components parts]
1. Polygon motor
Drum
2. fθ lens A
3. fθ lens B
4. LSU glass
5. LSU base 6 4
6. Mirror
7. Laser emitting diode
8. Collimator lens
9. LD slit glass plate
10. LD mirror
11. Cylindrical lens
12. PD PWB
13. PD lens 5 1 2 3 7
14. PD mirror
Figure 3-68
9 8 7
12
11 13 14
1
2 10
6 3
Figure 3-69
3-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
YC9 YC27
YC1 YC3
PD PWB YC4
LSU cleaning motor YC6-1

YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
Figure 3-70
3-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Developer section

(3-1) Developer unit
The developer section consists of the magnet roller forming the magnetic brush, the sleeve roller forming
the thin layer by replacing the toner, the developer blade, and the developer screw mixing up the toner.
The toner density is adjusted by impressing the bias to the magnet roller and the sleeve roller. The toner
amount inside the developer unit is detected by the toner sensor.
[Components parts]
1. Sleeve roller
%
2. Magnet roller 6 2 1
3. Developer blade
4. Developer screw A
5. Developer screw B
6. Developer case
7. Toner sensor
8. Drum
5 7 4 3
Figure 3-71
5
4
2
3
Figure 3-72
3-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias
Main high-voltage PWB YC34
YC33
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer K / Transfer belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Feed image PWB
Developer clutch YC23-4
T/C sensor K
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
Vibration motor
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Developer PWB K YC2
Drum relay PWB
Figure 3-73
3-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Drum section

The drum section consists of the drum, the main charger unit, and the cleaning unit. The drum surface is
evenly charged to prepare forming the electrical latent image by emitting the laser.
(4-1) Main charger unit

The charged roller with the electric charge contacts the drum surface and rotates to charge the drum
evenly.
(4-2) Cleaning
The remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected
to the waste toner box by the drum screw. The eraser consists of the LED lamp, and it removes the
remaining electric charge on the drum before the main charge.
[Components parts] 3 5 6 8
1. MC roller
2. MC cleaning roller
3. Drum
4. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade
6. Cleaning roller
7. Drum screw
8. Eraser
1 2 7
Figure 3-74
2
1
5
6
Figure 3-75
3-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage YC34
Main high-voltage PWB
YC33
Feed image PWB
YC24-1
YC24-2
Drum motor K
YC24-3
YC24-4
Drum relay PWB

᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Cleaning lamp K
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Drum PWB K YC10
Drum heater
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK YC6
Figure 3-76
3-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Transfer and separation section

(5-1) Primary transfer unit
The primary transfer section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt and primary transfer roller
facing the drum. When printing the image, the toner image formed on the drum is transferred on the transfer
belt by impressing the bias to the primary transfer roller facing the drum, and then the toner image is formed.
Also, the ID sensor attached to the main unit measures the toner density on the transfer belt.
The transfer cleaning unit collects the remaining toner on the transfer belt after the secondary transferring,
and forwards it to the waste toner box as waste toner.
[Components parts]
1. Drive roller
2. Backup roller 8 7 6 5 3 1
3. Primary transfer roller
4. Tension roller
5. Transfer belt
6. Belt pre-brush
7. Cleaning fur brush
8. Cleaning roller
9. Cleaning screw
10. Cleaning blade
10 9 4 2 12
11. Transfer unit cover (B)
12. Drum
Figure 3-77
2
9
8
4
7 3
10
1
11
Figure 3-78
3-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
YC34
Transfer high-voltage
Transfer bias
PWB
Engine PWB
Belt release sensor YC23-7
YC23-1
Belt release motor
YC23-2
Feed image PWB
YC24-13
Developer K / YC24-14
Transfer belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Transfer connect
PWB
Belt thermistor YC2-1

Transfer PWB
YC3-3
Belt cleaning motor
YC3-4
Figure 3-79
3-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-2) Secondary transfer roller unit

The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller attached to the paper conveying
unit, the discharge needle and etc.. The DC bias from the high-voltage PWB (HVPWB) is impressed to the
secondary transfer roller, and the toner image formed on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper by the
potential gap. After transferring, the paper is separated by self stripping and the electric charge on the paper is
removed by the separation brush contacting the ground.
[Components parts]
1. Secondary transfer roller
2
2. Discharger needle
3. Transfer front guide
4. Transfer spring
3 1 4
Figure 3-80
3 4
Figure 3-81
3-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Transfer Bias Transfer T2_OFF_REM

high-voltage T2_CNT YC34-A10
Separate bias T_REM YC34-A13
PWB YC34-A14
Figure 3-82
3-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Fuser section

Paper conveyed from the transfer / separation section is caught in between the fuser heater belt and the
fuser pressure roller. Since the fuser heater belt is heated by IH and the fuser pressure roller pressed by
the fuser pressure spring is pressed, the toner is thermally melted by heat and pressure and then fused to
paper.
The surface temperature of the fuser heater belt and the fuser pressure roller is detected by the fuser
thermistor and controlled by the Engine PWB.
(6-1) Fuser unit

[Components parts]
1. Fuser heater belt 9 8
2. IH core
7
3. Fuser thermistor
4. Separator
5. Fuser press roller 2 4
6. Fuser press roller separation 3
5
claw
7. Actuator (Fuser sensor) 11
8. Fuser exit roller
9. Fuser exit sub roller 13 12
10. Pressure switching cam
11. Fuser frame
12. Fuser front guide
13. Fuser discharger needle 1
Figure 3-83
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
3-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 3-84
3-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC10-2
YC2-1 Fuser motor
YC10-3
YC3-1
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high voltage Fuser pressure release motor
YC10-8
PWB
Feed drive PWB
FSR-1
Fuser thermostat
Feed image PWB
Rear belt rotation sensor YC22-16
Fuser thermistor 1 YC22-13
YC22
Fuser pressure release sensor YC2-11
Fuser jam sensor YC2-6
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
IH position sensor YC32-B8
YC32-B9
YC32-B10
IH core motor
YC32-B11
YC32-B12
Figure 3-85
3-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(7) Exit feedshift section

The exit feedshift section consists of the paper path from the fuser section to the inner tray or the duplex
conveying section.
(7-1) Exit unit

1
[Components parts]
1. Upper exit roller
10
2. Upper exit pulley 2
3. Lower exit roller 9 8
4. Lower exit pulley 7
5. Exit conveying roller 5
6. Exit conveying pulley 3 6
7. Reversing guide
8. Reversing guide pulley 10
9
4
9. Actuator (Exit paper full sensor) 9
10. Exit feedshift guide
11. Exit guide pulley 7
12. Actuator (Exit reversing sen-
sor)
Figure 3-86
8
2 7
9
1
9
4
10
5
6
12
11
Figure 3-87
3-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Feed image PWB
Upper exit full sensor YC17-A10
Lower exit full sensor YC17-A7
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
Exit reversing motor
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
Exit reversing sensor YC17-A19
YC17-1A5
Upper exit solenoid
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower exit solenoid
YC17-A13
Figure 3-88
3-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7-2) Exit paper jam

Stretch the exit level lever if the next output paper is caught up by paper output to the exit tray.
1. Stretch the exit level lever (c) on the exit

actuator if the leading edge of the next b b
output paper is caught up by the trailing a c
edge (a) of the output paper.
2. Pushes down the trailing edge (a) of out- a

put paper to prevent the (b) leading edge
of next paper from being caught up.
Figure 3-89
In case of stretching the exit level lever
Figure 3-90
In case of restoring the exit level lever
Figure 3-91
3-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
(8) Duplex conveying section

(8-1) Duplex conveying unit
The duplex conveying section consists of the paper conveying path to forward the paper from the exit feed-
shift section in the duplex print to the paper conveying section.
[Components parts] 1
1. DU conveying upper roller
2. DU conveying upper pulley
9
3. DU conveying middle roller
2
4. DU conveying middle pulley 12
5. DU conveying lower roller 3
6. DU conveying lower pulley 4
7. DU registration roller
8. DU registration pulley
9. Actuator (DU sensor 1)
10. Actuator (DU sensor 2) 6
11. DU conveying base 5
12. DU conveying guide 4
11
10
7
8
Figure 3-92
1
9
3
2 4
12
5
6
10
11
7
8
Figure 3-93
3-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
Conveying open/close sensor YC7-B13
Duplex sensor 1 YC7-B12
Feed drive PWB
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Duplex clutch 2 YC7-A3
Duplex clutch 1 YC7-A1
Duplex sensor 2 YC7-B9
Figure 3-94
3-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3-8 Mechanical construction (option)

(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100)
The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80 g/m2) and consists of 2 cas-
settes. Paper from the cassette is picked up by rotating the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit
by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
14 3 4
2 1 12
9 10 8 7
13
15
5
12
13
15
1
4
5
2
9 10 8 7 14 3
Figure 3-95
[Components parts]
1. PF feed roller 9. PF paper length guide

2. PF Pickup roller 10. PF cassette base
3. PF Pickup holder 11. PF paper width guide release lever
4. PF retard roller 12. PF conveying roller
5. PF retard holder 13. PF conveying pulley
6. PF friction pad 14. PF actuator (PF paper sensor)
7. PF lift plate 15. PF actuator (PF conveying sensor)
8. PF paper width guide
3-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
8
9 12
7 13
14
2
11 4
6 1
Figure 3-96
8
9 7
14
2
12
13
4
8 1
6
11
Figure 3-97
3-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
[Block diagram]
PF PWB
YC3-11
PF paper length sensor 1 YC3-13
YC3-15
PF paper width sensor 1 YC3-17
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
PF conveying sensor 1 YC4-6
PF paper sensor 1 YC3-3
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 YC4-3
PF feed clutch 1 YC9-3
PF conveying clutch 1 YC9-1
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
PF conveying clutch 2 YC9-5
PF feed clutch 2 YC9-7
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF paper sensor 2 YC5-3
PF conveying sensor 2 YC4-14
PF paper width sensor 2 YC5-17
YC5-11
PF paper length sensor 2 YC5-13
YC5-15
Figure 3-98
3-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110)

(2-1) Cassette section
The cassette can load 1650 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 1500 sheets paper (80 g/m2). For feeding from the
cassette, paper is pulled out by the rotation of the pickup roller, and is conveyed to the main unit by the
rotation of the feed roller / conveying roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
1 1 10
[Components parts]
9 8 7 2 4 13 2 4 11
1. PF feed roller
2. PF Pickup roller
3. PF Pickup holder
4. PF retard roller
5. PF retard holder
6. PF friction pad 12 3
7. PF lift plate 5 12 3 14
8. PF paper width guide 5
9. PF paper length guide*1
10. PF conveying roller
11. PF conveying pulley
12. PF actuator (PF paper sen-
sor)
13. PF actuator (PF horizontal
conveying sensor)
14. PF actuator (PF vertical conveying sensor)
*1: Metric specification only
Figure 3-99
8
9
12
4
9 1 8 13
2 10
8 11 14
9
8
9 11 1
2
8 12
8
10
4
6
7
Figure 3-100
3-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
[Block diagram]
PF feed left clutch 2 YC9-7
PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 YC9-9
PF horizontal conveying sensor YC4-14
PF vertical conveying sensor YC4-6
PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 YC9-5
PF feed right clutch 1 YC9-3
PF vertical conveying clutch YC9-1
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF PWB
Figure 3-101
3-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Side feeder (PF-7120)

The cassette can load 3500 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 3000 sheets paper (80 g/m2). For feeding from the
cassette, paper is pulled out by the rotation of the pickup roller, and is conveyed to the main unit by the
rotation of the feed roller / conveying roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
[Components parts]
9 1 3 2 7 6 8
1. PF feed roller
2. PF Pickup roller
3. PF Pickup holder 10
4. PF retard roller
4
5. PF friction pad
6. PF lift plate
7. PF paper width guide 11
8. PF paper length guide 5
9. PF conveying roller
10. PF conveying pulley
11. PF actuator (PF paper sen-
sor)
Figure 3-102
1 7
9
10 8
4 2 6
5
7
Figure 3-103
3-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
PF feed clutch YC15-1
YC18-1
YC18-2
PF conveying motor YC18-4
YC18-5
YC18-6
PF PWB
YC8-1
PF lift motor
YC8-2
PF lift upper limit sensor YC5-16
PF lift lower limit sensor YC6-9
YC5-9
PF paper feed solenoid
YC5-10
Figure 3-104
3-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(4) Document Processor (DP-7100)

(4-1) Original paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the original tray to
the original conveying section. The original is fed by rotating the DP pickup roller and the DP feed belt.
[Components parts]
1. DP pick up roller
2. DP feed belt
11 12 2 3 5 7 13
3. DP feed holder
4. DP retard roller 10 4 1 8
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original sensor
7. DP original width guide
8. DP original tray
9. DP feed sensor
10. DP registration roller
11. DP registration pulley
12. DP actuator (DP registration
sensor) 9 6
13. DP actuator (DP original length
sensor)
Figure 3-105
2
13
12
11
8
1
4
6
8
9 12
Figure 3-106
3-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-2) Original conveying section and exit section

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The conveyed original is scanned at the
optical section (CCD) in the main unit when passing the DP slit glass.
The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The original already scanned is output to
the original exit table by the exit roller. When scanning the original in the duplex reversing mode, the origi-
nal is conveyed to the reversing tray once and then re-conveyed to the original conveying section by the
reversing roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP conveying pulley 1 6 8 9
3. DP scanning guide
4. DP scanning guide pulley
6. DP conveying pulley 2
7. DP feedshift guide
8. DP reversing roller
9. DP reversing pulley 14
10. DP feedshift roller
11. DP feedshift pulley
12. DP exit roller
13. DP exit pulley
14. DP exit tray
1 3 6 11 15 13
2 4 5 7 10 12
15. DP actuator
(DP exit sensor)
Figure 3-107
3-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5
3
1 4
8
2 9
15 13 14
10 12
8 11
Figure 3-108
3-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DP timing sensor YC7-5
YC9-9
YC9-10
DP conveying motor YC9-12
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP lift motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DP lift lower limit sensor YC7-12
YC11-5
YC11-6
DP reversing motor YC11-8
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP exit sensor YC17-3
DP original width sensor YC6-5
DP original length sensor YC6-3
DP feed sensor YC4-2
DP registration sensor YC7-3
DP lift upper limit sensor YC16-8
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP feedshift motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
DP feedshift sensor YC16-5
Figure 3-109
3-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-3) Dual Reverse Scan
2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
Conveyed to the DP switchback

2
3
tray by the DP switchback feedshift
guide. DP switchback roller
DP switchback tray
1
DP switchback feedshift guide
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
The second side of original is 2

3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is
conveyed to the DP switchback tray. DP switchback tray
1
Slit glass: second side scanning
Ejected to the original eject table

DP regist roller
by the DP switchback, DP
feedshift and DP eject rollers. DP switchback roller
2
3 1
DP eject roller
Original eject table
DP conveying roller DP feedshift roller
Figure 3-110
3-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Document Processor(DP-7110)

(5-1) Original paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the original tray to
the original conveying section. The original is fed by rotating the DP pickup pulley and the DP feed roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP pick up roller
2. DP paper feed belt
11 10 2
3. DP belt tension pulley
12 9 8 3 1 7 6 13 14
4. DP retard roller
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original width guide
7. DP lift plate
8. DP feed sensor
9. DP registration roller
10. DP registration pulley
13. DP original tray
14. DP original length sensor 4 5
Figure 3-111
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
Figure 3-112
3-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-2) Original conveying section and exit section

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The 2nd side of the conveyed original is
scanned when passing the CIS and the 1st side at the optical section (CCD) in the main unit when passing the
DP slit glass. The original already scanned is output to the original exit table by the exit roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP backside timing sensor 32 1
2. DPCIS
3. DPCIS roller
6. DP scanner guide pulley
7. DP scanner guide
9. DP conveying pulley 3 13
10. DP actuator
(DP exit sensor)
11. DP exit roller
12. DP exit pulley
13. DP exit tray
5 4 6 8 10 12
7 9 11
Figure 3-113
2
3
6 4
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
Figure 3-114
3-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
[Block diagram]
DP backside timing sensor YC7-5
DPSHD PWB
DP feed sensor YC7-5
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP PWB
DP original length sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP exit motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
DP original width sensor YC6-3
DP lift upper limit sensor YC2-10
DP lift lower limit sensor YC4-2
DP exit sensor YC16-8
DP timing sensor YC16-5
Figure 3-115
3-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)

(6-1) Paper conveying section
The conveying section consists of the parts as shown below. Paper on the middle tray is transferred after
adjusting the side registration by moving the DF side registration guides in the staple and sort modes.
[Components parts] 18 12 11 10 7 8 9 5 3 4
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF conveying roller 13
4. DF conveying pulley
5. DF entry sensor 14
6. DF paper stopper
7. DF Middle roller 2
8. DF Middle pulley
1
9. DF paddle
10. DF upper guide
11. DF paper width guides
12. DF bundle exit unit
13. DF exit roller 15 17 6 16
14. DF exit pulley
Figure 3-116
15. DF actuator
(DF paper holding sensor)
16. DF stapler
17. DF middle tray
18. DF tray
3-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18 13
8
7
14
4
9
2 1
16
Figure 3-117
3-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DF bundle eject sensor YC19-18
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
DF side registration sensor 1 YC19-6
YC13-2
DF Paper press solenoid
YC13-3
DF exit paper sensor YC16-3
DF Paper press sensor 2 YC19-24
DF Paper press sensor 1 YC19-21
DF paper entry sensor YC17-5
DF Side registration sensor 2 YC19-3
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF adjusting sensor YC19-27
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF Side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF Side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
DF staple unit
DF staple reley PWB YC10
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF paper entry motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
DF paddle sensor YC17-3
DF slide sensor YC19-30
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF exit release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF middle motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
DF PWB
Figure 3-118
3-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-2) Bundle exit operation

1st sheet
a
1. By rotating the DF entry roller and DF
middle roller (a), paper is conveyed to
the process section and then conveyed
to the DF tray (b).
Figure 3-119
a
2. The DF bundle exit unit (b) and The DF
upper guide (c) descend when the paper d b
trailing edge passes the DF middle roller
(a). Then, the DF exit roller (d) is rotated c
reversely and paper is sent to the DF mid-
dle tray (e).
Figure 3-120
b a
3. Then, the DF upper guide (a) ascends
and the DF bundle exit unit (b) ascends
by the DF exit release motor drive.
By rotating the DF paddles(c), paper is f c
conveyed to the DF middle tray (d).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (e)
drive the DF side registration guides (f) to
d
adjust paper.
Figure 3-121
3-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2nd sheet and after

c
4. By rotating the DF entry roller and DF
middle roller (c), 2nd paper (b) is con-
veyed to the process section as the 1st
b
sheet(a).
Figure 3-122
a
5. The DF bundle exit unit (b) and The DF
upper guide (c) descend when the paper d b
trailing edge passes the DF middle roller
(a). Then, by rotating the DF exit roller (d) c
and the DF paddles (e) , paper is con- e
veyed to the DF middle tray (f). Paper is
adjusted which is same as the 1st sheet.
f
Figure 3-123
a
6. Once completing to adjust the last sheet
to bundle, the DF bundle exit unit (a) b
descends and output paper bundle (c) to
the DF tray (d) by the rotation of DF exit
roller (b). c
Figure 3-124
3-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)

(7-1) Paper entry and feedshift and DF tray B exit section
The paper entry section convey paper from the main unit to the feedshift section. Also, the feedshift guide
3 switches the paper conveying path to convey paper to the DF tray B or finishing section.
[Components parts] 7 9 8
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley 6
3. DF feedshift guide 3
4. DF tray B conveying roller 11
6. DF tray B exit roller
7. DF exit pulley 10
8. DF sub exit sensor 4
5
9. DF actuator (DF sub exit sen-
sor) 2
3
10. DF entry sensor
11. DF tray B 1
Figure 3-125
11
9
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
Figure 3-126
3-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DF Sub tray full sensor YC21-6
DF sub exit sensor YC21-3
YC12-5
YC12-6
DF exit motor
YC12-7
YC12-8
YC12-13
YC12-14
YC12-15
YC12-16
YC18-12
DF feedshift solenoid 3
YC18-13
DF PWB
Figure 3-127
3-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7-2) Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section

The feedshift guide 3 (b) is activated by the DF feedshift solenoid 3 (a) and switches the paper conveying path
for the paper conveyed to the feedshift section to output it to the DF tray B (c) or convey to the feedshift sec-
tion for the relief drum (d) or finishing section (e). Also, the DF sub exit sensor (f) detects paper jam when out-
put paper to the DF tray B (c).
a
e
d
b
Figure 3-128
(7-3) Finishing section

The finishing section consists of the parts below and the paper conveyed from the main unit and output to
the DF tray A. Also, bundle exit mode and staple mode are processed.
Also, for folding, switch the paper conveying path to the relief drum side by the feedshift guide 1.
3-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Components parts] 13 16,17 15 10 9 6 4 7 1

1. DF relief drum 14 11 8
2
4. DF feedshift guide 1 12
5. DF feedshift guide 2
6. DF drum sensor 3
7. DF actuator (DF drum sensor)
8. DF middle sensor
9. DF actuator (DF middle sen- 5
sor)
10. DF Middle roller 18
11. DF Middle pulley
12. DF tray A exit roller
13. DF exit pulley
14. DF exit sensor 19
15. DF bundle exit unit
16. DF side registration sensor 1
18. DF staple unit
19. DF slide sensor
20. DF tray A
Figure 3-129
20
10
11
13
12 9
1
5
2
3
Figure 3-130
3-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DF shift sensor 1 YC23-3
YC14-5 / YC14-6
DF shift motor 2
YC14-7 / YC14-8
YC14-9 / YC14-10
DF shift motor 1
YC14-11 / YC14-12
DF shift sensor 2 YC23-6
DF shift release sensor YC23-18
DF exit clutch YC14-13
YC14-1 / YC14-2
DF shift release motor
YC14-3 / YC14-4
YC15-1 / YC15-2
DF paddle motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC12-17 / YC12-18
YC12-19 / YC12-20
YC12-9 / YC12-10
DF middle motor
YC12-11 / YC12-12
YC18-6
YC18-7
DF drum sensor YC20-3
DF middle sensor YC20-6
YC18-1 / YC18-2
DF relief drum motor
YC18-3 / YC18-4
YC18-9
YC18-10
YC12-1 / YC12-2
DF slide motor
YC12-3 / YC12-4
YC19-1 / YC19-2
DF tray motor
YC19-3 / YC19-4

DF PWB
DF staple relay PWB YC17
DF staple unit
DF bundle exit sensor YC22-15
DF tray upper surface sensor 2 YC13-3
YC15-5 / YC15-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC15-7 / YC15-8
YC15-9 / YC15-10
YC15-11 / YC15-12
DF exit sensor YC22-11
Figure 3-131
3-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7-4) Relief drum operation
When finishing multiple copies of A4 size paper to the finishing section or folding section, to secure the time to
finish paper, the 1st and 2nd paper of the next group is relieved until the 3rd paper is conveyed.
7. DF feedshift guide 1 (b) is activated by a

the DF feedshift solenoid 1 (a) and the
conveying path for the conveyed paper is
switched. The 1st paper of the next
group is conveyed to the relief drum (c).
8. Likewise, 2nd paper of the next group is
conveyed to the relief drum (c).
b
c
Figure 3-132
9. When the 3rd paper of the next group is

conveyed into the relief drum, it is con-
veyed to the finishing section (a) with the
1st and 2nd paper. Then, the paper con-
veying path is switched by the feedshift
guide 1 (b).
Figure 3-133
3-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
10. The DF feedshift solenoid 2 (b) activates

the feedshift guide 2 (c) and it switches
the paper conveying path to convey
paper to the folding unit (a).
Figure 3-134
3-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1st sheet c
1. By rotating the middle roller (a), paper is
conveyed to the process section. a
Paper is conveyed to the DF tray A (c)
by the DF tray A exit roller (b).
2. The conveying guide (d) descends when

the paper trailing edge passes the middle
roller (a). Then, the DF tray A exit roller (b) a
is rotated reversely and paper is sent to the
adjusting tray (e).
d
b
e
f
g
3. Then, the paper conveying guide (d)
ascends and the bundle exit unit (g) k
ascends by the DF exit release motor (f)
h
drive.
By rotating the DF tray A exit roller (b) and
adjusting paddles (h), paper is conveyed to
the adjusting tray (i).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (j) drive
the adjusting guides (k) to adjust paper.
d
b i
j
Figure 3-135
3-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2nd sheet and after

4. By rotating the DF entry roller and DF mid-
dle roller (c), 2nd paper (b) is conveyed to b
the process section as the 1st sheet(a). c
5. The conveying guide (d) descends when

e f
the paper trailing edge passes the DF mid-
dle roller (c). Then, by rotating the paddles c
(e) and the adjusting paddles (e), paper is
conveyed to the adjusting tray (g). Paper is
d
h
6. When adjusting the last paper of bundle is
completed, the bundle exit unit (h) j
descends and the DF tray A exit roller (i)
rotates to output the paper bundle to the DF
tray A (j).
Figure 3-136
3-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(8-1) Finishing section
The finishing section consists of the parts below and paper conveyed from the main unit is output to the
exit tray. Also, bundle exit mode and staple mode are processed.
[Components parts] 9 10 12 8 6 7 5 4 2 1 15 3
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF entry sensor
4. DF middle sensor
5. DF actuator (DF middle sen-
sor)
6. DF Middle roller
7. DF Middle pulley 11
8. DF bundle exit unit 13,14
9. DF exit roller
10. DF exit pulley
11. DF exit sensor
12. DF adjusting tray
13. DF side registration sensor 1 16
15. DF staple unit
16. DF slide sensor
17. DF paddle
18. DF tray
Figure 3-137
3-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18
6
7
18
10
9
1
2
Figure 3-138
3-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
DF exit sensor YC19-8
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
YC8-9 / YC8-10
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF middle motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-13 / YC8-14
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF PWB
DF staple relay PWB YC10
DF staple unit
DF bundle exit sensor YC19-12
DF middle sensor YC18-3
YC9-5 / YC9-6
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
YC9-11 / YC9-12
Figure 3-139
3-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1st sheet
1. By rotating the DF entry roller (a) and
DF middle roller (b), paper is conveyed
to the process section and then con-
veyed to the finishing section. Paper is
d b
conveyed to the DF main tray (d) by the
exit roller (c).
c
a
2. The conveying guide (e) descends when

the paper trailing edge passes the middle
roller (b). Then, the exit roller (c) is rotated b
reversely and paper is sent to the adjusting
tray (f).
c
e
f
h g
3. Then, the conveying guide (e) ascends and

the bundle exit unit (h) ascends by the DF
l
exit release motor (g) drive.
By rotating the exit roller (c) and adjusting
paddles (i), paper is conveyed close to the
position (j) of the adjusting tray (f).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (k) drive
the adjusting guides (l) to adjust paper.
j
i k
Figure 3-140
3-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2nd sheet and after

4. By rotating the DF entry roller (c) and DF
middle roller (d), 2nd paper (b) is conveyed
to the process section as the 1st sheet(a).
b d
5. The conveying guide (e) descends when

the paper trailing edge passes the middle f
roller (d). Then, by rotating the paddles (f) d
and the adjusting paddles (g), paper is con- e g
veyed to the adjusting tray (h). Paper is
6. When completing to adjust the last sheet to f

bundle, the bundle exit unit (i) descends
and by rotating the main tray exit roller (j),
the paper bundle is output to the DF main
tray (k).
k
j
Figure 3-141
3-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Mailbox (MT-730(B))

Paper is output to the mailbox tray 1 to 7 which is specified and stock them.
[Components parts] 9
1. MT conveying pulley
2. MT conveying roller
10
3. MT exit pulley
4. MT exit roller
5. MT lower entry guide 11
3
6. MT middle entry guide 4
7. MT upper entry guide 12
8. MT feedshift nail 3 7
4
9. MT tray 1 13
10. MT tray 2 3 8
4
11. MT tray 3 14 2 1
12. MT tray 4 3 8
13. MT tray 5 4
15
14. MT tray 6 3
15. MT tray 7 4 8
16. MT Actuator 2 1
3
(MT overflow sensor) 4 8
3 8
4
2 1
8
7
5 6
Figure 3-142
9
10
11
7
12 3
4
13 16 3
4
16 3
14 4
16 3
15 4
16 3
2 4
1
16 3
4
16 3
2 4
1
16 8
2
1
Figure 3-143
3-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
MT PWB
MT tray exit sensor 2 YC1-18
MT tray sensor 1 YC1-2
YC5-1
MT conveying motor YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-4
MT tray exit sensor 1 YC2-2
MT home position sensor YC2-4
YC3
YC7
DF PWB
Figure 3-144
3-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9-1) Operation of output to the mailbox tray

As the belt supporting plate (b) moving on the belt (a) passes through the feedshift claw lever (c), the feedshift
claws (d) operate to switch the conveying path of the paper and output them to each tray. Also, the MT tray
exit sensor (e) detects paper jam.
b d
a e
Figure 3-145
3-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)Punch unit (PH-7)

The punch unit is installed to the paper loading part of the document finisher, and stops the loaded paper once
and make punch holes.
[Components parts]
1. PH cam
2. PH cutter 1
3. PH dust tank 6
4. PH cutter holder
7
5. PH cam shaft
6. PH home position sensor 2
7. PH pulse sensor
8. PH pulse plate
Figure 3-146
8
4
1
5
2
Figure 3-147
3-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
YC4-1
PH motor
YC4-3
PH slide sensor YC6-3
YC3-1
YC3-2
PH slide motor
YC3-3
YC3-4
PH pulse sensor YC8-3
PH home position sensor YC8-6
PH tank set sensor YC9-1
PH PWB
PH tank full sensor YC5-10
YC5-4
YC5-5
PH paper edge sensor 1
YC5-6
YC5-7
PH paper edge sensor 2 YC7-1
YC5-2
PH solenoid
YC5-3
YC1
YC7
DF PWB
Figure 3-148
3-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)Folding unit (BF-730)

The folding unit makes the conveyed paper bi-fold or tri-fold with the BF blade and output paper to the BF tray.
Also, the BF staple unit makes paper half-folded and outputs booklet-stapled paper to the BF tray.
[Components parts]
1. BF conveying roller 1 2 1
2. BF conveying pulley 1 3
3. BF vertical conveying sensor
4. BF conveying roller 2
5. BF conveying pulley 2
6. BF entry roller 21 17 16
7. BF entry pulley 22 19 18 14 15
8. BF entry sensor 5 4
9. BF paper sensor
8
10. BF blade motor 6 7
11. BF blade sensor 25
12. BF right roller
20
13. BF left roller 26
23
14. BF top roller
15. DF staple unit 9
16. DF exit sensor
17. BF conveying roller 3
18. BF conveying pulley 3
19. BF feedshift solenoid
20. BF exit roller
21. BF exit pulley
24 13 1211 10
22. BF tray full sensor
Figure 3-149
23. BF exit paper press arm
24. BF lower moving plate
25. BF upper moving plate
26. BF tray
1
2
1
18
1 21 17
14 20
5
6
4
26 4
13 12
Figure 3-150
3-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Block diagram]
BF tray full sensor YC20-9
BF side registration sensor 1 YC20-6
BF exit sensor YC20-12
YC17-2
BF feedshift solenoid
YC17-3
YC13-6 / YC13-7
BF staple motor
YC13-9 / YC13-10
BF vertical conveying sensor YC20-15
BF paper entry sensor YC20-29
BF adjusting sensor 2 YC20-26
BF side registration sensor 2 YC20-21
YC10-9 / YC10-10
BF paper entry motor
YC10-11 / YC10-12
YC15-1 / YC15-2
BF blade motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
BF paper sensor YC20-18
YC20-5 / YC10-6
BF side registration sensor 2
YC10-7 / YC10-8
YC10-1 / YC10-2
BF adjusting motor 2
YC10-3 / YC10-4
YC10-13 / YC10-14
BF adjusting motor 1
YC10-15 / YC10-16
BF main PWB
YC16-1 / YC16-2
BF main motor
YC16-3 / YC16-4
YC10-17 / YC10-18
YC10-19/ YC10-20
BF adjusting sensor 1 YC20-3
BF blade sensor YC20-24
YC3, 5, 7
YC9, 10
DF PWB
Figure 3-151
3-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-1) Paper folding operation (Center-folding, Tri-folding)

Center-folding
1. Paper (b) stuck in the folding unit (a) is conveyed to the center-folding position by the BF adjusting motor
1/2 (c) that move the BF upper moving plate (d) and BF lower moving plate (e).
2. The BF adjusting motor 1/2 (f) drives to adjust the paper side registration.
e a d
f c
c f
Figure 3-152
3. The BF blade (a) pushes up the center of paper by the BF blade motor drive to pinch it between the BF
right roller (b) and BF left motor (c).
4. Center-folded paper is output to the BF tray (e) by the BF right roller (b), BF left roller (c) and BF exit roller
(d).
c b
d a
Figure 3-153
3-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Tri-folding
1. The paper in the folding unit is conveyed to the center-folding position by drive of the BF adjusting motor
1/2 as well as the center-folding operation.
2. After the paper side registration, the BF blade (a) pushes up the paper and have it pinched between the
BF right roller (b) and BF left roller (c).
3. The BF feedshift solenoid (d) activates the BF feedshift guide (e), and switches the conveying path of
paper from the BF right/left roller and convey it to the relief section (f).
d
e
f
b
c a
Figure 3-154
4. When the paper stops at the relief section, the paper loop generated at the space is pinched between the
BF right roller (a) and upper BF roller (b). Then, the paper is folded inside.
3-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 3-155
5. Tri-folded paper (a) is output to the BF tray (d) by the BF conveying roller3 (b) and BF exit roller (c).
c b
a
Figure 3-156
3-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11-2) Tri-folding position adjustment for the folding unit

Perform the measure below in case to make uniform the width of A, B and C when tri-folding the paper.
A B C
B
Z
*: In case to perform this measure to the
bundled paper, please note that there
might be a little margin for the tri-folding
A C
position and Z section might be folded.
*: Machine default setting (B)

Metric (A4) : 100 to 102 mm
Inch (Letter) : 95 to 96 mm
X
Figure 3-157
3-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment 1
Change the width of B.
Adjustment plate position change method
1. Push the folding unit release lever (a)

and pull out the folding unit (b).
a
Figure 3-158
3-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2. Open the upper folding unit cover (a) b

upward and remove two screws (b) to
detach the exit cover (c).
b
c
Figure 3-159
3-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Loosen two screws (b) securing the

adjustment plate (a) and move it.
*: Raise the adjustment plate to narrower
F
the width of B and lower the adjustment
plate to wider the width of B.
(Scale: 1mm)
*: When adjusting, fix it where the left and

right scale are equal in reference to the
scale (c). b a b
Default setting position

Metric : A4 (d)
Inch : LT (e)
*: Engraved mark for A4 and LT are avail-
able at the machine rear side only.
e
d
Figure 3-160
B
Treatment 2
Change the setting values in U246 [Setting:
Change the setting value of [Three Fold] to
shift the tri-folding position (a) and change the A C A C
width of A and C. Width of B remains
Left Right
unchanged.
Raise the setting value to align the tri-folding

position to the left.
Lower the setting value to align the tri-folding a a
position to the right.
Figure 3-161
3-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the
power lamp on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the
disassembly.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to
damage the PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
(2) Storage and handling of the drum

Note the following when handling and storing the drum.
When pulling out the drum unit from the main unit, please be careful not to hit a very strong light, such as
direct sunlight on the surface of the drum.
Store in the range of ambient temperature of -20 to 40 degree C(–4°F to 104°F) and ambient humidity of
85% RH or less. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Avoid storing the drum unit in
the place where the temperature and humidity may suddenly change even if these changes are within the
tolerable range.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object.
Make sure not to touch the drum surface with bare hands or gloves.
If the drum is touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
(3) Storage of the toner container

Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Do not place the toner container under direct sunshine or high humidity environment.
4-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4-2 Maintenance parts

(1) Maintenance kit
100V
Item for the maintenance Quan Part No. Alternative

Name used in service Name used in parts list tity parts No.
manual
MK-6325 MK-6325/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702NK0JP0 072NK0JP
(600,000 images) • DRUM(H) UNIT 1
• DLP(H) K UNIT 1
• FUSER UNIT(H) 1
• TRANSFER MONO UNIT 1
• ROLLER SECONDRY TRANS- 1
FER ASSY 2
• PULLEY FEED
2
• PULLEY PICKUP
2
• PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY
SP 1
• PULLEY FEED ASSY 1
• RETARD ROLLER ASSY 1
• FILTER TOP 1
• FILTER REAR LOWER
120V/ 220-240V
Item for the maintenance Quan Part No. Alternative

tity parts No.
Name used in service Name used in parts list
manual
MK-6325 MK-6325/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702NK0UN0 072NK0UN
(600,000 images) • DRUM(H) UNIT 1
• DLP(H) K UNIT 1
• FUSER UNIT(H) 1
• TRANSFER MONO UNIT 1
• ROLLER SECONDRY TRANS- 1
FER ASSY
2
• PULLEY FEED
2
• PULLEY PICKUP
2
• PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY
SP 1
• PULLEY FEED ASSY 1
• RETARD ROLLER ASSY 1
• FILTER TOP 1
• FILTER REAR LOWER
4-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit
Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Classifi- Mode Title of the maintenance mode (Setting) MK-6325

cation No.
Replace- U119 Drum unit initial settings ○
ment set-
tings
U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting (Belt Initialize) ○
U127 Checking/clearing the transfer counts (Clear) ○
Image U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
adjust-
ment
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (Normal Mode) ○
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
U410 Half tone automatic adjustment ○
Mainte- U251 Maintenance counter clear (Clear) ○
nance
Items to perform after replacing the unit

Drum unit
Section Mode Title of the maintenance mode (Setting)

No.
Replace- U119 Drum unit initial settings ○
ment set-
tings
U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
adjust-
ment
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (Normal Mode) ○
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
Developer unit

No.
Replace- U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
ment set-
tings
4-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

No.
adjust-
ment

No.
Replace- U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting (Belt Initialize) ○
ment set-
tings
adjust-
ment
Secondary transfer roller

No.
Replace- U127 Checking/clearing the transfer counts (Clear) ○
ment set-
tings
adjust-
ment
MC roller
Classifi- Mode Title of the maintenance mode (Setting)

cation No.
Replace- U930 Clearing the main charger roller counts (Clear) ○
ment set-
tings
adjust-
ment
4-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures

Replacement of the maintenance kit is required after about 600,000 images. The message [Replace MK.]
appears at the replacement timing.
Execute maintenance mode U251 to reset the count after replacing the maintenance kit in the following proce-
dures.
(1) Cassette feed section

(1-1) Detaching and attaching the retard roller, the pickup roller and the feed roller.
Procedures
1. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direc- c
tion of the arrow.
2. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direction a
of the arrow.
b
Figure 4-1
4-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Note when attaching;

*: When installing the cassette (a), please d
insert the positioning parts (b), (d) of the
cassette into the rail shaft and pins (c), e
(e).
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-2
3. While holding the lock lever (a) and pull

out the primary feed unit (c) from the main
unit (b) upper row. b
4. Grasp the lock lever (d) and pull out the
primary paper feed unit (e) from the main
unit (b) of the bottom row. c
Figure 4-3
4-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
5. Release hook (a), and remove the retard a

roller (b) from the bushing (c).
c d
Figure 4-4
6. Turn over the primary feed unit (a).
Figure 4-5
4-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7. Slide the feed cover (b) from the primary

feed unit (a).
Figure 4-6
8. Release hook (a), and remove the pickup

roller (b) and the feed roller (c) from the
bushing.
*: Remove the pickup roller (b) while lifting it
up slightly.
9. Attach the new feed roller.

10. Attach new pickup roller.
c b
Figure 4-7
11. After replacing the new pickup roller and

feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a) to the
position where it is aligned to the triangle
mark (b).
b
a
Figure 4-8
4-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
12. Turn over the primary feed unit.

13. Attach new retard roller.
IMPORTANT
When replacing new feed roller, pickup roller or retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller surface.

*: When installing the primary feed unit (a),
align the protrusion (b) at the lower part of
the primary feed unit to the guide (c) and e
d
align the protrusion (d) at the upper part
of the primary feed unit to the guide (e) of
the main unit.
a
In case if the message [The error
occurred with the cassette XX] appears,
remove and insert the primary paper feed
unit.
c b
Figure 4-9
Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.

Clearing the maintenance counts (Execute maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner
1. Open the front cover (a) slightly.
Figure 4-10
2. While opening the front cover (a), grasp

the left and right upper parts of the main-
tenance front cover (b) and open it
a
Figure 4-11
4-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Pull both left and right lever (b) of the

inner cover (a) to open.
b b
Figure 4-12
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push in the A
part until the position of the lever (b) is same
level as both side covers.
Figure 4-13
4-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Grasp the handle of the regist cleaner (a)

and pull it out.
5. Inspect the sponge of the regist cleaner
(a) and, clean or replace it.
Figure 4-14
4-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) MP tray feed section

(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the MP feed roller
Procedures
1. Open multi purpose tray (a).
Figure 4-15
2. Pinch the holder (a) and remove the MP b

feed roller (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-16
4-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Removing MP feed roller.
c
1. Slide the MP feed roller holder (c) until
b
the hook (b) comes to visible.
2. Release the hook (b) with a flat head

screwdriver (d) and rotate the MP feed d
roller holder (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
3. Pull out the MP feed roller holder (c) and c

remove the MP feed roller (e). e
4. Attach new MP feed roller (e).
Figure 4-17
4-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the MP retard roller

Procedures
1. Remove the MP retard roller (a) in the
direction of the arrow.
2. Attach the new MP retard roller.
3. Attach the new MP feed roller. a
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new MP retard roller or MP
feed roller, please be careful not to touch the
roller surface.
Figure 4-18
Execute the following setting after replacing the MP feed roller.

Clearing the maintenance counts (Execute maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3) Transfer section

(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the primary transfer unit
Procedures
1. Open the right cover (a) of the main unit b
(b).
Figure 4-19
Note
Before removing the primary transfer unit (a), b
make sure that the pressure release lever (b)
comes close to the position (c) at the right
edge of the cover of the primary transfer unit.
c a
b
b
Figure 4-20
4-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
2. Open the front cover slightly and open the

maintenance front cover.
3. Open the inner cover. a
4. Push in the release lever (b) and grasp
the handle (c), and then pull out the pri-
mary transfer unit in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-21
5. After that, hold the upper side handle (b)

of the primary transfer unit (a) and
remove it in the direction of the arrow.
6. Inspect the primary transfer unit (a) and,
clean or replace it. a
7. Reattach the parts in the original position. b
IMPORTANT
Make sure not to hit the transfer belt to the
inner cover (d) and maintenance front cover
(c).
d
c
Figure 4-22
4-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

Before installing the primary transfer unit (a),
b
confirm the pressure release lever (b) is B A
aligned to the right edge of the primary transfer
unit cover (c).
If coming out to A side, the lever hits when

inserting the unit. c
If coming in to B side, the belt or drum might be
damaged as the transfer roller is pushed when
inserting the unit.
b
a
b
Figure 4-23
*: When attaching the primary transfer unit

(a).
1. Hold the handle (f) with both hands to c
keep it horizontally and insert it by
bending the upper part of the primary c
transfer unit (b) and matching to the rail
(c) of the main body. b
2. Touch by hand at both left and right of the
f
rib (d) (position A and B) at the upper part
of the unit front side and insert it straight.
b
*: If inserting them by holding the other a
position (EX: such as the release lever d
section (e) to hold when pulling out the
unit), they may not be inserted straight,
and the drawer connector pin at the unit
side contact the housing of the drawer
A B
connector at the main unit side. This may
cause the deformation/damage to the unit e
and there is a concern that the following
phenomenon occurs.
Figure 4-24
C1950 [Primary transfer unit EEPROM error]
C2840 [Belt cleaning motor error]
Execute the following setting after replacing the primary transfer unit.
1. Primary transfer unit initial setting (Execute the maintenance mode U469): Belt Initialize
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
4-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer unit.

Procedures
1. Open the right cover (d).
2. While pressing the front and rear side of d
the front transfer guide plate (a), push the
ribs (b) at the front and rear side of the
a
arm in the direction of the arrow and
release them from the front and rear
hooks (c).
b
c
a
b
c
b
c
Figure 4-25
3. Push the lock lever (b) toward the

machine rear side.
4. Release the hooks (c) and rotate the lock 2
lever (b) in the direction of the arrow.
5. Lift up the front side of the secondary 1
transfer unit (d) to remove it.
b
6. Inspect the secondary transfer unit (d)
and clean or replace it. c
Execute the following setting after replac-

ing the secondary transfer roller .
1. Checking/ clearing the transfer counts
(maintenance mode U127): Clear
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute
maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically
Figure 4-26
4-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller

*: In case to remove secondary transfer
roller only without removing transfer front
guide plate. a
Procedures
1. Open the right cover (a).
2. Lift up the front and back of the levers (b)
of the transfer front guide plate (d) and b
release the hooks (c) at the front and c
back arm section. Then, lift up the trans-
fer front guide plate (d).
b
c
Figure 4-27
4-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Push the lock lever (b) toward the

machine rear side.
4. Release the hooks (c) and rotate the lock
lever (b) in the direction of the arrow. 2
5. Lift up the machine front side of the sec-
ondary transfer roller (d) and remove it. 1
6. Inspect the secondary transfer roller (d) b
and, clean or replace it.
7. Reattach the parts in the original position. c
Execute the following setting after replac-

ing the secondary transfer roller .
1. Checking/ clearing the transfer counts
(maintenance mode U127): Clear
2. ID correction operation setting (Execute
maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically
Figure 4-28
4-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Drum section

(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the drum unit
Procedures
Figure 4-29

a
Figure 4-30
4-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Note
Before removing the drum unit (a), make sure b
that the pressure release lever (b) comes close
to the position (c) at the right edge of the cover
of the primary transfer unit.
c a
b
b
Figure 4-31

b b
Figure 4-32
4-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push in the A
part until the position of the lever (b) is same
level as both side covers.
Figure 4-33
4. Open the right cover (a) of the main unit

(b).
b
Figure 4-34
4-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
5. Push up on the lock lever (a) and remove

the four drum units (b). b
6. Attach the new drum units.
a
b
Figure 4-35
IMPORTANT
*: When installing drum unit, touch by hand
at the convex section (a) at the lower part
of the unit front side and insert it straight.
*: If inserting them by holding the other

position, they may not be inserted
straight, and the drawer connector pin at
the unit side contact the housing of the
drawer connector at the main unit side.
This may cause the deformation/damage
to the unit and there is a concern that the
following phenomenon occurs.
C7901 [Drum unit BK EEPROM error]
Figure 4-36
4-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
IMPORTANT
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) of the a
developer unit when installing the drum unit
while the developer unit is installed. Otherwise,
it causes the drum damage.
Figure 4-37
4-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
After replacing the drum unit, close the cover and turn on the power.
Drum refresh will be executed automatically.
Please perform the below settings after "Ready" is displayed.
1. Drum unit initial setting (Execute maintenance mode U119): Execute
2. Developer bias adjustment (Execute maintenance mode U140): AC Calib/Calibration
3. Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464): Calib
4. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode
5. Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464): Calib
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit

Procedures
1. Open the front cover slightly. b
2. Open the front cover for maintenance.
3. Open the inner cover.
5. Remove the drum unit (a).
6. Lay down the drum unit (a).
c ղ
7. Push the lock lever (b).
8. Pull up the main charger unit while pulling
it up and remove the main charger unit (c)
from the drum unit (a) in the direction of ձ
the arrow.
9. Inspect the main charge roller unit (c) and
clean or replace it.
Figure 4-38
4-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
IMPORTANT
1. When installing the main charger roller
b
unit (a), attach it to the drum unit (c)
with the condition of the MC roller
release lever (b) released.
2. Insert the MC roller release lever (b) into
the opening and push down on part A and
make sure it clicks and locks in place. a
Figure 4-39
Execute the following setting after replacing the MC roller.

1. Clearing the main charger roller counts (maintenance mode U930): Clear
4-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Developer section

(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the developer unit
Procedures
Figure 4-40

a
Figure 4-41
4-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b b
Figure 4-42
4. Push up on the lock lever (a) and remove

the four developer units (b).
5. Attach the new developer unit.
Figure 4-43
4-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
IMPORTANT
*: When installing the developer unit, touch
by hand at the convex section (a) at the
lower part of the unit front side and insert
it straight.
*: If inserting them by holding the other

position, they may not be inserted
straight, and the drawer connector pin at
the unit side contact the housing of the
drawer connector at the main unit side.
This may cause the deformation/damage
to the unit and there is a concern that the
following phenomenon occurs.
C7911 [Developer unit BK EEPROM error] a

Abnormal image caused by the developer
leakage
Figure 4-44
7. After inserting the developer unit (a), a

securely push the lock shaft (b).
*: Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b)

when inserting the developer unit. Other-
wise, it may cause the drum damage.
b
Figure 4-45
4-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
After replacing the developer unit, close the cover and turn on the power.
Developer unit auto aging correction, etc. will be executed.
1. Developer bias adjustment (Execute maintenance mode U140): AC Calib/Calibration
4-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Fuser section

(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit
Procedures
b
(b).
Figure 4-46
2. Release the hook (b) while pressing the

left and right levers (a), and remove the
fuser unit (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b b
a a
Figure 4-47
4-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

*: When installing the fuser unit (a), please
insert the pin (b) by inserting it into the rail
(c) of the main unit and pressing until the
hook is applied.
b c
c
b
Figure 4-48
IMPORTANT
Insufficient lock will cause the phenomenon below when installing the fuser unit.
1. Back side lock failure
This will cause the C6600 fuser belt rotation failure without drive at the rear side.
2. Front side lock failure
This will cause a factor of image squareness failure due to skew feeding.
4-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height (Trailing edge skew image adjustment)
Procedures
1. Compare the trailing edge of the image between the original document and output document and check
the image length matching side (image front side or image rear side)
[Origin
nal]
P
Printing direc
ction
(Image front side) (Image rear side)
Output image
[O e A] [O
Output imagee B]
(Image front side is short) (Image rear side is short)
(Image front side) (Image rear side) (Image front side) (Image rear side)
Figure 4-49

(b).
Figure 4-50
4-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b a a b
Figure 4-51
4. Loosen 2 screws (f) fixing the fuser positioning guide at the inner front frame.
5. Lift the fixing positioning guide (g) and move the fixing height adjustment lever (h) left and right.
[Shift amount reference] (Adjust based on the side with the correct image length)
• When front side of the image is short (Output image pattern A), relocate the fuser height adjust-
ment lever (h) toward the machine right side and lower the position of the fuser positioning guide
(g) by one step. The rear side of the image shrinks about 0.4 mm
• When rear side of the image is short (Output image pattern B), relocate the fuser height adjust-
ment lever (h) toward the machine left side and increase the position of the fuser positioning
guide (g) by one step. The rear side of the image extends about 0.5 mm
f (Inner front frame viewed from the machine rear side)
f
Machine left side
Machine right side

h
Figure 4-52
6. After the adjustment is completed, bring the fuser positioning guide (g) downward so that it hits the fuser
height adjustment lever (h), tighten the two screws (f) and fix it
4-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(7) Others
(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the filter
Procedures
Rear upper filter
1. Push the lever (a) and remove the rear b
upper filter cover (b) and the rear upper
a
filter (c).
2. Clean or replace the upper rear filter and c
refit the filter.
Rear filter
1. Push the lever (d) and remove the rear
filter cover (e) and the rear filter (f).
2. Clean or replace the rear filer (f) and refit
the filter.
Figure 4-53
4-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4-4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option)

(1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller, PF pickup roller and PF feed
roller
Procedures
paper feeder (c) and remove it in the
direction of the arrow. a
Figure 4-54
3. Open the cover (a).
Figure 4-55
4-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

out the primary feed unit (c) from the b
paper feeder (b) upper row.
primary paper feed unit (e) from the paper c
feeder (b) of the bottom row.
Figure 4-56
6. Release hook (a), and remove the PF a

retard roller (b) from the bushing (c).
c d
Figure 4-57
4-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
7. Turn over the primary feed unit (a).
Figure 4-58
8. Slide the feed cover (b) from the primary

feed unit (a).
a
Figure 4-59
4-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9. Release hook (a), and remove the PF

pickup roller (b) and the PF feed roller (c)
from the bushing.
*: Remove the PF pickup roller (b) while lift-
ing it up slightly.
10. Attach new PF feed roller.

11. Attach new PF pickup roller.
c b
Figure 4-60
12. After replacing the new PF pickup roller

and PF feed roller, reseat the feed cover
(a) to the position where it is aligned to
the triangle mark (b).
b
a
Figure 4-61
13. Turn over the primary feed unit.

14. Attach new PF retard roller.
IMPORTANT
When replacing new PF feed roller, PF pickup roller or PF retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller sur-
face.
4-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

*: When installing the primary feed unit (a),
align the protrusion (b) at the lower part of
the primary feed unit to the guide (c) and e
d
align the protrusion (d) at the upper part
of the primary feed unit to the guide (e) of
the main unit.
a
In case if the message [The error
occurred with the cassette XX] appears,
remove and insert the primary paper feed
unit.
c b
Figure 4-62
4-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)

(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller, PF pickup roller and PF feed
roller
Procedures
1. Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the
main unit (b) and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-63
2. Remove 1 screw (a) (M3x8).

3. Slide the stopper (b) in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
Figure 4-64
4-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4. Pull out the right paper cassette (a) and

the left paper cassette (b) from the paper
feeder (c).
c
b
a
Figure 4-65
5. Hold the handle (a) and pull out the PF

conveying unit (b).
Figure 4-66
4-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

*: When installing the PF conveying unit (a),
insert the rail (b) of the PF conveying unit
in accordance with the guide (c) of the
main unit.
b
*: When installing the PF conveying unit (a),
please be careful not to touch the retard
release lever (d) at the bottom of the PF
d
conveying unit to the frame.
c
b
a
Figure 4-67
6. Release hook (b), and remove the PF

retard roller (c) from the bushing (d). a
Figure 4-68
4-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Turn over the PF conveying unit (a).

8. Release hook (b), and remove the PF
pickup roller (c) and the PF feed roller (d)
from the bushing.
9. Attach new PF feed roller.

10. Attach new PF pickup roller.
11. Turn over the PF conveying unit.
12. Attach new PF retard roller.

a
c
b
Figure 4-69
IMPORTANT
When replacing new PF feed roller, PF pickup roller or PF retard roller, be careful not to touch the roller sur-
face.
4-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)

(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF pickup roller and PF feed roller
Procedures
1. Pull out the deck.
2. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and detach
the wire cover (b).
b
Figure 4-70
3. Disconnect the connector (b) from the

main unit (a). d
4. Remove the wire (d) from the clamp (c).
5. Remove one screw (e)(M3×8).
6. Slide the PF feed unit (f) frontward and
remove it while rotating it by using the a
positioning shaft (g) as fulcrum. c
g
b
f
e
Figure 4-71
4-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Remove two stop rings A (b) from the PF b

feed roller shaft (a).
8. Remove two stop rings B (c) and slide the c b
joint (d).
Figure 4-72
9. Slide two bearings (b) on both sides of

the feed roller holder (a). d b
10. Remove the feed roller holder (a) and
a
spring (d) upward from the PF feed unit
(c).
Figure 4-73
4-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF retard roller
Procedures
1. Remove the PF feed unit (a).
c
2. Turn over the PF feed unit (a).
3. Remove the stop ring (c) from the PF
retard roller shaft (b). d
4. Pull out the spacer (d) from the PF retard
roller shaft and remove it.
*: Be careful not to drop the set pin when
removing the spacer
Figure 4-74
5. Pull out the set pin (b) of torque limiter

(a).
6. Pull out the torque limiter (a) and the PF
retard roller (d) while pushing retard d
release lever (c), and remove them.
7. Clean or replace the PF retard roller. b a
c
8. Reattach the PF retard roller to the PF
feed unit in the original position.
9. Reattach the PF feed unit in the original
position.
Figure 4-75
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.
4-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup roller and DP feed roller.
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a). a
2. Pulling release lever (b) and open the fix-
ing cover(c).
Figure 4-76
3. Rotate the DP feed unit (a) and pull it out

in the direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-77
4-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller.
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a). a
2. Remove hook (b) and remove the DP
retard roller cover (c). b c
Figure 4-78
3. Remove the stop rings (a), and remove

the DP retard roller (b) and the torque lim-
iter (c).
4. Inspect or replace the DP retard roller
and refit all removed parts.
c
b
Figure 4-79
4-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup roller and DP feed roller.
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a).

2. Remove two screw (b) (M3×8) of DP feed
b
guide (C). a
b
Figure 4-80
3. Raise the DP feed guide (a) and detach it

in the upward direction
Figure 4-81
4-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Raise the DP feed unit (a) upward.
Figure 4-82
5. Remove the front side stop ring (b) from d

the DP feed belt shaft (a). c
6. Slide the DP feed unit (c) frontward and
remove it from the document processor
(d) b
Figure 4-83
4-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller.
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Detach the DP feed guide (a) and the DP
feed unit.
3. Release hook (a) and remove the DP
retard roller cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-84
4. Remove the stop rings (a), and remove

the DP retard roller (b) and the torque lim- a
iter (c).
5. Attach the new DP retard roller. c
Figure 4-85
4-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4-5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit
After replacing the maintenance kit, please close the cover and turn on the power.
Drum refresh automatic control, developer unit automatic aging correction, etc. will be executed.
Execute by U952 (preset setting for the maintenance mode workflow) (P.6-283)
4. Select the maintenance kit to set.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the mainte-
nance mode.
6. After transition, execute the setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and exit from the maintenance mode.
Start
MK-6325
U119 Setting the drum

(Execute)
U140 Developer bias adjustment

(AC Calib> Calibration)
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit

(Belt Initialize > Execute)
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Clear)
U464 ID correction setting

(Calib > Execute)
U412 Adjusting the uneven density

(Normal Mode)

(Calib > Execute)
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
U251 Clearing the maintenance counter

(Clear)
4-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4-6 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures

(1) Exterior cover
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the front cover
Procedures
Figure 4-86

a
Figure 4-87
4-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Close the front cover (a).
Figure 4-88
4. Remove the stopper (b) of the front cover

(a).
5. Slide the front cover in the direction of the a
arrow and remove the fulcrum shaft (c)
from the fulcrum section (d).
b
c
d
Figure 4-89
4-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the front cover for maintenance
Procedures
main unit (b) and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow. b
Figure 4-90
2. Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum

pin (a).
Figure 4-91
4-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Open the front cover slightly.

4. Open the front cover (a) for maintenance.
5. Remove each screw (b) of 2 straps (c )
and remove the front cover for the main-
tenance (a) in the direction of the arrow. b c
c
b
Figure 4-92
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the inner cover

Procedures
tenance front cover (b) and open it a
Figure 4-93
4-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b b
Figure 4-94
4. Release the hook(b) with a flat-blade

screwdriver(a), remove the inner cover
(c) in the direction of the arrow. a
Figure 4-95
4-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-4) Rear top cover

Procedures
1. Remove a screw (a)(M3x10) and then
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid-
a
ing in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-96
(1-5) Detaching and reattaching the rear bottom cover

Procedures
2. Push down on the lower rear cover (b)
and release the upper rib, then, lift it up
with a little open condition and release
the lower hook (c). After that, remove it in
the direction of the arrow.
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-97
4-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(1-6) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover

Procedures
2. Detach the rear top cover.
4. Remove the DP rear cover (b) by sliding
a
Figure 4-98
(1-7) Detaching and reattaching the ISU rear cover

Procedures
1. Detach the rear top cover. a
2. Remove the DP rear cover
3. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8).
4. Detach the ISU rear cover (b) in the direc-
tion of the arrow. a
Figure 4-99
4-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-8) Detaching and reattaching the top left cover/the rear left cover/the lower left
cover.
Procedures
1. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8). b
2. Release two hooks (c) and remove the
left rear cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow.
a
Figure 4-100

5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (c) into the
front side aperture (b) and widen it in the
direction of the arrow to release four
hooks (d) and to remove the upper left
cover (e).
c

When installing the upper left cover (e), hang a
four lower hooks (f) first and then hang the
d
e
upper hook (d).
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-101
4-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8. Release four hooks while lifting up the left
bottom cover (b), and detach it.
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-102
4-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-9) Detaching and reattaching the right top cover

Procedures

2. After removing front side rib (c) and then
remove the upper right cover (b) in the
b
Figure 4-103
(1-10) Detaching and reattaching the rear right top cover / rear right bottom cover
Procedures
1. Detach the rear top cover.
2. Open the right cover. c
4. Release the hook (b) and remove right
rear upper cover (c).
a
c
b
Figure 4-104
4-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
5. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8) and

detach the right rear bottom cover (c) in
Notes when attaching

c
When reinstalling, insert two hooks (b) first to
install.
Figure 4-105
4-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-11) Detaching and reattaching the right cover Assy.

Procedures

2. Remove the hooks of the damper spring
(a).
3. Remove the stopper (c) of the fulcrum pin
(b). Slide the arm (d) in the direction of
the arrow and remove it from the fulcrum
pin (b).
a
c
b d
Figure 4-106
4. Rotate the wire cover (b).

5. Push the left and right fulcrum section a
and remove the wire cover (a)
6. Release the wire (b) from the hook (c)
and disconnect two connectors (d).
b
c
d
Figure 4-107
4-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Remove the stopper (a) and slide the

strap(b), and then pull it out from the pin.
Figure 4-108
4-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Open front (a) and back (b) of the handle

cover.
9. Raise up the front cover shaft (c). After
that, slide it in the direction of the arrow
10. Tilt up the back cover shaft (a). After that,
slide it in the direction of the arrow b
d
d
a
c
Figure 4-109
4-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
11. Remove the right cover Assy (a) in the

Figure 4-110
4-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Detaching and reattaching the conveying unit
12. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8).

13. Release two hooks (b) and remove the
wire cover (c).
a
c
Figure 4-111
14. Disconnect the connector (a) and remove

one wire stopper (b).
Figure 4-112
4-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
15. Widen the connecting section on both

h
sides of the middle guide (a) with a flat
h
head screwdriver (h) and remove the pin
(c) from the hole (b). c
c
16. Rotate the middle guide (a) in the direc-
tion of the arrow 1 and pull it out in the
direction of the arrow 2.
g
Note when attaching; b
17. To attach the middle guide (a), insert the
boss (f) to the pin (e) which is reverse
way of removing it and after that, insert it
d
in both sides of the hole (b).
b
e
Figure 4-113
4-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
18. Rotate and open the resist guide (a).

19. Raise up the shaft (b) and (c), and slide it
b
Figure 4-114
20. Remove the conveying unit (a) in the a

Figure 4-115
4-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Optical section

(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the LSU
Procedures
b
(b).
Figure 4-116

tenance front cover (b) and open it a
Figure 4-117
4-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b b
Figure 4-118
5. Grasp the handle of the regist cleaner (a)

and pull it out.
Figure 4-119
4-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7. Detach the rear secondary transfer guide
(b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
b
Figure 4-120
8. Disconnect the middle conveying unit

wire (a) from the connector (b).
Figure 4-121
4-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

When reattaching, connect the wire (a) of the
middle conveying unit to the connector and
then insert the wire into the rib (b).
Figure 4-122
9. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8) and

detach the middle conveying unit (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-123
4-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

When attaching the middle conveying unit (c), a
insert the positioning section (a) into (d) and a
the positioning hole (b) into (e) first and then,
attach the middle conveying unit.
b
c
b
Figure 4-124
4-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
10. Loosen the LSU fixing pins (b) and spring

(c) with a screwdriver (a) and remove
them.
c
b
c
b
Figure 4-125

arrow.
a
Figure 4-126
4-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cover (e).
c

d
e
upper hook (d).
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-127
4-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-128
4-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the LSU left stay (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-129
20. Pull out the laser scanner unit (a) half

way. b
21. Disconnect FFC connector (b) and the
connector (c).
Figure 4-130
4-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
22. Pull out the laser scanner unit (a).

23. Inspect the laser scanner unit (a) and,
Figure 4-131
4-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Notes when replacing the laser scanner unit

Execute the following adjustment after replacing the laser scanner unit.
1. Drum unit initial setting (Execute maintenance mode U119): Execute

(1)Input "119" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
*: Start the drum setup operation.
(3)Press the [Stop] key.

(2)Select [Calib].
*: Calibration starts.
3. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode

(2)Select [Normal Mode].
(3)Press the [Start] key.
*: Output the test patter with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
(4)Set the test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
(5)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(6)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (2nd sheet)
*: According to the test pattern of 1st sheet, output with -20% light intensity setting.
(8)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(9)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (3rd sheet)
*: Check the correction result.[Finish] appears after normal completion. Display [Finish] .after normal com-
pletion.

(2)Select [Calib].

(1)Input "410" using the numeric keys.
*: Display the execution information screen.
*: Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.
(3)Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back and the
4-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
*: Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.
Figure 4-132

*: The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
(5)Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
*: The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
(7)[Finish] appears after normal completion.
6. Exiting from the maintenance mode

*: Exit from the maintenance mode
4-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the lens unit

Procedures

b
Figure 4-133
3. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and D

detach the right ISU cover (b).
E
D
Figure 4-134
4-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Remove the contact glass (a) in the direc- D

tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-135
5. Remove five screws (a)(M3x8) and D

D
detach the lens cover (b).
D
D
D
Figure 4-136
4-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Disconnect the FFC (a).

7. Disconnect the FFC from the FFC con- E
nector (b) with a lock.
Figure 4-137
4-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8). a

a
9. Detach the lens unit (b) in the direction of a
the arrow. a
a a
a b a
Figure 4-138
4-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Reattaching the lens unit
Decide the fix position of lens unit (a) by the

a
H
following.
The right and left of machine: Confirm the
number a on the label affixed on the lens (b).
Match the line (c) of lens unit (a) to the posi- G
tioning line (b) of same number on frame side.
The front and back of machine: Match the
edge (e) of lens unit (a) to the positioning line F
(d) on frame side.
Fix the lens unit (a) as before with four screws. E
D b
Figure 4-139
(2-3) Detaching and reattaching the lamp unit

Procedures
1. Remove the platen cover or the docu-
ment processor.
b
Figure 4-140
4-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and D

detach the right ISU cover (b).
E
D
Figure 4-141
5. Remove the contact glass (a) in the direc- D

tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-142
4-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then

detach the front glass cover (b). a
*: Remove right side of the main unit first
and remove it.
b
a
Figure 4-143
7. Remove two pins (a)(M3x8) and then a

detach the rear glass cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-144
4-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Peel off two sheets (a).
Figure 4-145
4-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
9. Move the lamp unit Assy (a) to the cut-out

section (b).
10. Disconnect FFC (f) from FFC connector b
(e).
11. Release two hooks (g) and remove FFC
guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
a
g a
h
Figure 4-146
12. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and

a
detach the lamp unit (b) from mirror frame
A (c).
13. Inspect or replace the lamp unit (b), and b
then reattach the removed parts in the a
original position.
14. When replacing the lamp unit (b), execute
maintenance mode U411 (adjusting the
scanner automatically).
c
IMPORTANT
Use an air blower when cleaning the reflector,
light guide plate and diffusion sheet of the LED
mount Assy. Clean not to leave a hair dust.
Figure 4-147
4-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-4) Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires

Precautions
When installing the optical wire (scanner
wire), please be sure to use the specified
wire.
Machine front side (P/N: 302H717380(gray))
Machine rear side(P/N: 302H717390(black))
Tools required to reattach

Two mirror frame fixing tools (P/N: 302NL1711_)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N: 302RH9401_)
Procedures
1. Detach the upper right cover.
2. Detach the ISU right cover.
3. Remove the contact glass.
4. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then

detach the front glass cover (b). a
*: Remove right side of the main unit first
and remove it.
b
a
Figure 4-148
4-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove two pins (a)(M3x8) and then a

detach the rear glass cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-149
6. Peel off two sheets (a).
Figure 4-150
4-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
7. Move the lamp unit Assy (a) to the cut-out

section (b).
8. Disconnect FFC (f) from FFC connector b
(e).
9. Release two hooks (g) and remove FFC
guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
a
g a
h
Figure 4-151
10. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and a

detach the lamp unit (b) from mirror frame
A (c). b
a
Figure 4-152
4-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
11. Remove two screws (c) (M3x×8) (front

and back), and detach the front wire hold- f
ing plate (d) and the rear wire holding
plate (e) from mirror frame A (f).
12. Detach the mirror frame A (f) from the
main unit.
d e
c
c
Figure 4-153
13. Remove the round terminal (b) of the opti- d

cal wire on the left side of the scanner unit b
(a) from the optical wire spring (c).
14. Remove the scanner wire (d) from the
main unit.
a
b
d c
Figure 4-154
4-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Reattaching the scanner wires
1. Insert the small ball (a) of the scanner

wire into the small ball hole of the scan-
ner wire drum (b)
2. Wind the scanner wires (c) three turns
inward and five turns outward.
*: Wrap around the ball of the scanner wire
so that the shorter side comes outward
*: Use the gray wire for the machine front
side and black wire for the machine rear
side.
3. Secure the scanner wires (c) by the scan-
ner wire stoppers (d). 5 3
3 5
d d
Figure 4-155
4-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
c
4. Move the mirror frame B (a) to the position
shown in the figure, and insert the mirror
frame fixing tool (c) in the front and rear
b
positioning holes (b), and fix the position
of the mirror frame B (a)
c
Figure 4-156
(1)Hang the scanner wire (a) on the outside of the main unit in the groove on the outside of the pulley (b) of
the mirror frame B from above.
*: Pass through the scanner wire outside of the positioning pin.
(2)Hang the round terminal (c) on the hook (d) inside the scanner unit
(3)Hang the scanner wire (e) on the inside of the main unit in the groove of the left side pulley (f) of the scan-
ner unit from below.
*: Pass through the scanner wire under the mirror frame B (j)
(4)Wind the scanner wires around the inside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from below to
above.
(5)Hang it on the pulley (g) on the left side of the scanner unit
(6)Hook the round terminals (h) to the scanner wire springs (i).
(7)Apply the procedures 1 through 6 to another scanner wires.
4-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
hg
i
b
i
h
f
g
c
d
a
f
c
d e
a
b
i e
h
g
j
b e
d
LQQHU
c a
outer
Figure 4-157
4-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Detach the scanner wire stoppers and the

mirror frame fixing tools.
6. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire
drum, align the scanner wires to the
inside.
7. Move the mirror frame B (b) left and right
to make the wire fit in correct position.
8. Refit the mirror frame A (a) in the main
unit.
9. Move the mirror frame A (a) and the mirror
frame B (b) to the left side of the main
unit, and then insert the mirror frame fix-
g g d
ing tool (d) in the front and rear positioning e
holes (c), and fix the position of the mirror f
frame A (a) and the mirror frame B (b). d
10. Attach the front wire holding plate (e) and
the rear wire holding plate (f) to the mirror
frame A (a) so as to pinch the wire (h) with
each screw (g)
11. Detach the mirror frame fixing tool (d).
12. Reattach the lamp unit in the original posi- c
tion.
c h
b
a
a h
b
Figure 4-158
4-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Drive section

(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit
Procedures

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-159
4-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Disconnect ten connectors (b) from feed

drive PWB (a).
4. Release the wire saddle (c) and remove
the wire (d).
d
c
YC10
YC9
YC1
YC11
YC6
YC2
YC3
YC7
YC4
YC5
Figure 4-160
4-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove five screws (a) (M3x8) and a

detach the feed drive unit (b).
6. Inspect the feed drive unit (b) and, clean
b
or replace it.
7. Reattach the parts in the original position. a a
a
a
b a
a
a a
Figure 4-161
(3-2) Detaching and attaching the main drive unit

Procedures
a
Figure 4-162
4-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-163
4. Disconnect three connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
Figure 4-164
4-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
5. Release four wire saddles(a). Remove

the binding band (b) with a snap and
remove the wire (c).
b c
Figure 4-165
6. Disconnect sixteen connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
2 2
YC
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
4 28 YC
Y C2 32 YC
YC 1
YC
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a (b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-166
4-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
7. Disconnect the connector (a). The bind- b

ing band (b) with a snap and disconnect
the connector (c).
Figure 4-167
8. Hook the removed wire (b) on the cut out

a
section (a) of the main unit.
Figure 4-168
4-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
9. Lift up the hook (b) of the waste toner

joint (a) to release the stopper ( c) and
pull it out in front.
IMPORTANT
a
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
without removing the waste toner joint (a), the 1 2
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
c
detected. b
Before removing the main drive unit, please
make sure to pull out the waste toner joint (a)
to the front.
Figure 4-169
10. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and detach

the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-170
4-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Detaching the waste toner forwarding unit.

11. Release 4 positions of hook (a) and
detach the waste toner forwarding unit a c
(b).
12. Inspect the waste toner forwarding unit
(b) and, clean or replace it.
13. Inspect the main drive unit (c) and, clean
or replace it.
b a
Figure 4-171
4-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the container motor

Procedures
a
Figure 4-172

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-173
4-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Figure 4-174

arrow.
a
Figure 4-175
4-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b
(b).
Figure 4-176

11. Release the hook (b) and remove right c
c
b
Figure 4-177
4-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
12. Disconnect 4 connectors (b) from the

main PWB (a) and pull them out from the
opening section (e). Remove the wire (c) c
from two wire saddles (d). e
d
b
Figure 4-178
13. Disconnect the FFC (b) and the connec-

tor (c) from the engine PWB (a)
b
c
Figure 4-179
4-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 4-180
4-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
15. Lift up the shield box (a) and pull it, and
then release the hooks (b). a
16. Open the shield box (a).
b
Note
When doing some work on the back bottom
side of the main unit with the shield box open,
please be careful not to hit your head against
the shield box.
Figure 4-181

b
container motor (a).
a
Figure 4-182
4-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8) and then

detach the container motor Assy (b)
19. Inspect the container motor Assy (b) and
b a
Figure 4-183
4-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-4) Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit

Procedures
a
Figure 4-184

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-185
4-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Figure 4-186

arrow.
a
Figure 4-187
4-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b
(b).
Figure 4-188

c
b
Figure 4-189
4-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

d
b
Figure 4-190

b
c
Figure 4-191
4-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 4-192
b
Note
the shield box.
Figure 4-193
4-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

container motor (a). Disconnect ten con- b
nectors (d) from feed image PWB (c). a
18. Remove the wire (c) from five wire sad-
dles (d).
d c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-194

20. Release six upper side hooks (c) and four c
lower side hooks (c) with a flat-blade
screwdriver (b), and then detach the b
transfer terminal cover (d).
a
d
Figure 4-195
4-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (8 locations) c
Figure 4-196
21. Disconnect three connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
Figure 4-197
4-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
22. Release four wire saddles(a). Remove

the binding band (b) with a snap and
remove the wire (c).
b c
Figure 4-198
23. Disconnect sixteen connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
22
YC
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC C3
2
Y 1
YC
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a (b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-199
4-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
24. Disconnect the connector (b) and remove

the wire (a).
b
a
Figure 4-200

IMPORTANT
a
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
without removing the waste toner joint (a), the 1 2
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
c
detected. b
Before removing the main drive unit, please
make sure to pull out the waste toner joint (a)
to the front.
Figure 4-201
4-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
26. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and detach

the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-202
27. Widen both hooks (a) and release the

hook (b), and then pull out the joint sec- d
tion (c) of the toner supply drive unit (d) to
remove it.
b b
1 1
a a
c
2
Figure 4-203
4-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
28. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8) and

detach the toner supply drive unit (b).
29. Inspect the toner supply drive unit (b)
and, clean or replace it.
a
b a
a a a
b
Figure 4-204
4-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-5) Detaching and reattaching the fuser drive unit

Procedures
a
Figure 4-205

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-206
4-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

Figure 4-207

arrow.
a
Figure 4-208
4-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

b
(b).
Figure 4-209

c
b
Figure 4-210
4-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

d
b
Figure 4-211

b
c
Figure 4-212
4-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Figure 4-213
4-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
b
Note
the shield box.
a
17. Detach the fuser unit.
Figure 4-214
4-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
18. Remove two connectors (a) and the wire

(b) from the hook (c).
b
c
Figure 4-215

20. Detach the fuser drive unit (c) in the direc-
tion of the arrow, while pressing the
release lever (b).
21. Inspect the fuser drive unit (c) and, clean
or replace it.
a
c
a
Figure 4-216
4-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

When attaching the fuser drive unit (a), pull the
lever (b) in the direction of the arrow and pass
the lever (c) on the opposite side to the open-
ing (d) before installing.
d c
b
Figure 4-217
4-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Others
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the SSD
Procedures
a
Figure 4-218
2. Remove one screw (a) (M2x4).

3. Disconnect the SSD (b) from the connec-
tor (c).
*: Use a P1 screwdriver and take care not to e
damage the screws.
*: This screw is exclusive. Please do not fix
SSD (b) with screws other than the items
below d
(7BB000204H BIND M SCREW 2x4)
c
a
b
Figure 4-219
4-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
To avoid damage when attaching the SSD (b), align the screw hole (d) to the positioning boss (e).
Please do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
SSD replacement procedures when the SSD replacement is indicated.
*: Data transfer by U026 is not available since data cannot be read when SSD is broken or it is in Read
Only mode.
Procedures
Preparation: 2 USB memory (for storing firmware and data backup)
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
(1)Store the firmware in a USB memory (USB memory A)

1. Store the newest firmware upgrade pack or set of the released firmware (Main /MMI /Panel Main/
BROWSER /DICTIONARY /Language /OCR /Color Table) in a USB memory.
*: Check the firmware applicable to the target model. Operation becomes unstable if firmware not covered
is included
In order to reboot, at least the main FW is required.
(2)Backup SSD data (USB memory B)

*: A 64GB USB memory is necessary to back up the 32GB SSD.
1. Install USB memory B.
2. Execute maintenance mode U026
Input "026" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Select [SSD].
Select [Backup]. Press the [Start] key.
Turn the power off after completion.
3. Replace with new SSD.
*: When installing SSD (8G/32G) that the capacity is different from the specification, please note that F010
(Communication error with SSD) occurs.
4. While USB memory A is installed, turn on the power.
Program loading from the SSD can't be performed, so the SSD recovery program in the SNOR on the
main board starts up and is automatically formatted
*: Please be careful that F010 will display in case if forgetting to install the USB memory.
5. Once "UPDATE completed" is displayed on the operation panel, turn the power off/on without removing
USB memory A.
(3)Updating firmware. (Refer to P.5-1)

(4)The data backed up to USB memory B is restored with U026.
(5)Install the HyPAS application from the Application screen.
*: Please check the type of Hypas application displayed on the application screen before replacing and
then reinstall.
4-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-2) Hard disk (HDD)

Procedures
a
Figure 4-220
2. Disconnect two connectors (a).

3. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8). Release
two hooks (d)(M3x8) and detach the hard d d
disk Assy (c).
b
b
c
b
Figure 4-221
4-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
When disconnecting the connector of the hard
disk (a), please be careful not to apply the
force on the battery of the main PWB (b).
There is a danger of damage to the terminal if
a force is applied b
Figure 4-222
4. Remove four pins (a) and detach the hard

disk (b). a
a
5. Inspect the hard disk (b) and, clean or
replace it.
Figure 4-223
*: Execute maintenance mode U024 (See pageP.6-35) when formatting a new HDD.
4-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
IMPORTANT
When installing the HDD (a), hold it without a
touching the PWB side (b) to avoid damage.
a
b
Figure 4-224
4-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-3) Detaching and reattaching the lift motor
Procedures
tion of the arrow.
of the arrow.
Figure 4-225

*: When installing the cassette (a), please
d
(e).
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-226
4-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

out the primary feed unit (c) from the main
unit (b) upper row. b
primary paper feed unit (e) from the main
unit (b) of the bottom row. c
Figure 4-227
4-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove the connector (a) x 2 and the c

each screw (b) (M3x8) x 3. b b
6. Detach the lift motor (c).
7. Inspect the lift motor (c) and, clean or b a
replace it.
a
b b
c
b b
b
b b c
b
Figure 4-228
Procedure when replacing

In case of the upper (A) A a b
(1)When attaching the lift motor, disconnect
the connector (b), release two hooks (d)
d
and remove the wire (c).
(2)Connect the connector (b) of the wire (c)

removed to new lift motor (e) and fasten c
two hooks (f).
e b
Figure 4-229
4-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
In case of the lower (B)

d
(1)When attaching the lift motor, remove the B b
film (b) affixed to the old lift motor (a), dis-
connect the connector (c) and remove the a
wire (d).
*: The film (b) can not be used in the new lift
motor. c
(2)Connect the connector (c) of the wire (d)
once disconnected to the new lift motor (e).
*: Don't fix the wire (d) in the hook (f).
f
e d
Figure 4-230
A
a
B a
Figure 4-231
4-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-4) Detaching and reattaching the fuser discharger unit
Procedures
(b).
Figure 4-232

b b
a a
Figure 4-233
4-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
3. Remove three screws (a)(M3x12).

4. Detach the fuser discharger unit (c) from
the IH unit (b)
5. Replace the fuser discharger unit (c).
a
c
a
b
a
Figure 4-234
After replacing the fuser discharge needle unit and IH unit, please perform the below settings.
(Clear the fuser counter value (correction))
Fuser counter clear (Execute the maintenance mode U167): Correction
4-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-5) Detaching and reattaching the exit unit

Procedures
(b).
b
Figure 4-235
2. Detach the fuser unit. a

3. Disconnect the connector (a) of the exit
unit.
4. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the exit unit (c).
5. Inspect the exit unit (c) and, clean or
replace it.
b
c
b
b b
Figure 4-236
4-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-6) Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit
Procedures
*: Remove the toner containers (a) while the power is on.
*: If the container cover (b) is locked, execute maintenance mode U033 to activate the container solenoid
and to open the container cover.
b
a
Figure 4-237

tion of the arrow.
of the arrow.
Figure 4-238
4-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

*: When installing the cassette (a), please
d
(e).
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-239
3. Release five hooks (b) of front right cover

(a) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-240
4-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4. Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum

pin (a) of the front cover for maintenance.
Figure 4-241
5. Open the front cover slightly.

6. Open the front cover (a) for maintenance.
7. Remove each screw (b) of 2 straps (c )
and remove the front cover for the main-
tenance (a) in the direction of the arrow. b c
c
b
Figure 4-242
4-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Close the front cover (a).
Figure 4-243
9. Remove the stopper (b) of the front cover

(a).
10. Slide the front cover in the direction of the
arrow and remove the fulcrum shaft (c) a
from the fulcrum section (d).
c
d
Figure 4-244
4-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
11. Remove the pin (b) while bending the ful-

crum and remove the waste toner box
cover (a).
Figure 4-245
12. Remove the waste toner box (a).
Figure 4-246
4-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b b
Figure 4-247
14. Detach the primary transfer unit.

15. Remove the drum unit.
16. Remove the developer unit.
17. Release the hook (b) with the flat-blade

screwdriver (a) and remove inner cover
(c) in the direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-248
4-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
18. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).

19. Disconnect the connector and remove the
container front cover (c).
b c a
b
b c b b
Figure 4-249

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-250
4-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
22. Disconnect the wire (b) from the connec-

tor of waste toner box unit (a).
Figure 4-251
IMPORTANT
When connecting the connector, please wire a
so that there is a margin in the wire (a).
Please be careful that the waste toner box
detection error or waste toner full detection
error in the early stage may appear if the waste
toner box unit is strained with the wiring.
Figure 4-252
4-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

IMPORTANT
a
When attempting to detach the waste toner
box unit without removing the waste toner joint 1 2
(a), the sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint
might deform and the waste toner full might be
c
mis-detected. b
Before removing the waste toner box unit,
make sure to pull the waste toner joint (a) in
front and release.
Figure 4-253
24. Pull out the rail (b) of upper cassette, and

remove one screw (a)(M3x8).
a b
Figure 4-254
4-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

26. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) of the right
front cover(b).
a
a
a
b
Figure 4-255
27. Disconnect the connector (c). Remove

seven screws (a)(M3x8) and then detach
the front inner cover (b).
c
aa b
a
a
a
a
a a
a a
a b
a
a
Figure 4-256
4-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
28. Disconnect two connector (a).

30. Release two hooks (c), and remove the b c
drum / developer relay PWB (d).
d
d d
Figure 4-257

32. Release four hooks (c) and detach the left
rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
Figure 4-258
4-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

cover (e).
c

a
When installing the upper left cover (e), hang d
four lower hooks (f) first and then hang the e
upper hook (d). d
d
b
a
Figure 4-259
4-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-260
Figure 4-261
4-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the waste toner box unit (b).
41. Inspect the waste toner unit (b) and,
Figure 4-262
After replacing new waste toner box unit, please perform the below settings.
Waste toner box weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
Items included in the waste toner box unit

A: Waste toner box unit
B: Waste toner box
Figure 4-263
Procedures
1. After replacing the waste toner box unit (A), turn the power on without installing the waste toner box.
2. Select the maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3. Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner]. Press the [Start] key.
4. Check if "OK" appears next to [Execute].
4-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
5. Insert the empty waste toner box (B) and

close the waste toner box cover (a).
a
Figure 4-264
6. Press [Waste Toner] and check if "None" is changed to "Empty". Then, press [Execute] --> the [Start] key.
7. The value next to [None / Empty] is updated and confirm the [OK] display next to [Execute].
*: If numbers (error code) is indicated next to [Execute], redo from the first step.
4-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-7) Fan motor attachment direction

*: When reattaching the fan motor, be aware of the attachment direction (intake/exhaust).
h c
a
g j
e
b
d f
Figure 4-265
a. IH PWB fan motor: intake *2 f. Power source fan motor: intake *2

b. The toner intake fan motor: intake *2 g. Exit/Front IH fan motor: intake *2
c. Controller fan motor: intake *1 h. Exit/Middle IH fan motor: intake *2
d. Developer fan motor K: intake *2 i. Exit fan motor: intake *2
e. Fuser edge fan motor: intake *2 j. The left container fan motor *1 : intake *2
*1: rating label side: the upper side, *2: rating label side: the inside, *3: rating label side: the lower side
4-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5) PWBs
Important
Before replacing the PWB, be sure to take the following procedures.
Otherwise, The PWB may be damaged.
- Disconnect the power cord.
- Press the power switch one second or more to discharge the electric charge inside the main unit.
(5-1) Detaching and attaching the engine PWB

Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
slide the rear top cover (b) in the direc-
a
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-266
4-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2. Disconnect all the connectors from the

engine PWB (b).
3. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and then
detach the engine PWB (b). a
4. Inspect or replace the engine PWB (b),
and then reattach the removed parts in a
the original position. b
a
a
YC1
YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC40
YC39 YC33 YC23 20
1
YC9 YC27 YC34 YC21 YC22
Figure 4-267
Notes when detaching a

In case of the FFC connector (YC35) with a
lock, release the lock cover (a) and pull out the
FFC (b).
b b
Figure 4-268
4-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Connect the FFC connector
When replacing the FFC of YC9 and

YC36, use the bundled set item of FFC
and two connectors and install in the fol-
YC36
lowing procedure.
YC9
Figure 4-269
1. Connect the connector the direction of

th Fig on the terminal surface (a) of the a
FFC.
*: The rib (c) at the center of the connector
(b) is facing down on the opposite side
to the FFC terminal surface (a).
b
Figure 4-270
2. Pass the FFC through the FFC insertion

hole (d) of the connector and press fit d
until the terminal surface (a) is visible.
Figure 4-271
4-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Notes when replacing the engine PWB

When replacing the engine PWB (a), make sure to remove the EEPROM (b) (YS1) from the old PWB and
install it in the new PWB.
b
YS1
YS1
b
a
a
Figure 4-272
*: After installing the main unit, install newest Engine firmware.
4-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the main PWB

Procedures
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid- a
Figure 4-273
(Step 2 to 3: Only the model that IB-35 is installed)
2. Disconnect the connector (a) from the

e
connector (c) of the main PWB (b).
3. Detach the screw (d)(M3x6) and detach
the PWB unit (e).
b
IMPORTANT
When disconnecting the connector (a) from the
main PWB (b), pull straight out against the
main PWB (b) and do not pull out diagonally.
a
c
If it is pulled slantwise it will cause damage to
FPC (f)
d e
Figure 4-274
4-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(Procedure 4 to 6: Only the model that docu-

ment processor (CIS) is installed)
4. Disconnect the connector (b) from the DP
relay PWB (a).
5. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8).
6. Detach the DP relay PWB (a) while dis- b
connecting the backside connector (d).
c
d
c
a
c
YC2
YC1
Figure 4-275
4-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

main PWB (a).
8. Remove eight screws (b)(M3x8) and b
detach the main PWB (a).
9. Inspect the main PWB (a) and replace it. b
b
b
b
b
a b
b
YC6
YC59 YC11 YC63 YC9
YC58
YC12 YC8
YC43
YC5
YC10
YC2
YC51
YC33
YC32 YC42
YC23
Figure 4-276
4-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Notes when replacing the main PWB

When replacing the main PWB, make sure to remove the SSD from the old PWB and install it in the new main
PWB. (Refer to P.4-137)
IMPORTANT
A main unit does not start up if SSD is not installed.
Please do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
Execute the following setting after replacing the main PWB.

1. Restore SSD backup data
*: Please make sure to perform before executing U004.
Execute the maintenance mode U026/Flash/Restore.
2. Return the device settings and job settings exported in advance by U917.
3. Setting the machine serial number

*: When the power is turned on, C0180 occurs as there is no machine serial number data. Therefore,
please execute U004 and match the serial number of the PWB.
Execute after checking the machine serial number of the engine board matches the serial number of the
main unit. Wrong data will be written when there is a discrepancy in U004.
(3)Turn the power switch off / on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
4. Firmware update (See page P.5-1)

*: Check the latest main firmware and upgrade it.

(2)Select [Calib].

(1)Input "410" using the numeric keys.
*: Display the execution information screen.
*: Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.
(3)Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back and the
4-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 4-277

*: The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
(5)Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
*: The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
(7)[Finish] appears after normal completion.
7. Resetting the setting value

• Confirm the set value with the maintenance report (U000) output in advance and input the value.
U251: Cassette counter value
U265: OEM setting
U065: Main Scan adjustment value
U402: Margin adjustment value
In addition, the data that changed setting at setup
• Re-register certificate (for network)

• In case if using the independent panel display, perform U224 (Install Original Panel Display) to re-register
the home screen.
• In case if the interface block setting or security level has changed in the system menu, please reconfigure
them.
• In case if the security kit is installed, enter the initial encryption code.
• Depending on the environment setting, the network needs to be reconfigured as the MAC address
(Printer name) is changed.
8. Exiting from the maintenance mode

Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
4-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-3) Detaching and attaching the main high voltage PWB

Procedures
a
Figure 4-278

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-279
4-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5. Detach the rear stay (b).
a
a
b a
Figure 4-280
4-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

main high voltage PWB (a).
7. Remove five screws (b)(M3x8).
8. Release three board supports (e).
9. Release two left hooks (c). c
10. Release upper part of three hooks (d) and
remove the main high voltage PWB (a). d
11. Inspect or replace the main high voltage
PWB (a), and then reattach the removed
parts.
c d
d
e
e
e
b
b a
b
Figure 4-281
4-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB

Procedures
a
Figure 4-282

Figure 4-283
4-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

arrow.
a
Figure 4-284

(b).
b
Figure 4-285
4-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

c
b
Figure 4-286

d
b
Figure 4-287
4-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

b
c
Figure 4-288
Figure 4-289
4-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
b
Note
the shield box.
Figure 4-290
4-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

container motor (a). Disconnect ten con- b
nectors (d) from feed image PWB (c). a
16. Remove the wire (c) from five wire sad-
dles (d).
d c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-291

18. Release six upper side hooks (c) and four c
lower side hooks (c) with a flat-blade
screwdriver (b), and then detach the b
transfer terminal cover (d).
a
d
Figure 4-292
4-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (8 locations)
c
Figure 4-293

transfer high voltage PWB (a).
20. Remove two screws (c)(M3x8).
21. Release two board supports (d) and
remove the transfer high voltage PWB d b
(a).
22. Inspect or replace the transfer high volt-
age PWB (a), and then reattach the
removed parts.
c
a
c
Figure 4-294
4-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-5) Detaching and attaching the low voltage PWB

Procedures

c
2
c 3
Figure 4-295

4. Detach the rear stay (b).
a
a
b a
Figure 4-296
4-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Disconnect two connectors (a).

6. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) and detach
a
the ground terminal (c).
7. Remove the wire saddle (d). b
a d
Figure 4-297
8. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8). c

9. Bring it to the front side and remove from
two lancing positions (b), and then
remove the PF drawer holder (c).
IMPORTANT
When attaching the MP feed roller holder (c),
make sure to hook it to two lancing positions.
a
Figure 4-298
4-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

main high voltage PWB (a).
12. Release three board supports (e).
13. Release two left hooks (c). c
14. Release upper part of three hooks (d) and
remove the main high voltage PWB (a). d
c d
d
e
e
e
b
b a
b
Figure 4-299
4-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the shield lid (b).
a
b
Figure 4-300

17. Remove the power supply shield (b) by
rotating it to pull out the lower side out
a
a
b
b
a
Figure 4-301
4-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

power source PWB (a).
20. Release two board supports (c) and c
remove the low voltage PWB (a).
21. Inspect or replace the power source PWB
(a), and then reattach the removed parts. b
c
b
a
b
YC2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 YC5
YC3
YC1
TB1 TB2
TB3
YC4
Figure 4-302
4-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5-6) Detaching and reattaching the IH PWB

Procedures
1. Lift up the operation panel (a).
a
Figure 4-303
2. Lift up the lever (b) of the sub tray (a) and d

release the lock. Then, lift up the rear
side of the main unit (c) and slide it to the
front side.
3. Remove the pin (d) by lifting up and
detach the sub tray (a).
d
b
4. Remove one screw (e)(M3×8).
5. Remove the connector cover (f). a
f
e
Figure 4-304
4-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
When the job separator is installed
b a
Figure 4-305
2. Lift the lever (b) of the upper tray (a), and

release the lock, and slide the upper tray
in the direction of the arrow, and pull out
the pin (c) and remove in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-306
4-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

arrow.
a
Figure 4-307

cover (e).
c

d
e
upper hook (d).
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-308
4-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Remove the sub tray (a) in the direction of

the arrow.
Figure 4-309

10. Remove the middle rear cover (b) in the
b a
Figure 4-310
4-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12. Detach the sensor mounting plate (b).
Figure 4-311

14. Detach the IH shield plate (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-312
4-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
15. Disconnect all connectors from the IH

PWB (b).
17. Release three board supports (c ) and
remove the IH PWB (b). b
18. Inspect or replace the IH PWB (b), and
then reattach the removed parts.
a
a
a
a
a
Figure 4-313
4-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-7) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB

Procedures
1. Push down the operation panel (a). e
2. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the
ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward
you and remove four lower hooks (d).
Release six upper side of hooks (e) and
then remove.
d
b
2
a
Figure 4-314
4-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4. Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade d
screwdriver (c).
5. Detach the exit upper cover (b) in the
direction of the arrow. c

When fasten the screw (a) of the upper exit
cover (b), fasten to pull the upper exit cover (b)
in the front side of the main unit.
b
d
c
Figure 4-315

7. Detach the operation lid (c) from the oper-
ation unit (b) in the direction of the arrow. a
Figure 4-316
4-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Disconnect three connectors (b) from the d

operation panel (a). d
9. Remove the wire guide (c).
10. Remove two screws (d)(M3x8). a
Figure 4-317
11. Lift up the operation panel (a).

12. Release two hooks (b) with a flat head
screwdriver (c) and remove the exit front
cover (d) while defeating it.
a
b
c
d
Figure 4-318

When attaching the front exit cover (d), insert two lower hooks first and then rotate them and hook them
securely.
4-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the operation section (b). b
Figure 4-319
14. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8). g

15. Detach the operation rear top cover (c)
e
from the operation unit (b).
16. Remove one screw (f)(M3x8).
g
d
17. Detach the operation cover (d) from the
operation unit (b).
18. Remove two screws (g)(M3x8).
f
19. Detach the operation rear lower cover (e)
from the operation unit (b).
b a
a
c
Figure 4-320
4-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
20. Disconnect all FFCs , FPCs and the con-

nectors from the operation PWB (c). a
21. Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8). a
22. Detach the operation panel main PWB (c)
a c a b
from the operation section (b).
23. Inspect or replace the operation panel
main PWB (c) and then reattach the
removed parts.
YC9
YC11
YC8
YC6
YC4
YC7
YC2
YC5
YC3 YC1
YC10
Figure 4-321
4-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(6) Sensor
(6-1) Attaching MP paper width sensor
1. Match the MP paper width guide (a) to

A6 size.
6
A
a
b
a
Figure 4-322
2. Insert the screw (b) for fixing the position

b
in the square hole of the MP lift plate.
Figure 4-323
3. To prevent the positioning screw (a) from

falling, turn the MP lift plate (b) over while
holding it with your finger.
Figure 4-324
4-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
4. Insert the round hole (a) of the gear in the

positioning screw (b) and attach.
b
Figure 4-325
5. Attach the D cut section (b) of the MP

paper width sensor matching to the D cut
shaft of the gear.
Figure 4-326
Set the cut out section (a) of the sensor cover

matching to the positioning screw (b) and
remove the screw (b) used for fixing the posi- c
tion. Attach the sensor cover.
a
b
Figure 4-327
4-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
4-7 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures (Option)

(1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit
Procedures
2. Remove the PF rear cover (c) from the
paper feeder (b).
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-328
4-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Disconnect the connector (b) of the motor

(a).
4. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the PF drive unit (d). a
5. Inspect or replace the PF drive unit (d),
and then reattach the removed parts in
the original position. b
c
c
c
c
Figure 4-329
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor

Procedures
Figure 4-330
4-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Remove the each connector (a) and the

each screw (b) (M3x8) x 3. b a
4. Detach the PF lift motor (c).
5. Inspect, clean or replace PF lift motor (c)
the original position.
c
b
b
b c
b
a
c
b
b
b b
b c
Figure 4-331
4-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Procedure when replacing

a b
(1)When attaching the PF lift motor, disconnect
the connector (b), release two hooks (d) d
(2)Connect the connector (b) of the wire (c)

removed to new PF lift motor (e) and fas- c
ten two hooks (f).
e b
Figure 4-332
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-333
4-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the PF

PWB (a).
4. Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and
detach the PF PWB (a).
5. Inspect or replace the PF PWB (a), and
b
a
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-334
4-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Large Capacity Feeder (PF-7110)

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
b
c a
a
a
a
Figure 4-335
3. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8).

4. Detach the interface Assy (a).
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-336
4-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
5. Release three wire saddle (a) and the

wire stopper (b), and remove the wire (c).
a a a b
Figure 4-337
6. Pull the lever (b) of the wire holder (a)

and remove the wire holder (a).
a b
a
Figure 4-338
4-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Remove five screws (b)(M3x8) and

detach the PF drive unit (a) in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
8. Inspect or replace the PF drive unit (a),
a
b
b
b b
Figure 4-339
4-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
b
c a
a
a
a
Figure 4-340
3. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8).

4. Detach the interface Assy (a).
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-341
4-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Disconnect the connector (c). Remove

three screws (b)(M3x8) and detach the lift
motor 2 (a).
b a
b c
Figure 4-342

7. Release the hook (d) from the square
hole (c) of the side frame and remove the
PF lift motor 1 unit (a).
b d
b
b
Figure 4-343
4-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9. Disconnect the connector (c) and detach
the PF lift motor 1 (a).
10. Inspect or replace each PF lift motor and
refit all removed parts. a
b
c
b
Figure 4-344
4-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
1. Remove five screws (a) (M3x8).
paper feeder (b).
b
c a
a
a
Figure 4-345
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the PF

PWB (a).
PF PWB (a).
c
b a
b
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-346
4-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Side Feeder (PF-7120)

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-347
3. Disconnect three connectors (a) and the

connector (b) from the PF PWB. a d
4. Remove two wire stoppers (c) and
remove the wire.
b a
a
c c
Figure 4-348
4-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and

detach the PF drive unit (a) from the main
c
unit while pushing in the switch lever (c).
b
b
Figure 4-349
4-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Procedures
paper feeder (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-350
3. Release six wire stoppers and the cable

cramp, and remove the wire of the PF lift
motor (a).
4. Disconnect the connector (b) and (c).
d
d
d
d
c d a
e
Figure 4-351
4-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and

detach the PF lift motor unit (a).
6. Inspect or replace the PF lift motor unit
(a), and then reattach the removed parts
in the original position.
Figure 4-352
4-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
paper feeder (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-353
3. Disconnect all connectors from the PF c

PWB (a).
5. Remove the PF PWB (a) from the two
hooks (c).
b
YC12 YC11
YC14
YC17
YC5
YC15
YC2
YC8 YC4
YC10
YC7
YC13
YC16 YC1
YC18 YC3 YC6
Figure 4-354
4-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor
Procedures
1. Open the document processor (a).
Figure 4-355
2. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and slide

the rear top cover (b).
Figure 4-356
4-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

detach the DP rear cover (b).
Figure 4-357
Figure 4-358
4-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove the DP wire cover (a).
Figure 4-359
6. Disconnect the connector (a) of DP wire.

7. Remove the DP wire from wire saddle (b)
and wire saddle (c)
Figure 4-360
4-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Disconnect the connector (a) of DP wire

from the wire holder (d).
Figure 4-361
9. Lift up the document processor (a) in the

direction of the arrow and remove the
hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
c
b
Figure 4-362
4-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (b) of the docu-
ment processor (a).
b
Figure 4-363
2. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8) and detach

the DP rear left cover (b).
Figure 4-364
4-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-3) Detaching and attaching the DP PWB

Procedures
ment processor (a).
b
Figure 4-365
2. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8) and detach

the DP rear left cover (b).
Figure 4-366
4-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3. Open the lid (a) and take the DP rear mid-

dle cover (b) out.
Figure 4-367
4. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8) and detach a

the DP rear right cover (b).
Figure 4-368
4-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove two wire stoppers (a). b

6. Remove one screw (b)(M3x8) and detach
the wire guide (c).
a
Figure 4-369
7. Disconnect all the connectors from the c

DP PWB (b). a
9. Remove the DP PWB (b) from the docu-
ment processor (c).
10. Inspect or replace the DP PWB (b) and a
reattach the removed parts at the original
position.
b
Figure 4-370
4-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor
Procedures
Figure 4-371

remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding
Figure 4-372
4-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
Figure 4-373
Figure 4-374
4-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Remove the DP wire cover (a).
Figure 4-375
6. Disconnect the connector (a), release two

wire saddle (c) and remove the DP wire
(b).
7. Disconnect the connector (d), release the
wire saddle (f) and remove the DP wire
e
(e).
f a
c b
c
Figure 4-376
4-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8. Disconnect the connector (a) of DP wire

from the wire holder (d).
a
Figure 4-377
9. Open the document processor.

10. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and the b a a
pin (b).
Figure 4-378
4-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
11. Slide the document processor (a) in the

direction of the arrow and remove the
hinge (c) from the main unit (b). b
a
c
c
Figure 4-379

Procedures
ment processor (a).
2. Remove the Strap (c) from the DP top
cover.
b
c
Figure 4-380
4-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
b
a
a
Figure 4-381
(5-3) Detaching and attaching the DP PWB

Procedures
ment processor (a).
cover (b).
b
c
Figure 4-382
4-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

a
b
a
a
Figure 4-383

DP PWB (b). c a
6. Remove the DP PWB (b) from the docu-
ment processor (c).
7. Inspect or replace the DP PWB (b) and b
reattach the removed parts at the original
a
position.
Figure 4-384
4-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the DPCIS

Procedures
ment processor (a).
cover (b).
b
c
Figure 4-385

a
b
a
a
Figure 4-386
4-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
4. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8) at the

machine rear side, and detach DPCIS
unit (a) upward.
Figure 4-387
5. Disconnect two connectors (b) from the

DPSHD PWB (a).
b
Figure 4-388
4-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Remove the DPCIS unit (a) while pushing b

the two hooks (c) of the front and rear 1 b
glass holder (b) in the direction of the
arrow to release them.
7. Detach the DPCIS glass (d) and DPCIS
(e) from DPCIS Unit (a). 2 2 f
c c
IMPORTANT
Check the position of black marking (f) for dis-
b
tinction of the front / back side of the glass.
Also, make sure not to touch the glass surface.
If it is dirty, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
Figure 4-389
8. Disconnect the connector (e).

9. Release four pins (c) with the flat-head
screwdriver (b) and detach DPSHD PWB
(d).
10. Replace the DPCIS and then reattach the
removed parts in the original position. b
11. When replacing the new DPCIS Assy,
a c
execute the following procedures.
12. Clean the DPCIS roller and contact glass
(CIS).
13. Execute maintenance mode U091 (White c
lines correction setting). (Refer to P.6-77) e
14. Make test copy with gray originals. d c
15. When white streak appears on the image
of the test copy, execute step 13, 14
again, repeating till white streak disap-
pears.
c
Figure 4-390
16. Execute maintenance mode U411
(scanner auto adjustment) (Refer to
P.6-202)
4-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)

(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the DF PWB
Procedures
1. Slide the DF main unit (a) in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-391
2. Open the staple cover (a).
Figure 4-392
4-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 4-393

5. Lift up the DF front cover (b) and release
two hooks (c) to detach it.
c
a b
Figure 4-394
4-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

DF PWB (e). YC4 YC8 YC13 YC9
YC7
7. Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and YC17

YC20
YC5
detach the DF PWB (a). YC10

YC11
8. Inspect or replace the DF PWB (b), and YC6
YC16
YC3
then reattach the removed parts in the YC19
original position.
b
a b b
Figure 4-395
4-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(6-2) Detaching and reattaching the DF staple unit

Procedures
1. Open the front cover (a).
3. remove the upper left cover (c).
b
When installing the upper left cover (c),
hang four lower hooks (d) first and then c
hang the upper hook (e).
a
b
Figure 4-396
Figure 4-397
5. Pull the PF main unit (a) in the direction of

the arrow and detach it.
Figure 4-398
4-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
IMPORTANT
When placing the DF main unit (a), keep
the attaching section (b) from contact to
avoid deformation of it.
a
b
Figure 4-399
6. Slide the DF main unit (a) in the direction

of the arrow.
7. Open the staple cover (b).
a
8. Remove the screw (c)(M3x8).
b
c
Figure 4-400

c b
10. Lift up the DF front cover (b) and release
two hooks (c) to detach it.
Figure 4-401
4-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
11. Remove the wire saddle (a).

12. Disconnect two connectors (b).
b b
Figure 4-402
13. Turn over the DF main unit (a).

b a
14. Slide the drawer unit (b) in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-403

16. Remove the DF front cover sensor (b)
Figure 4-404
4-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
17. Slide the DF stapler unit (a) toward close b

to the center.
18. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the DF staple unit (a). b
Figure 4-405
19. Slide the DF stapler unit (a) detached in

the direction of the arrow. (1), (2)
20. Rotate so that the gear section (b) sit on
the upper position. (3)
21. Rotate the Staple cartridge holder (c) to
sit at the opening section (d). (4) 1
a
d
b
c
Figure 4-406
4-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
22. Pull the DF stapler unit (a) through the

opening.
23. Inspect or replace the DF staple unit (a),
Figure 4-407
IMPORTANT
When detaching/attaching the DF stapler
unit (a) through the opening, take care to
avoid damage to the parts such as gears.
Figure 4-408
*: When replacing the DF stapler unit (a),

detach the stapler guide (b) and attach
the new DF stapler unit.
a
b
Figure 4-409
4-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
1. Open the DF front cover (a).
2. Pull out the PH tank to remove it.
Figure 4-410
3. Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under

the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and lift
it up to release the lock and open the sta-
ple cover (a).
Figure 4-411
4-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

DF staple unit (a).
a
b
b
Figure 4-412
5. Lift up the front side of the DF staple unit

(a) to release the hook (b) and pull it out
toward you.
Figure 4-413
4-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
2. Remove the cover (b).
Figure 4-414

4. Releases 3 hooks (b) and remove the DF
rear cover (c).
c
a a
Figure 4-415
4-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

DF PWB (e). YC4 YC8 YC9
6. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8). YC17
7. Remove board support (c) and remove YC5

YC10
YC11
the DF PWB (a). YC19

U3
YC16
then reattach the removed parts in the

original position.
b
c
a
b
Figure 4-416
4-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)

Procedures
1. Open the DF front cover (a).
2. Pull out the PH tank to remove it.
a
b
Figure 4-417
3. Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under

the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and lift
it up to release the lock and open the sta-
ple cover (a).
Figure 4-418
4-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

DF staple unit (a).
a
b
b
Figure 4-419
5. Lift up the front side of the DF staple unit

(a) to release the hook (b) and pull it out
toward you.
Figure 4-420
4-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Procedures
2. Remove the cover (b).
Figure 4-421
3.Remove 3 screws (a) (M4x8).

4. Detach the DF rear cover (b). b
Figure 4-422
4-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Disconnect all the connectors from the YC3 YC12 YC18 YC17 YC16
YC19
DF PWB (e). YC21

YC14
6. Remove six screws (b) (M3x8) and YC5 YC20
detach the DF PWB (a). YC4

YC15

YC7 YC22
then reattach the removed parts in the YC9

YC6
original position. YC10

YC2
YC1
U3
YC23
YC13
a
b
b b
Figure 4-423
4-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures

Check the maintenance counts by the maintenance mode U901.
(1) Main unit

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
PM maintenance (x1000 counts) Remark

Parts name Parts No.
Set UP User Call 300 600 900 1200 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
A <Set Up>
1 TONER (CARTRIDGE) --------
2 IMAGE QUALITY -------- CH CH CH CH CH CH

AD AD AD AD AD AD
MK-8515A -------- RE RE DK(BK),DV(BK),TR,2ND TR ROLLER
FK,FILTER,PARTS PULLEY SET
MK-8515B -------- RE RE COLOR DV-3UNIT
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS -------- CH CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 SHEET DUCT PU H 302ND04B80 CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM

2ND04B80 In-machine cooling air filter
3 FILTER TRANSFER 302ND33240 CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
2ND33240 Primary transfer cooling air intake filter
4 FILTER COVER RIGHT 302ND33300 CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
2ND33300 PWB cooling air intake filter
C <PF and Conveying section>
1 PARTS CLEANER REGIST ASSY SP 302ND94020 CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
2ND94020 RE Paper dust removal
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP 302ND94350 CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
2ND94350 RE RE RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
3 PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP 302ND94210 CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP 302ND94340 CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
5 ROLLERS, PULLEYS -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
6 GUIDES -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
D <Exit and Duplex Section>
4-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

1 ROLLERS, PULLEYS -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 GUIDES -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
E <Image scanner section>

1 PARTS CONTACT-GLASS ASSY(I)SP 302RH94150 CL CL CL CL CL CL Slit glass for DP: Dry cloth after cleaning with alcohol (FACE SIDE)
2RH94150 When inatalling DP,clean with dry cloth.
PARTS CONTACT-GLASS 302RH94160 Contact glass for putting the original on: Dry cloth after cleaning with alcohol (FACE SIDE)
ASSY(C)SP
2RH94160
2 MIRROR A/B/C -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
3 LENS ISU -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
4 PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP 302ND93120 CL Replace at the image failure

2ND93120 RE
5 RAIL ISU R/F -------- LU Apply grease only at an abnormal sound, shake, etc
Grease to the optical rail: PG-671(P/N: 6017000)
6 SENSOR OPT. 7NXPS181EL1M CH Clean with alcohol or wipe with a dry cloth only at an error (sensor transmitter and receiver
H01 only)
CL
7 PARTS ISU 302ND93110 CH Replace at an image failure
2ND93110 RE
F <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH CH CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH CH CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
RE
3 Each gears -------- CH CH CH CH CH In case if there is abnormal sound, apply EM-50 LP coating to teeth
LU (PN 7BG010009H GREASE MOLYKOTE EM-50LP 50G)
G <MP tray>
1 PULLEY PAPER FEED 302ND94380 CL CH CH CH CH CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (If no replacement)
RE RE RE RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count : Target to replace at 150K.
2 PULLEY SEPARATION 302F909171 CL CH CH CH CH CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (If no replacement)
RE RE RE RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count : Target to replace at 150K.
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2) Option
(2-1)DP-7100

A <Set Up>
1 IMAGE QUALITY ------ CH CH CH CH CH CH
AD AD AD AD AD AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol
2 DP glass of the main unit CH CL CL CL CL Main unit side
CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

1 PARTS PAPER FEED ASSY SP 303R794100 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
3R794100 CH:Performing U905 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
2 PULLEY SEPARATION 303LL07190 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
3LL07190 CH:Performing U905 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
3 SENSOR OPT 7NXPS133GD1+ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Airbrush or dry cloth

H01
D <Conveying and Reversing section>
1 ROLLER REGISTRATION 303R724020 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R724020
2 PULLEY, REGISTRATION 303P724170 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X5 3P724170
3 ROLLER CONVEYING LEFT 303R724030 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R724030
4 PULLEY CONVEYING BK 303M824210 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X5 3M824210
5 ROLLER CONVEYING RIGHT 303R724040 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R724040
X3 3M824210
4-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

7 ROLLER LOOP 303R729010 CL CL CL CL CL
3R729010
X4 3M824210
9 ROLLER EXIT 303R728010 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R728010
10 PULLEY EXIT 3HK10030 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3HK10030
11 ROLLER SHIFT 303R729020 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R729020
12 PULLEY EXIT 3HK10030 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3HK10030
13 GUIDE READING 303R724060 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3R724060
14 SENSOR OPT 7NXPS124GD1+ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Airbrush or dry cloth

H01
X2
E <Other section>
1 PLATE ORIGINAL 303JC04201 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3JC04201
4-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(2-2)DP-7110

A <Set Up>
1 IMAGE QUALITY ------ CH CH CH CH CH CH
AD AD AD AD AD AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol
2 DP glass of the main unit CH CL CL CL CL Main unit side
CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

C <PF Section>
1 BELT PF 303LL07531 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
2 PULLEY LF 303M407480 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
3M407480 CH:Performing U905 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
3 PULLEY SEPARATION 303LL07190 CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
4 PARTS GUIDE SEPARATE ASSY 303M494200 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol

SP
3M494200
D <Conveying Section>
1 PARTS ROLLER REGISTRATION 303M494070 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

SP
3M494070
2 PULLEY, REGISTRATION BK 303M424300 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
X8 3M424300
3 PULLEY REG B BK 303M424310 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
3M424310
4 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING 303M494090 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

LEFT SP
3M494090
5 PULLEY GUIDE READING 303LL24190 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
X10 3LL24190
6 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING 303M494100 CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

RIGHT SP
3M494100
4-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

7 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING 303M494080 CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth

UPPER SP
3M494080
8 PARTS ROLLER EJECT SP 303M494110 CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth
3M494110
9 GUIDE READING 303M424251 CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth
X3 3M424251
10 SENSOR OPT. 7NXPS124GD1+ CL CL CL CL CL CL: Airbrush or dry cloth

H01
E <Table Section>
1 SENSOR OPT. 7NX- CL CL CL CL CL CL: Airbrush or dry cloth

PSR11GD6FH01
F <Other Section>
1 PLATE ORIGINAL 303JC04201 CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3JC04201
G <CIS Section>
1 PARTS ROLLER CIS SP ------ CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 GLASS CIS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (wet cloth is strictly prohibited.)
4-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-3)PF-7100

Parts name Parts No. Based on cycle of the
Set UP User Call Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH
AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
1 PARTS PULLEY SET SP 302ND94700 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94700 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP 302ND94350 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94350
3 PULLEY FEED 302N406030 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2N406030
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP 302ND94340 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94340
5 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOW SP 302ND94360 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS 2ND94360
6 GUIDES -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
D <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
4-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-4)PF-7110

machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH
AD
B <Cover>
1 PARTS PULLEY SET SP 302ND94700 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94700 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP 302ND94350 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94350
3 PULLEY FEED 302N406030 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2N406030
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP 302ND94340 CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2ND94340
5 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOW SP 302ND94360 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS 2ND94360
6 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOWER SP 303RC94070 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS 3RC94070
D <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
4-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-5)PF-7120

machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH CH:check the center alignment gap.
AD (check after center adjustment of copier)
B <PF Section>
1 PULLEY FEED 302K906350 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2K906350 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2 PULLEY RETARD 302K906360 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
3 PULLEY PICKUP 302K906370 CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
4 PARTS ROLLER ASSIST SP 303NG94060 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3NG94060
5 CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV44041 CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
X2 2KV44041 RE
4-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-6)AK-7100

machine
2 PARTS ROLLER FEED A SP 303RG94020 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RG94020
3 PARTS ROLLER FEED C SP 303RG94040 CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RG94040
4 PULLEYS -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-7)DF-7100

machine
A <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS, TRAY -------- CL Alcohol or dry cloth
B <PF, Conveying and exit sections>
1 ROLLER FEED 303RD24010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RD24010
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER 303RD07020 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RD07020
3 ROLLER CONVEYING 303RD24020 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RD24020
4 PULLEY MIDDLE A 302H722760 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 2H722760
5 ROLLER MIDDLE 303RD36110 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RD36110
6 PULLEY MIDDLE 303NB36661 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3NB36661
7 PULLEY PAPER FEED 3BR07040 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3BR07040
8 PULLEY EXIT 303RD36130 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3RD36130
9 PULLEY EXIT ONEWAYCLUTCH 303RD36180 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
X2 3RD36180
10 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT CENTER 303NB36500 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
X2 3NB36500
11 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT 303RD36200 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
X2 3RD36200
C <Sensor>
1 SENSOR OPT 7NX- CL Airblow

PSR11GD6MH01
4-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

machine
2 SENSOR OPT 7NXPS124GD1+ CL Airblow

H01

SG2A241++H01
x7
4-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-8)DF-7110

machine
A <Cover>
1 ROLLER FEED LOWER 303RW07010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW07010
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER 303RW07030 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW07030
3 ROLLER MIDDLE 303RW36010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW36010
x2 3NB36661
5 ROLLER EXIT 303NB36340 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3NB36340
6 PULLEY EXIT 303NB36200 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x2 3NB36200
7 ROLLER SUB CONVEYING 303RW24040 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW24040
8 ROLLER SUB EXIT 303RW24050 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW24050
9 PULLEY SUB EJECT 303B817020 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x2 3B817020
10 PULLEY SUB EJECT 303NB24311 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x4 3NB24311
11 STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT 63212210 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
63212210
3NB36500
13 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT SIDE 303NB36490 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
x2 3NB36490
4-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

machine
14 STATIC-ELIMINATOR SUB EJECT 303NB24300 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
3NB24300
C <Sensor>

H01
x2

SG2A141++H01
x16

SG2A241++H01
4 SENSOR A, SEPARATION 303H327460 CL Airblow
3H327460
5 SENSOR OPT 7NXKB1281AA2 CL Airblow

H01

PSR11GD6FH01
4-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
(2-9)DF-7120

machine
A <Cover>
1 ROLLER FEED LOWER 303RW07010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW07010
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER 303RW07030 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW07030
3 ROLLER MIDDLE 303RW36010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RW36010
x2 3NB36661
5 ROLLER EXIT 303NC36010 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3NC36010
6 PULLEY EXIT 303NB36200 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x2 3NB36200
7 STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT 63212210 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
63212210
3NB36500
9 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT SIDE 303NB36490 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
x2 3NB36490
C <Sensor>

H01
x2

SG2A241++H01
3 SENSOR OPT. 7NX- CL Airblow

SG2A141++H01
x8
4-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

machine
4 SENSOR A, SEPARATION 303H327460 CL Airblow
3H327460
5 SENSOR OPT 7NXKB1281AA2 CL Airblow

H01
4-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update
Execute when upgrading the below firmware

*: Parallel process can be done by each group to reduce processing time.
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller firmware DL_CTRL.2NK CTRL
2 Panel data DL_PANL.2ND PANL
3 Optional language data DL_OPT.2ND OPT
4 Dictionary data DL_DIC.2ND DIC
5 Browser data DL_BRWS.2ND BRWS
6 OCR dictionary data DL_OCR.2R6 OCR
[GROUP2 UPDATE]
step
1 Slot 1 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX1
2 Slot 2 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX2
[GROUP3 UPDATE]
step
1 INNER PUNCH DL_03RF.2ND INNER-PU
2 MAIL BOX DL_03N0.2ND MAIL-BOX
3 BOOKLET DL_03ND.2ND BOOKLET
4 PUNCH UNIT DL_03NK.2RH P-UNIT
5 4000-sheets DF DL_03RW.2ND DF
1000-sheets DF
INNER DF DL_03ND.2ND INNER-DF
6 DP DL_03R7.2ND DP-REV
DL_03R7.2ND DP-CIS
7 A4 Side Feeder DL_03RL.2ND PF-SIDE
8 3000-sheets PF DL_03RB.2ND PF-UNDER
500 sheets x 2PF
9 Engine firmware DL_ENGN.2NK ENGN
5-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[GROUP4 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available.
[GROUP5 UPDATE]
step
1 Panel firmware DL_SPNL.2ND SPNL
5-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Signature verification when updating the FW

Perform signature verification on the update file to prevent the FW update to be executed by illegally falsi-
fied update file
File names of the signature and firmware certificate

Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file
name
Controller data 2NK_CTRL_sign.bin 2NK_CTRL_cert.pem
Panel data 2ND_PANL_sign.bin 2ND_PANL_cert.pem
Optional language data 2ND_OPT_sign.bin 2ND_OPT_cert.pem
Dictionary data 2R6_DIC_sign.bin 2ND_DIC_cert.pem
Browser data 2ND_BRWS_sign.bin 2ND_BRWS_cert.pem
OCR dictionary data 2R6_OCR_sign.bin 2R6_OCR_cert.pem
FAX PWB 3R2_FAX_sign.bin 3R2_FAX_cert.pem
INNER PUNCH 2ND_03RF_sign.bin 2ND_03RF_cert.pem
PUNCH UNIT 2RH_03NK_sign.bin 2RH_03NK_cert.pem
BOOKLET 2ND_03ND_sign.bin 2ND_03ND_cert.pem
MAIL BOX 2ND_03N0_sign.bin 2ND_03N0_cert.pem
4000-sheets DF
2ND_03RW_sign.bin 2ND_03RW_cert.pem
1000-sheets DF
INNER DF 2ND_03RD_sign.bin 2ND_03RD_cert.pem
2ND_03R7_sign.bin 2ND_03R7_cert.pem
DP 2ND_03R8_sign.bin 2ND_03R8_cert.pem
2ND_03RJ_sign.bin 2ND_03RJ_cert.pem
3000-sheets PF
2ND_03RB_sign.bin 2ND_03RB_cert.pem
500-Sheets x 2 PF
A4 Side Feeder 2ND_03RL_sign.bin 2ND_03RL_cert.pem
Engine PWB 2NK_ENGN_sign.bin 2NK_ENGN_cert.pem
Panel PWB 2ND_SPNL_sign.bin 2ND_SPNL_cert.pem
Note when upgrading the firmware

When using a USB memory requiring a long time to start up, the main unit will start up before executing the
firmware update. And it is not possible to enter the firmware update mode.
Maintenance mode U025 firmware update (S): Execute the firmware update by the Firmware Update
(Security)
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file
(skip files: ES_SKIP.ON) in the root folder of the USB memory.
*: If the high-speed master file exists, skip to update the same version of the firmware.
5-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Procedures
1. Push the power switch (a) to turn on the
power.
2. Push the power switch (a) to turn off the
power.
3. Insert the USB memory (b) with the
firmware into the USB memory slot (c).
4. Push the power switch (a) to turn on the
power.
c
b
Figure 5-1
䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢 FW -U PD ATE䢢䢢䢢䢢
5. [FW-UPDATE] and the progress indica-
䢢
tor is displayed. &75/ 0$,/%2;
䢢 3$1/
*: Several kinds of firmware updates are 237
%22./(7
䢢 381,7
processed simultaneously. ',& ')
䢢 %5:6
,11(5')
䢢 3&/87 '35(9
3&/87 '3&,6
䢢
&&/87 '3/2:
䢢 &&/87 3)6,'(
2&5 3)81'(5
䢢
)$; (1*1
)$; 631/
,11(538
Figure 5-2
FW -UPDATE䢢䢢䢢䢢 Com pleted

6. Once [Completed] is displayed, the firm-
ware update is completed. &75/1'B 0$,/%2;1R&KDQJH
7. Check if the new firmware versions are 3$1/1R&KDQJH %22./(71R&KDQJH
2371R&KDQJH 381,71R&KDQJH
displayed. ',&1R&KDQJH ')1R&KDQJH
%5:61R&KDQJH ,11(5')1R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '35(91R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '3&,61R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH '3/2:1R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH 3)6,'(1R&KDQJH
2&51R&KDQJH 3)81'(51R&KDQJH
)$; (1*11'B
)$; 631/1R&KDQJH
,11(5381R&KDQJH
Figure 5-3
*: If there is no corresponding master file, display [No Change].
[*] is displayed after the firmware version if the firmware update is skipped.
*: [----------] is displayed when the FAX PWB, the option equipment, etc. is not installed.
5-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Display the result of the signature verification

Official signature verification file Display the result
Both certificate and signature files are available and they were Version number
successfully verified.
Both certificate and signature files are available however they S000
were failed for verification.
There is no certificate / signature files. S001
Or either of them does not exist.
Note
Please do not turn off the power or remove the USB memory (b) while updating.
8. Turn off the power and remove the USB memory.

9. Turn on the power and check if [Home] screen appears, and then turn off the power.
In case of an error and finish FW -U P D A T E E rror

When an error occurs while updating the firm-
&75/1'B
ware, stop the process immediately and dis- 3$1/1R&KDQJH
0$,/%2;1R&KDQJH
%22./(71R&KDQJH
plays the error message and error code. 2371R&KDQJH 381,71R&KDQJH
',&1R&KDQJH ')1R&KDQJH
%5:61R&KDQJH ,11(5')1R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '35(91R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '3&,61R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH '3/2:1R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH 3)6,'(1R&KDQJH
2&51R&KDQJH 3)81'(51R&KDQJH
)$; (1*1(UURU
)$; 631/1R&KDQJH
,11(5381R&KDQJH
Figure 5-4
Code Description Code Description

0000 Others S000 Other signature verification error *1
0100 No Master file S001 Signature verification file is missing
0200 Version mismatch of the master file N001 Network connection failed. *2
(There is no update target interrupted)
03xx No Download File (No.xx)
04xx File (No.xx) Checksum mismatch N002 Network connection failed. *3
(There is an update target interrupted)
05xx File (No.xx) Preparation failure
x6xx File (No.xx) Oversize
08xx File (No.xx) Writing failure
*1: Including the expired FM certificate

*2: Automatically restarted for the normal start-up since the normal start-up is available next time.
*3: Change to the USB update mode without restarting automatically as normal start-up might not be possible
next time.
5-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Safe-Update
In case if the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or removing the USB memory during the
firmware update, the firmware update will be retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power switch on without removing the USB memory.
*: The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down will be skipped.
5-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode
Service mode for the main unit maintenance and repair is equipped.
(1) Executing method of the maintenance mode
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the [▲] [▼] keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the [▲] [▼] keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Maintenance modes list

Classifi- No. Name of maintenance mode Outline
cation
General U000 Printing Maintenance Report Print the reports and export them to a USB
memory
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Exit from the maintenance mode
U002 Set Factory Default Initialize to the factory-default setting
U003 Setting the telephone number of the Set the telephone number of the service person.
service person
U004 Machine Number Display and set the machine serial number
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Set the maintenance mode ID
U018 Firmware self verification Check the firmware falsification.
U019 Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the PWB
Initializa- U021 Initializing Memory Initialize the backup RAM
tion
U024 Formatting an HDD Format the HDD
U025 Firmware update (S) Update the firmware
U026 Retrieve the backup data Retrieve the backup data
Driving U030 Motor operation check Drive the drive motor
Paper U031 Checking the conveying switch Check the conveying switch On/Off
feed
Convey- U032 Clutch operation check Check the paper conveying clutch operation
ing U033 Solenoid operation check Drive the paper conveying and toner supply
Cooling solenoids
U034 Paper timing data adjustment Adjust the leading edge timing and the center
line
U035 Folio size setting Set length and width of Folio paper.
U037 Fan motor operation check Drive each fan motor.
U051 Registration paper loop amount Adjust the paper loop amount between the roll-
adjustment ers
U053 Adjusting the motor speed Set speed correction of each motor.
U059 Fan mode setting Set the drive mode of the conveying fan motor
Optical U061 Lamp lighting check Turn the exposure lamp on
section
U063 Shading position adjustment Change the scanner shading position
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table Adjust the magnification for table scanning
scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjust the leading edge timing for table scan-
ning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center Adjust the center line for table scanning
line
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjust the starting position for DP scanning
6-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cation
Optical U070 DP magnification adjustment Adjust the magnification for DP scanning
section U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Tim- Adjust the DP scanning timing
ing
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjust the center line for DP scanning
U073 Scanner motor operation check Operate the scanner in the set condition
U074 Adjusting the DP input characteris- Set the DP image scanning density
tics
U087 Setting the DP scanning position Change the scanning position as the corrective
change operation measures for the black lines
U089 MIP-PG pattern output Output MIP-PG pattern
U091 White lines correction setting Set the white lines detection threshold
U099 Original size detection setting Check the operation of the original size detec-
tion and set detection threshold
High volt- U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
age sec-
tion
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment Setting and outputting the primary transfer volt-
age
U106 Secondary transfer voltage adjust- Set the secondary transfer voltage correction
ment value
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage Set the transfer belt cleaning voltage
adjustment
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment Set control voltage of the transfer belt unit clean-
ing
U110 Drum counter Display the drum counter
U117 Drum unit number Display the drum number
U118 Drum unit history Display the drum history
U119 Drum unit initial setting Set the initial LSU light intensity
U120 Drum drive distance counter Display the drum drive distance counter
U122 Primary transfer unit number Display the primary transfer unit number
U123 Primary transfer unit history Display the machine number and the primary
transfer unit counter history
U127 Clearing the transfer count Display the transfer counter value
U128 Transfer timing adjustment Adjust the transfer high-voltage output ON/OFF
timing
Devel- U131 Toner sensor control voltage adjust- Adjust the toner sensor control voltage
oper sec- ment
tion
U132 Forcible toner supply operation Execute the toner supply in the toner control
level
U135 Checking the toner motor operation Drive the toner motor
6-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

cation
Devel- U136 Toner level detection setting Set the number of pages printable at toner near
oper sec- end
tion U139 Temperature, humidity Display the machine inside and outside humidity
U140 Developer bias adjustment Adjust the developer bias values or set the high
altitude mode.
U147 Setting the toner applying mode Set the overcharge toner removal mode
U148 Drum refresh mode setting Set auto drum refresh mode
U155 Toner sensor output value Display the toner sensor output
U156 Toner control level adjustment Display and adjust the toner empty level
U157 Developer drive time Display/set the developer drive time
U158 Developer counter Display/set the developer counter
U159 Toner container function setting Set the toner container lock and waste toner box
Fuser U161 Fuser control temperature adjust- Set the fuser control temperature
section ment
U164 Fuser unit history Display the machine number and the fuser unit
history
U165 Fuser unit number Display the fuser unit number
U167 Clearing the fuser counter Display/clear the counter value
U169 Setting the fuser power source Display/set the IH PWB control voltage
U193 Fuser drive control setting Set the fuser drive control setting
U197 Setting Fuser Control Set the fuser control
U199 Fuser temperature Monitor the fuser temperature
Opera- U200 All LEDs lighting Light all the LEDs on the operation panel
tion sec- U201 Initializing the touch panel Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch
tion / panel
Support
equip- U203 Check DP operation Check paper conveying operation for the docu-
ment ment processor alone
U204 Key card/key counter setting Key card/key counter connection setting
U206 Set the coin vendor Set the coin vendor
U207 Operation key check Check the operation panel key operation
U208 Setting the paper size for the side Set paper size of side feeder
deck
U211 Enhancement unit connection set- Set the connection of the enhancement devices
ting
U221 USB host lock function setting Set USB Host lock function ON/OFF
U222 Setting the IC card type Set the ID card type
U223 Operation panel lock Set On/Off of the operation unit lock function
U224 Setting Original Panel Display Set the opening screen
U230 Optional device serial number Display the serial number of the optional devices
6-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

cation
Opera- U234 Setting destination for punch Set the punch unit destination
tion sec- U237 Finisher exit volume limit Set the tray stack capacity
tion /
Support U240 Finisher operation check Check the drive operation
equip- U241 Finisher switch check Check the switch operation
ment
U243 Checking the DP motor Drive the DP motor and solenoid
U244 Checking DP switch Drive the DP sensor
U245 Checking the message Check message
U246 Finisher adjustment Set adjustment value of the finisher
U247 Paper feed operation check Drive the PF motor and clutch
U249 Finisher line test Execute the 4000-sheet finisher operation test
Mode U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set Change the preset value
Setting U251 clearing the maintenance counter Display/clear/change the counter value
U252 Destination Set the machine operation and display for each
specification of the destination
U253 Switching the double/single counts Set the counting method by each color mode
U260 Switching feed/exit count Set the count-up timing
U265 Setting by destination Set the OEM code
U271 Setting the page count unit Set the counting unit of the long size paper
U278 Delivery date setting Set the mono color copy count mode
U285 Set Service Status Page Register delivery date
U286 Optional language setting Set the print coverage report output
U287 Automatic recovery function Add/delete/change the optional language
U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity Set whether to make auto recovery function
notification setting after the error
U325 Paper interval setting Switch the display mode of the abnormal tem-
perature and humidity detection
U326 Set black line cleaning display Switch the black line cleaning guidance display
U327 Cassette heater control setting Select the cassette heater control setting
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coeffi- Set the coefficient of the custom size
cient
U339 Drum heater ON mode setting Set the drum heater
U340 Setting the applied mode Set the memory allocation
U341 Printer cassette setting Set the cassette for printer output only
U343 Duplex priority mode Switch to set the duplex printing priority mode
U345 Maintenance due timing display set- Set the maintenance timing message display
ting
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Set the BAM related sleep mode
6-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cation
Image U402 Adjusting the printing margins Adjust the scan image margins
process- U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjust the margin of scanning originals
ing original on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjust the margin of scanning originals
original from the document proces-
sor
U407 Writing timing adjustment (Reversal) Adjust the writing timing when printing duplex
U410 Half tone automatic adjustment Acquire the data for the halftone auto adjust-
ment and the ID correction
U411 Scanner auto adjustment Adjust the scanner and DP automatically
U412 Adjusting the uneven density Correct the LSU density unevenness
U415 Adjusting the print position automati- Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing
cally
U425 Set Target Input the Lab value described on an adjustment
original
U464 ID correction setting Set the ID correction
U465 ID correction data Display the light intensity control value after the
ID correction
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit Set the primary transfer unit
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate Set the JPEG compression ratio
U474 Checking the LSU cleaning Set the LSU cleaning operation check and
cleaning cycle
U485 Image process mode setting Set the image process related items
U520 TDRS setting Check/refer the information for the TDRS
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initialize all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initialize the software switches except the
machine data
U603 User data 1 Set the user for FAX usage
U604 User data 2 Set the user for FAX usage
U605 Data clear Initialize the FAX communication data
U610 System 1 Set the number of lines to be ignored at 100%
magnification RX mode/auto reduction mode.
U611 System 2 Set number of lines to be adjusted at auto
reduction mode.
U612 System 3 Set operation at FAX communication
U615 System 6 Set the printing size and received image size at
FAX reception
U620 FAX system Set the signal detection method at remote
switching
6-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

cation
FAX U625 Communication settings Set the interval and the number of times for auto
redialing
U630 Communication control procedures Set the FAX communication
1
2
3
4
U634 Communication control procedures Set acceptable error when judging the received
5 TCF signal
U640 Communication time setting 1 Set the detection time by remote switching
mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Set the time-out time for the fax communication
U650 Modem 1 Set the G3 transmission cable equalizer
U651 Modem 2 Set the modem output level
U660 Ring setting Set the NCU (network control unit)
U670 List output Output the list of the fax communication data
U671 Clearing FAX backup data Clear the FAX backup data
U695 FAX function customization Set ON/OFF of FAX bulk transmission
U698 Setting the maintenance port Set the port to apply
U699 Software switch: Set Set the software switches individually
Others U901 Clearing the counters by paper Display/clear the counter value by each feeding
source cassette
U903 Clearing the jam counter Display/clear number of occurrence by jam trig-
ger code
U904 Clearing the service call error Display/clear number of the service call error
counter and system error
U905 Optional counter Display the counter value
U906 Resetting the partial operation Reset the partial operation
U908 Total counter Display the FAX total count
U910 Black rate data Clear the print coverage data and its period
U911 Counter by media type Display/clear the counter by each media type
U917 Read/Write Backup Data Read/write the backup data to a USB memory
U920 Charge counter Display the set value of the charge count
U927 Clearing all the charge/life counters Clear the charge count and the machine life
count
6-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

cation
Others U928 Machine life counter Display the machine life counter value.
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts Display and set the MC roller counter value
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log Set the maintenance mode history log
U942 DP loop amount setting Adjust the paper loop amount when using the
document processor
U952 Maintenance mode workflow Execute the maintenance flow with the Work-
Flow data
U964 The log correction flow Transfer the log files stored in the HDD to a USB
memory.
U969 Toner area code Display the toner area code
U977 Setting the data capture mode Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB
memory
U981 Setting/Checking of predictive main- Refers/Changes the information regarding CBS
tenance alert data in KFS.
U984 Developer unit number Display the developer unit number
U985 Developer unit history Display the developer unit number history
U989 HDD scan disk Execute the HDD scan disk
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time Display the accumulated DP CIS lighting time
U991 Scanner counter Display the scanner count
6-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode

U000 Printing Maintenance Report
(Message: Output Maintenance Report)
Contents
Output the list of the current settings of maintenance modes, and occurrence condition of paper
jam or service call error. Output the event log and the service status page.
Also, send output data to a USB memory.
Purpose
Check the current settings of maintenance modes, and occurrence condition of paper jam and
service call error.
When initializing or replacing the backup memory, output the list of the current settings of mainte-
nance modes beforehand as it is necessary to re-enter the settings after initialization or replace-
ment.
Method
2.Select the item to output.
Items Output list

Maintenance Maintenance mode setting list
User Status Output User Status Page
Service Status Output Service Status Page
Event Output the event log report
Network Status Output Network Status Page
LLU Report Output LLU report
All All reports output
3.Press the [Start] key to output the list.

* :If A4/Letter size paper is available, it will be output in this size. If A4/Letter size paper is not
available, select the paper source. Output status is displayed.
Method: send output data to a USB memory

2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Select the item to send.
4.Select [USB(Text)] or [USB(HTML)].
Items Output list

Print Print a report
USB(Text) Destination: send to USB memory (text format)
USB(HTML) Destination: send to USB memory (HTML format)

* :The output data is sent to the USB memory.
* :LLU Report data can not be transfered to the USB memory. Only print output is possible.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-9
Detail of Unit History Report
Unit History Report

MFP ZF4860XXXX
TASKalfa 6002i 2019/03/25 15:15
Firmware version 2NK_S000.001.241 2019.03.22 [2NK_1000.001.192] [2ND_1100.001.007]
Machine No.:ZF4860XXXX Total Life Count:100000
(1) Drum unit Serial/Counter/History (4) ZF4860XXXX (5) 0

(2) FR500ZXXXXXX (3) 55555 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
Develop unit Serial/Counter/History ZFF860XXXX 0

FQZ00ZXXXXXX 55555 --------------------------- 4
ZFR860XXXX 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
Transfar unit Serial/Counter/History ZFF860XXXX 0

FRN00ZXXXXXX 55555 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
Fuser nit Serial/Counter/History ZFF860XXXX 4

FRB500ZXXXXXX 55555 ZFQ820XXXX-------- 11447
--------------------------- 11391
----------------------- 0 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
----------------------- 0 --------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
--------------------------- 0
(6) Charger roller unit Counter

50000
(7) System
Counter: 36/0
Version: 2KV_D100.003.001/-/-/-/-/-
1
Figure 6-1
6-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-9
Detail of Unit History Report
Unit History Report

MFP ZF4860XXXX
TASKalfa 6002i 2019/03/25 15:15
Firmware version 2NK_S000.001.241 2019.03.22 [2NK_1000.001.192] [2ND_1100.001.007]
Machine No.:ZF4860XXXX Total Life Count:100000
(8) RP Code
0009 0C08 CXXX
0009 0C08 CYYY
0009 0C08 CXXX
0009 0C08 CYYY
6-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Title Contents

1 Unit Name Name of the unit
2 Unit Serial number Unit serial number that is actually installed (Was installed in
the past) (Descending order: Serial no. of 3 history
information) (The top is the latest)
3 Unit counter value Unit counter value that is actually installed (Was installed in the
past) (For the past unit, the counter value at the time of
replacement)
4 Main unit serial number Main unit serial number that the unit is installed (Descending
order: 3 history information of the unit installation)
5 Unit counter value Unit counter value when start using the unit with the applicable
main unit
6 Charger roller unit counter Charger roller unit counter value that is actually installed
value
7 Boot count, Sample set count, Display reset count/sample set count/various type of the
etc. version
8 RP code Acquires the last two update dates of the main software
version and the engine software version, encodes them, and
displays them
The contents to be displayed are the following in order from
the top
-Encoded engine software version and the last updated date
-Encoded main software version and the last updated date
-Encoded engine software version and the one previous
updated date
-Encoded main software version and the one previous updated
date
6-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Detail of Event Log
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 6002i (2) 2016/03/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6 )Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 (7) Life Count:100000
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time (10) Maintenance Log
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 # Count. Item. Data and Time
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2 444444 02.01 2014/02/12 17:30
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 1 222222 02.02 2014/02/12 17:30
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5
4 0501.01.08.01.00
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01
0501.01.08.01
2014/02/12 17:30
2014/02/12 17:30
3 (a)
555555 (b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01 (e)
2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
(9) Service Call Log (11) Toner Log

# Count. Service Code Date and Time # Count. Item Serial Number Date and Time
8 9999999 01.00.0100 2014/07/05 10:00 5 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/05/01 10:00
7 9999999 02.01.0100 2014/07/04 10:00 4 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/04/05 10:00
6 9999999 01.01.0000 2014/06/26 10:00 3 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/02/21 10:00
5 9999999 01.00.0000 2014/05/01 10:00 2 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2013/11/30 10:00
4 9999999 01.01.0000 2014/04/05 10:00 1 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2013/11/24 10:00
3 9999999 02.00.0000 2014/02/21 10:00
2 9999999 02.00.0000 2013/11/30 10:00
1 9999999 01.00.0000 2013/11/24 10:00
Figure 6-2
6-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 6002i 2016/03/19 15:15
Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 Life Count:100000
(12) Counter Log

(f) J0000: 0 J4302: 0
J0100: 1 J4303: 1
J0101: 11 J4304: 11
J0104: 222 J4309: 2
J0105: 1 J9000: 1
J0106: 1 J9004 0
J0107: 1 J9010: 1
J0110: 1 J9060: 1
J0111: 1 J9061: 2
J0211: 1 J9062: 1
J0212: 1 J9110: 1
J0213: 999 J9120: 0
J0501: 1 J9200: 1
J0502: 1 J9210: 1
J0503: 1 J9220: 2
J0504: 1
J0508: 1 (g) C0000: 0
J0509: 1 C0001: 1
J0511: 1 C0002: 2
J0512: 1 C0003: 3
J0513: 1 C0004: 4
J0514: 1 C0005: 5
J0518: 1 C0006: 6
J0519: 1 C0007: 7
J1403: 1 C0008: 8
J1404: 1 C0009: 9
J1413: 1 C0010: 10
J1414: 1 CF245: 11( 0)
J1604: 1 CF248: 12( 0)
J1614: 1 CF345: 13( 0)
J4002: 1 (h) T00: 10
J4003: 1 M00: 20
J4004: 1 M02: 30
J4009: 1
J4012: 1
J4013: 1
J4014: 1
J4019: 1
J4201: 1
J4202: 0
J4203: 1
J4204: 1
J4208: 0
J4209: 1
J4211: 11
J4212: 222
J4213: 1
J4214: 2
J4218: 1
J4219: 2
J4301: 1
6-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Description of event log
No. Items Contents

(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine firmware version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Operation panel firmware version
(6) Machine serial number
(7) Total life counter
6-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriptions Date and
Time
Record 1 to 16 occurrence The total page count at the Log code ( 5 types in hexa- Date and
If number of the past paper time of paper jam. decimal) time of
jam occurrence is less occur-
than 16, all of them are (a) Cause of paper jam rence
described. It will be deleted (b) Paper source
from the old log if it (c) Paper size
exceeds 16 times (d) Paper type
(e) Output location
(a)Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection", for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (P.7-
120)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
06 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)

00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 8D: A5E 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0E: A6 26: Full bleed paper (12 x
05: Executive 0F: B6 8)
06: Letter-R 10: Commercial #9 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 11: Commercial #6 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 12: ISO B5 A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 13: Custom size 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1E: C4 B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 1F: Hagaki 33: Folio
89: B5E 20: Oufuku Hagaki 34: Youkei type 2
0A: A3 21: Oficio II 35: Youkei type 4
6-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Contents
(8) Paper Jam Log
cont.
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Thick 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(e) Details of output location (hexadecimal)

01: Main unit face down (FD)
02: Main unit face up (FU)/1,000-sheet finisher (FU)/
4,000-sheet finisher tray B(FU)
03: 1,000-sheet finisher(FD)
4,000-sheet finisher tray A (FD)
05: Job separator tray
07: 4,000-sheet finisher tray B(FD)
0A: Folding unit tray
0B: MT tray 1(FD)
0C: MT tray 1(FU)
15: MT tray 2(FD)
16: MT tray 2(FU)
1F: MT tray 3(FD)
20: MT tray 3(FU)
29: MT tray 4(FD)
2A: MT tray 4(FU)
33: MT tray 5(FD)
34: MT tray 5(FU)
3D: MT tray 6(FD)
3E: MT tray 6(FU)
47: MT tray 7(FD)
48: MT tray 7(FU)
6-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
No. Contents
(9) Service Call Log
# Count. Service Code Date and
Time
Record 1 to 8 occurrence The total page count at the The first two digits (identifi- Date and
of the past self diagnostics time of the self diagnostic cation number) time of
error. error. 01: Service call / System occur-
If number of the past self error rence
diagnostics error occur- 02: Unit replacement
rence is less than 16, all of
them are described. Next two digits (Auto
reboot information)
00: Without auto reboot
01: Auto reboot execution
Last 4 digits
Self diagnostic error code
(Refer to P.7-280)
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 indicates Self diagnos-
tic error, 00 indicates with-
out auto reboot and 6000
indicates Self diagnostic
error code.
*: Auto reboot function
can be set at U287
6-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
No. Contents
(10) Maintenance Log
# Count. item Date and
Time
Record 1 to 8 occurrence Total page count at the Maintenance replacement Date and
of the past unknown toner time of the replacement of item code (1-byte value to time of
detection. If number of the the maintenance item. indicate 2 items) occur-
past unknown toner detec- rence
tion is less than 8, all of First byte (Replacing item)
them are described. The toner replacement log 02: Maintenance kit
is triggered by toner empty.
This record may contain Second 1 byte (replace-
such a reference as the ment item type)
toner container is inserted
twice or a used toner con- 01: MK-6325
tainer is inserted.
(11) Toner Log

# Count. Item. Serial Number Date and
Time
Record 1 to 32 occurrence When using the non-genu- log code Date and
of the past unknown toner ine toner container, record First 1byte(Replacing item) time of
detection. If number of the the log at occurrence of 01: Genuine product occur-
past unknown toner detec- the toner container 02: Non-genuine product rence
tion is less than 32, all of replacement (total page
them are described. count). Next 1byte (type of
replacement item)
00: Black
Last 16 digits
Display the serial number
of the toner container.
6-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(12) Counter Log

(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for main-
tenance Item
Display the log counter of Display the log counter of Display the log counter by Consist of
paper jams by each loca- self diagnostics errors by the maintenance replace- three log
tion. each cause. ment item. counters
Refer to Paper Jam Log. of paper
The number of auto reboot T: Toner container jams, self
* All factors including those is also displayed at the 00: Black diagnos-
that have not occurred are service call/system error. tics errors,
displayed M: Maintenance kit and main-
01: MK-6325 tenance
(e.g.) CF245: 4(2) replace-
System error 245 occurred ment
four times in the past and Example: T00: 1 items.
auto reboot was done The toner container
twice. (Black) has been replaced
once in the past.
The toner replacement log

is triggered by toner empty.
This record may contain
such a reference as the
toner container is inserted
twice or a used toner con-
tainer is inserted.
6-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Detail of service status page
Service Status Page (2) [XXXXXXXXXX]

MFP (3) 2016/03/03 15:15
TASKalfa 6002i (4) [XXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] (5)
(1) Firmware version 2NK_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(6) (7) (8)
Controller Information
Memory status (39) FRPO Status
(9) Total Size 4.0 GB User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.00
Time User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.00
(10) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam .
(11) Date and Time 06/04/2010 12:00 .
(12) Time Server 10.183.53.13 .
Installed Options .
(13) Document Processor Installed .
(14) Paper Feeder LCF(1500X2) .
(15) Side Feeder Not Installed .
(16) SD Card Not Installed .
(17) Finisher Not Installed .
(18) Mail Box Not Installed .
(19) Job Separator Not Installed .
(20) Card Authentication Kit (B) .
Installed .
(21) Internet Fax Kit (A) Not Installed
.
(22) Data Security Kit (E) Installed
.
(23) UG-33 Installed
.
(24) UG-34 Installed
.
(25) USB Keyboard Installed .
(26) USB Keyboard Type US-English PDF mode Y5 00
(27) Scan extention Kit(A) Installed e-MPS error control Y6 03
(28) Print Coverage RP Code
Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) (40) 1234 5678 9012
(29) Total (41) 5678 9012 3456
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (42) 9012 3456 7890
(30) Copy (43) 3456 7890 1234
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(31) Printer
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(32) FAX
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(33) Period (27/10/2009 - 03/11/2009 08:40)
(34) Last Page (%) 1.00
FAX Information
(35) Rings (Normal) 3
(36) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(37) Rings (TAD) 3
(38) Option DIMM Size 16MB
Figure 6-3
6-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
Service Status Page [XXXXXXXXXX]

MFP
MFP 2016/03/03 15:15
TASKalfa i [XXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Firmware version 2NK_2000.001.133 2016.02.20 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Controller Information Engine Information

Print Settings (46) NVRAM V ersion _CI04709_CI04709
(44) MP Tray Priority (47) FAX Slot1 2NM_1200.001.089
Auto Feed
FAX BOOT Version 2NM_5000.001.006
(45) Altitude Adjustment FAX APL Version 2NM_5100.004.001
FAX IPL Version 2NM_5200.001.006
Status Normal
(48) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D
Send Information
(49) Date and Time 14/03/05 15:30
(50) Address mail@bjd.ne.jp
1/2 (51) (52)
(53) 100/100
(54) 0/0/0/0/
(55) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/1/1/1/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) (65) (66) (67) (68) (69)(70)
(71) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(72) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
(73) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/
(74) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(76) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(77) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(78) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(79) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(80) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(81) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(82) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(83) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(84) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(85) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(86) XXXXXXXX/
(87) [ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ]
(88) [ABCDEFGHIJ]
(89) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/
(90) 1/1/1/0/1/0/0/ 2010/12/15 12:34:56
1/5/ (91)(92)
1/1/ (93) (94)
1/0/0 (95)(96)(97)
(98) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
(99) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
Figure 6-4
6-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
No. Items Contents

(1) Firmware Version -
(2) Machine serial number -
(3) System date -
(4) API version of the HyPAS application
(5) Browser version
(6) Engine firmware version -
(7) Engine boot version -
(8) Operation panel firmware version -
(9) Total memory size -
(10) Local time zone -
(11) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour : minute
(12) NTP server name -
(13) Whether the DP is installed or not Installed/Not Installed
(14) Whether the paper feeder is installed Cassette(500-sheet×2) / Cassette(1500-sheet×2) / Not
or not Installed
(15) Whether the side feeder is installed or Installed/Not Installed
not
(16) Whether the SD memory card is Installed/Not Installed
installed or not
(17) Whether the finisher is installed or not 1000-sheet finisher / Inner finisher /
4000-sheet finisher/not installed
(18) Whether the mail box is installed or not Installed/Not Installed
(19) Whether the job separator is installed Installed/Not Installed
or not
(20) Whether the ID card authentication kit Installed/before installation/trial
(B) is installed or not
(21) Whether the internet FAX kit (A) is Installed/before installation
installed or not
(22) Whether the Data security kit (E) is Installed/before installation
installed or not
(23) Whether the UG-33 is installed or not Installed/before installation/trial
(24) Whether the UG-34 is installed or not Installed/before installation
(25) USB keyboard connection status Connected/Not connected
(26) Type of the USB keyboard US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German
French
(27) Whether the scan extension kit (A) is Installed/before installation/trial
installed or not
(28) Average coverage for printer Print coverage notation is just a guide (reference) and do
(Page count converted to the A4/Letter not represent the actual toner consumption
size)
6-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
No. Items Contents

(29) Total average coverage Black
(30) Average coverage for copy Black
(31) Average coverage for printer Black
(32) Average coverage for FAX Black
(33) Cleared date and output date -
(34) Coverage on the last output page -
(35) Number of rings 0 to 15
(36) Number of rings before automatic 0 to 15
switching
(37) Number of rings before connecting to 0 to 15
the answering machine
(38) Optional DIMM size -
(39) FRPO setting -
(40) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the
latest update.
(41) RP code Coding the main software version and the date of the lat-
est update.
(42) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the
previous update.
(43) RP code Coding the main software version and the date of the pre-
vious update.
(44) MP tray priority setting Off(No setting)/Auto(Auto feed)/Always(All times)
(45) High altitude adjustment setting data Normal/1001-2000m/2001-3000m/3001-3500m
(46) NVRAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)
(a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the
database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the
ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are
identical with (c) and (f).
(47) FAX firmware version -
(48) MAC address -
(49) The last sent date and time -
(50) Transmission address -
6-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Items Contents

(51) Destination information -
(52) Area information -
(53) Margin setting Top margin/Left margin
(54) L parameters Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/Left mar-
gin integer part /Left margin decimal part
(55) Life counter (The first line) Machine life/ MP tray/ Paper feeder 1/ Paper feeder 2/
Paper feeder 3/ Paper feeder 4/ Paper feeder 5/ Duplex
Life counter (The second line) Drum unit K/ Primary transfer unit/ Secondary transfer
unit/ Developer unit K/ MC roller K/ Fuser unit/ Fuser dis-
charger unit
Life counter (The third line) Maintenance kit
(56) Panel lock information F00: OFF
F01: Partial lock1
F02: Partial lock2
F03: Partial lock3
F04: Full lock
(57) USB information U00: Not Connected
U01: Full speed
U02: Hi speed
(58) Paper handling information 0: Paper source select
1: Paper source fixed
(59) Auto cassette change mode 0: OFF
1: ON (Default)
(60) Black and white printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(61) Charge count up timing 0: When secondary feed starts
1: When output is completed
(62) Temperature (machine inside) -
(63) Temperature (machine outside) -
(64) Relative outside humidity -
(65) Absolute outside humidity -
(66) Machine inside humidity
(67) Asset Number -
(68) Job end judgment time-out time -
(69) Job end detection mode 0: Detect as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detect as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a
break in job
(70) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
6-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Items Contents

(71) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
*: For details on settings, refer to 2: Normal 2 2: Low
MDAT command in "Prescribe 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
Commands Reference Manual". 4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings
6: Heavy 3 0: Disable
7: Heavy 4 1: Enable
8: Heavy 5
9: Extra Heavy
(72) IO Calibration information K
(73) Bias Calibration information -
(74) Sensor initial information -
(75) Calibration information -
(80) Paper loop correction shift amount -
(81) Paper loop correction interval -
(82) Paper loop correction patch amount -
(85) RFID information (K) -
(86) RFID read/write version -
(87) Optional PF firmware version -
(88) Software version of option language -
(89) Maintenance information -
(90) Data sanitization information FAX Board/Main Memory/Panel Memory/SSD/Executed
time
1: Success
0: Fail
-: Not performed or Not installed
(91) Toner low setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(92) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(93) Shift regulation for a single original 0: disable (shift regulation off)
1: enable (shift regulation on)
(94) Banner print affirmation displays to 0: No display
set. 1: Display every page
6-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. Items Contents

(95) ErP applied mode setting 0: ErP non-applied mode
1: ErP applied mode
(96) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)
1: Full-page mode
(97) Wake-up mode 0: Off (Don't wake up)
1: On (Do wake up)
(98) Drum serial number Black
(99) Developer serial number Black
6-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

(Message:Exit Maintenance Mode)
Contents
Exit the maintenance mode and return back to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Execute when exit the maintenance mode.
Method
2.Return back to the normal copy mode.
U002 Set Factory Default

(Message: Set Factory Default)
Contents
Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
Purpose
Executes the machine initial settings when shipping from factory.
Method
2.Select [Mode1(All)].
Items Contents
Mode1(All) Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default
4.Turn the power switch off.

* :An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off / on, and execute initialization by the mainte-
nance mode U002.
Please wait at least 5 seconds or more between power off and on
Error code list
Code Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0003 Controller (OS error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U003 Setting the telephone number of the service person

(Message: Set Telephone Number for Service Call)
Contents
Set the phone number displayed at the service call error.
Purpose
Execute to set the phone number for the service call when installing the machine
Setting
* :Display the key to input on the touch panel.
2.Input telephone number (15 digits maximum).
3.Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.
Completion
U004 Machine Number

(Message: Machine Number)
Contents
Display or set the machine serial number.
Purpose
Use when checking the machine serial number.
After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the service call C0180 "machine serial num-
ber mismatch" is displayed.
Method
When the machine serial number of the engine PWB and the main PWB match.
Items Contents
Machine No. Display the machine serial number.
When the machine serial number of the engine PWB and the main PWB do not match.
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Display the machine serial number of the main PWB.
Machine No.(Eng) Display the machine serial number of the engine PWB.
Setting
Execute if the machine serial numbers do not match.
1.Select [Execute].
* :Start writing the machine serial number
3.Turn the power switch off then on. Please wait at least 5 seconds or more between power off
and on
Completion
6-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID

(Message: Set Maintenance Mode ID)
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for the field.
Purpose
Prevent vulnerability of security function by changing maintenance mode ID for the field.
Method
2.Select items to set.
Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initialize the maintenance mode ID for the field.
Setting: New ID
1.Select [New ID].
2.Press ten key (0–9, *, #) to enter new 8-digit ID.
* :Either [*] or [#] must be included.
4.Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5.Press ten key (0–9, *, #) to re-enter new 8-digit ID.
Method: Initialize
1.Select [Initialize].
2.Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.
Completion
Error code list
Code Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.
0002 ID does not match.
0003 8-digit ID is not input
6-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U018 Firmware self verification

(Message: Check Firmware Checksum)
Contents
Verify if the firmware is not falsified.
Purpose
Re-calculate the checksum to verify the firmware is not falsified.
Method
Items Contents
Expected Display the checksum expected value
Result Display the result of the checksum calculation
Execute Execute self-verification
2.Select [Execute].
After execution, display the checksum obtained in the [Expected].
The following appears if the verification result is illegal.
Items Contents
f001 The expected value file does not exist
f002 Expected value file read failure
f003 Illegal data of the expected value file (not 64-byte data)
s001 Fails to obtain the checksum
NG Expected value and checksum are different
Completion
6-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U019 Firmware Version

(Message: Firmware Version)
Contents
Display each firmware / software version.
Purpose
Use when checking each firmware / software version.
Method
* :Display each firmware version.
2.Change the screen using the [▲][▼] key.
Items Contents
Main Main firmware
MMI Operation section firmware
Panel Main Panel firmware
Panel Boot Panel Boot
Browser Browser firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine boot
RFID RFID
Dictionary Dictionary firmware
Option Language Optional language firmware
OCR OCR dictionary firmware
HyPAS Embedded API HyPAS Embedded API firmware
DP DP firmware
DP Boot DP Boot
DP SSW Document Processor SSW
PF1 Paper feeder 1 firmware
PF1 Boot Paper Feeder 1 boot
Side PF Side feeder firmware
Side PF Boot Side feeder boot
SMT SSW SMT SSW
PF2 Paper feeder 2 firmware
PF2 Boot Paper Feeder 2 boot
DF finisher firmware
DF Boot finisher boot
PH PH Firmware
PH Boot PH Boot
MT MT Firmware
MT Boot MT boot
6-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Items Contents
BF BF firmware
BF Boot BF Boot
Fax APL1 Fax APL1
Fax Boot1 FAX Boot1
Fax IPL1 Fax IPL1
Fax APL2 Fax APL2
Fax Boot2 FAX Boot2
Fax IPL2 Fax IPL2
Application Name 01 Application 1 firmware
Completion
6-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U021 Initializing Memory

(Message: Initialize Memory)
Contents
Initialize all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service
call error history and mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area spec-
ification selected in the maintenance mode U252 (Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.

* :All data other than for adjustments is initialized and set initial setting value by each destina-
tion
and on
* :An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When error occurs, turn the power switch off / on, and execute initialization by the mainte-
nance mode U021.
Error code list
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
Completion
6-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U024 Formatting an HDD

(Message: Format HDD)
Contents
Initialize the HDD.
Purpose
Initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD in the field.
Note
The following settings are initialized if the HDD is initialized.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key, Document
Box, etc.),Shortcut key, Panel program.
If executing full-format, the following installed software is deleted.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software.
Method
2.Select items to be executed.
Items Contents
HDD Format Executing the HDD format
SSD Format Executing the SSD format
3.Select items to be executed. Display the item to delete.
Items Contents
Full Full format
Data Data format (save in the application software)
4.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Start operation
5.Press the [Start] key to execute the initialization.

and on
* :Manually reinstall deleted software.

Optional language, OCR dictionary software, (OCRDATA): Install using a USB memory.
Install the HyPAS application (FMU, etc.) from the Application screen.
* :If there is no OCR dictionary software, a warning dialog is displayed, and the OCR function
can't be used.
Completion
6-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U025 Firmware update (S)

(Message: Firm Update(Security))
Contents
Execute Firmware-Update from the USB memory when "Very High" is selected in the Security
Level settings under the System Menu.
Supplement
Firmware update starts by executing the maintenance mode U025 under the condition of the
USB memory is installed.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Update the firmware

* :It is not possible to execute when the USB memory is not installed.
4.After completing normal operation, turn the power switch off / on. Please wait at least 5 sec-
onds or more between power off and on
Completion
6-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U026 Retrieve the backup data

(Message: Pulling Backup Data)
Contents
Execute to retrieve backup data after replacing the main PWB.
Purpose
Restore the setting value backed up from the HDD to the flash memory on the main PWB.
Migrate data from backup source SSD to backup destination SSD via USB memory
Method
Items Contents
Flash Restore the firmware
SSD When USB memory is installed, back up and restore SSD data.
Method: Flash
1.Select [Restore].
Items Contents
Restore Restore the backup data

and on
Method: SSD
Items Contents
Backup Backup the SSD data
Restore Restore the backup data

3.After completion of [Restore], turn the power switch off / on. Please wait at least 5 seconds or
more between power off and on
* :Display "NG" when completed abnormally.

Saved data:
U278 Delivery date setting
U402 Print margin adjustment
U952 Maintenance workflow registration data
Completion
6-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U030 Motor operation check

(Message: Check Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each motor.
Contents
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
2.Select the motor to operate.
* :Each operation start.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the feed motor
DLP(K) Operate the developer K/Transfer belt motor
Belt Lift Operate the belt release motor
Belt Clean Operate the belt cleaning motor
Drum(K) Operate the drum motor K
IH Core Operate the IH Core motor
Fuser Operate the fuser motor
Fuser Release Operate the fuser pressure release motor
SB(CW) Operate the exit reverse motor (CW)
SB(CCW) Operate the exit reverse motor (CCW)
Bridge Operate the BR conveying motor
Container Mix Operate the toner container motor
Toner Recovery Operate the waste toner motor
Vibration Operate the vibration motor
* :To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
U031 Checking the conveying switch

(Message: Check Conveying Switch)
Contents
Display the on/off status of each switch and sensor to detect paper on the paper conveying path.
Purpose
Execute to check if the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method
2.Check the condition of the switches and sensors by turning them on / off manually.
3.The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
Casstte2 Feed Display the switching status of the conveying sensor
Regist Display the switching status of the registration sensor
Belt Jam Display the switching state of the belt wound sensor
Exit Feed Display the switching status of the exit sensor
DU1 Display the switching status of the DU sensor 1
DU2 Display the switching status of the DU sensor 2
Bridge1 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 1
Bridge2 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 2
Exit Paper Display the switching status of the exit switchback sensor
Fuser Feed Display the switching status of the fuser sensor
Display the switching Display the switching status of the JS sensor
status of the fuser
sensor
Completion
6-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U032 Clutch operation check

(Message: Check Clutch Operation)
Contents
Supply power to each clutch.
Purpose
Execute to check each clutch operation.
Method
2.Select the clutch to operate.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the vertical conveying clutch
Middle Operate the middle clutch
DU1 Operate the DU clutch 1
DU2 Operate the DU clutch 2
DLP Operate the developer clutch
Regist Operate the registration clutch
MPT Feed Operate the MP clutch
Cassette2 Operates the feed clutch 2
Cassette1 Operates the feed clutch 1
Motor Operate the motor
* :The clutch operation is available while the motor is operated.
4.To stop the clutch operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U033 Solenoid operation check

(Message: Check Solenoid Operation)
Contents
Supply power to each solenoid.
Purpose
Execute to check each solenoid operation.
Method
2.Select the solenoid to operate.
* :Select the motor first before checking the motor rotation.
* :Operation is not possible if the front cover is open.
* :Operation can' be done even when "Printer preparation in progress" is displayed
*:
Items Contents
Branch Eject Up Operate the upper exit solenoid
Branch Eject Down Operate the lower exit solenoid
ID Sensor Operate the cleaning solenoid
Container Cover(K) *1 Operate the toner container solenoid(K)
Motor Operate the motor
* :The solenoid operation is available while the motor is operated.
4.To stop the operation of the solenoid, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
6-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U034 Paper timing data adjustment

(Message: Adjust Paper Timing Data)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Execute if regular errors occur on the leading edge of the original and the leading edge of the
copy image
Execute if regular errors occur on the center of the original and the center of the copy image
Method
2.Select items to be adjusted.
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Adjust the leading edge timing
LSU Out Left Adjust the center line
LSU Out Top 3/4 Adjust the leading edge timing (3/4 speed)
Mode*1 Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset*1 Reset the conveying timing inspection data
On Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor ON)
Off Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor retrieve time)
*1: This is only factory inspection use.
6-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: LSU Out Top

2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data

Setting varia-
value tion
MPT(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray (L)
MPT Half(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray Half (L)
Cassette(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
sette feed (L)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(L) sette feed Half (L)
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copy (L)
Duplex Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(L) duplex copy Half (L)
MPT(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray (S)
MPT Half(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray Half (S)
Cassette(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
sette feed (S)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(S) sette feed Half (S)
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copy (S)
Duplex Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(S) duplex copy Half (S)
* :Initial setting value is a reference value as the value changes by the adjustment at the pro-
duction.
5.Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
For the test pattern 1, increase the setting value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the setting value.
6-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves in the direction of the trailing edge,
and when the setting value is decreased, the image moves in the direction of the leading
edge.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-5
Note
Please check the copy image after completing this adjustment If proper images can not be
obtained even after adjustment, please adjust in the following maintenance mode
U034 > U066(P.6-65) > U071(P.6-69)
6-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: LSU Out Top 3/4


Setting varia-
value tion
MPT(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray (L) at 3/4 speed
Cassette(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
sette feed (L) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing when -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (L) at 3/4 speed
MPT(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray (S) at 3/4 speed
Cassette(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
sette feed (S) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing when -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (S) at 3/4 speed
edge.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-6
Note
U034 > U066(P.6-65) > U071(P.6-69)
6-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Adjustment: LSU Out Left


Setting varia-
value tion
MPT Adjust the center line when feeding from -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
MP tray
Cassette1 Adjust the center line when feeding from -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
cassette 1
cassette 2
cassette 3 (Optional unit)
Duplex Adjusting the center line when making -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex (back page) copy
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the
setting value is decreased.
Center line of printing
(within ± 2 mm)

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-7
Note
U034 < U067(P.6-66) < U072(P.6-71)
6-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Execution: Mode
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
* :Operation is started and data is reset
Items Contents
Execute Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Method: On Timing/Off Timing

1.Select items to check
* :Display the measured value.
Items Contents
Value(Plain) Check the measured value(Plain)
Value(Thick) Check the measured value(Thick)
Completion
6-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U035 Folio size setting

(Message: Adjust Folio Size)
Contents
Changes the printable area when copying with Folio paper.
Purpose
Preventing the image from missing in the trailing edge or left/right edges by setting the actual
size of Folio paper used
Method

Setting varia-
value tion
Length Set the Folio paper length. 330 to 356 330 1 mm
(mm)
Width Set the Folio paper width. 200 to 220 210 1 mm
(mm)
Completion
6-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U037 Fan motor operation check

(Message: Check Fan Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each fan motor.
Contents
Execute to check each fan motor's operation.
Method
2.Select the fan motor to operate.
Items Contents
All Operate all the fan motors
Fuser Edge Operate the fuser edge fan motor
IH PWB Operate the IH PWB fan motor
DLP4 Operate the developer fan motor K
Exit Cooling Operate the exit fan motor, the right container fan motor
Exit Paper IH Coil Operate the exit/IH fan motor
Toner Operates the toner suction fan motor
LVU Operate the power source fan motor
Belt Cooling Operate the developer fan motor K
Completion
6-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U051 Registration paper loop amount adjustment

(Message: Adjust Paper Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount.
Purpose
The leading edge of the image may drop, image position may shift irregularly or paper is folded
in a Z-shape.
* :Use to check/adjust skew feed.
Method
Items Contents
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at B/W
B/W
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at 3/4 speed
3/4
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount

3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
Items Contents Setting range Data

varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L)
MPT Half(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L) at half speed
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (L)
Cassette Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(L) cassette feed (L) at half speed
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
duplex (L)
Duplex Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(L) duplex (L) at half speed
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S)
MPT Half(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S) at half speed
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (S)
6-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

varia-
tion
Cassette Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(S) cassette feed (S) at half speed
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
duplex (S)
Duplex Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(S) duplex (S) at half speed
Initial setting value
Items 60ppm 50ppm 40ppm

MPT(L) -4 -4 -4
MPT Half(L) -4 -3 -3
Cassette(L) -4 -4 -4
Cassette -5 -4 -4
Half(L)
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -3
Duplex -3 -2 -2
Half(L)
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4
MPT Half(S) -4 -3 -3
Cassette(S) -4 -4 -4
Cassette -5 -4 -4
Half(S)
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -3
Duplex -3 -2 -2
Half(S)
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
when the setting value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-8
6-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount B/W


varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W MP tray feed (L)
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W cassette feed (L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W duplex feed (L)
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W MP tray feed (S)
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W cassette feed (S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W duplex feed (S)

MPT(L) -4 -6 -6
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -4
MPT(S) -4 -6 -6
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -4
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-9
6-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount 3/4


varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L)
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (L)
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S)
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (S)

MPT(L) -4 -4 -4
Duplex(L) -3 -3 -3
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4
Duplex(S) -3 -3 -3
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-10
6-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Completion
6-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U053 Adjusting the motor speed

(Message: Adjust Motor Speed)
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
* :The adjustment value "+" makes the motor speed "Slow" and "-" makes the motor speed
"Fast".
Method
Items Contents
Motor1 Adjust the drum motor K
Motor2 Adjust the developer K/Transfer belt motor
Motor3 Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the feed
motor, the PF feed motor (Option)
Motor4 Adjust the drum motor K
Motor1 Half Set the drum motor K at the half speed mode
Motor2 Half Set the developer K/the transfer belt motor at the half speed
Motor3 Half Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the feed
motor, PF feed motor (Option) at the half speed
Motor1 3/4 Set the drum motor K at 3/4 speed
Motor2 3/4 Set the developer motor K/transfer belt motor at 3/4 speed
Motor3 3/4 Set the exit motor, the fuser motor, the BR conveying motor, the feed
motor, PF feed motor (Option) at the 3/4 speed
duction.
Setting: Motor1

varia-
tion
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor K -5000 to 5000 -

Drum(K) 0 8 11
6-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Motor2

varia-
tion
Trans Belt Adjust the developer K/Transfer belt -5000 to 5000 -
motor

Trans Belt 0 0 0
Setting: Motor3

varia-
tion
SB Adjust the exit motor -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor -5000 to 5000 -
Feed Adjust the feed motor -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust the PF feed motor (Option) -5000 to 5000 -

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -105 -124 -157
Bridge1 -45 -53 -67
Feed 65 58 73
Option 0 0 0
6-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
Setting: Motor4

varia-
tion
Drum Adjust the drum motor K -5000 to 5000 -
Mono(K)

Drum 22 25 32
Mono(K)
Setting: Motor1 Half


Setting varia-
value tion
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor K at the half speed -5000 to 5000 0 -

Drum(K) 16 16 22
Press the [Start] key and confirm the setting value.


Setting varia-
value tion
Trans Belt Adjust the developer K/the transfer belt -5000 to 5000 0 -
motor at the half speed

Trans Belt 0 0 0

6-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

varia-
tion
SB Adjust the exit motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor at half -5000 to 5000 -
speed
Feed Adjust the feed motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust the PF feed motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -307 -328 -426
Bridge1 -96 -96 -134
Feed 70 74 97
Setting: Motor1 3/4


Setting varia-
value tion
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor K at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 0 -

Drum(K) 11 11 16
Setting: Motor2 3/4


varia-
tion
Trans Belt Adjust the developer motor K/transfer belt -5000 to 5000 -
motor at 3/4 speed

Trans Belt 0 0 0
6-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Motor3 3/4


varia-
tion
SB Adjust the exit motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjusts the fuser motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjust the BR conveying motor at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 -
speed
Feed Adjust the feed motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjust the motors for the optional device -5000 to 5000 -
at 3/4 speed

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -213 -213 -307
Bridge1 -67 -67 -96
Feed 49 49 70
Completion
6-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U059 Fan mode setting

(Message: Set Fan Mode)
Contents
In the cooling mode, perform condition setting to turn all the fans.
Purpose
Change the temperature setting which shift to the cooling mode that all fans are rotated at full
speed when the main unit inside temperature becomes high during continuous printing.
Setting
Items Contents
Cooling Mode Set the Cooling Cycle
Setting: Cooling Cycle


Setting varia-
value tion
Cooling Set the Cooling Cycle -3 to 3 2 -
Mode
Completion
6-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U061 Lamp lighting check

(Message: Check Lamp ON)
Contents
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
Light the exposure lamp to confirm.
Method
2.Select the item to operate.
Items Contents
CCD Turns the exposure lamp on
CIS Turn the DP CIS lamp on (when the simultaneous duplex scanning doc-
ument processor is installed)
3.Press the [Start] key. Lamps are lit.

* :Press the [Stop] key to turn the lamp off.
Completion
6-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U063 Shading position adjustment

(Message: Adjust Shading Position)
Contents
Changes the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute if the vertical white lines appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning
the shading plate, namely there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where there is no influence of dirt or
scratch of the shading plate.
Setting

Setting varia-
value tion
Position Changes the scanner shading position 0 to 18 0 0.16mm
* :If the set value is increased, the shading position moves toward the machine left side and
toward the right side if the value is reduced.
Note
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
6-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

(Message: Adjust Scanner Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction if scanner magnification is not
correct.
Note
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depend-
ing on the content of the original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-63)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-63)
Method

Setting varia-
value tion
Main Scan Scanner magnification in the main scan- -75 to 75 0 0.02%
ning direction
Sub Scan Adjust scanner magnification in the sub- -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction
duction.
Adjustment: Main Scan

* :When the setting value is increased, the image widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-11
6-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Adjustment: Sub Scan

* :When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-12
Completion
6-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing

(Message: Adjust Table Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Execute if regular errors occur on the leading edge of the original and the leading edge of the
copy image
Adjustment

Setting variation
value
Front Adjust the scanner leading edge timing. -30 to 30 0 0.16
(mm)
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-13
Note
U034(P.6-42) > U065(P.6-63) > U066
Completion
6-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line

(Message: Adjust Table Center)
Contents
Adjust the center line in the main scanning direction for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

Setting variation
value
Front Adjust the scanner center line -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
duction.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-14
Note
U034(P.6-42) > U065(P.6-63) > U067
Completion
6-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U068 DP scanning position adjustment

(Message: Adjust DP Scan Position)
Contents
Adjust the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used
* :Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is
changed.
Method

Setting variation
value
DP Read Adjusts the starting position for scanning -38 to 38 0 0.16 mm
originals.
Black Line Adjust the scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 -
copy originals.
Adjustment: DP Read
1.Select [DP Read].
edge.
Adjustment: Black Line

1.Select [Black Line].
4.Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu]
key.
5.Press the [Start] key to execute the test copy.
6.Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check
that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
6-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U070 DP magnification adjustment

(Message: Adjust DP Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
Items Contents Setting Initial Data

range Set- varia-
ting tion
value
Sub Scan (F) Adjust the back page magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction at duplex scan
Sub Scan (B) Adjust the back page magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction at duplex scan
Main Adjust the back page magnification in the main 0 to 75 0 0.02%
Scan(CIS) scanning direction at duplex scan (DPCIS)
Sub Scan Adjust the back page magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
(CIS) scanning direction at duplex scan (DPCIS)
duction.
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-15
Completion
6-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing

(Message: Adjust DP Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjust the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the
copy image when the DP is used
Method
DP-7100

Setting variation
value
Front Head Front page leading edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Front Tail Front page trailing edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Head Back page leading edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Tail Back page trailing edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
DP-7110

Setting variation
value
CIS Head Adjust the leading edge timing for the CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
scanning
CIS Tail Adjust the trailing edge timing for the CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
scanning
DP-7120

Setting variation
value
6-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
duction.
Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head/CIS

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-16
Note
Check the back page after adjusting the front page. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-42) > U071
Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail/CIS Tail

value is decreased.
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 6-17
Completion
6-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U072 Adjusting the DP original center

(Message: Adjust DP Original Center)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
when scanning the original through DP (Document Processor)
Adjustment

Setting variation
value
Front Adjust DP front page center line -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
Back Adjust DP back page center line -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
CIS Adjust the DPCIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085
mm
duction.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-18
Note
Check the back page after adjusting the front page. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-42) > U065(P.6-63) > U067(P.6-66) > U072
Completion
6-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U073 Scanner motor operation check

(Message: Check Scanner Motor Operation)
Contents
Simulate the scanner operation in any condition.
Purpose
Execute the scanner operation to check the abnormal operation and dust adhesion on the slit
glass.
Method
Items Contents
Scanner Motor Execute the scan operation
Home Position Home positioning operation
Dust Check Check if there is dust by turning the exposure lamp on
DP Reading scan position operation for the document processor
3.Select [Execute].
* :Start scanning with the condition specified.
5.To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Setting: Scanner Motor


Setting varia-
value tion
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 (%) 100 1%
Size Original size 100 to 10200 10200 100
Lamp Turning the exposure lamp on/off 0: OFF 1: ON -
1: ON
Paper size corresponding to each set value
Setting Destination Setting Destination Setting Destination

value value value
4300 B5 6100 B5R 8600 B4
5000 A4 6600 8 1/2"×11" 9000 11"×15"
5000 A5R 7100 A4R 10000 A3
5100 11"×8 1/2" 7800 Folio 10200 11"×17"
5100 5 1/2"×8 1/2" 8400 8 1/2"×14"
Completion
6-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U074 Adjusting the DP input characteristics

(Message: Adjust DP Input)
Contents
Set the DP image scanning density
Purpose
Changes the setting if the background image appears when scanning bluish original or originals
with slightly thick background. Adjust the image difference between the table scanning and DP
scanning. DP CIS scanning is not corrected.
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial

Setting
value
Coefficient DP image scanning density correction 0: No correction 0
1: Low-level
correction
2: Middle-level
DP Color Permitting the color registration correction opera- 1: On 1
Regist tion 2: Off
Completion
6-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U087 Setting the DP scanning position change operation

(Message: Set DP Scanning Position Operation)
Contents
If dust can be detected by comparing the original trailing edge scanned data with the scanned
data after the original feed, change the original scan position next time.
Also, reduce the black lines by image correction.
Purpose
Use as the corrective measures for the black lines appearing with dust on the original scanning
position when using the document processor.
Setting

Setting
value
Front Set the front page scanning data threshold 0 to 128 48
Back Set the threshold of the back page scan data at 0 to 128 48
duplex scan
Black Line Initialize the original scanning position - -
* :If the set value is lowered, dark density image are considered dust as it makes dust detec-
tion more likely.
If the set value is increased, it will be difficult to detect dust.
Method: Black Line

1.Select [Clear].
* :Original scan position returns to the initial line.
Completion
6-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U089 MIP-PG pattern output

(Message: Output MIP-PG Pattern)
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG pattern generated by the main unit.
Purpose
When adjusting the image scanning items, execute to check the machine status except the scan-
ner section using the MIP-PG pattern output without image scanning process.
* :Test pages printed from the maintenance mode are not counted for the print coverage and
page count displayed on the service status page.
Method
2.Select the MIP-PG pattern to output
Items Contents
Gray scale Gray scale pattern PG
Mono1 PG for Gray confirmation(Density:0)
Mono4 PG for Gray confirmation(Density:70)
256Gradation PG for the grayscale level check (256 grayscale PG1)
6-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Items Contents
Sample Set Outputs the following output patterns for the long life unit warranty appli-
cation
For the developer status and engine ID check, for the drum quality
check
(Gray scale, Mono1, Mono4)

4.Press the [Start] key to output a MIP-PG pattern.
Completion
6-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
U091 White lines correction setting

(Message: Set White Line Correction)
Contents
Set the error detection threshold for white lines correction and display the abnormal pixel count.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the DP CIS, DP main PWB or DP CIS roller.
Setting

Setting varia-
value tion
Coefficient(R) Display the red pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - –
Coefficient(G) Display the green pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - –
Coefficient(B) Display the Blue pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - –
Threshold(R) Set the red error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(G) Set the green error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(B) Set the blue error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold Set the abnormal pixel threshold set- 0 to 8191 75 -
(Abnormal) ting
Mode Set the white lines correction mode 0: No correction 0 -
1: Correction
2: Test mode
Execute Execute retaining the white reference - – –
data
* :Normally do not change the threshold from the initial value of 112.
Increase the value if white lines appear while the CIS roller/glass is not dirty.
Reduce the set value if thin lines disappear depending on the original to use.
Set in the range of 50 to 200. (In the case of out of range, it may affect the image output)
6-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
Method: Execute
1.Select [Execute].
* :Start retaining the white reference data.
4.Set the gray original face-down on the document processor and set paper in the cassette.
* :Match the original and paper size.
* :Outputs 2-sheet test pattern.
1st sheet: black band of about 60mm width
2nd sheet: blank (or may be gray band of about 60mm width)
6.Setting is correctly completed if no vertical line is observed on both sheets.
If vertical black streaks in blank sheet (gray band) or vertical white streaks in black band
appear in the same position, clean the DP CIS roller or DP CIS glass section and then perform
the white strip correction again.
White line correction is completed if both sheets have vertical black lines or vertical white
lines. However, check the engine since there are factors of vertical streaks at the engine Side.
* :Mode is set to [1].
How to check the test copy
Blank paper Black band Factor Corrective action

No lines No lines - Completion
Black line White lines DP CIS roller/ Execute the U091 CIS roller/glass contamination
glass contami-
nation
Black line No lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
No lines White lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
Completion
6-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U099 Original size detection setting

(Message: Set Original Size Detection)
Contents
Check the operation of the original size detection and set detection threshold
Purpose
Change the detection threshold if the original size is frequently misdetected with entirely dark
originals (high density) or dark originals at edges only.
Setting
* :Move to each setting screen
Items Contents
Data1 Display original width
B/W Level1 Original size detection threshold setting
Data2 Display original width (when document processor is installed)
Execution: Data1/Data2
1.Place an original on the table and close the platen cover or the document processor.
2.The light source is turned on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. Whether or not the
original length is present is judged with the document size sensor (Detected twice when the
document processor is installed)
Items Contents
Original Area(dot) Detected number of pixels (dot) in the original width
Original Area(mm) Detected the original width (mm)
Size SW L Indicating ON/OFF of the original length sensor (0: Off/1: On)
6-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
Setting: B/W Level1


Setting varia-
value tion
Original1 Set the threshold for judging as an origi- 0 to 255 50*1 1
nal 40*2
nal 30*2
nal 20*2
*1: DP installed machine, *2: non-installed machine

* :Lowering the setting value improves the sensor's sensitivity and high density originals can
be detected but the original mat may be detected as an original.
* :If differentiating each setting value, mis-detection may appear depending on the condition of
placing the original.
Original mat Original

Fig. Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R to A3 8.5" to 11"
1 2 3 2 2 B6R to A4R 5.5" to 8.5"
297 mm 3 3 to B6R to 5.5"
Figure 6-19
Completion
6-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U100 Main high voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust Main High Voltage Output)
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the MC roller.
Purpose
Change the setting value and adjust the image when an image failure (background image)
occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Adj AC Bias Adjust main charge AC bias
Set AC Auto Adj Set AC bias automatic adjustment
Set DC Bias Before Display the main charge DC bias correction value. (Adjustment value
before correction)
Set DC Bias After Display the main charge DC bias correction value. (Adjustment value
after correction)
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
Set Charger Freq Set the frequency of the main charger
Chk Current Display the electric current flows
Set AC Gain Set the AC Gain
Setting: Adj AC Bias

* :When the setting value is increased, the image density becomes lighter, and the image den-
sity becomes darker when the setting value is decreased.
Setting value varies depending on the environment.

Setting
value
AC Bias(K) Black main charge AC bias value 0 to 2300 1040
6-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Set AC Auto Adj

Items Contents
On Adjust automatically
Off Not adjusted automatically
* :Initial setting value: On

Setting: Set DC Bias Before

1.Display the current setting.
Items Contents
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
Setting: Set DC Bias After

Items Contents
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full
speed)
Setting: Adj DC Bias

* :When the setting value is increased, the image density becomes lighter, and the image den-
sity becomes darker when the setting value is decreased.

Setting
value
DC2 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value (Full -200 to 200 0
speed)
Setting: Set Charger Freq

* :When the setting value is increased, the image density becomes darker, and the image den-
sity become lighter when the setting value is decreased.
Items Contents Setting range

Generally Setting the frequency of the main charger (Normal 2000 to 3300
speed)
Half Setting the frequency of the main charger (Half 2000 to 3300
speed)
3/4 Setting the frequency of the main charger (3/4 2000 to 3300
speed)
6-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Generally 2355 2992 2362
Half 2362 2362 2362
3/4 2362 2362 2362
Setting: Chk Current

Items Contents
K Black inflow current
* :Please do not perform "Chk Current" more than 10 seconds.

* :As discharge products adhere after execution, please execute drum refresh.
Setting: Set AC Gain

Items Contents
Mode Multiplication Mode setting
Value Multiplication value setting
Setting: Mode
Items Contents
Auto Automatic environmental setting (default)
Mode Charge Multiplication Mode
* :nitial setting value: Auto

Setting: Value

Setting
value
Multiple Charge Multiplication value
0.8 to 1.3 1.0
Value
I
Completion
6-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Voltage Output)
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting
Items Contents
Voltage Set the primary transfer feedback voltage
Altitude Adjustment Altitude Adjustment setting
Current Set the primary transfer feedback current
Final Current Set the primary transfer feedback final current
Prohibit Reflection Set the primary transfer feedback correction ON/OFF setting
Force Execute Set the forcing primary transfer feedback
Surround Correct Setting the environmental correction ON/OFF
Setting: Voltage
Items Contents
Target Set the primary transfer feedback voltage target
Step Set the primary transfer feedback voltage step
Value Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (1st side)
Value 2nd Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (2nd side)
Setting: Target

Setting varia-
value tion
K Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 70 -
target value
6-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Step

Setting varia-
value tion
Step Primary transfer feedback voltage step 0 to 290 30 -
Setting: Value

varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (Constant speed)
B/W Monochrome primary transfer feedback 0 to 290 -
voltage value
(Monochrome printing at Constant speed)
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Monochrome primary transfer feedback 0 to 290 -
voltage value
(Monochrome printing at 3/4 speed)
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (Half speed)
B/W Half Monochrome primary transfer feedback 0 to 290 -
voltage value
(Monochrome printing at half speed)

Normal(K) 199 194 180
B/W 210 190 130
3/4(K) 180 180 161
B/W 3/4 180 180 160
Half(K) 161 157 142
B/W Half 160 150 140
6-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Value 2nd


varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (Constant speed)
B/W Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value (Half speed)
B/W Half Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
value

Normal(K) 184 179 166
B/W 200 180 170
3/4(K) 166 166 146
B/W 3/4 170 170 150
Half(K) 146 142 128
B/W Half 150 150 135
Setting: Altitude Adjustment

Items Contents
1st Side Altitude Adjustment setting (1st side)
2nd Side Altitude Adjustment setting (2nd side)
Setting: 1st Side

6-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

Setting varia-
value tion
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -2 -
Setting: 2nd Side


Setting varia-
value tion
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -2 -
Setting: Current
Items Contents
Target Primary transfer feedback current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer feedback current target setting (2nd side)
6-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Target
Items Contents Setting Data

range varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Constant speed)
B/W Monochrome primary transfer feedback current 0 to 500 -
target
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Monochrome primary transfer feedback current 0 to 500 -
target
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Half speed)
B/W Half Monochrome primary transfer feedback current 0 to 500 -
target

Normal(K) 242 223 174
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 174 174 121
B/W 3/4 156 156 109
Half(K) 121 113 87
B/W Half 260 200 156
Setting: Target 2nd


range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)
B/W Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(3/4 speed)
6-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

range varia-
tion
B/W 3/4 Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Half speed)
B/W Half Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -

Normal(K) 165 155 119
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 133 133 93
B/W 3/4 133 133 93
Half(K) 93 87 67
B/W Half 180 155 119
Setting: Final Current

Items Contents
Target Primary transfer final current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer final current target setting (2nd side)
Setting: Target

range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)
(3/4 speed)
(Half speed)
6-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5

range varia-
tion

Normal(K) 242 223 174
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 174 174 121
B/W 3/4 156 156 109
Half(K) 121 113 87
B/W Half 260 200 156
Setting: Target 2nd


range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)
(3/4 speed)
(Half speed)

Normal(K) 165 155 119
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 133 133 93
B/W 3/4 133 133 93
Half(K) 93 87 67
B/W Half 180 155 119
6-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
Setting: Prohibit Reflection

Items Contents
On Primary transfer feedback result reflection prohibition setting: On
Off Primary transfer feedback result reflection prohibition setting: Off
* :Initial setting value: Off

Setting: Force Execute

1.Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
* :The operation is started.
Items Contents
Execute Forced primary transfer feedback execution
Setting: Surround Correct

Items Contents
On Primary transfer feedback environmental correction prohibition setting:
On
Off Primary transfer feedback environmental correction prohibition setting:
Off
* :Initial setting value:

Completion
6-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
U106 Secondary transfer voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 2nd Transfer Roller Output)
Contents
Set the secondary transfer control voltage by each paper type.
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Light/Normal1 Transfer control value for Light and Normal1
Normal2/3 Transfer control value for Normal 2 / 3
Heavy1 Transfer control value for Normal 1 / 3
Heavy2/3 Transfer control value for Heavy 2 / 3
Heavy 4/5 Transfer control value for Heavy 4 / 5
OHP Transfer control value for Transparency
Bias Bias setting
Setting: Light / Normal1 / Normal2/3

Items Contents
1st Front page transfer control value at full speed
2nd Back page transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) Surface transfer control value on gloss mode at 3/4 speed (Front page)
2nd 3/4(Gloss) Surface transfer control value on gloss mode at 3/4 speed (Back page)
1st B/W Front page transfer control value on B/W at full speed
2nd B/W Back page transfer control value on B/W at full speed
Setting: 1st / 2nd / 1st 3/4(Gloss) / 2nd 3/4(Gloss) / 1st B/W / 2nd B/W

range varia-
tion
Width=105 Setting paper width = 2 to 200 1[uA]
105
210
297
6-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
[1st]

Width=105 132 120 91
Width=210 102 93 69
Width=297 71 65 50
[2nd]

Width=105 166 158 126
Width=210 114 104 81
Width=297 100 61 48
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]

Width=105 91 91 64
Width=210 69 69 48
Width=297 50 50 35
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]

Width=105 118 118 82
Width=210 81 81 57
Width=297 48 48 34
[1st B/W]

Width=105 132 120 91
Width=210 102 93 69
Width=297 71 65 50
[2nd B/W]

Width=105 166 140 111
Width=210 114 103 92
Width=297 100 93 87
6-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
Setting: Heavy1
Items Contents
1st 3/4 Front page transfer control value at full speed
2nd 3/4 Transfer control value at full speed (Back page)
Setting: 1st 3/4 / 2nd 3/4


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st 3/4]

Width=105 91 91 64
Width=210 69 69 48
Width=297 50 50 35
[2nd 3/4]

Width=105 118 118 82
Width=210 81 81 57
Width=297 48 48 34
6-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Heavy2/3
Items Contents
1st Half Front page transfer control value at the half speed
2nd Half Back page transfer control value at the half speed
Setting: 1st Half / 2nd Half


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st Half]

Width=105 56 52 40
Width=210 46 42 32
Width=297 45 42 32
[2nd Half]

Width=105 77 71 55
Width=210 71 65 50
Width=297 40 37 28
6-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Heavy4/5
Items Contents
1st Half Front page transfer control value at the half speed
2nd Half Back page transfer control value at the half speed
Setting: 1st Half / 2nd Half


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st Half]

Width=105 56 52 40
Width=210 46 42 32
Width=297 45 42 32
[2nd Half]

Width=105 77 71 55
Width=210 71 65 50
Width=297 40 37 28
6-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
Setting: OHP

range varia-
tion
105
210
297

Width=105 60 56 43
Width=210 51 48 37
Width=297 40 37 29
Setting: Bias

varia-
tion
Reverse Reverse bias setting (Full speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse Half Reverse bias setting (Half speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse 3/4 Reverse bias setting (3/4 speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse B/W Reverse bias setting (B/W) 0 to 200 -
Cleaning Cleaning (Full speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Cleaning Half Cleaning (Half speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Cleaning 3/4 Cleaning (3/4 speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]

Reverse 0 0 0
Reverse Half 0 0 0
Reverse 3/4 0 0 0
Reverse B/W 0 0 0
Cleaning 67 62 48
Cleaning Half 50 46 36
Cleaning 3/4 56 52 40
6-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Completion
6-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Unit Cleaning Output)
Contents
Belt(A)/(B):Set the transfer belt unit cleaning control voltage
1st sheet CLN B/W: Shift printing surface from the position of the cleaning section
Purpose
Belt(A): Change the setting when offset images appear with the transfer belt cleaning failure.
1st sheet CLN B/W:
Set when cleaning failure of the transfer belt occurs only on the first sheet after monochrome
continuous printing.
First copy time will be slightly longer after On.
Method
Items Contents
Belt(A) Belt A setting
Belt(B) Belt B setting
1st sheet CLN B/W Set the cleaning operation after monochrome printing
Setting: Belt(A)

varia-
tion
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Half Half speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
B/W B/W setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]

Full 15 15 15
Half 10 10 10
B/W 15 15 15
3/4 10 10 10
6-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Belt(B)

varia-
tion
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Half Half speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
B/W B/W setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]

Full 15 15 15
Half 10 10 10
B/W 15 14 13
3/4 10 10 10
Setting: 1st sheet CLN B/W

Items Contents
On Turn on the cleaning operation setting after monochrome printing
Off Turn off the cleaning operation setting after monochrome printing

Completion
6-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment

(Message: Adjust Separation Shift Bias)
Contents
Separation shift bias output adjustment and ON/OFF timing
Purpose
Change setting if paper separation failure occurs
Method
Items Contents
Output Separation Shift bias output adjustment
Output 3/4 Separation Shift bias output adjustment at 3/4 speed
Timing ON/OFF timing adjustment by paper position
Subtraction Value Subtracted value for the separation bias (correction by fuser count)
Setting: Output

varia-
tion
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for the front page of thin
paper at full speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for the back page of thin
paper at full speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for the front page of normal
paper at full speed
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for the back page of normal
paper at full speed
Add Normal Lead Additive setting for the lead- -60 to 60 1 uA
ing edge of normal paper
Heavy/OHP Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1 uA
for Heavy and Transparency
6-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Light 1st 20 17 14
Light 2nd 20 17 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 5 5 5
Add Normal 1 2 2
Lead
Heavy/OHP 0 0 0
Setting: Output 3/4 / Output B/W


varia-
tion
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting for the front page 0 to 60 1 uA
of thin paper at full speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting for the back page 0 to 60 1 uA
of thin paper at full speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting for the front page 0 to 60 1 uA
of normal paper at full speed
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias setting for the back page 0 to 60 1 uA
of normal paper at full speed

Output 3/4

Light 1st 14 14 14
Light 2nd 14 14 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 5 5 5
Output B/W

Light 1st 20 17 14
Light 2nd 20 17 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 5 5 5
6-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Timing

Setting value varia-
tion
On Timing Lead Separation shift bias ON tim- -200 to 200 -20 1mm
ing at the leading edge
On Timing Center Separation shift bias ON tim- -200 to 200 30 1mm
ing at the center of page
Off Timing Separation shift bias OFF -200 to 200 10 1mm
timing

Setting: Subtraction Value
1.Select [Value].

tion
Value Subtracted value for the sep- -60 to 60 -35 1 uA
aration bias
Completion
6-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U110 Drum counter

(Message: Drum Unit Counter)
Contents
Execute to display the drum counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method
* :The drum counter value is displayed.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum counter value
Completion
U117 Drum unit number

(Message: Drum Unit Number)
Contents
Display the drum number
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Procedure
* :Display the drum number.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum number
Completion
6-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U118 Drum unit history

(Message: Drum Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method
* :Select items to refer.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum history
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History 1 to 3 Drum counter history
Completion
6-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U119 Drum unit initial setting

(Message: Set Up Drum Unit) *: High-end model
only
Contents
Set the initial LSU luminosity based on the drum sensitivity
Purpose
Execute after replacement of the drum unit or laser scanner unit
After completion, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Send the sensitivity data of the drum (stored in EEPROM) to the engine
PWB and set the LSU light amount correction.

* :Start the drum setup operation.
and on
Completion
U120 Drum drive distance counter

(Message: Drum Driving Distance Counter)
Contents
Display the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Execute to display the drum control counter.
Method
* :Display the counter value.
Items Contents
K Display the Black drum drive distance counter
Completion
6-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
U122 Primary transfer unit number

(Message: 1st Transfer Unit Number)
Contents
Display the primary transfer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the primary transfer unit number.
Procedure
* :Display the primary transfer unit number
Completion
U123 Primary transfer unit history

(Message: 1st Transfer Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter history
Purpose
Perform to check the main unit serial number and the primary transfer unit counter value.
Method
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 primary transfer unit counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial n]umber history
Cnt History 1 to 3 Primary transfer unit counter history
Completion
6-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Message: Clear Transfer Roller Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counter used for transfer high voltage output correction, etc.
Purpose
Execute when verifying the primary/secondary transfer unit counter value after replacing them.
Also, execute to clear the secondary transfer counter value after replacing it.
Procedure
* : The transfer counter value is displayed
Items Contents
Mid Trans(Cnt) Display the primary transfer counter value
2nd Trans(Cnt) Display the secondary transfer counter value
Mid Trans(Time) Display the primary transfer unit drive time counter value
2nd Trans(Time) Display the secondary transfer unit drive time counter value
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the secondary transfer counter value.
* :2nd Trans (Cnt)/2nd Trans (Time) only
Completion
6-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U128 Transfer timing adjustment

(Message: Adjust Transfer Timing)
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the transfer high voltage output.
Purpose
Prevent paper from being rolled up in the drum.
Setting

range varia-
tion
On Timing 1st Front page transfer On timing -200 to 200 0.1 ms
adjustment value
On Timing 2nd Back page transfer On timing -200 to 200 0.1 ms
adjustment value
Off Timing Transfer Off timing adjustment -200 to 200 0.1 mm
value

On Timing 1st 72 72 71
On Timing 2nd 72 72 71
Off Timing 10 13 16
ON timing conversion table

Distance per 0.3 0.253 0.2
1ms [mm]
Completion
6-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
U131 Toner sensor control voltage adjustment

(Message: Adjust Toner Sensor Control Voltage)
Contents
Adjust the toner sensor control voltage
Purpose
If control values are not correctly retrieved due to the EEPROM on the developer unit failure,etc.,
change to manual adjustment and fix the control value temporary.
Method
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
Mode Switch manual adjustment/automatic adjustment
Setting: Manual
Items Contents Setting Initial set-

range ting value
Control(K) Toner sensor(K) control voltage 4400 to 4650 0
Method: Auto
1.The current setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Default(K) Toner sensor(K) default control voltage
Execution: Mode
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
* :Initial setting value: Auto

Completion
6-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U132 Forcible toner supply operation

(Message: Supply Toner Forcefully)
Contents
Toner is supplied forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Purpose
Execute if toner empty is detected frequently.
Procedure
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Install toner

* :Execute toner supply forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply
level.
Items Contents
Supply(K) Black toner supply level
Sensor(K) Black toner sensor output value
Completion
6-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U135 Checking the toner motor operation

(Message: Check Toner Motor Operation)
Contents
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
Execute to check the toner motor operation.
Note
If driven for a long time or several times repeatedly, the developer unit will be full of toner inside
and it may lock up.
Method
2.Select the item to operate.
* :Start the operation
Items Contents
Toner Drive the toner motor
Hopper Drive the toner container motor
Completion
6-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U136 Toner level detection setting

(Message: Set Toner Near End Detection)
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of detecting toner near end earlier than the current setting if the interval
between toner near end and toner empty is too short.
Setting
* :Change the setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.

tion
K Setting the black toner level 0 to 9 3 -
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty
becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
* :The set value is not reflected if set when Toner Low is already indicated.
* :Turn the main switch off and on to change the setting when Toner Low is already indicated
toner hopper.
Completion
6-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U139 Temperature, humidity

(Message: Temperature/Humidity)
Contents
Display the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Purpose
Check the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Procedure
Items Contents
Ext/Int Machine inside and outside temperature (°C) and machine outside
humidity (%)
LSU Machine inside temperature around LSU (°C)
Developing Machine inside temperature around Developer (°C)
Method: Ext/Int
1.Display the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
External Temp Machine outside temperature (°C)
External Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature (°C)
Method: LSU
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Laser Scanning Unit (°C)
Method: Developing
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Developer Unit (°C)
Completion
6-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U140 Developer bias adjustment

(Message: Adjust Developing Bias)
Contents
Display/change the developer bias setting values or set high altitude mode.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias setting values.
Method
Items Contents
Sleeve DC Set the developer sleeve roller DC bias.
Sleeve AC Set the developer sleeve roller AC bias.
Mag DC Set the developer magnet roller DC bias.
Mag AC Set the developer magnet roller AC bias.
Sleeve Freq Set the developer sleeve roller frequency.
Sleeve Duty Set the developer sleeve roller duty.
Mag Duty Set the developer magnet roller duty.
AC Calib Execute and set AC Calibration
Image Preference Set the toner density
Altitude Adjustment Set the altitude adjustment mode
Freq Mode Set the developer frequency mode
Setting: Sleeve DC / Sleeve AC

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting

value
K *1 Black developer sleeve DC/AC bias setting 0 to 100/ 50/1400
1000 to 1900
High *2 Developer sleeve DC/AC bias setting (High 0 to 100/ 50/1400
speed) 1000 to 1900
*1: 35/40/50ppm model, *2: 60 ppm model only
6-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Mag DC

value
K *1 Black developer magnet roller DC bias setting 150 to 500 350
High *2 Developer magnet roller DC bias setting (High 150 to 500 350
speed)
Setting: Mag AC
Items Contents Setting range Initial set-

ting value
K *1 Black developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200
High *2 Developer magnet roller AC bias setting (High 1500 to 2800 2500
speed)
Setting: Sleeve Freq


value
K *1 Developer K sleeve roller frequency setting 3500 to 4900 4000/4189
(Full speed)
High *2 Developer K sleeve roller frequency setting 3500 to 4900 4000
(High speed)
*1: 40/50ppm model, *2: 60 ppm model only


K - 4488 4724
High 4710 - -
6-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
Setting: Sleeve Duty


value
K *1 Developer K sleeve roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99 40/43
speed)
High *2 Developer K sleeve roller duty setting (High 1 to 99 43
speed)


K - 43 40
High 43 - -
Setting: Mag Duty


value
K *1 Developer K magnet roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99 68
speed)
High *2 Developer magnet roller duty setting (High 1 to 99 68
speed)
Setting: AC Calib
Items Contents
Calibration Executing AC Calibration (Developer AC bias setting)
Execution timing
1.Setup at high altitude
2.When replacing the developer unit or drum unit
3.When the developer leakage occurs
4. When the solid image density is low after executing the AC calibra-
tion
Magnification Setting the AC calibration target bias value
Execution timing
1. When the developer leak occurs after executing the AC calibration
6-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Calibration
2.Change the developer ON for executing AC calibration.

value
K Switch On/Off of Black developer 0: Off / 1: On
Execute Executing Calibration
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key. AC calibration is started.
and on
* :The error code is displayed when the error occurs
Setting: Magnification

value
K Set when developer K leak occurs -10 to 15 11/11/7
* :: 60/50/40 ppm model


K 11 11 7
Setting: Image Preference


value
Copy Set the toner density on copy -1 to 1 0
* :If the setting value is reduced, the toner consumption decreases.
and on
6-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Altitude Adjustment

Items Contents
Normal Set 1000m or less
1001 to 2000m Set at 1001 to 2000m
2001 to 3000m Set at 2001 to 3000m
3001 to 3500m Set at 3001 to 3500m
* :Initial setting value: Normal

Setting: Freq Mode

Items Contents
Mode0 Set to Mode0
Mode1 Set to Mode1
* :Initial setting value: Mode1

Completion
6-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U147 Setting the toner applying mode

(Message: Set Toner Apply Mode)
Contents
Execute mode setting to remove overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner applying mode).
And also execute setting of operation (vibration motor control) of returning the toner accumulated
on the developing blade into the developing unit
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount. Execute when changing the frequency
of vibration motor control
* :Density is lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Procedure
Items Contents
Timing Set the toner apply timing
Mode Set the toner applying mode.
Upper limit Set the upper limit of the toner applying amount for each operation
mode.
Setting: Timing

value
Job End Set the toner apply count (job end) 1 to 255 12
Setting: Mode
Items Contents
On Execute the toner applying operation
Off Not to execute the toner applying operation

Setting: Upper limit

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting Data

value varia-
tion
Value Set the upper limit of the toner 0 to 2.0 2.0 0.1%
applying amount for each operation
mode.
6-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Completion
U148 Drum refresh mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Refresh Mode)
Contents
Set the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting

value
Mode Set Auto drum refresh mode 0: Off
1: Short 2
2: Standard
3: Long
Completion
6-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
U155 Toner sensor output value

(Message: Toner Sensor Output Value)
Contents
Display the toner sensor output
Purpose
Execute to check output value when an image failure occurs.
Method
2.Select items to refer
* :Switch to each reference screen.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner sensor value
Toner Display the toner sensor value
Calibration Executing the calibration for the waste toner
Method: Waste Toner

1.Display the waste toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Full Display the waste toner sensor value 1 (WTS1)
Method: Toner
1.Display the toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Sensor(K) Display the toner sensor output
Method: Calibration
1.Display each setting value.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner weight sensor output value
None Display the adjustment value (no bottle)
Empty Display the adjustment value (empty bottle)
Level Display the accumulated waste toner amount
Execute Executing the calibration
Completion
6-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U156 Toner control level adjustment

(Message: Adjust Toner Control Level)
Contents
Display and adjust the toner empty level.
Purpose
Display and adjust the toner empty level.
Setting
2.Select [Empty].
Items Contents
Empty Display the toner empty level
3.Display the toner supply level.
Items Contents
K Display the Black toner empty level
Completion
6-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U157 Developer drive time

(Message: Developing Unit Drive Time)
Contents
Display the developer drive time to be a reference for the toner density control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit.
Procedure
* :Display the developer unit drive time.
Items Contents
K Display the Black developer unit drive time.
Completion
U158 Developer counter

(Message: Developing Unit Counter)
Contents
Display the developer counter value
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method
* :Display the developer counter value
Items Contents
K Display the Black developer counter value.
Completion
6-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
U159 Toner container function setting

(Message: Set Toner Container Function)
Contents
Perform the container cover lock setting, the lock release operation display setting and the waste
toner box usage setting of the toner container K.
Purpose
Set when changing the container cover lock setting or displaying the lock release operation And
also, use to change setting when the toner container K is used as the waste toner box
* :If you want to unlock the container cover all the time, set lock invalid.
Procedure
Items Contents
Container Lock Container Lock setting
Container Unlock Display Setting to display the toner lock release operation
Waste Box Setting Setting reuse of the toner container as the waste toner box
Setting: Container Lock

Items Contents
Off Lock disabled
Low Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Low
Empty Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Empty
* :Initial setting value: Empty

* :If it is set as Off, all the container cover open once the front cover is opened.
Setting: Container Unlock Display

Items Contents
On Display the lock release selection in the System Menu --> [Adjust-
ment/Maintenance] screen
Off The lock release selection does not display in the System Menu --
> [Adjustment/Maintenance] screen
100V model: Off
120V model: On
220-240V model: On
6-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5
Setting: Waste Box Setting


set- varia-
ting tion
value
Message Set for displaying message to replace the On/Off *1 -
toner container K together with the waste
toner box.
Waste Toner Setting the waste toner amount to judge 0 to 50 50 10%
Level*2 whether to display messages and to stop
jobs
*1: 100V model : Off, 120V/220-240V model : On

* 2: Setting can be done only if the Message is set as ON
If the waste toner amount at Toner Empty is at the specified Waste Toner Level or less, Replace
Waste Toner Box message is not displayed and no jobs are stopped. (Replacement message is
displayed when it is at the setting amount or more)
After change setting, the power OFF/ON indication appears.
Completion
6-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
U161 Fuser control temperature adjustment

(Message: Adjust Fuser Control Temperature)
Contents
Set the fuser control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl,
creases and fusing failure on thick paper.
Method
Items Contents
Warm Up Control temperature except at printing
Print Control temperature at printing
Grain Mode Control for the impalpable unevenness in glossiness
Ready Time Adjust Setting the low-temperature aging operation temperature
Mixed Size Mode Setting waiting time for rotate sort
Setting: Warm Up

value
Ready(Center) Control temperature at displaying Ready 100 to 200
(Center)
Ready(Edge) Control temperature at displaying Ready 100 to 200
(Edge)
Ready(Press) Control temperature at displaying Ready 0 to 200
(Press)
Drive(Center) Stable temperature during driving (Center) 100 to 200
Wait(Center) Stable temperature during halt (Center) 100 to 200
Low Control temperature at low power 0 to 200
Power(Center) consumption (Press)
Full Speed Full speed shift temperature (Center) 0 to 200
Shift(Center)
Pressure(Cen- Pressurizing beginning temperature (Press) 0 to 200
ter)
6-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

100V

Ready(Center) 160 155 135
Ready(Edge) 125 120 105
Ready(Press) 30 30 30
Drive(Center) 165 160 140
Wait(Center) 160 155 145
Low 85 85 85
Power(Center)
Full Speed 50 50 50
Shift(Center)
Pressure(Cen- 110 105 100
ter)
120V

Ready(Edge) 135 130 105
Low 85 85 85
Power(Center)
Full Speed 50 50 50
Shift(Center)
ter)
220-240V

Ready(Edge) 135 130 105
Low Power 85 85 85
(Center)
Full SpeedShift 50 50 50
(Center)
ter)
6-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: Print
Items Contents Setting range

Full Speed Temperature during print at full speed 100 to 200
Print(Center) (Center)
Duplex Shift temperature during duplex print at full 0 to 255
Shift(Center) speed (Center)

100V

Full Speed 170 165 155
Print(Center)
Duplex 0 0 0
Shift(Center)
120V/ 220-240V

Full Speed 180 175 165
Print(Center)
Duplex 0 0 0
Shift(Center)
Setting: Grain Mode

1.Select the mode to set.
Items Contents
Mode0 Current level (No special control is done)
Mode1 Improvement mode for the impalpable unevenness in glossiness
Mode2 More improvement
* :Initial setting value: Mode0

Setting: Ready Time Adjust

Items Contents Setting Initial setting value

range
100V 120V
220-240V
Value Operating temperature correction value (α) 0 to 5 4 4
of low temperature aging
6-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
*: If the set value α is decreased, the operating temperature of aging performed after stabilization in the
silent mode decreases.
*: If low operating temperature of low temperature aging is lowered, aging may not enter and fusing level
may be poor.
Aging operation Less than 13+α°C 13+α°C or more 18°C or more

temperature
Aging time 60 seconds 35 seconds 0 seconds
Setting: Mixed Size Mode

Items Contents Setting range Initial set- Data Vari-

ting ation
Priority Select waiting time for rotate sort 0: Quality priority 0 -
1: Speed priority
Temperature Gap*1 Setting temperature deference 5 to 50 40 1°C
between center and edge that stop
print job.
*1: Switching is available in Priority 1 setting
Completion
U164 Fuser unit history

(Message: Fuser Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine serial number and fuser unit history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and the fuser unit counter value.
Method
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 fuser unit counter history.
Items Contents
Cnt History 1 to 3 Fuser unit history
Completion
U165 Fuser unit number

(Message: Fuser Unit Number)
6-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Contents
Display the fuser unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser unit number.
Procedure
* :Display the fuser unit number.
Completion
6-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U167 Clearing the fuser counter

(Message: Clear Fuser Counter)
Contents
Display the fuser counter value, display or clear the discharge correction counter for the fuser
discharger needle.
Purpose
Execute to confirm the fuser counter value. And also, execute it to clear the discharge correction
counter value after replacing the IH unit or fuser discharger needle unit.
Procedure
* : Display the fuser unit counter value
Items Contents
Cnt Display the fuser unit counter value
Release(Time) Display the fuser unit drive time (release)
Press(Time) Display the fuser unit drive time (press)
Correction Display or change the discharge correction counter value for the fuser
discharger needle
Clear Clear the discharge correction counter for the fuser discharger needle
Clear the fuser discharger needle unit count after replacing it
Setting: Correction
1.Select [Correction].
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
* :The correction fuser counter value is cleared
Completion
6-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U169 Setting the fuser power source

(Message: Set Fuser Power Source)
Contents
Display and set the control voltage specification of IH PWB
Purpose
Perform to check the control voltage specification.
* :When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH controlPWB.
Setting
Items Contents
Set Fuser Setting the fuser unit destination

value
Mode Setting the fuser unit destination 1: 100V model -
2: 200V model (Destination)
3: 120V model
4: 110V model
Completion
6-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U193 Fuser drive control setting

(Message: Set Fuser Drive Control)
Contents
Display and change bias setting value for fixing belt charging needle
Purpose
Check and change the bias applied current value to the surface of the fuser belt as a measure
against the fuser electrostatic offset due to the charging of the fuser belt.
* :Increasing the set value suppresses the adhesion of toner to the fuser belt, but if it raises too
much, it will also promote adhesion of organic matter to the charge needle, so that electro-
static offset tends to occur. Therefore, please be careful.
If you can not see the effect even if raising the set value, replace the fuser discharge needle
unit and clear the correction fuser counter value at U167.
Setting
Items Contents
Bias Display and change bias setting value for fixing belt charging needle

variation
B/W Monochrome (High speed) 0 to 200 0.1 uA
3/4 3/4 speed 0 to 200 0.1 uA
Half Half speed 0 to 200 0.1 uA

B/W 20 20 20
3/4 20 20 20
Half 20 20 20
Completion
6-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U197 Setting Fuser Control

(Message: Set Fuser Control)
Contents
Change the fuser control setting
Purpose
Change the fuser control setting when the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunctions caused by
the fuser control.
* :For specific areas (100 V specification)
Setting
Items Contents
Security Gate Set malfunction prevention of the security gate (anti-theft gate)
Execution: Security Gate

Items Contents
On Turn on malfunction prevention setting of the security gate (anti-theft
gate)
Off Turn off malfunction prevention setting of the security gate (anti-theft
gate)
Security gate
Direct Path
Swept Transmitter Signal
Reradiated
Signal
Swept
Transmitter Tag
Signal
Transmitter Receiver
6-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U199 Fuser temperature

(Message: Fuser Temperature)
Contents
Display the fuser temperature
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Procedure
* :Display the fuser temperature
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge1 Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt edge section
Heat Roller Center Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt center section
Heat Roller Middle Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser belt middle section
Press Roller Center Display the temperature (°C) of the fuser pressure roller center section
Completion
6-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U200 All LEDs lighting

(Message: Turn ON All Panel LEDs)
Contents
All the LEDs on the operation panel will light up
Purpose
Execute to check the LED on the operation panel
Procedure
2.Select [Execute].
* :All the LEDs on the operation panel will blink
4.Press the [Stop] key to turn the LED off.
Completion
6-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U201 Initializing the touch panel

(Message: Initialize Touch Panel)
Contents
Adjust touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation
panel is replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned.
* :When unable to press the software numeric keys due to the touch screen press position
error and unable to enter the maintenance mode, press and hold [Home], [Stop] and [Reset]
keys 3 seconds to start up U201.
Method Maintenance Mode

1.Press the [Start] key. Maintenance Mode Active U201
2.Select items to be executed. Initialize Touch Panel
3.Press the [Start] key. Initialize
* :Move to each execution screen
Check
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically correct the touch panel display position
Check Check the touch panel display position
Method: Initialize
* :Do not touch the touch panel.
Please do not touch a operation panel.
6-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
1.Press the center of indicated "+".

Press the center of the "+" sign.

*Press it using a tool with a fine tip.


If you cannot proceed to the next step, press the Stop key and try again.

6-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

6.After setting is completed, [Initialize Com-

pleted] is displayed and the touch panel is
automatically corrected.
7.After correction is completed, the screen will
move to the [Check] screen
Initialize completed.
Method: Check
Single Tap Check
1.Press the center of indicated three "+", and
then check the display position. Initialize
Single Tap Check.


If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.
2.Confirm that the deviation of X and Y of the

displayed coordinates is within 6
(13, -3)
* :If the set value is out of specified value, Initialize
select [Initialize] and press the [Start] key Multi Tap

to return to step 1 Check
Single Tap Check.

(-8, 15)
Select "Mult Tap Check" and press the Startkey to go to the next step.
If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.

(4, -1)
6-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Multi Tap Check

1. Select [Multi Tap Check] and press the Step 1 : Not completed.
Step 2 : Not completed.
[Start] key.
2.Press 2 points of [ ] at the same time (Step1) Initialize
* :Display the detected point with a red dot if

it is out of the default value.
Multi tap Check. Step1.
* :If the set value is out of specified value, Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
select [Initialize] and press the [Start] key *Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
to return to step 1.
3.Press 2 points of [ ] at the same time (Step2)

* :[Completed] appears in Step1 and Step2 if Step 1 : Not completed.
Step 2 : Not completed.
it is within the default value.
Initialize
Multi tap Check. Step1.

Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
*Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
4.[Multi Tap Check completed.] appears when

the setting is complete. Step 1 : Completed.
Step 2 : Completed.
Multi Tap Check completed.

Press the Stopkey.
The screen for selecting a maintenace item No. is displayed.
Completion
6-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U203 Check DP operation

(Message: Check DP Operation)
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Execute to check DP operation
Method
2.Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3.Select the scan speed to operate
Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed High speed scan:
Mode Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Result Check the conveying timing
Method: Normal Speed/High Speed

4.Select items to operate
Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, execute feed operation of single sided original through CCD
CCD RADP With paper, execute feed operation of back page through CCD
CIS With paper, execute feed operation of back page through CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) With paper, execute feed operation (continuous feed) of single sided
original through CCD
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, execute feed operation (continuous operation) of back
page through CCD
CIS(Non-P) Without paper, execute feed operation (continuous operation) of back
page through CIS

Setting: Mode
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key to reset.
6-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Result
1.Display the conveying timing data.
Completion
6-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U204 Key card/key counter setting

(Message: Set Key-Card/Key-Counter)
Contents
Set the optional key card or key counter connection.
Purpose
Execute when installing the key card or key counter.
Procedure
Items Contents
Device Set the key card/key counter connection.
Message Set the message displayed when the device is not installed.
Setting: Device
1.Select the type of the optional counter to install.
Items Contents
Key-Card Key card installation
Key-Counter Key counter installation
Parallel Coin Parallel Coin Vender installation
Vender*1
Off Not installed

*1: Displayed when U206 On/Off Config is set to Off.

and on
Setting: Message
Items Contents
Key Device When multiple devices are used, change the display priority of the login
screen to the key device
Coin Vendor When multiple devices are used, change the display priority of the login
screen to the coin vendor
* :Initial setting value: Coin Vendor

and on
Completion
Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U206 Set the coin vendor

(Message: Set Coin Vendor Mode)
Contents
Set the optional Coin Vendor connection.
Also, set the details such as the operation mode and unit price when the coin vendor is installed.
(This is an optional device which is currently supported for Japan specification only)
Purpose
To run this maintenance mode if a coin vender is installed.
Method
Items Contents
On/Off Config* Coin vendor is installed or not
No Coin Action Set the operation when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size
Boot Mode Setting activation mode
Apl Charge Mode Setting extended charge unit price
* :Not displayed when selecting Parallel Coin Vendor in U204.
Setting: On/Off Config

Items Contents
On Set the coin vendor is installed
Off Set the coin vendor is not installed

and on
Setting: No Coin Action

Items Contents
All Clear All clear at coin shortage during the print
Auto Clear Auto clear at coin shortage during the print
Off Do nothing at coin shortage during the print

6-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Price
Items Contents
Normal Charge setting: Normal
AD Charge setting: Commercial
Print Charge setting: Print
Apl Charge setting: Extended
Setting: Normal / AD
Items Contents
B/W Black and White
2.Change the charger setting value by using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting value

A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10
Other Others 0 to 300 10
* :Settable in 10-yen increments

* :Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
Setting: Print
Items Contents
B/W Black and White

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting value

A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10
Other Others 0 to 300 10
* :Settable in 10-yen increments

* :Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
Setting: Apl
6-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

value
Apl1 Expanded charging unit price 1 0 to 300 10
Setting: Boot Mode

Items Contents
Normal Assign activation to normal mode
Copy Service Assign activation to copy service display
* :Initial setting value: Copy Service

and on
Setting: Apl Charge Mode

Items Contents
On The extended charge unit is used.
Off The extended charge unit is not used.

Completion
6-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U207 Operation key check

(Message: Check Panel Key Operation)
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Procedure
1.Press the [Start] key to display execution window.
2.[Count 0] appears and the LED at the most left column in the operation panel is turned on.
3.Pressing the keys in order from the top at the row where the LED is lit, count increases one by
one. When pressing all the keys at the row and there is an LED at the next right side row, the
LED is lit.
* :The job separator LED is lit during execution and turns off when completing.
Completion
6-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U208 Setting the paper size for the side deck

(Message: Set Deck Paper Size)
Contents
Set paper size used in side feeder.
Purpose
Change the setting when installing the side feeder or the size of paper used in the side feeder is
changed.
Setting
* :Move to setting screen
Items Contents
Cassette3* Setting the paper size for Cassette3
*:High Capacity Feeder(1500 sheet x 2) and Side Feeder (3000-sheet) only
Setting
Items Contents
A4 Paper size of the side feeder: A4
B5 Paper size of the side feeder: B5
Letter Paper size of the side feeder: Letter
* :Initial setting value: Letter (Inch specifications), A4 (Other specifications)

and on
Completion
6-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U211 Enhancement unit connection setting

(Message: Set Enhancement Connection)
Contents
Execute to set the job separator installation
Purpose
Execute when installing the job separator.
* :Make sure to set [Off] for preventing wrong LED lighting when not installed.
Procedure
2.Select [Inner Job Separator].
Items Contents
Inner Job Separator Job separator setting
Procedure
Items Contents
On Installing the job separator
Off The job separator is not installed

and on
Completion
6-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U221 USB host lock function setting

(Message: Set USB Host Lock Function)
Contents
Set ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. When setting it to on, the device connected to the
USB host is not recognized.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Procedure
2.Select [Host Lock].
Items Contents
Host Lock Turns the USB Host lock function on/off
Items Contents
On The USB Host lock function is available
Off The USB Host lock function is not available

and on
Completion
6-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U222 Setting the IC card type

(Message: Set IC Card Type)
Contents
Set the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting
Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
* :Initial setting value: Other

* :SSFC: Shared Security Formats Cooperation
Completion
6-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U223 Operation panel lock

(Message: Set Panel Operation Lock)
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
Execute to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the
users other than those with administrator privileges.
Setting
Items Contents
Unlock Unlock System Menu operation
Partial Lock 1 Lock System Menu operation and Input/Output setting
Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution
setting
Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution set-
ting and Paper settings
Lock Lock System Menu operation and Job Cancel operation
* :Initial setting value: Unlock

Operation item Partial Lock 1 Partial Lock 2 Partial Lock 3 Lock

Move to the maintenance mode Permission Permission Permission Permission
Move to the system menu. Permission Permission Prohibition Prohibition
Send, Send from Document Box Permission Permission Permission Permission
Switch to registration/ editing Permission Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition
Address book
Switch to registration/editing Doc- Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition
ument Box
Pressing the [Stop] key Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
Pressing the [Status/Job Cancel] Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
key
Disconnect the FAX line Permission Permission Permission Prohibition
Completion
6-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U224 Setting Original Panel Display

(Message: Install Original Panel Display)
Contents
Change the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine start up and the
image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user request
Setting
1.Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.
3.Turn the main power switch on.
Items Contents
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data
Operation item Partial Lock 1 Lock

Opening Img Startup screen Whole start up screen
Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area
Home Menu Img Home Menu screen Home Menu display area
Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display area (top)
Call Msg Detail Service call message 2 Message display area (descriptive
area)

* :Start installation or uninstallation
8.When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Supplement 1: File information
Description File name Image size (in pixels) File format

Startup screen opening_ext_image.png Length: 480 PNG
Width : 800
Service call screen callwin_ext_image.png Length: 200 PNG
Width : 180
Home Menu menu_background.png Length: 480 PNG
screen Width : 800
Service call callwin_ext_mes_top.txt - TEXT
message 1 (Unicode)
Service call callwin_ext_mes_detail.txt - TEXT
message 2 (Unicode)
6-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Supplement 2: Displaying Startup screen

The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping.
Graphics display on service call screen
The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at a service call.
How to change the message
After, entering #562 (4 letters) using the numeric keypad during a service call display, service call
messages 1 and 2 display.
How to reset the message display
Reverting the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous.
Note
The graphics file for startup screen must be opaque. (To avoid the background from overlapping
at recovering from sleeping.)
The total size of the files installable is approximately 4 MB.
Completion
6-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U230 Optional device serial number

(Message: Optional Device Serial No)
Contents
Display the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem
occurrence.
Procedure
* :Display the serial number.
Items Contents
DP Display the document processor serial number.
Finisher Display the finisher serial number.
Booklet Display the booklet folder serial number.
PF1 Display the paper feeder 1 serial number.
PF2 Display the paper feeder 2 serial number.
Completion
U234 Setting destination for punch

(Message: Set Punch Destination)
Contents
Set destination of the punch unit for the finisher.
Purpose
Execute when installing the punch unit for the destination different from the main unit.
Setting
2.Select [Destination].
Items Contents
Auto Match the destination setting.
Japan Metric Japan metric
Inch North American inch specification
Europe Metric European metric

and on
Completion
6-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U237 Finisher exit volume limit

(Message: Set Finisher Paper Stack Limit)
Contents
Set the stacking count of the main tray and middle tray.
Purpose
Execute when stacking failure occurs.
Procedure
2.Select [Main Tray] or [Middle Tray].

Setting value
Main Tray Set the main tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0
Middle tray Set the middle tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0

and on
Main tray Middle tray

Input value 4000-sheet Finisher 4000-sheet Fin- 1000-sheet Fin-
isher isher
0 4000 sheets 65 sheets 50 sheets
1 1500 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets
Completion
6-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U240 Finisher operation check

(Message: Check Finisher Operation)
Contents
Turn each motor and solenoid of the finisher on.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the finisher.
Procedure
Items Contents
Motor Finisher motor operation check
Solenoid Finisher solenoid operation check
Mail Box MT motor operation check
Booklet Booklet folder operation check
Method: Motor
Items Contents
Feed In(H) Drive the DF paper entry motor at high speed.
Feed In(L) Drive the DF paper entry motor at low speed.
Middle(H) Drive the DF middle motor at high speed.
Middle(L) Drive the DF middle motor at low speed.
Eject(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed.
Eject(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed.
Save(H) *1 Drive the DF relief drum motor at high speed.
Save(L) *1 Drive the DF relief drum motor at low speed.
Tray Drive the DF tray motor.
Operation pattern: After descending to the lower limit, ascends and
descends again when passing 1s after detecting the middle sensor off.
ascends again when detecting the middle sensor on and stops at the
upper limit.
Staple Move Drive the DF slide motor.
Staple Drive the DF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Width Test(LD) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Beat Drive the DF paddle motor.
Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position.
Sort Test *1 Execute the DF shift operation.
6-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Items Contents
Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position
Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position
Punch Drive the PH motor
Punch Move *2 Drive the PH slide motor.
Eject Conv(H) Drive the DF drum motor at high speed.
Eject Conv(L) Drive the DF drum motor at low speed.
Cooling Fan *1 Drive exit fan motor.
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Except Inner finisher
Method: Solenoid
Items Contents
Sub Tray *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 on
Save Drum *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 2 on
Booklet *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 3 on
Punch Turn the punch solenoid on
Three Fold *1 Turn the BF feed-shift solenoid on
Press Paper *2 Turn the DF paper press solenoid
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Inner finisher only

Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Conv Drives the MT drive motor to convey paper
Branch Drives the MT drive motor for feed-shift
6-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Booklet
Items Contents
Folding Drive the BF main motor.
Blade Drives the BF blade motor.
Bundle Up Drives the BF adjuster motor 2
Bundle Down Drives the BF adjuster motor 1
Staple Drive the BF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Execute the side registration test (A3).
Width Test(LD) Execute the side registration test (LD).
Feed In Drive the BF paper entry motor.
Completion
6-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U241 Finisher switch check

(Message: Check Finisher Switches)
Contents
Display each switch and sensor status of the document finisher.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Procedure
Items Contents
Finisher Check the finisher switch and sensor operation.
Mail Box Check the operation of the MT switch and the sensor.
Booklet Check the booklet switch and sensor operation.
Punch Check the punch unit switch and sensor operation.
Method: Finisher
* :The display of the switch inverts at the time of detecting the switch on.
Items Contents
Front Cover DF front cover sensor
Eject Cover DF exit cover sensor
Top Cover *2 DF top cover sensor
Tray U-Limit *3 DF tray sensor 1
Tray HP2 *1 DF tray sensor 2
Tray Middle *3 DF tray sensor 3
Tray L-Limit DF tray sensor 4
Tray L-Limit(BL) *1 DF tray sensor 5
Tray Top *3 DF tray upper side sensor
HP DF entry sensor
Sub Tray Eject *1 DF sub exit sensor
Middle Tray Eject *3 DF middle exit sensor
Drum *1 DF drum sensor
Staple HP DF slide sensor
Middle tray DF exit sensor
Width Front HP DF side registration sensor 1
Width Tail HP DF side registration sensor 2
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle exit sensor
Match Paddle DF adjusting sensor
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor
Shift Front HP *1 DF shift sensor 1
6-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Items Contents
Shift Tail HP *1 DF shift sensor 2
Shift Unlock HP *1 DF shift release sensor
Sub Tray Full *1 DF sub tray full sensor
Shift Set *1 DF shift set sensor
Press Paper Up *4 DF paper press sensor 1
Press Paper Down *4 DF paper press sensor 2
Release *4 DF installation detection switch
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: 1000-sheet finisher only, *3: Except Inner finisher, *4: Inner fin-
isher only
Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Eject MT tray exit sensor
Cover MT cover open/close switch
Over Flow1 MT tray sensor 1
Over Flow 6 MT tray sensor 6
Over Flow 7 MT tray sensor 7
Motor HP MT home position switch
6-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Booklet
Items Contents
HP BF paper entry sensor
Eject BF exit sensor
Paper BF paper sensor
Tray Full BF tray full sensor
Bundle Up HP BF adjusting sensor 2
Bundle Down HP BF adjusting sensor 1
Width Up HP BF side registration sensor 1
Width Down HP BF side registration sensor 2
Blade HP BF blade sensor
Tray BF tray open/close detection switch
Set BF set sensor
left Guide BF left cover sensor
Vertical Feed Vertical feed sensor
Method: Punch
Items Contents
Punch HP *1 PH home position sensor
Edge Face 1 *1 PH paper edge sensor 1
Tank PH tank set switch
Tank Full PH tank full sensor
HP *2 PH entry sensor
*1: Except Inner finisher, *2: Inner finisher only
Completion
6-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U243 Checking the DP motor

(Message: Check DP Motors)
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Feed Motor *3 Drive the DP feed motor for normal rotation
Conv Motor DP conveying motor
Rev Motor *2 Drive DP feedshift motor.
Lift Motor *3 DP lift motor
Feed clutch *2 Drive DP feed clutch.
Regist clutch *2 DP registration clutch
Eject motor *3 DP exit motor
Regist Motor *1 DP registration motor
DP Fan *1 DP drive fan motor
CIS Fan *1 DP CIS fan motor
*1: DP-7110 only, *2: DP-7120 only, *3: Except DP-7120
3.Press the [Start] key. Each operation start.

Completion
6-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U244 Checking DP switch

(Message: Check DP Switches)
Contents
Display each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Feed *2 Check DP feed sensor.
Regist Check DP registration sensor.
Timing Check DP timing sensor.
CIS Head *2 Check DP back page timing sensor
Set Check DP original sensor.
Longitudinal Check DP original length sensor.
Lift U-Limit Check DP lift upper limit sensor.
Lift L-Limit Check DP lift lower limit sensor.
Cover Open Check DP upper cover switch
Open Check DP open/close switch.
Eject Check DP exit sensor
Branch Motor HP *1 Check DP feedshift sensor.
*1: DP-7100 only, *2: DP-7110 only
Completion
6-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
U245 Checking the message

(Message: Check Display Message)
Contents
Display messages indicated on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
Execute to check messages indicated.
Procedure
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, display messages in order.
* :Enter the message number using the numeric keys,then press the [Start] key to display the
message of the designated number.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys key, switch the language.
Completion
6-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U246 Finisher adjustment

(Message: Adjust Finisher)
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
· Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Adjust if paper skews or is folded in A z-shape in the PH mode.
· Punch position stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Adjust if the punch hole position is not as specified in the PH mode.
Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust the punch center position if it is shifted in the PH mode.
· Front/rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
· Home position adjustment before/after shift
Adjust when exit paper is not aligned.
Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.
· Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
· Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjust the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
· Adjustment of center folding position
Adjust the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
· Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjust the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Setting
Items Contents
Finisher Setting the finisher adjustment value
Booklet Adjustment value setting of folding unit
6-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Finisher
Items Contents
Punch Regist Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Punch Feed Punch position stop timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Punch Width *2 Punch center position timing adjustment in the PH mode.
Width Front HP Front width adjuster home position adjustment
Width Tail HP Rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Shift Front HP *1 Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP *1 Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Front/rear staple home position adjustment
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Except Inner finisher
Setting: Punch Regist

1.Select [Punch Regist].
Content to adjust Setting Initial set- Data varia-

range ting value tion
Adjusting the PH registration stop timing -20 to 20 0 0.25 mm
* :Increase the value if paper is skewed (sample 1).

Reduce the set value if paper is folded in a Z-shape (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-20
Setting: Punch Feed

1.Select [Punch Feed].

Adjusting the PH position stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.52mm
* :Increase the setting value if the punch position is shorter than specified value.
Reduce the setting value if the punch position is longer than specified value.
6-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)
Figure 6-21
Setting: Punch Width

1.Select [Punch Width].

PH center position timing adjustment -4 to 4 0 0.52 mm
* :Reduce the setting value if the punch position is shorter than specified value.
Increase the setting value if the punch position is longer than specified value.
Center line
(within ± 2 mm)
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-22
Setting: Width Front HP / Width Tail HP

1.Select [Width Front HP] or [Width Tail HP].

Front width adjuster home position adjust- -30 to 30 0 0.97mm
ment
Rear width adjuster home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.97mm

4.Press the [Stop] key and return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
5.Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Width Test(A3)].
* :The middle tray side registration guides move to A3 size position.
6.Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
7.Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
6-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Shift Front HP / Shift Tail HP

1.Select [Shift Front HP] or [Shift Tail HP]

Adjustment of front shift home position -30 to 30 0 0.97mm
Adjustment of rear shift home position -30 to 30 0 0.97mm

5.Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Sort Test].
6.Check consistency of the exit paper and repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in
position.
Setting: Staple HP
1.Select [Staple HP].

Front/rear staple home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.97mm
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-23
Method: Booklet
1. Select items to set.
Items Contents
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position
Staple Pos 1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
Staple Pos 2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
Staple Pos 3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Booklet Pos 1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
Booklet Pos 2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
Booklet Pos 3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Three Fold Adjustment of tri- folding position
6-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Width Up HP/Width Down HP

1.Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP].

Adjustment of upper side registration home posi- -15 to 15 0 0.34 mm
tion
Adjustment of lower side registration home posi- -15 to 15 0 0.34 mm
tion

5.Enter U240 and select [Booklet] and then [Width Test(A3)].
* :The width guides of the folding unit will move to A3-size position.
6.Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
7.Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
Setting: Staple Pos

1.Select [Staple Pos 1], [Staple Pos 2] or [Staple Pos 3].

Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Let- -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
ter size
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/ -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Legal size
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/ -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Ledger/8K size
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the staple position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mmA3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper
× 1/2 ± 3 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-24
Setting: Booklet Pos

1.Select [Booklet Pos 1], [Booklet Pos 2] or [Booklet Pos 3].
6-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
size
Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
size
Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Led- -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
ger/8K size
* :Increase the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3mm
A
Center line Sample 1 Sample 2

Figure 6-25
Setting: Three Fold

1.Select [Three Fold].

Adjustment of tri- folding position -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
* :Increase the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: 7.0 ± 2mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-26
Completion
6-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U247 Paper feed operation check

(Message: Check Paper Feeder)
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Procedure
Items Contents
2PF Operates 2-tray paper feeder
LCF Operate the high capacity feeder
Side Feeder Operate the side feeder
Setting: 2PF
1.Select the item to set.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF feed motor OFF
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF conveying clutch 2: ON
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Start the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
6-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Setting: LCF
Display Contents
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: ON
2.Select [Execute].
Setting: Side Feeder

Display Contents
On PF feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF feed clutch: ON
Cassette1 Solenoid PF feed solenoid: ON
2.Select [Execute].
Completion
6-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U249 Finisher line test

(Message: Finisher Line Test)
Contents
Execute the 4000-sheet finisher operation test
Purpose
Execute to check the 4000-sheet finisher operation
Setting
Items Contents
Punch Position Check the PH stop position
Booklet Pass Check the paper paths to the folding unit

4.Press the [System Menu] key to make a test copy.
Completion
6-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set

(Message: Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set)
Contents
Change the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Execute when changing the display timing of messages prompting the maintenance and auto-
matic grayscale adjustment
Setting
Items Contents Setting Initial

range Setting
value
M.Cnt A Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999 600000
counter (Kit A)
M.Cnt HT Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999
counter (HT adjustment)
Cassette 1 Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999 300000
counter (Cassette 1)
Cassette 2 Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999 300000
Cassette 3 *1 Change the pre-set value of the maintenance 0 to 9999999 300000
*1: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *2: 3000-sheet side feeder only

Completion
6-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U251 clearing the maintenance counter

(Message: Clear Maintenance Counter)
Contents
Display, clear and change the maintenance counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance counter value
Or, execute to clear the counter value when performing the periodical maintenance
Setting
Items Contents Setting

range
M.Cnt A Maintenance cycle counter value (Kit A) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt HT Maintenance cycle counter value (HT adjustment) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 1 Maintenance cycle counter value (Cassette 1) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 2 Maintenance cycle counter value (Cassette 2) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 3 *1 Maintenance cycle counter value (Cassette 3) 0 to 9999999
Clear Clear all the maintenance counter value 0
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the setting value.
Completion
6-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Destination)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the specification of the destina-
tion.
Purpose
Execute to reset the destination setting to the original value when initializing the back up RAM in
the simulation U021.
Procedure
Items Contents
Japan Metric *1 Japan metric
Inch *2 Inch
Europe Metric *2 Europe Metric
Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
*1: 100V model only, *2: Except 100V model

* :Initial setting value: Destination
* :Initializes according to the destination
and on
* :An error code is displayed when an error occurs.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off / on, and execute initialization using mainte-
nance mode U252.
Error code list
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U253 Switching the double/single counts

(Message: Set Double/Single Count)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be
counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
2.Select [B/W].
Items Contents
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)
3.Select [SGL] or [DBL]
Items Contents
SGL(All) Set single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(A3/Ledger) Set the double counts for A3 (420mm) or more
DBL(B4) Set double count if the size is Legal (356mm) or larger
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2

SGL(All) (100V model), DBL(A3/Ledger) (120V/ 220-240V model)
*2: The Folio length can be set to between 330 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035.
However, the double count will be applied when the set value is 330mm (Initial value) or lon-
ger.
Completion
6-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U260 Switching feed/exit count

(Message: Set Copy Count Mode)
Contents
Switch count timing such as total count, etc. to feed or exit.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
2.Select the copy count timing.
Items Contents
Feed Select secondary feed start timing
Eject Select the paper exit timing
* :Initial setting value: Eject

Completion
U265 Setting by destination

(Message: Set Model Destination)
Contents
Set the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
Items Contents
No. Display the OEM code

and on
Completion
6-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U271 Setting the page count unit

(Message: Set Page Count Unit)
Contents
Execute the long paper count setting.
Purpose
Execute to change the long paper count.
* :If double count is set in U253, the value multiplied with this is the long paper count.
Setting

Setting varia-
value tion
Banner A Count setting of Long Paper A (470.1mm 2 to 30 2 -
to 915mm/18.51” to 36”)
Banner B Count setting of Long Paper B (915.1mm 2 to 30 3 -
to 1220mm/36.01” to 48”)
Completion
6-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U278 Delivery date setting

(Message: Set Delivery Date)
Contents
Register the date when the machine was installed.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the installation date of the machine.
Procedure
2.Select [Today].
* :Set the installation date of the machine.
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
* :Clear the installation date of the machine.
Completion
U285 Set Service Status Page

(Message: Set Service Status Page)
Contents
Set if the print coverage report on the report output is displayed or not.
Purpose
Setting
Items Contents
On Display the print coverage report.
Off Not to display the print coverage report.

3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
6-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U286 Optional language setting

(Message: Set Option Language)
Contents
Add/delete/change the optional language
Purpose
Set the optional language that can be selected in the System Menu
Setting
Items Contents
Option Language 1 Set optional language 1
* :Initial setting value: 0(None)

and on
Setting
Items Contents
ARABIC Installed langauage list
CHINESE-S
DANISH
JAPANESE
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
VIETNAMESE
None
* :Display varies depending on installed optional language package.

Completion
6-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U287 Automatic recovery function

(Message: Set Auto Reset Function)
Contents
Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence of the service call or the
system error.
Purpose
Set to change ON/OFF setting of the automatic recovery function after occurrence of the service
call or the system error.
Setting
Items Contents
C0XXX SET WHETHER TO ENABLE THE AUTOMATIC RECOVERY FUNCTION AFTER
OCCURRENCE OF THE SERVICE CALL"C9XXX".
C1XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the service call "C1xxx".
CFXXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after occurrence
of the CF system error.
Completion
6-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity notification setting

(Message: Set Abnormal Heat and Humidity Warning)
Contents
Set whether to indicate the notification when detecting abnormal temperature and humidity.
Purpose
Setting
Items Contents
On Indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Off Do not indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification

Completion
U325 Paper interval setting

(Message: Set Paper Interval (Add Toner))
Contents
Set the print interval at high print coverage.
Purpose
Used to change the print interval at high print coverage.
Setting

Setting
value
Interval Set On/Off of print interval at high print coverage. On/Off Off
Mode Set the print interval mode at high print coverage 1 to 10 1
Completion
6-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U326 Set black line cleaning display

(Message: Set Black Line Clean Display)
Contents
Set whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Display the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the con-
tact glass when scanning from the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Black Line Mode Set On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance display
Items Contents
On Display the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not displayed.

Completion
6-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U327 Cassette heater control setting

(Message: Set Cassette Heater Control)
Contents
Select the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Select the cassette heater control setting.
Set whether the cassette heater is available in the optional cassette.
Procedure
Items Contents
Mode1 Set the cassette heater control Mode1.
Mode2 Set the cassette heater control Mode2.
Off Set the cassette heater control Off (not installed).

* :Drum refresh is not executed at power-up when the cassette heater control is [On].
* :Mode1: ON at 65%RH or more of the machine outside humidity (OFF: during drive ),
Mode2: during drive ), Mode2: always ON
Completion
6-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient

(Message: Adjust Coverage Size Calculation Rate)
Contents
Set the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert
the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial set-

ting value
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Mode Switch full-color count and color coverage count 0: Full color 0
display 1: by coverage
Level1 Set low coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 1.0
Level2 Set middle coverage threshold value 0.2 to 99.9 2.5
Completion
6-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
U339 Drum heater ON mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Heater On Mode)
Contents
Set the drum heater
Purpose
Whether or not to display the drum heater setting in the system menu, and perform the drum
heater setting
Method
Items Contents
System Set whether the drum heater setting in the system menu is displayed.
Drum Heater Set the drum heater
Setting
Items Contents
On Enabled
Off Disabled

* :If it is set to [Off] in [System Menu], [Drum Heater] is set to [Off]
Completion
6-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U340 Setting the applied mode

(Message: Set Applied Mode)
Contents
Allocate memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a
working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct print-
ing occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Adj Memory The memory allocation setting
Adj Max Job No. of multiple job upper limit setting
Setting: Adj Memory


range ting value
Image Area temporarily used to create output -100 to 0
image. 100(MB)
* :Set the below value in case print failure occurs because of the memory shortage. (recom-
mended value)
Image : +100
* :The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large.

and on
Setting: Adj Max Job


range ting value
Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 10
Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 -
* :The maximum [Printer] jobs should be (maximum jobs) – (maximum copy jobs).
Completion
6-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U341 Printer cassette setting

(Message: Set Printer Exclusive Cassette)
Contents
Set the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it
cannot be used for copy.
Setting
* :Multiple cassettes can be selected.
Items Contents
Cassette1 Set cassette 1 as exclusive cassette for the printer output.
Cassette2 Set cassette 2 as exclusive cassette for the printer output.
Cassette3 *1 Set cassette 3 as exclusive cassette for the printer output (Paper
feeder).
feeder).
feeder).

* :Initial setting value: Off (Cassette1 to 5)
Completion
6-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U343 Duplex priority mode

(Message: Set Duplex Priority Mode)
Contents
Switch between duplex copy or simplex copy for initial setting on copy mode.
Purpose
Set the frequently used settings depending on the usage of the user.
Setting
* :Select items to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Off Duplex print priority is disabled

Completion
U345 Maintenance due timing display setting

(Message: Set Maintenance Time Soon Display)
Contents
Set how many prints in the maintenance cycle to display a message notifying that the mainte-
nance time is approaching.
When the maintenance count value reaches the number of pages minus the set value from the
maintenance cycle, a message near the maintenance will be displayed
Purpose
Execute to change the display timing of a message near the maintenance.
Setting

range ting value
Cnt Set the display timing of a message near the 0 to 9999 0
maintenance.
(Remaining number of prints that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle reaches)
SSD Life Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 99 5(%)
for the SSD replacement.
Completion
6-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode

(Message: Selecting Sleep Mode)
Contents
Change the sleep mode setting.
Purpose
Execute when switching the setting of sleep mode.
Method
Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switch Auto Sleep function setting
Fuser Power Mode Fuser Power Mode setting
Setting: Timer/Sleep Level

Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off
Set Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
* :Initial setting value: More Energy Save

and on
Setting: Auto sleep

Items Contents
On Enable Auto Sleep function
Off Disable Auto Sleep function
* : Initial setting value: On

* : If it is set to Off, sleep shift operation will not be performed even if sleep mode is set in sys-
tem menu.
* : Peel off the energy saver label when setting it to off
6-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Fuser Power Mode

Items Contents
Auto If the Sleep Timer is set to "10 minutes" or less, the fuser heating is
turned off after passing 1 minute since the engine drive stops.
If the Sleep Timer is over 10 minutes, the fuser heating is not turned off
even if the engine drive stops after copying.
On The fuser heating is not turned off (continues ON) even if the engine
drive stops after copying.
Off The fuser heating is turned off after passing 1 minute since the engine
drive stops after copying.
(The setting as before)
* :Initial setting value: Auto
Completion
6-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
U402 Adjusting the printing margins

(Message: Adjust Print Margin)
Contents
Adjust the scan image margins.
Purpose
Adjust if each margin is improper.
* :There might be the possibility to occur paper jam at fuser section if the leading edge margin
is less than the specified value.
* :There might be the possibility to occur an image failure (image smudge) on the second page
in continuous print if there is no trailing edge margin.
Adjustment

Setting varia-
value tion
Lead Adjust the printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Margin Adjust the printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Margin Adjust the printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
Trail Adjust the printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
duction.
* :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-27
Note
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following maintenance
mode to adjust.
U034(P.6-42) > U402
Completion
6-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact

glass
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(Table))
Contents
Adjust the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

Setting varia-
value tion
A Margin Adjust the scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjust the scanner leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
C Margin Adjust the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjust the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
value is decreased.
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-28
Note
U034(P.6-42) > U402(P.6-195) > U403
Completion
6-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the docu-

ment processor
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjust the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment
Items Contents Setting Initial Data

range Setting varia-
value tion
A Margin Adjusts the DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjust the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
C Margin Adjust the DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjust the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
A Margin(Back) *1 Adjust the DP left margin (Back page) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin(Back) *1 Adjust the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
(Back page)
C Margin(Back) *1 Adjust the DP right margin (Back page) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin(Back) *1 Adjust the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
(Back page)
*1: Simultaneous duplex scan model only

value is decreased.
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-29
6-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Note
U034(P.6-42) > U402(P.6-195) > U403(P.6-196) > U404
Completion
6-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U407 Writing timing adjustment (Reversal)

(Message: Adjust Writing Timing (Reverse))
Contents
Adjust the write timing when copy printing is rotated by 180°.
Purpose
Adjust when copy printing is drawn by 180° from the scanned image (the image on the memory).
Note
This adjustment is executed after completion of the adjustment in the following maintenance
mode.
U034(P.6-42) > U402(P.6-195) > U66(P.6-65) >
U403(P.6-196) > U71(P.6-69) > U404(P.6-197) > U407
Adjustment
5.Select [Adj Data].

Setting varia-
value tion
Adj Data Adjust the leading edge timing when -47 to 47 0 1dot
writing the image in the memory
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-30
Completion
6-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U410 Half tone automatic adjustment

(Message: Half Tone Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Acquire data necessary for executing halftone automatic adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the halftone density reproducibility is not good
Adjustment
* :Display the execution information screen.
* :Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on the A4/Letter size paper.
2.Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with the arrows toward the back
and the printed side facing down on the platen.
Figure 6-31
* :The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
4.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
* :The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
7.An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error codes
Code Occurrence Contents Re-

position adjust-
ment
S001 Scanner Original reference patch is not detected Enable
S002 Original deviation is in excess in the main scan- Enable
ning direction
S003 Original deviation is in excess in the sub-scan- Enable
ning direction
S004 Original skew is in excess Enable
S005 Original type error Enable
SFFF Other scanner error Disable
E001 Engine Engine status error Disable
E002 Adjustment result error Disable
EFFF Other engine error Disable
C001 Controller Pause status Disable
C002 Adjustment result error Disable
C110 Adjustment value (increase amount) value error Disable
(black)
(cyan)
(magenta)
(yellow)
C210 Adjustment value (increase rate) error (black) Disable
C220 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error Disable
(cyan)
C240 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error Disable
(magenta)
C280 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (yel- Disable
low)
CFFF Other controller error Disable
Completion
6-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
U411 Scanner auto adjustment

(Message: Scanner Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Adjust the scanner section or DP scanning section using the specific originals automatically.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberra-
tion in main/sub scanning direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color cor-
rection matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF cor-
rection, Input gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Execute when adjusting the scanner section or DP scanning section automatically.
Items Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
Table (Chart Execute automatic adjustment of the table 7505000005
A) scanning.
Magnification in the sub scanning direction

/ Leading edge timing
Center line / chromatic aberration
Sub scanning chromatic aberration / MTF
correction COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
gamma in color mode / color correction

No.302K357010
matrix
Input gamma in monochrome mode
DP Execute DP front page scan automatic 302AC68243
FU(ChartB) *1 adjustment
Execute DP back page scan automatic
DP adjustment
FD(ChartB) *2
Magnification in the sub-scanning direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing
6-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
Items Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
DP Execute DP front page scan automatic 7505000005
FU(ChartA) *1 adjustment
Main scanning chromatic aberration / sub

scanning chromatic aberration / MTF cor-
rection
matrix
DP Execute DP back page scan automatic
FD(ChartA) *2 adjustment
Main scanning chromatic aberration / sub

scanning chromatic aberration / MTF cor-
rection
matrix
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value 7505000005
DP Auto Adj Adjusting the document processor Execute in a simplified manner if
*1 scanning section with the chart output by Chart B is not available.
the local machine
Magnification in the sub-scanning direction

Leading edge timing
Center line
*1: DP installed machine only, *2: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP model only
6-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Table (Chart A)

In case of the target value auto input
* :Normally, adjust it here.
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
2.Enter maintenance mode U411.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [Table(ChartA)].
7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjust-
ment.
8.When automatic adjustment has completed properly, [OK] will be displayed.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and
the barcode can't be read, adjust by the following procedure after input the target value manually.
In case of the target value manual input
1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment
original (P/N: 7505000005) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [Table(ChartA)].
8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.
In the following DP adjustment, if the image position shifts large, an error might occur when
adjusting with ChartA, therefore, adjust the color with ChartB (image position) first and then,
adjust with ChartA (color).
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
* :Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
*:DP adjustment original (ChartB)
5 mm
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Figure 6-32

3.Select [DP FU(ChartB)].
Method: DP FD (Chart B)
* :Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-down on the DP.
3.Select [DP FD(ChartB)].
6-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: DP Auto Adj

1.Set A4/Letter paper.
2.Press the [Start] key to print the adjustment original.
3.Set the adjustment original output on the table and press the [Start] key.
4.Set the output adjustment original with face-up on the DP.
5.Press the [Start] key and scan the original.
6.Press the [Start] key to start the front page automatic adjustment.
7.Set the output adjustment original with face-down on the DP.
8.Press the [Start] key and scan the original.
9.Press the [Start] key to start the back page automatic adjustment.
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
ment.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.

2.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-down on the DP.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
ment.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
6-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-down on the DP.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
* :When automatic adjustment has completed properly, [OK] will be displayed. If an error
occurs during auto adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this
case, check the error and execute the automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
Code Contents Corrective action

00 Automatic adjustment success -
01 Black band detection error 1. Set the original correctly and
(Table scanning leading edge skew in the execute the auto adjustment
sub-scanning direction) again.
2. Check lighting of the lamp or
04 Black band is not detected (Table leading
replace it.
edge in the sub-scanning direction)
05 Black band is not detected (Table far end in
the main scanning direction)
06 Black band is not detected (Table near end
in the main scanning direction)
07 Black band is not detected (Table trailing
08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in 1. Check the attachment position of
the main scanning direction) DP.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in 2. Check lighting of the lamp or
the main scanning direction) replace it.
3. Check the back and front of the
0a Black band is not detected (DP leading adjustment original.
0b Black band is not detected
(Original check of DP leading edge in the
sub-scanning direction)
0c Black band is not detected (DP trailing
0d White band is not detected (DP trailing
6-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off / on and
execute again.
0f Magnification error in the sub-scanning 1. Turn the power switch off / on
direction and execute again.
10 Leading edge error in the sub-scanning 2. Adjust manually.
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
direction
11 Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning
direction
12 DP skew error in the sub-scanning direc-
tion
13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off / on and
execute again.
14 Center line error in the main scanning 1. Turn the power off and on, and
direction execute again.
2. Adjust manually.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning direc-
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
tion
16 Magnification error in the main scanning
direction
17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and exe-
cute again.
18 DP paper jam error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
19 PWB replacement error -
1a Original error 1. Clean the contact glass and slit
glass.
2. Exchange the adjustment origi-
nal.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference correction
coefficient error
1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute
again.
Is the bar code dirty?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute
again.
Is the acquired bar code the same?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
6-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error
30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original
error
63 Completed to obtain the test RAW -
Completion
* :*Return back to maintenance mode number selection screen.
6-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U412 Adjusting the uneven density

(Message: Adjust Uneven Density)
Contents
Scan the test pattern image distribution directly from the scanner and adjust LSU light intensity.
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
Correct uneven developer/transfer density in the main scanning direction.
* :After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
Items Contents
Normal Mode Normal Mode
On/Off Config Uneven density correction On/Off setting
Method: Normal Mode

* :Output the test patter with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
2.Set the test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
3.Press the [Start] key. Start scanning.
* :Test pattern is output after completing scanning. (2nd sheet)
* :According to the test pattern of 1st sheet, output with -20% light intensity setting.
5.Press the [Start] key. Start scanning.
* :Test pattern is output after completing scanning. (3rd sheet)
* :Check the correction result.[Finish] appears after normal completion. Display [Finish] .after
normal completion.
1st retrial
8.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
9.Execute Step 3 to 7
2nd retrial
10.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
11.Execute Step 3 to 7
* :An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error codes list
Display Contents Display Contents

S001 Patch is not detected E002 Background image error
S002 Original position shift in the main E003 Density error
scanning direction
S003 Original position shift in the sub- E004 Uneven density error
scanning direction
S004 Original skew error EFFF Other engine error
S005 Original type error C001 Controller error
SFFF Other scanner error CFFF Other controller error
E001 Engine status error

Items Contents
On Enable the uneven density correction
Off Disable the uneven density correction

* :Automatically set to on after completing correction.
Completion
6-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U415 Adjusting the print position automatically

(Message: Print Position Auto Adjust)
Contents
Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing at the print engine
Adjust leading edge timing/center line/margin
Purpose
Execute when performing various adjustment on the print engine section automatically
* : * Execute this mode in a simplified manner when the Chart B(302AC68243) is not available.
Method
1.Set A3/Ledger paper.
* :Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
3.Select [Execute].
* :A test pattern is outputted.
5.Set the output Test Pattern as the original.
* :Automatically perform adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7.When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Error codes list
Display Contents Display Contents

S001 Black band is not detected (main C101 Adjustment value error (main
scanning direction far end) scanning direction magnification)
S002 Black band is not detected (main C102 Adjustment value error (auxiliary
scanning direction near end ) scanning direction magnification)
S003 Black band is not detected (auxil- C103 Adjustment value error (leading
iary scanning direction leading edge timing)
edge)
S004 Black band is not detected (auxil- C104 Adjustment value error (center
iary scanning direction trailing line)
edge)
S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew C105 Adjustment value error (B margin)
error (1.5 mm or more)
S006 Main scanning direction skew error C106 Adjustment value error (A margin)
(1.5 mm or more)
S007 Original error (detection of reverse C107 Adjustment value error (C margin)
original paper)
S008 Original error (page mismatch) C108 Adjustment value error (D margin)
SFFF Other scanner error CFFF Other controller error
Completion
6-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U425 Set Target

(Message: Set Target Adjustment Value)
Contents
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Method
Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Set the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA
Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
Setting: White
2.Enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original by using [Left/
Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys.

Setting variation
value
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 93.6 -
a A value setting -200 to 200 0.9 -
b B value setting -200 to 200 -0.4 -
6-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Black

Setting variation
value
a A value setting -200 to 200 -0.2 -
Setting: Gray1

Setting variation
value
b B value setting -200 to 200 1.2 -
Setting: Gray2

Setting variation
value
Setting: Gray3

Setting variation
value
6-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

Setting variation
value
Setting: C

Setting variation
value
Setting: M

Setting variation
value
Setting: Y

Setting variation
value
Setting: R
6-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-5

Setting variation
value
Setting: G

Setting variation
value
Setting: B

Setting variation
value
Setting: Adjust Original

* :This setting is usually unnecessary.

Setting variation
value
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 4.0 to 6.0 5.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Set the adjustment value of the left 9.0 to 11.0 10.0 0.1mm
edge.
6-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Setting variation
value
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the 189.0 to 191.0 190.0 0.1mm
trailing edge.
1.Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of
black belt 3 of the adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the below distance of three locations "A", "B" and "C". (A: 30mm from the left
edge, B: 105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2.Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys.
4.Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment
original.
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the
right edge of black belt 2.
5.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
7.Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black
belt 3 on the adjustment original at two positions.
1) Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance
from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of
the left edge and deduct A. E:Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge
of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)
8.Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
30mm 148.5mm 267mm
A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge

15mm
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
Figure 6-33
6-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: DP(ChartB)
* :This setting is usually unnecessary.

Setting variation
value
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Set the adjustment value of the left 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the 388.0 to 392.0 390.0 0.1mm
trailing edge.
1.Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment
original.
2.Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys.
3.Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
5.Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside)
on the adjustment original.
6.Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys.
&
ㄪᩚ⏝ཎ✏&KDUW%㸦㒊ရ␒ྕ$&㸧
Figure 6-34
Completion
6-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(Message: Set ID Adjustment Mode)
Contents
Set permission/prohibition of the ID correction operation (calibration). Execute each setting of the
calibration.
Purpose
Execute the calibration setting when an image failure occurs or depending on the user’s request.
Execute Calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
Items Contents
Permission Permit/Prohibit Calibration
Time Interval Sets the time interval to execute calibration after completing printing.
Mode Set execution cycle of the calibration
On/Sleep Out Calibration operation setting (power-up/recovery from sleep mode)
AP/NE Calibration operation setting (AP/NE)
Leaving Time Set the reference time to determine whether to execute calibration from
sleep time when recovering from Sleep mode
Timing Setting the execution timing by drive time
Target Value Setting the sensor target value for the toner thick layer calibration and
light intensity calibration
Calib Executing Calibration
Solid Image Edge reduction setting
Setting: Permission
1.Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration

6-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Time Interval


range
Time(sec) Calibration interval 0 to 9999
* :Setting is changeable in 10 count increments.


Timing 300 360 450
Setting: Mode
Items Contents
Short 0: Calibration cycle setting: Short
Normal 1: Calibration cycle setting: Normal
Long 2: Calibration cycle setting: Long
Custom 3: Calibration cycle setting: Custom
* :Initial setting value: Normal

Setting: On/Sleep Out

Items Contents

Setting: AP/NE
Items Contents

6-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Leaving Time


range ting value
Time(min) Setting the sleep timer 0 to 480 480
Setting: Timing

range
Time(sec) Set continuous print standard time 60 to 9999
* :Setting is changeable in 1 count increments.


Timing 600 720 900
Setting: Target Value


range ting value
Thickness(K) Toner layer calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 135
Gamma(K) Light amount calibration (Black) 0 to 500 307
Setting: Print Rate(B/W)


range ting value
Threshold Proportion of black/white printing (Threshold) 1: On / 0: Off 0
Method: Calib
1.Select [Execute].
* :Calibration starts.
Items Contents
Execute Execute Full Calibration
6-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Solid Image

Items Contents
On 1: Enable smoothing edges
Off 0: Disable smoothing edges

Completion
6-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U465 ID correction data

(Message: ID Adjustment Data)
Contents
Refers to the ID correction data.
Purpose
Execute to check the data.
Method
* :Move to the display screen
Items Contents
Laser Power Display the light intensity control value.
Laser Power(En) Display the exposure level (En)
Laser Power(Drum) Display the half exposure level of the drum (Drum)
Laser Power(Max) Display the maximum exposure level (Max)
Bias Calib Sensor value for the toner layer calibration
T7 CTD T7 control value
Stress Primary transfer belt durability
Method: Laser Power

* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
K Display the Black light intensity control value.
Method: Laser Power(En)

Items Contents
K Displays the exposure level
Method: Laser Power(drum)

Items Contents
K Display the half exposure level of the drum (Black)
Method: Laser Power(Max)

Items Contents
K Display the Black maximum exposure level (Max)
6-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Bias Calib

Items Contents
K Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Black)
Method: T7 CTD
Items Contents
K T7 control value (Black)
Method: Stress
Items Contents
Front Primary transfer belt durability (Front)
Rear Primary transfer belt durability (Rear)
Completion
6-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit

(Message: Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit)
Contents
Set the operation of the transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the transfer belt unit.
Method
Items Contents
Belt Initialize Executing the primary transfer belt speed correction
Method: Belt Initialize

1.Select [Execute].
* :Start primary transfer belt speed correction.
3.When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

4.Error codes list
Code Description
1 Main body cover open
2 toner empty
3 Waste toner over-filled
4 Detecting the service call error
22 Discharge undetected error K
Completion
6-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate

(Message: Adjust JPEG Compression Rate)
Contents
Execute to set compression ratio for JPEG image by the image quality mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. For example, in case of
enlarged copy of 200% or more, increase the setting value to change the compression ratio in
order to eliminate the roughness of the image. If the set value is reduced, compression is high
and image quality is deteriorated. If the set value is increased, image quality is improved but pro-
cessing speed is slower.
Method
Items Contents
Copy Compression ratio for copying
Send Compression ratio for sending
System Compression ratio when storing in the system temporary.
Print Compression ratio for printer
Method: Copy
Items Contents
Photo Compression ratio for the photo mode
Text Compression ratio for the text mode
Setting: Photo

range ting value
Luminance Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 10 10
Chrominance Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 10 10
Setting: Text

range ting value
Luminance Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 10 10
Chrominance Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 10 10
6-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Method: Send
Items Contents
Photo Compression ratio for the photo mode
Text Compression ratio for the text mode
HC-PDF(BG) Set the compression ratio for high compression PDF
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression ratio for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression ratio for High compression PDF (compression pri-
ority).
Setting: Photo

range ting value
Y1 Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)
CbCr1 Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 100 30(%)
Setting: Text

range ting value
6-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

range ting value
Setting: HC-PDF(BG)

range ting value
Setting: HC-PDF(Char)

range ting value
Setting: HC-PDF(File Size)


range ting value
6-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: System

range ting value
Y Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)
CbCr Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)
Setting: Print

range ting value
Luminance Compression ratio for the brightness 1 to 10 7(%)
Chrominance Compression ratio for the color difference 1 to 10 7(%)
Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
6-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
U474 Checking the LSU cleaning

(Message: Check LSU Cleaning Operation)
Contents
Execute the LSU cleaning by operating the LSI cleaning motor. Also, set the cleaning operation
interval and timing to enter the operation.
Method
Items Contents
Execute Execute the LSU cleaning operation.
Cycle Set the LSU cleaning operation.
Method: Execute
* :The LSU slit glass is cleaned.
Method: Cycle

range ting value
Cnt Set the LSU cleaning cycle. 0 to 5000 1000
Setting: Cnt
* :Settable in 500-sheet increments.
Completion
6-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
U485 Image process mode setting

(Message: Set Image Process Mode)
Contents
Set the rotation processing method of PDF image rotation method.
Purpose
Execute when changing the rotation processing method of PDF image.
Method
Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image
Set- Contents
ting
value
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
1 The image rotation is designated to the actual image
2 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
(CTM rotation)
Completion
6-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
U520 TDRS setting

(Message: Set TDRS)
Contents
Check/set the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method
Items Contents
Registration Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog
Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog
On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog
Setting: Registration
Items Contents
TDRS User Registering process for user and password
Access Code Register Access Code
Setting: TDRS User / Access Code / TDRS User & Access Code
Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager
TDRS Server Set the TDRS server URL
TDRS User Set the TDRS Username
Access Code Set the TDRS access code
Proxy Server Set the TDRS proxy server URL
Proxy Port Set the TDRS proxy port number
Proxy User Set the TDRS proxy username
Text Set the TDRS description
* :[Regist] is not executable if a USB memory is not installed.

* :When the USB memory is inserted, TDRS information is automatically retrieved and dis-
played.
After obtaining the TDRS information, select [Regist] and then register the TDRS information
by pressing the [OK] or [Start] key.
* :After the normal completion, [Complete] is indicated in the status information of the item
that was performed.
When an error occurs, the following numbers are indicated in the status information of the
item that has been operated.
* :If [User/Processing Registration using a Password] is selected in the previous dialog, the
"TDRS User" will be indicated.
If [Processing Registration using an Access Code] is selected, the "Access Code" will be
indicated.
6-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error codes
Items Contents Items Contents

e0001 HDD is unavailable. t0001 Fatal error
e0002 The USB memory is unavailable. t0002 Error in processing the network
e0003 The file to import does not exist in t0003 An illegal parameter error
the USB memory.
e0004 Reading from the USB memory t0004 Insufficient resource
has failed.
e0005 Unmounting the USB memory has t0005 Communication error
failed.
e0006 Moving or renaming the file has t0006 Error in processing communica-
failed. tion.
e0007 Opening the file has failed. t0007 Login error
e0008 Closing the file has failed. t0008 External error
e0009 Error in reading the file t0009 Authentication error
e000A Copying the file has failed. t000A HTTP error: Request error
e000B Opening the directory has failed. t000B HTTP error: Error due to the
server
e000C Creating the working directory has t000C HTTP error: Error due to the client.
failed.
e000D Deleting the working file has failed.
Setting: Information
1.Displays the set contents
Items Contents
Agent ID Agent ID
Agent Type Agent Type
Model Display of the model name
Serial No Display of the machine serial number
Offline Display of the TDRS connection state

Items Contents
On Enables TDRS
Off Disables TDRS

and on
Completion
6-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U600 Initialize: All Data

(Message: Initialize: All Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX
PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered con-
tents if the file system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
2.Select [Execute].
* :Display the entry screen for the country code and OEM code.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code] and enter a country code using the numeric keys.
* :Refer to the following country code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Set the country code
OEM Code Set the OEM code
* :No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

* :Start initialization of the data.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
5.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
* :When initialization is successful, "Completed" is displayed for one second.

* :Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)
6-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Country code list
country country
Destination Destination
code code
000 Japan 181 North America*2
156 Asian nations*1 007 South America*3
254 Taiwan 253 European nations*4
097 Korea 009 Australia
038 China 126 New Zealand*5
*1: Applied for Sales company competent Singapore, India, Thailand, Hong Kong.
*2: Applied for Sales company competent USA, Canada.
*3: Applied for Sales company competent Bolivia, Chile, Peru, Argentina, Brazil.
*4: Applied for Sales company competent Italy, Germany, Spain, U.K., Netherlands, Sweden,
France, Austria, Switzerland, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, Portugal, Ireland, Norway, Russia,
Saudi Arabia, Turkey.
*5: Change the country code when selling in New Zealand. The country code to input is 126.
6-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U601 Initialize: Keep data

(Message: Initialize: Keep Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the des-
tination and OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
2.Select [Execute].
* :Display the entry screen for the country code and OEM code.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code].

* :Refer to the country code list. (Refer to P.6-233)
Items Contents
Country Code Set the country code
OEM Code Set the OEM code
* :No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

* :Start initialization of the data.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
6.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
6-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U603 User data 1

(Message: User Data 1)
Contents
Set the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
2.Select [Line Type].
Items Contents
Line Type Line Type
Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS

* :[Completed] is displayed.
Completion
6-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U604 User data 2

(Message: User Data 2)
Contents
Set the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
2.Select [Rings(F/T)].
Items Contents Setting Initial setting value

range
Rings (F/T) Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 -
* :If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.
Completion
U605 Data clear

(Message: Clear Data)
Contents
Initialize data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
2.Select [Clear Com.Rec.].
Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

Completion
6-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto
reduction mode.
Method
Items Contents
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction
mode.
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/Let-
terR) in the auto reduction mode.
Setting: Cut Line(100%)

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the record-
ing capacity when recording the data at 100% magnification.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting,
they are recorded on the next page.
Contents Setting Initial Data

value tion
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax 0 to 22 3 -
at 100% magnification.
* :Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Setting: Cut Line: Auto

ing capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the
entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

value tion
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
6-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Cut Line: Auto

ing capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the
entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

value tion
Set number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the 0 to 22 0 -
A4R/Letter R auto reduction mode.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Completion
6-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U611 System 2
Contents
Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Method
Items Contents
ADJ LINES Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is
set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size
paper is set.
Setting: ADJ LINES

Setting Initial Data

Contents range Setting varia-
value tion
Set number of lines to be adjusted at auto reduction mode. 0 to 22 7 -

Setting: ADJ LINES(A4)


value tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when 0 to 22 22 -
A4 paper is set.

6-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: ADJ LINES(LT)

Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

value tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when 0 to 22 26 -
letter size paper is set.

Completion
6-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U612 System 3
Contents
Set the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method
Items Contents
Auto reduct Select auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Set the automatic protocol list printing.
Setting: Auto Reduct

Set whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direc-
tion or at 100% magnification.
Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the
FAX paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.

Setting: Protocol List

Set the automatic protocol list printing.
Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.

Completion
6-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U615 System 6
Contents
Set the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification
machine
Method
Items Contents
RX WIDTH FOR 11"
Setting: RX WIDTH FOR 11"

Items Contents
LEDGER Transmits the A3 width to the destination machine
B4 Transmits the B4 width to the destination machine
* :Initial setting value: LEDGER

Completion
6-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U620 FAX system

(Message: FAX System)
Contents
Set the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
2.Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode
Items Contents
One Set the one-shot type detection
Cont Set the continuous type detection
* :Initial setting value: One

Completion
6-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U625 Communication settings

(Message: Set Communication)
Contents
Set the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to
complete transmission. Change the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method
Items Contents
Interval Set the auto redialing interval
Times Set the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval

value tion
Set the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 min- -
utes

Setting: Times

value tion
Set the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -

Completion
6-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U630 Communication control procedures 1

(Message: Communication Control 1)
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Set the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality
line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method
Items Contents
TX Speed Set the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Set the reception speed.
TX Echo Set the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
RX Echo Set the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Set the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34
is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1.Select the communication speed.
Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps
4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps
* :Initial setting value: 14400bps/V17

Setting: RX Speed
Set the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination
unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1.Select the reception speed.
Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps Set to V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)
* :Initial setting value: 14400bps
6-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Setting: TX Echo
Set the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error
occurs with echo at the transmitter side.
Items Contents
500 Send the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Send the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
* :Initial setting value: 300

Setting: RX Echo
Set the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when
an error occurs with echo at the receiver side.
Items Contents
500 Send the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Send the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.

Completion
6-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Contents
Purpose
Set the transmission and reception of ECM
Set the CED frequency
Method
Items Contents
ECM TX Set ECM transmission.
ECM RX Set ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission cost is higher priority than the image quality.
* :Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.

Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission cost is higher priority than the image quality.
* :Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.

6-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: CED Freq

Set the CED frequency. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement mea-
sures for the international communication.
Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz

Completion
6-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Correspond to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Set the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Set the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching mode.
Setting: DIS 4Byte

Set whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal.
Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T)

Set the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode.
Items Contents
1Time Set no. of detection of CNG to 1 time.
2Time Set no. of detection of CNG to 2 time.
* :Initial setting value: 1 Time (100V model)/2 Times (Others)

Completion
6-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method
Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Set the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Set the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Set the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Set whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and recep-
tion.
Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.

Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Set if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.

6-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: DIS 2Res

Set the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the cor-
rective measures for transmission errors and other problems.
Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
* :Initial setting value: Once

Setting: RTN Check

Set the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors
occur frequently due to the line quality, lower this setting to reduce them.
Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
* :Initial setting value: 15%

Completion
6-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Contents
Set the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Exe-
cute it as one of measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
* :Relax the communication conditions
Setting
2.Select [TCF Check].
Setting range Initial

value
TCF Check Set the allowed error bytes when detecting 1 to 255 0
the TCF signal

Completion
6-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U640 Communication time setting 1

(Message: Communication Time 1)
Contents
Set the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Set the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
Setting Initial
Items Contents
range Setting value
Time(One) Set the one-shot detection time for 0 to 255 7
remote switching. 1 (New Zealand)
Time (Cont) Set the continuous detection time for 0 to 255 80
remote switching.

Completion
6-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U641 Communication time setting 2

(Message: Communication Time 2)
Contents
Set the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method
Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Set the T0 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Set the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 TIME OUT Set the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Set the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Set the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Set the Td time-out time.
Setting: T0 Time Out

Set the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Set to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or
when the destination unit sets the auto switching function.
Contents Setting Initial

range Setting value
Set the T0 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 56
58(100V model)


Set the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception.
*This setting is usually unnecessary.

range Setting value
Set the T1 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 36
38(100V model)

6-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

The T2 time-out time is specified as follows.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception

range Setting value
Set the T2 time-out time. 1 to 255 69

Setting: Ta Time Out

Set the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in
the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 6-35 ). If either receiving a FAX signal
within this time or passing this time, the mode automatically switches to the FAX reception mode.
Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range Setting value
Set the Ta time-out time. 1 to 255 (s) 30

Ring back tone send start
Start of fax reception

as a fax machine
Line connection
Ring detection
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
Figure 6-35 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time
Setting: Tb1 Time Out

Set the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the FAX/
telephone automatic switching mode, (See figure 6-35). Execute when a reception error occurs
when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range Setting value
Set the Tb1 time-out time. 1 to 255 20

6-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Tb2 Time Out

Set the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in
the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 6-35). Execute when a reception error
occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range Setting value
Set the Tb2 time-out time. 1 to 255 80

Setting: Tc Time Out

In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after
a connected handset receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, oper-
ated as a normal phone after this.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to
receive a call.

range Setting value
Set the Tc time-out time. 1 to 255 (s) 60

Setting: Td Time Out

Set the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to
receive a call. Be sure not to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the
unit is being used as a telephone.

range Setting value
Set the Td time-out time. 1 to 255 6
30(100V model)
9(120V model)

Completion
6-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Set the G3 cable equalizer. Set the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjust the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method
Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Set the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Set the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Set the modem detection level.
Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr

1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].
* :Initial setting value: 0dB
Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr

1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].
* :Initial setting value: 0dB
Setting: RX Mdm Level

1.Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm].
* :Initial setting value: -43dBm
Completion
6-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Set the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
Setting Initial
Items Contents
range Setting value
Sgl LVL Modem Set the modem output level. -15 to 0 11
10 (100V model)
12 (Australia)
DTMF LEV DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -8
(Cent) -9 (100V model)
-7 (Australia)
-6(120V model)
DTMF LEV (Diff) Set the DTMF output level (level dif- 0 to 5.5 2
ference) 1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)

Completion
6-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U660 Ring setting

(Message: Set Calls)
Contents
Set the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Set the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Set the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Set the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Select if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
* :Initial setting value: PSTN

Setting: Dial Tone

Select whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax
is connected to a public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.

6-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Busy Tone

Set whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone
is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent
FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this prob-
lem may be improved. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if
the destination line is busy.
Items Contents
On Detect the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
* :Initial setting value: On/Off (Australia)

Setting: PBX Setting

Select the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
*According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.
Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
* :Initial setting value: Loop

Setting: DC Loop
Set if the loop current is detected before dialing.
Items Contents
On Detect the loop current before dialing.
Off Do not detect the loop current before dialing.

Completion
6-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U670 List output

(Message: Output List)
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
* :Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print
Jobs] is pressed to halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
4.Output selected list.
Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential
boxes, firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance
mode (self-status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion
6-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U671 Clearing FAX backup data

(Message: Clear FAX Back Up Data)
Contents
Clear the communication history information of FAX/Internet FAX which is backed up in MFP.
Purpose
Execute to prevent information disclosure of the backup data.
Setting
2.Select the item to output.
Items Contents
RECOVERY FAX Stor- Enable to use the DIMM used in another machine.
age
FAX Data CLEAR Clear all the data in the DIMM.
Change FAX Storage Change the storage destination of the backup data

* :Clear the backup data.
4.When selecting [FAX Data CLEAR], turn the power switch off / on. Please wait at least 5 sec-
onds or more between power off and on
Completion
6-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U695 FAX function customization

(Message: Customize FAX Function)
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX Set ON/OFF of FAX bulk transmission
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
Setting: FAX Bulk TX

1.By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.

Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg

1.By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4
2.Initial setting value: Off

Completion
6-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U698 Setting the maintenance port

(Message: Set Port for Maintenance)
Contents
Set the port applicable to the maintenance mode.
Purpose
Set the maintenance mode target port when installing multiple ports .
Setting is unnecessary if the same contents are set for both ports. Set only when different items
are set for each port.
* :This maintenance mode only appears when the multiple ports are installed.
Setting
2.Press [Port Select].
* :Current setting display is inverted.
Items Contents
ALL All ports
PORT 1 Port 1 (FAX PWB port)
PORT 2 Port 2 (Optional multiple port)
Note
Since the setting contents of this item are cleared when exiting the maintenance mode or turning
off the power, it is necessary to make settings after entering the maintenance mode again
Completion
6-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U699 Software switch: Set

(Message: Set: Soft SW)
Contents
Set the FAX software switches individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
* :Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting is not neces-
sary to change.
Method
2.Select [SW No.].
3.Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the
[Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specify the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
4.Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.
Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).

Completion
List of software switches which can be configured

Communication control procedures
No. bit Contents

36 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34
6-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. bit Contents

38 0 2400bps/V34
41 3 FSK detection in V.8
42 4 4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active
2 FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or
more
Communication time setting
No. bit Contents

53 76543210 T3 timeout setting
54 76543210 T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)
55 76543210 T5 timeout setting
60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal
63 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)
64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception
66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Modem setting
No. bit Contents

89 76543 RX gain adjust
NCU setting
No. bit Contents

121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern
122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern
1 Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching
125 76543210 Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
126 7654 Ringback tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/
telephone switching
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Calling time setting
No. bit Contents

133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time
134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time
141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)
142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)
143 76543210 Ringer ON time detection
144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection
145 76543210 Ringer OFF time undetected
6-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
No. bit Contents

147 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)
148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time
149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the
DC circuit
151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
6-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U901 Clearing the counters by paper source

(Message: Clear Paper Feeder Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the counter value by each paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Execute to clear counters when replacing the
maintenance parts.
Method
* :Display the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Display and clear the MP tray counter value
Cassette1 Display and clear Cassette 1 counter value
Cassette2 Display and clear Cassette 2 counter value
Cassette3 *1 Display Cassette 3 counter value
Cassette4 *1 Display Cassette 4 counter value
Cassette 5 *2 Display Cassette 4 counter value
Duplex Display and clear the duplex unit counter value
*1: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2, *2: 3000-sheet side feeder

2.Select the counter to clear.
* :Unable to clear [Cassette 3], [Cassette 4] and [Cassette 5]
Completion
6-269
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U903 Clearing the jam counter

(Message: Clear Paper Misfeed Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Execute to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts
Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
Method: Total Cnt

1.Select [Total Cnt].
* :Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
2.Change the screen using the [▲] [▼] key.
* :Unable to clear the accumulated jam counter values.
Completion
6-270
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U904 Clearing the service call error counter

(Message: Clear Service Call Counter)
Contents
Display and clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Execute to check the service call error. Execute to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
Items Contents
Cnt Display and clears the service call error counter.
Total Cnt Display accumulate service call error counts.
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
Method: Total Cnt

1.Select [Total Cnt].
* :Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Unable to clear the accumulated service call error counter values.
Completion
6-271
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U905 Optional counter

(Message: Option Counter)
Contents
Display the counter values of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher
and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet
finisher and inner finisher.
Method
2.Select the device to check.
* :Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP *1 Display the counter value of the document processor.
DF *2 Display the counter value of the document finisher.
*1: DP installed machine, *2: DF installed machine
Method: DP
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
RADP Duplex original count is displayed.
CIS *1 Display the counter value of simultaneous duplex scanning
*1: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP installed machine
Method: DF
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Sorter Display the counter value of the sorter.
Staple Display the counter value of the staple.
Punch Display the counter value of the PH usage.
Stack *1 Display the main tray exit counter value.
Saddle *1 Display the saddle exit counter value.
Fold *1 Display the center folding counter value.
Three Fold *1 Display the tri-folding counter value.
*1: 4000-sheet finisher installed machine
Completion
6-272
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U906 Resetting the partial operation

(Message: Reset Disable Function Mode)
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after
repairing the parts.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.
3.Press the [Start] key to release the partial operation.

and on
Completion
U908 Total counter

(Message: Total Counter)
Contents
Display the total counter value.
Purpose
Display the total counter value to check.
Method
* :Display the total counter value.
Completion
6-273
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U910 Black rate data

(Message: Clear Coverage Data)
Contents
Clear the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4/Letter size paper and its period of time
(as shown on the service status page).
Purpose
Clear data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clear the print coverage data.
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the print coverage data.
Completion
6-274
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U911 Counter by media type

(Message: Paper Size Counter)
Contents
Display feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Display the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method
* :Display feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Display A3 feed counts
B4 *1 Display B4 feed counts
B5 *1 Display B5 feed counts
Folio *1 Display Folio feed counts
Ledger *2 Display Ledger feed counts
Legal *2 Display Legal feed counts
Letter *2 Display Letter feed counts
Statement *2 Display Statement feed counts
ETC Display other feed count.
*1: metric specification, *2: inch specification
Completion
6-275
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U917 Read/Write Backup Data

(Message: Read/Write Backup HDD Data(USB))
Contents
Retrieve the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or write the data from the USB
memory to the main unit.
Purpose
Back up the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information
Method
1.Turn the power switch off.
3.Turn the power switch on.
* :Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory.
5.Select the object item.
Items Contents Depending data*

Address Book Address book informa- -
tion
Job Account Job accounting infor- -
mation
One Touch One-touch key informa- Address book information
tion
User User management Job accounting information
information
Document Box Document box informa- Job accounting, User information
tion
Shortcut Short-cut information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
Fax Forward FAX forward informa- Job accounting, User, Document Box information
tion
System System setting informa- -
tion
Network Network setting infor- -
mation
Job Setting Job setting information -
Printer Printer setting informa- -
tion
Fax Setting FAX setting information -
Program Program information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX
setting
Panel Setting Panel setting informa- Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
tion management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX set-
ting and Program
* :Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or
written.
6-276
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6.Select [Export] or [Import].
Items Contents
Import Importing data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.
7.Press the [Start] key. Start reading or writing.

* :The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
* :When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears.
9.When selecting [Import], after completion of writing, turn the power switch off / on. Please wait
at least 5 seconds or more between power off and on
Error code list
Code Contents
e000 Unspecified error
e0001 Parameter error
e0002 Generating a dummy file has failed.
e0003 The XML file to import does not exist
e0004 The exported file does not exist
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling addressbook
e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch
e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management
e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel program data
e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding FAX data
e0600 to e06ff Error in handling the system configuration
e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters
e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting
e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts
e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information
e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling FAX data
e0c00 toe0cff Error in handling printer data
e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data
e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes
e1000 to e1fff Error in the device-related process
e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF
e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF
e4000 to e4fff Error in process for import
(e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4008) Invalid file header
e5000 to e5fff Error in the SOAP data rewriting process
Completion
6-277
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U920 Charge counter

(Message: Charge Counter)
Contents
Display the setting value of the charge count.
Purpose
Execute to check the setting value of the charge count.
Method
2.Select the item to display.
* :Switched to each display screen.
Items Contents
Main Function Main function counts
Sub Function Sub functions counts
Method: Main Function

* :The charge counts for the main functions are displayed.
Items Contents
B/W Copy Display B/W copy counts.
B/W Prn Display B/W printer counts.
B/W FAX Display FAX counts.
Method: Sub Function

* :The charge counts for the sub functions are displayed.
Items Contents
Simplex Display simplex print counts.
Duplex Display duplex print counts.
Combine(Off) Display no combine printer counts.
Combine(2in1) Display combine printer counts (2in1).
Combine(4in1) Display combine printer counts (4in1).
Completion
6-278
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
U927 Clearing all the charge/life counters

(Message: Clear All Charge/Life Counter (one time only))
Contents
Clear all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values
are 1000 or less.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize the charge count and machine life count.

* :Clear all charge counts and machine life counts.
Completion
U928 Machine life counter

(Message: Machine Life Counter)
Contents
Display the machine life counter value.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine life counter value.
Method
* :Display the machine life counter value.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the machine life counter value.
Completion
6-279
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts

(Message: Clear Charger Roller Counter)
Contents
Display and set the MC roller counter value
Purpose
Execute to confirm the counter value after main charger unit replacement. And also, execute
when clearing the counter value after the replacement.
Method
* :Display the MC roller counter value.
Items Contents
K Display the MC roller counter value for Black.
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
Completion
6-280
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log

(Message: Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log)
Contents
Set the function to record the in/out date of the maintenance mode or date executing each main-
tenance item individually and output the log file.
Purpose
Record the maintenance mode history to analyze the cause when a problem occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Export Exports Maintenance Log.
Setting Maintenance log output setting
Method: Export
1.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Export maintenance log to USB memory

Export maintenance log to USB memory
* :If a USB memory is not inserted, [Execute] is grayed out .
* :Display OK/NG after execution.
Setting: Setting
* :Select the key including the number to set indicated by each block.
Items Contents
U000 to U019 Set the maintenance log output for U000 to U019.
U600-U699 Set the maintenance log output for U600 to U699.
6-281
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
2.Set on/off for the number desired to set.
Completion
U942 DP loop amount setting

(Message: Adjust DP Original Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method

Items Contents range Setting variation
value
Front Single-side original loop amount -32 to 32 0 0.20mm(DP-
7100)
0.16mm(DP-
7110)
Back *1 Double-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
Mix *2 Mixed original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
*1: Reversing duplex scanning machine only, *2: except DP-7120

Increase the set value if no feed jam or skew feed occurs and reduce the set value if creases
appear on the original.
Completion
6-282
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
U952 Maintenance mode workflow

(Message: Maintenance Mode Work Flow)
Contents
Execute maintenance mode registered in workflow data of machine main unit or USB memory in
order
Purpose
Execute when you want to register routine maintenance mode work in advance.
Method
Items Contents
Continue Resume interrupted workflow.
Execute(USB) Execute the workflow in a USB memory.
Execute Execute the workflow saved in the main unit.
Entry(USB) Register the workflow in a USB memory to the main unit.
Entry Register the workflow in the main unit manually.
Log Display the latest workflow execution history.
Method: Continue
1.Select maintenance mode number to execute.
* :Selected maintenance mode is executed.
Method: Execute(USB)
1.Make sure to check that the LED display turns off before turning off the power switch
5.Select [Execute(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory

* :Execute maintenance mode registered in workflow in order
Method: Execute
1.Select the place to save the data to execute.
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit

3.Press the [Start] key to start the processing.
6-283
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
* :The machine is preset with the following workflow at shipment.
Items Contents
SET UP 464,410,000,927,278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140,101,464
WARRANTY 089,000
MK 119,140,469,127,464,412,464,410,251
EH SETUP 411,034,246,211
Method: Entry(USB)
5.Select [Entry(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory
7.Select the workflow save area.
Items Contents
8.Select [Execute].
* :Register the workflow data in a USB memory to the main unit.
Method: Entry
1.Select [Entry].
2.Select the workflow save area.
Items Contents
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the
workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers

* :Execute maintenance mode registered in workflow in order
6-284
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
e.g.
It is possible to register in case if USB memory with the following command and wording / main-
tenance number (changeable) is inserted
File format: xxx.mwf
1, SET UP,464,410,000,927,278
2, HIGH ALTITUDE, 140,101,464
3, WARRANTY,089,000
4, MK-A,119,140,469,127,464,412,464,410,251
5, EH SETUP,411,034,246,211
Completion
6-285
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
U964 The log correction flow

(Message: Non-display)
Contents
Transfer the log files stored in the HDD to a USB memory.
The data to be transferred includes a log and a panel display when acquiring logs.
Purpose
Transfer the log file stored in the HDD to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method
5.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.

* :Start transferring the log files stored in the HDD to a USB memory.
[Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes)
7.[Completed] appears after normal completion.
and on
Supplement
How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes
Start retrieving the log when pressing and holding three keys on the operation panel (Status/Job
Cancel + System Menu/Counter + Stop) for 3 to 6 seconds.
The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns on when completed.
The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB memory.
Error code list
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB memory is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory
Copy Error Failed to copy from HDD to USB memory
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion
6-286
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
U969 Toner area code

(Message: Toner Area Code)
Contents
Display the toner area code.
Purpose
Execute to check current setting of toner area code and model code.
Method
* :Display the toner area code and model code
Items Contents
Area Code Toner container area code
Model Code Model code
Completion
U977 Setting the data capture mode

(Message: Set Data Capture Mode)
Contents
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Purpose
In order to check the data, store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB memory.

* :When detecting abnormal operation, an error code is displayed.
Error code list
Items Contents
1 USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data
processing or is write-protected.
4 USB memory is full.
50 Other error occurred
Completion
6-287
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
U981 Setting/Checking of predictive maintenance alert data

(Message: Set/Check CBM Alert Data)
Contents
Refer/Change the information about CBM (condition based maintenance) in KFS.
Purpose
Refer/Change the counter, threshold and setting current value about CBM (condition based
maintenance)
Execution
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
CBM Alert CBM Alert
Cassette Feed Timing Paper feed timing
Retard Retard
Image Quality Background image/Thin density
DP Feed Retry DP paper feed retry
Scan Image Image vertical streak has entered
Execution: CBM Alert

Items Contents
Engine Engine
Scanner Scanner
Setting: Engine
2.Change the setting value by using [+] [-] key or the numeric keypad.
Items Contents Setting Initial setting

range
Cassette Feed Timing Paper feed timing 0 to 1 0: (Off)
Retard Retard 0 to 1 0: (Off)
Image Quality Background image/Thin density 0 to 1 0: (Off)
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Scanner

range
DP Feed Retry DP paper feed retry 0 to 1 0: (Off)
Scan Image Image vertical streak has entered 0 to 1 0: (Off)
6-288
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3.Press the [Start] key and then fix the setting value.
Execution: Cassette Feed Timing

Items Contents
Total Error Cnt Total Error Counts threshold for market
Total Error Cnt(HQ) Total Error Counts threshold for development
Error Cnt Per Unit Error Counts Per Unit threshold for market
Notice 1K Cnt The number of Notice 1K Counts
Error Cnt Per 1K Error Counts Per 1K threshold for market
Error Cnt Per 1K(HQ) Error Counts Per 1K threshold for development
Condition Setting Condition Setting
Setting: Total Error Cnt


range
Cassette1 Cassette 1 0 to 9999999 0
Setting: Total Error Cnt(HQ)


range
6-289
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Error Cnt Per Unit


range
Setting: Notice 1K Cnt


range
Setting: Error Cnt Per 1K


range
6-290
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Error Cnt Per 1K(HQ)


range
Setting: Condition Setting


range
Threshold Feed Threshold Feed Error1 20 to 500 25
Error1
Threshold Feed Threshold Feed Error2 20 to 500 50
Error2
Rate Of Alert Rate Of Alert 1 to 100 10
Unit Per Sheet Num- Unit Per Sheet Number 100/500/ 100
ber 1000
Execution: Image Quality

Items Contents
Background Of Print- Background Of Printing
ing
Thin Concentration Thin Concentration
Retry Setting Retry Setting
Calibration Calibration
6-291
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Background Of Printing


range
K CTD value K 0 to 1000 800
Setting: Thin Concentration


range
K CTD value K 0 to 255 228
Setting: Retry Setting


range
Value Retry number 0 to 255 1
Developing Refresh Developing Refresh at a retry 0 to 1 1
Existence Retry existence or not 0 to 1 1
Method: Calibration
Items Contents
Dot Cnt Dot counts when a calibration was succeeded last time
Developing Time Developing driving time when a calibration was succeeded last time
Setting: Dot Cnt


range
K Black 0 to 999999 0
6-292
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Setting: Developing Time


range
K Black 0 to 999999 0
Execution: DP Feed Retry

Items Contents
Cnt DP Feed Retry counts
Setting DP Feed Retry setting
Setting: Cnt

range
Total Cnt DP paper feed pulley total counts threshold for 0 to 999999 0
market
Total Cnt(HQ) DP paper feed pulley total counts threshold for 0 to 999999 0
development
Cnt Per Unit DP paper feed pulley counts per unit threshold 0 to 999999 0
for market
Error DP paper feed pulley defined sheet error 0 to 999999 0
counts
Setting: Setting

range
Feed Error Feed Error for market 200 to 5000 894
Feed Error(HQ) Feed Error for development 200 to 5000 844
Rate Of Alert Rate Of Alert 0 to 100 10
Unit Per Sheet Num- Unit Per Sheet Number 300/500/1000 1000
ber
6-293
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Execution: Scan Image

Items Contents
Cnt Scan Image counts
Setting Scan Image setting
Setting: Cnt

range
Detect Black DP(CCD side) streak detection 0 to 999999 0
Line(CCD)
Detect White DP(CIS side) white streak detection 0 to 999999 0
Line(CIS)
Table Scan Table Scan sheet number 0 to 999999 0
Unit Per DP Cnt(B) Error Counts Per Unit (DP back side of 0 to 999999 0
black streak)
Error Defined sheet error counts of notice 0 to 999999 0
number
Setting: Setting

range
Removal Of Black Setting of line removal strong(DP face 5 to 15 15
Line(F) side of black line)
Removal Of Black Setting of line removal strong(DP face 5 to 15 15
Line(B) back of black line)
Rate Of Alert(F) Rate of alert detection[%] (DP face side 0 to 20 1
of black line)
Rate Of Alert(B) Rate of alert detection[%] (DP face back 0 to 20 1
side of black line)
Unit Per Sheet Num(F) Unit Per Sheet Number (Face side) 300/500/1000 1000
Unit Per Sheet Unit Per Sheet Number (Back side) 300/500/1000 1000
Num(B)
Completion
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-294
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U984 Developer unit number

(Message: Developing Unit Number)
Contents
Display the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method
* :Display the developer unit number.
Items Contents
K Display the Black developer unit number.
Completion
6-295
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U985 Developer unit history

(Message: Developing Unit History)
Contents
Display the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Display the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method
* :Select K.
Items Contents
K Display the Black developer unit history.
* :Display the machine serial number and 3 developer counter history.
Items Contents
Cnt History 1 to 3 Developer counter history
Completion
6-296
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U989 HDD scan disk

(Message: HDD Scandisk)
Contents
Apply Scandisk to the HDD for data recovery.
Purpose
There might be the possibility that HDD management information may become error when turn-
ing off the power while accessing the hard disk, HDD recovery is executed.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute HDD scan disk request
3.Press the [Start] key to execute scandisk.

and on
Completion
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time

(Message: Clear Scanner Lamp ON Time)
Contents
Display the accumulated DP CIS lighting time
Purpose
Execute to check the DP CIS usage.
Method
* :DP CIS accumulated lighting time is displayed in minutes.
Items Contents
CIS Display the accumulated DP CIS lamp lighting time
Completion
6-297
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U991 Scanner counter

(Message: Scanner Counter)
Contents
Display the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method
* :Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Display times of copy and scan operations.
Fax Scan Display times of FAX scan operations.
Other Scan Display times of other scan operations.
Completion
6-298
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems
(1) Isolate the place of image failure
<How to isolate the cause>
Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.
Yes: Scanner factor
1. Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](See page 7-2).

(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass --> CCD failure at scanning factor)
Isolate with the original scanning position.

a. DP simplex (Main unit CCD scan)
b. On the contact glass (scan by the main unit CCD)
2. Refer to image failure with engine factor (See page 7-64).

(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Primary transfer image formation process failure)
<Image data flow>
Copying :
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB (LSU)
Sending :
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB PC
Printing data from PC :

APC PWB
Printer driver Engine PWB
(LSU)
7-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back
side through the mechanically reversed DP)
No. Contents Image sample

(2-1) Abnormal image
(2-2) Colored background
(2-3) Black or color spots
(2-4) Blurred characters
(2-5) Mismatch between the center of the origi-

nal and the center of the copy image (Front
side)

nal and the center of the copy image (Back
side)
7-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(2-7) Horizontal black streaks
(2-8) Vertical streaks, band (black or color)
(2-9) Regular difference of the leading edge on

the original image and copy image (Front
side)

the original image and copy image (Back
side)
(2-11) Vertical streaks, band (white)
(2-12) moiré (front side)
(2-13) moiré (back side)
7-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(2-14) Missing entire image (White / Black)
(2-15) Image is dark partly or light
(2-16) Blurred image
(2-17) Image is missing partly
(2-18) Color shift
(2-19) Skewed image
(2-20) Entire image is light
7-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

(When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection FFC is not connected Clean the FFC terminals of Service
properly. Or it is faulty. the following FFC and recon- Manual -
nect them. If the FFC terminal Section 8
is deformed or broken, "PWBs"
replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking the connection The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD connec- Detaching
connected, or is faulty. tion cable. Or, replace it. and reat-
taching the
HDD
3 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
HDD
4 Checking the lens unit The lens unit is not Reattach the lens unit. Detaching
attached properly. and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7 Checking the main PWB The connector or the FFC Clean the terminal of the con- Service
is not connected properly. nectors on the main PWB, Manual -
Or, the wire, FFC, the reconnect the connector of Section 8
PWB is faulty. the wire, and reconnect the "PWBs"
FFC terminal. If the wire or Detaching
the FFC is faulty, repair or and reat-
replace them. If not resolved, taching the
replace the main PWB. Main PWB
7-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density] to Function
Adjustment is not set. [Auto] at [System Menu/ Defaults
Counter] > [Common Set- (Opera-
tings] > [Function Defaults] tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Changing the setting The background density is Set [Background Density] to Function
dark. [Manual] to adjust the den- Defaults
sity at [System Menu/ (Opera-
Counter] > [Common Set- tion Guide
tings] > [Function Defaults] - Section
6)
3 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density Back-
Adjustment is not set. Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
Quality]. Density
Adjust-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
4 Changing the setting The original background Set [Background Density Back-
density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
ground density adjustment Image Quality], and adjust Density
is dark. the background density. Adjust-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
5 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during press-
scanning. ing.
6 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at Detaching
the backside of the contact and reat-
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. When the same phenomenon Mainte-
occurs at the table scanning nance
too, execute U411 Mode List
[Table(chartA)].
7-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the home posi- The home position sensor Reattach the home position
tion sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
replace the FFC.
10 Checking the lamp unit The lamp unit is not Reattach the lamp unit. Detaching
taching the
Lamp Unit
11 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty or Clean the DP slit glass or
not properly attached. reattach it.
12 Adjusting the left DP hinge The original is raised at Adjust the left DP hinge
height scanning. height.
13 DP replacement The DP frame is deformed Replace the document pro- Detaching
or the DP hinges are faulty. cessor. and reat-
taching the
DP
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
15 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Cleaning the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass.
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Checking the original The originals out of specifi- Ask a user to use the speci-
cation are used. (They are fied paper.
thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the
original is bent. paper creases of the original.
3 Cleaning the DP convey- The DP conveying roller or Clean the DP conveying
ing roller and the bushings the bushing is dirty. roller and the bushing.
4 Checking the DP convey- The original conveying pul- Reattach the DP conveying
ing pulley and the pressure ley does not rotate pulley and the pressure
spring smoothly. spring.
5 Checking the DP drive The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
parts properly attached.
6 Checking the original pick- The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up
up guide does not operate properly. guide.
7 Replacing the DP scan- The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning
ning guide deformed. guide.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights Adjust the left DP hinge
height of the DP do not match. height.
9 Checking the DP The document processor Check the positioning of the
is not properly installed in document processor and
the main unit. tighten the screws again.
10 Checking the DP hinges The holding pressure of Adjust the DP hinges holding
holding pressure the DP hinge is not prop- pressure.
erly adjusted. (The DP
hinge does not operate
smoothly in the up and
down direction, and the
right and left sides of the
DP are distorted because
the DP can not hold the
opened condition.)
11 Replacing the DP hinges DP hinge is faulty. (The DP Replace the DP hinges.
opened condition.)
7-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
(Front side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)

1 Checking the original The originals are not prop- Reset the originals.
erly set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scan- Adjust U072 [Front]. Mainte-
ning the front page of the nance
originals at the document Mode List
processor is not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjust- Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
ment when DP scanning is (For the dual scan DP only) nance
not executed. Mode List
4 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjust- Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart Mainte-
ment when DP scanning is B)]. nance
not executed. Mode List
(Back side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)

1 Checking the original The originals are not prop- Reset the originals.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scan- Adjust U072 [Back]. Mainte-
ning the back page of the nance
originals at the document Mode List
processor is not adjusted.
7-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


3 Executing U072 Scanning the image on the Adjust U072 [Front]. Mainte-
back of the size indication nance
plate. (U072 [Front] adjust- Mode List
ment value is not proper.)
4 Executing U411 Scanning the image on the Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
back of the size indication A)]. nance
plate. (U411 Mode List
[Table(ChartA)] adjust-
ment value is not proper.)
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Cleaning the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass and
and the DP original con- the DP conveying guide.
veying guide
2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and Detaching
shading plate at the back- the shading plate at the back- and reat-
side of the contact glass is side of the contact glass. taching the
dirty. Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
3 Cleaning the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror in the lamp Detaching
unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
4 Checking the lamp unit The dust is adhered on the Remove dust inside the laser Detaching
lamp unit. path of the lamp unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
5 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using
an air-blower.
6 Executing U063 The image scanning posi- Execute U063 to change the Mainte-
tion is incorrect. scanner shading position. nance
Mode List
8 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original
detected original size are Size
mismatched. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
9 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
10 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust U067 [Front]. Mainte-
incorrect. (The streaks or nance
bands appear out of the Mode List
original image.)
11 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
incorrect. (Streaks or A)]. nance
original.)
7-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust U068 [DP Read]. Mainte-
scanning an original on the nance
DP is incorrect. Mode List
original image.)
14 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
incorrect. (Streaks or nance
original.)
15 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart Mainte-
incorrect. (Streaks or B)]. nance
original.)
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-9) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
(Front side)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust U071 [Front]. Mainte-
original leading edge at the nance
document processor is not Mode List
properly set.
2 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
scanning an original on the (For the dual scan DP only) nance
3 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart Mainte-
scanning an original on the B)]. nance
5 Replacing the DP convey- The DP conveying roller is Replace the DP conveying
ing roller worn down. roller.
6 Applying the grease The DP drive motor rotates Apply the grease to the drive
irregularly and the exces- gear of the DP drive motor.
sive load is applied to the (EM-50LP: Part number
DP drive gear. (7BG010009H))
7 Replacing the DP drive The DP drive motor rotates Reattach the DP drive motor
motor irregularly due to the fault. and reconnect the connector.
If not repaired, replace it.
(Back side)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust U071 [Back]. Mainte-
leading edge on the back nance
page of the originals at the Mode List
document processor is not
properly set.
7-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
taching the
Lamp Unit
4 Checking the lens cover The lens cover is off. Reattach the lens cover. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Executing U063 The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the Mainte-
backside of the contact scanner shading position. nance
glass is dirty. Mode List
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
and the DP original con- the DP original conveying
veying guide guide.
7-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-12) moiré (front side)


1 Changing the setting The original image quality Set [Original Image] at [Sys- Function
is not set properly. (moiré tem Menu/Counter] > [Com- Defaults
changes depending on the mon Settings] > [Function (Opera-
image quality.) Defaults] tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Reloading the original The original is not set Rotate the originals in 90
properly. (moiré appears in degrees and reset them.
the original scanning direc-
tion.)
(2-13) moiré (back side)


1 Changing the setting The original image quality Set [Original Image] at [Sys- Function
is not set properly. (moiré tem Menu/Counter] > [Com- Defaults
changes depending on the mon Settings] > [Function (Opera-
image quality.) Defaults] tion Guide
- Section
6)
tion.)
7-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Checking the original The originals were set Reset the original to correct
upside down. the front and back direction.
2 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is not Reattach the DP slit glass.
properly attached.
replace the FFC.
6 Checking the scanner The scanner drive belt Reattach the scanner drive
drive belt comes off. belt.
7 Checking the scanner The scanner drive gear is Reattach the scanner drive
drive gear not properly attached. gear.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Checking the table scan- The table scanning of origi- Check if the same phenome- Measures
ning nals is faulty. non occurs when scanning for Table
on the contact glass. If it Scanning
occurs, perform the field
measures for the same phe-
nomenon that occurs when
scanning on the contact
glass.
3 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is bent. Reattach the DP slit glass.
4 Checking the DP scanning DP scanning guide is not Reattach the DP scanning
guide installed properly. guide.


1 Replacing the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or
replace it if possible.
2 Removing condensation The DP slit glass has con- Remove the condensation on
densation. the DP slit glass.
3 Removing condensation The mirror has condensa- Remove the condensation on Detaching
tion. the mirror in the lamp unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
4 Removing condensation The lens has condensa- Remove the condensation on Detaching
tion. the lens in the lens unit. and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Removing condensation The glass of the CCD Remove the condensation on Detaching
PWB has condensation. the CCD PWB glass using a and reat-
blower brush taching the
Lens Unit
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
the scanner is incorrect. A)]. nance
Mode List
replace the FFC.
7-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB


1 Checking the original The original is not set Reset the originals.
properly.
2 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manu- Original
paper side do not match ally. Size
on the operation panel. (Opera-
(The setting is incorrect.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Changing the setting The copy position is Set [Auto Image Rotation] to Function
rotated automatically. [Off] from the System Menu. Defaults
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
properly attached.
replace the FFC.
7-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(2-18) Color shift


1 Checking the original The originals out of specifi- Ask a user to use the speci-
cation are used. (They are fied paper.
thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the
original is bent. paper creases of the original.
4 Checking the DP convey- The original conveying pul- Reattach the DP conveying
ing pulley and the pressure ley does not rotate pulley and the pressure
spring smoothly. spring.
5 Checking the DP drive The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
parts properly attached.
6 Replacing the DP scan- The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning
ning guide deformed. guide.
7 Checking the original pick- The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up
up guide does not operate properly. guide.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights Adjust the left DP hinge
height of the DP do not match. height.
7-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the DP The document processor Check the positioning of the
is not properly installed in document processor and
the main unit. tighten the screws again.
10 Checking the DP hinges The holding pressure of Adjust the DP hinges holding
holding pressure the DP hinge is not prop- pressure.
erly adjusted. (The DP
opened condition.)
11 Replacing the DP hinges DP hinge is faulty. (The DP Replace the DP hinges.
opened condition.)
(2-19) Skewed image


1 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
creased. paper creases of the original.
2 Checking the original width The original skews. Relocate the original width
guides guides.
3 Adjusting the right DP The right DP hinge position Adjust the right DP hinge Right DP
hinge position is not adjusted back and position back and forth. Hinge
forth. Adjust-
ment (DP-
7110
Installa-
tion Guide)
4 Cleaning the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. Clean the DP feed roller.
(It can be removed by
cleaning.)
5 Replacing the DP feed The DP feed roller is dirty. Replace the DP feed roller.
roller (It cannot be removed by
cleaning.)
6 Cleaning the DP registra- The DP registration roller Clean the DP registration
tion roller is dirty. roller.
7 Checking the DP registra- The operation of the DP Reattach the DP registration
tion pulley registration pulley is faulty. pulley.
7-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Executing U942 The original loop amount Adjust the original loop Mainte-
before registration is amount at U942. nance
improper. Mode List


and the DP original con- the DP conveying guide.
veying guide
properly attached.
4 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality accord- Original
adjusted. (The original ing to the originals. Image
type and image quality dif- (Opera-
fers.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
5 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Function
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
to "On".) Setting] > [Function Defaults] (Opera-
> [EcoPrint] tion Guide
- Section
6)
6 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be Adjust-
adjusted. (The density set- dark. ment/
ting is too light.) Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Back- Adjust-
adjusted. ([Background ground Density Adjustment to ment/
density] is set to "Off".) make dark. Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] set- Change to [Off] at [System Function
ting is [On] Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
Setting] > [Function Defaults] (Opera-
> [Prevent Bleed-thru] tion Guide
- Section
6)
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
10 Executing U411 The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
adjusted. FD(ChartA)] and [DP nance
FU(ChartA)]. Mode List
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Scanner Factors (Dual scan DP:When scanning the back side through DP)


nal and the center of the copy image

the original image and copy image
7-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(3-9) Moiré
(3-14) Color shift
7-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(3-15) Skewed image
7-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

Object: Dual scan DP
(When scanning the back side through DP)

1 Checking the DP relay The DP relay PWB is not Reattach the DP relay PWB.
PWB properly attached.
2 Checking the SATA cable The SATA cable is not Reinsert the connectors of Service
properly connected. the SATA cable between the Manual -
DPSHD PWB and the DP Section 8
relay PWB. "PWBs"
3 Replacing the SATA cable The SATA cable is Replace the SATA cable Service
deformed or broken. between the DPSHD PWB Manual -
and the DP relay PWB. Section 8
"PWBs"
4 Checking the DPSHD The DPSHD PWB is not Reconnect the DPSHD PWB
PWB properly connected. to the DPCIS.
5 Replacing the DPSHD The DPSHD PWB is faulty. Replace the DPSHD PWB.
PWB
6 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS then exe- Detaching
cute U091 and U411. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS-
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7 Replacing the DP relay The DP relay PWB is Replace the DP relay PWB.
PWB faulty.
8 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Setting Background Den- The original background Set [Background Density Back-
sity Adjustment density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
ground density adjustment Quality]. Density
is set to Off. Adjust-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Setting Background Den- The original background Set [Background Density Back-
sity Adjustment density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
3 Executing U411 The CIS image adjust- Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
ment (U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. nance
FD(ChartA)]) is not exe- Mode List
cuted.
4 Checking the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty Clean the CIS roller
5 Checking the CIS roller The CIS roller does not Reattach the CIS roller driv-
rotate properly. ing section.
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
7-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB


1 Checking the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
7-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB

1 Reloading the original The originals are not prop- Reload the original properly.
2 Executing U072 The DP scanning position Adjust the DPCIS center line Mainte-
is not adjusted. by executing U072 [CIS]. nance
Mode List
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
is not adjusted. nance
Mode List
4 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
is not adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. nance
Mode List
7-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


2 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Executing U072 The leading edge timing is Adjust U072 [CIS]. Mainte-
improperly adjusted. nance
(Streaks or bands appear Mode List
on the image outside the
original.)
2 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
improperly adjusted. nance
original.)
3 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
improperly adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. nance
original.)
4 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
5 Cleaning the DP convey- The DP conveying guide is Clean the DP conveying
ing guide dirty. guide.
6 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration pulley Clean the DP registration pul-
tion pulley is dirty. ley.
8 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line cor- Execute U091. Mainte-
rection) is not executed. nance
Mode List
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
7-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB

1 Executing U072 The DP scanning position Adjust the DPCIS center line Mainte-
is not adjusted. by executing U072 [CIS]. nance
Mode List
2 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. Mainte-
is not adjusted. nance
Mode List
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
is not adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. nance
Mode List
7-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


2 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
3 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line cor- Execute U091. Mainte-
rection) is not executed. nance
Mode List
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-9) Moiré

1 Changing the image qual- The image quality mode is Change the image quality Printer
ity mode not set properly. (Moiré mode. Driver
changes depending on the Operation
image mode) Guide
tion.)
3 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
adjustment is not exe- FD(ChartA)]. nance
cuted. Mode List


relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
7-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB


1 Checking the image quality Image quality is not prop- Select the image quality fit- Original
mode erly adjusted. (Original ting the original type. Image
type and image quality are (Opera-
mismatched.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the fold or creases of
creased. the original.
DP conveying guide.
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB


1 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass has conden- Remove condensation on the
sation. CIS glass.
DP conveying guide.
3 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is warped. Reattach the CIS glass.
4 Replacing the CIS glass The CIS glass has some Replace the CIS glass.
scratches.
6 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
adjustment is not exe- FD(ChartA)]. nance
cuted. Mode List
7 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is not properly Reattach the DPCIS. Detaching
attached. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
8 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS then exe- Detaching
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Reloading the original The originals are not prop- Reload the original properly.
2 Setting the original size Actual original size and Set the original size manu- Original
detected original size are ally. Size
mismatched. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Changing the Border The Border Erase function Lower the setting of the Bor- Border
Erase function is not properly set. (Setting der Erase. Erase
is too large.) (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3-14) Color shift


1 Checking the first side There is a factor in the Check if the same phenome- Measures
scanning through DP original feeding. non occurs when scanning for 1st
the front side through DP. If it Page DP
occurs, perform the field Scanning
scanning the front side
through DP.
2 Checking the CIS roller The originals are conveyed Reattach the CIS roller.
without contacting the CIS
roller.
3 Checking the DP convey- The DP conveying roller is Clean the DP conveying
ing roller (before and after dirty. roller and the bushing.
scanning)
4 Checking the DPCIS The originals are away Reattach the DPCIS. Detaching
from the CIS glass. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
(3-15) Skewed image


1 Checking the first (front) This is the same as the Perform the treatment when Measures
side DP scanning issue that occurs when scanning the first (front) side for 1st
scanning the first (front) through DP. Page DP
side through DP. Scanning
attached. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
7-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK


1 Checking the table scan- The table scanning of origi- Check if the same phenome- Measures
ning nals is faulty. non occurs when scanning for Table
on the contact glass. If it Scanning
occurs, perform the field
scanning on the contact
glass.
2 Executing U411 U411 [DP FD(ChartA)] is Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
not executed. FD(ChartA)]. nance
Mode List
3 Cleaning the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty Clean the CIS roller
attached. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
relay PWB. "PWBs"
"PWBs"
PWB
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
PWB faulty.
7-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(4-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift

7-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the original image and copy image
(4-10) Moiré
(4-11) No image comes out (White or Black)
7-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(4-15) Skewed image
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

1 Checking the connection The FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. Service
connected, or it is faulty. If FFC terminal is turned up Manual -
or deformed, or FFC is dam- Section 8
aged, replace FFC. "PWBs"
CCD PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking the cable The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD cable, or
connected, or is faulty. replace it.
and reat-
taching the
HDD
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
6 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors Detaching
to the main PWB. If the wire and reat-
is pinched up or has damage, taching the
repair or replace it. If not Main PWB
repaired, replace the main
PWB.
7-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density] to Function
Adjustment is not set. [Auto] at [System Menu/ Defaults
Counter] > [Common Set- (Opera-
tings] > [Function Defaults] tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Changing the setting The background density is Set [Background Density] to Function
dark. [Manual] to adjust the den- Defaults
sity at [System Menu/ (Opera-
Counter] > [Common Set- tion Guide
tings] > [Function Defaults] - Section
6)
3 Changing the setting The Background Density Set [Background Density Back-
Adjustment is not set. Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
Quality]. Density
Adjust-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
4 Changing the setting The original background Set [Background Density Back-
density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
5 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during press-
scanning. ing.
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
A)]. nance
Mode List
7-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Lamp Unit
taching the
Lens Unit
12 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift

1 Removing foreign material There is a load on the Remove the foreign objects
scanner movement since on the scanner rails.
the foreign objects adhere
on the scanner rails.
taching the
Lamp Unit
3 Checking the belt tension A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt
scanner movement since tension properly.
the belt tension is
improper.
4 Removing foreign material The foreign objects adhere Remove the foreign objects
on the scanner wire drum. on the scanner wire drums.
5 Removing foreign material The foreign objects adhere Remove the foreign objects Detaching
on the pulley groove. on the pulley of the lamp unit and reat-
assy. taching the
Lamp Unit
6 Checking the scanner The scanner wire is dirty or Clean the scanner wire or Detaching
wires dropped out. reattach it. and reat-
taching the
Scanner
Wires
7 Replacing the scanner There are scratches on the Replace the scanner wires. Detaching
wire scanner wire. and reat-
taching the
Scanner
Wires
7-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set on the contact glass.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass. Detaching
properly attached. and reat-
taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is Adjust U067 [Front]. Mainte-
not adjusted. nance
Mode List
4 Executing U411 The automatic table scan- Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
ning adjustment is not exe- A)]. nance
cuted. Mode List
7-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Executing U066 Scan the image at back Adjust U066 [Front]. Mainte-
side of the size indication nance
plate. (Adjustment value at Mode List
U066 [Front] is not appro-
priate.
4 Executing U411 Scan the image at back Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
side of the size indication A)]. nance
plate. (Adjustment value at Mode List
U411 [Table(ChartA)] is not
appropriate.
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original
detected original size are Size
mismatched. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
original image.)
5 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
incorrect. (Streaks or A)]. nance
original.)
6 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and Detaching
shading plate at the back- the shading plate at the back- and reat-
side of the contact glass is side of the contact glass. taching the
dirty. Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
taching the
Lamp Unit
9 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using
an air-blower.
10 Executing U063 The image scanning posi- Execute U063 to change the Mainte-
tion is incorrect. scanner shading position. nance
Mode List
replace the FFC.
7-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
properly. (The leading
edge of the original is not
set on the contact glass
properly)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust U066 [Front]. Mainte-
timing is incorrect nance
Mode List
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
timing is incorrect A)]. nance
Mode List
5 Checking the scanner The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive
drive belt loose. belt.
6 Checking the scanner wire Installation of the scanner Retighten the screw of the
drums wire drum is loosen. scanner wire drums.
7 Checking the scanner The attachment of the Retighten the screw of the
drive gear scanner drive gear is scanner drive gear.
loose.
7-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
taching the
Lamp Unit
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Checking the shading The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the Mainte-
plate backside of the contact scanner shading position. nance
glass is dirty. Mode List
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-10) Moiré
1 Changing the setting The original image quality Set [Original Image] in [Sys- Function
is not set properly. (moiré tem Menu/Counter] key > Defaults
changes depending on the [Common Settings] > [Func- (Opera-
image quality.) tion Defaults]. tion Guide
- Section
6)
2 Checking the original The original is not set Rotate the originals in 90
tion.)
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scan- Change the value at U065 Mainte-
ning direction is large. [Main Scan] to reduce the nance
(This problem occurs when scanner magnification in the Mode List
the print ratio is set as main scanning direction.
100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
scanner section is incor- A)]. nance
rect Mode List
(4-11) No image comes out (White or Black)

1 Checking the original The originals were set Reset the original to correct
upside down. the front and back direction.
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Changing the setting Image quality is not prop- Set [Original Image] in [Sys- Function
erly adjusted. (Original tem Menu/Counter] key > Defaults
type and image quality are [Common Settings] > [Func- (Opera-
mismatched.) tion Defaults]. tion Guide
- Section
6)
3 Checking the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
creased. paper creases of the original.
4 Checking the original mat The original mat shifts. Reattach the original mat.
taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7 Checking the contact glass Original is scanned on the Set the booklet original while
bent contact glass. not bending the contact
glass.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
10 Replacing the lamp unit A part of LED does not Check if the LED lamp lights Detaching
switch on. by executing U061 [CCD]. If it and reat-
does not light, replace the taching the
lamp unit and execute U411 Lamp Unit
[Table(ChartA)]. Mainte-
nance
Mode List
11 Removing the foreign As the foreign objects Remove the foreign objects
objects and applying adhere on the scanner rail on the scanner rails and
grease or the grease is not apply the grease (PG-671) to
enough, the lamp unit does the rails if necessary.
not operate correctly.
7-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 Checking the lamp unit The mirror is attached at Reattach the lamp unit. Detaching
the incorrect position. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
13 Replacing the lamp unit The LED reflector is not Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
attached properly or and reat-
deformed. taching the
Lamp Unit
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or
replace it if possible.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass has con- Remove the condensation on Detaching
densation. the contact glass. and reat-
taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
3 Checking the lamp unit The mirror has condensa- Remove the condensation on Detaching
tion. the mirror in the lamp unit. and reat-
taching the
Lamp Unit
4 Checking the lens unit The lens has condensa- Remove the condensation on Detaching
tion. the lens in the lens unit. and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
5 Checking the CCD PWB The glass of the CCD Remove the condensation on Detaching
PWB has condensation. the CCD PWB glass using a and reat-
blower brush taching the
Lens Unit
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
the scanner is incorrect. A)]. nance
Mode List
replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB.
7-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Changing the setting Marked part by highlighter Set [Highlight] to [On] at Original
pen on the original cannot [System Menu/Counter] > Image
be scanned. [Common Settings] > [Func- (Opera-
tion Defaults] > [Original tion Guide
Image] - Section
8)
properly.
3 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manu- Original
paper side do not match ally. Size
on the operation panel. (Opera-
(The setting is incorrect.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Changing the setting The copy position is Set [Auto Image Rotation] to Function
rotated automatically. [Off] from the System Menu. Defaults
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
5 Changing the setting The Border Erase function Lower the setting of the Bor- Border
is not properly set. (Setting der Erase. Erase
is too large.) (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
6 Cleaning the contact glass The original scanning side Clean the original scanning
of the contact glass is dirty. side of the contact glass.
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
replace the FFC.
taching the
Lens Unit
11 Checking the original size Original size and paper Replace the original size sen-
sensor size are not matched on sor.
the operation panel dis-
play. (Original size sensor
is misdetected.)
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-15) Skewed image

1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set. (The original is
skewed.)
2 Checking the scanner unit The scanner unit height is Adjust the whole scanner unit Adjust-
improper. height. ment of
Scanner
Unit
Height
taching the
Lamp Unit
7-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality accord- Original
adjusted. (The original ing to the originals. Image
type and image quality dif- (Opera-
fers.) tion Guide
- Section
8)
2 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Function
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
to "On".) Setting] > [Function Defaults] (Opera-
> [EcoPrint] tion Guide
- Section
6)
3 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be Adjust-
adjusted. (The density set- dark. ment/
ting is too light.) Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Back- Adjust-
adjusted. ([Background ground Density Adjustment to ment/
density] is set to "Off".) make dark. Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
5 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] set- Change to [Off] at [System Function
ting is [On] Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
Setting] > [Function Defaults] (Opera-
> [Prevent Bleed-thru] tion Guide
- Section
6)
glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
"Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit")
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(Chart Mainte-
A)]. nance
Mode List
7-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace the FFC.
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB.
7-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

(5-1) Background appear
(5-2) Black spots (toner smudges)
(5-3) Image is missing partly (blank image, white

spots)
(5-4) Blank image

(5-6) Dirty reverse side
7-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(5-8) Horizontal streaks or band (White, black)
(5-9) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the

original image and the copy image (varia-
tion of paper leading edge timing)
(5-11) Offset
(5-12) Fusing failure
(5-13) Paper skew at the trailing edge
7-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(5-14) Uneven transfer
(5-16) The vertical white streaks or bands appear

on the image when scanning the first or
second side through DP
(5-17) Vertical streaks, bands
7-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
(5-1) Background appear
1 Checking the primary The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
that spans between papers) taching the
of the transfer belt, clean the Primary
transfer belt. After cleaning, Transfer
in case if it is not improved Unit
even performing the calibra-
tion, replace the primary
transfer unit.
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it
grounds securely.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Correct the secondary trans-
transfer bias contact bias contact is deformed. fer bias contact so that it
grounds the shaft of the sec-
ondary transfer roller
securely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer If image failure occurs at the Detaching
transfer roller roller is dirty. circumferential pitch of the and reat-
secondary transfer roller, taching the
clean it. If it is not improved, Second-
replace the secondary trans- ary Trans-
fer roller. fer Roller
7-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-2) Black spots (toner smudges)

1 Cleaning the cleaning pre- The transfer belt cantbe- Clean the cleaning pre-brush Detaching
brush cleanedasthecleaningpre- of the primary transfer sec- and reat-
brushisdirty.' tion. And Next, execute U474 taching the
[Execute] (LSU cleaning) to Primary
perform cleaning of the trans- Transfer
fer belt. Unit Main-
tenance
Mode List
2 Checking the primary There is dirt and scratches If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit of the long period that the outer pitch (long period and reat-
spans between the sheets that spans between papers) taching the
at the outer pitch (A3 3- of the transfer belt, clean the Primary
sheet continuous printing) transfer belt with the soft Transfer
of the transfer belt cloth that has toner on it. If it Unit
is not improved, replace the
primary transfer unit.
transfer roller roller is dirty or has some circumferential pitch of the and reat-
scratches. secondary transfer roller, taching the
4 Checking the fuser unit Fuser belt is dirty. Or, for- If image failure occurs at the Detaching
eign objects are adhered circumferential pitch (96mm) and reat-
or scratched. of the fuser belt, clean it. Or, taching the
remove foreign objects on the Fuser Unit
fuser belt by printing the solid
image. If it is not improved,
replace the fuser unit.
5 Primary transfer unit The transfer belt cantbe- Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement cleanedasthecleaningpre- unit. and reat-
brushisfaulty.' taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(5-3) Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots)

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- The paper is stored in the Install the cassette heater if Installing
age place high humidity environment. necessary. And instruct the the
user to store the paper in a optional
place with low humidity. equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
3 Checking the primary Surface of the transfer belt If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit is dirty or scratched. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
transfer belt. If it is not Transfer
improved, replace the pri- Unit
mary transfer unit.
4 Checking the primary The pressure release gear Check if the pressure release 2ND-0076
transfer unit at the machine front side of joint gear at the machine rear
the primary transfer unit side of the primary transfer
comes off. unit can be pulled out. If yes,
it means the pressure release
gear at the machine front side
of the unit comes off. There-
fore, replace the primary
transfer unit.
6 Setting the media type The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
properly set. the System Menu. MP Tray
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7 Executing U161 The fuser temperature is Execute U161 [Print] and Mainte-
shifted largely. reset the fuser temperature to nance
the default value. Mode List
7-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-4) Blank image

1 Checking the right cover The right conveying unit is Check the lock of the right
not closed. cover Assy, and open and
close the right cover (convey-
ing unit).
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire. • Transfer high volt-
age PWB - Engine PWB •
Transfer high voltage PWB -
Feed image PWB
3 Checking the transfer high- The secondary transfer Replace the transfer high- Detaching
voltage PWB bias output from the trans- voltage PWB. and reat-
fer high-voltage PWB is taching the
faulty. Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
4 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is Replace the feed image
PWB faulty. PWB.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The ON signal of the sec- Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
ondary transfer high-volt- and reat-
age (3.3V to 0V) is not taching the
output from the engine Engine
PWB. PWB
1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper width guides or the MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides do not guides to fit them with the
fit with the paper size. paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when Adjust the center line at U034 Mainte-
image writing the data is [LSU Out Left]. nance
incorrect. Mode List
7-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-6) Dirty reverse side

2 Changing the setting The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer Mainte-
bias is improperly set. bias to the default value at nance
U106. Mode List
3 Checking the fuser pres- The fuser pressure roller is Perform the duplex printing
sure roller dirty caused by the paper with the solid image and
type setting. clean the fuser pressure
roller. And set proper paper
thickness in System Menu.
4 Cleaning the conveying The conveying guide or the Clean the conveying guide
guide and the developer developer unit is dirty. and developer unit.
unit
7-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if Installing
age place humidity environment. necessary. And instruct the the
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
3 Checking the right cover The right DP hinge position Open the right cover (convey-
is not adjusted back and ing unit) once, and close it
forth. firmly.
4 Checking the primary The primary transfer roller If the position of the primary 2ND-0076
transfer unit does not contact the trans- transfer roller is not aligned,
fer belt or weak. The pres- correct the pressing position.
sure release gear at the And also, please check if the
machine front side of the pressure release joint gear
primary transfer unit can be pulled out from the
comes off. machine rear side of the pri-
mary transfer unit. If yes, it
means the pressure release
transfer unit.
5 Executing U101 The proper current does Execute U101 [Force exe- Mainte-
not flow on the primary cute]. nance
transfer roller. Mode List
6 Changing the setting The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer Mainte-
voltage is improperly set. voltage to the default value at nance
U106. Mode List
7 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Clean the secondary transfer
transfer bias contact bias contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its
deformed, so, the impres- shape so that it is grounded
sion is unavailable. securely.
Feed image PWB
7-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the transfer high- The secondary transfer Replace the transfer high- Detaching
voltage PWB bias output from the trans- voltage PWB. and reat-
fer high-voltage PWB is taching the
faulty. Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
11 Replacing the engine PWB The ON signal of the sec- Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
ondary transfer high-volt- and reat-
age (3.3V to 0V) is not taching the
output from the engine Engine
PWB. PWB
7-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-8) Horizontal streaks or band (White, black)

1 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
transfer belt. Transfer
Unit
2 Cleaning the fuser belt The fuser belt is dirty. When the image failure Detaching
appears in the fuser belt and reat-
length interval, clean the taching the
fuser belt. Fuser Unit
3 Checking the right cover Only one side of the right Close the right cover (con-
cover (conveying unit) is veying unit).
closed, or the pressure
spring is deformed.
4 Checking the secondary The pressure spring is not Reattach the pressure spring. Detaching
transfer unit properly attached or If not repaired, replace the and reat-
deformed. secondary transfer unit. taching the
Second-
ary Trans-
fer Unit
5 Checking the primary The transfer belt surface is Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit faulty. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
6 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser belt surface has Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
some scratches. and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
7-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-9) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image
(variation of paper leading edge timing)
1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is Adjust the leading edge tim- Mainte-
not properly adjusted. ing at U034 [LSU Out Top]. nance
Mode List
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount Execute U051 to adjust the Mainte-
before registration is paper loop amount before nance
improper. registration. Mode List
3 Checking the clutch The feed conveying Execute U032. If the paper Mainte-
related clutch does not feed / conveying related nance
operate correctly. clutches (feed clutch, middle Mode List
clutch or registration clutch) Detaching
do not operate properly, reat- and reat-
tach them and reconnect the taching the
connectors. If not repaired, Feed Drive
replace the feed drive unit. Unit

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within Basic
used. the specification. Paper
Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
2 Changing the setting The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Applying the grease The drives from the con- Apply the grease to the drive
veying motors are not gear of the conveying related
smoothly transmitted. motor. (EM-50LP: Part num-
ber (7BG010009H))
4 Replacing the conveying The conveying guide is Replace the conveying guide.
guide deformed.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser forwarding guide Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
is deformed or the fuser and reat-
pressure is uneven. taching the
Fuser Unit
7-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-11) Offset
1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within Cassette /
used. the specification, or change MP Tray
to the media type setting Settings
closest to the specified paper. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
2 Changing the setting The media type is not Change the settings accord- Cassette /
properly set. ing to the media type (paper MP Tray
weight). Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Firmware upgrade The initial setting value Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
change for the transfer belt to the latest version Update
cleaning bias by the
engine firmware is not
reflected. (Implemented in
the middle of production)
4 Executing U107 The setting value of the Reset the primary transfer Mainte-
primary transfer cleaning cleaning voltage to the nance
voltage at U107 is incor- default value at U107. Mode List
rect.
5 (If occurs only on the first The transfer belt is not Set [On] at U107 [1stSheet- Mainte-
sheet after finishing contin- cleaned properly at the CLN B/W]. (Engine firmware nance
uous printing) Executing time of the first sheet out- version 002.007 or after) Mode List
U107 put after finishing continu-
ous printing.
6 Checking the primary The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
transfer unit dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
Unit
7 Checking the primary The primary transfer clean- Clean the primary transfer
transfer cleaning bias con- ing bias contact smudges cleaning bias contact. Or,
tact or is deformed. correct its shape so that it is
securely grounded.
8 Executing U106 The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer Mainte-
voltage is improperly set. voltage to the default value at nance
U106. Mode List
9 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer roller roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
7-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

10 Executing U161 The higher fuser tempera- Execute U161 [Print] and Mainte-
ture is set. reset the fuser temperature to nance
the default value. Mode List
11 Cleaning the fuser belt The fuser belt is dirty. When the image failure Detaching
appears in the fuser belt and reat-
length interval, clean the taching the
fuser belt. Fuser Unit
12 Checking the fuser dis- If toner organic material If image failure occurs at the Detaching
charger needles adheres and accumulates circumferential pitch of the and reat-
on the leading ends of the fuser belt after cleaning, taching the
fuser discharger needles check the fuser discharge Fuser Dis-
depending on the high needle. If yellow dirt (toner charger
print volume with the high organic objects) adhere to Needle
print coverage, the the fuser discharge needle, Unit Main-
charging efficiency is replace the fuser discharge tenance
reduced. needle and execute U167 Mode List
[Correction] to reset.
13 Primary transfer unit Transfer cleaning voltage Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement is not applied due to the unit. and reat-
broken wire in the primary taching the
transfer unit. Primary
Transfer
Unit
nected properly or, the lowing wire connectors and Manual -
cleaning bias of the pri- reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
mary transfer does not there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
apply as the wire is faulty. the wire. • Transfer high volt-
Feed image PWB
15 Replacing the transfer The transfer high-voltage Replace the transfer high- Detaching
high-voltage PWB PWB is faulty. voltage PWB. and reat-
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
18 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser belt surface has Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
some scratches. and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
7-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-12) Fusing failure

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the proper
used. paper.
2 Setting the media type The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Executing U161 The lower fuser tempera- Change the fuser tempera- Mainte-
ture is set. ture to the default value. nance
Mode List
4 Replacing the fuser unit The nipped pressure Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
(width) to the solid image is and reat-
low and fuser pressure set- taching the
ting (spring) is too weak. Fuser Unit
7-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-13) Paper skew at the trailing edge

1 Cleaning the secondary The neighboring parts of Clean the secondary transfer Cleaning
transfer unit the secondary transfer roller, discharge needle, dis- the Sec-
roller are dirty with paper charge sheet and the paper ondary
dust. conveying route. Transfer /
Separa-
tion Sec-
tion
2 Removing foreign material Paper is caught by foreign Replace the toner sucking
material such as a piece of fan motor if it does not oper-
paper. ate properly when executing
U037 [Toner].
3 Relocating the paper width The set position of the Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper paper width guides / MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides is mis- guides to fit them with the
matched with the paper paper size.
size, and so, the paper is
skewed.
4 Checking the conveying The registration rollers or Check if the registration roll-
section the middle pulleys are not ers and the middle pulleys
properly attached, or they are properly attached. If nec-
are dirty. essary, reattach them. Also,
they are dirty with toner or
paper dust, clean them.
5 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (convey-
right cover closed. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.
6 Reinstalling the fuser unit The fuser unit is not prop- Insert the fuser unit straight Detaching
erly installed. into the main unit, and lock and reat-
both sides of the fuser unit taching the
firmly. Fuser Unit
7 Adjusting the fuser unit The fuser unit height is Adjust the height adjusting Adjusting
height improper. lever at the machine inner the fuser
front side that can adjust the unit height
fuser unit height.
7-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5-14) Uneven transfer

1 Opening and closing the The conveying section is Open the right cover (convey-
conveying section not closed completely. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.
2 Cleaning the cleaning pre- Paper dust is accumulated Remove the cleaning cover
brush around the cleaning pre- and clean the cleaning pre-
brush. brush.
securely grounded.
4 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at Detaching
dirty. the outer pitch (long period and reat-
Unit
5 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer roller roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
6 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Repair the deformation of the Detaching
transfer unit roller is faulty. Or, the pres- pressure spring. If not and reat-
sure spring is deformed. repaired, replace the second- taching the
ary transfer unit. Second-
ary Trans-
fer Unit
7 Primary transfer unit There is a scratch on the Replace the primary transfer Detaching
replacement surface of the transfer belt. unit. and reat-
Or, the primary transfer taching the
cleaning bias contact is Primary
faulty. Transfer
Unit
Feed image PWB
9 Replacing the transfer The primary transfer clean- Replace the transfer high- Detaching
high-voltage PWB ing bias contact is faulty. voltage PWB. and reat-
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
7-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
12 Replacing the fuser unit The roller, or the parts in Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
the drive section or the and reat-
fuser press-release section taching the
are deformed or worn Fuser Unit
down.

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the new dry
paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if Installing
age place humidity environment. necessary. And instruct the the
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
(5-16) The vertical white streaks or bands appear on the image when scanning the
first or second side through DP
mary transfer unit.
3 Checking the exit feedshift Paper contacts to the exit Check the deflection of paper Detaching
guide feedshift guide strongly. at the time of output and rein- and reat-
stall the exit feedshift guide. tachint the
Exit Unit
7-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser pressure roller, Execute duplex printing with Detaching
the fuser pressure roller the solid image to clean the and reat-
separation claw and the fuser pressure roller. And taching the
fuser separation plate are also clean the separation Fuser Unit
dirty by the paper dust. claw of the fuser pressure
The fuser belt is worn roller and the fuser separa-
down or the parts inside tion plate. Check the parts
the fuser unit are dam- inside the fuser unit such as
aged. the fuser belt, and if worn
down or damaged, replace
the fuser unit.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Cleaning the exit feedshift The exit feedshift guide Clean the exit feedshift guide. Detaching
guide has toner dirt or welding. and reat-
tachint the
Exit Unit
4 Cleaning the discharger The discharge needle is Clean the discharge needle
needle dirty by the paper dust or which is upper part of the
the toner. secondary transfer roller by
the Cleaning brush, etc..
mary transfer unit.
6 Cleaning the cleaning pre- The transfer belt cantbe- Clean the cleaning pre-brush Detaching
brush cleanedasthecleaningpre- of the primary transfer sec- and reat-
brushisdirty.' tion. And Next, execute U474 taching the
[Execute] (LSU cleaning) to Primary
perform cleaning of the trans- Transfer
fer belt. Unit Main-
tenance
Mode List
securely grounded.
7-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

transfer roller roller is dirty, is deformed circumferential pitch of the and reat-
or is worn down. secondary transfer roller, taching the
Feed image PWB
10 Replacing the transfer The cleaning bias is not Replace the transfer high- Detaching
high-voltage PWB generated from the trans- voltage PWB. and reat-
fer high-voltage PWB. taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
13 Replacing the fuser dis- The fuser discharge nee- Replace the fuser discharge
charger needle unit dle is dirty. needle unit.

1 Checking paper size set- The MP tray size is Set the MP tray paper size
ting detected as unknown [---]. properly. And pull out the sub
tray until the position where
the triangle mark can be seen
or store it in the MP frame
completely.
7-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

7-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(6-7) Blank image
(6-8) Toner dirt (Single color)
(6-9) Periodic toner dirt (Single color)
(6-10) Missing entire image (Solid image by a sin-

gle color)
(6-11) Horizontal streaks or band (White or single

color)
(6-12) Irregular horizontal white streaks, white

spots
(6-13) Horizontal uneven density
7-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(6-15) Offset
(6-16) Gradation reproducibility is low
(6-18) Light vertical black streaks at both edge of

paper which is outside of the image area
(6-20) Vertical uneven density
7-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(6-22) Uneven halftone image
7-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

1 Measures for the image Uncharged toner is Execute 'Developer Refresh', Adjust/
quality improvement increasing due to the high 'Calibration' and 'Tone Curve Mainte-
density continuous print- Adjustment' in order. nance
ing in the high temperature Menu
environment. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the toner cover- Toner coverage (T/C) is Each color sensor value on Mainte-
age (T/C) high. U155 [Toner] is a positive nance
value, execute developer Mode List
refresh until the value Adjust/
becomes [0]. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
3 Checking the print cover- The charge amount of the Check the print coverage on Mainte-
age toner is low. the service status page and if nance
printing is done with high Mode List
density, execute the devel- Adjust/
oper refresh. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
4 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Clean the developer bias
bias contact is dirty or deformed. contact, or correct its shape
so that it grounds securely.
5 Checking the developer The toner sensor is faulty. Reinstall the developer unit. Detaching
unit Replace it if it is not fixed. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
6 Checking the high voltage The high voltage contact of Clean the high voltage con- Detaching
contact the main high voltage PWB tact and correct it to ensure and reat-
is dirty or deformed. that it is grounded. Or, rein- taching the
stall the main high voltage Main High
PWB. Voltage
PWB
7-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the wire.
• Main high voltage PWB -
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
8 Replacing the main high Developing bias output Replace the main high volt- Detaching
voltage PWB from main high voltage age PWB. and reat-
PWB is high taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Checking the temperature Temperature is low in the If the machine inside tem- Mainte-
inside the main unit installation environment. perature is below 10°C / 50°F nance
at U139, instruct user to Mode List
change the installation envi-
ronment of the room tem-
perature 16°C / 60.8°F or
higher. (This phenomenon
tends to occur immediately
after being left in a low tem-
perature environment for few
days if turning on the power).
2 Setting the drum heater Developing section is Set [ON] at U339 [Drum Mainte-
affected by the humidity Heater]. nance
Mode List
3 Checking the main charger The MC roller surface is Clean the MC roller surface. Detaching
unit dirty. If not improved, replace the and reat-
main charger unit. taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
4 Reinstalling the main char- The main charger unit is Reinstall the main charger Detaching
ger unit not installed properly. unit to the drum unit, and and reat-
Reinstall the drum unit to the taching the
main body to ensure that the Main
connector is connected. Charger
Unit
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
5 Replacing the main char- The MC roller reaches its If the MC roller counter Mainte-
ger unit life. exceeds 400,000 at U930, nance
replace the main charger unit Mode List
as the drum surface potential Detaching
become low under the low and reat-
temperature environment. taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
6 Changing the setting The setting value of the If the setting values at U100 Mainte-
main high voltage is incor- are not the default values, nance
rect. reset them to the default val- Mode List
ues.
7 Checking the drum unit The drum is faulty. Replace the drum unit. Detaching
and the developer unit and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
7-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the main charger Main charger high voltage Clean the charger high volt- Detaching
high voltage contact contact on the main high age contact and correct it to and reat-
voltage PWB is dirty or ensure that it is grounded. Or, taching the
deformed. reinstall the main high voltage Main High
PWB. Voltage
PWB
the wire.
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
10 Replacing the main high Main charger bias output Replace the main high volt- Detaching
voltage PWB from the main high voltage age PWB. and reat-
PWB is low. taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

1 Checking the drum driving The drum driving distance Check the drum driving dis-
distance counts. counts are not reset since tance counts of the corre-
the drum unit was replaced sponding drum by executing
without turning off the main U120. If the counts on the
power, and accordingly the operation panel certainly dif-
excessive image correc- fer from the actual ones, turn
tion is performed. the main power on and off.
When the counts are not
recovered, replace the drum
unit since the EEPROM PWB
in the drum unit might be
damaged due to the hot-
swapping.
2 Checking the ID sensor Calibration is not executed Output the event log report Event Log
properly. and if there is a history of Report
C7601 or C7602, clean the Output
front ID sensor or rear ID Adjust/
sensor, and execute calibra- Mainte-
tion. If not improved, replace nance
front ID sensor or rear ID Menu
sensor. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
nected properly. The for- lowing wire connectors and Manual -
eign objects adhere on the reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
connector terminal which there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
makes contact failure. Or, the wire.
the wire is faulty. • Front ID sensor / rear ID
sensor - Feed drive PWB
4 Checking the cleaning The cleaning solenoid Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If Mainte-
solenoid does not operate. the cleaning solenoid does nance
not operate properly, reattach Mode List
it and reconnect the connec-
tor. If not repaired, replace it.
5 Replacing the feed drive The feed drive PWB is Replace the feed drive PWB.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 Checking the connection FFC terminal is not con- Reconnect the following FFC. Service
nected properly. The for- If FFC terminal is deformed Manual -
eign objects adhere on the or FFC is damaged, replace Section 8
connector terminal which FFC. 'PWBs'
makes contact failure. Or, • LSU (APC PWB) - Engine
FFC is faulty. PWB
8 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
7-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Reinstalling the toner con- Toner is collected on one Sufficiently shake the toner Toner
tainer side. container and reinstall it to Container
the main unit. Replace-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Replacing the toner con- The toner supply opening If toner opening does not Toner
tainer does not open. open, replace the toner con- Container
tainer. Replace-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
3 Measures for the image Calibration is executed Execute 'Developer Refresh', Adjust/
quality improvement with the condition of the 'Calibration' and 'Tone Curve Mainte-
light density, and develop- Adjustment' in order. nance
ing bias is controlled with a Menu
high level. Or, the toner is (Opera-
deteriorated due to many tion Guide
low density printing. - Section
10)
4 Checking the drum unit The developing roller does Reinstall the drum unit and Detaching
and the developer unit not contact with the drum the developer unit. and reat-
as the drum unit or the taching the
developer unit is not Drum Unit
installed properly. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
5 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both
ends of the developer unit.
6 Checking the toner cover- Toner density (T/C) is low. If the sensor value of each Mainte-
age (T/C) color at U155 [Toner] is minus nance
value, the toner should be Mode List
supplied forcibly with U132
[Execute] until the value
become [0].
7-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 Checking the print cover- The charge amount of the Check the print coverage on Mainte-
age toner is high. the service status page and if nance
printing is done with low den- Mode List
sity lower than 2%, execute Adjust/
the developer refresh. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
8 Checking the developer The toner sensor has a Execute Developer Refresh Adjust/
unit fault and so toner is not when the four-color PG Mainte-
supplied. image output as test page is nance
too light. Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
9 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Correct the developer bias
bias contact is deformed. contact so that it grounds
securely.
10 Executing U140 The developer bias values Execute U140 and reset the Mainte-
that are fixed (except developer bias to the default nance
'Sleeve AC' and 'Mag DC') value. Mode List
and are not changed
according to the Calibra-
tion are changed from the
default value.
11 Correcting the primary Primary transfer bias is not Execute U101 [Force exe- Mainte-
transfer bias contact applied properly cute]. After that, select U101 nance
[Voltage] > [Value] and if the Mode List
displayed value is 290 (upper Detaching
limit value) or 85 (lower limit and reat-
value), correct the primary taching the
transfer bias contact. Transfer
Output event log report and if High Volt-
there is a history of [C513*] is age PWB
available, replace transfer
high voltage PWB.
7-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 Checking the primary Primary transfer bias is not Select U101 [Current] > [Tar- Mainte-
transfer bias applied properly get] and increase the setting nance
value [+50] and execute Mode List
[Force Execute]. If it is Detaching
improved, check the primary and reat-
transfer bias terminal, and if it taching the
is no problem, replace the pri- Primary
mary transfer unit. Transfer
Unit
13 Checking the primary The primary transfer roller When the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit is not properly attached. roller comes off, replace the and reat-
primary transfer unit. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
14 Checking the primary The image become light If the conductive grease
transfer unit since there is a conductiv- adheres in between the drive
ity between the backup roller and the back up roller,
roller of the primary trans- wipe off the grease.
fer unit and the drive roller,
and the secondary transfer
current leaks to the backup
roller.
15 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it
grounds securely.
16 Replacing the primary Transfer belt is worn out. Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
the wire is faulty. • Main high voltage PWB -
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
18 Replacing the main high The main high voltage Replace the main high volt- Detaching
voltage PWB PWB is faulty. age PWB. and reat-
taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
7-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire is faulty. • Transfer high voltage PWB -
Engine PWB
• Transfer high voltage PWB -
Feed image PWB
20 Replacing the transfer high The transfer high voltage Replace the transfer high Detaching
voltage PWB PWB is faulty. voltage PWB. and reat-
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
the wire is faulty. • Toner motor - Feed image
PWB
22 Replacing the toner motor Toner motor does not oper- Execute U135 to check the Mainte-
ate properly toner motor operation. If the nance
toner motor does not operate Mode List
properly, reattach it and
reconnect the connector. If
not repaired, replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Executing Drum refresh Condensation on the drum Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
surface Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Checking the setting Drum surface potential is If the following value at U100 Mainte-
(35ppm or faster models) higher than the setting is out of the range of the nor- nance
value. mal value, the electric charge Mode List
adjustment is not correctly Detaching
performed. And, if the value and reat-
at U100 [Chk Current] is out taching the
from 100 to 250 or changing Drum Unit
value is more than 30, there
is an error on the electric
charge.
Replace the drum unit
(Eraser damage or drum
grounding failure) or correct
the main high voltage PWB
contact. (The execution of
U100 [Chk Current] should
be done within 10 seconds
and execute the drum
refresh.)
?U100 [Adj AC Bias] > [AC
Bias]: 600 - 1300
?U100 [Set DC Bias After] >
[DC2Bias]: 300 - 450
4 Checking the MC roller The voltage applied to the Correct the MC roller contact
contact MC roller contact is high to secure the grounding.
5 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty Clean the eraser.
6 Checking the eraser Eraser is faulty Reinsert the drum unit into Detaching
the main unit all the way and and reat-
reconnect the connector. If taching the
not repaired, replace the Drum Unit
drum unit.
7-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 Executing U120 Since the photosensitive If the drum drive distance Mainte-
layer is thin, the drum sur- counter at U120 is more than nance
face potential after expo- 450,000m, replace the drum Mode List
sure is high unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
8 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn If there is no continuity Detaching
out. Or, the drum is not between the drum and the and reat-
grounded. frame, replace the drum unit. taching the
Drum Unit
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Correcting the release The primary transfer roller Check if the primary transfer
mechanism does not contact the trans- roller is in contact with the
fer belt. transfer belt. If not, correct
the separation mechanism of
the transfer belt.
transfer high voltage PWB are not the default values, nance
is changed. reset them to the default val- Mode List
ues.
3 Checking the ID sensor Calibration is not executed Output the event log report Event Log
properly. and if there is a history of Report
C7601 or C7602, clean the ID Output
sensor and execute calibra- Adjust/
tion. If not improved, replace Mainte-
ID sensor. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
the wire is faulty. • Front ID sensor / rear ID
5 Checking the cleaning The cleaning solenoid Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If Mainte-
solenoid does not operate. the cleaning solenoid does nance
6 Checking the connection The connector or FFC ter- Reconnect the following wire Service
minal is not connected connectors and reconnect the Manual -
properly. Or, the wire and FFC. If there is no continuity, Section 8
FFC is faulty. replace the wire. If the FFC 'PWBs'
terminal section is deformed
or FFC is broken, replace the
FFC.
• LSU - Engine PWB
7 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty (1-line of Replace the LSU. Detaching
laser is not emitted since and reat-
the FFC terminals of the taching the
LSU are deformed.) LSU
transfer high voltage PWB are not the default values, nance
is changed. reset them to the default val- Mode List
ues.
7-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
14 Changing the setting Toner on the developing Change the value at U464 Mainte-
roller is little as the devel- [Target Value] > [Thickness] nance
oping bias is set low. from the default value to the Mode List
value between [0 to +30]. Adjust/
And after that, execute [Cali- Mainte-
bration] and [Tone curve nance
adjustment]. Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
7-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-7) Blank image

1 Reattach the developer The developing roller does Switch the lock lever up and Detaching
roller (for 35ppm or faster not contact with the drum. down and return the devel- and reat-
models) oper roller to the setting posi- taching the
tion. Developer
If the developer roller does Unit
not return due to the break-
age of the lock lever or the
failure of the developer roller
pressure wire, replace the
developer unit.
2 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Clean the developer bias
bias contact is dirty or deformed. contact, or correct its shape
so that it grounds securely.
3 Replacing the developer The developer drive gear Replace the developer unit. Detaching
unit is faulty. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
4 Executing U140 The setting value of the Execute U140 and reset the Mainte-
developer bias is improper. developer bias to the default nance
value. Mode List
the wire is faulty. • Developer motor - Feed
image PWB
• Developer clutch K - Feed
image PWB
• Feed image PWB - Engine
PWB
6 Checking the developer The developing motor Execute U030 to check the Mainte-
motor does not operate properly. developer motor operation. If nance
the developer motor does not Mode List
operate properly, reattach it
and reconnect the connector.
7 Checking the main drive The developer roller does If the developer roller, the
unit not rotate since drive of the gear/coupling of the main
main drive unit is not trans- drive unit which transfer the
mitted. Or, the drum does drive to the drum or the drive
not rotate since drive of the shaft, etc. are not attached
main drive unit (drum properly, repair them. If they
motor) is not transmitted. are damaged, replace them.
7-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its
deformed. shape so that it grounds
securely.
9 Replacing the drum unit The ground plate in the Check the continuity of the Detaching
drum is deformed, and drum and the frame, if there and reat-
can't be grounded. is no continuity, replace drum taching the
unit. Drum Unit
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
12 Checking the contact The contact is dirty or Clean the contacts between
deformed. the transfer high voltage
PWB and the primary transfer
section, or correct them so
that they ground securely.
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
nected properly. Or, FFC is If FFC terminal is deformed Manual -
faulty. or FFC is damaged, replace Section 8
FFC. 'PWBs'
• LSU (APC PWB) - Engine
PWB
7-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

16 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(6-8) Toner dirt (Single color)

1 Cleaning the developer Toner drops off from the Clean the developer unit and Adjust/
unit / executing Developer developer unit. execute the developer Mainte-
Refresh refresh. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
2 Executing U474 Toner drops off from the Execute LSU cleaning few Mainte-
cleaning fur brush of the times at U474. (Solve the nance
transfer belt. problem of the toner clogging Mode List
of the cleaning fur brush by
the high density printing.)
3 Replacing the primary The transfer belt reaches If the value at U127 [Mid Mainte-
transfer unit to its life. Trans(Cnt)] is more than nance
250000, replace the primary Mode List
transfer unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-9) Periodic toner dirt (Single color)

1 (In case of 94mm cycle) The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
Executing drum refresh Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 (In case of 94mm cycle) There are some scratches Replace the drum unit. Detaching
Replacing drum unit on the drum surface. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
4 (In case of 38mm cycle) There is dirt or foreign Wipe the MC roller by dry Detaching
Replacing main charger object on the MC roller sur- cloth or wipe it with water. If it and reat-
unit face. Or, the shaft is cor- does not improve, replace the taching the
roded. charger unit. Main
Charger
Unit
5 (In case of 39mm cycle) There is dirt, foreign object Wipe the developer roller dry. Detaching
Cleaning / replacing devel- or scratch on the develop- If it does not improve, replace and reat-
oper unit. ing roller. the developer unit. taching the
Developer
Unit
6 (In case of 45mm cycle) The foreign objects adhere Replace the primary transfer Detaching
Replacing primary transfer on the primary transfer unit. and reat-
unit roller. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-10) Missing entire image (Solid image by a single color)

1 reinstalling the main char- The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger Detaching
ger unit and drum unit charger unit is not prop- unit to the drum unit and rein- and reat-
erly installed. stall the drum unit into the taching the
main unit to ensure secure Drum Unit
contact . Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
2 Replacing the drum unit The cleaning blade winds Replace the drum unit. Detaching
up and is caught between and reat-
the MC roller and the taching the
drum. Drum Unit
3 Checking the MC roller The contact of the MC Clean the MC roller contact. Detaching
contact roller is dirty or deformed. And correct contact to secure and reat-
(Charge bias can't be the grounding. For the 35ppm taching the
applied) or faster models, check the Main
value at U100 [Chk Current] Charger
and if the value is less than Unit
100 or changes extremely Mainte-
(30), finish checking within 10 nance
seconds and execute the Mode List
drum refresh.
4 Checking the high voltage The high voltage contact of Clean the high voltage con- Detaching
contact the main high voltage PWB tact and correct it to ensure and reat-
is dirty or deformed. that it is grounded. Or, rein- taching the
stall the main high voltage Main High
PWB. Voltage
PWB
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
6 Replacing the main high Bias voltage is not output Replace the main high volt- Detaching
voltage PWB uniformly from the main age PWB. and reat-
high voltage PWB. taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
7-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
nected properly. Or, FFC is If FFC terminal is deformed Manual -
faulty. or FFC is damaged, replace Section 8
FFC. 'PWBs'
PWB
9 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-11) Horizontal streaks or band (White or single color)

1 Executing U140 (35ppm or U140 [AC Calib] is not exe- Change the value of all color Mainte-
faster models) cuted. at U140 [AC Calib] > [Calibra- nance
tion] from [0] (Off) to [1] (On) Mode List
and execute. (Sleeve AC
value at U140 will be lower
than the value before AC
calib is executed.)
2 Checking the developer Both ends of the developer Clean both ends of the devel-
unit roller are dirty and it oper roller and the developer
causes the developer bias bias contact.
leakage.
3 Executing Developer The last image remains on Execute the developer Adjust/
refresh the developer roller sur- refresh. Mainte-
face. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
4 Replacing the developer Both ends of the developer Replace the developer unit. Detaching
unit roller and the developer and reat-
bias contact are deterio- taching the
rated and it causes the Developer
developer bias leakage. Unit
5 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
7 Replacing the drum unit Scratches or pinholes are Replace the drum unit. Detaching
on the drum surface, which and reat-
makes leakage. taching the
Drum Unit
8 Replacing the main char- The MC roller surface is If image failure occurs at the Detaching
ger unit dirty or scratch. circumferential pitch of the and reat-
MC roller, replace charger taching the
unit. Main
Charger
Unit
7-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer Detaching
transfer bias contact contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its and reat-
deformed. shape so that it grounds cer- taching the
tainly. If it is not fixed, replace Primary
the primary transfer unit. Transfer
Unit
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
11 Replacing the main high Bias voltage is not output Replace the main high volt- Detaching
voltage PWB uniformly from the main age PWB. and reat-
high voltage PWB. taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-12) Irregular horizontal white streaks, white spots

1 Checking the installation The settings do not match Change the setting at U140 Mainte-
environment the installation environ- [Altitude Adjustment] to [1001 nance
ment (High altitude - 2000m] (if it does not Mode List
exceeding 1,500m above improved, [2001 -3000m]).
sea-level). And next, set the correspond-
ing color [AC Calib] > [Cali-
bration] to [1] (On) and also
set [Magnification] to lower
than 0. (Lower limit value: -
10)
2 Changing the setting The developer bias is easy Execute U140 [Altitude Mainte-
to leak since the main unit Adjustment] and set the nance
is installed in the low alti- proper altitude. Mode List
tude environment.
3 Executing U140 Developer bias leaks. Execute U140 [AC Calib]. Mainte-
(Except the OPC models) nance
Mode List
4 Checking the MC roller MC roller contact is not Correct the MC roller contact
contact grounded. to secure the grounding.
5 Checking the drum unit The drum unit is not prop- Reinstall the drum unit. Detaching
and the developer unit erly installed, so it does not and reat-
ground the drum drive taching the
shaft. Drum Unit
6 Replacing paper Paper with the high sur- Replace with the recom-
face resistance is used. mended paper.
7-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-13) Horizontal uneven density

1 Checking the main charger MC roller rotation is Reattach the main charger Detaching
unit uneven. unit. and reat-
taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
2 Replacing the main char- The MC cleaning roller is Replace the main charger Detaching
ger unit deformed. unit. and reat-
taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
3 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both
ends of the developer unit.
4 Replacing the developer The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit. Detaching
unit and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
5 Cleaning the developing The conduction is not sta- Clean the developer bias
bias contact bilized due to the dirty contact.
developer bias contact.
6 Checking the developer The developer powder in Execute the developer Adjust/
unit the developer unit is deteri- refresh. If not repaired, Mainte-
orated. replace the developer unit. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
7 Executing Drum refresh Toner smudges in the Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
shape of a streak are on Mainte-
both ends of the drum sur- nance
face. Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
7-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit. Detaching
down. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
10 Replacing the LSU The laser emission is Replace the LSU. Detaching
uneven. and reat-
taching the
LSU

Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Replacing the primary The primary transfer roller Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit is dirty or deformed. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
4 Checking the developer The developer roller does Return the developer roller to Detaching
roller not return to the setting the original position. Also, if and reat-
position, or the developer the machine rear side of the taching the
roller at the machine rear developer roller does not Developer
side does not contact the contact the drum, replace the Unit
drum since the developer developer unit.
roller pressing wire is
faulty.
7-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-15) Offset
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
down or has some and reat-
scratches. taching the
Drum Unit
4 Cleaning the developing The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.
roller
5 Replacing the developer The developer roller sur- Replace the developer unit. Detaching
unit face is worn down or has and reat-
scratches. taching the
Developer
Unit
(6-16) Gradation reproducibility is low

1 Adjusting the image The calibration or grada- Execute System Menu Adjust/
tion adjustment is not exe- [Adjustment/Maintenance] > Mainte-
cuted. [Calibration] and [Tone curve nance
adjustment]. Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
7-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
densation. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU dustproof glass is Execute Laser Scanner Adjust/
ner Cleaning dirty. Cleaning. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
4 Replacing the LSU The LSU dustproof glass is Replace the LSU. Detaching
deteriorated. and reat-
taching the
LSU
7-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-18) Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper which is outside of the
image area
1 Executing Developer Toner outside the develop- As a relief measure, execute Adjust/
Refresh ing area width (311mm) of Developer Refresh. Mainte-
the developing roller flies nance
and is transferred to the Menu
drum side. As a result, light (Opera-
vertical black streaks tion Guide
appears on both ends (out - Section
of the image area) of the 10)
SRA3 paper which is wider
than the developing area
width.
2 Explanation for user Toner outside the develop- Explain to the user that it is a
ing area width (311mm) of vertical black streak which is
the developing roller flies outside the image area and
and is transferred to the can not be completely elimi-
drum side. As a result, light nated. (It will not be com-
vertical black streaks pletely eliminated by
appears on both ends (out exchanging the developing
of the image area) of the unit, etc.).
SRA3 paper which is wider 'SRA 3 (450 x 320 mm) is the
than the developing area paper width that can be
width. printed in the margin' Line for
marking design work and
marking for cutting (registra-
tion mark) '.The location
where this vertical black
streak occurs is outside the
[registration mark] and it is
not an image area. therefore,
there is no problem in actual
use.'
7-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Replacing the drum unit The cleaning blade or Replace the drum unit. (If the Detaching
drum surface is worn out. drum drive distance counter and reat-
at U120 is more than con- taching the
stant value (upper segment Drum Unit
model:450000, lower seg- Mainte-
ment model: 150000), the nance
cleaning blade is worn out.) Mode List
4 Cleaning the MC roller Streaky dirt adheres to the Wipe the MC roller surface Detaching
surface of the MC roller, with water. and reat-
and no electric potential is taching the
applied. Main
Charger
Unit
5 Replacing the main char- MC roller surface is Replace the main charger Detaching
ger unit streaky altered. unit. and reat-
taching the
Main
Charger
Unit
6 Checking the developer Foreign objects and aggre- Clean the developer roller. Detaching
unit gated toner adhere to the Or, replace the developer unit and reat-
developing roller surface. if not repaired after cleaning. taching the
Developer
Unit
7 Checking the primary The transfer belt is Clean the transfer belt. If not Detaching
transfer unit scratched or foreign repaired, replace the primary and reat-
objects adhere. transfer unit. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-20) Vertical uneven density

1 Replacing the LSU LSU emits the laser Replace the LSU. Detaching
unevenly. (Inner mirror and reat-
comes off.) taching the
LSU
2 Checking the primary The transfer belt is not Reattach the primary trans-
transfer unit contact with the drum. fer unit.
(The primary transfer roller
does not press evenly the
transfer belt against the
drum).
3 Replacing the primary The transfer belt is not Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit contact with the drum uni- unit. and reat-
formly. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
4 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
densation. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
6 Checking the main charger Streaky dirt adheres to the Clean the MC roller surface. Detaching
unit surface of the MC roller. If not improved, replace the and reat-
Main
Charger
Unit
down. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
7-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the developer The toner layer on the Execute the developer Adjust/
unit developer roller is uneven. refresh. If not repaired, Mainte-
replace the developer unit. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
9 Installing the cassette The cassette heater is not Install the cassette heater. Installing
heater installed in the high humid- the
ity environment. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

1 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU dustproof glass is Execute Laser Scanner Adjust/
ner Cleaning dirty. Cleaning. Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Replacing the developer Foreign objects and aggre- Replace the color developer Detaching
unit gated toner are mixed in unit that has a problem. And and reat-
the developer unit. next, check the supply taching the
entrance of the toner con- Developer
tainer (shutter section) and Unit
remove if the aggregated
toner is adhered.
3 Removing foreign material There are foreign objects Remove foreign objects on
on the laser path of the the frame or sealing material
LSU. between the developer unit
and the drum unit.
4 Replacing the LSU Foreign objects are on the Replace the LSU.
mirrors inside the LSU.
Mainte-
nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
7 Replacing the drum unit There are some scratches Replace the drum unit. Detaching
on the drum surface. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
8 Checking the main charger There is dirt, foreign object Clean the MC roller surface. Detaching
unit or scratch on the MC roller. If not improved, replace the and reat-
Main
Charger
Unit
9 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty Clean the eraser.
7-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6-22) Uneven halftone image

1 Cleaning the transfer belt There are foreign objects Clean the transfer belt sur- Detaching
on the transfer belt. face. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Replacing the primary The transfer belt surface is Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit uneven due to the transfer unit. and reat-
belt skew. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1) Prior standard check items
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)
7-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
1 Checking the conveying Each conveying units are Check if the front / back or left
unit not properly attached. / right of the vertical convey-
ing section and the horizontal
conveying section do not
open pulling by a slight
strength. If necessary, reat-
tach them.
2 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not Open the right cover and
right cover aligned to the other exte- close it again securely.
rior covers.
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
3 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
7-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the
paper curl
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs,
and the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the check if a piece of torn paper,
leading edge of the sheet foreign objects or the burrs
is bent. on the part do not exist on the
paper path, and remove
them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Reset the fuser temperature Mainte-
fuser temperature is to the default value at U161 nance
improper. when the paper curls. Mode List
3 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough or the cutting edge by reversing the paper direc-
of loaded paper is dam- tion. Correct or replace paper
aged. if a dog-ear is found.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If
you cannot get user agree-
ment about the paper
replacement, relocate the
leading end of paper and the
trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified paper is used Ask a user to use the speci- Basic
or foreign objects are on fied paper type. Or, remove Paper
the paper. the paper with foreign Specifica-
objects. tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
7-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign
piece of paper, etc. objects on the paper path and
remove the burrs on the parts
such as the guide or the actu-
ator.
2 Checking the guide The guide is dirty. If the guide or the discharge
needle is dirty by the toner,
the paper dust, etc., clean by
the waste cloth or the brush.
3 Checking the guide The guide does not prop- Check the guide, and remove
erly operate due to the any burrs. Also, if the guide
incorrect attachment or a does not operate smoothly
fault. manually, reattach the guide.
Then, replace the guide if it is
not fixed or if there is defor-
mation or frictional wear.
4 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not Execute U033 and check if Mainte-
operate properly. the guide can move smoothly nance
by the operation sounds. If Mode List
the guide does not operate
thoroughly or smoothly, reat-
tach the guide. And, replace
the solenoid if the issue is not
resolved.
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette

1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides width guides do not fit with guides or the MP paper width
the paper size. guides along the paper size
when the paper skew or the
paper creases occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the
enough. paper source. If a part of the
paper is bent, remove it.
3 (When feeding the paper The paper is not properly When the paper is loaded
from the large capacity loaded. over the guide in the cassette
feeder) Checking the of the large capacity paper
paper feeder,
reload the paper so the paper
edge is not on the bump in
the cassette.
7-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
(1-7) Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys

1 Checking the roller or the The roller or surface of the Check if the rollers or the pul-
pulley pulley is dirty, or faulty. leys have no paper dust,
toner, foreign objects, diame-
ter change or frictional wear,
and clean their surface. If not
repaired, replace the parts.
2 Checking the motor The motor does not oper- Execute U030 (main unit), Mainte-
ate properly. U240 (finishers) or U243 nance
(document processors) to Mode List
check the related motor oper-
ation. If the motor does not
operate properly, perform the
field measures of each paper
jam code.
3 Checking the clutch The clutch does not oper- Execute U032 (main unit), Mainte-
ate properly. U243 (dual scan DP) to nance
check the clutch operation. If Mode List
the clutch does not operate
not repaired, replace the indi-
vidual clutch or the unit con-
taining the clutch.
4 Cleaning the roller shaft The roller shaft or the If a load is given to the roller
and the bearings bearings are dirty. rotation caused by the dirt of
the roller shaft or the bear-
ings, clean.
5 Checking the spring The spring does not press Check if the spring is drop-
the conveying roller or pul- ping off or the roller and the
ley properly. pulley are pressed properly,
then reattach them if neces-
sary.
7-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor

1 Checking the actuator and The actuator or the return If the actuator is caught or
the recovery spring spring does not operate came off, reattach the actua-
correctly. tor or recovery spring.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. When the sensor surface or
photoreceptor black felt is
dirty by paper dust, etc.,
clean them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not oper- Check the sensor operation Mainte-
ate correctly. by executing U031 (main nance
unit), U241 (finishers) or Mode List
U244 (document processor).
If the sensor does not oper-
ate properly, clean and reat-
tach it, then reinsert the
connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

1 Checking the paper lead- The leading edge margin is When there is no margin from Mainte-
ing edge margin not enough. the paper leading edge to nance
4.0mm(+1.5/-0.0mm) and Mode List
also there is no check line on
20mm(+/-1mm) from the
paper leading edge of the test
pattern output at U034 (In
case that the fuser jam
occurs), adjust the paper
leading edge timing at U034
and then adjust the leading
margin at U402.
2 Relocating the paper width The paper size is misde- Relocate the paper width
guides tected. guides or the MP paper width
guides along the paper size
to properly detect the paper
size.
3 Checking the settings The media type is not If the media type setting does Cassette /
properly set. not matched the actual paper MP Tray
weight (the paper jam occurs Settings
due to the paper separation (Opera-
failure), set the media type at tion Guide
[System Menu/Counter] key - Section
> [Common Settings] > [Org./ 8)
Paper Set] > [Media Type].
7-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity

1 Checking the ground The static electricity accu- When the main unit is
mulates. installed in the low humidity
environment where the static
electricity easily accumulates
on the conveying guide
during the continuous print-
ing,
check if the discharge sheet
in the exit section and the
metal guide in the transfer
section are grounded
securely. Reattach them if
necessary.
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette
are always damp.)
1 Checking the paper stor- Papers have been stored Ask users to store paper in a
age place in the improper place. dry place.
2 Installing the cassette The paper is damp. Install the cassette heater Installing
heater and set the mode by execut- the
ing U327. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Paper misfeed detection

(2-1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed
message on the operation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the
front cover or paper conveying cover.
The locations are displayed on the operation panel when a paper jam has occurred.
Jam location indication
3DSHUMDP
2SHQFDVVHWWH
5HPRYHWKHSDSHU
7RUHPRYHSDSHUZKLFKLVGLIILFXOW
WRJHWDFFHVVWRWKHFDVVHWWH
FDQEHUHPRYHG
&ORVHWKHFDVVHWWH
-$0

H
K
M
Q L
O J H N
P P H N
N N
P P H
H
H G
A
H
B F
E C
R I
S D
1. Shows the location of a paper jam.

2. Shows the previous step.
3. Shows the next step.
4. Shows the removal procedure.
Figure 7-1
A. Misfeed in the cassette 1 K. Misfeed inside the mail box paper

B. Misfeed in the cassette 2 L. Misfeed inside the inner finisher
C. Misfeed in the cassette 3 (500-sheet × 1) M. Paper jam at the document processor
D. Misfeed in the cassette 3 (1500-sheet × 2) N. Misfeed inside the 1000-sheet finisher
C. Misfeed in the cassette 4 (500-sheet × 1) O. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (inner) finisher
E. Misfeed in the cassette 4 (1500-sheet × 2) P. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (Tray A) finisher
F. Misfeed in the cassette 5 (side feeder) Q. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (Tray B)finisher
G. Misfeed in MP tray R. Misfeed inside the Center fold unit
H. Misfeed inside the right cover 1 S. Misfeed inside the Center fold tray
I. Misfeed inside the right cover 2
J. Misfeed inside the bridge conveying
7-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Paper misfeed detection condition

Main unit + Optional unit1
19
20
M 22
31 21
K
27
QQ 23 11
J 66xx
13 12 U
OO
26 OO OO L
10 9
J
25 8
PP 24
W H
OO 3
4
VV
29
7 6 GG
1
18 F
AA T 5
2 HH
28
R BB 16
30
17
II
EE 15 CC 14
SS
Figure 7-2
1. Paper sensor 1 12. Upper exit full sensor 22. DP timing sensor
2. Paper sensor 2 13. BR conveying sensor 1 23. DP exit sensor
3. DU sensor 1 14. BR conveying sensor 2 24. DF entry sensor
4. DU sensor 2 15. PF paper sensor 1 25. DF middle sensor
5. Conveying sensor 16. PF paper sensor 2 26. DF exit sensor
6. MP conveying sensor 17. PF vertical conveying sensor 27. DF drum sensor
7. Registration sensor 18. PF horizontal conveying sen- 28. DF sub exit sensor
8. Belt roll-up sensor sor 29. BF entry sensor
9. Fuser sensor 19. PF feed sensor 30. BF vertical conveying sensor
10. Exit reversing sensor 20. DP feed sensor 31. BF exit sensor
11. Lower exit full sensor 21. DP backside timing sensor 32. MT tray exit sensor
7-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Main unit + Optional unit
19
20
32 21 M 22
N
N N
N 12
N
N 14 13
Q U
25 23 Q 10
N
24 LL J 11
9
W H
H
H
3
8
4
V
V
6
7V G
G
G
GG
1
T
A 5
2 HH
B
B
BBB
17
I
C
C
C 15
18
D 16
Figure 7-3
1. Paper sensor 1 10. Exit reversing sensor 19. DP feed sensor

2. Paper sensor 2 11. Lower exit full sensor 20. DP backside timing sensor
3. DU sensor 1 12. Upper exit full sensor 21. DP timing sensor
4. DU sensor 2 13. BR conveying sensor 1 22. DP exit sensor
5. Conveying sensor 14. BR conveying sensor 2 23. DF entry sensor
6. MP conveying sensor 15. PF paper sensor 1 24. DF middle sensor
7. Registration sensor 16. PF paper sensor 2 25. DF exit sensor
8. Belt roll-up sensor 17. PF conveying sensor 1
9. Fuser sensor 18. PF conveying sensor 2
7-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A. Paper jam at cassette 1 L. Paper jam at the inner finisher

B. Paper jam at cassette 2 M. Paper jam at the document processor
C. Paper jam at cassette 3 (500-sheet × 1) N. Paper jam at the 1000-sheet finisher
D. Paper jam at cassette 3 (1500-sheet × 2) O. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet (inner) finisher
C. Paper jam at cassette 4 (500-sheet × 1) P. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet (Tray A) finisher
E. Paper jam at cassette 4 (1500-sheet × 2) Q. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet (Tray B)finisher
F. Paper jam at cassette 5 (side feeder) R. Paper jam at the Folding unit
G. Paper jam at the MP tray S. Paper jam at the Folding tray
H. Paper jam at right cover 1 T. Paper jam at the conveying section
I. Paper jam at right cover 2 U. Paper jam at the duplex unit
J. Paper jam at the bridge conveying section V. Paper jam at the registration section
K. Paper jam at the mail box W. Paper jam at the Fuser section
7-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J0000 - J1604 I J4215 W J4903 W J6070 O J7002 L
J0100 - J1614 I J4218 W J4904 W J6080 O J7100 R
J0101 - J4002 T J4219 W J4905 W J6100 O J7110 R
J0104 - J4003 T J4301 U J4908 W J6101 N J7200 R
J0105 - J4004 T J4302 U J4909 W J6102 L J7210 S
J0106 - J4005 T J4303 U J4911 J J6110 O J7300 R
J0107 - J4012 V J4304 U J4912 J J6111 N J7310 S
J0110 - J4013 V J4305 U J4913 J J6112 L J7400 R
J0111 - J4014 V J4309 U J4914 J J6200 O J7500 R
J0114 - J4015 V J4311 U J4915 J J6210 O J7600 R
J0212 - J4101 V J4312 U J4918 J J6300 O J7700 R
J0213 - J4102 V J4313 U J4919 J J6301 N J7710 R
J0300 - J4103 V J4314 U J5001 J J6310 O J7800 O
J0501 A J4104 V J4315 U J5002 J J6311 N J7810 K
J0502 B J4105 V J4319 U J5003 J J6400 O J7900 O
J0503 C J4108 V J4401 U J5004 J J6401 N J7901 N
J0504 D J4109 V J4402 U J5005 J J6402 L J7902 L
J0508 U J4111 W J4403 U J5008 J J6410 O J9000 M
J0509 G J4112 W J4404 U J5009 J J6411 N J9001 M
J0511 V J4113 W J4405 U J5011 J J6412 L J9002 M*1,*2
J0512 T J4114 W J4409 U J5012 J J6500 O J9004 M*1,*3
J0513 T J4115 W J4701 W J5013 J J6510 O J9005 M*1,*2
J0514 T J4118 W J4702 W J5014 J J6511 N J9006 M*1
J0518 V J4119 W J4703 W J5015 J J6512 L J9007 M*1
J0519 V J4201 W J4704 W J5018 J J6600 O J9008 M*2
J0523 C J4202 W J4705 W J5019 J J6610 O J9009 M*1,*2
J0524 E J4203 W J4709 W J6000 -*2 J6710 O J9010 M
J0533 C J4204 W J4711 U J6001 -*1 J6810 O J9011 M
J0534 E J4205 W J4712 U J6002 -*3 J6811 N J9110 M
J0545 F J4208 W J4713 U J6012 -*3 J6812 L J9200 M*1,*3
J0555 F J4209 W J4714 U J6020 O J6910 O J9210 M*1
J1403 C J4211 W J4715 U J6021 N J6911 N J9300 M*2
J1404 I J4212 W J4719 U J6041 N J6912 L J9310 M*2
J1413 I J4213 W J4901 W J6050 O J7000 P J9400 M
J1414 I J4214 W J4902 W J6060 O J7001 N J9410 M
7-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J9600 M*1,*2
J9610 M*1,*2
*1:DF-7100
*2:DF-7110
*3:DF-7120
7-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Jam Codes
Error code Contents note

J0000 Power ON jam
J0107 Fuser temperature stabiliza-
tion time-out
J0100/J0101/J0104/ Paper jam caused by the
J0105/J0106 firmware factor
J0110/J0111/J0114 Cover open detection J0110: Right cover / Maintenance front cover
open detection (Right cover switch), J0111: Front
cover open detection (Front cover sensor), J0114:
BR cover open detection (BR cover sensor)
J0212/J0213 PF right cover open detection Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
J0300 Paper output completion non- Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
detection jam
J0501/J0502/J0503/ Cassette no feed (Prior check Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper
J0504 item) feeder (Cassette3, 4)
Remarks: Items to be checked beforehand when
the cassette no paper feed jam occurs
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the
leading edge of paper, and the lift plate does not
rise up (Can't hear the descent sound of the lift
plate when pulling out the cassette).
J0503/J0504 No paper feed from cassette Object: Paper feeder
Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the
leading edge of paper, and the lift plate does not
rise up (Can't hear the descent sound of the lift
plate when pulling out the cassette).
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the
leading edge of paper, and the lift plate rise up
(Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when
pulling out the cassette), but feed drive does not
start.
Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the
leading edge of paper, and the lift plate rise up
(Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when
pulling out the cassette), but feed drive does not
start.
J0501/J0502/J0503/ No paper feed from cassette Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper
J0504 1-4 feeder (Cassette3, 4)
Condition: Feed slip mark on paper leading edge.
(Pick up pulley can't convey paper)
7-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: There is a bent or tear on the center of
paper leading edge (Can't feed till retard roller.
Or, the retard roller does not roll forward.)
Condition: There is a bent other than the center of
paper leading edge (The paper jam occurs as
paper is caught before paper goes into the retard
roller.)
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.
Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreas-
ing, or paper is slipping.
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: The sensor detection is not stable.
Condition: The sensor detection is not stable.
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreas-
ing or paper is slipping. Or, the roller is not rotat-
ing.
Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreas-
ing or paper is slipping. Or, the roller is not rotat-
ing.
J0508 No paper feed from the Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
duplex section caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
J0508 No paper feed from the Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Duplex
duplex section conveying drive does not rotate. Or, DU clutch
does not operate correctly.)
J0509 No paper feed from the MP Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
tray caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
J0509 No paper feed from the MP Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed
tray drive does not start. Or, MP clutch does not oper-
ate correctly.)
J0511 Multi-feeding from cassette
J0512 Multi-feeding from cassette
J0513/J0514 Multi-feeding from cassette Object: Paper feeder
J0518 Multi-feeding from the duplex
section
J0519 Multi-feeding from the MP
tray
7-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J0523/J0524 No paper feed from the large Object: Large capacity feeder
capacity paper feeder Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
J0523/J0524 No paper feed from the large Object: Large capacity feeder
capacity paper feeder Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed
drive does not start. Or, PF feed clutch does not
operate correctly.)
J0533/J0534 Multi-feeding from the large Object: Large capacity feeder
capacity paper feeder
J0545 No paper feed from the side Object: Side feeder
feeder Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
paper is slipping.)
J0545 No paper feed from the side Object: Side feeder
feeder Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed
drive does not start. Or, the conveying clutch
J0555 Multi-feeding from the side Object: Side feeder
feeder
J1403/J1404 Conveying sensor non-arrival Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
jam Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
paper is slipping.)
J1403/J1404 Conveying sensor non-arrival Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
jam Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed
drive does not start. Or, conveying clutch does
not operate correctly.)
J1413/J1414 Conveying sensor stay jam Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
J1604 PF conveying sensor 1 non- Object: Paper feeder
arrival jam Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
paper is slipping.)
J1604 PF vertical conveying sensor Object: Large capacity feeder
non-arrival jam Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is
paper is slipping.)
J1604 PF conveying sensor 1 non- Object: Paper feeder
arrival jam Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed
non-arrival jam Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed
J1614 PF conveying sensor 1 stay Object: Paper feeder
jam
7-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

stay jam
J4002/J4003/J4004/ Registration sensor non- Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder /
J4005 arrival jam Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or Side
feeder
Condition: There is a damage on paper.
J4002/J4003/J4004/ Registration sensor non- Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder /
J4005 arrival jam Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4 ), or Side
feeder
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (The
middle roller does not rotate. The middle clutch
J4012/J4013/J4014/ Registration sensor stay jam Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder /
J4015 Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or Side
feeder
J4101/J4102/J4103/ Belt winding sensor non- Condition: Paper JAM on the primary transfer
J4104/J4105/J4108/ arrival jam belt. (Paper does not separate from the belt)
J4109
J4101/J4102/J4103/ Belt winding sensor non- Condition: Paper jam after passing through the
J4104/J4105/J4108/ arrival jam secondary transfer roller (Belt winding sensor
J4109 does not detect.)
J4101/J4102/J4103/ Belt winding sensor non- Condition: Paper jam before the secondary trans-
J4104/J4105/J4108/ arrival jam fer roller.
J4109
J4111/J4112/J4113/ Belt winding sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam before fuser section.
J4114/J4115/J4118/
J4119
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam at fuser section.
J4204/J4205/J4208/
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4204/J4205/J4208/ leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4204/J4205/J4208/ leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam after passing through the
J4204/J4205/J4208/ fuser exit roller.
J4209
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam
J4214/J4215/J4218/
J4219
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the exit unit
J4214/J4215/J4218/
J4219
7-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam at the exit section when
J4214/J4215/J4218/ feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the
J4219 punch unit installed for the inner finisher. (Inch
specification only)
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam
J4214/J4215/J4218/
J4219
J4301/J4302/J4303/ DU sensor 1 non-arrival jam
J4304/J4305/J4309
J4311/J4312/J4313/ DU sensor 1 stay jam
J4314/J4315/J4319
J4401/J4402/J4403/ DU sensor 2 non-arrival jam
J4404/J4405/J4409
J4701/J4702/J4703/ Exit reverse sensor non-
J4704/J4705/J4709 arrival jam
J4711/J4712/J4713/ Exit reverse sensor stay jam
J4714/J4715/J4719
J4901/J4902/J4903/ BR conveying sensor 1 non-
J4904/J4905/J4908/ arrival jam
J4909
J4911/J4912/J4913/ BR conveying sensor 1 stay
J4914/J4915/J4918/ jam
J4919
J5001/J5002/J5003/ BR conveying sensor 2 non-
J5004/J5005/J5008/ arrival jam
J5009
J5011/J5012/J5013/ BR conveying sensor 2 stay
J5014/J5015/J5018/ jam
J5019
J6000/J6001/J6002 DF paper entry failure jam Object: J6000 (4000-sheet finisher), J6001
(1000-sheet finisher), J6002 (Inner finisher)
J6012 Inner DF open jam Object: Inner finisher
J6020/J6021 DF front cover open jam Object: J6020 (4000-sheet finisher), J6021
(1000-sheet finisher)
J6041 DF top cover open jam Object: 1000-sheet finisher
J6050 BF tray open jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J6060 MT cover open jam Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
J6070 BF unit open jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J6080 BF left cover open jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J6100/J6101/J6102 DF paper entry sensor non- Object: J6100 (4000-sheet finisher), J6101
arrival jam (1000-sheet finisher), J6102 (Inner finisher)
J6110/J6111/J6112 DF paper entry sensor stay Object: J6110 (4000-sheet finisher), J6111 (1000-
jam sheet finisher), J6112 (Inner finisher)
7-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J6200 DF sub exit sensor non- Object: 4000-sheet finisher
arrival jam
J6210 DF sub exit sensor stay jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6300/J6301 DF middle sensor non-arrival Object: J6300 (4000-sheet finisher), J6301
jam (1000-sheet finisher)
J6310/J6311 DF middle sensor stay jam Object: J6310 (4000-sheet finisher), J6311 (1000-
sheet finisher)
J6400/J6401/J6402 DF exit sensor non-arrival Object: J6400 (4000-sheet finisher), J6401
jam (1000-sheet finisher), J6402 (Inner finisher)
J6410/J6411/J6412 DF exit sensor stay jam Object: J6410 (4000-sheet finisher), J6411 (1000-
sheet finisher), J6412 (Inner finisher)
J6500 DF exit sensor non-arrival Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam when exiting paper stack
J6510/J6511/J6512 DF exit sensor stay jam when Object: J6510 (4000-sheet finisher), J6511 (1000-
exiting paper stack sheet finisher), J6512 (Inner finisher)
J6600 DF drum sensor non-arrival Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam
J6610 DF drum sensor stay jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6710 DF drum sensor stay jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
during paper conveying into
the BF unit
J6810/J6811/J6812 Front DF side registration jam Object: J6810 (4000-sheet finisher), J6811 (1000-
J6910/J6911/J6912 Rear DF side registration jam Object: J6910 (4000-sheet finisher), J6911 (1000-
J7000/J7001/J7002 DF staple jam Object: J7000 (4000-sheet finisher), J7001
(1000-sheet finisher), J7002 (Inner finisher)
J7100 BF paper entry sensor non- Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
arrival jam
J7110 BF paper entry sensor stay Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam
J7200 BF exit sensor non-arrival Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam
J7210 BF exit sensor stay jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
J7300 BF exit sensor non-arrival Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam at tri-folding
J7310 BF exit sensor stay jam at tri- Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
folding
J7400 Upper BF side registration Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam
J7500 Lower BF side registration Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
jam
J7600 BF staple jam Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
7-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J7700 BF vertical conveying sensor Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
non-arrival jam
J7710 BF vertical conveying sensor Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
stay jam
J7800 Mail Box exit non-arrival jam Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
J7810 Mail Box exit stay jam Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
J7900/J7901/J7902 DF paddle jam Object: J7900 (4000-sheet finisher), J7901
(1000-sheet finisher), J7902 (Inner finisher).
J9000 No original feed from the DP Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
DP
J9001 DP small size original jam Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
DP
J9002 Paper jam detected when Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
starting the paper conveying DP
Remarks: When detecting the DP feed-shift motor
error (C9180) (up to 2 times), display J9002.
(Mechanically reversed DP only)
J9004 DP registration sensor non- Object: Mechanically reversed DP
arrival jam during the original
reversing
J9005 No original feed from the DP Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically
reversed DP with the DP feed belt
J9006 DP exit sensor non-arrival Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP
jam during the original revers- feed belt
ing
J9007 DP exit sensor stay jam Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP
during the original reversing feed belt
J9008 No original feed from the DP Object: Dual scan DP
(Original is B6 size or smaller)
J9009 DP original jam caused by Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically
the image scanning reversed DP with the DP feed belt
J9010 Document processor open Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
detection DP
J9011 DP top cover open detection Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
DP
J9110 DP feed sensor multi-feeding Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
jam DP
J9200 DP registration sensor non- Object: Mechanically reversed DP
arrival jam
J9210 DP registration sensor stay Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP
jam feed belt
J9300 DPCIS non-arrival jam Object: Dual scan DP
J9310 DP backside timing sensor Object: Dual scan DP
stay jam
7-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

J9400 DP timing sensor non-arrival Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
jam DP
J9410 DP timing sensor stay jam Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed
DP
J9600 DP exit sensor non-arrival Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically
jam reversed DP with the DP feed belt
J9610 DP exit sensor stay jam Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically
reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Content of Jam Code

J0000: Power ON jam
The power was turned on while the unspecified conveying sensor turns on.

1 Specifying the sensor (Specify the sensor which Specify the sensor that dis- Mainte-
is turned on) plays ON at U031. (Go to the nance
next step.) Mode List
2 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If a piece of paper or the for-
remaining on paper con- eign objects adhere on the
veying route to turn on the conveying path, or a burr in
sensor. the parts such as the guide or
the actuator, remove them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not oper- Clean and reattach the sen- Mainte-
ate correctly. sor specified at U031, and nance
reconnect the connector. If Mode List
the wire.
• Feed drive unit - Feed drive
PWB
• Faulty sensor defined at
U031 - Feed drive PWB
7-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0107: Fuser temperature stabilization time-out

The fuser temperature does not achieve to the paper feed-able temperature within the specified time.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove a piece of paper
activate properly. from each conveying section
and check the sensors. Then,
turn the power switch and the
main power switch off . After
5s passes, turn the main
power switch and the power
switch on.
2 Checking the installation The electric power supply Plug the power cord into
environment fluctuates or the electric another wall outlet.
voltage reduces.
3 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
type, paper size) do not Settings
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
properly activate. latest version. Update
5 Checking the fuser unit The fuser heater is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
J0100/J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106: Paper jam caused by the firmware factor

Firmware does not operate correctly. (The conveying related control error)

switch on.
7-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0110/J0111/J0114: Cover open detection

J0110: Right cover / Maintenance front cover open detection (Right cover switch),
J0111: Front cover open detection (Front cover sensor), J0114: BR cover open
detection (BR cover sensor)
The cover-open is detected during print.

1 Checking the cover The covers are not fitted. Check if the cover is closed
firmly, and reattach it if nec-
essary. If the cover is
deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the cover switch The cover switch does not Reattach the cover switch
operate properly. and reconnect the connector.
If the cover switch is faulty,
replace it.
J0212/J0213: PF right cover open detection

Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, PF right cover open is detected during printing.

1 Checking the PF right The PF right cover is not Check if the PF right cover is
cover aligned to the other exte- securely closed, and reat-
rior covers. tach it if necessary. Fix or
replace it if it is deformed.
2 Checking the PF right PF right cover sensor does Reattach the PF right cover
cover sensor not operate correctly. sensor and reconnect the
connector. If the PF right
cover sensor is faulty, replace
it.
J0300: Paper output completion non-detection jam

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
The paper output completion is not communicated from the finisher.

switch on.
7-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the connection The finisher cable is not Reconnect the finisher cable
connected correctly to the to the main unit.
main unit.
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: Cassette no feed (Prior check item)

Object: Main unit (Cassette1, 2) or the paper feeder (Cassette3, 4)
Remarks: Items to be checked beforehand when the cassette no paper feed jam
occurs
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on
after passing the specific time.

1 Reloading the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
3 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper in the
bent. cassette.
4 Checking the paper Paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If it
or waving. is difficult to replace, switch
the leading edge and the trail-
ing edge of paper, or flip
paper upside down and reset
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
6 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove paper that the for-
paper. eign objects adheres in the
cassette.
7-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0501/J0502: No paper feed from cassette

Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift
plate does not rise up (Can't hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out
the cassette).
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding
mark on the leading edge of paper)

nected properly. Or, the lift lowing wire connectors and Manual -
motor does not drive as reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the wire.
• Lift motor 1, 2 - Feed drive
PWB
• Feed drive PWB - Engine
PWB
2 Checking the drive parts The lift motor drive is not If there are any problems
transmitted to the lift plate such as breakage or biting of
drive parts because of the foreign objects in the joints of
engagement failure. the gears, couplings etc. of
the motor, clean or replace
them.
3 Checking the lift motor The lift motor is not Reattach the lift motor 1 or 2 Detaching
attached properly or faulty. and reconnect the connector. and reat-
If not repaired, replace it. taching the
Lift Motor
4 Replacing the lift plate The lift plate is damaged or Replace the lift plate.
deformed.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Object: Paper feeder
plate does not rise up (Can't hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out
the cassette).
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding

nected properly or PF lift lowing wire connectors and Manual -
motor does not drive as reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the wire.
• PF lift motor 1, 2 - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking the drive parts The PF lift motor drive is If there are any problems
not transmitted to the PF such as breakage or biting of
lift plate drive parts foreign objects in the joints of
because of the engage- the gears, couplings etc. of
ment failure. the motor, clean or replace
them.
3 Checking the PF lift motor PF lift motor is not Reattach the PF lift motor 1 Detaching
attached properly or faulty. or 2 and reconnect the con- and reat-
nector. If not repaired, taching the
replace it. PF Lift
Motor
4 Replacing the PF lift plate The PF lift plate is dam- Replace the PF lift plate.
aged or deformed.
5 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

plate rise up (Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the
cassette), but feed drive does not start.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding

1 Performing the field mea- The cassette base cannot 1. Replace the retard roller. 2ND-
sures against the issue press enough to the retard At that time, check the sur- 0089_1
caused by the cassette release lever at the pri- faces of the pickup roller and 2ND-
base bending. mary feed unit due to the the feed roller, if worn down, 0089_2
cassette base bending, replace them.
and there are some gaps 2. Attach the heater cover kit
between the retard roller (302ND94A0_).
and the feed roller. 3. Measure the bending of
the cassette base sides (refer
to the reference documents
for the measurement
method), if the bending is
less than the specific value
(7mm or more), replace the
cassette and attach the
heater cover set
(302ND94A0_).
the wire.
• Feed clutch 1, 2 - Feed
drive unit
• Feed drive unit - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
3 Checking the paper feed Feed roller does not rotate Reattach the feed shaft and
shaft and the pin as feed shaft and feed pin feed pin. If there is deforma-
of the feed roller is not tion, etc., replace them.
attach properly.
4 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch is Execute U032. If feed clutch Mainte-
clutch not connected, so the 1 or 2 does not operate cor- nance
paper feed roller does not rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
rotate. nect the connector. If not
repaired, replace it.
7-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Removing the foreign The lift plate does not rise Remove a piece of paper or
objects and checking the up till the upper limit posi- foreign objects. Check if the
operation of the actuator tion while the lift upper limit actuator of the lift upper limit
sensor turns on. sensor 1 or 2 is switched to
on when the lift plate rises up.
Then, reattach the actuator if
necessary.
6 Checking the drive gear The drive from the feed If there are any problems on Detaching
motor is not transmitted. the gear, etc. of the feed drive and reat-
unit, replace them. taching the
Feed Drive
Unit
7 Replacing the feed motor The feed roller does not Execute U030 [Feed]. If the Mainte-
rotate since the feed motor feed motor does not operate nance
does not drive. correctly, reattach it and Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

plate rise up (Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the
cassette), but feed drive does not start.
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding

sures against the issue press enough to the retard At that time, check the sur- 0089_1
caused by the cassette release lever at the pri- faces of the pickup roller and 2ND-
base bending. mary feed unit due to the the feed roller, if worn down, 0089_2
cassette base bending, replace them.
and there are some gaps 2. Attach the heater cover kit
between the retard roller (302ND94A0_).
and the feed roller. 3. Measure the bending of
the cassette base sides (refer
to the reference documents
for the measurement
heater cover set
(302ND94A0_).
the wire.
• PF feed clutch 1, 2 - PF
feed unit
• PF feed motor - PF feed unit
• PF feed unit - PF PWB
3 Checking the paper feed Feed roller does not rotate Reattach the feed shaft and
shaft and the pin as feed shaft and feed pin feed pin. If there is deforma-
of the feed roller is not tion, etc., replace them.
attach properly.
4 Checking the PF paper PF feed roller does not Execute U247. If PF feed Mainte-
feed clutch rotate since PF feed clutch clutch 1, 2 does not operate nance
is not engaged. properly, reattach it and Mode List
7-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Removing the foreign The PF lift plate does not Remove a piece of paper or
objects and checking the rise up till the upper limit foreign objects. Check if the
operation of the actuator position while the PF lift actuator of the PF lift upper
upper limit sensor turns on. limit sensor 1 or 2 is switched
to on when the PF lift plate
rises up. Then, reattach the
actuator if necessary.
6 Checking the drive gear The PF feed motor drive is If there are any problems on Detaching
not transmitted. the gear, etc. of the PF drive and reat-
unit, replace them. taching the
PF Drive
Unit
7 Replacing the PF feed The PF feed roller does Execute U247. If the PF feed Mainte-
motor not rotate since the PF motor does not operate cor- nance
feed motor does not drive. rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
nect the connector. If not
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: No paper feed from cassette 1 - 4

Condition: Feed slip mark on paper leading edge. (Pick up pulley can't convey paper)
When feeding from cassette 1 to 4, paper stops at the pickup roller after feed clutch turns on, and next sensor
does not turn on.

1 Checking the paper gauge More than upper limit of Reset the number of sheets
paper is loaded. that fit in the upper limit label
position.
guides width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
the paper size. paper size.
7-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the pressure The conveying function of Reattach the spring for the Detaching
spring for the pickup pulley the pickup pulley is not pickup pulley if it comes off. If and reat-
enough. deformed, replace it. taching the
Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
4 Checking the pickup pulley The conveying function of Clean the pickup pulley sur- Detaching
the pickup pulley is not face. If worn down, replace it and reat-
enough. taching the
Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
6 Checking the paper feed The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller Detaching
roller the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, and reat-
enough. replace it. taching the
Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller

Condition: There is a bent or tear on the center of paper leading edge (Can't feed till
retard roller. Or, the retard roller does not roll forward.)
When feeding from cassette 1 to 4, paper stops at the retard roller after feed clutch turns on, and next sensor
does not turn on.

1 Checking the retard roller Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the Detaching
retard roller is not enough. retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
replace it. taching the
Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
2 reattaching the retard The retard spring is out of Reattach the retard spring.
spring position.
7-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 (When the paper leading Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper or the for-
edge is bent or paper is veying guide, piece of eign objects adhere on the
skewed) Checking the paper, etc.. conveying path, or a burr in
paper path the parts such as the convey-
ing surface of the conveying
guide or the actuator, remove
or replace them. If the sheet
or film has a damage, defor-
mation, floating, repair or
replace them.

Condition: There is a bent other than the center of paper leading edge (The paper jam
occurs as paper is caught before paper goes into the retard roller.)
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on
since the paper stops at the paper feed roller.

1 Checking the paper Paper is curled downward. Correct or replace paper. If it
is difficult to replace, switch
them.
replace them.
7-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: Conveying capability is decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette after feed clutch
turns on, it does not reach to next sensor.

1 Checking the retard roller The conveying perfor- Clean the surface of the Detaching
mance is deteriorated due retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
to poor forward rotation of replace it. taching the
the retard roller Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
2 reattaching retard release The retard release lever Reattach the retard release
lever and retard holder and the retard holder do lever and retard holder.
not operate correctly due
to the installation failure.
3 (When feeding special Conveying capability of the Set special media below the
media) Change setting special media is not storage limit to the paper feed
method for the special enough. tray other than cassette 1.
media Also, when using envelopes,
set the envelope after attach-
ing the envelope attachment
Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
5 (When the paper skew The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
occurs) Relocating the width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
paper width guides the paper size. paper size.
6 (When paper is skewed) More than upper limit of Reset the number of sheets
Checking the paper gauge paper is loaded. that fit in the upper limit label
position.
7-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• Middle clutch - Feed drive
PWB (Cassette 1)
• Vertical conveying clutch -
Feed drive PWB (Cassette 2)
PWB
8 Checking the clutch The clutch does not oper- Execute U032 to the opera- Mainte-
ate properly. tion of the clutch related to nance
paper feeding. If the clutch Mode List
does not operate correctly,
reattach it and reconnect the
replace it. (Cassette 1: Mid-
dle clutch, Cassette 2: Verti-
cal conveying clutch)
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing, or paper is slipping.
When feeding from cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette after feed clutch
turns on, it does not reach to next sensor.

1 Checking the retard roller The conveying perfor- Clean the surface of the Detaching
mance is deteriorated due retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
to poor forward rotation of replace it. taching the
the retard roller Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
7-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 reattaching retard release The retard release lever Reattach the retard release
lever and retard holder and the retard holder do lever and retard holder.
not operate correctly due
to the installation failure.
3 (When feeding special Conveying capability of the Set special media below the
media) Change setting special media is not storage limit to the paper feed
method for the special enough. tray other than cassette 1.
media Also, when using envelopes,
set the envelope after attach-
ing the envelope attachment
Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
position.
the wire.
• PF conveying clutch 1, 2 -
PF PWB
8 Checking the PF convey- PF conveying clutch does Execute U247. If PF convey- Mainte-
ing clutch not operate correctly. ing clutch 1, 2 does not oper- nance
ate properly, reattach it and Mode List
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

When feeding from cassette1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette and conveyed
through next roller after feed clutch turns on, and reach to next sensor.

1 (In case there is a paper The registration sensor Execute U031 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
loop mark when feeding does not operate properly. registration sensor does not nance
the paper from cassette 1) operate properly, clean and Mode List
Checking the registration reattach it then reconnect the
sensor connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
2 (When feeding paper from The conveying sensor Execute U031 [Cassette2 Mainte-
cassette 2) Checking the does not operate correctly. Feed]. If the conveying sen- nance
conveying sensor sor does not operate prop- Mode List
erly, clean and reattach it
then reconnect the connector.
3 (When feeding paper from The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
cassette 1) Checking the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
connection is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
the wire.
• Registration sensor - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
3 (When feeding paper from The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
cassette 2) Checking the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the wire.
• Conveying sensor - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

When feeding from cassette1, 2, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette and conveyed
through next roller after feed clutch turns on, and reach to next sensor.

the wire.
• PF conveying sensor 1, 2 -
PF PWB
2 Checking the PF convey- PF conveying sensor does Clean and reattach the PF
ing sensor not operate correctly. conveying sensor 1 or 2 and
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing or paper is slipping. Or, the
roller is not rotating.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, after feed clutch turns on, the leading edge of paper comes out from the
cassette but stops at next roller.

Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
7-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the conveying Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the con-
roller and the pulley conveying roller is not veying roller and pulley.
enough. Check the pressure level of
the conveying roller and pul-
ley and if the spring or bear-
ing is dropped off, reattach
them. If they are deformed or
worn out, replace them.
3 Checking the drive gear The conveying roller does If the foreign objects adhere
not rotate since the drive on the drive gear, remove
gear does not transfer the them. If it is damaged, etc.,
drive. replace it.
4 Checking the feed drive Feed drive unit does not Check the operation of the Detaching
unit operate correctly. feed drive unit. If the feed and reat-
drive unit does not operate taching the
correctly, reattach it. If not Feed Drive
repaired, replace it. Unit
position.
replace them.
the wire.
PWB (Cassette 1)
• Vertical conveying clutch -
Feed drive PWB (Cassette 2)
PWB
7-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the clutch The clutch does not oper- Execute U032. If the middle Mainte-
ate properly. clutch (for cassette 1) or the nance
vertical conveying clutch (for Mode List
cassette 2) does not operate
correctly, reattach it and
10 Checking the feed motor The feed motor does not Execute U030 [Feed]. If the Mainte-
rotate. feed motor does not operate nance
correctly, reattach it and Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing or paper is slipping. Or, the
roller is not rotating.
When feeding from cassette3, 4, after feed clutch turns on, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cas-
sette but stops at next roller.

Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
2 Checking the conveying Conveying capability of the Clean the surface of the con-
roller and the pulley conveying roller is not veying roller and pulley.
enough. Check the pressure level of
the conveying roller and pul-
ley and if the spring or bear-
ing is dropped off, reattach
them. If they are deformed or
worn out, replace them.
7-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the drive gear The conveying roller does If the foreign objects adhere
not rotate since the drive on the drive gear, remove
gear does not transfer the them. If it is damaged, etc.,
drive. replace it.
4 Checking the PF drive unit PF drive unit does not Check the operation of the Detaching
operate correctly. PF drive unit. If the PF drive and reat-
unit does not operate cor- taching the
rectly, reattach it. If not PF Drive
repaired, replace it. Unit
position.
replace them.
the wire.
• PF conveying clutch 1, 2 -
PF PWB
• PF feed motor - PF PWB
9 Checking the PF convey- PF conveying clutch does Execute U247. If PF convey- Mainte-
ing clutch not operate correctly. ing clutch 1, 2 does not oper- nance
ate properly, reattach it and Mode List
10 Checking the PF feed The PF feed motor does Execute U247. If the PF feed Mainte-
motor not rotate. motor does not operate cor- nance
rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
7-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is
decreasing. Or, paper is slipping.)
The registration sensor does not turn on after DU clutch is ON (dual reverse operation).

1 Performing the prior stan- There is a mechanical Perform the prior standard
dard check items cause such as the dirty check items.
guide, etc.
replace them.
3 (When paper leading edge The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper if it is
is bent) Checking paper damp.
4 (When paper stops at the Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
DU conveying roller due to used. paper within the specifica- Paper
slip) Checking paper tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
5 (When paper stops at the Paper conveying capabil- Clean the DU conveying
DU conveying roller) ity is decreasing or slip- roller and the surface of the
Checking the DU convey- ping. (Rotation is not DU conveying pulley. Check
ing roller and the pulley smooth) the pressure level of the roller
and the pulley, if the spring or
bearing are dropped off, reat-
tach them. If they are
deformed or worn out,
replace them. If the foreign
objects are on the drive gear,
remove them. If it is dam-
aged, replace it.
7-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not Reattach the actuator and the
the spring operate properly. spring of the registration sen-
sor. If the do not operate cor-
rectly due to the deformation,
etc., repair or replace them.
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Duplex conveying drive does not rotate.
Or, DU clutch does not operate correctly.)
The registration sensor does not turn on after DU clutch is ON (dual reverse operation).

1 (When paper stops at the The feed motor drive is not Check if the DU conveying
DU conveying roller) transmitted properly. roller manually rotates
Checking the drive parts smoothly. And clean and
reattach the drive parts if nec-
essary. If not repaired,
replace them.
the wire.
• DU sensor 1, 2 - Feed drive
PWB
• DU clutch 1, 2 - Feed drive
PWB
• Feed motor - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
3 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not oper- Execute U031 [DU1] or Mainte-
ate correctly. [DU2]. If the DU sensor 1 or 2 nance
does not operate properly, Mode List
clean and reattach it then
4 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not oper- Execute U032 [DU1] or Mainte-
ate correctly. [DU2]. If DU clutch 1 or 2 nance
does not operate correctly, Mode List
replace it.
operate correctly. feed motor does not operate nance
7-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

The MP conveying sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray.

1 (When paper stops at the The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
MP feed roller) Checking crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
paper tion
2 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from MP
is bent) Checking paper bent. tray.
3 (When paper leading edge Paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If it
is bent) Checking paper or waving. is difficult to replace, switch
them.
4 (When paper leading edge foreign objects are on the Remove paper that the for-
is bent) Checking paper paper. eign objects adheres from
MP tray.
MP feed roller) Checking used. paper within the specifica- Paper
paper tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
replace them.
7-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 (When paper stops at the Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the MP Detaching
MP feed roller) Checking ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
the MP feed roller and the ping. (Rotation is not replace it. And if the foreign taching the
drive gear smooth) objects are on the drive gear, MP Feed
remove it. If it is damaged, Roller
replace it.
the spring operate properly. spring of the MP conveying
sensor. If the do not operate
correctly due to the deforma-
tion, etc., repair or replace
them.
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, MP clutch
When feeding from MP tray, registration sensor does not turn on.

1 Replacing the MP retard The paper edge is caught Replace the MP retard guide Detaching
guide sheet by the MP retard guide sheet (302ND0885_) affixed and reat-
sheet. on the MP retard roller guide. taching the
MP retard
roller
2 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate if it
attached properly. does not rise up.
3 Checking the MP lift motor The MP lift motor does not When the MP lift plate does
operate properly. not rise up, reattach the MP
lift motor and reconnect the
replace it.
4 (When paper stops at the The feed motor drive is not Check if the drive of the feed
MP feed roller) Checking transmitted properly. motor is transmitted to the
the drive parts conveying unit and, clean
and reattach the drive parts if
necessary. If not repaired,
replace the parts.
7-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
drive PWB
• MP clutch - Feed drive PWB
PWB
PWB
6 Checking the registration The registration sensor Execute U031 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
sensor does not operate properly. registration sensor does not nance
operate properly, clean and Mode List
reattach it then reconnect the
replace it.
7 Checking the MP clutch The MP clutch does not Execute U032 [MPT Feed]. If Mainte-
operate correctly. the MP clutch does not oper- nance
ate correctly, reattach it and Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0511: Multi-feeding from cassette

When feeding from cassette 1, registration sensor is kept ON and does not turn off.

1 Checking the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
tion
7-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace paper. And install Installing
the cassette heater if neces- the
sary. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
3 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force Clean the surface of the Detaching
of the retard roller is not retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
enough. The retard roller replace it. taching the
contacts the feed roller Retard
unevenly. Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
4 Checking the retard spring The retard spring is out of Reattach the retard spring.
position.
5 Checking the primary The primary paper feed Replace the primary paper Detaching
paper feed unit unit is faulty feed unit with the one in other and reat-
paper source and check if it taching the
operates properly. If repaired, Retard
replace the primary paper Roller/
feed unit. Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
the wire.
• Paper length sensor 1 -
Feed drive PWB
drive PWB
• Registration clutch - Feed
drive PWB
• Feed clutch 1 - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
7-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 Checking the paper length Paper size is misdetected If the paper size loaded in the
sensor by paper length sensor. cassette differs from the
paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach
paper length sensor 1 and
8 (When there is no paper The rotation of the registra- Execute U032 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
loop mark) Checking the tion roller does not stop registration clutch does not nance
registration clutch while the registration operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
clutch remains engaged. and reconnect the connector.
replace it.
10 Checking the paper feed The rotation of the feed Execute U032 [Cassette1]. If Mainte-
clutch roller does not stop while feed clutch 1 does not oper- nance
the feed clutch remains ate correctly, reattach it and Mode List
engaged. reconnect the connector. If
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0512: Multi-feeding from cassette

Conveying sensor does not turn off at paper feed from cassette 2.

tion
sary. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force Clean the surface of the Detaching
of the retard roller is not retard roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
enough. The retard roller replace it. taching the
unevenly. Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
4 Checking the retard spring The retard spring is out of Reattach the retard spring.
position.
5 Checking the primary The primary paper feed Replace the primary paper Detaching
paper feed unit unit is faulty feed unit with the one in other and reat-
paper source and check if it taching the
operates properly. If repaired, Retard
replace the primary paper Roller/
feed unit. Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
the wire.
• Paper length sensor 2 -
Feed drive PWB
drive PWB
• Feed clutch 2 - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
7 Checking the paper length Paper size is misdetected If the paper size loaded in the
sensor by paper length sensor. cassette differs from the
paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach
paper length sensor 2 and
8 Checking the conveying The conveying sensor Execute U031 [Cassette2 Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. Feed]. If the conveying sen- nance
sor does not operate prop- Mode List
7-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch Execute U032 [Cassette2]. If Mainte-
clutch does not operate properly. feed clutch 2 does not oper- nance
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0513/J0514: Multi-feeding from cassette

When feeding from the cassette3, 4, PF conveying sensor does not turn off.

tion
sary. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
3 (In case of occurring at the The fan shaped arm shifts Reattach the fan shaped arm
initial setup) Checking the due to run-over of the actu- (302DN0918_). If it is
fan shaped arm ator for paper length sen- deformed, replace it.
sor. Or, if the fan shaped
arm is deformed, the paper
length sensor in the cas-
sette misdetects.
4 Checking the PF retard The paper separation force Clean the PF retard roller sur- Detaching
roller of the PF retard roller is not face. If it is worn down, and reat-
enough. The PF retard replace it. taching the
roller contacts the PF feed PF Retard
roller unevenly. Roller
5 reattaching PF retard The PF retard spring Reattach the PF retard
spring comes off. spring.
7-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking the PF primary The PF primary paper feed Replace the PF primary Detaching
paper feed unit unit is faulty paper feed unit with the one and reat-
in other paper source and taching the
check if it operates properly. PF Pickup
If repaired, replace the PF Roller and
primary paper feed unit. PF Feed
Roller
7 Checking the installation There is no ground Check the continuity between
between the main unit and the main unit and the paper
the paper feeder. feeder, and reconnect the
drawer connector.
the wire.
• PF paper length sensor 1, 2
- PF PWB
• PF conveying sensor 1, 2 -
PF PWB
PWB
9 Checking the PF paper Paper size is misdetected If the paper size loaded in the
length sensor by the PF paper length cassette differs from the
sensor. paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach the
PF paper length sensor 1 or 2
ing sensor not operate correctly. conveying sensor 1 or 2, then
11 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed clutch Execute U247 [2PF] > Mainte-
feed clutch does not operate properly. [Clutch] > [C1 Clutch] or [C2 nance
Clutch]. If PF feed clutch 1 or Mode List
2 does not operate properly,
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
7-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section

The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the duplex section.

tion
2 Checking the paper Paper is curled or waved Correct or replace paper. If it
due to the moisture is difficult to replace, switch
absorption. the leading edge and the trail-
them.
the wire.
drive PWB
drive PWB
• DU clutch 1, 2 - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
4 (When there is no paper The rotation of the registra- Execute U032 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
loop mark while paper is at tion roller does not stop registration clutch does not nance
the registration section) while the registration operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
Checking the registration clutch remains engaged. and reconnect the connector.
clutch If not repaired, replace it.
replace it.
7-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not oper- Execute U032 [DU1] or Mainte-
ate correctly. [DU2]. If DU clutch 1 or 2 nance
replace it.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray

When feeding from MP tray, registration sensor does not turn off.

tion
2 Checking the paper Paper is curled or waved. Correct or replace paper. If it
them.
3 Checking the MP feed The paper fanning is not Clean the MP feed roller and Detaching
roller and the MP friction enough. the MP friction pad, or and reat-
pad replace them. taching the
MP Feed
Roller
the spring operate properly. spring of the MP conveying
sensor. If the do not operate
them.
the wire.
drive PWB
• MP clutch - Feed drive PWB
PWB
7-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
7 Checking the MP clutch The rotation of the MP Execute U032 [MPT Feed]. If Mainte-
feed roller does not stop the MP clutch does not oper- nance
while the MP clutch ate correctly, reattach it and Mode List
remains engaged. reconnect the connector. If
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder

Object: Large capacity feeder
When feeding from large capacity feeder, the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying
sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch is turned on.

1 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the
is bent) Checking paper bent. deck.
them.
is bent) Checking paper paper. eign objects adhere from the
deck
7-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace them.
position.
PF feed roller) Checking crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
paper tion
PF feed roller) Checking used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
8 (When paper stops at the Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the PF Detaching
PF feed roller) Checking ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
the PF feed roller ping. (Rotation is not replace it. taching the
smooth) PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
9 (When paper stops at the The PF feed motor drive is Check if the drive of the PF Detaching
PF feed roller) Checking not transmitted correctly. feed motor is transmitted to and reat-
the drive parts the PF drive unit and, clean taching the
and reattach the drive parts if PF Drive
necessary. If not repaired, Unit
replace the parts.
the spring operate properly. spring of the PF feed sensor.
If they do not operate cor-
rectly due to the deformation,
etc., repair or replace them.
7-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, PF feed
clutch does not operate correctly.)
When feeding from large capacity feeder, the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying
sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch is turned on.

1 (When paper stops at the The PF feed motor drive is Check if the drive of the PF Detaching
PF feed roller) Checking not transmitted correctly. feed motor is transmitted to and reat-
the drive parts the PF drive unit and, clean taching the
and reattach the drive parts if PF Drive
necessary. If not repaired, Unit
replace the parts.
the wire.
• PF horizontal conveying
sensor - PF PWB (Left deck)
• PF vertical conveying sen-
sor - PF PWB (Right deck)
PWB
3 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal convey- Clean and reattach the PF
conveying sensor or the ing sensor or the PF verti- horizontal conveying sensor
PF vertical conveying sen- cal conveying sensor does or the PF vertical conveying
sor not operate correctly. sensor, then reconnect the
replace it.
4 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed clutch Execute U247. If PF feed Mainte-
feed clutch does not operate properly. clutch 1, 2 does not operate nance
properly, reattach it and Mode List
motor not operate correctly. motor does not operate cor- nance
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
7-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0533/J0534: Multi-feeding from the large capacity paper feeder

When feeding from large capacity feeder, they do not turn off even predetermined time has passed since the
PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor turns on.

tion
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the
bent. deck.
paper. eign objects adhere from the
deck
6 Checking the installation The ground between the Check the continuity between
main unit and the large the main unit and the large
capacity paper feeder is capacity paper feeder, and
not secured. reconnect the drawer con-
nector.
the wire.
sor - PF PWB (Right deck)
sensor - PF PWB (Left deck)
PWB
7-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal convey- Clean and reattach the PF
conveying sensor or the ing sensor or the PF verti- horizontal conveying sensor
PF vertical conveying sen- cal conveying sensor does or the PF vertical conveying
sor not operate correctly. sensor, then reconnect the
replace it.
9 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not Reattach the actuators and
the spring operate properly. the springs for the PF hori-
zontal conveying sensor or
the PDF vertical conveying
sensor. If they do not operate
properly due to deformation,
etc., correct or replace them.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0545: No paper feed from the side feeder

Object: Side feeder
The PF feed sensor does not turn on even after the predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch
turns on when feeding from side feeder.

1 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper from the
is bent) Checking paper bent. side feeder.
them.
7-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

is bent) Checking paper paper. eign objects adhere from the
side feeder.
replace them.
position.
6 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance of front Reattach the pressure spring Detaching
Checking the pressure and rear of the PF feed of the PF feed roller. If it is and reat-
spring rollers are not proper. deformed, repair or replace it. taching the
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
PF feed roller) Checking crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
paper tion
PF feed roller) Checking used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
9 (When paper stops at the Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the PF Detaching
PF feed roller) Checking ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
the PF feed roller and the ping. (Rotation is not replace it. And if the foreign taching the
drive gear smooth) objects adhere on the drive PF Pickup
gear, remove them. If it has a Roller and
damage, replace it. PF Feed
Roller
7-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J0545: No paper feed from the side feeder

Object: Side feeder
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, the
conveying clutch does not operate correctly.)
The PF feed sensor does not turn on even after the predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch
turns on when feeding from side feeder.

1 (When paper stops at the The PF feed motor drive is Check if the drive of the PF
feed roller) Checking the not transmitted correctly. feed motor is transmitted to
drive parts the PF drive unit and, clean
replace the parts.
2 Checking the installation There is no ground Check the continuity between
between the main unit and the main unit and the large
the side feeder. capacity paper feeder, and
reconnect the drawer con-
nector.
the wire.
• PF feed sensor - PF PWB
• PF feed clutch - PF PWB
• PF conveying motor - PF
PWB
4 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed sensor Clean and reattach the PF
feed sensor does not operate properly. feed sensor, then reconnect
the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
5 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed clutch Execute U247 [Side Feeder] Mainte-
feed clutch does not operate properly. > [Clutch] > [C1 Clutch]. If the nance
PF feed clutch does not oper- Mode List
ate properly, reattach it and
6 Checking the PF convey- The PF conveying motor Execute U247 [Side Feeder] Mainte-
ing motor does not operate correctly. > [Motor]. If the PF conveying nance
motor does not operate prop- Mode List
erly, reattach it and reconnect
replace it.
7-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J0555: Multi-feeding from the side feeder

Object: Side feeder
The PF feed sensor does not turn off even after the predetermined time has passed since it turns on when
feeding paper from the side feeder.

tion
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with for-
paper. eign objects.
5 Checking the PF retard The PF retard spring Reattach the PF retard
6 Checking the installation There is no ground Install the rail of the side PF-7120
between the main unit and feeder (Bundled items of the Installa-
the side feeder. side feeder) to the main unit. tion Guide
the wire.
• PF feed sensor - PF PWB
• PF feed clutch - PF PWB
8 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed sensor Clean and reattach the PF
feed sensor does not operate properly. feed sensor, then reconnect
replace it.
7-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the PF paper The rotation of the PF feed Execute U247 [Side Feeder] Mainte-
feed clutch roller does not stop while > [Clutch] > [C1 Clutch]. If the nance
the PF feed clutch remains PF feed clutch does not oper- Mode List
engaged. ate properly, reattach it and
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J1403/J1404: Conveying sensor non-arrival jam

The conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

replace them.
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 (When paper is skewed or Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the PF Detaching
conveyed late) Checking ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
Roller
tion
bent. cassette.
them.
cassette.
9 (When paper slips) Check- Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
ing paper used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
J1403/J1404: Conveying sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, conveying
The conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

PF feed roller) Checking not transmitted correctly. feed motor is transmitted to
the drive parts the PF drive unit and, clean
replace the parts.
7-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
drive PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J1413/J1414: Conveying sensor stay jam

The conveying sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.

replace them.
position.
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
5 (When the paper skew The paper is caught with Reattach the conveying
occurs) Checking the con- the conveying guide. guide. If a burr in the convey-
veying guide ing surface of the conveying
guide, remove or replace it.
6 Checking the PF feed Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the PF Detaching
roller and the drive gear ity is decreasing or slip- feed roller. If it is worn out, and reat-
ping. (Rotation is not replace it. And if the foreign taching the
smooth) objects adhere on the drive PF Pickup
Roller
7 Checking the PF cover The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is
closed securely. Replace it if
it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
tion
bent. cassette.
7-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
cassette.
the wire.
drive PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
7-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J1604: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feed paper from the cassette 4.

tion
paper. eign objects adhere in the
cassette.
replace them.
Roller
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper in the
is bent) Checking paper bent. cassette.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
J1604: PF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

tion
paper. eign objects adhere in the
deck.
replace them.
7-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Roller
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
7 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove bent paper in the
is bent) Checking paper bent. deck.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
7-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J1604: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feed paper from the cassette 4.

replace the parts.
the wire.
• PF conveying sensor 1 - PF
PWB
• PF conveying clutch 2 - PF
PWB
ing sensor not operate correctly. conveying sensor 1, then
4 Checking the PF convey- PF conveying clutch does Reattach the PF conveying
ing clutch not operate correctly. clutch 2 and reconnect the
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J1604: PF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

replace the parts.
the wire.
sor - PF PWB
clutch 2 - PF PWB
3 Checking the PF vertical The PF vertical conveying Clean and reattach the PF
conveying sensor sensor does not operate vertical conveying sensor,
correctly. then reconnect the connector.
4 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal convey- Execute U247. If PF horizon- Mainte-
conveying clutch ing clutch does not operate tal conveying clutch 2 does nance
correctly. not operate properly, reattach Mode List
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J1614: PF conveying sensor 1 stay jam

PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn off when feed paper from the cassette 4.

replace them.
Roller
position.
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
6 (When the paper convey- The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is
ing was delayed) Checking closed securely. Replace it if
the PF cover it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
tion
bent.
7-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
12 Checking the PF paper The PF feed sensor is not Reattach the PF feed sensor
feed sensor attached properly. The and reconnect the connector.
connector is not connected If not repaired, replace it.
properly. Or, the wire is
faulty.
the wire.
14 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
est version. to the latest version Update
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J1614: PF vertical conveying sensor stay jam

The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 4.

replace them.
Roller
position.
5 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance of front Reattach the pressure spring
Checking the pressure and rear of the conveying of the conveying related roll-
spring related rollers are not ers. If it is deformed, repair or
proper. replace it.
deformation.
tion
bent.
them.
7-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
the wire.
sor - PF PWB
14 Checking the PF vertical The PF vertical conveying Clean and reattach the PF
conveying sensor sensor does not operate vertical conveying sensor,
correctly. then reconnect the connector.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or
Side feeder
Condition: There is a damage on paper.
The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side feeder.

1 (When there is a catch Paper is caught by foreign If the foreign objects, a burr
mark at the paper leading objects, a hole, a burr, etc. are on the conveying surface
edge or paper is skewed) on the conveying surface of the conveying guide,
Checking paper path of the conveying guide. remove or replace them. If
the sheet guide has a dam-
age, deformation, floating,
repair or replace it.
2 (When paper is bent such The conveying path is If the foreign objects, a burr
as Z-shape) Checking clogged with foreign are on the conveying surface
paper path objects such as a piece of of the conveying guide,
paper, etc.. remove or replace them. If
there is a damage, replace
them.
3 (When paper is skewed or Paper conveying capabil- Clean the surface of the mid-
bent such as Z-shape) ity is decreasing or slip- dle roller. If it is worn out,
Checking the middle roller ping. (Rotation is not replace it. If the foreign
and the drive gear smooth) objects adhere on the drive
gear, remove them. And if it is
damaged, replace it.
position.
proper. replace it.
deformation.
8 (When paper leading edge The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper in the
is bent) Checking paper bent. cassette.
them.
7-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

is bent) Checking paper paper. eign objects adheres in the
cassette.
middle roller and paper crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
leading edge is bent) tion
Reloading paper
middle roller) Checking used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
13 (When paper is bent such The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
as Z-shape and jammed nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
before the registration is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
roller) Checking the con- there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
nection the wire.
drive PWB
PWB
PWB
replace it.
15 Checking the middle clutch When paper stops at the Execute U032 [Middle]. If the Mainte-
middle roller: As the middle middle clutch does not oper- nance
clutch does not turn on, the ate correctly, reattach it and Mode List
middle roller does not reconnect the connector. If
rotate. not repaired, replace it.
When paper become Z-
fold and paper JAM occurs
before the registration
roller: The rotation of the
middle roller does not stop
while the middle clutch
remains engaged.
PWB faulty.
7-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4 ), or
Side feeder
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (The middle roller does not rotate. The
middle clutch does not operate correctly.)
The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side feeder.

1 (When paper stops at the The feed motor drive does Check if the drive of the feed
middle roller) Checking the not transmit to the middle motor is transmitted to the
drive parts roller. feed drive unit and, clean and
reattach the drive parts if nec-
essary. If not repaired,
replace the parts.
2 (When paper JAM occurs The paper is not suffi- Set the paper loop amount at Mainte-
before registration roller) ciently pinched between U051. nance
Setting paper loop the registration rollers. Mode List
the wire.
drive PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
replace it.
5 Checking the middle clutch The middle clutch does not Execute U032 [Middle]. If the Mainte-
operate properly. middle clutch does not oper- nance
7-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4012/J4013/J4014/J4015: Registration sensor stay jam

Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or
Side feeder
The registration sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side feeder.

replace them.
position.
proper. replace it.
5 (When multi-feed occurs) The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
Reloading the paper crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
7-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 (When multi-feed occurs) The paper separation force Clean the feed roller and the Detaching
Checking the paper feed of the retard roller is not retard roller. And replace and reat-
roller and the retard roller enough. The retard roller them. taching the
unevenly. Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
7 Checking the conveying The paper conveying force Clean or replace the convey-
rollers of the conveying rollers is ing related rollers.
insufficient.
bent. cassette.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
cassette.
the wire.
drive PWB
drive PWB
PWB
replace it.
7-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

14 Checking the registration The registration clutch Execute U032 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
clutch does not operate properly. registration clutch does not nance
operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4101/J4102/J4103/J4104/J4105/J4108/J4109: Belt winding sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper JAM on the primary transfer belt. (Paper does not separate from the
belt)
The belt roll-up sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, the side feeder, duplex sec-
tion or the MP tray.

1 Cleaning the discharge Toner, paper dust are stick- Clean the discharge needle Cleaning
needle and separation ing to the discharge needle located at upper section of the Sec-
sheet or separation sheet, and the secondary transfer roller ondary
separation performance is and the separation sheet. Transfer /
decreasing. Separa-
tion Sec-
tion
2 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
4 Checking the connection The connector at the paper Reconnect the connector
conveying unit that con- between the paper conveying
nects to the main unit is unit and the main unit.
not properly connected.
(Loose connection, etc.)
7-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• Belt roll-up sensor - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
6 Checking the belt winding The belt winding sensor Execute U031 [Belt Jam]. If Mainte-
sensor does not operate properly. the belt roll-up sensor does nance
not operate properly, clean Mode List
and reattach it then recon-
7 Execute U108 The separation shift bias Change the setting [On Tim- Mainte-
ON timing of paper leading ing Lead] at U108 [Timing] nance
edge is late. back to the default value. Mode List
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper jam after passing through the secondary transfer roller (Belt
winding sensor does not detect.)

the wire.
drive PWB
PWB
7-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper jam before the secondary transfer roller.

1 (When there is any dam- Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper or the for-
age at paper leading edge) veying guide, piece of eign objects adhere on the
Checking paper path paper, etc.. conveying path, or a burr in
the parts such as the convey-
replace them.
2 (If there is a damage on Paper is caught in clear- Reattach the transfer for-
paper leading edge) Rein- ance of the transfer forwarding guide.
stalling the transfer forwarding guide.
warding guide
3 (When there is a damage Paper is caught in the reg- If the registration guide sheet
in the middle of paper) istration guide sheet. has a damage, deformation,
Checking the registration floating, repair or replace it.
guide sheet
7-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 (If there is a damage in the Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
middle of paper) Replacing ing due to moisture cassette heater. the
paper and install the cas- absorption. optional
sette heater equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
5 Changing the setting The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
6 Setting the paper loop The paper is not suffi- Set the paper loop amount at Mainte-
amount ciently pinched between U051. nance
the registration rollers. Mode List
8 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Close the right cover securely
transfer roller roller does not rotate prop- so that the drive of the pri-
erly. mary transfer belt is transmit-
ted to the secondary transfer
roller. If there is deformation
of the secondary transfer
roller, breakage of the drive
gear, scraping of the bearing
etc., replace it.
9 Checking the drive gear The drive is not transmitted Repair or replace the drive
to the registration roller. gears transmitting the drive of
the feed motor to the registra-
tion roller.
the wire.
drive PWB
PWB
7-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 Checking the registration The registration clutch Execute U032 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
clutch does not operate properly. registration clutch does not nance
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4111/J4112/J4113/J4114/J4115/J4118/J4119: Belt winding sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam before fuser section.
The belt roll-up sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, the side feeder, duplex sec-

1 Performing the prior stan- There is a mechanical Perform the prior standard
dard check items cause such as the dirty check items.
guide, etc.
2 (When the paper leading Paper is caught in the If a piece of paper, the foreign
edge is bent or paper is fuser entrance guide. objects are on the conveying
skewed) Checking the path, or the foreign objects, a
paper path burr are on the conveying
surface of the fuser entrance
guide, remove them. Or,
replace the fuser entrance
guide. If the sheet or the film
is dropped off, repair or
replace them.
4 Checking the fuser roller The fuser roller does not Install the fuser unit so that Detaching
and the drive parts operate correctly. the drive of the fuser motor is and reat-
transmitted to the fuser roller. taching the
If there is a drive gear dam- Fuser Unit
age of the fuser roller, scrap-
ing of the bearing etc.,
replace it.
(belt roll-up sensor) conveying unit that con- between the paper conveying
7-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
drive PWB
PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4201/J4202/J4203/J4204/J4205/J4208/J4209: Fuser sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam at fuser section.
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper is jammed inside the fuser unit when feeding paper from
cassette 1 to 4, the side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.

1 (When the jam occurs The actuator does not Reinstall the actuator and the Detaching
such as an accordion jam) operate properly. spring of the fuser sensor. If it and reat-
Checking the actuator and does not operate correctly taching the
the spring due to the deformation, repair Fuser Unit
or replace them.
2 Checking the fuser exit Paper is caught in the con- If welding of toner, a burr are Detaching
guide veying surface of the fuser on the conveying surface of and reat-
exit guide. the fuser exit guide, remove taching the
or replace them. Fuser Unit
3 Changing the setting The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Replacing paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
7-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

bent.
6 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If it
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
9 Checking the fuser pres- The foreign objects adhere Clean the fuser pressure Detaching
sure roller/fuser belt/fuser on the fuser pressure roller, fuser belt and fuser for- and reat-
forwarding guide roller, fuser belt or fuser warding guide. Or, replace taching the
forwarding guide. the fuser unit. Fuser Unit

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper wraps around the fuser roller when feeding paper from cas-
sette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Adjusting the paper lead- The margin at the paper If each margin is not uneven, Mainte-
ing edge timing leading edge is incorrect. adjust the leading margin in nance
U034. Mode List
3 Replacing paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
bent.
them.
7-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
sure roller and the fuser to the fuser pressure roller roller and the fuser belt. And and reat-
belt or the fuser belt. replace the fuser unit. taching the
Fuser Unit
9 Checking the fuser separa- Toner or etc. adheres to If the toner, etc. are on the Detaching
tion plate the fuser separation plate, fuser separation plate, and reat-
or there is deformation or remove them. If it is taching the
floating. deformed, replace the fuser Fuser Unit
unit.

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper wraps around the fuser roller when feeding paper from cas-

1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
2 (When using the thin Thin paper of 55g or less is Change paper type to [Cus- Cassette /
paper) Checking the image used and the solid image tom 7] at System Menu and MP Tray
of 30mm and more also change paper weight of Settings
appears at the leading [Custom 7] to [light]. Custom (Opera-
edge. 7 thin paper setting: this is tion Guide
the mode to support the fuser - Section
separation failure by decreas- 8)
ing the conveying speed and
the fuser temperature. (After
change setting, [
sure roller and the fuser to the fuser pressure roller roller and the fuser belt. And and reat-
belt or the fuser belt. replace the fuser unit. taching the
Fuser Unit
4 Checking the fuser separa- Toner or etc. adheres to If the toner, etc. are on the Detaching
tion plate the fuser separation plate, fuser separation plate, and reat-
or there is deformation or remove them. If it is taching the
floating. deformed, replace the fuser Fuser Unit
unit.
7-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: Paper jam after passing through the fuser exit roller.
Although the paper jam occurs after passing through the fuser exit roller when feeding paper from cassette 1
to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray, the fuser sensor does not turn on.

1 (When the paper skew The actuator does not Reinstall the actuator and the Detaching
occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. spring of the fuser sensor. If it and reat-
ator and the spring does not operate correctly taching the
due to the deformation, repair Fuser Unit
or replace them.
2 (When paper is skewed) The fuser exit guide is Reattach the fuser exit guide. Detaching
Checking the fuser exit deformed. If there is a warp on the con- and reat-
guide veying surface of the fuser taching the
exit guide, repair or replace it. Fuser Unit
3 (When paper is skewed) The conveying capability Clean the fuser exit roller. If Detaching
Checking the fuser exit of the fuser exit roller is not the surface is worn out, and reat-
roller enough. replace it. taching the
Fuser Unit
bent.
them.
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
9 Checking the connection The drawer connector is Reconnect the drawer con- Detaching
not properly connected. nector between the fuser unit and reat-
and the feed image PWB. taching the
Fuser Unit
7-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• Fuser sensor - Feed image
PWB
PWB
8 Checking the fuser sensor The fuser sensor does not Execute U031 [Fuser Feed]. Mainte-
operate properly. If the fuser sensor does not nance
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/J4215/J4218/J4219: Fuser sensor stay jam

The fuser sensor does not turn off since the paper jam occurs in front of the exit roller when feeding paper
from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
2 Checking the exit guide Paper is caught in the exit If a piece of paper, the foreign
guide, a piece of paper, objects are on the conveying
etc.. path, or a burr in the parts
such as the conveying sur-
face of the exit guide or the
actuator, remove or replace
them.
3 Installing the cassette Due to steam generated Install the cassette heater. Installing
heater from paper, paper sticks to the
the exit guide. optional
equip-
ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the exit guide Toner is welded to the exit Clean the conveying surface Detaching
guide. of the exit guide. and reat-
taching the
Exit Unit
5 Checking the actuator The actuator is not Reattach the actuator for the
attached properly. fuser sensor.
6 Checking the connection The drawer connector is Reconnect the drawer con- Detaching
not properly connected. nector between the fuser unit and reat-
and the feed image PWB. taching the
Fuser Unit
the wire.
PWB
• Fuser motor - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
PWB
8 Checking the exit roller The exit roller or drive Reinstall the exit unit so that Detaching
and the drive parts parts do not operate cor- the drive of the fuser motor is and reat-
rectly. transmitted to the upper and taching the
lower exit roller. If there is a Exit Unit
damage of the upper and
lower exit roller, scraping of
the bearing tec., replace it.
9 reattaching corrugation Corrugation parts do not Reattach the corrugation Detaching
parts operate correctly. parts in the exit unit. (Parts to and reat-
add stiffness to the output taching the
paper) Exit Unit
replace it.
11 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor does not Execute U030 [Fuser]. If the Mainte-
operate properly. fuser motor does not operate nance
7-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 (When the issue occurs The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
when conveying paper to nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the job separator or the is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
duplex section) Checking there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the connection the wire.
• Exit reverse motor - Feed
image PWB
PWB
13 (When the issue occurs The exit reverse motor Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
when conveying paper to does not operate properly. the exit reverse motor does nance
the job separator or the not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
duplex section) Checking tach it and reconnect the con-
the exit reverse motor. nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB

Condition: Paper jam in the exit unit
The fuser sensor does not turn off since the paper jam occurs at the exit section when feeding paper from cas-

1 Checking the paper tray There is an obstacle on the Remove an obstacle.
tray.
2 Checking the paper tray Paper stopper is not Store paper stopper upper
stored. exit tray.
5 Checking the exit guide Foreign objects such as Clean the exit guide, or
toner are on the exit guide. replace the exit unit.
7-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking the exit roller The exit roller does not Replace the exit unit if the Detaching
rotate. drive gear is deformed, the and reat-
torque limiter is faulty, or the taching the
bushing is worn down. Exit Unit
7 (When the sensor does not The fuser unit or the exit Reinstall the fuser unit and Detaching
turn on under the condition unit is not installed prop- the exit unit, and reconnect and reat-
that paper is available) erly. the connector of the exit unit. taching the
reinstalling the fuser unit or Fuser Unit
the exit unit Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Exit Unit
the wire.
PWB
image PWB
PWB
9 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not Reinstall the actuator and the Detaching
the spring operate properly. spring of the fuser sensor. If it and reat-
does not operate correctly taching the
due to the deformation, repair Fuser Unit
or replace them.
replace it.
11 (When the issue occurs The exit reverse motor Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
when conveying paper to does not operate properly. the exit reverse motor does nance
the job separator or the not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
duplex section) Checking tach it and reconnect the con-
the exit reverse motor. nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Condition: Paper jam at the exit section when feeding LetterR or Legal on the
machine with the punch unit installed for the inner finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex
section or the MP tray, the corners of the paper leading edge are caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of
the punch unit and paper jam occurs, and the fuser sensor does not turn on.

1 Reloading the paper The paper is curled Reload paper upside down.
upward. And so, it is easy
to be caught by the PH cut-
ter receiving hole.
2 Relocating the paper width Paper skew occurs since Relocate the paper width
guides there is a gap between the guides so that there is no gap
paper width guides and the between them to the paper
paper edges. edges.
3 Explanation for user The corners of the paper Request user to feed paper
(request to change from leading edge of LetterR as 'Letter' not but 'LetterR'. If
'LetterR' to 'Letter') are close to the PH cutter user accepts, relocate the
receiving holes of the paper width guides to 'Letter'
punch unit. Consequently, position and load the paper.
the corners are caught by Then, explain users who
the holes if each center need to change 'Orientation'
position is not adjusted. in Quick Print on the printer
drive so that the orientation is
rotated to 90 degrees C.
4 Adjusting the center posi- The center positions of the Adjust each center position Adjusting
tions of the punch unit and punch unit and the paper by the following procedures. the center
the paper width guides width guides are mis- (Refer to the reference docu- positions
matched, and so, the cor- ment' for the details.) of the
ners of the paper leading 1. Load paper on the MP tray. punch unit
edge is caught by the PH Then, set the punch holes and the
cutter receiving holes of and execute the test print to paper
the punch unit. align the position of the width
punch unit. guides
2. Feed paper from each
paper source except the MP
tray to check if the forward
and backward punch holes
are not shifted.
3. If the forward and back-
ward punch holes are shifted
aside in above 2, change the
center position of the paper
width guides to adjust. After
changing the center position,
execute U034 [LSU Out Left]
and adjust the center line
except for 'MPT'.
7-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The fuser sensor does not turn off since the paper jam occurs at the exit feed-shift guide when feeding paper
from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.

tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
bent.
them.
5 (When paper stick to the Toner is welded to the exit Clean the conveying surface
exit feed-shift guide and feed-shift guide. of the exit feed-shift guide.
paper JAM occurs) Clean
the exit feed-shift guide
6 (When paper JAM occurs The paper curls. Replace with long grain
in the middle of the exit paper.
feed-shift guide) Replac-
ing paper
7 (When paper JAM occurs Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
in the middle of the exit ing due to moisture cassette heater. the
feed-shift guide) Replac- absorption. optional
ing paper and installing the equip-
cassette heater ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
8 (When the paper jam The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
occurs at the middle of the paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
exit feed-shift guide) type, paper size) do not Settings
Checking paper match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 (When the paper jam Paper is caught in the exit If a piece of paper, the foreign
occurs since paper hits the feed-shift guide, a piece of objects are on the conveying
exit feed-shift guide) paper, etc.. path, or a burr in the parts
Checking paper convey- such as the conveying sur-
ing path face of the exit feed-shift
or replace them.
10 (When the paper jam The exit feed-shift guide Reattach the exit feed-shift
occurs since paper hits the does not operate correctly. guide. Or, reconnect the con-
exit feed-shift guide) nector of the exit unit.
Checking the exit feed-
shift guide
11 (When the paper jam The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Mainte-
occurs since paper hits the operate correctly. Up] or [Branch Eject Down] to nance
exit feed-shift guide) check the exit feed-shift Mode List
Checking the exit solenoid guide operation. If it does not
operate correctly, reattach
the exit upper solenoid or the
exit lower solenoid and
12 (When the paper jam The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
occurs since paper hits the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
exit feed-shift guide) is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
Checking the connection there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the wire.
• Exit upper solenoid / Exit
lower solenoid - Feed image
PWB
PWB
13 (When paper hit the exit The feed image PWB is Replace the feed image
feed-shift guide and paper faulty. PWB.
JAM occurs) Replacing the
feed image PWB
14 (When paper hit the exit The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
feed-shift guide and paper and reat-
JAM occurs) Replacing the taching the
engine PWB Engine
PWB
7-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4301/J4302/J4303/J4304/J4305/J4309: DU sensor 1 non-arrival jam

DU sensor 1 does not turn on after dual reverse operation when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side deck
or the MP tray.

1 (When paper is bent Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper or the for-
before the DU conveying veying guide, piece of eign objects adhere on the
roller) Checking paper path paper, etc.. conveying path, or a burr in
replace them.
2 (When paper is bent The paper curls. Replace with long grain
before the DU conveying paper.
roller) Replacing paper
3 (When paper is bent Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
before the DU conveying ing due to moisture cassette heater. the
roller) Replacing paper absorption. optional
and install the cassette equip-
heater ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
4 (When paper is bent The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
before the DU conveying paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
roller) Changing setting type, paper size) do not Settings
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
bent.
them.
8 Checking the paper con- The roller, the guide, etc. is Clean , repair and reattach
veying parts not attached properly. Or, the conveying parts such as
they are dirty, deformed, the roller, guide, etc. If not
worn out. repaired, replace it.
7-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 (When paper is skewed) Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
Checking paper used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
10 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the reverse Reattach the reverse guide
Checking the reverse guide pulley is not enough. pulley. If the pressing parts
guide pulleys are deformed or damaged,
replace them.
11 (When paper is skewed) Conveying capability of the Clean the DU upper convey-
Checking the DU convey- DU conveying roller is not ing roller. If the surface is
ing roller enough. worn out, replace it.
12 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the DU con- Reattach the DU upper con-
Checking the DU convey- veying pulley is not veying pulley. If the pressing
ing pulleys enough. parts are deformed or dam-
aged, replace them.
13 Checking the connection The exit unit connector or Reconnect the connector of Detaching
the conveying unit connec- the exit unit and the connec- and reat-
tor connecting to the main tor between the conveying taching the
unit is not connected prop- unit and the main unit. Exit Unit
erly. (Pin is disconnected, Detaching
etc.) and reat-
taching the
Right
Cover
Assy
the wire.
• DU sensor 1 - Feed drive
PWB
• DU clutch 1 - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
PWB
• Engine PWB - Main PWB
(In case that the abnormal
image due to the FFC con-
nection failure also appears
at the same timing)
7-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

15 Checking DU sensor 1 The DU sensor 1 does not Execute U031 [DU1]. If DU Mainte-
operate correctly. sensor 1 does not operate nance
properly, clean and reattach it Mode List
16 (When paper jam occurs at The DU conveying roller Repair the drive parts in
the DU conveying roller) does not rotate as the between the feed motor and
Checking the drive parts drive parts are faulty. the DU upper conveying
roller. If they do not operate
correctly due to the damage,
replace them.
17 (When paper jam occurs at The DU conveying roller Execute U032 [DU1]. If DU Mainte-
the DU conveying roller) does not rotate as DU clutch 1 does not operate cor- nance
Checking DU clutch 1 clutch does not operate rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
correctly. nect the connector. If not
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4311/J4312/J4313/J4314/J4315/J4319: DU sensor 1 stay jam

DU sensor 1 does not turn off after dual reverse operation when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side
feeder or the MP tray.

7-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
PWB
PWB
PWB
4 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not oper- Execute U031 [DU1]. If DU Mainte-
ate correctly. sensor 1 does not operate nance
5 Checking the drive parts The DU conveying roller Repair the drive parts in
does not rotate correctly as between the feed motor and
the drive parts are faulty. the DU upper conveying
roller or the DU middle con-
veying roller. If they do not
operate correctly due to the
damage, replace them.
6 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not oper- Execute U032 [DU1]. If DU Mainte-
ate correctly. clutch 1 does not operate cor- nance
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4401/J4402/J4403/J4404/J4405/J4409: DU sensor 2 non-arrival jam

DU sensor 2 does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after DU sensor 1 turns on when feeding
paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder or the MP tray.

7-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 (When paper is bent Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper or the for-
before the DU conveying veying guide, piece of eign objects adhere on the
roller) Checking paper path paper, etc.. conveying path, or a burr in
replace them.
3 (When paper is bent The paper curls. Replace with long grain
before the DU conveying paper.
roller) Replacing paper
4 (When paper is bent Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
before the DU conveying ing due to moisture cassette heater. the
roller) Replacing paper absorption. optional
and install the cassette equip-
heater ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
5 (When paper is bent The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
before the DU conveying paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
roller) Changing setting type, paper size) do not Settings
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
bent.
them.
9 (When paper is skewed) Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
Checking paper used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
7-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

10 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the reverse Reattach the reverse guide
Checking the reverse guide pulley is not enough. pulley. If the pressing parts
guide pulleys are deformed or damaged,
replace them.
11 (When paper is skewed) Conveying capability of the Clean the DU middle/lower
Checking the DU convey- DU conveying roller is not conveying roller. If the press-
ing roller enough. ing parts are deformed or
damaged, replace them.
12 (When paper is skewed) Pressure of the DU con- Clean the DU middle/lower
Checking the DU convey- veying pulley is not conveying pulley. If the press-
ing pulleys enough. ing parts are deformed or
damaged, replace them.
the wire.
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
(In case that the abnormal
image due to the FFC con-
nection failure also appears
at the same timing)
15 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not oper- Execute U031 [DU2]. If DU Mainte-
ate correctly. sensor 2 does not operate nance
16 (When paper jam occurs at The DU conveying roller Repair the drive parts in
the DU conveying roller) does not rotate as the between the feed motor and
Checking the drive parts drive parts are faulty. the DU middle conveying
roller or the DU lower convey-
ing roller. If they do not oper-
ate correctly due to the
damage, replace them.
7-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

17 (When paper jam occurs at The DU conveying roller Execute U032 [DU2]. If DU Mainte-
the DU conveying roller) does not rotate as DU clutch 2 does not operate cor- nance
Checking the DU clutch clutch does not operate rectly, reattach it and recon- Mode List
correctly. nect the connector. If not
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4701/J4702/J4703/J4704/J4705/J4709: Exit reverse sensor non-arrival jam

The exit reverse sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder or the MP tray.

2 (When the paper skew The paper is caught with a If a piece of paper, the foreign
occurs) Checking the piece of paper, etc. objects are on the conveying
paper path path, or a burr in the parts
ator, remove them.
3 (When the paper skew The actuator does not Reattach the actuator and
occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. spring of the exit reverse sen-
ator and the spring sor. If they do not operate
them.
5 (When paper jam occurs in The paper curls. Replace with long grain
the middle of the exit feed- paper.
shift guide) Replacing
paper
7-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 (When paper jam occurs in Paper stiffness is weaken- Replace paper and install the Installing
the middle of the exit feeding due to moisture cassette heater. the
shift guide) Replacing absorption. optional
paper and installing the equip-
cassette heater ment
(Cassette
Heater)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7 (When paper jam occurs in The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
the middle of the exit feed- paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
shift guide) Changing set- type, paper size) do not Settings
ting match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
tions. Specifica-
tions
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
11)
bent.
them.
12 (When the paper jam The exit feed-shift guide Reattach the exit feed-shift Detaching
occurs since the paper hits does not operate correctly. guide and reconnect the con- and reat-
the exit feed-shift guide) nector of the exit unit. taching the
Checking the exit feed- Exit Unit
shift guide
13 (When paper hits the exit Toner or etc. adheres to Clean the exit feed-shift Detaching
feed-shift guide and paper the exit feed-shift guide. guide. If not repaired, replace and reat-
jam occurs) Cleaning the the exit unit. taching the
exit feed-shift guide or Exit Unit
replacing the exit unit.
14 Checking the exit upper The exit upper roller does Replace the exit unit if the Detaching
roller not rotate. drive gear is deformed, the and reat-
7-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

15 Checking the connection The connector of the exit Reconnect the connector of Detaching
unit is not connected prop- the exit unit. and reat-
erly. taching the
Exit Unit
the wire.
• Exit reverse sensor - Feed
image PWB
PWB
image PWB
PWB
17 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse sensor Execute U031 [Exit Paper]. If Mainte-
sensor does not operate properly. the exit reverse sensor does nance
18 Checking the exit solenoid The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Mainte-
operate correctly. Up] or [Branch Eject Down] to nance
check the exit feed-shift Mode List
guide operation. If it does not
19 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
motor does not operate properly. the exit reverse motor does nance
not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
tach it and reconnect the con-
nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4711/J4712/J4713/J4714/J4715/J4719: Exit reverse sensor stay jam

The exit reverse sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder or the MP tray.

ator, remove them.
occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. spring of the exit reverse sen-
ator and the spring sor. If they do not operate
them.
5 Checking the exit feed- Toner or etc. adheres to Clean the exit feed-shift Detaching
shift guide the exit feed-shift guide. guide. Or, replace the exit and reat-
unit. taching the
Exit Unit
6 Checking the exit upper The exit upper roller does Replace the exit unit if the Detaching
roller not rotate. drive gear is deformed, the and reat-
7 reconnecting the connec- The connector of the exit Reconnect the connector of Detaching
tor of the exit unit. unit is not connected prop- the exit unit. and reat-
erly. taching the
Exit Unit
the wire.
• Exit reverse sensor - Feed
image PWB
PWB
image PWB
PWB
7-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse sensor Execute U031 [Exit Paper]. If Mainte-
sensor does not operate properly. the exit reverse sensor does nance
10 Checking the exit solenoid The exit solenoid does not Execute U033 [Branch Eject Mainte-
operate correctly. Up] or [Branch Eject Down] to nance
check the exit feed-shift Mode List
guide operation. If it does not
11 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
motor does not operate properly. the exit reverse motor does nance
replace it.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J4901/J4902/J4903/J4904/J4905/J4908/J4909: BR conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section
or the MP tray.

ator, remove them.
7-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. spring of BR conveying sen-
ator and the spring sor 1. If they do not operate
them.
5 Checking the conveying The foreign objects such Clean or replace the convey-
guide as toner are on the con- ing guide.
veying guide.
6 Checking the paper con- The paper conveying roller Replace the parts if the gear
veying roller does not rotate. is deformed, the torque lim-
iter is faulty, or the bushing is
worn down.
7 Checking BR conveying The BR conveying sensor Execute U031 [Bridge1 Mainte-
sensor 1 1 does not operate cor- Feed]. If BR conveying sen- nance
rectly. sor 1 does not operate prop- Mode List
8 Replacing the BR convey- The BR conveying motor Execute U030 [Bridge]. If the Mainte-
ing motor does not operate correctly. BR conveying motor does not nance
9 reattaching the attach- The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying AK-7100
ment kit between BR PWB and unit. Installa-
feed image PWB is not tion Guide
connected properly.
10 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J4911/J4912/J4913/J4914/J4915/J4918/J4919: BR conveying sensor 1 stay jam

BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section
or the MP tray.

ator, remove them.
them.
veying guide.
worn down.
connected properly.
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J5001/J5002/J5003/J5004/J5005/J5008/J5009: BR conveying sensor 2 non-arrival jam

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section
or the MP tray.

ator, remove them.
them.
veying guide.
worn down.
7-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

9 Reinstalling the bridge unit The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying AK-7100
between BR PWB and unit. Installa-
connected properly.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J5011/J5012/J5013/J5014/J5015/J5018/J5019: BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn off when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side feeder, duplex section
or the MP tray.

ator, remove them.
them.
veying guide.
7-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

worn down.
8 Checking the BR convey- The BR conveying motor Execute U030 [Bridge]. If the Mainte-
connected properly.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J6000/J6001/J6002: DF paper entry failure jam

Object: J6000 (4000-sheet finisher), J6001 (1000-sheet finisher), J6002 (Inner
finisher)
Turning on of the DF paper entry sensor is detected before the paper output from the main unit.

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If a piece of paper, the foreign
piece of paper, etc. objects are on the conveying
path, or a burr in the parts
ator, remove them.
the wire.
• DF entry sensor - DF PWB
7-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the DF paper The DF entry sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
entry sensor not operate correctly. [HP]. If the DF entry sensor nance
clean and reattach it, then
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J6012: Inner DF open jam

Object: Inner finisher
The Inner DF open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF connec- The DF connection sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
tion sensor does not operate properly. [Release]. If the DF connec- nance
tion sensor does not operate Mode List
J6020/J6021: DF front cover open jam

Object: J6020 (4000-sheet finisher), J6021 (1000-sheet finisher)
The DF front cover open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF front The DF front cover is not Check if the DF front cover
cover aligned to the other exte- closes firmly and reattach the
rior covers. DF front cover if necessary. If
the DF front cover is
deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the DF front The DF front cover sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
cover sensor does not operate properly. [Front Cover]. If the DF front nance
cover sensor does not oper- Mode List
7-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6041: DF top cover open jam

Object: 1000-sheet finisher
The DF top cover open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover is not Check if the DF top cover is
aligned to the other exte- closed firmly and reattach the
rior covers. DF top cover if necessary. If
the DF top cover is deformed,
2 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Top Cover]. If the DF top nance
J6050: BF tray open jam

Object: 4000 finisher + holding unit
The BF tray open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray does not oper- Check if the BF tray closes
ate properly. firmly, and reattach the BF
tray if necessary. If the BF
tray is deformed, repair or
replace it.
2 Checking the BF tray sen- The BF tray sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. [Tray]. If the BF tray sensor nance
replace it.
J6060: MT cover open jam

Object: 4000 finisher + mail box
The MT cover open is detected during the paper conveying to the Mail Box.

1 Checking the MT cover The MT cover is not Check if the MT cover is
aligned with the other exte- securely closed, and reat-
rior covers. tach it if necessary. Repair or
7-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the MT cover The MT cover sensor does Execute U241 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
sensor not operate properly. [Cover]. If the MT cover sen- nance
replace it.
J6070: BF unit open jam

The BF unit open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF set sen- The BF set sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. [Set]. If the BF set sensor nance
replace it.
J6080: BF left cover open jam

The BF left cover open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover is not Check if the BF left cover
sensor aligned with the other exte- turns on the BF left cover
rior covers. sensor firmly. If the BF left
cover is deformed, repair or
replace it.
2 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover sensor Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Left Guide]. If the BF left nance
J6100/J6101/J6102: DF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

finisher)
J6100/6101: DF conveying sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after BR conveying
sensor 2 turned on.
7-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6102: DF conveying sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after fuser sensor located
at the main unit turned on.

the wire.
• DF entry motor - DF PWB
replace it.
4 Checking the DF paper The DF entry motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
entry motor not operate correctly. [Feed In]. If the DF entry nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J6110/J6111/J6112: DF paper entry sensor stay jam

finisher)
The DF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

the wire.
7-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J6200: DF sub exit sensor non-arrival jam

The DF sub exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor
turned on.

1 (When printing the banner) The custom size paper of Set the following at the printer Printer
Checking the paper length 470.1mm (18.5inch) or driver properties. Driver
more length is fed. • Media Type: Plain Operation
• Source: MP tray Guide
the wire.
• DF sub exit sensor - DF
PWB
• DF feed-shift solenoid 3 -
DF PWB
• DF exit motor - DF PWB
7-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the DF sub exit The DF sub exit sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Sub Tray Eject]. If the DF nance
sub exit sensor does not Mode List
5 Checking DF feed-shift The DF feed-shift solenoid Execute U240 [Solenoid] > Mainte-
solenoid 3 3 does not operate cor- [Booklet]. If DF feed-shift nance
rectly. solenoid 3 does not operate Mode List
replace it.
7 Checking the DF exit The DF exit motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Eject]. If the DF exit motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J6210: DF sub exit sensor stay jam

The DF sub exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since the DF sub exit sensor turned
on.

7-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• DF sub exit sensor - DF
PWB
DF PWB
3 Checking the DF sub exit The DF sub exit sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Sub Tray Eject]. If the DF nance
sub exit sensor does not Mode List
replace it.
replace it.
7 Checking the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6300/J6301: DF middle sensor non-arrival jam

The DF middle sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor turned
on.

1 Checking the mechanical The roller, the guide, etc. is Perform the prior standard
factor not attached properly. Or, check items.
they are dirty, deformed,
worn out.
the wire.
• DF middle sensor - DF PWB
DF PWB
• DF middle motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Middle Tray Eject]. If the DF nance
middle sensor does not oper- Mode List
replace it.
6 Checking the DF middle The DF middle motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > [Mid- Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. dle]. If the DF middle motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6310/J6311: DF middle sensor stay jam

The DF middle sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

the wire.
• DF exit clutch - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF exit The DF exit clutch does Reattach the DF exit clutch
clutch not operate correctly. and reconnect the connector.
replace it.
6 Checking the DF middle The DF middle motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > [Mid- Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. dle]. If the DF middle motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6400/J6401/J6402: DF exit sensor non-arrival jam

finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn on even specific time has passed after DF middle sensor turned on.

the wire.
• DF exit sensor - DF PWB
• DF tray motor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF exit sen- The DF exit sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. [Middle Tray]. If the DF exit nance
sensor does not operate Mode List
replace it.
6 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Tray]. If the DF tray motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6410/J6411/J6412: DF exit sensor stay jam

finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn on even specific time has passed after DF exit sensor turned on.

the wire.
replace it.
replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the DP firmware to Firmware
est version. the latest version. Update
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6500: DF exit sensor non-arrival jam when exiting paper stack

When making bundled output, DF exit sensor does not turn on even predetermined time has passed after DF
middle sensor turned on.

the wire.
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6510/J6511/J6512: DF exit sensor stay jam when exiting paper stack

finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn off after the bundle exit started.

the wire.
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6600: DF drum sensor non-arrival jam

The DF drum sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor turned
on.

the wire.
• DF drum sensor - DF PWB
DF PWB
• DF drum motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF drum The DF drum sensor does Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor not operate correctly. [Drum]. If the DF drum sensor nance
replace it.
solenoid 1 1 does not operate cor- [Sub Tray]. If DF feed-shift nance
5 Checking the DF drum The DF drum motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Eject Conv]. If the DF drum nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6610: DF drum sensor stay jam

The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

the wire.
DF PWB
• DF drum motor - DF PWB
replace it.
solenoid 1 1 does not operate cor- [Sub Tray]. If DF feed-shift nance
5 Checking the DF drum The DF drum motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Eject Conv]. If the DF drum nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6710: DF drum sensor stay jam during paper conveying into the BF unit
The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on when conveying the
paper to the folding unit.

the wire.
• DF relief drum motor - DF
PWB
• BF entry motor - BF PWB
• DF PWB - BF PWB
replace it.
4 Checking the DF retraction The DF relief drum motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
drum motor does not operate correctly. [Save]. If the DF relief drum nance
replace it.
5 Checking the BF paper The BF entry motor does Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
entry motor not operate correctly. [Feed In]. If the BF entry nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7 Replacing the BF PWB The BF PWB is faulty. Replace the BF PWB.
7-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6810/J6811/J6812: Front DF side registration jam

finisher)
DF side registration sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the specific time since DF side registration motor
1 turned on during the standby operation.

1 Checking the front DF The front DF adjusting Check if the DF front adjust-
adjusting plate plate is not properly ing plate shifts manually.
attached, or it is dirty, Clean and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not shift smoothly. Then,
replace it if it is not fixed.
the wire.
• DF side registration sensor
1 - DF PWB
• DF side registration motor 1
- DF PWB
3 Checking DF side registra- The DF side registration Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
tion sensor 1 sensor 1 does not operate [Width Front HP]. If the DF nance
correctly. side registration sensor 1 Mode List
does not operate properly,
replace it.
4 Checking DF side registra- The DF side registration Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tion motor 1 motor 1 does not operate [Width Test]. If DF side regis- nance
correctly. tration motor 1 does not oper- Mode List
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J6910/J6911/J6912: Rear DF side registration jam

finisher)
DF side registration sensor 2 does not turn off after passing the specific time since DF side registration motor
2 turned on during the standby operation.

1 Checking the rear DF The rear DF adjusting Check if the DF rear adjusting
adjusting plate plate is not properly plate shifts manually. Clean
attached, or it is dirty, and reattach it if it does not
deformed, or worn down. shift smoothly. Then, replace
it if it is not fixed.
the wire.
2 - DF PWB
- DF PWB
3 Checking DF side registra- The DF side registration Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
tion sensor 2 sensor 2 does not operate [Width Tail HP]. If the DF side nance
correctly. registration sensor 2 does not Mode List
4 Checking DF side registra- The DF side registration Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tion motor 2 motor 2 does not operate [Width Test]. If DF side regis- nance
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7000/J7001/J7002: DF staple jam

finisher)
The DF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the DF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up
was detected during the DF staple motor operation.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF reg- Check if the lower BF regis- Staple
istration guide shifts manu- tration guide shifts manually, Jam Clear
ally, and reattach it if it and reattach it if it does not (Opera-
does not smoothly shift. smoothly shift. tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the drive parts The DF staple motor does Check if the DF staple motor Detaching
not rotate due to the rotates manually. Replace the and reat-
excessive load. DF staple unit if it does not taching the
rotate smoothly due to the DF Staple
damaged gear, etc. Unit
the wire.
• DF staple unit - DF staple
relay PWB
• DF staple relay PWB - DF
PWB
4 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
unit and reat-
taching the
DF Staple
Unit
5 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple relay PWB Replace the DF staple relay
relay PWB is faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7100: BF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

The BF paper entry sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the BF vertical conveying
sensor turned on.

the wire.
• BF entry sensor - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF paper The BF entry sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
entry sensor not operate correctly. [HP]. If the BF entry sensor nance
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7110: BF paper entry sensor stay jam

The BF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since the BF vertical conveying
sensor turned on.

7-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• BF entry sensor - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF paper The BF entry sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
entry sensor not operate correctly. [HP]. If the BF entry sensor nance
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7200: BF exit sensor non-arrival jam

The BF exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the center fold operation started.

the wire.
• BF exit sensor - BF PWB
• BF blade motor - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
7-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the BF exit sen- The BF exit sensor does Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. [Eject]. If the BF exit sensor nance
replace it.
4 Checking the BF blade The BF blade motor does Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Blade]. If the BF blade motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7210: BF exit sensor stay jam

The BF exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on during the center fold
operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray is not properly Remove the paper and reat-
attached. tach the BF tray.
the wire.
• BF PWB - DF PWB
replace it.
7-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7300: BF exit sensor non-arrival jam at tri-folding

The BF exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since starting the tri-fold operation.

the wire.
• BF feed-shift solenoid - BF
PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
replace it.
4 Checking the BF feed-shift The BF feed-shift solenoid Execute U240 [Solenoid] > Mainte-
solenoid does not operate correctly. [Three Fold]. If the BF feed- nance
shift solenoid does not oper- Mode List
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J7310: BF exit sensor stay jam at tri-folding

The BF exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on during the tri-fold opera-
tion.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray is not properly Remove the paper and reat-
attached. tach the BF tray.
the wire.
• BF PWB - DF PWB
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7400: Upper BF side registration jam

BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the upper BF side registra-
tion guide shifted toward the sensor.

1 Checking the upper BF The upper BF side regis- Check if the upper BF side
side registration guide tration guide is not properly registration guide shifts man-
attached, or it is dirty, ually, and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not smoothly shift.
7-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• BF side registration sensor
2 - BF PWB
• BF side registration motor 2
- BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking BF side registra- The BF side registration Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
tion sensor 2 sensor 2 does not operate [Width Down HP]. If the BF nance
correctly. side registration sensor 2 Mode List
replace it.
tion motor 2 motor 2 does not operate [Width Test]. If BF side regis- nance
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7500: Lower BF side registration jam

BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the lower BF side registra-
tion guide shifted toward the sensor.

1 Checking the lower BF The lower BF side registra- Check if the lower BF side
side registration guide tion guide is not properly registration guide shifts man-
attached, or it is dirty, ually, and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not smoothly shift.
7-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
1 - BF PWB
- BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
tion sensor 1 sensor 1 does not operate [Width Up HP]. If the BF side nance
correctly. registration sensor 1 does not Mode List
tion motor 1 motor 1 does not operate [Width Test]. If BF side regis- nance
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7600: BF staple jam

The BF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the BF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up
was detected during the BF staple motor operation.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF reg- Check if the lower BF regis- Staple
istration guide shifts manu- tration guide shifts manually, Jam Clear
ally, and reattach it if it and reattach it if it does not (Opera-
does not smoothly shift. smoothly shift. tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the BF staple The BF staple motor does Check if the BF staple motor
unit not rotate due to the rotates manually. Replace the
excessive load. BF staple unit if it does not
rotate smoothly due to the
damaged gear, etc.
7-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• BF staple unit (BF staple
motor) - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple unit is faulty. Replace the BF staple unit.
unit
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7700: BF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the paper output sig-
nal from the main unit was received.

the wire.
• BF vertical conveying sen-
sor - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
conveying sensor sensor does not operate [Vertical Feed]. If the BF verti- nance
correctly. cal conveying sensor does Mode List
not operate properly, reattach
4 Checking the drive parts The BF paper entry motor Check if the BF entry motor
drive parts are faulty. rotates by manually and if it
does not rotate smoothly due
to the damage of the gear,
etc., replace the drive parts of
the BF entry motor.
7-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7710: BF vertical conveying sensor stay jam

The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since it turned on.

the wire.
• BF vertical conveying sen-
sor - BF PWB
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
conveying sensor sensor does not operate [Vertical Feed]. If the BF verti- nance
correctly. cal conveying sensor does Mode List
not operate properly, reattach
4 Checking the drive parts The BF paper entry motor Check if the BF entry motor
drive parts are faulty. rotates by manually and if it
does not rotate smoothly due
to the damage of the gear,
etc., replace the drive parts of
the BF entry motor.
7-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7800: Mail Box exit non-arrival jam

MT tray exit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the paper is output from the main
unit.

1 Checking the belt and the The belt and surrounding Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
neighboring parts parts are not attached [Conv] to check the operation nance
properly. Or, they are dirty, of the belt. If the belt does not Mode List
deformed or worn out. operate correctly, repair the
belt and the neighboring parts
(feed-shift claw lever, guide,
etc.). If not repaired, replace
the part.
the wire.
• MT tray exit sensor 1, 2 -
MT PWB
• MT home position sensor -
MT PWB
• MT conveying motor - MT
PWB
• MT PWB - DF PWB
3 Checking the MT tray exit MT tray exit sensor 1 or 2 Execute U241 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly. [Eject]. If MT tray exit sensor nance
1 or 2 does not operate prop- Mode List
replace it.
7-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the MT home The belt holding plate does Execute U241 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
position sensor not operate properly since [Motor HP]. If the MT home nance
the MB home position sen- position sensor does not Mode List
sor is not properly con- operate properly, reattach it
nected or not attached. and reconnect the connector.
5 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying motor Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
ing motor does not operate properly. [Conv]. If the MT conveying nance
replace it.
6 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7810: Mail Box exit stay jam

The MT tray exit sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

1 Checking the belt and the The belt and surrounding Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
neighboring parts parts are not attached [Conv] to check the operation nance
properly. Or, they are dirty, of the belt. If the belt does not Mode List
deformed or worn out. operate correctly, repair the
belt and the neighboring parts
(feed-shift claw lever, guide,
etc.). If not repaired, replace
the part.
2 Checking the MT tray The MT tray is not properly Reattach the MT tray.
attached.
the wire.
• MT tray exit sensor 1, 2 -
MT PWB
PWB
• MT PWB - DF PWB
7-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the MT tray exit MT tray exit sensor 1 or 2 Execute U241 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
sensor 1 or 2 does not operate properly. [Eject]. If MT tray exit sensor nance
1 or 2 does not operate prop- Mode List
replace it.
5 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying motor Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
ing motor does not operate properly. [Conv]. If the MT conveying nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J7900/J7901/J7902: DF paddle jam

finisher).
Turning on of the DF paddle sensor is not detected after passing 1s since the DF paddle motor activated.

1 Removing the paper The paper is jammed in Remove the jammed paper
the DF paddle. from the DF paddle.
2 Checking the drive parts The DF paddle does not Check if the DF paddle motor
rotate due to the excessive rotates by manually and if it
load. does not rotate smoothly due
to the damage of the drive
parts, replace it.
the wire.
• DP paddle sensor - DP
PWB
• DP paddle motor - DP PWB
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. [Lead Paddle]. If the DF pad- nance
dle sensor does not operate Mode List
7-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle motor does Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. [Beat]. If the DF paddle motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9000: No original feed from the DP

Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP
The DP feed sensor does not turn on after the paper feed was retried.

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is folded.
2 Checking the original The original curls down- Correct or replace the origi-
ward or waves. nal. If it is difficult to replace,
switch the front end and the
rear end of the original, and
reset.
3 Checking the original The original out of specifi- Explain users to use the origi-
cation is used. nal within the specifications.
4 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on Remove the original with the
the original. foreign objects.
5 Checking the paper path The original is caught up If a piece of paper, the foreign
by a piece of paper. objects are on the conveying
ator, remove them.
6 Checking the DP feed The paper conveying force Clean the DP feed roller sur-
roller of the DP feed roller is face. If worn down, replace it.
insufficient.
7 Replacing the DP front The film of the DP front Replace the DP front separa-
separation pad assy separation pad assy is tion pad assy (including the
peeling off. film).
the spring operate properly. spring of the DP feed sensor.
If it does not operate correctly
due to the deformation, etc.,
repair or replace them.
7-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

for the mechanically nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
reversed DP with the DP is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
feed roller there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the wire.
• DP feed sensor - DP PWB
• DP feed clutch - DP PWB
• DP conveying motor - DP
PWB
for the dual scan DP or the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
mechanically reversed DP is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
with the DP feed belt there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the wire.
• DP feed motor - DP PWB
11 Checking the DP feed sen- The DP feed sensor does Execute U244 [Feed]. If the Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. DP feed sensor does not nance
12 Checking the DP feed The DP feed clutch does Execute U243 [Feed Clutch]. Mainte-
clutch for the mechanically not operate correctly. If the DP feed clutch does not nance
reversed DP with the DP operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
feed roller and reconnect the connector.
13 Checking the DP convey- The DP conveying motor Execute U243 [Conv Motor]. Mainte-
ing motor for the mechani- does not operate correctly. If the DP conveying motor nance
cally reversed DP with the does not operate correctly, Mode List
DP feed roller reattach it and reconnect the
replace it.
14 Checking the DP feed The DP feed motor does Execute U243 [Feed Motor]. Mainte-
motor (For the dual scan not operate correctly. If the DP feed motor does not nance
DP and the mechanically operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
reversed DP with the DP and reconnect the connector.
feed belt)) If not repaired, replace it.
15 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9001: DP small size original jam

1. DP timing sensor turned off immediately after DP timing sensor turns ON.
2. When secondary feed starts, DP feed sensor or DP registration sensor is OFF.
3. When DP timing sensor is ON, DP feed sensor or DP registration sensor is OFF.
4. When DP registration sensor is OFF, the original at secondary feed section does not reach to DP timing
sensor.

cation is fed. nal within the specifications.
2 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not Remove the sponge for the
the spring operate properly. sound cut of the actuator
operation (for the DP regis-
tration sensor). And if the
actuators or the springs are
deformed, etc. that they do
not operate correctly, replace
them.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
J9002: Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying

Remarks: When detecting the DP feed-shift motor error (C9180) (up to 2 times),
display J9002. (Mechanically reversed DP only)
The unspecific conveying sensor turns on when starting the paper conveying.

1 Specifying the sensor (Specify the sensor which Specify the sensor that dis- Mainte-
is turned on) plays ON at U244. (Go to the nance
next step.) Mode List
2 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If a piece of paper, the foreign
remaining on paper con- objects are on the conveying
veying route to turn on the path, or a burr in the parts
sensor. such as the guide or the actu-
ator, remove them.
7-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not oper- Clean and reattach the sen- Mainte-
ate correctly. sor specified at U244, and nance
reconnect the connector. If Mode List
the wire.
• Faulty sensor defined at
U244 - DP PWB
J9004: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing

Object: Mechanically reversed DP
The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation
started.

ator, remove them.
2 (If the thin original with low The gap at the time of sep- Replace the release lever in
stiffness is used) Replac- aration of the DP reversing order to widen the gap at the
ing the release lever. roller is narrow, and the time of DP reverse roller sep-
second original (first side) aration. (LEVER DU PRESS:
can't enter between the DP 303R70730_, the last digit 1
reversing rollers when or newer).
reversing the first original
3 (When the original is The paper conveying per- Clean the DP conveying
skewed) Checking the DP formance of the DP con- roller surface. If worn down,
conveying roller veying roller is insufficient. replace it.
4 (When the original is The location of the original Align the original width
skewed) Relocating the width guides and the origi- guides to the original size.
original width guides nal size are mismatched.
5 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP feed-shift
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feed-shift guide. guide. If there is a burr on the
feed-shift guide conveying surface of the DP
branch guide, remove or
replace it.
7-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 (When the original is The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
skewed) Checking the nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the wire.
• DP feed-shift motor - DP
PWB
7 (When the original is The DP feed-shift guide Execute U243 [Rev Motor]. If Mainte-
skewed) Checking the DP does not switch as the DP the DP feed-shift motor does nance
feed-shift motor for the feed-shift motor does not not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
mechanically reversed DP operate correctly. tach it and reconnect the con-
with the DP feed roller nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
8 (When the original is The DP feed-shift guide Reattach the DP feed-shift
skewed) Checking the DP does not switch as the DP motor and reconnect the con-
feed-shift motor for the feed-shift motor does not nector. If not repaired,
mechanically reversed DP operate correctly. replace it.
with the DP feed belt
9 (When the original convey- The paper conveying force Clean the DP reverse roller
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller is surface. If worn down,
DP reverse roller insufficient. replace it.
original is folded.
reset.
the wire.
• DP registration sensor - DP
PWB
PWB (DP feed roller type)•
DP reverse motor - DP PWB
(DP feed belt type)
7-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

15 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration sensor Execute U244 [Regist]. If the Mainte-
tion sensor does not operate correctly. DP registration sensor does nance
not operate correctly, clean Mode List
and reattach it, then recon-
ing motor for the mechani- does not operate correctly. If the DP conveying motor nance
cally reversed DP with the does not operate correctly, Mode List
DP feed roller reattach it and reconnect the
replace it.
17 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse motor Execute U243 [Eject Motor]. Mainte-
motor for the mechanically does not operate correctly. If the DP reverse motor does nance
reversed DP with the DP not operate correctly, reat- Mode List
feed belt tach it and reconnect the con-
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9005: No original feed from the DP

Object: Dual scan DP and the mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
The DP lift upper limit sensor does not turn on even the specific pulse has passed when the DP lift plate rise
up.

1 (When the DP lift plate The DP lift plate is not Reattach the DP lift plate. If
does not lift up) Checking attached properly, or the the fulcrum shaft is broken,
the DP lift plate fulcrum shaft of the DP lift replace the DP lift plate.
plate is damaged.
2 (When the DP lift plate The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
does not rise up) Checking nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the connection is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
the wire.
• DP lift motor - DP PWB
• DP original sensor - DP
PWB
3 (When the DP lift plate The DF lift motor does not Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If Mainte-
does not rise up) Checking operate properly. the DP lift motor does not nance
the DP rise motor operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
7-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 (When the DP lift plate The DP original sensor Execute U244 [Set]. If the DP Mainte-
does not rise up) Checking does not operate correctly. original sensor does not nance
the DP original sensor operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
5 Checking the original The original is not set Insert the original all the way
properly. and align the original width
guides to the original.
original is folded.
reset.
9 Checking the actuator The actuator does not Depending on the original, if
operate properly. the actuator of the DP lift
upper sensor does not turn
on, reattach the actuator.
the wire.
• DP lift upper limit sensor -
DP PWB
11 Checking the DP lift upper The DP lift upper limit sen- Execute U244 [Lift U-Limit]. If Mainte-
limit sensor sor does not operate cor- the DP lift upper limit sensor nance
rectly. does not operate correctly, Mode List
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-269
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9006: DP exit sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing

Object: Mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
The DP exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation started.

1 (When the original leading The original is caught by If a piece of paper, the foreign
end has any damage) the conveying guide or a objects are on the conveying
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. path, or a burr in the parts
ator, remove them. If the rib
of the guide is damaged,
replace it.
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feed-shift guide. guide. If the burrs are on the
feed-shift guide original conveying side of the
DP feed-shift guide, remove
them or replace the guide.
5 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor Reattach the DP feed-shift
motor does not operate correctly. motor and reconnect the con-
nector.
6 (When the original convey- The conveying capability Clean the DP reverse roller or
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller or the surface of the DP feed-
DP reverse roller and the the DP feed-shift roller is shift roller. If they are worn
DP feed-shift roller not enough. out, replace them.
original is folded.
reset.
7-270
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• DP exit sensor - DP PWB
• DP reverse motor - DP
PWB
11 Checking the DP exit sen- The DP exit sensor does Execute U244 [Eject]. If the Mainte-
sor not operate correctly. DP exit sensor does not oper- nance
motor does not operate correctly. If the DP reverse motor does nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9007: DP exit sensor stay jam during the original reversing

The DP exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation started.

ator, remove them.
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feed-shift guide. guide. If the burrs are on the
feed-shift guide original conveying side of the
DP feed-shift guide, remove
them or replace the guide.
7-271
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor Reattach the DP feed-shift
motor does not operate correctly. motor and reconnect the con-
nector.
6 (When the original convey- The conveying capability Clean the DP reverse roller or
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller or the surface of the DP feed-
DP reverse roller and the the DP feed-shift roller is shift roller. If they are worn
DP feed-shift roller not enough. out, replace them.
original is folded.
reset.
the wire.
• DP reverse motor - DP
PWB
motor does not operate correctly. If the DP reverse motor does nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-272
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9008: No original feed from the DP (Original is B6 size or smaller)

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the original feeding
started.

ator, remove them.
2 (When the original is The paper conveying per- Clean the DP feed belt sur-
skewed) Checking the DP formance of the DP feed face. If worn down, replace it.
feed belt belt is not enough.
3 Checking the original The original is not set Insert the original all the way
properly. and align the original width
guides to the original.
original is folded.
reset.
the wire.
• DP backside timing sensor -
DP PWB
• DP feed motor - DP PWB
8 Checking the DP backside The DP backside timing Execute U244 [CIS Head]. If Mainte-
timing sensor sensor does not operate the DP backside timing sen- nance
correctly. sor does not operate cor- Mode List
rectly, reattach it and
9 Checking the DP feed The DP feed motor does Execute U243 [Feed Motor]. Mainte-
motor not operate correctly. If the DP feed motor does not nance
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-273
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9009: DP original jam caused by the image scanning

The next original is in standby of the secondary paper feed during the image scanning.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove the originals and
activate properly. check the sensors. Then, turn
the power switch and the
switch on.
3 Checking the DP relay The image data transmis- Reconnect the DP relay
cable sion processing failed due cable.
to the DP relay cable con-
nection failure.
4 Executing [Memory Diag- The memory in the main Execute [Memory Diagnos- Adjust-
nostics] PWB is faulty. tics] at [Adjustment/Mainte- ment/
nance] in the System Menu. Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
J9010: Document processor open detection

The document processor open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP The document processor Check if the document pro-
is not properly installed, or cessor is securely closed,
it is faulty. and reinstall it if necessary.
Fix or replace the DP covers
if it is deformed.
the wire.
• DP opening/closing sensor -
DP PWB
7-274
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the Mainte-
closing sensor sensor does not operate DP opening/closing sensor nance
properly. does not operate correctly, Mode List
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9011: DP top cover open detection

The DP top cover open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover is faulty. Check if the DP top cover is
securely closed, and reat-
tach it if necessary. Fix or
the wire.
• DP top cover sensor - DP
PWB
3 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover sensor Execute U244 [Cover Open]. Mainte-
sensor does not operate correctly. If the DP top cover sensor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam

The DP feed sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.

original is folded.
7-275
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

reset.
5 (Except for the dual scan The paper separation force Clean the DP reverse roller
DP) Checking the DP of the DP reverse roller is surface. If worn down,
reverse roller insufficient. replace it.
6 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse cover Reattach the DP reverse
cover comes off. cover.
7 (When the original is Conveying capability of the Clean the DP feed roller or Detaching
skewed) Checking the DP DP feed roller or DP feed the surface of the DP feed and reat-
feed roller or the DP feed belt is not enough. belt. If they are worn out, taching the
belt replace them. DP Pickup
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
9 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP feed guide.
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feed guide. If the burrs are on the original
feed belt conveying side of the DP
feed guide, remove them or
replace the DP feed guide.
the wire.
for the mechanically nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
reversed DP with the DP is faulty. reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
feed roller there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the wire.
• DP feed clutch - DP PWB
12 Checking the DP feed sen- The DP feed sensor is Clean and reattach the DP
sor dirty, is not properly feed sensor, then reconnect
attached, is not properly the connector. If not repaired,
connected, or it is faulty. replace it.
7-276
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

13 Checking the DP feed The rotation of the DP feed Execute U243 [Feed Clutch]. Mainte-
clutch for the mechanically roller does not stop while If the DP feed clutch does not nance
reversed DP with the DP the DP feed clutch remains operate correctly, reattach it Mode List
feed roller engaged. and reconnect the connector.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9200: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Mechanically reversed DP
The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned
on.

ator, remove them.
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
4 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP conveying
skewed) Checking the DP the DP conveying guide. guide. If there is a burr on the
conveying guide conveying surface of the DP
conveying guide, remove or
replace it.
5 (When the original convey- The paper conveying per- Clean the DP conveying
ing delays) Checking the formance of the DP con- roller surface. If worn down,
DP conveying roller veying roller is insufficient. replace it.
6 (When the original convey- The DP top cover is Check if the DP top cover is
ing delays) Checking the deformed. securely closed. If it cannot
DP top cover be closed due to the defor-
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
7-277
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

switch the leading edge and
the trailing edge of paper, and
reset. Or, when scanning
duplex, flip paper upside
down and reset them.
the wire.
PWB
PWB
replace it.
ing motor does not operate correctly. If the DP conveying motor nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
7-278
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J9210: DP registration sensor stay jam

The DP registration sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned
on.

ator, remove them.
replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
7-279
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
PWB
PWB
replace it.
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9300: DPCIS non-arrival jam

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor
turned on.

ator, remove them.
7-280
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
the wire.
DP PWB
PWB
replace it.
7-281
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9310: DP backside timing sensor stay jam

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor
turned off.

ator, remove them.
replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
7-282
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
DP PWB
PWB
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9400: DP timing sensor non-arrival jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP
registration sensor turned on.

ator, remove them.
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
7-283
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
the wire.
• DP timing sensor - DP PWB
PWB
12 Checking the DP timing DP timing sensor does not Execute U244 [Timing]. If the Mainte-
sensor operate correctly. DP timing sensor does not nance
replace it.
7-284
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9410: DP timing sensor stay jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP
registration sensor turned off.

ator, remove them.
Roller and
DP Feed
Roller
replace it.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
7-285
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• DP timing sensor - DP PWB
PWB
13 Checking the DP timing DP timing sensor does not Execute U244 [Timing]. If the Mainte-
sensor operate correctly. DP timing sensor does not nance
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9600: DP exit sensor non-arrival jam

The DP exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.

ator, remove them.
7-286
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
4 (When the original convey- The height of the DP Adjust the height of the DP
ing delays in the dual scan hinges is improper. hinges.
DP) Adjusting the height of
the DP hinges
5 (When the original convey- The opening/closing oper- Check if the document pro-
ing delays) Checking the ation of the document processor is securely closed. If it
opening/closing motion of cessor is faulty. cannot be closed due to the
the document processor DP frame deformation,
replace the document pro-
cessor.
original is folded.
the wire.
PWB
7-287
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
J9610: DP exit sensor stay jam

The DP exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned off.

ator, remove them.
replace it.
3 (When the original convey- The paper conveying force Clean the DP exit roller sur-
ing delays) Checking the of the DP exit roller is face. If worn down, replace it.
DP exit roller insufficient.
4 (When the original convey- The height of the DP Adjust the height of the DP
ing delays in the dual scan hinges is improper. hinges.
DP) Adjusting the height of
the DP hinges
5 (When the original convey- The opening/closing oper- Check if the document pro-
ing delays) Checking the ation of the document processor is securely closed. If it
opening/closing motion of cessor is faulty. cannot be closed due to the
the document processor DP frame deformation,
replace the document pro-
cessor.
original is folded.
7-288
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
PWB
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures
No. Contents Condition

(1) Paper creases (Fuser factor)
(2) Paper creases (Registration or Transfer
factor)
7-289
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(3) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size When feeding LetterR or Legal size paper from
paper in the main unit with the punch unit cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder),
for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the cor- duplex section or the MP tray, the corners of
ners of the paper leading edge being paper leading edge is caught by the PH cutter
caught by the PH cutter receiving holes receiving holes of the punch unit and the dog-ear
occurs
(4) Dog-ear When feeding from the large capacity feeder, the
dog-ear occurs at the primary feeding due to the
downward curl of paper.
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures
(4-1) Paper creases (Fuser factor)

Condition: The image is printed on the crease section. (Fuser factor)

1 Checking the paper Paper is curled caused by Flip paper upside down and
the moisture absorption. reset. Or, replace with new
Or, paper leading edge is paper which is unopened
waving. paper.
2 Clean the rear transfer The surrounding area of Clean the rear transfer guide, Cleaning
guide and the discharge the rear transfer guide is the discharge needle, the dis- the Sec-
needle dirty with the toner, paper charge sheet and paper con- ondary
dust, etc.. veying path. Transfer /
Separa-
tion Sec-
tion
3 (When the paper is Paper is caught in the rear If a piece of paper, the foreign
skewed) Checking the rear transfer guide, discharge objects are on the conveying
transfer guide and the dis- needle, a piece of paper, path, or the foreign objects, a
charge needle. etc.. burr are on the rear transfer
guide, the discharge needle,
remove or replace them. If
the guide materials are
dropped off, repair or replace
them.
4 (When the paper creases Under the condition of con- Clean the fuser exit guide
occur at the center of the densation in the fuser exit and clear the condensation.
paper leading edge in case guide, curled paper due to After that, replace with new
of feeding the duplex 2nd moisture absorption is paper which is unopened
page) Checking the use used (it is caught in the paper.
environment dent located at the center
of the fuser exit guide as
there is no stiffness on
paper.)
7-290
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 (If occurring under a spe- The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
cific condition) Changing paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
the setting type, paper size) do not Settings
match. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
6 (When occurring under a Large size printing after Change the setting of the Mainte-
specific condition that the continuous small size fuser temperature back to the nance
fuser temperature of printing, long standby set- default condition and check . Mode List
before and after becomes ting after printing drive is (after open the right convey-
non-uniform) Changing the done ing section and leave it open
setting to decrease the fuser tem-
perature.)
7 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in a damp Instruct the user to store Installing
age place place. paper tightly sealed in the the
location where the humidity is optional
low. Or, install the cassette equip-
heater. ment
(Cassette
Heater)
8 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Clean the secondary transfer Detaching
transfer roller roller is dirty with the toner, roller. If the secondary trans- and reat-
paper dust, etc.. Or, it is fer roller is worn out, replace taching the
worn out. it. Second-
ary Trans-
fer Roller
9 Replacing the fuser unit Paper entrance guide of Check the pressure balance Detaching
the fuser unit is deformed. of both ends of the fuser unit and reat-
The center of the fuser by checking the nipped pres- taching the
pressure roller is worn out. sure on the solid image. If the Fuser Unit
The pressure spring of balance is uneven, replace
back and front of fuser unit the fuser unit.
is not attached properly.
10 Replacing the fuser dis- The front and back of If the leading edge of the Detaching
charger needle unit paper entry guide of the fuser discharge needle is and reat-
fuser unit are unevenly dirty with sediments, replace taching the
charged and discharged. the fuser discharge needle Fuser Dis-
unit. charger
Needle
Unit
7-291
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4-2) Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor)

Condition: The image is not printed on the crease section. (Registration, transfer
factor)

1 Checking the paper The paper is curled down- Correct or replace paper. If
ward or wavy. you cannot get user agree-
ment about the paper
replacement, relocate the
leading end of paper and the
trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
paper. eign objects adhere from the
cassette.
3 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (convey-
right cover closed. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.
4 (When the paper is being The set position of the Reset the paper width guide
conveyed obliquely) paper width guides / MP or the MP paper width guide
Resetting the paper width paper width guides is mismatches to paper size. Or,
guide or MP paper width matched with the paper check set position of the sup-
guide size, and so, the paper is port guide. (Excluding the
skewed. cassette1)
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
6 Checking the conveying Conveying related rollers Clean the surface of the con-
rollers are not attached properly. veying related rollers and the
Or, the conveying capabil- pulleys (vertical conveying,
ity is not enough due to middle, registration) and reat-
dirty. tach.
7 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance is not Check the pressure of the
Checking the pressure good because the pres- conveying related rollers and
spring sure spring of front and the pulleys, and if the spring
back of the roller are not or the bearings are dropped
attached properly. off, reattach them. If they are
deformed or worn out,
replace them.
7-292
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 (When the paper skew Paper is caught at the con- If a piece of paper, the foreign
occurs) Checking the veying guide, piece of objects are on the conveying
paper path paper, etc.. path, or the foreign objects, a
burr are on the conveying
surface of the conveying
guide, remove or replace
them. If the sheet guide
material has a damage,
deformation, floating, repair
or replace them.
9 Cleaning the conveying The middle roller guide, Clean the middle roller guide
guide transfer forwarding guide and conveying surface of the
are dirty with the toner, transfer forwarding guide.
paper dust, etc..
10 Checking the conveying The middle roller guide, Reattach the middle roller
guide transfer forwarding guide guide and the transfer for-
are not attached properly. warding guide. If they are
Or, they are faulty. faulty, replace them.
(4-3) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with the punch
unit for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper leading edge being
caught by the PH cutter receiving holes
Condition: When feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the punch unit
installed for the inner finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex section
or the MP tray, the corners of paper leading edge is caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit
and the dog-ear occurs

1 Reloading the paper The paper is curled Reload paper upside down.
upward. And so, it is easy
to be caught by the PH cut-
ter receiving hole.
2 Relocating the paper width Paper skew occurs since Relocate the paper width
guides there is a gap between the guides so that there is no gap
paper width guides and the between them to the paper
paper edges. edges.
3 Explanation for user The corners of the paper Request user to feed paper
(request to change from leading edge of LetterR as "Letter" not but "LetterR".
"LetterR" to "Letter") are close to the PH cutter If user accepts, relocate the
receiving holes of the paper width guides to "Letter"
punch unit. Consequently, position and load the paper.
the corners are caught by Then, explain users who
the holes if each center need to change "Orientation"
position is not adjusted. in Quick Print on the printer
drive so that the orientation is
rotated to 90 degrees C.
7-293
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Adjusting the center posi- The center positions of the Adjust each center position Adjusting
tions of the punch unit and punch unit and the paper by the following procedures. the center
the paper width guides width guides are mis- (Refer to the reference docu- positions
matched, and so, the cor- ment" for the details.) 1. Load of the
ners of the paper leading paper on the MP tray. Then, punch unit
edge is caught by the PH set the punch holes and exe- and the
cutter receiving holes of cute the test print to align the paper
the punch unit. position of the punch unit. 2. width
Feed paper from each paper guides
source except the MP tray to
check if the forward and
backward punch holes are
not shifted. 3. If the forward
and backward punch holes
are shifted aside in above 2,
change the center position of
the paper width guides to
adjust. After changing the
center position, execute
U034 [LSU Out Left] and
adjust the center line except
for "MPT".
(4-4) Dog-ear
When feeding from the large capacity feeder, the dog-ear occurs at the primary feeding due to the downward
curl of paper.

1 Reloading the paper Paper is caught up at the Reload paper upside down.
PF frame with the down-
ward curl.
2 Affixing the seal materials The leading edge corner In order to relieve the entry Proce-
section of paper enters into angle to the location on the dures for
the gap between the PF lift PF frame where paper hits, affixing
plate and the PF frame, affix the seal material PARTS
and hits the vertical sur- (PARTS SHEET DECK SHEET
face of the PF frame. FEED SET SP:303RC9408_) DECK
to the PF frame. FEED SET
7-294
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-3 Service call error/ System error

If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the power
switch off and unplug the machine from power. (Allow at least 5 s before starting to conduct service until the
capacitors on the circuit boards have been completely discharged.)
7-295
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1) Service call error/ System error
Error code Contents

C0030 FAX PWB system error
C0060 Type mismatch error
C0070 FAX PWB incompatible detection error
C0080 Optional Printing System device error
C0100 Backup memory device error
C0120 MAC address data error
C0130 Backup memory reading/writing error
C0150 Engine EEPROM reading / writing error
C0160 EEPROM data error
C0170 Charger count error
C0180 Machine serial number mismatch
C0350 Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
C0361 Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
C0362 Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
C0640 Hard Disk error
C0650 FAX image storage pair-check error
C0660 Hard Disk encryption key error
C0670 Hard Disk overwriting error
C0680 SSD error
C0800 Image processing error
C0830 FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
C0840 RTC error ('Time for maintenance T' appears)
C0870 PC FAX Image data transmission error
C0920 FAX file system error
C0950 FAX job stay error
C0980 24V power interruption detection
C1000 MP lift motor error
C1010 Lift motor 1 error
C1020 Lift motor 2 error
C1030 PF lift motor 1 error (Paper Feeder)
C1040 PF lift motor 2 error (Paper Feeder)
C1140 PF lift motor error (Side feeder)
C1800 Paper Feeder communication error
C1820 Side feeder communication error
C1900 Paper Feeder EEPROM error
7-296
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

C1920 Side feeder EEPROM error
C1950 Primary transfer unit EEPROM error
C2201 Drum motor K steady-state error
C2300 Fuser motor error
C2500 Feed motor error
C2600 PF feed motor error
C2700 Primary / secondary transfer release error
C2760 Developer K/Transfer belt motor startup error
C2810 Waste toner motor error
C2840 Belt cleaning motor error
C3100 Carriage error
C3200 LED lamp startup error
C3210 CIS lamp error
C3300 CCD AGC error
C3310 CIS AGC error
C3500 Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC
C3600 Scanner sequence error
C3800 AFE error
C4001 Polygon motor synchronization error
C4011 Polygon motor steady-state error
C4101 BD initialization error
C4201 BD steady-state error
C4600 LSU cleaning motor error
C4701 VIDEO ASIC device error 1
C4801 LSU type mismatch error
C5101 Main high voltage error K
C5130 Primary transfer high voltage error
C6000 IH heating error 1
C6020 Center thermistor high temperature error
C6030 Center thermistor broken
C6050 Center thermistor low temperature error
C6120 Press thermistor high temperature error
C6130 Press thermistor broken
C6200 IH heating error 2
C6220 Edge thermistor high temperature error
C6230 Edge thermistor broken
C6250 Edge thermistor low temperature error
7-297
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

C6320 Middle thermistor high temperature error
C6330 Middle thermistor broken
C6410 Uninstalled fuser unit
C6600 Fuser belt rotation error
C6610 Fuser pressure release sensor error
C6620 IH core motor rotation error
C6740 IH PWB high temperature error (IGBT2)
C6760 Fuser IH input excessive electric current error
C6770 IH low power error
C6900 Edge fan motor error
C6910 Engine firmware unexpected error
C6920 Exit/IH fan motor error
C6950 IH PWB communication error
C6980 Fuser unit EEPROM error
C6990 Fuser power source destination error
C7001 Container motor error
C7101 T/C sensor K error
C7200 Inner thermistor broken (developer)
C7210 Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)
C7221 LSU thermistor broken
C7231 LSU thermistor short-circuited
C7241 Belt thermistor broken
C7251 Belt thermistor short-circuited
C7301 Toner motor K error
C7320 Toner container detection connector error
C7420 Uninstalled primary transfer unit
C7470 Toner absorption fan motor error
C7480 Power source fan motor error
C7490 Exit fan motor error
C7601 Front ID sensor error
C7602 Rear ID sensor error
C7611 Bias calibration read value error (Black)
C7800 Outer thermistor broken
C7810 Outer thermistor short-circuited
C7901 Drum unit K EEPROM error
C7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error
C7941 LSU EEPROM error
7-298
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

C7942 LSU EEPROM error 2
C7970 Weight sensor error
C7980 Waste toner overflow (Waste toner full sensor error)
C8010 PH motor error 1
C8090 DF paddle motor error
C8100 DF exit release motor error
C8110 DF shift motor 1 error
C8120 DF shift motor 2 error
C8130 DF shift release motor error
C8140 DF tray motor error 1
C8160 DF tray motor error (3)
C8170 DF side registration motor 1 error 1
C8210 DF staple motor front/rear error
C8230 DF staple motor error 1
C8250 DF main tray error 4
C8260 DF middle motor HP detection error
C8300 Main program error / BF unit communication error
C8310 BF side registration motor 2 error
C8320 BF adjustment motor error
C8330 BF blade motor error
C8340 BF staple motor error 1
C8350 BF side registration motor 1 error
C8360 BF main motor error
C8370 BF staple motor error 2
C8410 PH slide motor error 1
C8420 PH slide motor error 2
C8430 Main program error / Punch unit communication error
7-299
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

C8500 Main program error / Mail Box communication error
C8510 MB conveying motor error 1
C8520 MB conveying motor error 2
C8800 Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)
C8900 DF backup error
C8930 BF unit backup error
C9000 Main program error / DP communication error
C9040 DP lift motor ascend error
C9050 DP lift motor descend error
C9060 DP EEPROM error
C9070 DP - SHD communication error
C9080 LED failure detection
C9180 DP feed-shift motor error
C9500 Image processing PWB error (Scanner)
C9510 Image processing circuit error (DP)
C9540 Backup data error
C0030: FAX PWB system error

The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch. After lation
5s passes, reinstall the FAX Guide
PWB, and then turn on the
main power switch and the
power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Update
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
7-300
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0060: Type mismatch error

Install the SSD for different model. Or, it is not possible to communicate with some units.

1 Checking the SSD Installed SSD containing Install SSD containing firm- Detaching
firmware which is not for ware which is for the applica- and reat-
the applicable model. ble model. taching the
SSD
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the connector Mainte-
nected properly, or the wire which connect to the below nance
is faulty. unit. If there is no continuity, parts
replace the wire. replace-
• Drum unit ment pro-
• Developer unit cedures
• Primary transfer unit
• Fuser unit
C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB,
any normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX Install the FAX PWB for the FAX Instal-
PWB is installed. applicable model. lation
Guide
2 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Update
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0080: Optional Printing System device error

Object: Printing System 15 (for 120V, 230V and 240V)
It is not possible to read FPGA version of the Fiery relay PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM does not Turn the power switch and
operate properly. the main power switch off .
After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Replacing the Fiery relay Fiery relay PWB for the Replace Fiery relay PWB
PWB other models is installed. which is applicable to the
model.
7-301
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Firmware upgrade The version of the main Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
firmware is not supported the latest version. Update
for the fiery relay PWB.
4 Checking the Fiery relay The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the con-
PWB nected properly. The wire nectors connecting on the
or the PWB is faulty. Fiery relay PWB and recon-
nect the connector. If the wire
is faulty, repair or replace it. If
not resolved, replace the
Fiery relay PWB.
5 Checking the main PWB The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the con-
nected properly. The wire nector (for Fiery relay PWB)
or the PWB is faulty. on the main PWB and recon-
nect. If it is not improved,
replace Fiery relay PWB.
C0100: Backup memory device error

An abnormal status is output from the flash memory.

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does Turn the power switch and
not operate properly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
PWB is faulty. the wire, and reconnect the 'PWBs'
C0120: MAC address data error

The MAC address data is incorrect.

power switch on.
2 Checking the MAC The MAC address is incor- Replace the main PWB when Detaching
address rect. the MAC address is not indi- and reat-
cated on the network status taching the
page. Main PWB
7-302
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error

The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable.

power switch on.
C0150: Engine EEPROM reading / writing error

1. Five times consecutive detection of no response from the device for more than 5ms on reading / writing.
2. Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times.
3. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the Turn the power switch and
engine PWB does not the main power switch off .
operate properly. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM on Detaching
the engine PWB erly attached. the engine PWB. and reat-
taching the
EEPROM
7-303
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the Mainte-
engine PWB and execute nance
U169. Mode List
Next, compare the setting Detaching
value of the maintenance and reat-
report outputted at U000 in taching the
advance and the setting Engine
value of the maintenance PWB
report outputted after replac-
ing EEPROM, and change
the setting value which are
different. (Related mainte-
nance mode: U053, U100,
U101, U106, U140, U161,
U464, U252, U034, U065,
U066, U067)
Finally, execute the following
maintenance mode in the fol-
lowing order.
U119 (for the 35 ppm or
faster models) > U411 >
U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC
Calib] > U140 [Calibration] >
U412 [Normal Mode] (for the
35 ppm or faster models) >
U464 [Calib] (for the 35 ppm
or faster models) > U410 >
U155 [Calibration] (The
empty waste toner box is
necessary.)
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C0160: EEPROM data error

The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the Turn the power switch and
engine PWB does not the main power switch off .
operate properly. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Executing U021 The storage data in the Execute U021. Mainte-
EEPROM on the engine nance
PWB is faulty. Mode List
7-304
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the Mainte-
engine PWB and execute nance
U169. Mode List
Next, compare the setting Detaching
value of the maintenance and reat-
report outputted at U000 in taching the
advance and the setting Engine
value of the maintenance PWB
U101, U106, U140, U161,
U464, U252, U034, U065,
U066, U067)
lowing order.
U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC
necessary.)
C0170: Charger count error

The values in one of the billing counters, life counter or the scanner counter mismatch between the main side
and the engine side.

1 Checking the machine The main PWB for the dif- Check the machine serial Mainte-
serial No. of the main PWB ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at nance
installed. U004, and install the correct Mode List
main PWB if the MAIN No. Detaching
differs. and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the dif- Check the machine serial Mainte-
serial No. in the EEPROM ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at nance
on the engine PWB installed. U004, and install the correct Mode List
EEPROM on the engine Detaching
PWB if the ENGINE machine and reat-
serial No. differs. taching the
EEPROM
7-305
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine Mainte-
serial No. differs at U004, nance
replace the main PWB and Mode List
execute U004. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
4 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. If the machine serial number Mainte-
the engine PWB in the engine PWB is different nance
at U004, reattach the Mode List
PWB. If not repairing, replace and reat-
the EEPROM and execute taching the
U169. Engine
Next, compare the setting PWB
value of the maintenance
report outputted at U000 in
advance and the setting
U101, U106, U140, U161,
U464, U252, U034, U065,
U066, U067)
lowing order.
U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC
necessary.)
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-306
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0180: Machine serial number mismatch

The machine serial Nos. in the main PWB and the EEPROM on the engine PWB mismatch when turning the
power on.

1 Checking the machine The main PWB for the dif- Check the machine serial Mainte-
serial No. of the main PWB ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at nance
installed. U004, and install the correct Mode List
main PWB if the MAIN No. Detaching
differs. and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the dif- Check the machine serial Mainte-
serial No. in the EEPROM ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at nance
on the engine PWB installed. U004, and install the correct Mode List
PWB if the ENGINE machine and reat-
serial No. differs. taching the
EEPROM
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine Mainte-
serial No. differs at U004, nance
replace the main PWB and Mode List
execute U004. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-307
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. If the machine serial number Mainte-
the engine PWB in the engine PWB is different nance
at U004, reattach the Mode List
PWB. If not repairing, replace and reat-
the EEPROM and execute taching the
U169. Engine
Next, compare the setting PWB
report outputted at U000 in
advance and the setting
U101, U106, U140, U161,
U464, U252, U034, U065,
U066, U067)
lowing order.
U469 [Auto] > U140 [AC
necessary.)
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-308
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0350: Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication

error)
Since NACK was received during the I2C communication, the retry was repeated 5 times and the initial com-
mand was transmitted, and then the retry was repeated 5 times again. After that, NACK was also received.

1 Resetting the main power The operation of the oper- Turn the power switch and
ation panel main PWB is the main power switch off .
faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
the wire.
• Operation panel main PWB
- Main PWB
• Operation panel main PWB
- NFC PWB
3 Replacing the operation The operation panel main Replace the panel main Detaching
panel main PWB PWB is faulty. PWB. and reat-
taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
5 Replacing the NFC PWB The NFC PWB is faulty. Replace the NFC PWB.
C0361: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
7-309
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C0362: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
the wire.
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-310
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0640: Hard Disk error

The HDD cannot be accessed properly.

1 Releasing the partial oper- The partial operation is Execute resetting the partial Mainte-
ation executed. operation at U906. nance
Mode List
2 (For the main unit without When installing the 8GB Replace with the correct Detaching
the HDD) Replacing the HDD mistakenly, it tries to 32GB SSD. and reat-
SSD access the HDD. At that taching the
time, the error appears if SSD
the HDD is not installed in
the main units .
3 (When abnormal sounds The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the Detaching
occur) Replacing the HDD abnormal sounds are from and reat-
the HDD. taching the
HDD
4 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the below SATA Service
nected properly. The SATA cable and connector of the Manual -
cable or the wire is faulty. wire. If there is no continuity, Section 8
replace SATA cable or the 'PWBs'
wire.
• HDD - main PWB
5 Initializing the HDD The HDD storage data is Execute U024 [FULL] (HDD Mainte-
faulty. Format). nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
HDD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD Detaching
age) already used in other used once, replace with the and reat-
unit is installed. correct SSD. taching the
SSD
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD Mainte-
age) already used in other used once, execute U671 nance
unit is reused without exe- [FAX Data CLEAR]. Mode List
cuting U671.
7-311
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Be sure to install the SSD to Detaching
age) is not properly the connector on the main and reat-
installed. PWB. taching the
SSD
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Replace with the new SSD. Detaching
age) is faulty. and reat-
taching the
SSD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0660: Hard Disk encryption key error

1. The encrypted password entered when replacing the main PWB is not correct.
2. Install SSD which is used in the other machine.

1 (When the issue occurs The encryption key after Execute U004 when this Mainte-
after replacing the main replacing the main PWB is issue occurs after replacing nance
PWB) Executing U004 faulty. the main PWB. Mode List
2 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the Detaching
(abnormal sounds) abnormal sounds are from and reat-
HDD
wire.
• HDD - main PWB
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
HDD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-312
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0670: Hard Disk overwriting error

The area that cannot be properly overwritten exists in a part of the HDD.

1 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the Detaching
(abnormal sounds) abnormal sounds are from and reat-
HDD
wire.
• HDD - main PWB
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
HDD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0680: SSD error

The SSD cannot be accessed, or the error occurs when accessing to the SSD.

1 Checking the SSD (if lit An SSD out of specifica- Install the SSD matching the
after replacing the SSD) tion is installed. memory capacity specifica-
tion.
2 Resetting the main power The SSD is faulty. Turn the power switch and
the main power switch off .
power switch on.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The connection with the Reinstall the SSD on the Detaching
main PWB is faulty. main PWB. and reat-
taching the
SSD
4 Initializing the SSD The data stored in the SSD Retrieve the SSD storage Mainte-
is faulty. data at U026, and then initial- nance
ize the SSD at U024. Mode List
7-313
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Retrieve the SSD storage Mainte-
data at U026, and then nance
replace the SSD. Mode List
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
SSD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C0800: Image processing error

The print sequence jam (J010x) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only
when handling the certain
image data, check if the
image data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of Acquire the job's log if the Checking
the certain file is faulty. phenomenon can be repro- Job & Job
duced by specifying the job Operation
when the error was detected. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
7)
C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Update
7-314
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not con- Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
nected properly. the main power switch. After lation
power switch.
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
is faulty. FAX. nance
Mode List
lation
Guide
C0840: RTC error ('Time for maintenance T' appears)

<Check at the start up>
• Setting value of RTC has returned to the past.
• The power has not turned on more than 5 years.
• Setting value of RTC is older than 00:01 January 1st, 2000.
<Check regularly (each 5 minutes) after start up>
• Setting value of RTC has returned to the past which is older than the time previously checked. After detect-
ing C0840, reset the main power to go into disable function and [Time for Maintenance] is displayed.

1 Executing U906 The backup battery on the Execute U906 and reset the Mainte-
main PWB is faulty, and display [Maintenance T]. nance
so, the RTC settings are After that, set the date and Mode List
erased after unplugging time (RTC) through System Date/
the power cord. menu. (It is necessary to per- Timer/
form this process every time Energy
when unplug/plug the power Saver
cord.) (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
2 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty, or The user call regarding Detaching
the backup battery runs C0840 is frequent even if per- and reat-
out. forming the previous treat- taching the
ment, replace the main PWB. Main PWB
7-315
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data
is transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch off . lation
After 5s passes, reattach the Guide
FAX PWB and turn the main
switch on.
Mode List
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
the latest version. Update
lation
Guide
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD Execute U024 [SSD Format]. Mainte-
is faulty. nance
Mode List
C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
incorrect FAX. nance
Mode List
power switch.
3 Reconnecting the FAX The FAX PWB is not con- Reinstall FAX PWB to Main FAX Instal-
PWB nected properly. PWB. lation
Guide
Update
lation
Guide
7-316
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power Print processing is not Turn the power switch and
properly executed. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
properly activate. the latest version. Update
C0980: 24V power interruption detection

1. Detected 24 V power off signal for 1s continuously.
2. Another service call occurred when passing 100ms after detecting 24V power failure detection signal, and
then 24 power supply was recovered.

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
the wire.
• Low voltage PWB - Engine
PWB
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is When the +24V generation Detaching
PWB faulty. from the low voltage PWB is and reat-
not stable, and it lowers, taching the
replace the low voltage PWB. Low Volt-
age PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1000: MP lift motor error

1. When the MP lift motor rotates in the descending direction, the MP position sensor does not turn on within
1850ms.
7-317
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2. When the MP lift motor rotates in the ascending direction, the MP position sensor does not turn off within
1600ms.

1 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate does not Repair or replace the MP lift
operate properly. plate on the MP tray when it
does not move vertically.
3 Checking the lift lever The lift lever is not properly Check if the lift lever is verti-
attached. cally shifted by the lift motor
cam, or if it has the excessive
load. Then, reattach the MP
tray. Then, replace the MP
tray if it is not fixed.
4 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the MP lift plate lift-
MP lift plate does not up drive gears rotate
rotate properly. smoothly or have no exces-
sive load. And apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part no.:
7BG010009H) to the sliding
section and repair the related
parts so that they can rotate
smoothly.
the wire.
• Main unit - Paper conveying
unit
• MP position sensor - Relay
connector - Feed drive PWB
PWB
6 Replacing the MP lift motor The MP lift motor does not Replace the MP lift motor.
operate properly.
7 Checking the MP position The MP position sensor is Reattach MP position sensor.
sensor not attached properly.
8 Replacing the MP position The MP position sensor is Replace MP position sensor.
sensor faulty.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-318
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C1010: Lift motor 1 error

Five times consecutive detection of any one of the below condition.
1. Turning on of lift upper limit sensor is not detected even 16s passed after inserting cassette 1.
2. After turning on lift motor 1, lock signal does not release for 300ms.
3. After detecting lift upper limit sensor 1 OFF during printing, lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on even
passing 1s from ascending control.

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not Repair or replace the lift plate
operate properly. when it does not move verti-
cally.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the lift plate lift-up
lift plate does not rotate drive gears rotate smoothly
properly. or have no excessive load.
And apply the grease (EM-
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire.
• Lift motor 1 - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
4 Checking lift motor 1 Lift motor 1 is faulty. Check the operation of lift Detaching
motor 1, and replace it if nec- and reat-
essary. taching the
Lift Motor
the wire.
• Lift upper limit sensor 1 -
Feed drive PWB
PWB
6 Checking lift sensor 1 Lift upper limit sensor 1 is Reattach lift upper limit sen-
not properly attached, or it sor 1. Replace it if it is not
is faulty. fixed.
PWB faulty.
7-319
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1020: Lift motor 2 error

Five times consecutive detection of any one of the below condition.
1. Turning on of lift upper limit sensor 2 is not detected even 16s passed after inserting cassette 2.
2. After turning on lift motor 2, lock signal does not release for 300ms.
3. After detecting lift upper limit sensor 2 OFF during printing, lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on even
passing 1s from ascending control.

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not Repair or replace the lift plate
operate properly. when it does not move verti-
cally.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the lift plate lift-up
lift plate does not rotate drive gears rotate smoothly
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire.
• Lift motor 2 - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
4 Checking lift motor 2 Lift motor 2 is faulty. Check the operation of lift Detaching
motor 2, and replace it if nec- and reat-
essary. taching the
Lift Motor
the wire.
• Lift upper limit sensor 2 -
Feed drive PWB
PWB
7-320
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking lift sensor 2 Lift upper limit sensor 2 is Reattach lift upper limit sen-
not properly attached, or it sor 2. Then, replace it if it is
is faulty. not fixed.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1030: PF lift motor 1 error (Paper Feeder)

[PF-7100 (Paper Feeder)]
1. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 16s since cassette 3 was inserted.
2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of PF lift motor 1.
3. Since PF lift sensor 1 turned off during printing, PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 1s
from the ascend control.
[PF-7110 (Large Capacity Feeder)]
1. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 24s since cassette 3 was inserted.
2. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 3s from the ascend control when starting printing.

1 Checking the PF lift plate The PF lift plate does not Repair or replace the PF lift
operate properly. plate when it does not move
vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the PF lift plate lift-up
PF lift plate does not rotate drive gears rotate smoothly
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire.
• PF lift motor 1 - PF PWB
4 Checking PF lift motor 1 PF lift motor 1 is faulty. Replace PF lift motor 1.
7-321
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• PF lift upper limit sensor 1 -
PF PWB
6 Checking PF lift sensor 1 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 Reattach PF lift upper limit
is not properly attached, or sensor 1. Then, replace it if it
it is faulty. is not fixed.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
C1040: PF lift motor 2 error (Paper Feeder)

[PF-7100 (Paper Feeder)]
1. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 16s since cassette 4 is inserted.
2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of PF lift motor 2.
3. Since PF lift sensor 2 turned off during printing, PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s
from the ascend control.
[PF-7110 (Large Capacity Feeder)]
1. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 24s since cassette 4 is inserted.
2. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 3s from the ascend control when starting printing.

vertically.
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire.
• PF lift motor 2 - PF PWB
4 Replacing PF lift motor 2 PF lift motor 2 is faulty. Replace PF lift motor 2.
7-322
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• PF lift upper limit sensor 2 -
PF PWB
6 Checking PF lift sensor 2 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 Reattach PF lift upper limit
is not properly attached, or sensor 2. Then, replace it if it
it is faulty. is not fixed.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
C1140: PF lift motor error (Side feeder)

Object: Side feeder
1. The PF lift upper limit sensor does not turn on even 30s passed after inserting cassette 5.
2. The lock signal is detected for 200ms continuously during the PF lift motor operation.
3. When start printing, the PF lift upper limit sensor does not detect on even passing 2s from ascending con-
trol.

vertically.
50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire.
• PF lift motor - PF PWB
4 Checking the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. Replace the PF lift motor.
7-323
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• PF lift upper limit sensor -
PF PWB
6 Checking the PF lift upper The PF lift upper limit sen- Reattach the PF lift upper
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor. Then, replace it if
attached, or it is faulty. it is not fixed.
7 Checking the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
C1800: Paper Feeder communication error

1. Communication error was detected 10 times continuously.
2. The ready signal is not notified from the paper feeder or the large capacity feeder within 6s after communi-
cation starts.

1 Checking the connection The cable is not properly Reconnect the cable into the
connected to the main unit. main unit.
the wire.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1820: Side feeder communication error

Object: Side feeder
1. Communication error was detected 10 times continuously.
7-324
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2. The ready signal is not notified from the side feeder within 6s after communication starts.

1 Checking the connection It is not properly connected Reconnect to the main unit.
to the main unit.
there is no continuity, replace 'Wiring
the wire. diagram
• PF PWB - PF PWB (Side (Options
feeder) connec-
tion)'
4 Checking the PF PWB The PF PWB (side feeder) Replace PF PWB (side Detaching
(side feeder) is faulty. feeder). and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
(Side
feeder)
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

1 Reconnecting the paper It is not properly connected Reinstall the paper feeder to PF-7100
feeder to the main unit. the main unit. Installa-
tion Guide
PF-7110
Installa-
tion Guide
7-325
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the connector of Service
nected properly, or the wire the wire between the engine Manual -
is faulty. PWB and the PF PWB. If the Section 8
wire is faulty, repair or 'PWBs'
replace it. If not resolved, Detaching
replace the PF PWB. and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C1920: Side feeder EEPROM error

Object: Side feeder
For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

1 Reconnecting the side It is not properly connected Reinstall the side feeder to PF-7120
feeder to the main unit. the main unit. Installa-
tion Guide
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the connector of Service
nected properly, or the wire the wire between the engine Manual -
is faulty. PWB and the PF PWB (side Section 9
feeder). If the wire is faulty, 'Wiring
repair or replace it. If not diagram
resolved, replace the PF (Options
PWB. connec-
tion)'
3 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace PF PWB (side Detaching
feeder). and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
(Side
feeder)
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-326
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
C1950: Primary transfer unit EEPROM error


1 Reinstalling the primary The primary transfer unit is Reinstall the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit not properly installed. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
the wire.
• Primary transfer unit -
Transfer PWB
• Transfer PWB - Feed image
PWB
PWB
3 Replacing the primary The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer Detaching
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-327
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C2201: Drum motor K steady-state error

The ready signal is at the H level for 2s continuously after drum motor K becomes stable.

1 Checking drum motor K The drum motor K drive is Execute U030 [Drum K] to Mainte-
faulty. check the drum motor K oper- nance
ation. Check if the drive gears Mode List
rotate and have no excessive
load, and apply the grease
(EM-LP, Part no:
smoothly.
the wire.
• Drum motor K - Feed image
PWB
PWB
3 Checking drum unit K The drum unit is faulty. Check if the drum or the drum Detaching
screw is rotated manually, and reat-
and replace the drum unit if taching the
not rotated. Drum Unit
4 Checking drum motor K Drum motor K is faulty. Replace drum motor K.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-328
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
C2300: Fuser motor error

The ready signal is at the H level for 1.5s continuously during the fuser motor drive.

1 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor operation Execute U030 [Fuser] to Mainte-
is faulty. check the fuser motor opera- nance
tion. Check if the drive gears Mode List
(EM-LP, Part no:
smoothly.
the wire.
PWB
PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
such as the fuser belt dam- and reat-
age. taching the
Fuser Unit
4 Replacing the fuser drive The fuser drive unit is Replace the fuser drive unit. Detaching
unit faulty. and reat-
taching the
Fuser
Drive Unit
5 Replacing the fuser motor The fuser motor is faulty. Replace the fuser motor. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Fuser
Drive Unit
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-329
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C2500: Feed motor error

The ready signal is not at the L level after passing 2s since the feed motor drive was started.

1 Checking the feed motor The operation of the feed Execute U030 [Feed] to Mainte-
motor is faulty. check the feed motor opera- nance
tion. Check if the drive gears Mode List
(EM-LP, Part no:
smoothly.
the wire.
PWB
PWB
3 Replacing the feed motor The feed motor is faulty. Replace the feed motor.
4 Replacing the feed drive The feed drive unit is Replace feed drive unit. Detaching
taching the
Feed Drive
Unit
PWB faulty.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
to the latest version Update
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
8 Replacing the feed image The power can't be sup- Replace the feed image
PWB plied to the feed drive PWB.
PWB.
7-330
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C2600: PF feed motor error

The ready signal is not at the L level (stable rotation) after passing 1s since the PF feed motor drive started.

1 Checking the PF feed The PF feed motor is not Execute U247 [2PF] or [LCF] Mainte-
motor properly connected, or it is > [Motor On] to check the nance
faulty. paper feed operation. If the Mode List
PF feed motor does not oper-
ate properly, reconnect the
connector of the motor.
Check if the PF feed roller
and the drive gears rotate
smoothly and have no exces-
sive load, apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part no.:
smoothly.
the wire.
(Drawer connector between
the paper feeder and the
main unit)
3 Replacing the PF feed The PF feed motor is Replace the PF feed motor. Detaching
motor faulty. and reat-
taching the
PF Drive
Unit
4 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware or the Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
PF firmware is faulty. and the PF firmware to the Update
latest version.
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-331
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
C2700: Primary / secondary transfer release error

The belt release motor was pressed or drove to the releasing direction, and releasing or pressing condition
continued for 2.3s.

1 Checking the drive parts The drive transmission of Execute U030 [Belt Lift]. If the Mainte-
the belt release motor is motor drive is not transmitted, nance
faulty. repair the drive transmission Mode List
parts.
the wire.
• Belt release motor - Feed
image PWB
• Belt release sensor - Feed
image PWB
PWB
• Feed image PWB - Low
voltage PWB
3 Checking the belt release The belt release sensor Reattach or replace the belt
sensor comes off. release sensor.
4 Checking the belt release The belt release motor is Reattach or replace the belt
motor not operated correctly. release motor.
transfer unit.
6 Replacing the primary The primary transfer roller Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit lift-up drive section is unit. and reat-
faulty. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
faulty. to the latest version Update
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-332
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

10 Replacing the low voltage The power is not supplied If the power is not supplied Detaching
PWB from the low voltage PWB from the low voltage PWB, and reat-
to the belt release motor. replace the low voltage PWB. taching the
Low Volt-
age PWB
C2760: Developer K/Transfer belt motor startup error

1. FG pulse of the motor does not enter for 2s continuously during driving the motor.
2. FG pulse exceeding 4000rpm was detected 10 times continuously.
3. The condition where the target speed +/-6.25% of the motor deviated continued for 2s.

1 Replacing the primary The transfer belt is faulty. Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Checking the developer K/ The drive transmission of Execute U030 [DLP(K)] to Mainte-
transfer belt motor drive the developer K/transfer check the excessive load is nance
transmission section belt motor is faulty. not applied to the drive gears, Mode List
roller and the belt by rotating
them. After that, clean the
drive section of the primary
transfer unit.
the wire.
• Developer K/Transfer belt
motor - Feed image PWB
PWB
4 Checking the developer K/ The developer K/transfer Reattach the developer K/
transfer belt motor belt motor is faulty. transfer belt motor and recon-
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-333
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C2810: Waste toner motor error

1. The lock detection signal shows L level during driving the waste toner motor. (0.5s x 3 times retry continu-
ously with 2ms cycle)
2. Low level of the lock detection signal can not detect within 50ms from the switching REM signal L to H. (3
times retry with 50ms cycle)

1 Checking the waste toner The waste toner box is not Reinstall the waste toner box. Replacing
box properly installed. the Waste
Toner Box
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the waste toner The waste toner motor Execute U030 [Toner Recov- Mainte-
motor does not operate properly. ery] to check whether the nance
waste toner motor operation Mode List
has an excessive load or not.
Then, repair it if necessary.
3 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not Check if the excessive load is
rotate properly. not applied to the drive gears
by rotating the gears, and
clean the drive gears and the
bushing, etc.
4 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner box is Replace the waste toner box. Replacing
box faulty. the Waste
Toner Box
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
5 Checking the waste toner The waste toner motor is Reinsert the connector into
motor not properly connected. the waste toner motor.
the wire.
• Waste toner motor - Engine
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-334
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
C2840: Belt cleaning motor error

1. FG pulse of the motor does not enter for 2s continuously during driving the motor.
2. FG pulse exceeding 4000rpm was detected 10 times continuously.
3. The condition where the target speed +/-6.25% of the motor deviated continued for 2s.

transfer unit not properly installed. unit. and reat-
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Cleaning the primary The roller in the primary Remove the waste toner
transfer cleaning section transfer cleaning section remaining in the primary
does not rotate properly. transfer cleaning section.
the wire.
• Belt cleaning motor - Trans-
fer PWB
• Transfer PWB - Transfer
connect PWB
• Transfer connect PWB -
Feed image PWB
• Feed image PWB - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
4 Checking the belt cleaning The belt cleaning motor Reattach the belt cleaning
motor does not operate properly. motor. If not repaired, replace
it.
5 Replacing the primary The cleaning drive section Replace the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit of the primary transfer unit unit. and reat-
is faulty. Transfer PWB or taching the
transfer connection PWB Primary
is faulty. Transfer
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty.
7-335
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C3100: Carriage error

The position of the home position sensor (turning on / off) mismatches when turning the main power on or fin-
ishing the original scan by the scanner.

1 Unlocking the primary mir- The primary mirror unit is Unlock the primary mirror Unlocking
ror unit not unlocked. unit. the scan-
ner mirror
frame
2 Removing foreign objects A load is applied to the Confirm the operation of the Mainte-
and applying the grease scanner movement. mirror unit by executing U073 nance
or moving by manual opera- Mode List
tion. If there is a heavy load
on it, check whether there are
any foreign objects on the
scanner wire or the scanner
wire drum, and then clean it.
After that, apply grease (PG-
671) on the scanner rail.
3 Checking the scanner The scanner wires are dirty Clean the scanner wire or Detaching
wires or come off. reattach it. and reat-
taching the
Scanner
Wires
4 Checking the scanner The scanner motor is Reattach the scanner motor
motor faulty. and reconnect the connector.
5 Checking the belt tension A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt
of the scanner motor scanner movement since tension properly.
the belt tension is
improper.
the wire.
• Scanner motor - Engine
PWB
the wire.
• Home position sensor -
Engine PWB
9 Checking the home posi- The home position sensor Replace the home position
tion sensor is faulty. sensor.
7-336
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C3200: LED lamp startup error

1. The white reference data acquired by lighting the lamp at the initial operation is at the specified value or
less. (2 or more LED lamps do not light.)
2. The black level adjustment of the A/D convertor on the CCD PWB is faulty. (The image contrast is faulty
due to the transmission error of the A/D conversion data signal or clock.)

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp does not Check if the LED lamp lights Detaching
light. by executing U061 [CCD]. If it and reat-
nance
Mode List
is deformed or broken, 'PWBs'
replace the FFC.
• LED PWB - CCD PWB
3 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit and Detaching
execute U411. and reat-
taching the
Lens Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-337
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
C3210: CIS lamp error

The input data did not exceed threshold for 5s when lighting the CIS lamp. (The light intensity of the CIS lamp
is insufficient when starting up.)

Mode List
2 Checking the DPCIS The CIS lamp does not Check if the CIS lamp lights Detaching
light. by executing U061 [CIS]. If it and reat-
DPCIS and execute U091 DP CIS
and U411. Mainte-
nance
Mode List
3 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass or the CIS Clean the CIS glass and the
and the CIS roller roller is dirty. CIS roller.
the wire.
• DP SHD PWB - DP PWB
• DP PWB - Engine PWB
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the DP firmware to Firmware
PWB
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-338
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C3300: CCD AGC error

The brightness of the LED lamps is darker (1 LED lamp does not turn on) or brighter than anticipated when
executing the AGC process for the CCD lamp.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp is broken. Check if the LED lamp lights Detaching
by executing U061 [CCD]. If it and reat-
nance
Mode List
2 Cleaning the backside of The white reference sheet Clean the white reference Detaching
the contact glass is dirty. sheet at the backside of the and reat-
contact glass. taching the
Contact
Glass
(Section 4
'Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
Lens unit')
replace the FFC.
• LED PWB - CCD PWB
taching the
Lens Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-339
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C3310: CIS AGC error

For internal count
The DPCIS could not acquire the correct white reference value while AGC process was executed.

Mode List
2 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass or the CIS Clean the CIS glass and the
and the CIS roller roller is dirty. CIS roller.
PWB
6 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then Detaching
execute U091 and U411. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C3500: Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC

The communication error was detected during the communication between the scanner ASIC and the engine
CPU.

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-340
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C3600: Scanner sequence error

The program internal processing error of the scanner sequence occurs.

1 Executing U021 The memory operation is Execute U021. Mainte-
faulty. nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C3800: AFE error

When writing, writing data and reading data does not match 3 times continuously. There is no response from
AFE for 100ms.

replace the FFC.
taching the
Lens Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4001: Polygon motor synchronization error

The ready signal is not at the L level after passing 15s since the polygon motor drive was started.

replace the FFC.
PWB
7-341
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the polygon The polygon motor does Check the rotation sound of Detaching
motor not rotate properly. the polygon motor, and reat- and reat-
tach or replace the LSU if it taching the
does not rotate properly. LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4011: Polygon motor steady-state error

The ready signal is at the H level for 15s continuously after the polygon motor drive becomes stable.

replace the FFC.
PWB
2 Checking the polygon The polygon motor does Check the rotation sound of Detaching
motor not rotate properly. the polygon motor, and reat- and reat-
tach or replace the LSU if it taching the
does not rotate properly. LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4101: BD initialization error

The BD signal was not detected for 1s after driving the polygon motor.

replace the FFC.
PWB
7-342
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU Detaching
diode is faulty. while paying attention to the and reat-
static electricity. taching the
LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4201: BD steady-state error

The BD signal is not detected during the laser lighting.

replace the FFC.
PWB
2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU Detaching
diode is faulty. while paying attention to the and reat-
static electricity. taching the
LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-343
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C4600: LSU cleaning motor error

The LSU cleaning motor lock-up was detected, or the motor continued to be shifted in the same direction for
8s or more.

1 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU cleaning drive Execute Laser Scanner Adjust/
ner Cleaning gear and the cleaning pad Cleaning. Mainte-
have the load and so they nance
are not shifted smoothly. Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Cleaning the LSU clean- The LSU cleaning drive Clean the LSU cleaning drive
ing drive gear and the gear and the cleaning pad gear and the cleaning pad.
cleaning pad have the load and so they
are not shifted smoothly.
3 Replacing the LSU The LSU cleaning drive Replace the LSU. Detaching
gear, cleaning wire or the and reat-
cleaning pad are taching the
deformed, or they are LSU
faulty.
4 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is Clean the following wire con- Service
not connected properly. Or, nector terminal and FFC ter- Manual -
the wire or FFC is faulty. minal, then reconnect the Section 8
connector and the FFC. If the 'PWBs'
wire or FFC is faulty, replace
them.
• LSU cleaning motor - APC
PWB (LSU)
• APC PWB (LSU) - Engine
PWB
5 Checking the LSU clean- The LSU cleaning motor is Reattach the LSU cleaning
ing motor not properly attached, or it motor and reconnect the con-
is faulty. nector. If not repaired,
replace it.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-344
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C4701: VIDEO ASIC device error 1

Communication with VIDEO ASIC has fails 10 times continuously. (After writing to VIDEO ASIC, read from
same address and the error occurred that the value does not match)

1 Resetting the main power The ASIC operation on the Turn the power switch and
engine is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware Firmware
est version. and the engine firmware to Update
the latest version.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C4801: LSU type mismatch error

The LSU mismatches with the main unit.

1 Checking the LSU The different type LSU is Install the correct LSU. Detaching
installed. and reat-
taching the
LSU
replace the FFC.
PWB
3 Replacing the LSU The APC PWB is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
LSU
7-345
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C5101: Main high voltage error K

1. The flowing current when Vpp is varied in three stages during Vpp adjustment is measured and the differ-
ence between the zero current value and the current value in the second step is equal to or less than the ref-
erence value.2. Even if Vpp [C] is applied, the detected Idc is too small. (Less than 5uA)

1 Reinstalling the main high Proper current does not Reinstall the main high volt- Detaching
voltage PWB flow as the MC roller con- age PWB. and reat-
tact point of the main high taching the
voltage PWB is not prop- Main High
erly contacted. Voltage
PWB
2 Checking the drum unit The drum or the drum Check if the drum or the drum Detaching
and the developer unit screw is not rotated prop- screw is rotated manually, and reat-
erly due to the excessive and replace the drum unit if taching the
load. not rotated. Drum Unit
3 Replacing drum motor K Drum motor K is faulty. Replace drum motor K.
4 Checking the main charger Proper current does not Clean the high voltage con- Detaching
unit flow as the foreign objects, tact of the main charger unit, and reat-
etc. adheres to the high and apply conductive grease taching the
voltage contact point of the to the roller shaft. Main
main charger unit. Charger
Unit
5 Replacing the main char- Proper current does not Replace the main charger Detaching
ger unit flow as the high voltage unit and execute U930. and reat-
contact point of the main taching the
charger unit is deformed or Main
damaged. Charger
Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
the wire.
Engine PWB
taching the
Main High
Voltage
PWB
7-346
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C5130: Primary transfer high voltage error

When adjusting the feedback, the detected electric current value exceeds the upper limit or is less than the
lower limit, or the adjustment result is 300V or less or is 2,900V or more.

transfer unit not properly installed. unit so that the connector and reat-
firmly connects. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Checking the high voltage Proper current does not Clean the high voltage con-
contact flow as the foreign objects, tact of the primary transfer
etc. adheres to the high roller, and apply conductive
voltage contact point of the grease to the roller shaft.
primary transfer roller.
3 Reinstalling the transfer Proper current does not Reinstall the transfer high Detaching
high voltage PWB flow as high voltage con- voltage PWB. and reat-
tact of the transfer high taching the
voltage PWB is faulty. Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
the wire.
Engine PWB
Feed image PWB
taching the
Transfer
High Volt-
age PWB
7-347
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

7 Correcting the drum drive Although the drum drive Correct the drum drive spring Detaching
spring spring normally presses of the main drive unit when and reat-
the drum drive coupling in the drum does not rotate due taching the
the main drive unit to the to the engagement failure Main Drive
drum unit side, if it shifts in with the drum drive cou- Unit
the direction where it can- plings.
not press the coupling and
cannot return, the drum
drive coupling does not
engage the coupling in the
drum unit.
8 Checking the drum unit There is no grounding for Apply conductive grease on Detaching
and the developer unit the drum unit. the drum drive shaft of the and reat-
main drive unit. If the drum taching the
drive shaft does not contact Main Drive
with the earth plate inside of Unit
the drum, replace the drum Detaching
unit. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
9 Checking the primary The pressure release gear Check if the pressure release Detaching
transfer unit at the machine front side of joint gear at the machine rear and reat-
the primary transfer unit side of the primary transfer taching the
comes off. unit can be pulled out. If yes, Primary
it means the pressure release Transfer
gear at the machine front side Unit
of the unit comes off. There- 2ND-0076
transfer unit.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6000: IH heating error 1

After warm-up is started, the center thermistor does not reach 100°C / 212°F even 60s passed. Or, during the
warm-up, specified temperature (Ready display temperature) is not detected even 420s passed after center
thermistor reached 100°C / 212°F.

1 Executing U169 The IH setting mis- Set the destination same as Mainte-
matches the power supply the voltage of the IH PWB at nance
specification. U169. Mode List
7-348
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Removing foreign material There are foreign objects If there are foreign objects Detaching
between the fuser unit and between the fuser unit and and reat-
the IH unit. Or, the foreign the IH unit, or on the fuser taching the
objects are adhered on the belt, remove them. After that, Fuser Unit
fuser belt. reinstall the fuser unit.
3 Reinstalling the fuser unit The foreign objects adhere Clean the drawer connection Detaching
on the drawer connection terminal of the fuser unit. and reat-
terminal of the fuser unit. Check the pin of the drawer taching the
Or, the drawer connector is connector is not bent, and Fuser Unit
not inserted completely. replace the fuser unit if it is
bent. If the pin is normal, rein-
stall the fuser unit so that the
drawer connector is securely
connected.
the wire.
• Drawer connector of the
fuser unit - Feed image PWB
PWB
• IH unit - IH PWB
• IH PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the fuser unit The temperature cannot Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
be detected properly due and reat-
to the broken thermostat or taching the
the thermistor error. Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
the wire.
10 Replacing the IH PWB The IH PWB is faulty. Replace the IH PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
7-349
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6020: Center thermistor high temperature error

The center thermistor detects 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
to the thermistor error, etc. taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6030: Center thermistor broken

The center thermistor temperature is detected at less than 41°C / 104°F for 1s when the edge thermistor
detects 100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.

1 Removing foreign material There is foreign material Remove foreign objects if Detaching
between the fuser unit and they are on between the fuser and reat-
the IH unit. Or, foreign unit and the IH unit, or on the taching the
material adheres on the heat roller. Then, reinstall the Fuser Unit
heat roller. fuser unit.
7-350
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

connected.
the wire.
PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit The temperature is not Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
properly detected due to and reat-
the broken wire or the taching the
thermistor error in the fuser Fuser Unit
unit.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6050: Center thermistor low temperature error

The center thermistor detected less than 80°C / 176°F for 1s during printing.

1 Changing the wall outlet The power voltage Connect the power cord to a
descends by 10% or more different wall outlet if the
of the rated voltage when power supply voltage
printing. descends by 10% or more of
the rated voltage.
7-351
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

connected.
the wire.
PWB
unit.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
the wire.
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
the wire.
7-352
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 Replacing the IH unit The IH unit is faulty. Replace the IH unit.
C6120: Press thermistor high temperature error

The press thermistor detected 210°C / 410°F or more for 1s.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
to the thermistor error, etc. taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6130: Press thermistor broken

1. During warm-up, press thermistor detects less than 35°C / 95°F for 60s continuously.
7-353
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2. After finishing warm-up, press thermistor detects less than 35°C / 95°F for 10s continuously.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
unit.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6200: IH heating error 2

The detected temperature of the edge thermistor does not reach 80°C / 176°F within 60s after warm-up starts.
7-354
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
During the warm-up, the detected temperature of the edge thermistor does not reach the ready display tem-
perature within 420s after reaching 100°C / 212°F.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit Correct temperature can't Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
be detected due to the wire and reat-
breakage or the thermistor taching the
error in the fuser unit. Or, Fuser Unit
the fuser belt is faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
the wire.
7-355
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
the wire.
C6220: Edge thermistor high temperature error

The edge thermistor detected 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
4 Replacing the fuser unit Correct temperature can't Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
be detected due to the wire and reat-
breakage or the thermistor taching the
error in the fuser unit. Or, Fuser Unit
the fuser belt is faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-356
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Reattaching the edge fan The edge fan motor is not Reattach the edge fan motor. Fan
motor properly attached. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
C6230: Edge thermistor broken

The edge thermistor detects less than 41°C / 105.8°F for 1s continuously when the center thermistor detected
100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
to the heater broken or the taching the
thermistor error. Fuser Unit
7-357
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6250: Edge thermistor low temperature error

The edge thermistor detected less than 80°C / 176°F for 1s during printing.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-358
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
the wire.
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
the wire.
C6320: Middle thermistor high temperature error

The middle thermistor detected 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
7-359
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire short-circuit or the taching the
unit.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Reattaching the edge fan The edge fan motor is not Reattach the edge fan motor. Fan
motor properly attached. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
C6330: Middle thermistor broken

The middle thermistor detects less than 41°C / 105.8°F for 1s continuously when the center thermistor or the
edge thermistor detects 100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.

connected.
the wire.
PWB
7-360
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6410: Uninstalled fuser unit

The unit identification code is mismatched. The unit for other models is installed.

1 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit for other Install the fuser unit for the Detaching
models is installed. applicable models. and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
connected.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Update
the wire.
PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
7-361
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6600: Fuser belt rotation error

The belt rotation pulse is not input for 1.8s continuously.

connected.
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit parts such Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
as the fuser belt, the belt and reat-
rotation detecting system, taching the
or the belt rotation sensor Fuser Unit
are faulty
3 Applying the grease The load increases due to Execute U030 [Fuser] to Mainte-
the lack of grease on the check the fuser motor opera- nance
bushing or the gears for tion. If the fuser motor does Mode List
the fuser motor. not rotate smoothly, apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part no.:
7BG010009H) to the bush-
ings or the gears.
the wire.
PWB
PWB
PWB
7-362
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.
9 Replacing the fuser drive The fuser drive gear is Replace the fuser drive gear.
gear faulty.
C6610: Fuser pressure release sensor error

1. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn off even after 3s passed from instructing to reduce the
fuser pressure of the fuser pressure release motor or to move the JAM processing position.
2. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn on even after 6s passed from instructing to add the fuser
pressure of the fuser pressure release motor.
3. The lock signal of the fuser pressure release motor became Low for 200ms. (However, when shifting to
JAM process, stop the fuser pressure release motor only and not service call turns on in the area from the
stop position 500ms before to the stop position.)

connected.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Execute U030 [Fuser Mainte-
nected properly, or the wire Release]. If the fuser pres- nance
is faulty. sure release motor does not Mode List
operate properly, reconnect Service
the connectors of the follow- Manual -
ing wires. If there is not conti- Section 8
nuity, replace the wire. 'PWBs'
• Fuser pressure release
motor - Feed drive PWB
PWB
PWB
drive PWB
7-363
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty at Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
the fuser pressure release and reat-
mechanism or the fuser taching the
pressure release sensor . Fuser Unit
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Replacing the fuser pres- The fuser pressure release Replace the fuser pressure
sure release motor motor is faulty. release motor.
9 Replacing the gear in the The gear of the fuser pres- Replace the gears in the
fuser pressure releasing sure releasing mechanism fuser pressure releasing
system at the main unit at the main unit is faulty. mechanism at the main unit.
C6620: IH core motor rotation error

1. When detecting the home position, the IH position sensor does not turn on within 5s after the IH core motor
is driven under the condition of the IH position sensor off.
2. When detecting the home position, the IH position sensor does not turn off and on within 5s after the IH
core motor is driven under the condition of the IH position sensor on.
3. When relocating the home position for the small size paper, the IH position sensor does not turn off within
the predetermined pulse after the IH core motor is driven under the condition of the IH position sensor on.

1 Checking the IH unit The IH unit connector is Check if the connector pins of
not connected properly. the IH unit do not bend. If the
pins bend, fix them.
Next, reinstall the IH unit so
that the connector firmly con-
nects.
2 Checking the IH position- The IH positioning sensor Reattach the IH positioning
ing sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
3 Cleaning the IH positioning The IH positioning sensor Clean the IH positioning sen-
sensor cannot detect properly sor.
since it is dirty.
7-364
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• IH core motor (IH unit) -
Feed drive unit
PWB
5 Replacing the IH unit The IH positioning sensor Replace the IH unit.
or the IH core motor is
faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6740: IH PWB high temperature error (IGBT2)

The IGBT temperature acquired from the power microprocessor detected is 115°C / 239°F or more for 1s con-
tinuously.

1 Checking the IH PWB fan The connection of the IH Execute U037 [IH PWB] and
motor PWB fan motor, or the IH check the operation of the fan
PWB fan motor is faulty. motor of the IH PWB. If it is
not operating, move to the
step2 [connect fan motor of
the IH PWB]. If it is operating,
move to the step3 [replace
fan motor of the IH PWB].
2 Connecting the IH PWB The connector of the IH Reinsert the connector of the
fan motor PWB fan motor wire is not IH PWB fan motor.
inserted securely.
3 Replacing the IH PWB fan The IH PWB fan motor is Replace the IH PWB fan Fan
motor faulty. motor. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
7-365
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6760: Fuser IH input excessive electric current error

The input current obtained from the power microcomputer was 20A (100/120V) or 10A (200V) or more contin-
ued for 200ms.

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser belt is faulty. Detach the fuser unit and Detaching
check if the fuser belt is not and reat-
faulty. If there is any damage, taching the
replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
the wire.
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
7-366
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6770: IH low power error

After fuser unit is started to heat, fuser rotation pulse signal can't be detected continuously for 1s. Or, no elec-
tric power is supplied to IH fuser unit. (Electric power detection on the IH PWB detected a set electric power
value of 30% or less for a predetermined time.)

the wire.
PWB
2 Checking the fuser unit The fuser unit drawer con- If foreign objects adhere on Detaching
drawer connectors nectors are not properly the drawer pins of each and reat-
connected. drawer connector, clean the taching the
drawer pins. If the drawer Fuser Unit
pins are deformed, repair or
replace it.
• In case the drawer pins in
the fuser unit are faulty and
they cannot be repaired by
cleaning and fixing: Replace
the fuser unit.
the main unit are faulty and
the wire. (Part no.:
302ND4637_).
If the drawer pins are not

faulty, reinstall the fuser unit
into the main unit so that the
drawer connectors connect
each other firmly.
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
7-367
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
7 Checking the cause The input power is Change the input power.
depending on the input improper.
power
8 Replacing the IH unit The IH unit is faulty (The Replace the IH unit.
coil is broken).
9 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser belt rotation Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
does not transfer to the and reat-
belt rotation detection taching the
mechanism due to slip Fuser Unit
between the fuser belt and
the belt cap gear. The belt
rotation sensor in the fuser
unit is faulty. The thermo-
stat is broken.
C6900: Edge fan motor error

The lock-up was detected for 20s continuously when driving the fan motor.

1 Checking the edge fan The connector is not con- Execute U037 [Fuser Edge] Mainte-
motor nected properly. The wire to check the edge fan motor nance
is faulty. The fan does not operation. And, check if the Mode List
operate as paper size on paper size on the MP tray is Detaching
the MP tray is misdetected. detected properly. and reat-
If the edge fan motor does taching the
not operate properly or the Right
paper size on the MP tray is Cover
misdetected, reconnect the Assy
connector of the conveying
unit (edge fan motor) to the
relay connector at the main
unit.
2 Correcting the connector The connector pin deforms Correct the deformed con-
pins for connecting the at the machine right side nector pin for connecting the
right cover (conveying unit) (inside the right cover). right cover (conveying unit) at
the machine right side of the
main unit (inside the right
cover).
7-368
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• Edge fan motor - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
4 Replacing the edge fan The edge fan motor is Replace the edge fan motor. Fan
motor faulty. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6910: Engine firmware unexpected error

1. The engine stabilization control continued for 1 hour.
2. The feed motor does not drive even passing 3s or more when driving the drum motor or the developer K/
transfer belt motor.
3. Only the high voltage remote signal turned on under the condition that the drum is stopped.
4. The main charger bias turned off while the developer bias was on.

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
3 Checking the engine PWB The engine PWB is not Retighten the screws secur- Detaching
properly attached or con- ing the engine PWB so that it and reat-
nected. can ground securely, and taching the
reinsert the connectors all the Engine
way. PWB
7-369
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6920: Exit/IH fan motor error


1 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Execute U037 [Exit Paper IH Mainte-
nected properly, or the wire Coil]. If the following fan nance
is faulty. motor does not operate prop- Mode List
erly, clean the terminal of the Service
connector and reconnect the Manual -
connector. If there is no conti- Section 8
nuity, replace the wire. 'PWBs'
• Exit/IH front fan motor -
Feed image PWB
• Exit/IH middle fan motor -
Feed image PWB
• Exit/IH rear fan motor -
Feed image PWB
PWB
2 Checking the exit/IH fan The exit/IH fan motors do Clean the following fan Fan
motors not properly operate. motors, and remove foreign Motors
objects if they adhere on the Attach-
fan motor. If not repaired after able Direc-
that, replace the fan motor. tion
• Exit/IH front fan motor
• Exit/IH middle fan motor
• Exit/IH rear fan motor
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-370
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C6950: IH PWB communication error

1. Communication between the IH PWB and the engine PWB is not established in the initial communication.
(150ms interval x 10 times retries are performed)2. After the initial communication is established, communica-
tion between the IH PWB and the engine PWB is not established. (For 500ms)

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
nected properly. Or, the lowing wire connectors and Manual -
wire is faulty. (Power sup- reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
ply failure to the IH PWB or there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
communication error by the wire.
the grounding failure.) • Low voltage PWB - IH PWB
3 Checking the power supply The abnormal electric Plug the power cord into
voltage noise is mixed in the power another wall outlet.
supply voltage.
4 Checking the low voltage The fuse on the low volt- Check the continuity of the Detaching
PWB age PWB is broken. fuse (F002) on the low volt- and reat-
age PWB. Then, replace the taching the
low voltage PWB if there is Low Volt-
no continuity. age PWB
and reat-
taching the
IH PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C6980: Fuser unit EEPROM error

It is not possible to access the fuser unit EEPROM since it matches one of the following.
7-371
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser unit drawer con- If foreign objects adhere on Detaching
drawer connectors nectors are not properly the drawer pins of each and reat-
connected. drawer connector, clean the taching the
drawer pins. If the drawer Fuser Unit
pins are deformed, repair or
replace it.
the fuser unit are faulty and
the fuser unit.
the main unit are faulty and
the wire. (Part no.:
302ND4637_).
If the drawer pins are not

faulty, reinstall the fuser unit
into the main unit so that the
drawer connectors connect
each other firmly.
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6990: Fuser power source destination error

The information mismatches between the engine backup and the IH PWB.

1 Executing U169 The voltage setting at Set the destination same as Mainte-
U169 mismatches the volt- the voltage of the IH PWB at nance
age of the IH PWB. U169. Mode List
7-372
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7001: Container motor error

1. After the container motor is started, ready signal does not turn on even 2s passed.
2. After the container motor is stabilized, ready signal is kept off 2s continuously.

1 Replacing the toner con- The toner container locks Replace the toner container. Toner
tainer up and is not rotated. Container
Replace-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the toner con- The toner container drive Execute U030 [Container Mainte-
tainer drive parts parts are not operated Mix] to check the container nance
properly, or the excessive motor operation. If the con- Mode List
load is applied to it. tainer motor does not operate
properly, clean the drive
gears and the couplings in
the container drive unit and
apply the grease (EM-50LP,
Part no.: 7BG010009H) to
them.
the wire.
• Container motor - Feed
image PWB
4 Checking the toner con- The toner container motor Reattach the container motor Detaching
tainer motor is faulty. and reconnect the connector. and reat-
If not repaired, replace it. taching the
Container
Motor
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-373
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7101: T/C sensor K error

The output value of T/C sensor is not settled within +100 (Toner is not detected) or -1000 (sensor connector is
coming off) against the initial toner setting value which is stored in the EEPROM of the developer unit. And
this condition was detected 3 times continuously.

1 Reinstalling the developer The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit K so Detaching
unit properly installed. that the connector firmly con- and reat-
nects. taching the
Developer
Unit
the wire.
• Drum/developer relay PWB
- Feed image PWB
PWB
3 Replacing the drive gear The drive gear for the Replace the developer unit K
developer unit K is bro- drive gear.
ken. (The developer screw
does not rotate.)
4 Replacing the developer Developer unit K (T/C sen- Replace developer unit K. Detaching
unit sor K) is faulty. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
6 Replacing the drum/devel- The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer Detaching
oper relay PWB PWB is faulty. relay PWB. and reat-
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit')
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-374
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7200: Inner thermistor broken (developer)

Input sampling value of the T/C sensor K (machine inside thermistor) is over the standard value.

nects. taching the
Developer
Unit
the wire.
- Feed image PWB
taching the
Developer
Unit
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit')
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-375
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)

Input sampling value of the T/C sensor K (machine inside thermistor) is below the standard value.

nects. taching the
Developer
Unit
the wire.
- Feed image PWB
taching the
Developer
Unit
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit')
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-376
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7221: LSU thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or more.

replace the FFC.
PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU (LSU thermistor) Replace the LSU. Detaching
is faulty. and reat-
taching the
LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7231: LSU thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or less.

replace the FFC.
PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU (LSU thermistor) Replace the LSU. Detaching
is faulty. and reat-
taching the
LSU
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-377
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7241: Belt thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the belt thermistor is at the reference value or more.

Primary
Transfer
Unit
the wire.
connect PWB
Feed image PWB
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
5 Replacing the transfer con- The transfer connection Replace the transfer connec-
nection PWB PWB is faulty. tion PWB.
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7251: Belt thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the belt thermistor is at the reference value or less.

Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-378
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

the wire.
connect PWB
Feed image PWB
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7301: Toner motor K error

Toner supply motor drive stopped and waited for 0.1s when the pulse plate of the toner supply screw could not
detect the pulse for 2s during the toner supply motor operation. Even if these operations repeated 3 times
continuously, the pulse could not be detected.

1 Checking the toner supply The toner supply screw is Check if the toner is not
drive unit not rotated properly due to clogged inside the toner sup-
the excessive load. (The ply drive unit by rotating the
pulse plate is not rotated.) toner supply screw manually.
Then, clean the unit if neces-
sary.
the wire.
• Toner motor K - Feed image
PWB
3 Replacing the toner sup- Toner supply drive unit Replace the toner supply Detaching
ply drive unit (toner motor K or toner drive unit. and reat-
remaining sensor K or the taching the
toner agitation spring) is Toner Sup-
faulty. ply Drive
Unit
7-379
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB faulty. PWB.
C7320: Toner container detection connector error

Disconnection of the toner container detection connector was detected when closing the toner container
cover.

the wire.
• Container drive unit (RFID
PWB) - Feed image PWB
2 Checking the container The connector is not con- If the connector of the wire
drive unit nected properly, or the wire inside the container drive unit
is faulty. disconnects, reconnect it. If
not repaired, replace the con-
tainer drive unit.
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7420: Uninstalled primary transfer unit

1. Unit identification code does not match.
2. Unit for the other model is installed.

1 Replacing the primary The primary transfer unit Install the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit for other models is unit for the applicable mod- and reat-
installed. els. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
2 Reinstalling the primary The connector of the pri- Reinstall the primary transfer Detaching
transfer unit mary transfer unit is not unit so that the connector and reat-
firmly connected. firmly connects. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-380
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
Feed image PWB
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Update
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7470: Toner absorption fan motor error


the wire.
• Toner absorption fan motor -
Feed image PWB
2 Checking the toner The fan motor does not Clean the toner absorption Fan
absorption fan motor rotate properly since it is fan motor and check if the fan Motors
dirty. is rotated manually. Then, Attach-
reattach it. able Direc-
tion
3 Replacing the toner The toner absorption fan Execute U037 [Toner] to Fan
absorption fan motor motor is faulty. check the operation. If the Motors
toner absorption fan motor Attach-
does not properly operate, able Direc-
replace it. tion
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-381
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7480: Power source fan motor error


the wire.
• Power source fan motor -
Engine PWB
2 Checking the power The fan motor does not Clean the power source fan Fan
source fan motor rotate properly since it is motor and check if the fan is Motors
dirty. rotated manually. Then, reat- Attach-
tach it. able Direc-
tion
3 Replacing the power The power source fan Replace the power source Fan
source fan motor motor is faulty. fan motor if it does not oper- Motors
ate properly when executing Attach-
U037 [LVU]. able Direc-
tion
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7490: Exit fan motor error


the wire.
• Exit fan motor (Fuser drive
unit) - Feed drive PWB
2 Checking the exit fan The fan motor does not Clean the exit fan motor and Fan
motor rotate properly since it is check if the fan is rotated Motors
dirty. manually. Then, reattach it. Attach-
able Direc-
tion
7-382
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-8

3 Replacing the exit fan The exit fan motor is faulty. If the exit fan motor does not Fan
motor operate properly when exe- Motors
cuting U037 [Exit Cooling], Attach-
replace it. able Direc-
tion
PWB faulty.
C7601: Front ID sensor error

Dark potential error: Sensor output value (FrontDarkP, FrontDarkS) is less than 0.15V or bigger than 0.80V.
Bright potential error: FrontBrightS is less than FrontDarkS or FrontBrightP is less than FrontDarkP+0.5V.

1 Cleaning the front ID sen- The front ID sensor is dirty. Clean the front ID sensor sur-
sor face.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If Mainte-
shutter not operate properly. the ID sensor shutter does nance
the cleaning solenoid.
the wire.
• Front ID sensor - Feed drive
PWB
• Cleaning solenoid - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
4 Replacing the cleaning The cleaning solenoid is Replace the cleaning sole-
solenoid faulty. noid.
5 Checking the front ID sen- The front ID sensor is not Reattach the front ID sensor.
sor properly attached.
6 Replacing the front D sen- The front ID sensor is Check if the value of U465 Mainte-
sor faulty. [T7 CTD] is fluctuated before nance
and after Calibration, and Mode List
replace the front ID sensor if
it was not fluctuated (uncali-
brated).
7-383
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

transfer unit.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7602: Rear ID sensor error

Dark potential error: Sensor output value (RearDarkP, RearDarkS) is less than 0.15V or bigger than 0.80V.
Bright potential error: RearBrightS is less than RearDarkS or RearBrightP is less than RearDarkP+0.5V.

1 Cleaning the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is dirty. Clean the rear ID sensor sur-
sor face.
the wire.
• Rear ID sensor - Feed drive
PWB
• Cleaning solenoid - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
4 Replacing the cleaning The cleaning solenoid is Replace the cleaning sole-
solenoid faulty. noid.
5 Checking the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is not Reattach the rear ID sensor.
sor properly attached.
7-384
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

6 Replacing the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is Check if the value of U465 Mainte-
sor faulty. [T7 CTD] is fluctuated before nance
and after Calibration, and Mode List
replace the rear ID sensor if it
was not fluctuated (uncali-
brated).
transfer unit.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7611: Bias calibration read value error (Black)

The ID sensors cannot properly read the patch density on the primary transfer belt when executing Calibration
or the color adjustment.

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
2 (In case if the printout is The developing roller does Switch the lock lever up and Detaching
light) Checking the devel- not contact with the drum. down and return the devel- and reat-
oper unit oper roller to the setting posi- taching the
tion. Developer
If the developer roller does Unit
not return due to the break-
age of the lock lever or the
failure of the developer roller
pressure wire, replace the
developer unit.
7-385
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

3 (In case if the printout is The laser does not output Clean the LSU. If not Detaching
light) Cleaning / replacing properly from the LSU. Or, repaired, replace it. and reat-
the LSU. LSU dustproof glass is taching the
dirty. LSU
4 (In case if the printout is Condensation on the drum Execute the drum refresh. Adjust/
light) Improving the con- surface And next, set [On] at U339 Mainte-
densation of the drum sur- [Drum heater] to turn on the nance
face drum heater. Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
5 Cleaning the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the surface of the front
and rear ID sensors.
6 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute U464 [Calib]. Mainte-
nance
Mode List
transfer unit.
9 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is not prop- Reattach the front and rear ID
erly attached, or the con- sensors and reconnect the
nector is not properly connectors.
connected.
10 (When the image is too Proper current does not Reattach the main high volt-
light) Checking the main flow as the main high voltage PWB and the transfer
high voltage PWB / trans- age PWB or the contact high voltage PWB.
fer high voltage PWB point of the transfer high
voltage PWB is faulty.
11 (When the image is too The parts for the drum unit, In case if the image is too Mainte-
light) Checking the drum developer unit and LSU is light, clean the drum unit, nance
unit / developer unit / LSU dirty or worn out. developer unit and the LSU. parts
Or, replace them. replace-
ment pro-
cedures
7-386
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
est version. latest version. Update
the wire.
• Front ID sensor and Rear ID
PWB
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7800: Outer thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (outer thermistor) is at the reference value or
more.

the wire.
• Temperature/humidity sen-
sor - Engine PWB
2 Replacing the tempera- The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/
ture/humidity sensor sensor is faulty. humidity sensor.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-387
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (outer thermistor) is at the reference value or
less.

the wire.
• Temperature/humidity sen-
sor - Engine PWB
2 Replacing the tempera- The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/
ture/humidity sensor sensor is faulty. humidity sensor.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7901: Drum unit K EEPROM error


1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn the power switch and
EEPROM in the drum unit the main power switch off .
is faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not prop- Reinstall drum unit K to con- Detaching
erly installed. nect the connector firmly. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
the wire.
• Drum unit - Drum/devel-
oper relay PWB
- Feed image PWB
PWB
7-388
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in the drum Replace drum unit K. Detaching
unit is faulty. and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
5 Checking the connection EEPROM signal line of If the signal wire has a Service
of the EEPROMS in each some units are faulty ground fault, replace it. Manual -
unit grounded. • Signal wires (SCL, SDA) Section 8
from the EEPROMs in the 'PWBs'
drum unit and the developer
unit - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Signal wires (SCL, SDA)
from the EEPROMs in the pri-
mary transfer unit and the
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit')
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7911: Developer unit K EEPROM error

7-389
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn the power switch and
EEPROM in the developer the main power switch off .
unit is faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
nects. taching the
Developer
Unit
the wire.
- Feed image PWB
PWB
4 Replacing the developer The EEPROM in the devel- Replace developer unit K. Detaching
unit oper unit is faulty. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit')
7 Checking the feed image The feed image PWB is Replace the feed image
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-390
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7941: LSU EEPROM error

Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times. Writing data and reading data does not match 8
consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in the Turn the power switch and
LSU is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Checking the FFC FFC is not connected Clean the FFC terminals of Service
replace the FFC.
PWB
3 Replacing the LSU The APC PWB (LSU) is Replace the LSU. Detaching
faulty. and reat-
taching the
LSU
C7942: LSU EEPROM error 2

Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times. Writing data and reading data does not match 8
consecutive times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in the Turn the power switch and
LSU is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Checking the FFC FFC is not connected Clean the FFC terminals of Service
replace the FFC.
PWB
3 Replacing the LSU The APC PWB (LSU) is Replace the LSU. Detaching
faulty. and reat-
taching the
LSU
7-391
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C7970: Weight sensor error

The condition of the sensor output value was less than the specified value continued for 500ms.

1 Reinstalling the waste The waste toner box is not Reinstall the waste toner box Replacing
toner box properly installed. into the main unit slowly, and the Waste
then check if it moves verti- Toner Box
cally. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the wire The relay connector Realign the wire so that the Connec-
(engine PWB and waste wire of the relay connector at tion of
toner motor/weight sen- the waste toner box unit Relay
sor) is not connected prop- backside is not excessively Connector
erly or disconnected as strained. Then, reconnect the of Waste
excessive tensioning of the relay connector. Toner Box
wire located at the back Unit (Sec-
side of the waste toner box tion 4
unit during maintenance 'Detach-
work. ing and
reattach-
ing waste
toner box
unit)
3 Checking the weight sen- The connector is not prop- Reconnect the connector of
sor and the actuator erly connected. Or, the the weight sensor. And, cor-
actuator is not attached rect the actuator position.
properly.
4 Checking the spring for the The spring of the weight Reattach the spring for the
weight sensor sensor is not attached weight sensor located under
properly. the waste toner box unit.
5 Cleaning around the The weight sensor and Clean around the weight sen-
weight sensor surrounding parts are dirty. sor with an air-blower.
6 Executing U155 The calibration of the Execute the waste toner cali- Mainte-
weight sensor is not exe- bration at U155. nance
cuted properly. Mode List
7 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner box is Replace the waste toner box. Replacing
box faulty. the Waste
Toner Box
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
7-392
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C7980: Waste toner overflow (Waste toner full sensor error)

The waste toner full sensor detected full (lock) of the waste toner box for 4 times continuously.

1 Checking the waste toner The waste toner box is full. Detach and reattach the Replacing
box waste toner box and close the Waste
the waste toner box cover. If Toner Box
the waste toner box is full, (Opera-
replace it. tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Checking the waste toner The connector is not prop- Reconnect the connector of
full sensor erly connected. the waste toner full sensor.
3 Cleaning the waste toner The waste toner is clogged Clean inside the waste toner Detaching
box joint section at the waste toner joint box joint section of the main and reat-
section. drive unit. taching the
Main Drive
Unit
4 Checking the connection The waste toner box joint Realign the wire so that the Connec-
section and the waste wire of the relay connector at tion of
toner box are not properly the waste toner box unit Relay
connected. backside is not excessively Connector
strained. Then, reconnect the of Waste
relay connector. After that, Toner Box
reinstall the waste toner box Unit (Sec-
into the main unit. tion 4
'Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing waste
toner box
unit)
7-393
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Checking the operation of The weight sensor actua- When the voltage from the Detaching
the weight sensor actuator tor inside the waste toner 2nd pin of connector YC29 on and reat-
box unit does not operate the feed image PWB is not taching the
properly. '3.3V (full detection)', reattach Waste
the weight sensor actuator Toner Box
inside the waste toner box Unit
unit and check if it operates
properly. If not operating
properly, replace the waste
toner box unit.
7 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner full sensor Replace the waste toner for- Detaching
forwarding unit inside the waste toner forwarding unit when the volt- and reat-
warding unit misdetects. age from the 2nd pin of taching the
connector YC29 on the feed Main Drive
image PWB is '3.3V (full Unit
detection)'.
the wire.
drive PWB
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB faulty.
C8010: PH motor error 1

Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher (When punch unit is
installed)
1. The PH home position sensor does not turn on even 200ms passed when the PH motor drives.
2. The pulse plate does not count the specified pulse even 300ms passed after the punch operation was
started.
3. After correction operation starts, the punch unit does not stop at 2-pulse position from the PH home position
sensor turning on within 500ms. (If the PH home position sensor turns on, the processing finishes normally.)

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch unit does not
assembled properly. move manually, repair the
position where restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the PH cam The PH cam drive parts Reattach the punch cam
drive parts are not attached properly, drive parts. If not repaired,
or faulty. replace them.
7-394
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• PH motor - PH PWB
• PH home position sensor -
PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
4 Replacing the PH motor The PH motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
[Punch]. If the PH motor does nance
not operate properly, replace Mode List
it.
5 Checking the PH home The PH home position Execute U241 [Punch] > Mainte-
position sensor sensor is not properly [Punch HP]. If the PH home nance
attached, or it is faulty. position sensor does not Mode List
operate properly, reattach it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the PH firmware to Firmware
7 Replacing the PH PWB The PH PWB is faulty. Replace the PH PWB. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
Upgrade the firmware by and reat-
using the latest upgrade pack taching the
immediately after replacing DF PWB
the DF PWB. Firmware
Update

installed)
The positioning alignment of the home position is not completed within 3s when initializing or waiting the home
position.

operation.
7-395
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the PH cam The PH cam drive parts Reattach the PH cam drive
drive parts are not attached properly, parts. If not repaired, replace
or faulty. them.
the wire.
• PH PWB - DF PWB
it.
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
Update

installed)
The home position detection does not turn off within 50ms when initializing the home position.

operation.
2 Checking the PH cam The PH cam drive parts Reattach the PH cam drive
drive parts are not attached properly, parts. If not repaired, replace
or faulty. them.
7-396
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• PH PWB - DF PWB
it.
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
Update
C8090: DF paddle motor error

Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher
1. The DF paddle sensor does not turn on even 1s passed when the DF paddle motor drives.
2. The DF paddle sensor does not turn off even if it drives for 1s from on condition.

1 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle drive parts Reattach the DF paddle drive
drive parts are not properly attached, parts. If not repaired, replace
or it is faulty. them.
the wire.
• DF paddle motor - DF PWB
• DF paddle sensor - DF
PWB
7-397
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Beat]. If the DF paddle motor nance
replace it.
4 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Execute U241 [Finisher] > Mainte-
sensor faulty. [Lead Paddle]. If the DF pad- nance
dle sensor does not operate Mode List
properly, replace it.
Update
C8100: DF exit release motor error

1. The DF bundle exit sensor does not turn on even 1s passed when the DF exit release motor drives.
2. The DF bundle exit sensor does not turn off even if drives for 1s from on condition.

1 Checking the DF bundle The exit guide in the DF Repair the DF bundle exit
exit unit bundle exit unit is unit.
deformed.
2 Checking the DF bundle The DF bundle exit unit Reattach the DF bundle exit
exit unit drive parts drive parts are not properly unit drive parts. If not
attached, or they are faulty. repaired, replace them.
the wire.
• DF exit release motor - DF
PWB
• DF bundle exit sensor - DF
PWB
4 Replacing the DF exit The DF exit release motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
release motor is faulty. [Eject Unlock(HP)]. If the DF nance
exit release motor does not Mode List
operate properly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF bundle The DF bundle exit sensor Reattach the DF bundle exit Mainte-
exit sensor is not attached properly or sensor, then check the sen- nance
faulty. sor operation by executing Mode List
U241. If the DF bundle exit
sensor does not operate
7-398
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Update
C8110: DF shift motor 1 error

DF shift sensor 1 does not turn on even if shifting 160mm when driving DF shift motor 1.

1 Checking the front shift The front shift guide is not If the front shift guide does
guide assembled properly. not move manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the front shift The front shift guide drive Reattach the front shift guide
guide drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If not repaired,
attached, or they are faulty. replace them.
the wire.
• DF shift motor 1 - DF PWB
• DF shift sensor 1 - DF PWB
4 Replacing DF shift motor 1 DF shift motor 1 is faulty. Replace DF shift motor 1 if it Mainte-
does not operate properly nance
when checking the operation Mode List
at U240.
5 Checking DF shift sensor 1 DF shift sensor 1 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 1, Mainte-
properly attached, or it is then execute U241 [Finisher] nance
faulty. > [Shift Front HP]. If DF shift Mode List
sensor 1 does not operate
Update
7-399
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8120: DF shift motor 2 error

DF shift sensor 2 does not turn on even if shifting 160mm when driving DF shift motor 2.

1 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide does not
guide assembled properly. move manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide drive Reattach the rear shift guide
the wire.
• DF shift motor 2 - DF PWB
• DF shift sensor 2 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF shift motor 2 DF shift motor 2 is faulty. Replace DF shift motor 2 if it Mainte-
does not operate properly nance
at U240.
5 Checking DF shift sensor 2 DF shift sensor 2 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 2, Mainte-
properly attached, or it is then execute U241 [Finisher] nance
faulty. > [Shift Tail HP]. If DF shift Mode List
Update
C8130: DF shift release motor error

1. The DF shift release sensor does not turn on even 1s passed when the DF shift release motor drives.
2. The DF shift release sensor does not turn on even if the DF shift release motor drives for 3s toward the
direction of the HP detection.
3. The DF shift release sensor does not turn off even if it drives for 3s toward the direction of the HP detection
off.

1 Firmware upgrade If the finisher is not Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
detected, the firmware is latest version while opening Update
faulty. the DF front cover.
7-400
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide does not
guide assembled properly. move manually, repair the
operation.
3 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide drive Reattach the rear shift guide
the wire.
• DF shift release motor - DF
PWB
• DF shift release sensor - DF
PWB
5 Checking the DF shift The DF shift release motor Replace the DF shift release Mainte-
release motor is faulty. motor if it does not operate nance
properly when checking the Mode List
operation at U240.
6 Checking the DF shift The DF shift release sen- Reattach the DF shift release Mainte-
release sensor sor is not properly sensor, then execute U241 nance
attached, or it is faulty. [Finisher] > [Shift Unlock HP]. Mode List
If the DF shift release sensor
replace it.
Update
C8140: DF tray motor error 1

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
The DF tray sensor or the DF tray upper side sensor does not turn on after passing 30s when ascending the
DF main tray or the DF tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray / DF tray If the DF main tray or the DF
/ DF tray is not assembled properly. tray does not move up and
down manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray / DF tray Reattach the DF main tray /
/ DF tray drive parts drive parts are not properly DF tray drive parts. If not
7-401
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
4 Replacing the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor [Tray]. If the DF tray motor nance
replace it.
5 (When installing the 1000- The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
sheet finisher) Checking nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the wire.
• DF tray sensor 1 - DF PWB
6 (When installing the 4000- The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the fol- Service
sheet finisher) Checking nected properly, or the wire lowing wire connectors and Manual -
the wire.
the wire.
• DF tray upper surface sen-
sor 1 - DF PWB
sor 2 - DF PWB
8 (When installing the 1000- DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, Mainte-
sheet finisher) Checking properly attached, or it is then execute U241 [Finisher] nance
DF tray sensor 1 faulty. > [Tray U-Limit]. If DF tray Mode List
9 (When installing the 4000- DF tray sensors 1, 2 are Reattach DF tray sensor 1 or Mainte-
sheet finisher) Checking not properly attached, or 2, then execute U241 [Fin- nance
DF tray sensor 1, 2 they are faulty. isher] > [Tray U-Limit] or [Tray Mode List
HP2]. If DF tray sensor 1 or 2
replace it.
10 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper surface sen- Reattach DF tray upper sur- Mainte-
side sensors 1, 2 sors 1, 2 are not properly face sensor 1 or 2, then exe- nance
attached, or they are faulty. cute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray Mode List
Top]. If DF tray upper surface
sensor 1 or 2 does not oper-
ate properly, replace it.
7-402
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Update

Turning on/off of DF paper holding sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing 4s when ascending the
DF tray.

1 Checking the DF tray The DF tray is not assem- If the DF tray does not move
bled properly. up and down manually, repair
the position where restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the DF tray drive The DF tray drive parts are Reattach the DF tray drive
parts not properly attached, or parts. If not repaired, replace
they are faulty. them.
the wire.
• DF paper holding sensor 1 -
DF PWB
• DF paper holding sensor 2 -
DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor if Mainte-
motor it does not operate properly nance
at U240.
5 Checking DF paper hold- DF paper holding sensors Reattach DF paper holding Mainte-
ing sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly sensor 1 or 2, then check the nance
attached, or they are faulty. sensor operation by execut- Mode List
ing U241. If DF paper holding
Update
7-403
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Remarks: If the error is detected during job, the tray full is displayed and this service
call will not come up.
Turning on and off of DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing
5s when descending the DF tray.

the operation.
the wire.
sor 1 - DF PWB
sor 2 - DF PWB
at U240.
5 Checking DF tray sensor 1 DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, Mainte-
properly attached. then check the sensor opera- nance
tion by executing U241. If DF Mode List
tray sensor 1 does not oper-
6 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper side sensors Reattach DF tray upper sur- Mainte-
side sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly face sensor 1 or 2, then nance
attached. check the sensor operation Mode List
by executing U241. If DF tray
upper surface sensor 1 or 2
replace it.
Update
7-404
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Turning on and off of DF tray sensors 1, 2 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after pass-
ing 5s when descending the DF main tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not
assembled properly. move up and down manually,
repair the position where
restricts the operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive Reattach the DF main tray
drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If not repaired,
the wire.
sor 1 - DF PWB
sor 2 - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
replace it.
5 Checking DF tray sensors DF tray sensors 1, 2 are Reattach DF tray sensor 1 or Mainte-
1, 2 not properly attached, or 2, then execute U241 [Fin- nance
they are faulty. isher] > [Tray U-Limit] or [Tray Mode List
HP2]. If DF tray sensor 1 or 2
replace it.
6 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper surface sen- Reattach DF tray upper sur- Mainte-
side sensors 1, 2 sors 1, 2 are not properly face sensor 1 or 2, then exe- nance
attached, or they are faulty. cute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray Mode List
Top]. If DF tray upper surface
Update
7-405
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8160: DF tray motor error (3)

DF tray sensor 3 does not turn on after passing 30s when descending the DF tray.

the operation.
the wire.
• DF tray sensor 3 -DF PWB
4 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
replace it.
5 Checking DF tray sensor 3 DF tray sensor 3 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 3, Mainte-
properly attached, or it is then check the sensor opera- nance
faulty. tion by executing U241. If DF Mode List
tray sensor 3 does not oper-
Update

DF tray sensors 4, 5 does not turn on after passing 60s when descending the DF main tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not
assembled properly. move up and down manually,
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive Reattach the DF main tray
drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If not repaired,
7-406
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• DF tray sensor 4 -DF PWB
or,
• DF tray sensor 5 (when
installing the folding unit) -DF
PWB
4 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
replace it.
5 Checking DF tray sensors DF tray sensors 4, 5 are Reattach DF tray sensor 4 or Mainte-
4, 5 not properly attached, or DF tray sensor 5 (when nance
they are faulty. installing the folding unit), Mode List
then execute U241 [Finisher]
> [Tray L-Limit] or [ Tray L-
Limit(BL)]. If DF tray sensor 4
or 5 does not operate prop-
erly, replace it.
Update

The DF tray sensor does not turn on after passing 4s when descending the DF tray.

the operation.
7-407
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• DF tray sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor if Mainte-
at U240.
5 Checking the DF tray sen- The DF tray sensor is not Reattach the DF tray sensor, Mainte-
sor properly attached, or it is then check the sensor opera- nance
faulty. tion by executing U241. If the Mode List
DF tray sensor does not
Update
C8170: DF side registration motor 1 error 1

The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registra- If the DF side registration
registration guide tion guide is not assem- front guide does not move
bled properly. manually, repair the position
where restricts the operation.
2 Checking the front DF side The DF side registration Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive front guide drive parts are tration front guide drive parts.
parts not properly attached, or If not repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
the wire.
- DF PWB
1 - DF PWB
7-408
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tration motor 1 1 is faulty. [Width Test(A3)] or [Width nance
Test(LD)]. If DF side registra- Mode List
tion motor 1 does not operate
5 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration sensor Reattach DF side registra- Mainte-
tion sensor 1 1 is not properly attached, tion sensor 1, then execute nance
or it is faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Width Mode List
Front HP]. If DF side registra-
tion sensor 1 does not oper-
Update

J6810/J6811/J6812 (Front DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registra- If the DF side registration
registration guide tion guide is not assem- front guide does not move
bled properly. manually, repair the position
2 Checking the front DF side The DF side registration Reattach the front DF side
registration guide drive front guide drive parts are registration guide drive parts.
parts not properly attached, or
they are faulty.
3 Replacing the front DF The front DF side registra- Replace the front DF side
side registration guide tion guide drive parts are registration guide drive parts.
drive parts faulty.
the wire.
- DF PWB
1 - DF PWB
7-409
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tion motor 1 1 is faulty. [Width Test(A3)] or [Width nance
or it is faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Width Mode List
Front HP]. If DF side registra-
tion sensor 1 does not oper-
Update

The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registra- If the DF side registration rear
registration guide tion guide is not assem- guide does not move manu-
bled properly. ally, repair the position where
2 Checking the rear DF side The DF side registration Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive rear guide drive parts are tration rear guide drive parts.
parts not properly attached, or If not repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
the wire.
- DF PWB
2 - DF PWB
4 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tration motor 2 2 is faulty. [Width Test(A3)] or [Width nance
7-410
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

or it is faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail Mode List
HP]. If DF side registration
Update

J6910/J6911/J6912 (Rear DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registra- If the DF side registration rear
registration guide tion guide is not assem- guide does not move manu-
bled properly. ally, repair the position where
2 Checking the rear DF side The side registration rear Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive guide drive parts are not tration rear guide drive parts.
parts properly attached, or they If not repaired, replace them.
are faulty.
the wire.
- DF PWB
2 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration motor Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
tion motor 2 2 is faulty. [Width Test(A3)] or [Width nance
5 Checking DF side registra- DF width adjustment sen- Reattach DF side registra- Mainte-
tion sensor 2 sor 2 is not installed prop- tion sensor 2, then execute nance
erly. Or, it is faulty. U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail Mode List
HP]. If DF side registration
7-411
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Update
C8210: DF staple motor front/rear error

The home position could not be detected after passing 3s when replacing to the home position at the initial
operation.

1 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple unit does not
unit assembled properly. move front and back manu-
ally, repair the position where
2 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit drive Reattach the DF staple unit
unit drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If not repaired,
the wire.
• DF staple motor - DF PWB
• DF staple sensor - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Sta- Mainte-
motor faulty. ple]. If the DF staple motor nance
replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
DF Staple
Unit
5 Checking the DF staple The DF staple motor is not Reattach the DF staple sen- Detaching
sensor properly attached, or it is sor. Then, replace the DF sta- and reat-
faulty. ple unit if the sensor is not taching the
fixed. DF Staple
Unit
Update
7-412
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8230: DF staple motor error 1

DF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: after the
motor is started, home position can't be detected even 600ms passed.)

1 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple can't be done
unit assembled properly. without paper jam, repair the
operation.
the wire.
• DF staple unit - DF PWB
3 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
unit and reat-
taching the
DF Staple
Unit
Update
C8250: DF main tray error 4

The lock-up detection signal is 0.7V or less for 10s continuously while driving the DF tray motor.

the operation.
the wire.
7-413
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

at U240.
Update
C8260: DF middle motor HP detection error

J790X (Middle paddle jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle drive parts Reattach or replace the DF
drive parts are not properly attached, paddle drive parts.
or it is faulty.
the wire.
• DF paddle sensor - DF
PWB
3 Replacing the DF middle The DF middle motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Mid- Mainte-
motor faulty. dle(H)] or [Middle(L)]. If the nance
DF middle motor does not Mode List
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Reattach the DF paddle sen- Mainte-
sensor not properly attached, or it sor, then execute U241 [Fin- nance
is faulty. isher] > [Lead Paddle]. If the Mode List
DF paddle sensor does not
Update
7-414
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8300: Main program error / BF unit communication error

Object: 4000-sheet finisher with the folding unit
After confirming connection with the holding unit, the communication has cut off.

1 Checking the BF set sen- The BF set sensor is not Reattach the BF set sensor.
sor attached properly.
the wire.
• BF PWB - DF PWB
3 Replacing the BF set sen- The BF set sensor is faulty. Execute U241 [Booklet] > Mainte-
sor [Set]. If the BF set sensor nance
replace it.
Update
C8310: BF side registration motor 2 error

BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the upper BF The upper BF side regis- If the BF side registration
side registration guide tration guide is not assem- upper guide does not move
bled properly. front and back manually,
2 Checking the upper BF The BF side registration Reattach the BF side regis-
side registration guide upper guide drive parts are tration upper guide drive
drive parts not properly attached, or parts. If not repaired, replace
7-415
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
- BF PWB
2 - BF PWB
4 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration motor Replace BF side registration Mainte-
tration motor 2 2 is faulty. motor 2 if it does not operate nance
operation at U240.
5 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration sensor Reattach BF side registration Mainte-
tion sensor 2 2 is not properly attached, sensor 2, then execute U241 nance
or it is faulty. [Booklet] > [Width Down HP]. Mode List
If BF side registration sensor
2 does not operate properly,
replace it.
C8320: BF adjustment motor error

At the initialization, turning on of the BF adjustment sensor is not detected after 2.5s passes.

1 Checking the BF shift belt The BF shift belt is not If the BF shift belt is not oper-
assembled properly. ated manually, repair the part
that restricts the operation.
2 Checking the BF shift belt The BF shift belt drive Reattach the BF shift belt
drive parts parts are not properly drive parts. If the belt comes
attached, or they are faulty. off, reattach it. If not repaired,
replace the BF shift belt drive
parts.
the wire.
• BF adjusting motor 1, 2 - BF
PWB
• BF adjusting sensor 1, 2 -
BF PWB
7-416
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Replacing BF adjustment BF adjustment motors 1, 2 Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motors 1, 2 are faulty. [Bundle Down] or [Bundle nance
Up]. If DF adjusting motor 1 Mode List
or 2 does not operate prop-
erly, replace it.
5 Checking BF adjustment BF adjustment sensors 1, Reattach BF adjusting sensor Mainte-
sensors 1, 2 2 are not properly 1 or 2, then execute U241 nance
attached, or they are faulty. [Booklet] > [Bundle Down HP] Mode List
or [Bundle Up HP]. If BF
adjusting sensor 1 or 2 does
not operate properly, replace
it.
C8330: BF blade motor error

The BF blade sensor does not turn on after passing 3s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the BF blade The BF blade is not If the BF blade does not oper-
assembled properly. ation manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the BF blade The BF blade drive parts Reattach the BF blade drive
drive parts are not properly attached, parts. If not repaired, replace
or they are faulty. them.
the wire.
• BF blade motor - BF PWB
• BF blade sensor - BF PWB
4 Replacing the BF blade The BF blade motor is Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Blade]. If the BF blade motor nance
replace it.
5 Checking the BF blade The BF blade sensor is not Reattach the BF blade sen- Mainte-
sensor properly attached. sor, then execute U241 nance
[Booklet] > [Blade HP]. If the Mode List
BF blade sensor does not
7-417
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8340: BF staple motor error 1

BF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: after the
motor is started, home position can't be detected even 600ms passed.)

1 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit is not If the BF staple unit does not
unit assembled properly. operation manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit drive Reattach the BF staple unit
the wire.
• BF staple unit - DF PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple motor is Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
unit faulty. [Staple]. If the BF staple nance
erly, replace the BF staple
unit.
C8350: BF side registration motor 1 error

BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 1s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the lower BF The lower BF side registra- If the BF side registration
side registration guide tion guide is not assem- lower guide does not opera-
bled properly. tion manually, repair the posi-
tion where restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the lower BF The BF side registration Reattach the BF side regis-
side registration guide lower guide drive parts are tration lower guide drive
drive parts not properly attached, or parts. If not repaired, replace
7-418
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
- BF PWB
1 - BF PWB
4 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration motor Replace BF side registration Mainte-
tration motor 1 1 is faulty. motor 1 if it does not operate nance
operation at U240.
5 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration sensor Reattach BF side registration Mainte-
tion sensor 1 1 is not properly attached, sensor 1, then execute U241 nance
or it is faulty. [Booklet] > [Width Up HP]. If Mode List
replace it.
C8360: BF main motor error

The lock-up signal was detected for 1s continuously during the motor operation.

1 Checking the BF convey- The BF conveying roller is If the BF conveying roller is
ing roller not assembled properly. not rotated manually, repair
the part that restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the BF convey- The BF conveying roller Reattach the BF conveying
ing roller drive parts drive parts are not properly roller drive parts. If not
the wire.
• BF main motor - BF PWB
4 Replacing the BF main The BF main motor is Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Blade]. If the BF blade motor nance
replace it.
7-419
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8370: BF staple motor error 2

BF staple JAM is detected 2 times continuously. (The condition of JAM detection for the second time: during
the motor is operating, home position can't be detected even 600ms passed.)

1 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit is not If the BF staple unit does not
unit assembled properly. operation manually, repair the
operation.
2 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit drive Reattach the BF staple unit
the wire.
• BF staple unit - DF PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple motor is Execute U240 [Booklet] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Staple]. If the BF staple nance
erly, replace it.
5 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple unit is faulty. Replace the BF staple unit.
unit
C8410: PH slide motor error 1

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher with the punch unit
The PH slide sensor does not turn on after shifting 30mm when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section
assembled properly. does not move front and back
manually, repair the position
2 Checking the PH drive The PH drive parts are not Reattach the PH drive parts.
parts attached properly, or faulty. If not repaired, replace them.
the wire.
• PH slide motor - PH PWB
• PH slide sensor - PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
7-420
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Replacing the PH slide The PH slide motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Punch Move]. If the PH slide nance
erly, replace the DF staple
unit.
5 Checking the PH slide sen- The PH slide sensor is not Reattach the PH slide sensor, Mainte-
sor properly attached, or it is then check the sensor opera- nance
faulty. tion by executing U241. If the Mode List
PH slide sensor does not
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
Update
C8420: PH slide motor error 2

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher with the punch unit
The paper edge cannot be detected even if shifting 30mm when detecting the paper edge.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section
assembled properly. does not move front and back
manually, repair the position
2 Checking the PH drive The PH drive parts are not Reattach the PH drive parts.
parts attached properly, or faulty. If not repaired, replace them.
the wire.
• PH slide motor - PH PWB
• PH paper edge sensor 1, 2 -
PH PWB
• PH PWB - DF PWB
7-421
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Replacing the PH slide The PH slide motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > Mainte-
motor faulty. [Punch Move]. If the PH slide nance
erly, replace the DF staple
unit.
5 Checking the PH paper PH paper edge sensors 1, Reattach PH paper edge sen- Mainte-
edge sensors 1, 2 2 are not properly sor 1 or 2, then check the nance
attached, or they are faulty. sensor operation by execut- Mode List
ing U241. If PH paper edge
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
Update
C8430: Main program error / Punch unit communication error

installed)
The communication could not succeed after confirming the connection with the punch unit.

the wire.
• PH PWB - DF PWB
and reat-
taching the
PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/
D Installa-
tion Guide)
7-422
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Update
C8500: Main program error / Mail Box communication error

Object: 4000-sheet finisher with the mail box
The communication failed after confirming the connection with the mail box.

1 Resetting the main power The PWB malfunctions. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
the wire.
• MT PWB - DF PWB
Update
C8510: MB conveying motor error 1

The MT home position sensor does not turn on after passing 10s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying roller is If the MT conveying roller is
operation.
7-423
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
PWB
MT PWB
3 Replacing the MT convey- The MT conveying motor is Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
ing motor faulty. [Conv]. If the MT conveying nance
erly, replace it.
4 Checking the MT home The MT home position is Reattach the MT home posi- Mainte-
position sensor not properly attached, or it tion sensor, then execute nance
is faulty. U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor Mode List
HP]. If the MT home position
C8520: MB conveying motor error 2

The MT home position sensor does not turn off after passing 2s during the standby operation.

1 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying roller is If the MT conveying roller is
operation.
2 Checking the MT convey- The MT conveying roller Reattach the MT conveying
ing roller drive parts drive parts are not properly roller drive parts.
attached, or they are faulty.
3 Replacing the MT convey- The MT conveying roller Replace the MT conveying
ing roller drive parts drive parts are faulty. roller drive parts.
the wire.
PWB
MT PWB
7-424
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

5 Replacing the MT convey- The MT conveying motor is Execute U240 [Mail Box] > Mainte-
ing motor faulty. [Conv]. If the MT conveying nance
erly, replace it.
6 Checking the MT home The MT home position is Reattach the MT home posi- Mainte-
position sensor not properly attached, or it tion sensor, then execute nance
is faulty. U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor Mode List
HP]. If the MT home position
C8800: Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)

1. When turning on the power, there was an error in the main program.
2. The communication error between the Engine and DF is detected 10 times continuously.
3. The ready signal is not notified from the DF within 6s after the communication starts.

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start Turn the power switch and
up properly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the DP firmware to Firmware
3 Reinstalling the finisher The finisher is not installed Reinstall the finisher in the
properly in the main unit. main unit. At that time, as for
Or, the drawer connector the inner finisher, confirm the
pins between the finisher finisher is completely inserted
and the main unit are all the way into the main unit
deformed or damaged. and then it is fixed with the
screw. If the issue is not
resolved after that, check the
drawer connector pins and if
deformed or damaged,
replace the drawer connector.
the wire.
• DF PWB - Engine PWB
7-425
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Update
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C8900: DF backup error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously.

the wire.
• DF PWB - Engine PWB
Update
7-426
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C8930: BF unit backup error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously.

the wire.
• BF PWB - DF PWB
C9000: Main program error / DP communication error

Object: Document processor
The document processor cannot be communicated.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware version Upgrade the firmware for the Firmware
between the main unit and main unit and the document Update
the document processor processor to the latest ver-
mismatches. sion.
the wire.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-427
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
C9040: DP lift motor ascend error

Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Turning on of the DP lift upper limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift
motor ascend drive. That status was continued 5 times or more.

1 Checking the original lift The original lift plate is not If the original lift plate does
plate attached properly. Or, the not move up and down manu-
fulcrum located at the back ally, repair the position where
side of the machine for the there is stuck. If damaged,
original lift plate is broken. replace it.
the wire.
• DP lift upper limit sensor -
DP PWB
3 Replacing the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is faulty. Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If Mainte-
the DP lift motor does not nance
operate properly, replace it. Mode List
4 Checking the DP lift upper The DP lift upper limit sen- Reattach the DP lift upper Mainte-
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor and execute nance
attached, or it is faulty. U244 [Lift U-Limit]. If the sen- Mode List
sor does not operate prop-
erly, replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C9050: DP lift motor descend error

Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Turning on of the DP lift lower limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift
motor descend drive. (The recovery is 3 times.)

1 Checking the original lift The original lift plate is not If the original lift plate does
plate attached properly. Or, the not move up and down manu-
fulcrum located at the back ally, repair the position where
side of the machine for the there is stuck. If damaged,
original lift plate is broken. replace it.
7-428
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• DP lift lower limit sensor -
DP PWB
3 Replacing the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is faulty. Execute U243 [Lift Motor]. If Mainte-
the DP lift motor does not nance
operate properly, replace it. Mode List
4 Checking the DP lift lower The DP lift lower limit sen- Reattach the DP lift lower Mainte-
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor and execute nance
attached, or it is faulty. U244 [Lift L-Limit]. If the sen- Mode List
sor does not operate prop-
erly, replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C9060: DP EEPROM error

Object: Document processor
The writing data and the reading data into the EEPROM mismatch.

1 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM on Detaching
erly installed. the DP PWB. and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the Detaching
DP PWB, then execute U411. and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-429
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
C9070: DP - SHD communication error

The communication error between the DP PWB and the DP SHD PWB is detected during the communication.

the wire.
PWB
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C9080: LED failure detection

For internal count
After 4 blocks of the LED lamps of the DPCIS are lit when turning on the power, the acquired peak value of
some blocks is the reference value or less.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp of the Execute U203 to confirm that Mainte-
DPCIS does not light. the LED lamp of the DPCIS nance
does not light. Go to the next Mode List
step.
the wire.
4 Executing U411 DP scanning is not prop- Execute U411 [DP Mainte-
erly adjusted. FD(ChartB)] and [DP nance
FD(ChartA)]. Mode List
5 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then Detaching
execute U091 and U411. and reat-
taching the
DP CIS
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
7-430
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

PWB
C9180: DP feed-shift motor error

Remarks: When detecting the DP feed-shift motor error (C9180) (up to 2 times),
display J9002.
HP can't be detected even after the retrying process for the HP detection of the DP feed-shift guide for 3 times
continuously.
* HP detection of the DP feed-shift guide: When the DP feed-shift motor moves to HP, if HP can't be detected
even driving the DP feed-shift motor for 1 round, the retry is done.

1 Removing the original The original accordion jam Remove the original which is
in the guide between the stuck in the guide between
DP reversing tray and the the DP reversing tray and DP
DP registration roller (The registration roller.
position is not visible when
the DP upper cover is
opened)
2 Cleaning the original con- Sticky foreign objects Clean the original conveying
veying guide. adhere to the original con- guide.
veying guide
3 Resetting the main power The DP feed-shift motor is Turn the power switch and
not controlled correctly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
4 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is After removing the DP feed-
motor not rotated correctly. Or, shift motor and repair it by
there is an excess load. rotating the drive section
manually, reattach it.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the connector terminal Service
nected properly, or the wire of the wire and reconnect. If Manual -
is faulty. there is no continuity, replace Section 8
the wire. 'PWBs'
?DP feed-shift motor - DP
PWB
?DP feed-shift sensor - DP
PWB
7 Replacing the DP feed- The DP feed-shift motor is Replace the DP feed-shift
shift motor faulty. motor.
7-431
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

8 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift sensor is Reattach the DP feed-shift
sensor not attached properly or sensor. If not repaired,
faulty. replace it.
and reat-
taching the
DF PWB
C9500: Image processing PWB error (Scanner)

replace the FFC.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
C9510: Image processing circuit error (DP)

2 Checking the connection The SATA cable is not Reconnect the connector of Service
properly connected, or it is the following SATA cable. If Manual -
faulty. there is no continuity, replace Section 8
the SATA cable. 'PWBs'
• DP SHD PWB - DP relay
PWB
PWB
PWB faulty.
7-432
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
C9540: Backup data error

When multiple parts are replaced at the same time, the internal data is changed and it interferes with the
machine operation. Consequently, the main unit cannot recover.

1 Checking the PWB Multiple PWBs were Recover to the original, if 2 or
replaced at the same time. more of the following related
parts were replaced at the
same time.
• Related parts: Memory,
each PWB
2 Checking the unit Multiple units were Be sure not to perform the
replaced at the same time. following works at the same
time when the memory or
each PWB is replaced.
• Replacing the drum unit or
the developer unit
• Relocating the drum units to
other color's position inside a
main unit
7-433
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) System Error (Fxxxx)
Error code Contents

F000 Communication error between the main unit and CPU
F010 Program read error (SSD)
F020 System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
F021 System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
F022 System memory error (RAM read/write error, or ASIC memory error)
F040 Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between
the controller and the print engine)
F041 Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
F050 Engine main program error
F051 Scanner engine program error
F052 Panel engine program error
F14E Error detection at FAX control section
F186 Abnormal detection in the Video control section
F278 Error detection of the secondary power supply
Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU
The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main PWB and the operation panel
main PWB is unavailable.

1 Resetting the main power The communication Turn off the power switch and
between the main PWB the main power switch. After
and the operation panel 5 seconds, turn on the main
main PWB is faulty. power switch and the power
switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the below wire, the ter- Service
nected properly. Or, the minal of SATA cable connec- Manual -
wire or the SATA cable is tor and reconnect them. If Section 8
faulty. there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire.
• Main PWB - Operation
panel main PWB
3 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the Mainte-
faulty. backup RAM data. nance
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-434
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
F010: Program read error (SSD)

The garbled 2bit data was detected during the program read from the flash memory.

1 (When the service call The firmware is not stored Insert the USB memory Firmware
error appears after replac- in the SSD. device containing all released Update
ing the SSD) Replacing the firmware into the main unit,
SSD along the correct pro- and turn the main power on.
cedures
2 Checking the SSD (if lit An SSD out of specifica- Install the SSD matching the
after replacing the SSD) tion is installed. memory capacity specifica-
tion.
switch.
4 Checking the SSD The SSD is not installed Check if there is an error on Detaching
properly. the terminal of the SSD and and reat-
Clean. After that, reconnect taching the
SSD. SSD
faulty. there is no continuity, replace "PWBs"
the wire.
panel main PWB
Mode List
7 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Execute U026 to back up the Mainte-
SSD data. After that, replace nance
SSD and turn on the power Mode List
while USB memory that con- Detaching
tains the firmware for the and reat-
appropriate model is inserted taching the
to the main unit. SSD
7-435
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.

switch.
Mode List
F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for main PWB ASIC at start up.

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn off the power switch and
properly start up. the main power switch. After
5 seconds, turn on the main
switch.
Mode List
7-436
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
F022: System memory error (RAM read/write error, or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for DP relay PWB ASIC at start up.

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn off the power switch and
properly start up. the main power switch. After
switch.
Mode List
3 Checking the DP relay DP relay PWB is not con- Reattach the DP relay PWB DP-7110
PWB nected or installed prop- and tighten the screw. If not Installa-
erly. repaired, replace the DP tion Guide
relay PWB.
F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error
between the controller and the print engine)
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.

between the controller and the main power switch. After
the print engine is faulty. 5 seconds, turn on the main
switch.
the wire.
• Engine PWB (YC43) - Main
PWB (YC63)
• Engine PWB - Low voltage
PWB (YC63)
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-437
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

5 Replacing the low voltage Power is not supplied from If there is no output of 5V and Detaching
PWB the low voltage PWB to the 24V from the low voltage and reat-
engine PWB. PWB, replace the low voltage taching the
PWB. Low Volt-
age PWB
F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB (Scanner).

between the controller and the main power switch. After
the scanner is faulty. 5 seconds, turn on the main
switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is Reconnect the following wire Service
not connected properly. Or, connectors and reconnect the Manual -
the wire or FFC is faulty. FFC. If there is no continuity, Section 8
replace the wire. If the FFC "PWBs"
terminal section is deformed
or FFC is broken, replace the
FFC.
• Main PWB - Engine PWB
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
F050: Engine main program error

The engine program cannot start up.

2 Resetting the main power The print engine ROM Turn off the power switch and
checksum is faulty. the main power switch. After
switch.
3 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM.
erly attached.
7-438
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the engine PWB The connector or the FFC Clean the terminal of the con- Service
is not connected properly. nectors on the engine PWB, Manual -
replace it. If not resolved, taching the
replace the engine PWB. Engine
PWB
F051: Scanner engine program error

The scanner program cannot start up

2 Resetting the main power The scanner engine RAM Turn off the power switch and
checksum is faulty. the main power switch. After
switch.
3 Checking the SSD The SSD is not installed Reinstall SSD. Detaching
properly. and reat-
taching the
SSD
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector or the FFC Clean the terminal of the con- Service
is not connected properly. nectors on the engine PWB, Manual -
replace it. If not resolved, taching the
replace the engine PWB. Engine
PWB
F052: Panel engine program error

The panel program cannot start up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the panel firmware Firmware
est version. to the latest version. Update
2 Resetting the main power The panel RAM checksum Turn off the power switch and
is faulty. the main power switch. After
switch.
7-439
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the connector on the Service
nected properly, or the wire operation panel main PWB Manual -
is faulty. and reconnect the connector. Section 8
If there is no continuity, "PWBs"
replace the wire.
taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
F14E: Error detection at FAX control section

If the communication between the main PWB and the FAX is interrupted, the signal is resent but it continues
to wait until necessary signal comes in and locks up.

1 Resetting the main power As the power reset was Turn off the power switch and
performed instantly, an the main power switch. After
error occurred in the com- 5 seconds, turn on the main
munication between the power switch and the power
controller and the FAX. switch.
2 Checking the connection The FAX PWB is not con- Clean the following connec- Service
nected properly. tion terminals and reconnect Manual -
the FAX PWB. Section 8
Main PWB - FAX PWB "PWBs"
FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
lation
Guide
F186: Abnormal detection in the Video control section

There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.

1 Resetting the main power As the power reset was Turn off the power switch and
performed instantly, an the main power switch. After
error occurred in the com- 5 seconds, turn on the main
munication between the power switch and the power
controller and the engine. switch.
7-440
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the connection FFC is not connected Clean the following FFC ter- Service
properly. Or it is faulty. minal of the FFC and recon- Manual -
nect. If the FFC terminal is Section 8
deformed or FFC is short cir- "PWBs"
cuited, replace FFC.
• Engine PWB (YC35) - Main
PWB (YC43)
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware Firmware
est version. and the engine firmware to Update
the latest version.
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
F278: Error detection of the secondary power supply

The operation became unstable as the primary power supply temporarily drops off and recovers.

1 Resetting the main power The power reset was per- Turn off the power switch and
formed instantly. the main power switch. After
switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Clean the connector on the Service
nected properly, or the wire low voltage PWB and recon- Manual -
is faulty. nect the connector of the Section 8
wire. If there is no continuity, "PWBs"
replace the wire.
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is Replace the low voltage Detaching
PWB faulty. PWB. and reat-
taching the
Low Volt-
age PWB
7-441
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis error code list.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
*: Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after turning the power off and then on.
Number Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks Content

- It locks on a Welcome screen. 1. Check the harness of the connection state of a connector between Panel<=>Main boards, * Execution of U024 will vanish user data [Main <=> Panel]
(Even if time passes for a definite period of time and perform an operation check. and the software installed. Main PWB: YC12
in more than * notes, a screen does not 2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required. Panel PWB: YC5
change) (FULL of U024) *
3. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed.
4. Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation check.
5. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
6. It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service headquarters.
* : Only HDD standard model
- It locks on a starting logo (Taskalfa/Ecosys) 1. Check the mounting failure of optional equipment and perform an operation check. * Execution of U024 will vanish user data [Main <=> Engine]
screen. 2. Check the harness of the connection state of a connector between Engine<=>Main and the software installed. Main PWB: YC63
(Even if time passes for a definite period of time boards, and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required. Engine PWB: YC35
in more than * notes, a screen does not 3. Check the harness of the connection state of a connector between Panel<=>Main boards,
change) and perform an operation check. [Main <=> DP I/F PWB]
4. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
(FULL of U024) * [Main <=> Panel]
5. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. Main PWB: YC12
6. Exchange a Engine board and perform an operation check. Panel PWB: YC5
F000 CF000 will be displayed if * notes progress is 1. Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), and the connection state of a con- [Main <=> Panel]
carried out for a definite period of time with a nector between Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC12
Welcome screen. 2. Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform an operation check. Panel PWB: YC5
The communication fault between Panel-Main If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an operation check.
boards 3. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
Communication fault between Panel Core-Main (FULL of U024) *
Core Notes 2 4. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed.
* Note 2 : Only Dual Core CPU model
F12X Abnormality detecting in a Scan control section 1. Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a [Main <=> Engine]
connector, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC64
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Engine PWB: YC37
(FULL of U024) *
3. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. [Main <=> DP I/F PWB
4. Exchange a DP I/F, Engine and SHD board and perform an operation check.
5. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. [DP I/F <=> SHD]
6. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. DP I/F PWB: YC2
* Only HDD standard model SHD PWB: YC3
7-442
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F13X Abnormality detecting in a Panel control section 1. Turn the power switch OFF/ON, check if the same system error occurs again. [Main <=> Panel]
2. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. Main PWB: YC12
Panel PWB: YC5
F14X Abnormality detecting in a FAX control part 1. Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a connector, [Main <=> KUIO I/F]
and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC8, YC9
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. KUIO PWB: YC3, YC4
(FULL of U024) *
4. Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671.
* Notes
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions are required.)
5. Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check.
* Notes
6. Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
8. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
* Note: Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main board
F15X Abnormality detecting in an authentication 1. Check the harness between authentication device <=>Main boards, and the connection Authentication device: IC card reader etc. [Main <=> USB I/F]
device control section situation of a connector, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC59, YC60
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. USB-HUB PWB: YC3, YC5
(FULL of U024) *
3. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
5. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F17X Abnormality detecting in a printer data control 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
part 2. (FULL of U024) *
F18X Abnormality detecting in a Video control section 1. Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a con- [Main <=> Engine]
nector, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC65
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Engine: YC3
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange an Engine board and perform an operation check.
F1DX Abnormality detecting of the image memory 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
Management Department (FULL of U024) *
7-443
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F21X Abnormality detecting in an image-processing 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F22X part (FULL of U024) *
F23X 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F24X Abnormality detecting in the system Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * F248 is the abnormalities of a printer pro- [Controller failure]
ment Department (FULL of U024) * cess. The solution method is only the power
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. In recurring by specific printer data, please Off / On.
3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. give me cooperation at acquisition of cap- USBLOG is required for the investiga-
4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. * ture data and USBLOG. tion.
F25X Abnormality detecting in a network manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * It may occur according to a visitor's net-
ment department (FULL of U024) * work environment.
4. Get USBLOG and packet capture and contact service headquarters.
F26X Abnormality detecting in the system Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
ment Department (FULL of U024) *
F2BX Abnormality detecting in a network control part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F2CX (FULL of U024) *
F2DX 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F2EX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F2FX 4. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F30X (Depending on an analysis result, it is packet capture acquisition)
F31X * Only HDD standard model
F2BX
F33X Abnormality detecting in the Scan Management 1. Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a [Main <=> Engine]
Department connector, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC63
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Engine PWB: YC35
(FULL of U024) *
3. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is performed. [Engine <=> DP Driver PWB]
4. Exchange a Engine/DP Driver board and perform an operation check. Engine PWB: YC33
5. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. DP Driver PWB: YC3
7-444
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F34X Abnormality detecting in the Panel Manage- 1. Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and the connection state of a connec- [Main <=> Panel]
ment Department tor, and perform an operation check. Main PWB: YC12
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Panel PWB: YC5
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check.
F35X Abnormality detecting in the printing controlling 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
Management Department (FULL of U024) *
F37X Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. No Flash for FAX data
Department (FULL of U024) * When OFF of the security kit that
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. replaced the HDD to the SSD.
3. Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671.
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions are required.) * notes
4. Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check.
* Notes
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main board
F38X Abnormality detecting in the authentication 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
authorized Management Department (FULL of U024) *
F3AX Abnormality detecting in the Entity Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F3BX ment Department (FULL of U024) *
F3CX 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F3DX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F3EX 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F3FX 5. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F40X * Only HDD standard model
F41X
F42X
F43X
F44X
F45X
F46X Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part 1. Exchange boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of a printer pro-
2. the acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out cess.
(Depending on the (2) case, it is print capture data acquisition) In recurring by specific printer data, please
* Only HDD standard model give me cooperation at acquisition of cap-
ture data and USBLOG.
7-445
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F47X Abnormality detecting of an image editing pro- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F48X cessing part (FULL of U024) *
F49X 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F4AX Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F4CX (FULL of U024) *
F4DX Abnormality detecting in the Entity Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
ment Department (FULL of U024) *
F4FX Abnormality detecting in the JOB Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after occur-
Department (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. me cooperation of acquisition.
F50X Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after occur- No Flash for FAX data
Department (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give When OFF of the security kit that
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. me cooperation of acquisition. replaced the HDD to the SSD.
F51X Abnormality detecting in a JOB execution part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after occur-
F52X (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give
F53X 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. me cooperation of acquisition.
F55X 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F56X 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F57X 5. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F58X Abnormality detecting in the various-services 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log at the time of occur- F5DX (especially if X is 9,A,B,C or D)
F59X Management Department (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give occurs when processing FAX reception
F5AX 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. me cooperation of acquisition. and URDS related matter.
F5BX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. When occurred, check data sent from
F5CX 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. * PC.
F5DX 5. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F5EX * Only HDD standard model
7-446
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

F5FX Abnormality detecting in a service execution 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after occur-
part (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give
F60X Abnormality detecting in the maintenance 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. In case of F60A:
mode/ (FULL of U024) * 60A is occurred when device registered
Remote Service Management Department 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. Remote Service detects off-line status with
3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. external system.
4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. * Please check device Network Settings and
5. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. Network environment which device is used
* Only HDD standard model (include Disconnection rule/status in night
time and on weekends.)
F62X Abnormality detecting in a service execution 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log at the time of occur- USB log at the time of occurrence is
part (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please give required for the analysis.
F63X Abnormality detecting in a device control sec- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
tion (FULL of U024) *
F68X Abnormality detecting in a storage device con- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * F684 is the overwrite error at the time of Each of the SSD / HDD to check the
trol section (FULL of U024) * an HDD security kit. operation after initializing. (U024 of SSD
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. / FULL, U024 of HDD / FULL)
F69X Abnormality detecting in a HyPAS-E part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F6AX (FULL of U024) *
F6BX 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
F6CX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
7-447
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-4 FAX Related Errors

(1) FAX Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card
(2) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error
(5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(7) C0920: FAX file system error
(8) C0950: FAX job stay error
(9) F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section
(10) The FAX cannot be sent
(11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished
(12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size
data
Content of FAX Related Errors

(1-1) The login fails with other than the ID card

1 Changing the setting [User/Job Account] is valid Set [Permit] at [User/Job ID Card
while the card authentica- Account] > [ID Card Settings] Authenti-
tion kit is not installed. > [Key Login] via the System cation Set-
Menu. tings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
9)
(1-2) C0030: FAX PWB system error

The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

power switch.
7-448
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Update
lation
Guide
(1-3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB,
any normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX Install the FAX PWB for the FAX Instal-
PWB is installed. applicable model. lation
Guide
Update
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
(1-4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD Detaching
age) already used in other used once, replace with the and reat-
unit is installed. correct SSD. taching the
SSD
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD Mainte-
age) already used in other used once, execute U671 nance
unit is reused without exe- [FAX Data CLEAR]. Mode List
cuting U671.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Be sure to install the SSD to Detaching
age) is not properly the connector on the main and reat-
installed. PWB. taching the
SSD
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Replace with the new SSD. Detaching
age) is faulty. and reat-
taching the
SSD
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-449
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Update
2 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not con- Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
nected properly. the main power switch. After lation
power switch.
Mode List
lation
Guide
(1-6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data
is transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch off . lation
After 5s passes, reattach the Guide
FAX PWB and turn the main
switch on.
Mode List
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
lation
Guide
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD Execute U024 [SSD Format]. Mainte-
is faulty. nance
Mode List
7-450
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-7) C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
incorrect FAX. nance
Mode List
power switch.
3 Reconnecting the FAX The FAX PWB is not con- Reinstall FAX PWB to Main FAX Instal-
PWB nected properly. PWB. lation
Guide
Update
lation
Guide
(1-8) C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
(1-9) F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the main firmware Firmware
and the FAX firmware to the Update
latest version.
2 Checking the connection The FAX PWB is not con- Check the connection FAX Instal-
nected properly. between the main PWB and lation
the FAX PWB, and reconnect Guide
it if necessary.
lation
Guide
7-451
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-10) The FAX cannot be sent

1 Checking the connection The modular cable discon- Reconnect the modular
of the modular cable nects. cable.
2 Changing the connection If the adapter and the Directly connect the main unit
switching device or the like to the telephone line.
is connected to the tele-
phone line, it is affected.
3 Changing the setting The line settings are incor- Correct the line settings.
rect. (Reduce the transmission
speed, etc.)
4 Checking the status at the The destination unit is Wait a while and then redial
destination unit. busy. the number if busy tones are
heard.
5 Checking the status at the The modular cable is dis- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
destination unit. connected in the destina- to reconnect the modular ation
tion unit if the destination cable. Guide
unit does not receive the
calling.
6 Checking the setting at the The manual reception is Ask the destination unit to FAX Oper-
destination unit set in the destination unit if change the reception set- ation
the destination unit does tings. Guide
not receive the calling.
7 Changing the sending con- When transmitting the data Input a pause at the last of FAX Oper-
tent to the other country, the the destination FAX number. ation
communication line is Guide
automatically cut.
(1-11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished

(1-12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is

transmitted as the A4 size data

1 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select [B4] or [A3/Ledger] FAX Oper-
destination unit is A4 / Let- according to the receivable ation
ter. size at the Address book reg- Guide
istration display > [i-FAX] >
[Paper size].
7-452
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select the condition of the FAX Oper-
destination unit is A4 / Let- destination unit when trans- ation
ter. mitting the data, choose [B4] Guide
or [A3/Ledger] according to
the receivable sizes.
7-453
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Communication Errors

Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error
code indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (The V.34 error is indicated with E of the error code and 5-
digit number)
Regarding the 5-digit number, upper 3 digits indicate error and large classification of cause, lower 2 digits
small classification of cause. The lower 2 digits are 00 for the item not requiring the category.
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code

General classification of error code
Error code indication
Figure 7-4
7-454
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted num-
ber. Or, sub address-based bulletin board transmission request was received but inter-
rupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub
address password was not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address
password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not pres-
ent in the sub address box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address
password was not registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match
in the restricted transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number
was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified
encryption box was not registered.
U00601/E00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613/E00613 Image writing section problem
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016 T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM
signal.
U01019/E01019 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after send-
ing CNC signal. (between own machines)
ing CTC signal. (ECM)
ing EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
ing RR signal. (ECM)
7-455
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

U01028/E01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).
U01052/E01052 DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080 PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.
U01092/E01092 Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and
communication speed at V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094/E01094 DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.
U01096/E01096 DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.
U01097/E01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR
signal or no response.
U01100/E01100 Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01101/E01101 Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the
one of own machine.
U01102/E01102 DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.
U01110/E01110 No response is received after sending DIS signal.
U01111/E01111 No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113/E01113 No response after transmitting an FTT signal.
U01125/E01125 No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)
U01129/E01129 No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)
U01141/E01141 DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.
U01143/E01143 DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.
U01155/E01155 DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160 Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.
U01162/E01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191/E01191 Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193 No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.
U01194/E01194 DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.
U01195/E01195 No message is received at phase C during reception.
U01196/E01196 Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.
U01400/E01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500/E01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600/E01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720/E01720 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed com-
monly used with the destination unit.
U01800/E01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810/E01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820/E01820 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
7-456
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Error code Contents

U01821/E01821 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed com-
monly used with the destination unit.
U03000/E03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200/E03200 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the box
specified by the destination unit.
U03300/E03300 In polling reception from a unit of our own model, operation was interrupted due to a mis-
match in permitted ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice sub address-based bulletin
board reception, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permitted ID or tele-
phone number.
U03400/E03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destina-
tion unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500/E03500 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password
was not registered in the destination unit.
U03600/E03600 An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mis-
match in the specified sub address password.
U03700/E03700 Interoffice sub address bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had
no sub address bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any sub
address box in the destination unit.
U04000/E04000 In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was
not registered in the destination unit.
U04100/E04100 The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address
transmission was executed.
U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the desti-
nation unit.
U04300/E04300 The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the
other machine.
U04400/E04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500/E04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100/E05100 The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not
match in the restricted transmission (password check transmission).
U05200/E05200 Restricted reception (Password check reception) was interrupted because the permitted
FAX number / ID did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the destination
unit did not return its phone number.
U05300/E05300 The destination unit set the restricted reception (Password check reception). Conse-
quently, the transmission was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did not
match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the own unit did not return its phone num-
ber.
U14000/E14000 Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.
U14100/E14100 In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000/E19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100/E19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.
U19300/E19300 Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.
7-457
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Communication Errors

U00000/E00000
1 Resending The status is Busy. Check if the destination unit FAX Oper-
can receive the data and ation
resend the data if there is no Guide
particular problem.
U00100/E00100
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted by a press of the
stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200
1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted Suspend resending from the FAX Oper-
by a press of the [Stop] destination unit or request the ation
key. destination unit to resend the Guide
data.
U00300/E00300
1 Request to the destination Recording paper on the Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit destination unit has run out to set the recording papers. ation
during transmission. Guide
U00430/E00430
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bul- Register a valid permitted FAX Oper-
number letin board transmission number ation
were requested, but the Guide
communication was inter-
rupted because the permit-
ted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting
unit.)
7-458
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U00431/E00431
1 Request to the destination An sub address bulletin Register the sub address FAX Oper-
unit board transmission was password in the destination ation
interrupted because the unit. Guide
specified sub address
password was not regis-
tered.
U00432/E00432
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Send by using correct the sub FAX Oper-
password board transmission was address password. ation
interrupted because the Guide
sub address password did
not match.
U00433/E00433
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Set data in the sub address FAX Oper-
box board transmission box. ation
request was received but Guide
data was not present in the
sub address box.
U00440/E00440
1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address FAX Oper-
password reception was interrupted password. ation
because the specified sub Guide
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450
1 Checking the permitted The reception was inter- Register the permitted num- FAX Oper-
number rupted because the permit- ber to be consistent at own ation
ted ID and FAX number did machine side. Guide
not match in the restricted
transmission (password
check transmission) in the
destination unit.
7-459
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U00460/E00460
1 Checking the encryption The encryption reception Register an encrypted box FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because number. ation
the specified encryption Guide
box number was not regis-
tered.
U00462/E00462
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key. FAX Oper-
key interrupted because the ation
encryption key for the Guide
specified encryption box
was not registered.
U00601/E00601
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and
resend.
2 Checking the original The original length Check if the original length
exceeds the maximum does not exceed 1.6 meter
allowed. and resend.
U00613/E00613
1 Checking the service call Image writing section error Check the service call error Event Log
error record record and perform the cor- Report
rective actions. Output
7-460
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U00656/E00656
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted because there was
an error in the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was inter- Turn off the power switch and
rupted because there was pull out the power plug. After
an error in the modem. passing 5s, reattach the FAX
PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
changed. FAX. nance
Mode List
lation
Guide
U00690/E00690
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and
pull out the power plug. After
passing 5s, reinsert the
power plug and turn on the
power switch.
2 Measures for the system System error in the main Perform the corrective System
error unit actions for the system error in Error List
the main unit.
U00800/E00800
1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not prop- Mainte-
speed occurred because of erly sent and resending does nance
reception of a RTN or PIN not solve it, reduce transmit Mode List
signal. start speed and resend the
data.
7-461
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U00811/E00811
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not prop- Mainte-
remained after retry of erly sent and resending does nance
transmission in the ECM not solve it, reduce transmit Mode List
mode. start speed and resend the
data.
U00900/E00900
1 Resending An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a
transmitted because of a page not transmitted prop-
page reception error. erly.
U01000/E01000
1 Resending An FTT signal was Resend.
received for a set number
of times after TCF signal
transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was
received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400
bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start nance
speed. Then, resend the Mode List
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of Mainte-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by nance
executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-462
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01001/E01001
1 Resending Function as indicated by Resend.
DIS signal is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
data.
U01016/E01016
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since Resend.
MBF signal is received but
DIS signal is not after
sending EOM signal.
data.
U01019/E01019
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
data.
7-463
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01020/E01020
after sending CTC signal.
(ECM)
data.
U01021/E01021
after sending EOR•Q sig-
nal. (ECM)
data.
U01022/E01022
after sending RR signal.
(ECM)
data.
7-464
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01028/E01028
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected Resend.
when sending in ECM
(ECM)
data.
U01052/E01052
1 Resending DCN signal is received Resend.
after sending RR signal
(ECM)
data.
U01080/E01080
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
data.
7-465
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01092/E01092
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol
speed and communication
speed at V.34 sending.
data.
U01093/E01093
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection Mainte-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mm Level]. nance
received signal is attenu- (Initial setting: -43dBm) Mode List
ated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
received signal is attenu- RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
ated with its frequency 0dBm)
response.
U01094/E01094
1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send Resend.
retrial time is exceeded at
phase B during transmis-
sion.
data.
7-466
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01096/E01096
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid com- Resend.
mand is received at phase
D during transmission.
data.
U01097/E01097
1 Resending The preset number of com- Resend.
mand retransfers was
exceeded after transmis-
sion of an RR signal or no
response.
data.
U01100/E01100
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request the destination unit
signal is not consistent to resend the data.
with the one of own
machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed Mainte-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX nance
Speed]. Mode List
7-467
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01101/E01101
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request the destination unit
signal except communica- to resend the data.
tion type is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
Speed]. Mode List
U01102/E01102
1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is Request the destination unit
received while own to resend the data.
machine has no transmis-
sion data.
Speed]. Mode List
U01110/E01110
1 Request for resending No response is received Request the destination unit
after sending DIS signal. to resend the data.
Speed]. Mode List
U01111/E01111
after sending DTC (NSC) to resend the data.
signal.
Speed]. Mode List
7-468
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01113/E01113
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection Mainte-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mm Level]. nance
received signal is attenu- (Initial setting: -43dBm) Mode List
ated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
received signal is attenu- RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
ated with its frequency 0dBm)
response.
U01125/E01125
after sending CNS signal. to resend the data.
(between own machine)
Speed]. Mode List
U01129/E01129
1 Request for resending No response after trans- Request the destination unit
mitting an SPA signal. to resend the data.
(Short protocol)
Speed]. Mode List
U01141/E01141
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request the destination unit
after sending DTC signal. to resend the data.
Speed]. Mode List
7-469
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01143/E01143
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received Set the G3 reception cable Mainte-
after sending FTT signal. equalizer in U650 [Rag G3 nance
RX Ear]. (Initial setting: Mode List
0dBm)
U01155/E01155
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request the destination unit
after sending SPA signal. to resend the data.
(simplified protocol)
Speed]. Mode List
U01160/E01160
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request the destination unit
time per line is exceeded to resend the data.
while receiving message.
Speed]. Mode List
U01162/E01162
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request the destination unit
time per line is exceeded to resend the data.
while receiving message.
Speed]. Mode List
7-470
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01191/E01191
1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request the destination unit
with error during image to resend the data.
data receipt sequence at
V.34.
Speed]. Mode List
U01193/E01193
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal Extend T2 time-out time in Mainte-
or invalid command is U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. nance
received at phase C/D (Change from the initial set- Mode List
during reception. ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures Mainte-
for echoes at the reception in nance
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set- Mode List
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting Mainte-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. nance
Mode List
U01194/E01194
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request the destination unit
phase B during reception. to resend the data.
Speed]. Mode List
7-471
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01195/E01195
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time in Mainte-
phase C during reception. U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. nance
(Change from the initial set- Mode List
ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures Mainte-
for echoes at the reception in nance
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set- Mode List
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting Mainte-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. nance
Mode List
U01196/E01196
1 Resending Error line control overflow Resend.
and decoding error
occurred in messages
during reception.
Speed]. Mode List
U01400/E01400
1 Checking the telephone "#" exists in advance of "x" Delete "#" from the registered FAX Oper-
number on the phone numbers of numbers if "#" exists in ation
the destination unit, so it is advance of "x" on the phone Guide
processed as the invalid numbers of the destination
dial line. unit.
U01500/E01500
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is Execute U630 [TX Speed] to Mainte-
speed the poor condition. reduce the transmit start nance
data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the default value of Mainte-
speed condition is poor and an the transmit start speed by nance
error frequently occurs. executing U630 [TX Speed]. Mode List
7-472
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01600/E01600
1 Request to the destination The communication line is Request the destination unit
unit the poor condition. to resend the data after
reducing the transmit start
speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit Mainte-
timing condition is poor and an to resend the data after low- nance
error frequently occurs. ering the reception start Mode List
speed.
U01700/E01700
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
data.
U01720/E01720
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4
(replacing the modem
parameter).
data.
7-473
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01721/E01721
1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there
is no communication
speed commonly used
with the destination unit.
data.
U01800/E01800
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 2 (line to resend the data after
probing). reducing the transmit start
speed.
Speed]. Mode List
U01810/E01810
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
Speed]. Mode List
U01820/E01820
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
Speed]. Mode List
7-474
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U01821/E01821
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit
interrupted because there to resend the data after
is no communication reducing the transmit start
speed commonly used speed.
with the destination unit.
Speed]. Mode List
U03000/E03000
1 Request to the destination No document was present Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit in the destination unit to set the originals. ation
when polling reception Guide
started.
U03200/E03200
1 Request to the destination There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit address box in the main to store the original data in ation
unit that are specified from the sub address box. Guide
the destination unit.
U03300/E03300
1 Request to the destination The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit number registered in the to register the own ID and the ation
destination unit are incor- own FAX number as the per- Guide
rect. mitted ID and the permitted
FAX number.
U03400/E03400
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
7-475
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U03500/E03500
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
U03600/E03600
1 Resending Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after input- FAX Oper-
reception was interrupted ting the sub address pass- ation
because the specified sub word registered in the Guide
address password did not destination unit.
match.
U03700/E03700
1 Checking the destination Destination machine has Check if the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit no sub address bulletin has a sub address bulletin ation
board communication board communication func- Guide
function or no originals are tion. If available, request the
stored in any original deliv- destination unit to save the
ery box (sub address box). original data in the sub
address box.
U04000/E04000
1 Request to the destination The original was transmit- Register the sub address FAX Oper-
unit ted to the sub address box, password in the destination ation
but the specified box was unit. Guide
not registered in the desti-
nation unit that is our own
model.
2 Checking the sub address The original was transmit- Match the sub address in the FAX Oper-
of the FAX transmission ted to the sub address box FAX forward condition ation
condition in the destination unit that Guide
is our own model, but the
sub address of the trans-
mission condition did not
match.
7-476
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U04100/E04100
1 Resending The destination unit had no Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
sub address reception to the reception function in ation
capability while the sub the destination unit. Guide
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200
1 Request to the destination In encrypted transmission, Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit the specified encryption to register the encrypted box. ation
box was not registered in Guide
the destination unit.
U04300/E04300
1 Resending The encryption transmis- Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
sion was carried out, but to the reception function in ation
there is no encryption func- the destination unit. Guide
tion at the other machine.
U04400/E04400
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
U04500/E04500
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
7-477
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U05100/E05100
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the FAX Oper-
number interrupted because the authorization number that ation
permitted ID and FAX has been registered. Guide
number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check transmis-
sion).
U05200/E05200
1 Checking the settings The number does not Change the restricted recep- FAX Oper-
match a permitted FAX tion settings. ation
number / ID, or it matches Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Request to the destination The own telephone num- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit ber is not informed from to register the own telephone ation
the destination unit. number. Guide
U05300/E05300
1 Request to the destination The number does not Ask the destination unit to FAX Oper-
unit match a permitted FAX change the restricted recep- ation
number / ID, or it matches tion settings. Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Request to the destination The main unit did not Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit acknowledge its phone to register the own telephone ation
number in question . number. Guide
U14000/E14000
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX Print documents stored in
box was interrupted due to memory and make room in
memory overflow in its memory. Or stop receiving in
unit. the FAX box.
7-478
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
U14100/E14100
1 Request to the destination Transmission was inter- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit rupted due to the memory to release memory. ation
overflow in the destination Guide
unit when transmitting into
the sub address box.
U19000/E19000
1 Checking the memory The reception was inter- Release memory by printing
rupted due to the memory originals stored in memory.
overflow in the main unit
during memory reception.
U19100/E19100
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
is an error in the data
during transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
is an error in the data passing 5s, reattach the FAX
during transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
switch.
U19300/E19300
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
is an error in the data
during transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
is an error in the data passing 5s, reattach the FAX
during transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
switch.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the Mainte-
changed. FAX. nance
Mode List
7-479
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

lation
Guide
7-480
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-5 Send Related Errors

(1) Send Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security soft-
ware settings
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear
(3) When scanning the original loaded on the contact glass to send, the scanned data is automatically
sent.
Content of Send Related Errors

(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or
the security software settings

1 Changing the setting The incorrect port number Change the SMB port num-
has been set. ber from '139' to '445'.
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear

1 Changing the setting The Windows Fire Wall is Open [Control panel] > [Sys-
not properly set. (Win- tem and Security] > Win-
dows Vista / 7 / 8) dows firewall] and select
[Permit the program or func-
tion through Windows fire-
wall].Check [Share files and
printers] and the check box
on the right as well.
(1-3) When scanning the original loaded on the contact glass to send, the scanned
data is automatically sent.

1 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not Press [Send] key or [FAX] Continu-
set to [On]. key, and select [On] in ous Scan
[Advanced setup] > [Continu- (Opera-
ous scan]. tion Guide
- Section
6)
7-481
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not Select [On] at [Functions] > Continu-
set to [On]. [Continuous scan] ous Scan
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
6)
7-482
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes)

Scan to PC (SMB/FTP/Email) transmission error codes, contents, checkpoints and remedies are
described.
The error code not listed here may be the software failure.
Turn the power switch off then on, and execute again.
(2-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.
1105 SMTP protocol is invalid.
1106 The sender address is not set.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session.
Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Scan to E-mail error code : 1101
SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

1 Changing the setting SMTP / POP3 server Correct the SMTP / POP3 Command
name is incorrect. server name at [Function Set- Center RX
tings] > [E-mail] via the com- Operation
mand center. Guide
2 Changing the setting The network settings are Correct the settings in the Command
incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Command Center. Operation
Guide
3 Changing the setting The network settings that Correct the network settings System /
the main unit is connected that the main unit is con- Network
to are incorrect. nected to. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-483
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

1 Changing the setting The user name or the Correct the SMTP / POP3 Command
password is incorrect. user name or password at Center RX
[Function Settings] > [E-mail] Operation
via the command center. Guide
2 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Command
settings are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

1 Changing the setting Destination address Correct the settings in the Command
domain is restricted and Network Settings via the Center RX
transmission is denied. Command Center. Operation
Guide

SMTP protocol is invalid.

1 Checking the settings SMTP protocol is invalid. Correct the protocol in the Command
Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

The sender address is not set.

1 Changing the setting The sender address is not Correct the protocol in the Command
set. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

mand center. Guide
7-484
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Connecting the LAN cable The LAN cable is not con- Connect the LAN cable to the
nected to the main unit. main unit.
3 Changing the setting The port number is incor- Correct the SMTP/POP3 port
rect. number.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

mand center. Guide
2 Changing the setting The port number is incor- Correct the SMTP/POP3 port
rect. number.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide
7-485
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The server cannot establish communication.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server Correct the SMTP / POP3 Command
server name name is incorrect. server name at [Function Set- Center RX
mand center. Guide
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incor- Correct the SMTP/POP3 port
port No. rect. number.
3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Command
Guide
4 Checking the settings The network settings that Correct the network settings System /
tion Guide
- Section
8)
5 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Command
Guide

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

Guide
7-486
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tion Guide
- Section
8)

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

Guide

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide

No SMTP authentication is found.

1 Changing the setting The SMTP server settings Set the correct SMTP Command
are incorrect. Authentication Protocol at Center RX
[Function Settings] > [E-mail] Operation
via the command center. Guide
7-487
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Failed to establish the SSL session.

1 Changing the setting The self-signed certificate Correct the certificates in the Command
of the device is incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide
2 Changing the setting The service certificate set- Correct the certificates in the Command
tings are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide
3 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 settings Correct the protocol in the Command
are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide
7-488
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 FTP server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed.
2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed.
2102 Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed.
2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2203 No response from the server during a specific period of time.
2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)
3101 FTP server responded with an error.
Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes

Scan to FTP error code : 1101
FTP server does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the FTP host The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name Command
name incorrect. via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-489
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Login to the FTP server has failed.

1 Correcting the user name The user name or the Correct the user name and
or the password password is incorrect. the password.
2 Changing the setting FTP server is improper. Correct the protocol in the Command
Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

FTP protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting FTP protocol is not Correct the protocol in the Command
enabled. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Initializing TLS has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Command
device are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide

TLS negotiation has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Command
device are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide
2 Changing the setting The FTP server settings Correct the protocol in the Command
Guide
7-490
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

Operation
Guide
2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not con- Connect the LAN cable to the
nected to the main unit. main unit.
3 Correcting the FTP port The port number is incor- Correct the FTP port number.
no. rect.
Guide
Guide

Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Operation
Guide
no. rect.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide
7-491
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The server cannot establish communication.

Operation
Guide
no. rect.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
3 Correcting the destination The destination folder Set the correct destination
folder name name is incorrect. folder.
Guide
7-492
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

No response from the server during a specific period of time.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-493
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

FTP server responded with an error.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
Guide
7-494
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 Destination host does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the host has failed.
1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled.
2101 Login to the host has failed.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed.
2203 No response from the host during a specific period of time.
Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes

Scan to SMB error code : 1101
Destination host does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the destination The destination host name Correct the destination host
host name is incorrect. name.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the user name The user name or the Correct the user name and
and the password password is incorrect. the password.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
est version. the latest version. Then, start Update
up the Command Center and Command
check if [Use Temporary File Center RX
Name] at 'SMB' is [On] at Operation
[Network Settings] > [Send Guide
Protocols] (Default setting:
[On]). If it is [Off], change it to
[On].
7-495
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Guide
4 Changing the setting The sharing settings of the Correct the sharing settings
destination host / folder are of the destination host /
incorrect. folder.

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

1 Checking the destination The invalid character is Correct the destination host
host name, destination included. name, folder name or the file
folder name and the file name if the invalid characters
name are included.
2 Correcting the destination The destination folder Revise the destination folder
folder name and the file name or the file name is and file name according to
name incorrect. the naming rules.
3 Changing the setting of the The destination host or the Revise the destination host
destination host and folder. destination folder is not set and destination folder prop-
properly. erly.

SMB protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting The settings of the SMP Correct the protocol in the Command
protocol are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the destination The destination host name Correct the destination host
host name is incorrect. name.
nected to the main unit in main unit.
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
3 Correcting the SMB port The port number is incor- Correct the SMB port num- SMB
no. rect. ber. Transmis-
sion Set-
tings
7-496
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

Writing scanned data has failed.

1 Correcting the sending file The sending file name is Correct the scanning file
name incorrect. name.
Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)

No response from the host during a specific period of time.

Guide
tion Guide
- Section
8)
nected to the main unit in main unit.
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
7-497
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-6 Print Errors

(1) The paper loading message appears
(2) Orientation is different
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
(4) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed.
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray The media types of each paper source defined
in the printer driver and the main unit are mis-
matched.
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or The main unit is not ready to print
[Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer
properties
(8) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the The main unit locks up.
printer standby message is indicated
(9) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the The main unit locks up.
main unit startup error
Processing/Memory lamp is turned on
(10) Print stops after printing several pages and The image processing fails due to the insuffi-
locks up cient memory, so the main unit locks up.
Processing and Memory lamps on operation
panel are lit
(11) Print output is unavailable due to the network The network has some troubles or the network
factor (1) setting is incorrect.
(12) Print output is unavailable due to the network The cable between the main unit and the PC is
factor (2) not properly connected.
(13) Print output is unavailable due to the network The access point (router or HUB) in the network
factor (3) does not operate properly.
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network The router is faulty, or the router settings are
factor (4) incorrect.
(15) Print output is unavailable due to the network Offline' appears and the print function is unavail-
factor (5) able.
(16) Print output is unavailable due to the network Only 1 PC can't print out of all PCs installed.
factor (6) There is no error indication and print job will be
held if print instruction is requested.
(17) Print output is unavailable due to the network The main unit IP address is changed.
factor (7)
(18) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver [Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job
setting (1) can't be performed due to the error. (Can't print)
(19) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver [Preparing the printer] is displayed on the opera-
setting (2) tion panel. The printing document is not output
and the job is held.
(20) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver A PC does not recognize the main unit.
setting (3)
7-498
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver PC operation does not stabilize.
setting (4)
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver Check if the issue occurs when printing the data
setting (5) from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC.
Then, print out the data from another PC if it
occurs at a certain PC.
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver The incorrect printer driver was selected.
setting (6)
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it
setting (7) remains when reinstalling it
(25) The printed image is partly missing The image data processing with a certain appli-
cation (Excel, PDF) is faulty.
(26) 'Paper Mismatch Error' appears The paper size is not detected properly.
Content of Print Errors

(1) The paper loading message appears

1 Checking the paper The size of the loaded Load the paper of the paper Printer
paper did not match the size defined at 'Paper size' in Driver
paper size set in the printer the [Basic] tab in the print set- Operation
properties. tings at the PC to the cas- Guide
sette.
2 Checking the paper size The paper size on the Check if the paper size on the
operation panel and the operation panel and the one
one set for the paper set for the paper source do
source do not match. not match
guides width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
the paper size. paper size.
4 Checking the actuator and The actuator or the spring Reattach the actuator and the
the spring for paper sensor does not spring for the paper sensor. If
operate properly. not repaired, replace them.
5 Checking the situation The print data generated Check if the print data not
by a certain application generated by a certain appli-
(Word) is faulty. cation (Word) is output prop-
erly. And then, change the
application setting if neces-
sary.
6 Changing the setting Paper orientation is not Check the page orientation
properly set in the print with preview before printing
page setting on a certain and reset the page orienta-
application (Word). tion at the print setting on a
certain application (Word).
7-499
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

7 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size Printer
media type detected at the detected on the MP tray and Driver
main unit did not match the media type of the MP tray Operation
with the paper size and the set via the System Menu (for Guide
media type set in the the main unit) matched to the
printer driver. paper size and the media
type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in
the printer properties at the
PC.
8 Changing the setting The MP tray setting does Select 'MP tray' at [Source] in Printer
not match between the the [Basic] tab in the print set- Driver
main unit and printer driver tings at the PC. Operation
Guide
(2) Orientation is different

1 Checking the paper size Paper same as the output Confirm it on the operation
size is not set in the paper panel that the same paper
source. size is set as the output size
selected by the printer driver
side. ([Status/Job cancel] key
> [Paper/Supply]). If not, set
paper in any cassette and
specify it as the paper
source.
2 (When feeding from MP Paper is not properly set at Pull out the sub tray from the
tray) Resetting the MP the MP tray. MP tray and set the MP
paper width guides paper width guides to match
the paper width then, confirm
if paper size shows correctly
on the operation panel. ([Sta-
tus/Job cancel] key > [Paper/
Supply]). If paper size is not
displayed correctly, go to the
next step [Checking the actu-
ator], and if displayed cor-
rectly, go to the step 5
[Changing the setting].
3 Checking the actuator Paper size is not detected Reattach the actuators for the
properly . paper width sensor and the
paper length sensor in the
paper source.
4 Checking the sensor Paper size is not detected Check the paper width sensor
properly . and the paper length sensor
in the paper source, and reat-
tach them if they come off.
7-500
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Changing the setting The printer driver is not set Set [Orientation] properly at Printer
correctly. the [Basic setting] of the Driver
printer driver. Operation
Guide
6 Reinstalling the printer The printer driver was not Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
driver properly installed. printer driver. Driver
Operation
Guide
7 Checking the print setting The print setting at the Set the print setting at the
at the application software application software side application software side
side has the priority. properly.
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray

The main unit MP tray setting is wrong

1 Changing the setting The Auto Cassette Change the Auto cassette Printer
Change is [On]. change setting to [OFF] if (Opera-
paper is not available in the tion Guide
selected cassette, paper will - Section
not be fed. ([System Menu/ 8)
Counter] > [Printer] > [Auto
Cassette Change] > [OFF])
2 Changing the setting Media type' in the [Basic] Check the media type set on Printer
tab in the print settings at the main unit cassette and Driver
the PC differs from the MP tray and set the media Operation
media type of the cassette type for the main unit in the Guide
that is set in the main unit. [Basic] tab in the print set-
tings at the PC.
3 Changing the setting The same media type is Set different media types Cassette /
set between the main unit between the main unit cas- MP Tray
cassette and MP tray sette and MP tray Settings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
(4) Garbled characters

The printer driver was not properly installed.

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in
error. process in the PC and the
main unit. Then, turn the
power switch and the main
power switch off. After 5s
passes, turn the main power
switch and the power switch
on.
7-501
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from
resident. Excel and Word is normal,
print the font list to check if a
font for special data is resi-
dent.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font
setting) is unselected. (default setting) and print the
data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
printer driver. Driver
Operation
Guide
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray

The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver and the main unit are mismatched.

1 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size Printer
media type detected at the detected on the MP tray and Driver
main unit did not match the media type of the MP tray Operation
with the paper size and the set via the System Menu (for Guide
media type set in the the main unit) matched to the
printer driver. paper size and the media
type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in
the printer properties at the
PC.
2 Changing the setting The MP tray setting does Select 'MP tray' at [Source] in Printer
not match between the the [Basic] tab in the print set- Driver
main unit and printer driver tings at the PC. Operation
Guide
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out

A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.

1 Deleting the job The generated data is Delete the print job spooled in
faulty. the PC and print it out again.
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated
on the printer properties
The main unit is not ready to print

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready Check if the error appears on
to print the operation panel or the
error lamp blinks. Then if
there is, cancel it.
7-502
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the main unit The main unit is not ready Resolve the problem at the
to print main unit if any
(8) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is
indicated
The main unit locks up.

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready After confirming no error is
to print indicated on the main unit's
operation panel, cancel all
PC print jobs. Then, turn the
power switch and the main
power switch off . After 5s
passes, turn the main power
on.
(9) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error
Processing/Memory lamp is turned on
The main unit locks up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
est version. latest version. Update
2 Changing the setting The sleep level is not set to Turn the power switch and Date/
Quick Recovery mode. the main power switch off . Timer/
After 5s passes, turn on the Energy
main power switch and the Saver
power switch. Then, set the (Opera-
sleep level to 'Quick Recov- tion Guide
ery'. - Section
8)
(10)Print stops after printing several pages and locks up

Processing and Memory lamps on operation panel are lit
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up.

1 Checking the situation The data processing in a Check if the issue occurs
certain PC is faulty. when printing the data from
all PCs in the network or from
a certain PC. Then, print out
the data from another PC if it
occurs at a certain PC.
7-503
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the situation The application is not prop- Check if a problem occurring
erly set. from a certain application and
file (big data like CAD data)
and change application set-
ting and refer to application's
help.
4 Deleting the job Processing fails. Cancel the job in process and Checking
reprint in the main unit job Job & Job
status Operation
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
7)
5 Memory allocation Memory allocation is insuf- If the processing memory at Mainte-
ficient. the main unit is not enough, nance
set to allocate the memory at Mode List
U340 [Adj Memory].
6 Resetting the main power The main unit locks up. If the operation panel or the
buttons are not active, turn
main power switch off. After
switch on.
(11)Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1)

The network has some troubles or the network setting is incorrect.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check if the memory LED on Checking
work. the operation panel of the Job & Job
main unit is blinking after Operation
printing out from the PC. If (Opera-
not blinking, cancel the pro- tion Guide
cessing job and reprint out. - Section
7)
2 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- When the printing error
work. appears on the operation
panel or the PC screen, clear
the error caused by the toner
or paper jam, etc.
3 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the main unit IP System /
work. Address in the status page, Network
etc. and then check if Com- (Opera-
mand Center can be opened tion Guide
using that IP Address. If not, - Section
reconfigure the network 8)
again.
7-504
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the internet connec-
work. tion and restore the network
connection if necessary
5 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the cable and reset
work. the router or HUB.
6 Restarting up The PC or the main unit Restart the PC or the main
locks up. unit, and print out again.

The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected.

1 Checking the cable The cable between the Check the cable connection
main unit and the PC is not between the main unit and
properly connected. the PC.
2 Restarting up The main unit or the PC Restart the main unit and
does not properly start up. then restart the PC.
3 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is Replace the Ethernet cable.
cable faulty.
4 Changing the connection Another network is faulty. Directly connect the main unit
to the PC with the cross cable
and then check if the same
data can be printed out.

The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate properly.

1 Restarting up The router or the HUB Check if the link lamp of the
does not properly activate. router or hub is lit and restart
it.
2 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is not In case the link lamp is off,
cable properly connected. once disconnect the Ether-
net cable from the router and
reconnect it to check the link
lamp is lit.
3 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is Replace the Ethernet cable.
cable faulty.
4 Restarting up The router, HUB, PC or the In case of no connection
main unit do not start up while the link lamp is lit,
properly. restart the router or hub and
then restart up the PC and
the main unit.
7-505
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.

1 Changing the setting The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP Printer
erly set. Address indicated in the sta- Driver
tus page is the same as the Operation
IP Address in the [Port] tab of Guide
[Printer Properties] at the PC.
If not, correct the IP address
at the PC
2 Changing the setting The printer host name is Check the printer host name
not properly set. by printing out the status
report when there is a server
environment. Then, check the
printer host name at the [Port]
tab in the printer properties at
a PC. If they differ, correct the
printer host name.

Offline' appears and the print function is unavailable.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the internet connec-
work. tion and restore the network
connection if necessary
2 Restarting up The PC malfunctions. When 'Offline' appears on the
printer driver, check if it is
used in the pause or offline.
Then, restart up the PC.
3 Changing the setting The application is not prop- Check if the other Excel /
erly set. Word data can be output and
change the setting of the
application.
4 Changing the setting The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP Printer
erly set. Address indicated in the sta- Driver
at the PC
5 Restarting up The IP address is not prop- Check if communication via System /
erly set. command center or PING is Network
available with IP address set (Opera-
up. Set up IP address again tion Guide
and restart the main unit if - Section
necessary. 8)
7-506
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

6 Restarting up The port settings in the Remove the checks at the
printer properties at the PC dual-directional support and
are incorrect. the SNMP status in the [Port]
tab of the printer properties in
a PC. Then, restart up the
main unit and the PC.
7 Restarting up The main unit does not After the printer is ready,
start up properly. check if the test sheet can be
output and restart the main
unit.

Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
Print file: Test page
Connecting method: Wireless LAN
Only 1 PC can't print out of all PCs installed. There is no error indication and print job will be held if print
instruction is requested.

1 Restarting up The main unit or the PC Restart up the main unit or
does not properly start up. the PC.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check the cable connection
connected. (Check if the network con-
nection is available.)
3 Checking the IP address The IP address is not prop- Check if the ID address is System /
erly set. properly set, and correct it if Network
incorrect. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check if access via com- Command
work. mand center or PING is avail- Center RX
able and then check the hub Operation
or router. Guide
5 Changing the setting The printer port IP Correct the IP address and Printer
address, the SNMP of the remove the checks at the Driver
printer driver, or the bi- SNMP status and the dual- Operation
directional support is not directional support in the Guide
properly set. [Port] tab of the printer prop-
erties at a PC. Then, restart
up the main unit and the PC.
6 Uninstalling the security The restriction of the secu- Check if the printer is avail-
software or setting the rity software causes the able by uninstalling the secu-
exception phenomenon. rity software. Or, set the
exception setting.
7-507
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

The main unit IP address is changed.

1 Restarting up There is trouble in the net- Check if a problem occurs
work. with output from all PCs on
the network and restart up
hub or router.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check if there is problem with
connected. the cable connection on the
network.
3 Restarting up The main unit does not If the operation panel or the
start up properly. buttons are not active, turn
main power switch off. After
switch on.
4 Changing the setting IP address was changed. Check if the main unit IP Printer
Address indicated in the sta- Driver
at the PC
5 Changing the setting The static IP Address is Set the static IP Address in System /
not set in the System the System Menu Network
Menu (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
(18)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1)
Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
[Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job can't be performed due to the error. (Can't print)

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains Printer
remaining. in the printer driver and Driver
delete the remaining. Operation
Guide
7-508
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
[Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The printing document is not output and the job is
held.

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains Printer
remaining. in the printer driver and Driver
delete the remaining. Operation
Guide
A PC does not recognize the main unit.

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Check if the printer icon of
properly set. PC is [Ready]. (Right click the
printer icon and execute the
trouble shooting)
2 Installing the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
printer driver. Driver
Operation
Guide
3 Restarting up The PC does not start up Restart up the PC.
properly.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is not the Update the printer driver. Printer
latest version. Driver
Operation
Guide
PC operation does not stabilize.

1 Restarting up The printer driver is not Restart PC. (In case if many
properly set. application software are run-
ning or the free space of the
PC memory /HDD is low)
7-509
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print
out the data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.

1 Checking the IP address The IP address is not prop- Check if the IP Address indi-
erly set. cated in the main unit status
report and system menu is
same as the IP address in the
port setting of [Printer Proper-
ties] at the PC. If not, correct
the IP address at the port set-
ting
The incorrect printer driver was selected.

1 Installing the printer driver The incorrect printer driver Select the correct printer
is selected. driver. If it is not in the PC,
install the printer driver for the
destination unit in the PC.
Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it remains when reinstalling it

1 Deleting the job The print jobs remain in Delete all print jobs spooling Printer
the spool inside the printer inside the printer driver. Driver
driver. Operation
Guide
2 Uninstalling the printer There is the unused printer Delete the unused printer
driver driver. driver.
3 Restarting the print The system is pausing. Right click the pausing printer
icon and select [Print resum-
ing]. Then, check the ready
port.
4 Checking the settings The host name or the IP When the main unit connects
address is not properly set. to a local network, check the
host name and the IP
address on the status report
of the main unit.
5 Adding the Standard TCP/ There is no main unit IP Add the main unit IP address
IP port Address in the Standard in Standard TCP/IP port and
TCP/IP Port print Test Page
7-510
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(25)The printed image is partly missing

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF) is faulty.

1 Checking the situation The image data process- When the phenomenon
ing with a certain applica- occurs with a certain file only,
tion (Excel, PDF) is faulty. check if there is an abnormal-
ity in the image data.
2 Checking the situation The data processing with a Check if the image does not
certain application (Excel, drop out on the print preview,
PDF) is faulty. and refer to the Help in the
application if necessary.
3 Changing the setting The PDL settings is incor- Select 'GDI compatible mode' Printer
rect. at [PDL settings] in the print Driver
settings at the PC. Operation
Guide
(26)'Paper Mismatch Error' appears

The paper size is not detected properly.

1 Changing the setting The paper size for the MP Adjust the MP tray paper size
tray is not properly set.
2 Resetting the MP paper The locations of the MP Reset the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides do not guides to match the paper
match the paper size. size.
3 Checking the MP tray The MP tray is not pulled Pull out the MP tray to extend
out. it if the A3 size paper is not
detected.
4 Changing the setting The paper size is not set Register the custom size in Cassette /
properly in the System [MP Tray Setting] in the Sys- MP Tray
Menu. tem Menu > [Paper Size] > Settings
[Size Entry]. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
5 Changing the setting Paper Mismatch Error is Set [Ignore] at [Common Set- Error Han-
set to [Ignore]. tings] > [Error Handlings] > dlings
[Paper Mismatch Error] via (Opera-
the System Menu. tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-511
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-7 Error Messages
No. Contents
(1) "Check the document processor" appears
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/inserting the
cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/inserting the
cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
(7) The message [Waste toner box is full] is wrongly displayed
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed
(10) The operation panel remains displaying 'Network device is starting'.
(11) The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed.
(12) The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'.
(13) Memory is full' is displayed at Scan to SMB.
(14) Check the toner container' is displayed while toner is available.
Content of Error Messages

(1) "Check the document processor" appears
Closing of the document processor cannot be detected.

1 Executing U244 The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the Mainte-
sensor does not operate DP opening/closing sensor nance
properly. does not operate properly, Mode List
replace it.
the wire.
• DP opening/closing sensor -
DP PWB
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Check the output of the DP
closing sensor signal sensor signal output is opening/closing sensor signal
faulty. on the DP PWB.
7-512
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
latest version. Update
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7 DP replacement The document processor Replace the document pro- Detaching
is faulty. cessor. and reat-
taching the
DP
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after
removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the
main unit

1 Reinserting the primary The primary paper feed Pull the primary paper feed Detaching
paper feed unit unit is not inserted com- unit out, then reinsert it com- and reat-
pletely. pletely. taching the
Pickup
Roller and
Feed
Roller
2 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not rise Reattach the lift plate. If it is
up. deformed, replace it.
the wire.
• Lift motor 1, 2 - Feed drive
PWB
PWB
4 Replacing the lift motor The lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve Mainte-
even U906 (Reset disable nance
function) is executed, replace Mode List
the lift motor 1 and 2. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Lift Motor
PWB faulty.
7-513
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after
removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the
main unit

1 Reinserting the PF primary The PF primary paper feed Pull out the PF primary feed Detaching
paper feed unit unit is not inserted com- unit and reinsert it com- and reat-
pletely. pletely. taching the
PF Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
2 Checking the lift plate The PF lift plate does not Reattach the PF lift plate. If it
rise up. is deformed, replace it.
the wire.
• PF lift motor 1, 2 - PF PWB
4 Replacing the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve Mainte-
even U906 (Reset disable nance
function) is executed, replace Mode List
the PF lift motor 1 and 2. Detaching
and reat-
taching the
PF lift
motor
and reat-
taching the
PF PWB
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-514
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover

1 Reattaching the front cover The front cover does not Reattach the front cover.
turn the front cover sensor
on due to the fitting failure.
the wire.
• Front cover sensor - Feed
image PWB
PWB
3 Replacing the front cover The front cover sensor is Replace the front cover sen-
sensor faulty. sor.
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover

1 Opening/closing the right The right cover switch is Open and close the right
cover and replacing the not turned on since the cover several times. If the
right cover switch mount- right cover switch mount- phenomenon reoccurs after
ing plate / right cover arm ing plate is caught by the that, replace with the new
right cover arm. right cover switch mounting
plate (302ND0432_) and the
new right cover open/close
arm (302ND2963_) which
have '1' or later of the last
digit part number.
2 Checking the right cover The covers are not fitted. When the right cover switch
switch does not turn on even if clos-
ing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover, but
check the covers if the right
cover switch turns on by
pushing directly. If the cover
is not aligned with the other
exterior covers, reattach it.
When the switch does not
always turn on, go to the next
step.
7-515
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• Right cover switch - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
4 Replacing the right cover The right cover switch is Replace the right cover
switch faulty. switch.
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray

the wire.
• MP paper sensor - Relay
connector
• Relay connector - Feed
drive PWB • Feed drive PWB
- Engine PWB
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the
MP paper sensor.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper sensor is Reattach the MP paper sen-
sensor not properly attached or it sor, and replace it if it is not
is faulty. fixed.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(7) The message [Waste toner box is full] is wrongly displayed

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the firmware to the
version. latest version.
7-516
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the operation (Separate the factor) If the waste toner box does
when opening/closing the not rotate when opening and
waste toner box cover. closing the waste toner box
cover, go to the next step
(Step 3) since the phenome-
non is caused by the weight
detection actuator. If it
rotates, go to Step 4 since the
phenomenon is caused by
the waste toner box or the
waste toner full sensor.
3 Checking the weight The weight detection actu- Repair the weight detection
detection actuator ator does not return to the actuator to return it to the
original position when proper position.
detaching and reinstalling
the waste toner box.
4 Reinstalling the waste Toner adheres on the sur- Pull out the waste toner box Replacing
toner box and cleaning the face of the waste toner full and reinstall it. Or, clean the the Waste
waste toner full sensor sensor (piezoelectric sen- surface of the waste toner full Toner Box
sor). sensor. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
5 Cleaning the waste toner The waste toner is clogged Clean inside the waste toner Detaching
box joint section at the waste toner joint box joint section of the main and reat-
section. drive unit. taching the
Main Drive
Unit
6 Replacing the waste toner Waste toner full sensor Reconnect the connector of
full sensor (piezoelectric sensor) is the waste toner full sensor.
wrongly detected. And next, measure the output
voltage of the waste toner full
sensor. (Undetected: 0V, Full
detection: 3.3V). If there is
output of 3.3V even the waste
toner is not full in the waste
toner box, replace the waste
toner full sensor.
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly
displayed

1 Replacing the wire The wire of the DP original When DP original sensor is
sensor is short-circuited. always on due to the short
circuit of the wire, replace the
wire.
2 Replacing the DP original The DP original sensor Replace the DP original sen-
sensor always turns on. sor.
7-517
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
DP PWB
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is
displayed

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Reaffix the pad of the DP
original is damaged and separation pulley cover by
caught with the pad of the holding the pad. If not
DP retard pulley cover. repaired, replace the DP sep-
aration pulley cover (includ-
ing the pad).
(10)The operation panel remains displaying 'Network device is starting'.

A bit error in the flash memory of the main PWB has occurred.

1 Resetting the main power The start-up of the main Turn off the power switch and
PWB is faulty. the main power switch. After
switch.
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-518
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(11)The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed.

1 Reinstalling the waste The waste toner box shifts Open the waste toner box
toner box and resetting the forward and it is misde- cover and pull out the waste
main power tected, or the weight sen- toner box, then reinstall it.
sor does not detect After surely closing the waste
properly for opening/clos- toner box cover, reset the
ing the waste toner box main power. Confirm the phe-
cover or presence of the nomenon does not reoccur
waste toner box. after the main unit recovers.
(If reoccurring, go to the next
step.)
2 Replacing the shutter sec- The urethane sponge in Replace the shutter section 2ND-0073
tion of the waste toner box the shutter section is of the waste toner box with
deformed by long term PARTS WTB SHUTTER
storage so that the reten- ASSY SP (302ND9496_).
tion force of the waste
toner box has decreased.
3 Replacing the waste toner If the urethane sponge If the phenomenon reoccurs Replacing
box under the shutter section after resetting the waste the Waste
of the waste toner box toner box and the waste toner Toner Box
bundled in the main unit is box cover, replace with the (Opera-
deformed and the slide waste toner box for service tion Guide
operation of the shutter (WT-8500). - Section
section becomes unex- 10)
pectedly smooth, the force
for keeping the waste toner
box is not enough. There-
fore, the waste toner box
shifts forward according to
the vibration of the main
unit drive and it is misde-
tected.
4 Checking the operation of The weight detection actu- Detach the waste toner box Detaching
the weight detection actua- ator is not attached prop- unit and pull out the fixing pin and reat-
tor erly, or switching operation at the machine rear side of taching the
of the weight detection the unit to separate the unit to Waste
actuator is not smooth the metal plate and the resin Toner Box
since there are burrs at the parts. Next, push the weight Unit
holes of the weight sensor detection actuator on the Mainte-
case which inserts the ful- metal plate by finger several nance
crum shafts of the actuator. times to switch. When per- Mode List
forming the actuator switch-
ing operation described
previously, shift the weight
detection actuator horizon-
tally. If the actuator switching
operation does not become
smooth after that, replace the
waste toner box unit and exe-
cute U155 [Calibration].
7-519
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

5 Reattaching the weight The weight detection Detach the waste toner box Detaching
detection spring spring has come off. unit and reattach the weight and reat-
detection spring. taching the
Waste
Toner Box
Unit
6 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Reconnect the connector to
nected properly to the the waste toner motor.
waste toner motor.
7 Replacing the waste toner The parts inside the waste Replace the waste toner box Detaching
box unit toner box unit such as the unit and execute U155 [Cali- and reat-
waste toner motor, etc. is bration]. taching the
faulty. Waste
Toner Box
Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
(12)The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'.
The waste toner box cover is closed but opening/closing is not detected.

1 Reinstalling the waste The waste toner box shifts Open the waste toner box
toner box and resetting the forward and it is misde- cover and pull out the waste
main power tected, or the weight sen- toner box, then reinstall it.
sor does not detect After surely closing the waste
properly for opening/clos- toner box cover, reset the
ing the waste toner box main power. Confirm the phe-
cover or presence of the nomenon does not reoccur
waste toner box. after the main unit recovers.
(If reoccurring, go to the next
step.)
2 Checking the weight sen- The weight sensor actua- Open the waste toner box
sor actuator tor does not operate prop- cover and pull out the waste
erly. toner box. Then, check if the
lever inside the waste toner
box unit where the waste
toner box was installed oper-
ates properly while pressing
the actuator detecting the
opening and closing of the
waste toner box cover at the
machine front side. If the
lever locks up, go to Step 3. If
it operates properly, go to
'Checking the connection' at
Step 4.
7-520
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

3 Reattaching the weight The weight sensor actua- Detach the waste toner box Detaching
sensor actuator and weight tor is not attached properly, unit and pull out the fixing pin and reat-
detection spring or the weight detection at the machine rear side of taching the
spring comes off. the unit to separate the unit to Waste
the metal plate and the resin Toner Box
parts. Next, reattach the Unit
weight sensor actuator and
the weight detection spring
attached at the metal plate
side.
the wire.
• Weight sensor - Engine
PWB (YC27)
5 Replacing the weight sen- The weight sensor is faulty. When the voltage generated Detaching
sor from the 11th pin of connector and reat-
YC27 on the engine PWB taching the
does not change even if Engine
opening and closing the PWB
waste toner box cover,
replace the weight sensor
(302K99421_).
6 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner box unit is Replace the waste toner box Detaching
box unit faulty. unit and execute U155 [Cali- and reat-
bration]. taching the
Waste
Toner Box
Unit
Mainte-
nance
Mode List
(13)Memory is full' is displayed at Scan to SMB.

1 Changing the original The scanned data capacity Reduce the scan resolution Function
scanner settings is large. of the original or select Defaults
[Black&White] at [Color/ (Opera-
Image Quality]. Then, resend. tion Guide
- Section
6)
7-521
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

2 Checking the Status The number of the waiting Check the sending job status Checking
screen jobs exceeds the limit. on the Status screen. If many Job & Job
waiting jobs exist, delete the Operation
unnecessary sending jobs. (Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
7)
3 Checking the OCR text Large volume originals are If OCR text recognition func- Function
recognition function scanned while the OCR tion is unnecessary, set [OCR Defaults
text recognition is On. Text Recognition] to Off at (Opera-
[System Menu/Counter] key tion Guide
> [Common Settings] > - Section
[Function Defaults]. Then, 6)
scan the originals again. If it
is necessary, set [File Sepa-
ration] to [On] and scan the
originals separately.
(14)Check the toner container' is displayed while toner is available.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the firmware to the
version. latest version.
2 Reinstalling the toner con- Toner aggregates. Pull the toner container out Toner
tainer and surely shake it to agitate Container
toner. Then, reinstall the Replace-
toner container. ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
nected properly to the the toner level sensor.
toner level sensor.
4 Executing U132 Toner aggregates. Execute U132. Mainte-
nance
Mode List
nected properly to the the toner motor.
toner motor.
6 Replacing the toner hop- The toner level sensor Replace the toner hopper
per unit inside the toner hopper unit.
unit misdetects, or the
toner motor is faulty.
7-522
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-8 Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
section sion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the
gears
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the
foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (squeal The conductive bushing at the machine rear
sounds) side of the lower exit roller slide with the roller
shaft.
(6) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit and exit The drive joint gears between the fuser unit and
unit (fluttering sounds) the exit unit excessively engage and then teeth
of the gears hit the bottom. At that time, the exit
actuator also vibrates.
(7) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (cracking The exit reverse motor is faulty.
sounds)
(8) Abnormal sound from the exit section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit
section
(9) Fan rotating sounds are noisy Fan motor is dirty or faulty.
(10) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
section sion, attachment failure of the primary paper
feed section
(11) Abnormal sound from the machine front side Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or
attachment failure at the MP feed section
(12) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the Rubbing sound between the bushing and the
fuser exit section stop ring of the fuser exit roller due to the
smudges / foreign objects adhesion
(13) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller
exit section and the shaft caused by the dirt or adhesion of
the foreign objects.
(14) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (fluttering There is a large load when sliding the fuser belt
sounds) and the parts in the belt
(15) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (cracking The cushion affixed in the cap of the fuser belt
sounds) edge section is peeled off.
(16) Abnormal sound from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the inter-
ference between the parts in the fuser section
(17) Abnormal sounds from the IH unit (buzzing When turning the power on, the buzzing sounds
sounds) are noticed from the IH unit at the upper right
side of the main unit.
(18) Abnormal sound from inside the machine The drive failure of the toner container, opening/
closing failure of the toner supply shutter, the
shortage of the toner amount or aggregation of
the toner.
7-523
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

(19) The tooth skipping sound from the toner con- The tooth skipping sound occurs when setting
tainer drive section up or at the toner container replacement
(20) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner
condensation in the developer section
(21) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
sion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum
section
(22) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jump- Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness,
ing sounds) smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste
toner vent of the primary transfer section
(23) The drive sounds are noisy during printing

(24) The metallic sound from the PF horizontal con-
veying section (Squeak sound)
(25) Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt
(Tooth jumping sounds)
(26) Abnormal sound from the waste toner forward-
ing unit
(27) Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (1) The hooks at the lower side of the main drive
unit come off, therefore the tooth between the
gear in the main drive unit and the gear in the
feed drive unit do not properly engage.
(28) Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (2) Each tooth of the gears of developer clutch and
idle gear contacts when rotating the idle gear in
the main drive unit.
(29) Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (3) The drive transmission from the motors in the
main drive unit is faulty
(30) Abnormal sounds from the image scanning sec- The scanner rails are dirty or foreign objects
tion adhere. The scanner wire fixing parts are not
attached properly. The gear of the scanner
motor is damaged.
(31) Abnormal sounds from the bridge unit (cracking The BR conveying pulley is damaged, dirty or
sounds when conveying the paper) foreign objects adhere.
(32) The high frequency sounds are generated from
the low voltage PWB when entering into the
sleep mode in the main unit with the optional
NIC.
7-524
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Content of Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)

1 Applying the grease The grease on each gear Check the rotation of the
or bushing is not enough. roller, the pulley or the gear, if
they do not rotate smoothly,
apply the grease on the gears
or the bearings. (EM-50LP,
Part number: 7BG010009H)
2 Reattaching the gears or The parts such as each Reattach the gear or the
the bearings gear or bushing are not bearings.
properly attached.
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears

1 Checking the registration The sponge of the registra- Clean the registration Detaching
cleaner tion cleaner is dirty, or the cleaner. Check the condition and reat-
sponge at the machine of the cleaner sponge and taching the
rear side peels up. replace it if necessary. When Registra-
inserting the registration tion
cleaner into the main unit, Cleaner
insert it from the upper slant
direction.
2 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gears of the conveying
on them. related rollers, and apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part num-
ber: 7BG010009H).
3 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the
grease worn down. conveying related pulley and
apply the Hanarl.
(302LV94550)
4 Cleaning and applying the The gear tooth are dirty or Clean the drive gears of the
grease foreign objects are on conveying related rollers, and
them. apply the grease (EM-50LP,
Part number: 7BG010009H).
5 Checking the pressure Pressure of the conveying Reattach the pressure
spring related roller and pulley springs of the conveying
are weak, and the bearing related rollers or the pulleys,
vibrates as the roller and or replace them.
pulley rotate.
6 Replacing the feed drive The feed drive unit is Replace feed drive unit. Detaching
taching the
Feed Drive
Unit
7-525
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.

1 Checking the developer The developer unit drive is Check if the developer is not Detaching
unit faulty. leaking from the developer and reat-
unit, there is no damaged taching the
location, and whether the Developer
roller rotates manually. Unit
Repair if necessary.
2 Replacing the developer The developer unit is Replace the developer unit. Detaching
taching the
Developer
Unit
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor

The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are shafts, and apply the grease
on them. (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H).
2 Checking the bushing The bushing is worn down. Replace the bearing of the
DP conveying roller.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the gears which trans-
grease foreign objects are on it. mit the drive to the DP con-
veying roller, and apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part num-
ber: 7BG010009H).
4 Checking the motor The motor does not Reattach the DP conveying
engage with the drive gear. related motors.
(5) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (squeal sounds)

The conductive bushing at the machine rear side of the lower exit roller slide with the roller shaft.

1 Cleaning and applying the The conductive bushing at Apply Hanarl (302LV94550) Field Mea-
grease the machine rear side of to the conductive bearing sures for
the lower exit roller slide (black) at the machine rear the abnor-
with the roller shaft. side of the exit lower roller. mal noise
from the
exit unit
7-526
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit and exit unit (fluttering sounds)
The drive joint gears between the fuser unit and the exit unit excessively engage and then teeth of the gears
hit the bottom. At that time, the exit actuator also vibrates.

1 Checking the drive link The drive joint gears Secure the exit unit with the Detaching
gear between the fuser unit and screws after shifting the drive and reat-
the exit unit excessively side of the exit unit upward so taching the
engage. that the drive joint gears of Exit Unit
the fuser unit and exit unit Detaching
engage properly. If not and reat-
repaired, replace with the taching the
fuser unit with the corrective Fuser Unit
measures.
• 302ND93083 /
302ND9C083 (KDCN) /
302ND9K083 (KDKR)
(7) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (cracking sounds)

The exit reverse motor is faulty.

1 Checking the exit reverse The exit reverse motor is Execute U030 [Exit]. If the Mainte-
motor faulty. abnormal sound occurs, nance
replace the exit reverse Mode List
motor.
(8) Abnormal sound from the exit section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bearings or gears are Clean the bearings of the Detaching
grease dirty or the foreign objects upper exit roller and the and reat-
adhere. gears, and apply the grease. taching the
(EM-50LP, Part number: Exit Unit
7BG010009H)
2 Cleaning and applying the The bearings are dirty or Clean the shaft of the exit Detaching
grease the foreign objects adhere. upper pulley and the exit and reat-
lower pulley, and apply taching the
Hanarl (302LV94550). Exit Unit
3 Cleaning and applying the The bearings are dirty or Clean the reverse guide and Detaching
grease the foreign objects adhere. the shaft of the exit feed-shift and reat-
guide. If it is not possible to taching the
remove the dirt or the foreign Exit Unit
objects, replace them.
4 Checking the exit rear The exit rear motor is Execute U030 [SB(CW)]. If Mainte-
motor (25/32ppm models) faulty. the abnormal sound occurs, nance
replace the exit rear motor. Mode List
7-527
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(9) Fan rotating sounds are noisy

Fan motor is dirty or faulty.

1 Cleaning the fan motor The fan of the fan motor is Execute U037 and specify Mainte-
dirty. the fan motor which has a nance
high rotation sound, and Mode List
clean the fan. Fan
Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
2 Replacing the fan motor The fan motor is faulty. Reattach the fan motor and Fan
reconnect the connector. If Motors
not repaired, replace it. Attach-
able Direc-
tion
(10)Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment failure of the primary paper feed section

sures against the issue press the retard release At that time, check the sur- 0089_1
caused by the cassette lever of the primary feed faces of the pickup roller and 2ND-
base bending. unit due to the bending of the feed roller, if worn down, 0089_2
the side of the cassette replace them.
base. And then, if the con- 2. Attach the heater cover kit
tact between the retard (302ND94A0_).
roller and the feed roller is 3. Measure the bending of
insufficient, both rollers are the cassette base sides (refer
rubbed against each other to the reference documents
when feeding. for the measurement
heater cover set
(302ND94A0_).
2 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear Reattach the primary paper
clutch or the clutch are not prop- feed drive parts such as the
erly attached. gear or the clutch if they are
not properly attached.
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear or the bushing is Clean the gears and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are bearings of the primary feed
on them. drive section, and apply the
grease. (EM-50LP, Part num-
ber: 7BG010009H)
7-528
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bear- Detaching
grease dirty or foreign objects are ings of the feed roller, and and reat-
on them. apply the grease. (EM-50LP, taching the
Part number: 7BG010009H) Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
5 Checking the paper feed The paper feed roller sur- Clean the paper feed roller, or Detaching
roller face is dirty or worn down. replace it if necessary. and reat-
taching the
Retard
Roller/
Pickup
Roller/
Feed
Roller
(11)Abnormal sound from the machine front side

Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at the MP feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear When the gears or the clutch
clutch or the clutch are not prop- in the MP paper feed drive
erly attached. section are not properly
attached, reattach them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bear-
grease dirty or foreign objects are ings of the MP feed roller,
on them. and apply the grease. (EM-
50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
3 Checking the MP friction The surface of the MP fric- Clean the MP friction pad and
pad tion pad is dirty or worn replace it if necessary.
out.
4 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate.
attached properly.
(12)Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser exit roller due to the smudges / foreign
objects adhesion

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit roller, bush- Clean the fuser exit roller, the
grease ing or the stop ring are bearings, stop ring, etc., and
dirty, or foreign objects are apply the heat resistant
on them. grease.
7-529
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
(13)Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section
Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller and the shaft caused by the dirt or adhesion of the foreign
objects.

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit sub roller or Clean the fuser exit sub roller, Detaching
grease the bearings are dirty. Or, the shaft, etc., and apply the and reat-
the foreign objects adhere. heat resistant grease. taching the
Fuser Unit
and reat-
taching the
Fuser Unit
(14)Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (fluttering sounds)

There is a large load when sliding the fuser belt and the parts in the belt

1 (If fluttering sounds caused There is a large load when Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
by the vibration of the exit sliding the fuser belt and and reat-
unit occur) Replacing the the parts in the belt taching the
fuser unit Fuser Unit
(15)Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (cracking sounds)

The cushion affixed in the cap of the fuser belt edge section is peeled off.

1 Replacing the fuser unit The cushion affixed in the Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
cap of the fuser belt edge and reat-
section is peeled off. taching the
Fuser Unit
(16)Abnormal sound from the fuser section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between the parts in the fuser section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings or the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gears of the fuser roller, and
on them. apply the heat resistant
grease.
7-530
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty. The for- Clean the fuser exit sub roller, Detaching
grease eign objects are adhered. the shaft, etc., and apply the and reat-
Or, the grease is not heat resistant grease. taching the
enough on the fixing shaft Fuser Unit
of the fuser exit sub roller
drive gear. (Rubbing sound
of the stop ring which fixes
the drive gear)
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser drive gear
grease objects are on it. and apply the grease. (EM-
50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
4 Applying the grease The grease is not enough. Apply the grease on the pres-
sure switching cam and the
frame. (EM-50LP, Part num-
ber: 7BG010009H)
5 (In case the phenomenon The gear of the fuser pres- Replace the fuser pressure
occurs when the fuser sure release motor is worn release motor.
pressure motor drives) down.
Replacing the fuser pres-
sure motor
6 (If occurring when fuser The fuser forwarding guide Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
drives) Replacing the fuser is bent and contacts the and reat-
unit fuser pressure roller. Or, if taching the
the fuser connection gear Fuser Unit
and the exit gear is too
close depending on the
parts assembling varia-
tion, the tooth of each gear
is hitting the bottom
against each other when
driving.
(17)Abnormal sounds from the IH unit (buzzing sounds)

When turning the power on, the buzzing sounds are noticed from the IH unit at the upper right side of the main
unit.

1 Replacing the IH unit The cores of the IH unit are Replace the IH unit.
in contact with each other.
7-531
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(18)Abnormal sound from inside the machine

The drive failure of the toner container, opening/closing failure of the toner supply shutter, the shortage of the
toner amount or aggregation of the toner.

1 Checking the toner con- The torque increases due Shake the toner container Toner
tainer to the toner condensation. enough and reinstall it. Or, Container
replace it. Replace-
ment
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
2 Cleaning the drive parts of The drive gear shaft or the If the drive gear of the con-
the container motor bearings of the container tainer motor does not rotate
motor is dirty. Or, the for- smoothly, clean the shaft or
eign objects are adhered. the bearings.
3 Reattaching the drive parts The stop ring of the con- Reattach the stop ring fixing
of the container motor tainer motor drive gear has the container motor drive
come off. gear to the shaft.
(19)The tooth skipping sound from the toner container drive section
The tooth skipping sound occurs when setting up or at the toner container replacement.

1 Replacing the container Toner container K back- Replace the container rail 2ND-0073
rail unit lashes inside the con- unit. For the monochrome
tainer rail, therefore the model, insert the positioning
pitch between the gear in pin (302ND1550_) into the
the container drive unit and hole of the container drive
the gear of toner container unit.
K become periodically
wider.

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in the developer section

1 Checking the developer The shaft or the bushing of Check if the developer roller
unit the developer roller is dirty rotates. If not rotating
or foreign objects are on smoothly, clean the shaft or
them. the bushing of the developer
roller.
2 Checking the developer The torque inside the Clean the developer unit. Detaching
unit developer unit increased Then, replace it if the issue is and reat-
due to the toner condensa- not resolved. taching the
tion, etc. Developer
Unit
7-532
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum section

1 Executing Drum refresh Toner is not enough on the Execute the drum refresh to Adjust/
drum. supply the toner to the clean- Mainte-
ing unit. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
Mode List
3 Checking the drum screw The drum screw does not Check the drum screw rota- Detaching
properly rotate. tion and if it does not rotates and reat-
smoothly, clean it. If it locks, taching the
replace the IH unit. Drum Unit
4 Cleaning and applying the Foreign objects are on the Clean the tooth surface of the
grease tooth of the drum drive drum drive gear and apply
gear, or the grease is not the grease. (EM-50LP, Part
enough. number: 7BG010009H)
5 Replacing the drum unit The torque inside the drum Replace the drum unit. Detaching
unit increased due to the and reat-
waste toner clogging, etc. taching the
Drum Unit
(22)Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds)

Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the
primary transfer section

1 Checking the shutter of the The shutter of the waste Check the opening and clos-
toner waste vent toner vent is not properly ing operation of the shutter of
opened and closed. the toner waste vent in the
transfer cleaning unit, and fix
the parts if necessary.
2 Checking the cleaning The cleaning screw does Check if the cleaning screw in
screw not properly rotate. the transfer cleaning unit
rotates smoothly, and clean it
if not rotating smoothly.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear or the bush- Clean the drive gears and the
grease ing is dirty, or foreign bearings of the primary trans-
objects are on them. fer unit, and apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H) or Hanarl
(302LV94550). (If they are
conductive bearings, apply
Hanarl.)
7-533
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the primary The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer Detaching
taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
(23)The drive sounds are noisy during printing

1 Changing the setting The Quiet Mode is off. Change the setting to [ON] at Adjust-
System Menu > [Adjustment/ ment/
Maintenance] > [Silent mode] Mainte-
nance
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
8)
(24)The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound)

1 Replacing the ground When the PF conveying Replace the ground spring.
spring roller rotates, the sliding (SPRING GROUND BRIDGE
surface of the bearings A:303RC0617_, the last digit
that hooking the PF con- is 1 or newer)
veying roller and the
ground spring is vibrating
fractionally.
(25)Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds)

1 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the drive gears and the
grease the foreign object is bearings of the primary trans-
adhered. fer unit, and apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H) or Hanarl
(302LV94550). (If they are
conductive bearings, apply
Hanarl.)
7-534
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

2 Replacing the main drive The gear section of the Replace the main drive unit. Detaching
unit developer K/transfer belt and reat-
motor and the gear taching the
engaged are scraped. Or, Main Drive
the drive of the parts in the Unit
main drive unit are faulty.
(26)Abnormal sound from the waste toner forwarding unit

1 Replacing the waste toner The drive of the motor in Replace the waste toner pipe 2ND-0090
forwarding unit the main drive unit is faulty. unit (Part number with the
last digit "2" or later).
(27)Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (1)

The hooks at the lower side of the main drive unit come off, therefore the tooth between the gear in the main
drive unit and the gear in the feed drive unit do not properly engage.

1 Reattaching the main drive The hook located at the Detach the main drive unit. Detaching
unit lower side of the main Then, fix the hooks and and reat-
drive unit comes off and secure the main drive unit taching the
the teeth of the main drive with 3 screws (7BB200308H). Main Drive
unit side gear and feed Unit
drive unit side gear does
not engage properly.

Each tooth of the gears of developer clutch and idle gear contacts when rotating the idle gear in the main drive
unit.

1 Replacing the main drive Each tooth of the gears of Replace with the main drive
unit developer clutch and idle unit (Part number with the
gear contacts when rotat- last digit "1" or later).
ing the idle gear in the
main drive unit.

The drive transmission from the motors in the main drive unit is faulty.

1 Reattaching the motor in The drive of the motor in Reattach the motor in the Detaching
the main drive unit the main drive unit is faulty. main drive unit. and reat-
taching the
Main Drive
Unit
7-535
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

2 Checking the developer The developer motor drive If the abnormal sounds are Mainte-
motor gear is damaged, or the noticed by executing U030 nance
gears do not properly [DLP], reattach the devel- Mode List
engage. oper motor. Also, when the
gear is damaged, replace the
developer motor.
(30)Abnormal sounds from the image scanning section

The scanner rails are dirty or foreign objects adhere. The scanner wire fixing parts are not attached properly.
The gear of the scanner motor is damaged.

1 Cleaning and applying the The scanner rails are dirty Remove the foreign objects
grease or foreign objects adhere. on the scanner rails and
apply the grease (PG-671) to
the rails if necessary.
2 Checking the scanner wire The front wire holding plate Reattach the front wire hold- Detaching
fixing parts or rear wire holding plate is ing plate and rear wire hold- and reat-
not attached properly and ing plate which fix the taching the
it contacts the scanner scanner wires to mirror frame Scanner
frame. A (primary mirror unit). Wires
3 Reattaching the scanner The scanner motor drive is Reattach the scanner motor.
motor not transmitted properly.
4 Replacing the scanner The gear of the scanner Replace the scanner motor.
motor motor is damaged by
pinching foreign objects,
etc..
(31)Abnormal sounds from the bridge unit (cracking sounds when conveying the
paper)
Condition: When installing the bridge unit (AK-7100)
The BR conveying pulley is damaged, dirty or foreign objects adhere.

1 Checking the BR convey- The BR conveying pulley is Clean the BR conveying pul-
ing pulley damaged, dirty or foreign ley. If damaged, replace it.
objects adhere.
2 Cleaning and applying the The bushing is dirty or for- Clean the bushing for the BR
grease eign objects adhere. conveying roller and apply
the grease (GE-676).
3 Cleaning the BR convey- The BR conveying guide is Clean the BR conveying
ing guide dirty or foreign objects guide. If difficult to remove
adhere. the smudge or foreign
objects, replace the guide.
7-536
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the BR convey- The BR conveying motor is Execute U030 [Bridge]. If the Mainte-
ing motor faulty. abnormal sounds are noticed, nance
replace the BR conveying Mode List
motor.
(32)The high frequency sounds are generated from the low voltage PWB when
entering into the sleep mode in the main unit with the optional NIC.
Condition: The sleep level is set to [Quick Recovery] when installing the ID card
reader, IB-50, IB-51, IB-35 or Printing System 15.

1 (In case the sleep level The sleep level is not set to Set 'Sleep Level' to [Energy Date/
change is acceptable) [Energy Saver]. Saver] at [System Menu/ Timer/
Changing the settings Counter] key > [Date/Timer/ Energy
Energy Saver]. Then, change Saver
the setting of the objective (Opera-
optional NIC to [On] at [Sleep tion Guide
Rules]. - Section
Note: However, in case of the 8)
main unit with the ID card
reader, it becomes impossi-
ble to recover the main unit
even if scanning the ID card
after this setting change.
Please explain a user who
should press the [Energy] key
on the operation panel to
recover the main unit.
2 (In case the sleep level The low voltage PWB does Replace with the low voltage Detaching
change is not acceptable) not support this conditions. PWB with '1' and after of the and reat-
Replacing the low voltage last digit part number. taching the
PWB • For 110V/120V: Low Volt-
302ND94611 age PWB
• For 220-240V: 302ND94621 Date/
In use of the above low volt- Timer/
age PWB, [Quick Recovery] Energy
sleep level can be set when Saver
installing the objective (Opera-
optional NIC. tion Guide
- Section
8)
7-537
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
7-9 Malfunction

(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misde-
tected or not displayed
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate (Final phenomenon: Malfunction such as the
abnormal image output due to heated CPU)
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate (Final phenomenon: The printing operation of
the main unit is frequently interrupted to cool the
machine inside according to the inner tempera-
ture increase during the continuous printing.)
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on
the power switch
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section (Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper
leading edge)
(7) No display in the operation main panel (Image on the operation panel is faulty or
becomes pure white)
(8) The operation panel remains displaying 'WEL- Communicate between the main PWB and the
COME' and does not change operation panel main PWB can't be done.
(9) No action by pressing the operation panel
(10) The login fails with other than the ID card
(11) The original size on the original glass is misde- A4 size original is displayed as A3 size when
tected. loading it on the contact glass and closing the
platen cover
(12) The container cover is not opened although the
toner container is not installed.
(13) The FAX icon is not displayed on the operation
panel even if installing the FAX PWB.
(14) The operation panel does not display the fin-
isher even if installing the finisher
(15) The Job separator LED continuously turns on The JS actuator (at the job separator) continues
even if removing the paper from the JS tray to turn the JS sensor (at the main unit) on while
there is no paper.
(16) Even if the paper feeder is installed, it is not dis-
played on the operation panel.
7-538
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Content of Malfunction
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed
Object: Main unit, Paper feeder

1 Checking the actuator The actuator does not Check if the actuator for the
operate properly. paper length sensor oper-
ates when inserting the cas-
sette. If it does not properly
operate, reattach the actua-
tor.
2 Checking the paper length The paper length sensor or Reattach the paper length
sensor and fan shaped the fan shaped arm does sensor or the fan shaped
arm not operate correctly. arm.
3 Checking the detected When inserting the cas- After inserting the cassette Cassette /
paper size on the opera- sette vigorously into the vigorously into the main unit MP Tray
tion panel main unit with a large with a large amount of paper Settings
amount of paper loaded in loaded in the cassette, check (Opera-
the cassette, the paper the paper size of the target tion Guide
width guide temporarily cassette which is detected on - Section
deflects, the angle of the the operation panel. ([Status/ 8)
switching lever for the Job Cancel] key > [Paper/
paper width sensor shifts, Supplies])
and the paper width sensor If the paper size in the cas-
does not turn on correctly. sette is not detected, pull out
the cassette and insert the
cassette with the normal
strength. If it does not reoc-
cur, please explain to the
user not to insert the cassette
vigorously.
If there is concern about
reoccurrence by the same
operation after that, specify
the paper size of the target
cassette instead of [Auto].
([System Menu/Counter] key
> [Cassette/MP tray Set-
tings] > [Cassette 1 (to 5)])
4 Attaching the countermea- If the cassette base is bent Attach PARTS CASSETTE 2ND-0085
sure part to LEVER SIDE due to the shock when LEVER ASSY SP
SWITCH A inserting the cassette (302L79423_) to LEVER
strongly, the amount of SIDE SWITCH A.
shifting LEVER SIDE
SWITCH at the cassette
base bottom is insufficient.
As a result, the paper width
sensor is not turned On.
7-539
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• Paper length sensor - Feed
drive PWB
• Paper width sensor - Feed
drive PWB
PWB
6 Replacing the paper length The paper length sensor is Replace the paper length
sensor faulty. sensor.
7 Replacing the paper width The paper width sensor is Replace the paper width sen-
sensor faulty. sor.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected

1 Checking the sub tray Sub tray is not in the Pull out the sub tray to the
proper position. position where you can see
the triangle mark. Or, store it
completely inside the MP
frame.
the wire.
• Main unit - Paper conveying
unit
• MP paper length sensor -
Feed drive PWB
• MP paper width sensor -
Feed drive PWB
PWB
3 Checking the MP paper MP Paper width sensor Check the home position of
width sensor does not operate correctly. the MP paper width sensor,
and reattach it if necessary.
Then, replace the sensor if it
is not fixed.
7-540
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the MP paper MP Paper length sensor Reattach the MP paper
length sensor does not operate correctly. length sensor. If not repaired,
replace it.
PWB faulty.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate

(Final phenomenon: Malfunction such as the abnormal image output due to heated CPU)

1 Cleaning the controller fan The fan is dirty with dust. Clean the controller fan
motor motor.
the wire.
• Controller fan motor - Main
PWB
3 Replacing the controller The controller fan motor is Replace the controller fan Fan
fan motor faulty. motor. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate

(Final phenomenon: The printing operation of the main unit is frequently interrupted to cool the machine inside
according to the inner temperature increase during the continuous printing.)

1 Checking the developer Foreign materials such as Clean the developer fan Mainte-
fan motor operation dust adhere on the devel- motor. Execute U037 [DLP1] nance
oper fan motor. to [DLP4] and specify the Mode List
developer fan motor that Fan
does not work. Proceed to Motors
the next step after specifying. Attach-
able Direc-
tion
7-541
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

the wire.
• Developer fan motor -
Drum/developer relay PWB
- Feed image PWB
PWB
3 Replacing the developer The developer fan motor is Replace the developer fan Fan
fan motor faulty. motor. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
taching the
Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detach-
ing and
reattach-
ing the
waste
toner box
unit')
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch

1 Measuring the input volt- The power cord has no Plug the power cord into
age continuity. another wall outlet.
2 Checking the power cord The power plug of the If the power plug is deformed
power cord is faulty. or faulty, replace the power
cord.
3 Checking the power cord The power cord is faulty. If there is no continuity of the
power cord, replace the
power cord.
7-542
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

4 Checking the main power The main power switch is Check the continuity between
switch faulty. the contacts of the main
power switch, and replace
the main power switch if there
is no continuity.
5 Checking the low voltage The connector is not con- Clean the terminal of the con- Service
PWB nected properly. The wire nectors on the low voltage Manual -
or the PWB is faulty. PWB, then reconnect the Section 8
wire connector. If the wire is 'PWBs'
faulty, repair or replace it. If Detaching
not repaired, replace the low and reat-
voltage PWB. taching the
Low Volt-
age PWB
6 Replacing the power The power switch is faulty. Check the power switch.
switch Replace it if there is no conti-
nuity.
7 Checking the engine PWB The connector or FFC ter- Check if the 10th pin of con- Detaching
minal is not connected nector YC29 on the engine and reat-
properly. Or, the wire, FFC, PWB generates 24V. When it taching the
PWB is faulty. does not generate 24V, clean Engine
a the terminals of the connec- PWB
tor on the engine PWB and Service
reinsert the wire connector Manual -
and the FFC terminal. If the Section 8
wire or FFC is faulty, repair or 'PWBs'
replace it. If not repaired after
that, replace the engine
PWB.
8 Checking the main PWB The connector or FFC ter- Clean the terminal of the con- Service
minal is not connected nectors on the main PWB, Manual -
properly. Or, the wire, FFC, then reconnect the wire con- Section 8
PWB is faulty. nector and reconnect the 'PWBs'
replace it. If not repaired, taching the
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section

(Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)

1 Reaffixing the toner scat- Scattering prevention Re-affix the scattering pre- Detaching
tering prevention seal on sheet is peeling off. vention sheet on the primary and reat-
the primary transfer unit transfer unit. taching the
Primary
Transfer
Unit
7-543
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the developer The developer unit or the Clean the developer unit and Detaching
and drum units drum unit is dirty. the drum unit. and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
Detaching
and reat-
taching the
Drum Unit
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
version. latest version. Update
4 Executing Developer The amount of toner in the Execute the developer Adjust/
refresh developer unit is large. Or, refresh twice. Mainte-
the toner is deteriorated. nance
Menu
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
10)
5 Replacing the developer The toner is deteriorated. Replace the developer unit. Detaching
unit and reat-
taching the
Developer
Unit
(7) No display in the operation panel

(Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)

1 Resetting the main power The main firmware does Turn off the power switch and
not start correctly. the main power switch. And
turn on the main power
after 5s passed. After that,
set the sleep level to [Quick
Recovery].
nected properly. Or, the lowing wire connectors and Manual -
wire is faulty so that the reconnect the connectors. If Section 8
power for display is not there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
supplied. the wire.
panel main PWB
• Main PWB - Low voltage
PWB
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
7-544
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
5 Replacing the engine PWB The capacitor on the Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
engine PWB is damaged. and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
6 Replacing the low voltage Low voltage power PWB is Replace the low voltage Detaching
PWB faulty and the power is not PWB. and reat-
supplied to the main PWB. taching the
Low Volt-
age PWB
(8) The operation panel remains displaying 'WELCOME' and does not change
Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel main PWB can't be done.

switch.
faulty. there is no continuity, replace 'PWBs'
the wire.
panel main PWB
Mode List
and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
taching the
Operation
Panel
Main PWB
7-545
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(9) No action by pressing the operation panel

1 Removing foreign objects Foreign objects enter into Remove foreign objects
the gap between the oper- around the touch panel.
ation cover and the touch
panel, and the touch panel
where is pressed by for-
eign objects responds.
Therefore, where touched
by a user does not
respond.
(10)The login fails with other than the ID card

1 Changing the setting [User/Job Account] is valid Set [Permit] at [User/Job ID Card
while the card authentica- Account] > [ID Card Settings] Authenti-
tion kit is not installed. > [Key Login] via the System cation Set-
Menu. tings
(Opera-
tion Guide
- Section
9)
(11)The original size on the original glass is misdetected.

A4 size original is displayed as A3 size when loading it on the contact glass and closing the platen cover

the wire.
• Original size timing sensor -
Engine PWB
• Original size sensor -
Engine PWB
2 Checking the original size The original size timing Check if the exposure lamp
timing sensor sensor does not operate turns on by pressing the actu-
properly. ator of the original size timing
sensor. If not turning on,
replace the sensor.
3 Checking the original size The original size sensor Reattach the original size
sensor does not operate properly. sensor. If not repaired,
replace it.
7-546
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(12)The container cover is not opened although the toner container is not installed.

1 Checking the connection The connector is not con- Select U033 [Container Mainte-
nected properly, or the wire Cover] and press the [Start] nance
is faulty. key to check the container Mode List
solenoid operation. When it
does not operate, reinsert the
connector to the container
solenoid. If the wire is faulty,
2 Replacing the container The container solenoid is Check if the container sole-
solenoid faulty. noid has continuity, and if
there is no continuity, replace
the container solenoid.
3 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is Reconnect the wire connec- Service
PWB faulty. tors on the feed image PWB. Manual -
If the wire is faulty, repair or Section 8
replace the wire. If not 'PWBs'
repaired after that, replace
the feed image PWB.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector is not con- Reconnect the wire connec- Service
nected properly. The wire tors on the engine PWB. If Manual -
or the PWB is faulty. the wire is faulty, repair or Section 8
replace it. If not repaired after 'PWBs'
that, replace the engine Detaching
PWB. and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
(13)The FAX icon is not displayed on the operation panel even if installing the FAX
PWB.

power switch.
7-547
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

2 Checking the FAX firm- The FAX firmware is not Check the FAX firmware ver- Mainte-
ware version latest. sion at U019. If not latest, nance
upgrade the FAX firmware to Mode List
the latest version. Firmware
Update
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not Reinstall the FAX PWB. If not FAX Instal-
installed properly, or faulty. repaired, replace the FAX lation
PWB. Guide
4 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Reconnect the wire connec- Service
tors on the main PWB. If the Manual -
wire is faulty, repair or Section 8
replace the wire. If not 'PWBs'
repaired after that, replace Detaching
the main PWB. and reat-
taching the
Main PWB
(14)The operation panel does not display the finisher even if installing the finisher

1 Resetting the main power The finisher does not oper- Turn the power switch and
ate properly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Checking the connection The connection between Reinstall the finisher to the Service
the finisher and the main main unit. If the connector or Manual -
unit is faulty. wire is faulty, repair or Section 9
replace it. 'Wiring
diagram
(Options
connec-
tion)'
3 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Reconnect the wire connec- Service
tors on the DF PWB. If not Manual -
repaired, replace the DF Section 9
PWB and then upgrade the 'Wiring
DF firmware to the latest ver- diagram
sion by using the USB device (Options
memory which contains the connec-
latest enhancement firmware tion)'
pack. Firmware
Update
7-548
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(15)The Job separator LED continuously turns on even if removing the paper from
the JS tray
The JS actuator (at the job separator) continues to turn the JS sensor (at the main unit) on while there is no
paper.

1 Reinstalling the job sep- The job separator is not Reinstall the job separator.
arator installed properly.
2 Checking the JS actuator The shaft of the JS actua- Reattach the JS actuator. If
tor comes off or is the shaft is deformed, replace
deformed. the JS actuator.
3 Reattaching COVER TOP The JS actuator at the job Shift COVER TOP REAR
REAR separator which the install- (302ND0411_) downward
ing position is followed to and secure it with the screw.
COVER TOP REAR can-
not interrupt the JS sensor
light since COVER RTOP
REAR is attached shifting
upward.
4 Reattaching the JS sensor The JS actuator cannot Adjust the position of attach-
mounting plate interrupt the JS sensor ing the JS sensor mounting
light since the JS sensor is plate (302ND0493_) in the
attached shifting from the vertical direction so that the
proper position. photo-interruption part of the
JS actuator inserts into the
center of the detection part of
the JS sensor.
5 Replacing the JS actuator The photo-interruption part Replace the JS actuator
of the JS actuator is (302ND04271) with the
caught by the edge of the shape changed so that it
detection part on the JS does not contact the edge of
sensor and then it cannot the detection part of the JS
return while remaining sensor.
paper detection On.
the wire.
• JS sensor - Feed image
PWB
PWB
7 Checking the JS sensor The JS sensor does not Replace the JS sensor.
operate properly.
PWB faulty. PWB.
and reat-
taching the
Engine
PWB
7-549
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
(16)Even if the paper feeder is installed, it is not displayed on the operation panel.

1 Resetting the main power The paper feeder does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
2 Checking the connection The connection between Reinstall the paper feeder to Service
the paper feeder and the the main unit. If the drawer Manual -
main unit is faulty due to connector pins or the wire is Section 9
the deformation of the faulty, repair or replace them. 'Wiring
drawer connector pins, etc. diagram
(Options
connec-
tion)'
3 Checking the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Reconnect the connectors to Service
the PF PWB. If not resolved, Manual -
replace the PF PWB and lock Section 9
the PF fixing pin and surely 'Wiring
tighten the screw. Then, turn diagram
the main power on. (Options
connec-
tion)'
7-550
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
7-10 Connector troubleshooting

*:Unless otherwise specified, it occurs at start-up
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC6 Feed Drive PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No Occur JAM and service No Occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) call error, C7601 (ID sensor call error, but abnormal oper- occurs
error *D rank) ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and no cassette open/
close can be detected
YC40 Feed Image PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power It doesn't occur JAM and C (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) error) call, but abnormal operation occurs
*Refer to Remarks (2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC42 Feed Image PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2760 (Transfer belt motor No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) error) call error error occurs
(2) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC9 APC PWB When printing, C4001 (Poly- No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The polygon motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
gon motor synchronization call error call error, but abnormal (3) The K image signal is shut off and abnormal K images are output
error) image *Refer to Remarks
YC27 APC PWB, lower power C0980(24V power shutoff C0980(24V power shutoff No occur JAM and service (1) The 24V power output permission signal is shut off and no 24V power is gener-
PWB, waster toner motor and detection) detection) call error ated to cause 24V power error
weight detection sensor (2) The 24V output permission signal is shut off and no 24V power is generated to
cause 24V power error
YC16 DP, sensor and scanner motor C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) (1) The carriage drive motor control signal is shut off and carriage error occurs
(2) Power to the carriage position sensor is shut off and carriage error occurs
(3) The carriage drive motor control signal is shut off and carriage error occurs
YC36 CCD PWB C3800(AFE error) No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) CPU-AFE device communication line is shut off and no communication is estab-
call error call error lished to cause AFE error
YC34 Transfer High Voltage PWB No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer high voltage control signal is shut off and images become faint with-
call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal out transfer
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks (3) Transfer belt cleaning high voltage control signal is shut off and cleaning failure
occurs
YC33 Main High Voltage PWB C5101 (Main high voltage K No occur JAM and service C5101 (Main high voltage K (1) K current detection signal is disconnected and high voltage error occurs
error) call error error) (3) A main charge control signal is disconnected and high voltage error occurs
YC1 Lower voltage power Source System error F040 (1) The power line to Engine PWB is shut off and no communication with Main PWB
PWB is established without Engine PWB start-up
YC29 IH PWB C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- (1) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
tion error) tion error) tion error) (2) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
(3) Ground is disconnected and no communication is established
YC43 Main PWB System error F040 No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) ASIC-CPU communication line is shut off and no communication is established
call error call error, but abnormal oper- (3) The signal to control "Job separator" LED on the operation panel is shut off and no
ation *Refer to Remarks LED is lit when ejected to the job separator
7-551
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Phenomenon
Engine YC35 Main PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) A job does not start while continuing Copy scans display
YC38 Temperature and humidity No occur JAM and service (1) The outer temperature/humidity sensor signal is shut off and C7800 (D rank) error
sensor, power source fan call error, C7800 (Broken occurs Temperature is kept at 23°C and no temperature correction functions
motor outer thermistor wire *D rank)
*Refer to Remarks
YC4 Fiery Relay PWB
Feed YC6 Engine PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
image communication error) error) call error occurs
(2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC28 Engine PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM No occur JAM and service C2760 (Transfer belt motor (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) call error error) error occurs
(2) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC29 Feed Drive PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C7980(Waste toner over- C7470(Toner sucking fan (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
motor error) flow)*Refer to Remarks for error) (2) The waste toner sensor control signal is shut off and waste toner overflow occurs
occurrence condition (3) The toner sucking fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
YC32 The middle transfer belt fuser C1950(Middle transfer belt No occur JAM and service "Main unit cover is open" the (1) The communication line with the primary transfer EEPROM is shut off and com-
high voltage PWB container unit EEPROM error) call error, but abnormal oper- front cover open is displayed. munication error occurs
solenoid ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The front cover open/close sensor signal is shut of and constant cover open
occurs
YC33 IH PWB fan motor, Eject/IH C6920(IH coil cooling fan C6920(IH coil cooling fan No occur JAM and service (1) Ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off and FAN error occurs.
fan motor error) error) call error (2) Ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off and FAN error occurs.
YC17 Ejection motor, sensor for C7901 (Drum K EEPROM When printing, JAM470x When printing, JAM430x (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
conveying, drum developer error) (Switch-back sensor non- (Duplex sensor non-arrival x: error occurs
relay PWB arrival x: differ by cassette differ by cassette) (2) The signal of the sensor on the paper conveying path is shut off and jam is
detected while being unable to detect paper
(3) The switch-back motor control signal is shut off at duplex printing and no paper is
switched. Then, jam is detected.
YC12 RFID PWB C7320(Toner container No occur JAM and service C7320(Toner container (1) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
detection connector error) call error, but abnormal oper- detection connector error) (2) The power line to the PWB to communicate the toner container is shut off and the
ation *Refer to Remarks toner container indication disappears from the operation panel while being unable to
detect the toner container
(3) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
YC36 Container motor When supplying the toner, When supplying the toner, No occur JAM and service (1) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
C7001(container stir motor C7001(container stir motor call error (2) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
error) error) (3) As the signal which controls the turn direction of the container motor is shut off
and the turn direction is fixed, but toner supply error doesn't occur since turned to the
supplying direction.
YC24 Drum motor Bk, Developer Bk C2201(Drum motor K steady- C2760(Transfer belt motor C2201(Drum motor K steady- (1) Since the control signal to drum motor Bk is shut off, motor error occurs.
or Belt motor state error) error) state error) (2) Since the control signal to developer Bk or belt motor is shut off, motor error
occurs.
(3) Since the control signal to drum motor Bk is shut off, motor error occurs.
7-552
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Phenomenon
Feed YC23 Sensor belt, separation motor C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- (1) The primary and secondary transfer pressure motor control signal is shut off and
image ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release pressure error occurs
error) error) error) (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and pres-
sure error occurs
(3) The primary and secondary transfer pressure sensor control signal is shut off and
pressure error occurs
YC19 Toner motor, sensor When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7301(Hop- No jam and service call error (1) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
per motor K error) per motor K error) (2) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The hopper K toner detection control signal is shut off and no toner is supplied
from the toner container while constantly judging sufficient toner
YC2 The right cover switch "Main unit cover is open" the
front cover open is displayed.
YC35 Transfer High Voltage PWB, No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) No power is supplied to Main High Voltage PWB and blank pages are output
Main High Voltage PWB call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal (2) No power is supplied to the transfer high voltage and images become faint without
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks transfer
(3) Power to the developer unit is shut off and faint images are output
YC3 Feed Drive PWB C2500(Conveying motor (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
error)
YC1 Lower voltage power source C2700(Primary and second- (1) No power is supplied to Feed Image PWB and motor error occurs
PWB ary transfer pressure release
error)
YC22 Fuser PWB, sensor, thermis- C6980(Fuser EEPROM C6030(Broken upper fuser No jam and service call error (1) The communication line with the fuser EEPROM is shut off and communication
tor error) thermistor detection) error occurs
(2) The fuser thermistor wire is broken and thermistor error occurs
YC30 BR Main PWB, DF Main PWB When copying, "Inner tray is No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
full. Remove the paper. " call error, but abnormal oper- call error, but abnormal oper- (1) AK detection signal is shut off and control is turned off while judging no AK. The
message is displayed. ation *Refer to Remarks ation *Refer to Remarks part attached to the eject section turns on the sensor there when no AK is installed
but it is turned off to cause mismatch when AK is installed and inner tray mis-detec-
tion occurs
(2) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
(3) No power is supplied to the paper sensor for the AK eject and [Job separator] LED
on the operation panel is not lit
YC25 DF Main PWB No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
call error, but abnormal oper- (1) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
ation *Refer to Remarks occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
Feed YC3 Engine PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
drive communication error) call error, but abnormal oper- call error, C7601 (ID sensor occurs
ation *Refer to Remarks error *D rank) (2) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and the cassette open/
close cannot be detected
(3) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
YC2 Feed Image PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C2840(Transfer belt cleaning No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
motor error) motor error) call error (2) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
7-553
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Phenomenon
Feed YC7 Conveying cover JAM0000(Initial JAM) "Main unit cover is open" the No occur JAM and service (1) The signal of the paper sensor on the conveying path is shut off and jam occurs
drive right cover open is displayed. call error, but C6900 *Refer while detecting paper at power-up
to Remarks (2) The right cover open/close sensor signal is shut off and right cover open is
detected constantly
(3) The MPF paper size detection signal is shut off and size error occurs. For exam-
ple: A4 side to indefinite size, A3 to A4 side When continuous A4L printing, occurs
Fuser edge cooling fan error(C6900).
YC8 Conveying cover C1000(MPF lift motor error) No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error (1) MPF lift motor sensor signal is shut off and motor error occurs without detecting
call error, but when executing the position
the MPF paper feeding, (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and motor
C1000 (MPF lift motor error). error occurs when feeding from MPF
YC10 Fuser motor C6610(Fuser pressure C7490(Eject cooling fan No jam and service call error (1) The fuser pressure motor control signal is shut off and fuser pressure position
releasing detection sensor error) sensor error occurs
error) (2) The eject fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
YC11 Feed motor C2500(Conveying motor C2500(Conveying motor JAM0501 at printing (1) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
error) error) (2) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The feed motor rotation direction control signal is shut off and jam occurs with the
reverse rotation
YC4 Feed clutch JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 No occur JAM and service JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 (1) Cassette 1 feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam occurs
no paper feed JAM) call error. no paper feed JAM) (2) Cassette 2 paper feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam
occurs
(3) Cassette 1 paper feed clutch control signal is shut of and no paper feed jam
occurs
YC5 Main unit (cassette) Cassette paper size is not Cassette bottom plate is not Cassette 1 and Cassette 2 (1) The cassette paper size sensor is shut off and size cannot be detected
displayed at the copy screen lifted up are displayed (2) Cassette 1 open/close sensor signal is shut off and the lift-up operation is not exe-
which the error doesn't occur. cuted without detecting the cassette open/close
(3) Cassette 1 and 2 lift-up motor control signal is shut off and Cassette 1 and 2 error
occurs
YC9 Registration clutch, ID sensor When printing, JAM4101(belt No occur JAM and service When printing, JAM4101(belt (1) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and no paper is conveyed to cause
roll-up sensor is non-arrival). call error, C7601 (ID sensor roll-up sensor is non-arrival). jam
error *D rank) (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and paper cannot be conveyed to
cause jam
YC6 Paper feed conveying sensor, JAM0000(Initial JAM) JAM0000(Initial JAM) No occur JAM and service (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
clutch call error. However if execut- paper
ing cassette 2 feed, JAM0502 (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
occurs. paper
(3) The power to the sensor on the paper conveying path passing through when feed-
ing from Cassette 2 is shut off and jam occurs if feeding from Cassette 2
YC1 Feed Image PWB C2500 or C6610(Conveying (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
motor error or Fuser pressure
releasing detection sensor
error)
7-554
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
Phenomenon
Main YC42 Power Source PWB The operation panel is not (1) No power is supplied to Main PWB and Panel does not start up
activated
YC6 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is acti-
vated but nothing appears
(White screen)
YC12 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is not The error doesn't occur. No (1) Since the power is not supplied to Panel, the Panel doesn't start up.
activated response when pressing the (2) Since the machine front side of power button signal is shut off, nothing is
main switch. responded.
(3) Since the signal for Panel recovery from sleep mode is shut off, when attempting
to recover by pressing the Energy Saver key in sleep mode, the operation panel side
cannot be recovered with the communication error, abnormal communication occurs
the service call error.
(Or when receiving FAX during sleep mode, the service call error appears while the
panel cannot return)
YC60 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC59 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC63 Engine PWB System error F040 No jam and service call error No jam and service call error
YC43 Engine PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) Scanner scans Copy but Scan display does not finish
YC23 Cooling fan No error has occurred
YC2 HDD
YC32 HDD
YC8 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred
YC9 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred No error has occurred No error has occurred
Phenomenon occurring at contact failure of the FFC (YC35) between the engine PWB and main PWB
7-555
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1
7-556
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7-11 Others
(1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides
(1-1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit
Adjust the center position of the punch unit (A) based on the MP tray.
Procedures
1. Pull out the inner finisher from the main
unit.
Figure 7-5
2. Remove the screw (B) and detach the punch unit cover (C).
3. Perform the test copy by feeding paper from the MP tray.
4. Loosen the screw (1).
When the punch holes shift toward the machine front side, relocate the punch unit (A) toward the
machine rear side ().
When the punch holes shift toward the machine rear side, relocate the punch unit (A) toward the
machine front side ().
5. Repeat Step2-3 till the punch holes are located within the reference value.
[Reference value (d)] (The reference value (e) cannot be adjusted.)
• For Metric: d=40.0mm±2mm, e=80mm±0.5mm
• For Inch: d=34.93mm±2mm (1.38in±0.08in), e=69.85mm±0.5mm (2.75in±0.02in)
6. Tighten the screw (1).
d
e
Figure 7-6
7-557
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
7. Reattach the punch unit cover (C) by the screw (B).

8. Reinstall the inner finisher into the main unit.
B(M3x8)
Figure 7-7
(1-2) Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjust the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray) based on the center position for the
punch unit after finishing the adjustment at Step 1).
[Adjusting the center position for the cassettes in the main unit / PF-7100]
1. Perform the test copy by feeding paper from each paper source.
2. Loosen the fixing screw (E) of the pinion gear (D) that secures the center position for the paper width
guides when the punch holes shift.
3. Relocate the paper width guide (F) of the machine rear side in the counter direction of the punch holes
shifted.
When the punch holes shift in the machine rear direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in
the machine front direction.
When the punch holes shift in the machine front direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in
the machine rear direction.
4. Tighten the fixing screw (E).
5. Put paper on the cassette, and relocate the paper width guides at the machine front and rear sides along
the paper width.
D
F
Figure 7-8
7-558
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. Repeat Step 1-5 till the punch holes

locate within the reference value.
[Reference value (d)] (The reference value
(e) cannot be adjusted.)
• For Metric: d=40.0mm±2mm, d
e
e=80mm±0.5mm
• For Inch: d=34.93mm±2mm
(1.38in±0.08in), e=69.85mm±0.5mm
(2.75in±0.02in)
Figure 7-9
(1-3) Adjusting the center line at U034

Execute U034 [LSU Out Left] to adjust the center line of each paper source (except the MP tray).
7-559
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110)
[Part]
Part No: 303RC94080 (3RC94080)
Part name: PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SET SP
Q'ty / 1 unit: 1
Remark
For the PF feed frame in the left cassette: Film A with PORON® x 2 pcs
For the PF feed frame in the right cassette: Film B with PORON® x 2 pcs
A B
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
40 mm
39 mm
Figure 7-10
[Affixing location]
Following PF feed frames for the left and right cassettes in PF-7110 (Large capacity feeder)
• Left cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER (303RC0603_)
• Right cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER B (303RC0613_)
[Step for affixing]

1. Locate the up-vertical and horizontal affixing location for the films with PORON® and clean there with
alcohol.
2. Remove the sheet from the PORON (a) and affix the PORON(a) faster than other parts.
3. Affix other parts (film) than PORON (a) and press them surely.
4. After affixing, pull out and reinsert the cassette multiple times to confirm the film with PORON® does not
contact the neighboring parts.
B a
A B
A
Figure 7-11
7-560
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Vertical alignment for the PF feed frame]

Affix the films on where the following 2 conditions are matched.
• Condition 1: Align the film (c) of film A and B with PORON to the slant surface (b) of the PF feed frame.
• Condition 2: Align the film (e) of film A and B with PORON to the vertical surface (d) of the PF feed frame.
b
e
d
a
Figure 7-12
[Horizontal alignment for the PF feed frame]

Align the films with PORON to the PF feed frame horizontally for the left cassette(A) and the right cassette(B).
0 mm
0.5 mm
A 0.5 mm
0 mm
0 mm
0.5 mm
B
0.5 mm
0 mm
Figure 7-13
7-561
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2ND-0073
Part No. 302ND94960

Part Name PARTS WTB SHUTTER ASSY SP
(Machine rear side of the waste toner box)

[Shutter ass'y (302ND94960)]
Remark
The Urethane sponge is affixed

on the back side of the shutter.
Procedure to replalce the shutter ass'y of the waste toner box㻌
No Procedure Detail
1 Detach the waste toner box from the machine.
Slide the shutter (a: Yellow label is affixed) at

the shutter section of the waste toner box in
the front direction of the machine.
2
* The arrow in the photo to the right shows the
moving direction of the part.
a a
b
While widening the hook (b) to both the left

3 and right, slide the shutter (c) in the front
direction of the machine.
Figure 1
While widening the hook (b) again at the d
position (Figure 1 to the right) where the
shutter (c) stops naturally and widen the hook
(e) of the shutter attachment plate (d), then
release the inside hook (f) of the shutter (c) c
one by one. (Photo to the right shows that the
4
condition of releasing the right inside hook (f)
first)
e
After that, detach the shutter ass'y (g: f
302ND94960) by sliding in the front direction
g
of the machine.
7-562
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
No Procedure Detail
d
Shutter ass'y (g)
h
Insert the shutter leading edge section (h) of

the shutter ass'y (g) for the field service in the
lower side of the shutter attachment plate (d)
and matching the position of the waste toner
output opening (i) to install it by sliding in the
5 rear direction of the machine.
Note: i
After installation, make sure that the hooks (b)
on both sides are securely engaged. (Refer to
the Figure. 2 to the right)
Figure 2
(Machine left side) (Machine right side)
b b
Slide the shutter (a) in the rear direction of the

machine.
6
Reattach the waste toner box to the machine.

a a
7-563
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2ND-0076
Procedure to check the pressure release gear㻌

Be sure to check if the pressure release gear at the machine front side of the primary transfer unit comes off or
not by pulling the pressure release joint gear at the machine rear side.
• When the pressure release joint gear can be pulled out:
The pressure release gear comes off. Therefore, replce with the new primary transfer unit.
• When the pressure release joint gear cannot be pulled out:
The pressure release gear does not come off.
[Primary transfer unit]

[The way to check the pressure release gear]
(Machine Pressure release joint gear:
rear side) If it is possible to pull out to
the outside direction of the
unit (Arrow direction of the
(Machine photo to the left), the
front side) pressure release gear is
come off.
(Condition that the cover is removed)

Gear is coming off
Normal condition
If the pressure release gear comes
off, the pressure release structure
Pressure of the machine front side does not
release gear operate properly, it leads to the
abnormal image or service call
error.
Note:
If the print operation is done when the pressure releasee gear comes off, the abnormal image (missing image,
light image, etc. Refer to [Fig.1].) or service call error C2700 (the primary/secondary transfer pressure release
error) might occur. And once the event log is printed, the history of service call below might remain on the list.
- C7601, C7602: ID sensor error - C7620: Auto color registration error
- C7611 to C7614: Bias calibration read value error - C5130 to C5134: Primary transfer high-voltage error
[Fig.1: U089 MIP-PG image]

(The condition of the abnormal image defers depending on the products or the condition of the pressure release
structure)
7-564
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2ND-0085
Part No. 302L794230

Part Name PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP
Remark 1 pce per 1 cassette
Procedure to attach PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP㻌

㻌
No. Procedure Detail
Clean the red shaded section of

1
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A with alcohol.
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A
PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP
LEVER SIDE
Peel off the double sided tape mount SWITCH A Cleaning position
of PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY
SP (302L794230) and affix the
surface of LEVER SIDE SWITCH A
which was cleaned with alcohol.
2 (Refer to the drawing 1 for the affixing Cleaning position
position)
After affixing it, press whole part of [Drawing 1]
PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP
by finger and make sure it adheres to Align at the edge
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A.
0.5mm 0mm
Align at the edge
0.5mm
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A
7-565
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2ND-0089_1
Procedure to attach the heater cover㻌

(Estimate work time: 10 min.)
No Procedure Detail
[Main unit cassette 2] [Main unit cassette 2]
Turn the power switch off and unplug
the power plug.
Pull the upper cassette (a) out from
the main unit (c) and take it out in the
Pull the lower cassette (b) out from the
main unit (c) and take it out in the
1 direction of the arrow.
[Paper feeder (PF-7100)] [PF-7100]
Turn the power switch off and unplug
the power plug.
Pull the upper cassette (a) out from
the main unit (c) and take it out in the
Pull the lower cassette (b) out from the
main unit (c) and take it out in the
Turn over the cassette and place 2

piled-up washers* bundled in the Z
heater cover set (302ND94A00) on
the part as shown in the figure to the
2 right. [Arrow view Z]
*The cassette side warpage is

corrected by adding the washers.
2 washers
Place the heater cover and secure it

with 5 screws bundled in the heater
cover set (302ND94A00) in the order “3” “2”
below.
“5” “4”
1㸬 Fix “1” temporarily.
2㸬 Fasten “2” and “3”.
3 3㸬 Fasten “1”.
“1“
4㸬 Fasten “4” and “5”.
Heater cover
* When placing the heater cover, it is
off the cassette base by the
thickness of the washers (0.8mmx2).
Fasten the screws while holding the
heater cover by hand.
4 Reattach the parts once detached.
7-566
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2ND-0089_2
Procedure to measure the cassette warpage 㻌

㻌
No Procedure Detail
Push the lever as in the figure to the

1 right toward the machine lower side
(arrow in the figure) pull up the lift
plate toward the machine upper side.
[Cassette base viewed from

the machine right side] [Vertical rib]
[Figure 1]
Measure the length between the edge

of the lift plate and the vertical rib at Z
2 the side of the cassette. (Refer to
Figure 1 for measuring point and
criteria)
7mm or more: OK
[Arrow view Z] Less than 7mm: NG
7-567
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2ND-0090
Replacement procedure
Estimate work time: 30 minutes
No Procedure Detail
[Remove the main drive unit]

(Procedure 1 to (-->) 11)
1 Remove the screw (a) (M3x10) and slide
the rear upper cover (b) in the arrow
direction.
Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x10).

Push down the rear lower cover (b) and
2 release the upper rib, and lift up while it
opens to release the lower hook (c). After
that, remove it in the arrow direction.
3 Disconnect 3 connectors (b) from the feed

drive PWB (a).
Release 4 wire saddles (a).

4 Remove the binding band with the snap
7-568
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
No Procedure Detail
[Low-end model]
(-->) Disconnect connectors (Connectors b in the

5 red frame section) from the feed image
PWB (a).
[High-end model]
Disconnect the connector (a). b

(-->)
6 Detach the wire saddle (b) and disconnect
the connector (c). c
Hang the connectors disconnected at the

procedure 5 and disconnected at the
procedure 6 (c) on the hook (d)
[Note] d
(-->) If trying to detach the main drive unit
7 without hanging the connector in the hook [Main drive unit]
(d), the connector wire interferes with the
waste toner joint and the sensor cleaning
spring in the waste toner joint gets
deformed, then it might be the possibility
to make wrong detection of the waste
toner full or the waste toner clog.
Waste toner joint
7-569
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
No Procedure Detail
[Low-end model]
(-->) Disconnect the connectors (Connectors b

8 in the red frame section) from the feed
image PWB (a)
[High-end model]
[Low-end model]
(-->) Remove six (6) screws (a) (M3 x 8) from [High-end model]
9 the main drive unit(b)
7-570
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
No Procedure Detail
Lift up the hook (b) of the waste toner
joint (a) and release the stopper (c), and
pull it out towards the front side.
[Waste toner joint (a)]
[Note when detaching the main drive
unit]
- If trying to detach the main drive unit Spring
without pulling out the waste toner joint
(a), the sensor cleaning spring in the (Rear side of
(-->) joint gets deformed andthen there the machine)
10 might be the possibility to make wrong
detection of the waste toner full or the
waste toner clog. Therefore, pull the
waste toner joint (a) out towardsthe
front side before detaching the main
drive unit.
- When pulling the waste toner joint (a)
out towards the front side, be careful
that the cleaning spring in the joint does
not get deformed.
[Low-end model]
(-->)
11 Detach the main drive unit(b).
[High-end model]
[Detaching/attaching the waste toner

(-->) forwarding unit] (Procedure (-->) 12 to
12 13)
Place the main drive unit on the work table
in the direction of the right figure. Work table
W
7-571
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
No Procedure Detail
Holding the left edge section of the waste

toner forwarding unit by a hand and detach
four position of the hooks (red circled
(-->) section of the right figure) and detach the
13 waste toner forwarding unit from the main
drive unit.
Attach new waste toner forwarding unit [Removed waste toner forwarding unit]
(New No.1 to 3) in the main drive unit.
Reattach the main drive unit in the main

unit in the reverse procedure of 1 to 11.
[Note when reattaching] [Figure 1]

After reattaching the main drive unit in the
(-->) main unit, make sure to check if the
14 sensor cleaning spring in the joint can be
seen. (Figure 1)
(Rear side of the machine)
7-572
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2ND-0092
Container rail unit for service
Color Low-end model Color High-end model Monochrome model

Part No. 302L79424_ 302ND94A1_ 302NK9414_
PARTS CONTAINER RAIL L PARTS CONTAINER RAIL PARTS CONTAINER RAIL
Part Name
ASSY SP ASSY SP MONO ASSY SP
Container rail unit for the field service is supplied without the following parts A to E. Also, the units for the
color high-end/monochrome model (No.3, 4) bundle the black film with sponge (Part E).
- Part A: Access saddle x 7 pcs
- Part B: Access saddle x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part C: Container left fan motor x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part D: Fixing screw x 1 pce for the container left fan motor (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part E: Black film with sponge x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
For the part A to D, they have to be removed from the container rail unit originally installed in the main
unit, and reattached to the container rail unit for service.
(Part E is bundled in the container rail unit for service since it cannot be reused.)
[Container rail unit for service]

(Drawing below is for the color high-end model. At each unit perr the model types, the
materials affixed in the outside and inside of the unit are different.)
(Unit installed in the main unit)
Remark
* After removing it from the main unit, remove Parts A to D

and attach to the container rail unit for service
Part B
Part A
Part E
(Brand new is bundled.)
Part D Part C
Positioning pin for the monochrome model only
Monochrome model
Part No. 302ND15500
Part Name PIN CONTAINER JOINT
Use at Step 21.
When the gear tooth jumping sound from the container drive unit occurs, be sure to
Remark
insert this pin into the container drive unit at the same timing of replacing with the
container rail unit for service.
7-573
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Procedure to replace with the container rail unit for service㻌

* The following procedure is in the condition where the job separator, inner finisher, relay conveying unit are removed.
If each enhancement device is installed around the inner tray, remove it before performing the following procedure.
(Total work time: Within about 35 minutes)

1 Open the front cover (a) and remove the toner

container
2 Open the front cover for the maintenance (b)
Remove 3 screws (M3x8P tite) and

3 disconnect the connector.
Remove the toner container cover assy (c)
c
b
7-574
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Remove 2 screws (M3x8) and release 2

positions of hook (c), and remove the left rear
cover (b) to the arrow direction
Remove the screw (M3x8) (e) of the left lower
4 cover (d).
* For detaching/attaching the left upper cover

with the following procedure, remove the
screw (e). It is not necessary to remove the
e
left lower cover (d)
d
Remove 2 screws (M4x8) (a).

Insert the flathead screwdriver (c) in the
opening section (b) at the front side of the left
upper cover and widen in the arrow direction,
and release 4 positions of hook (d) and then
5 remove the left upper cover (e).
[Note when attaching]

When attaching the left upper cover (e), hook
4 positions (f) of lower side first and hook (d)
upper side to attach.
[* Main unit without the job separator tray,

inner finisher, relay conveying unit only]
6-1. Lift up the operation panel section

6-2. Lift up the lever (b) of the sub tray (a) to
release the lock and lift up the rear side
of the main unit (c) and slide it to the front
side
6
6-3. Lift up the machine front side of the sub
tray (a) and remove the pin (d) and
detach the sub tray (a)
6-4. Remove the screw (M3x8) (e)
6-5. Remove the connector cover (f)
* The above enhancement unit has to be

removed before this procedure
7-575
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
7 Remove 3 screws (M3x8) (a) and detach the

rear middle cover (b)
Release two hooks (b) of the machine left

side of the inner tray (a) and detach the inner a
tray (a) to the arrow direction
8
* It is possible to detach the inner tray (a) with
the sub tray (c) attached.
Unhook the hook (a) of the binding band at

9 the machine inner right rear side of the
container rail unit form the round hole (b)
a
7-576
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Disconnect the connector of the gray 2-pin

wire (a) and release the wire from the 12
10
positions (c) of the wiring rib of the upper part
of the container rail unit
a c
Disconnect the connector (a) from the

attachment hole for the connector at the right d
front side of the container rail unit
Release the bundled wire (b) at the right side c b
of the container rail unit from 5 binding bands
(c). a
11 Disconnect the connector (d) from the
connector YC2 of the fuser high voltage PWB
Originally, it is not necessary to release the
connector (d) but, there might be the
possibility to come off when releasing the
bundled wire (b). Therefore, for the caution,
just add it as the procedure.
b
Release the bundled wire (a) at the right
12 side of the container rail unit from the
binding band (b) x 5 a
13-1. Remove screw (M3x8) (a) at the right

front side of the container rail unit.
13
a
(Continue to the next page.)
7-577
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

13-2. Remove the screw (M3x8) (b) at the left
rear side of the container rail unit.
[Caution when fixing the screw]

The screw (a, b) should be fixed by the
following procedure.
13 1) Temporarily fix the screw (a) at the right
front side.
2) Shift the container rail unit in the left
direction of the machine and tighten screw
(b) at the left rear side.
3) Tighten the screw (a) at the right front side
completely. b
Shift the container rail unit (a) in the arrow

direction and release 4 positions of hook at
the bottom part of the machine front side of
the container rail unit
14
* 4 positions of hook at the front side of the
container rail unit are hooked at the cutout
of the metal plate. (Refer to the procedure
24 for the details)
Lift up the front side of the container rail unit b

slightly and disconnect the connector (a) from
the transfer connection PWB, and pull out the
connector wire in the upper direction from the
15
hole (b) at the right front side
After that, detach the container rail unit from

the main unit
7-578
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Remove 7 access saddles (a) from the

16
machine right side of the container rail unit
[Color high-end model/monochrome

model only]
Peel off the black film with sponge (a) at the b
machine left rear side of the container rail unit
Release the wire (c) of the container left fan
17
motor from the access saddle (b), and e
remove the screw (d) and detach the
container left fan motor (e). Remove the
access saddle (b) c
* Throw the black film with sponge (a) away d
a

model only]
Attach the container left fan motor (a) in the
container rail unit for the field service (b) and b
fix it with the screw (c)
18
Attach the access saddle (d)
a
d e
Align the wire of the container left fan motor c
(e) as shown in the right drawing and fix it to
the access saddle (d)
7-579
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6

model only]
For affixing the black film with sponge (Brand
new item: a) which is bundled in the container
rail unit for the field service, clean the affixing
position with alcohol (Red line/shaded area in
the right drawing) and affix it based on the
alignment shown on the right drawing a
After affixing it, wipe the bending position of
19 the film bending section (b) with dry cloth and c
bend the film bending section and affix it.
After affixing it, press it firmly. 0mm
1mm
Note:
Make sure to check the fixing screw (d) of the
container left fan motor is positioned at the Dry cloth
round hole (c) for the screw of the black film b
with sponge
(Prohibit to overlap the film on the screw (d)) d
Align to the rib edge surface *

* The edge section of the black film with sponge
has to be within the rib
Attach 7 access saddles which were removed

in the procedure 16 at the machine right side
20
of the container rail unit for the field service.
(Refer to the procedure 16)
7-580
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
a D cut
b
Groove
[Monochrome model only]

Insert the D cut shape of the positioning pin [Back side of the boss
(a:No.1) matching to the D cut shape in the c hole (c) (Rear side of the
boss hole (c ) located at left of the white color machine) a
gear (b) (located at the rear side of the
machine inside)
21 D cut
Groove
Until the projection in the boss hole fits into Projection
the groove of the positioning pin (Click feeling
available), insert the positioning pin into the (Container drive unit for the monochrome model
boss hole after inserting the positioning pin (a)
Place the container rail unit (a) on the

22
installation surface inside of the machine
Pull the connector wire (b) out from the hole

(a) of the right front side of the container rail
23
unit downwards and connect it to the
connector (c) on the transfer connection PWB
c b
7-581
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
Container rail unit for service
Color Low-end model Color High-end model Monochrome model

Part No. 302L79424_ 302ND94A1_ 302NK9414_
PARTS CONTAINER RAIL L PARTS CONTAINER RAIL PARTS CONTAINER RAIL
Part Name
ASSY SP ASSY SP MONO ASSY SP
Container rail unit for the field service is supplied without the following parts A to E. Also, the units for the
color high-end/monochrome model (No.3, 4) bundle the black film with sponge (Part E).
- Part A: Access saddle x 7 pcs
- Part B: Access saddle x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part C: Container left fan motor x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part D: Fixing screw x 1 pce for the container left fan motor (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
- Part E: Black film with sponge x 1 pce (Color high-end/monochrome model only)
For the part A to D, they have to be removed from the container rail unit originally installed in the main
unit, and reattached to the container rail unit for service.
(Part E is bundled in the container rail unit for service since it cannot be reused.)
[Container rail unit for service]

(Drawing below is for the color high-end model. At each unit perr the model types, the
materials affixed in the outside and inside of the unit are different.)
(Unit installed in the main unit)
Remark
* After removing it from the main unit, remove Parts A to D

and attach to the container rail unit for service
Part B
Part A
Part E
(Brand new is bundled.)
Part D Part C
Positioning pin for the monochrome model only
Monochrome model
Part No. 302ND15500
Part Name PIN CONTAINER JOINT
Use at Step 21.
When the gear tooth jumping sound from the container drive unit occurs, be sure to
Remark
insert this pin into the container drive unit at the same timing of replacing with the
container rail unit for service.
7-582
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
2ND-0094
Part No. 302ND94A20

Part Name PARTS SPACER CONTAINER COVER CL SET SP
1 piece of this kit (302ND94A20) bundles 3 sponges.
Remark
Procedures to affix the sponges
(Work time: About 5 minutes)

Open the front cover and the container
1
covers.
[Sponges]
Straight
line
side
Clean with alcohol the circle shapes of
the inside of container cover Y/C/M.
Remove the release paper from the
double-faced tape of the sponges, and
then affix the sponges so that the
straight line side faces the upside of
the container covers.
2 Note:
Be sure not to affix the sponge to the
inside of container cover K.
Toner container K is longer than other
toner containers, therefore, if closing
container cover K with the sponge, the (After affixing)
parts at the toner container K machine Container cover Y/C/M
rear side might be deformed or
damaged.
Close the container cover and the front

3
cover.
7-583
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8 PWBs
8-1 PWB description
(1) Main PWB
(1-1) Connector position
YC58 1 1 7 1 13 1 6
YC6
B15 1 B1 20 YC11 YC63 YC9
1 YC60 60
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
YC2 1
YC51 1
52
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
Figure 8-1
8-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(1-2) PWB photograph
Figure 8-2
(1-3) Connector lists

Destination
YC2: HDD
YC6: Operation panel main PWB
YC8: KUIO relay PWB
YC9: KUIO relay PWB
YC12: Power switch, Operation panel main PWB
YC23: Controller fan motor
YC32: HDD
YC42: Low voltage PWB
YC43: Engine PWB
YC58: WiFi PWB
YC59: USB hub PWB
YC60: USB hub PWB
YC63: Engine PWB
Connector Pin Signal I/O Measured volt- Description

s age
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
2 TXP O - HDD data signal
3 TXN O - HDD data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RXN I - HDD data signal
6 RXP I - HDD data signal
7 GND - - Ground
8-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
2 LCD_OFF O 0V/3.3V DC Control signal
3 LOCKN O 0V/3.3V DC Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O 0V/3.3V Transmission data signal
DC(pulse)
6 TX0P O 0V/3.3V Transmission data signal
DC(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 VBUS1 O 5V DC 3.3V DC power output to KUIO relay

PWB
2 USB_DN1 I/O - USB data signal
3 USB_DP1 I/O - USB data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 AUDIO1 I Analog AUDIO signal
6 WAKEUP1 O 0V/3.3V DC Control signal
7 RESET1 I 0V/3.3V DC Reset signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 VBUS0 O 5V DC 5V DC power output to KUIO relay PWB
10 USB_DN0 I/O - USB data signal
11 USB_DP0 I/O - USB data signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 AUDIO0 I Analog AUDIO signal
14 WAKEUP0 O 0V/3.3V DC Control signal
15 RESET I 0V/3.3V DC Reset signal
2 5V_CUT0 I 0V/5V DC 5V DC cut signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 5V O 5V DC 5V DC power output to KUIO relay PWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 5V_CUT1 I 5V DC 5V DC cut signal
YC12 A1 I2C_SCL_NFC O 0V/3.3V I2C clock signal

DC(pulse)
A2 INT_ENER- I 0V/3.3V DC Energy Saver key interrupt signal
GYSAVEKEY
A3 FPRST O 0V/3.3V DC Operation panel reset signal
8-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC12 A4 P2C_SDAT O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
A5 C2P_SDAT I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
A6 P2C_SDIR O 0V/3.3V DC Panel communication direction signal
A7 P2C_SBSY O 0V/3.3V DC Panel busy signal
A8 C2P_SCK O 0V/3.3V Panel clock signal
DC(pulse)
A9 DISPLAY_POW- O 0V/3.3V DC LCD backlight lighting-off signal
ERON
A10 INT_ANYKEY O 0V/3.3V DC Main recovery signal
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 +5.0V6 O 5V DC 5V DC power output
B1 POWER_ON O 0V/3.3V DC Power key: On/Off
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 JOB_LED O 0V/3.3V DC JS LED control signal
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 BEEP_POW- O 0V/3.3V DC Alert sound recovery signal
ERON
B8 LED_MEMORY O 0V/3.3V DC Memory LED control signal
B9 LED_ATTENTION O 0V/3.3V DC Attention LED control signal
B10 LED_PROCESS- O 0V/3.3V DC Processing LED control signal
ING
B11 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal
B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ O 0V/3.3V DC Panel recovery signal
B13 INT_ENER- I 0V/3.3V DC Energy Saver key interrupt signal
GYSAVEKEY
B14 NIRQ O 0V/3.3V DC NFC interrupt signal
B15 I2C_SDA_NFC O 0V/3.3V I2C clock signal
DC(pulse)
YC23 1 SPEED CON- O 0V/5V DC Controller fan motor: On/Off
TROL
2 GND - - Ground
3 5V2 O 5V DC 5V DC power output
8-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
2 +5V_HDD O 5V DC 5V DC power output to HDD
1 GND - - Ground
YC42 1 5V0 I 5V DC 5V DC power input from LVU

2 GND - - Ground
3 5V0 I 5V DC 5V DC power input from LVU
4 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground

2 AC_DETECT - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 SAR_2_CH21_N I 0V/3.3V Image data signal
DC(pulse)
6 SAR_2_CH21_P I 0V/3.3V Image data signal
DC(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
8 SAR_2_CH22_N I 0V/3.3V
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
10 GND - - Ground
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
13 GND - - Ground
14 SAR_2_VCLK2_N I 0V/3.3V Image data signal
DC(pulse)
15 SAR_2_VCLK2_P I 0V/3.3V Image data signal
DC(pulse)
16 GND - - Ground
8-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC43 17 SAR_2_CH11_N I 0V/3.3V Image data signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
19 GND - - Ground
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
22 GND - - Ground
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
25 GND - - Ground
26 SAR_2_VCLK1_N I 0V/3.3V Image data signal
DC(pulse)
27 SAR_2_VCLK1_P I 0V/3.3V Image data signal
DC(pulse)
28 GND - - Ground
29 SAT_2_VSYN- O 0V/3.3V Image data signal
C_D_N DC(pulse)
C_D_P DC(pulse)
C_C_N DC(pulse)
C_C_P DC(pulse)
C_B_N DC(pulse)
C_B_P DC(pulse)
C_A_N DC(pulse)
C_A_P DC(pulse)
37 SAT_2_HSYN- O 0V/3.3V Image data signal
C_D_N DC(pulse)
C_D_P DC(pulse)
C_C_N DC(pulse)
8-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC43 40 SAT_2_HSYN- O 0V/3.3V Image data signal
C_C_P DC(pulse)
C_B_N DC(pulse)
C_B_P DC(pulse)
C_A_N DC(pulse)
C_A_P DC(pulse)
45 GND - - Ground
46 OS_SAD1N O 0V/3.3V Serializer output data
DC(pulse)
47 OS_SAD1P O 0V/3.3V Serializer output data
DC(pulse)
48 GND - - Ground
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
51 GND - - Ground
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
54 GND - - Ground
55 OS_SACKN O 0V/3.3V Serializer transfer data
DC(pulse)
56 OS_SACKP O 0V/3.3V Serializer transfer data
DC(pulse)
57 GND - - Ground
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
60 GND - - Ground
YC58 1 SD_D3 I/O 0V/3.3V Data signal
DC(pulse)
2 SD_D2 I/O 0V/3.3V Data signal
DC(pulse)
3 SD_CMD I/O 0V/3.3V Data signal
DC(pulse)
8-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
5 SD_CLK I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
6 GND - - Ground
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
9 GND - - Ground
10 VIO PI 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
11 VBAT PI 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 PAVDD PI 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 HOSTWAKE I 0V/3.3V DC Interrupt signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 RESET I 0V/3.3V DC Reset signal
18 DETECT - - Ground
19 USB_+ I/O USB data signal
20 USB_- I/O USB data signal
YC59 1 VBUS O 5V DC 5V DC power output

2 DATA- I/O LVDS USB data signal
3 DATA+ I/O LVDS USB data signal
4 ID - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC60 1 +5V7 O 5V DC 5V DC power output

2 +5V7 O 5V DC 5V DC power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC63 1 JS_LED_REM O 0V/3.3V DC JOB separator LED lighting signal

2 ENG_WAKE- I 0V/3.3V DC Engine sleep recovery signal
UP_REQ(M_E)
8-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC63 3 HLD_ENG_N(M_ I 0V/3.3V DC Engine stop signal
E)
4 E2C_SDAT(E_M) O 0V/3.3V G6 communication data output signal
DC(pulse)
5 C2E_SDAT(E_M) I 0V/3.3V G6 communication data input signal
DC(pulse)
6 C2E_SCLK(M_E) I 0V/3.3V G6 communication clock signal
DC(pulse)
7 E2C_SBSY(E_M) O 0V/3.3V G6 communication busy signal
DC(pulse)
8 E2C_IR(E_M) O 0V/3.3V DC G6 communication interrupt signal
9 E2C_SDIR(E_M) O 0V/3.3V G6 communication direction signal
DC(pulse)
10 ENG_POWOFF_ I 0V/3.3V DC Engine power off signal
N(E_M)
11 HLD_SCN_N(E_ I 0V/3.3V DC Scanner stop signal
M)
12 DP_WAKE- I 0V/3.3V DC DP sleep recovery signal
UP_REQ
13 GND - - Ground
8-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Engine PWB

B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1 YC38
4 5 A11 A12
1 YC43 A1 A16 A1 B1
14 1
YS1
1 YC6
YC35 B12 A1
YC42 A20
B1
60
18
YC40
B20 A1
20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1 20 1
1 6 1
YC22
YC9 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 40 1 17 1 11 1 12
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
8-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC6: Feed drive PWB
YC9: APC PWB
YC16: DP, Home position sensor, Original size sensor, Original size timing sensor, Scanner motor
YC21: Coin vendor
YC22: Key card 1, Key counter
YC23: Key card or MK2
YC27: APC PWB, Waste toner motor, Weight detection sensor, Low voltage PWB
YC29: IH PWB
YC33: Main high-voltage PWB
YC34: Transfer high-voltage PWB
YC35: Main PWB
YC36: CCD PWB
YC38: Temperature/humidity sensor, LVU fan motor, PF PWB
YC40: Feed image PWB
YC42: Feed image PWB
YC43: Main PWB

s age
YC6 A1 3.3V3_FUSE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A2 3.3V2_FUSE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 REG_R_LED O Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
A10 ID_SENS_R_S I Analog Rear ID sensor detection signal
A11 ID_SENS_R_P I Analog Rear ID sensor detection signal
A12 REG_F_LED O Analog Front ID sensor control signal
B1 ID_SENS_F_S I Analog Front ID sensor detection signal
B2 ID_SENS_F_P I Analog Front ID sensor detection signal
B3 REG_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Registration sensor: On/Off
B4 ATLAS_CLK O 0V/3.3V Serial communication clock signal
DC(pulse)
B5 ATLAS_SDO(EN O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
G to DRI) DC(pulse)
B6 ATLAS_EN O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication enable signal
B7 ATLAS_CS I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication select signal
8-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC6 B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
to ENG) DC(pulse)
B9 MPF_ORG_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC MP paper sensor: On/Off
B10 CAS1_2_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette open/close detection signal
B11 REG_CL_REM O 0V/24V DC Registration clutch: On/Off
B12 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 DATAP2_K O LVDS Image data K

2 DATAN2_K O LVDS Image data K
3 GND - - Ground
4 DATAP1_K O LVDS Image data K
5 DATAN1_K O LVDS Image data K
6 GND - - Ground
7 LSU_TH O Analog LSU thermistor voltage
8 GND - - Ground
9 POL_CLK O 0V/5V DC(pulse) PM clock signal
10 POL_RDY I 0V/3.3V DC PM ready signal
11 POL_REM O 0V/5V DC PM remote signal
12 BD I 0V/5V DC BD signal
13 P4_BK O 0V/3.3V DC Laser control signal
14 P2 O 0V/3.3V DC Laser control signal
15 P0 O 0V/3.3V DC Laser control signal
16 CSI_K O 0V/3.3V DC EEPROM chip select signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 DATAP2_M O LVDS Image data M
19 DATAN2_M O LVDS Image data M
20 GND - - Ground
21 DATAP1_M O LVDS Image data M
22 DATAN1_M O LVDS Image data M
23 GND - - Ground
24 SD_CLK O 0V/3.3V DC Shading clock signal
25 P4_Col O 0V/3.3V DC Laser control signal
26 CSI_C O 0V/3.3V DC EEPROM chip select signal
27 CSI_Y O 0V/3.3V DC Laser driver chip select signal
28 INT_ST I 0V/5V DC Laser driver Initializing monitor signal
29 SET O 0V/3.3V DC Laser driver set signal
30 CSI_M O 0V/3.3V DC Laser driver chip select signal
8-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
32 DIO I 0V/3.3V DC Micro wire communication data input
signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 DOI O 0V/3.3V DC Micro wire communication data output
signal
35 GND - - Ground
36 SKOI O 0V/3.3V DC Micro wire communication clock signal
37 GND - - Ground
38 CSO O 0V/3.3V DC EEPROM chip select signal
39 GND - - Ground
40 DATAP2_C O LVDS Image data C
41 DATAN2_C O LVDS Image data C
42 GND - - Ground
43 DATAP1_C O LVDS Image data C
44 DATAN1_C O LVDS Image data C
45 GND - - Ground
46 DATAP2_Y O LVDS Image data Y
47 DATAN2_Y O LVDS Image data Y
48 GND - - Ground
49 DATAP1_Y O LVDS Image data Y
50 DATAN1_Y O LVDS Image data Y
YC16 A1 GND - - Ground

A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B O 0V/24V Scanner motor control signal
DC(pulse)
A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A O 0V/24V Scanner motor control signal
DC(pulse)
A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A O 0V/24V Scanner motor control signal
DC(pulse)
A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B O 0V/24V Scanner motor control signal
DC(pulse)
A6 PLT_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Original size timing sensor: On/Off
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 3.3V2 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A9 5V2 O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A10 ORG_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Original size sensor: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
8-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC16 A12 HP_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Home position sensor: On/Off
A13 GND - - Ground
A15 GND - - Ground
A16 GND - - Ground
B1 DP_CLK(ENG to O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication clock signal
DP)
B2 DP_SOO(ENG to O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data output signal
DP)
B3 DP_TMG(DP to I 0V/3.3V DC DP scanning start signal
ENG)
B4 DP_CO(DP to I 0V/3.3V DC DP cover open/close detection signal
ENG)
B5 DP_RDY(DP to I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication ready signal
ENG)
B6 DP_FD_SW I 0V/3.3V DC DP conveying sensor: On/Off
B7 DP_ORG_SET I 0V/3.3V DC DP original sensor: On/Off
B8 3.3V3_FUSE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 +24V2 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
B15 DP_SEL(ENG to O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication select signal
DP)
B16 DP_SDI(DP to I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data input signal
ENG)

2 SGND - - Ground
3 SGND - - Ground
4 MCV_ENBL I 0V/3.3V DC Coin vendor enable signal
5 FGND - - Ground
6 MCV_FED- O 0V/3.3V DC Coin vendor control signal
_COUNT
7 MCV_EJ_COUNT O 0V/3.3V DC Coin vendor control signal
8 MCV_COPY_SIG O 0V/3.3V DC Coin vendor control signal
8-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC21 9 MCV_UART_TXD O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
10 SGND - - Ground
11 MCV_UART_RXD I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
12 SGND - - Ground
2 DC1_SET I 0V/3.3V DC Key counter set signal
3 DC1_COUNT O 0V/3.3V DC Key counter count signal
YC23 A1 +5V0_FUSE O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A2 +5V0_FUSE O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A9 MK2_ENBL I 0V/3.3V DC Enable signal
A10 +24V4 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
B1 MK2_RKEY7 O 0V/3.3V DC Control signal
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 MK2_COUNT O 0V/3.3V DC Count signal
YC27 1 +5V4IL_LSU O 5V DC 5V DC power output

2 +5V4IL_LSU O 5V DC 5V DC power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 CLN_MOT_A O 0V/24V DC Cleaning motor drive control
6 CLN_MOT_B O 0V/24V DC Cleaning motor drive control
8-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
8 PGND - - Ground
9 WTNR_MOT_A O 0V/24V DC Waste toner motor drive control
10 WTNR_MOT_B O 0V/24V DC Waste toner motor drive control
11 WTNR_WEIGHT I 0V/3.3V DC Waste toner sensor: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
14 AC DETECTOR I 0V/3.3V DC AC shutdown detection signal
15 GND - - Ground
16 CAS_HEATER O 5V DC Cassette heater control signal
17 SLEEP O 0V/5V DC 24V output enabling signal

2 +3.3V2_FUSE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI O 0V/3.3V IH Clock signal (HI)
DC(pulse)
4 IH_IGBT_- O 0V/3.3V IH Clock signal (LOW)
CLK_LOW DC(pulse)
5 IH_ERROR I 0V/3.3V DC IH error signal
6 IH_TXD O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
7 IH_RXD I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
9 IH_RELAY O 0V/3.3V DC IH relay signal
YC33 1 SGND - - Ground
2 SGND - - Ground
3 HV_REM O 0V/3.3V DC High voltage remote signal
4 B_K_MAG_AC_C O 0V/10VDC AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
5 B_K_MAG_D- O 0V/10VDC DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
C_CNT
6 M_C_DC_CNT O 0V/10VDC DC charger control voltage C
7 B_M_MAG_D- O 0V/10VDC DC magnet roller bias control voltage M
C_CNT
8 M_K_DC_CNT O 0V/10VDC DC charger control voltage K
9 M_M_DC_CNT O 0V/10VDC DC charger control voltage M
8-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC33 10 B_C_MAG_D- O 0V/10VDC DC magnet roller bias control voltage C
C_CNT
11 B_C_MAG_AC_C O 0V/10VDC AC magnet roller bias control voltage C
NT
12 M_Y_DC_CNT O 0V/10VDC DC charger control voltage Y
13 M_M_I_SENS I 0V/10VDC Charger current detection M
14 M_K_I_SENS I 0V/10VDC Discharge detection voltage K
15 M_C_I_SENS I 0V/10VDC Charger current detection C
16 M_Y_I_SENS I 0V/10VDC Charger current detection Y
17 B_Y_MAG_D- O 0V/10VDC DC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
C_CNT
18 B_MAG_AC_CLK O 0V/10VDC AC Magnet roller bias clock signal
YC34 1 CL_CNT O Analog Cleaning control voltage

2 T1_Y_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
3 T1_C_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
4 T1_M_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
5 T1_I_SENS I Analog Primary transfer current detection
6 T2_OFF_REM O 0V/16VDC Secondary transfer remote off signal
7 T1_K_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
8 SP_CNT O Analog Separation bias control voltage
9 T2_CNT O Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
10 T_REM O DC0V/14V Transfer remote signal
11 SGND - - Ground

2 OS_SAD4P O LVDS Serializer output data
3 OS_SAD4N O LVDS Serializer output data
4 GND - - Ground
5 OS_SACKP O LVDS Serializer transfer data
6 OS_SACKN O LVDS Serializer transfer data
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
8-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
16 GND - - Ground
17 SAT_2_HSYN- O LVDS Image data signal
C_A_P
C_A_N
C_B_P
C_B_N
C_C_P
C_C_N
C_D_P
C_D_N
25 SAT_2_VSYN- O LVDS Image data signal
C_A_P
C_A_N
C_B_P
C_B_N
C_C_P
C_C_N
C_D_P
C_D_N
33 GND - - Ground
34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P I LVDS Image data signal
35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N I LVDS Image data signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 SAR_2_CH13_P I LVDS Image data signal
8-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC35 38 SAR_2_CH13_N I LVDS Image data signal
39 GND - - Ground
41 SAR_2_CH12_N I LVDS Image data signal
42 GND - - Ground
45 GND - - Ground
46 SAR_2_VCLK2_P I LVDS Image data signal
47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N I LVDS Image data signal
48 GND - - Ground
51 GND - - Ground
54 GND - - Ground
57 GND - - Ground
58 GND - - Ground
59 AC_DETECT - - Ground
60 GND - - Ground
YC36 1 +12V5 O DC12V DC12V power output

2 +12V5 O DC12V DC12V power output
5 NC - - Not used
6 LED_PWM O 0V/3.3V LED driver PWM signal
DC(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
8 DSI_CIS_5P I LVDS Serial input data
9 DSI_CIS_5N I LVDS Serial input data
10 GND - - Ground
8-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
16 GND - - Ground
17 DSI_CIS_CKP I LVDS Transfer clock
18 DSI_CIS_CKN I LVDS Transfer clock
19 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 AFE_RD I 0V/3.3V DC AFE serial communication read signal
27 GND - - Ground
28 AFE_WD O 0V/3.3V DC AFE serial communication write signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 AFE_CLK O 0V/3.3V AFE serial communication clock signal
DC(pulse)
31 GND - - Ground
32 AFE_CS O 0V/3.3V DC AFE serial communication select signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 AFE_MCLK_P O LVDS AFE clock signal
35 AFE_MCLK_N O LVDS AFE clock signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 NC - - Not used
YC38 A1 PF_CAS_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette open/close signal

A2 PF_PAUSE O 0V/3.3V DC Pause signal
A3 PF_SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
A4 PF_SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
A5 PF_RDY I 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
8-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC38 A6 PF_CLK O 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
A7 PF_SEL2 O 0V/3.3V DC PF CPU signal
A8 PF_SEL1 O 0V/3.3V DC Side paper feeder CPU signal
A9 GND - - Ground
A11 PF_VER_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC PF vertical conveying sensor: On/Off
B1 +3.3V2_FUSE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 SUB_SDA I/O 0V/3.3V Communication data signal
DC(pulse)
B4 SUB_CLK O 0V/3.3V Communication clock signal
DC(pulse)
B5 LVU_PWB_- I 0V/3.3V DC LVU fan alarm signal
FAN_ALM
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 LVU_PWB_- O 0V/24V DC LVU fan motor: On/Off
FAN_REM
B8 HUMID_CLK O 0V/3.3V DC Temperature/humidity sensor clock sig-
nal
B9 HUMID_OUT I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor detection
voltage (humidity)
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 TEMP I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor detection
voltage (temperature)
YC39 1 5V0 I 5V DC 5V DC power input

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 +24V4 I 24V DC 24V DC power input
YC40 A1 +5V0 O 5V DC 5V DC power output

A3 GND - - Ground
A4 GND - - Ground
A5 +3.3V2_FUSE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
8-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

s age
YC40 A7 +3.3V2_FUSE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 JS_SENS_AK I 0V/3.3V DC BR job separator sensor: On/Off
A11 FRONT_CO_OPE I 0V/3.3V DC Front cover sensor: On/Off
N
A12 JS_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC JS sensor: On/Off
A13 ANALOG_SEL O 0V/3.3V DC Analog select signal
A14 KSS_EN O 0V/3.3V DC Enable signal
A15 KSS_CS O 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
A16 KSS_CLK O 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
A17 KSS_SDI I 0V/3.3V KSS communication data signal
DC(pulse)
A18 KSS_SDO O 0V/3.3V KSS communication data signal
DC(pulse)
A20 3.3V_TH_CUT I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
B1 DRUM HEAT O 0V/3.3V DC Drum heater control signal
B2 DF_CLK I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
B3 DF_SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
B4 DF_SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
B5 DF_SEL O 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
B6 DF_RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
B7 DF_SYNC O 0V/3.3V DF sync signal
DC(pulse)
B8 DF_DET I 0V/3.3V DC Connection detection signal
B9 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(edge)
B10 FSR_TH_CENT I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (cen-
ter)
B11 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(Fuser pressure roller)
B12 FSR_TH_MID I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (mid-
dle)
B13 FSR_ALARM I 0V/3.3V DC Fuser alarm signal
B14 TPC_BK I 0V/3.3V DC T/C sensor detection voltage K
8-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC40 B15 DRUM_B- O 0V/5V DC Drum motor remote signal K
K_MOT_REM
B16 DRUM_B- O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Drum motor clock signal
K_MOT_CLK
B17 DRUM_B- I 0V/3.3V DC Drum motor sync signal K
K_MOT_RDY
B18 GND - - Ground
B19 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O 24V DC 24V DC power output
T2
B20 FSR_OFF- O Analog Fuser high voltage control voltage
SET_CNT
YC42 1 DLP_BK_- O 0V/5V DC Transfer belt motor remote signal

BELT_MOT_REM
2 DLP_BK_- O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Transfer belt motor clock signal
BELT_MOT_CLK
3 DLP_BK_- O 0V/5V DC Transfer belt motor rotation switching
BELT_MOT_DIR signal
4 DLP_BK_- I 0V/3.3V DC Transfer belt motor sync signal
BELT_MOT_RDY
5 DLP_BK_- O 0V/5V DC Transfer belt motor brake signal
BELT_MOT_BRA
KE
6 ANALOG_SEL O 0V/3.3V DC Analog select signal
7 UNIT_E2P_SCL O 0V/3.3V DC Unit EEPROM communication clock
8 UNIT_E2P_SDA I/O 0V/3.3V DC Unit EEPROM communication data sig-
nal
9 TPC_M I 0V/3.3V DC T/C sensor detection voltage M
10 TPC_C I 0V/3.3V DC T/C sensor detection voltage C
11 TPC_Y I 0V/3.3V DC T/C sensor detection voltage Y
12 DLP_COL_MOT_ O 0V/5V DC Developer motor remote signal CMY
REM
13 DLP_COL_MOT_- O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Developer motor clock signal CMY
CLK
14 DLP_COL_MOT_ O 0V/5V DC Developer motor rotation switching sig-
DIR nal CMY
15 DLP_COL_MOT_ I 0V/3.3V DC Developer motor sync signal CMY
RDY
16 DRUM_COL_MO O 0V/5V DC Drum motor remote signal CMY
T_REM
17 DRUM_COL_MO O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Drum motor clock signal CMY
T_CLK
8-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC42 18 DRUM_COL_MO I 0V/3.3V DC Drum motor sync signal CMY
T_RDY
YC43 1 24V2 24V DC 24V DC power input

2 GND - - Ground
3 DP_WAKE- O 0V/3.3V DC DP sleep recovery signal
UP_REQ
4 HLD_SCN_N(E_ I 0V/3.3V DC Scanner stop signal
M)
5 ENG_POWOFF_ I 0V/3.3V DC Engine power off signal
N(E_M)
6 E2C_SDIR(E_M) O 0V/3.3V G6 communication direction signal
DC(pulse)
8-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Feed image PWB

1
YC33 1 18
14 YC36
B20 YC22 B1 6
A9 A1
YC19
8 1
A1 A20 YC12
YC17 4
1 B1 A18 YC25
YC24 A1 B20 1
26
1
YC32
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
8-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1: Low power voltage PWB
YC2: Right cover switch
YC3: Feed drive PWB
YC6: Engine PWB
YC12: RFID PWB
YC17: Exit reversing motor, Lower exit full sensor, Upper exit full sensor, Lower exit solenoid, Upper exit
solenoid, Exit sensor, Drum/Developer relay PWB
YC19: Toner motor K, Toner level sensor K, Toner motor rotation sensor K
YC22: Fuser PWB, Thermostat, Thermistor 1/2, Front belt rotation sensor, Rear belt rotation sensor
YC23: Belt release motor, Developer clutch, Belt release sensor
YC24: Developer K/Transfer belt motor, Drum motor K
YC25: DF PWB
YC28: Engine PWB
YC29: Feed drive PWB, Toner absorption fan motor, Waste toner full sensor
YC30: B R PWB, DF PWB
YC32: Transfer connect PWB, Container solenoid K, JS sensor, Front cover sensor, Fuser high voltage
PWB
YC33: IH PWB fan motor, Exit/Front IH fan motor, Exit/Middle IH fan motor
YC35: Transfer high voltage PWB, Main high voltage PWB
YC36: Container motor

s age
YC1 1 +24V4 I 24V DC 24V DC power input
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 +24V3_IL I 24V DC 24V DC power input


2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O 24V DC 24V DC power output
T2
8-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

s age
YC6 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A2 3.3V3_FUSE I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
A3 KSS_IM- I 0V/3.3V KSS communication data signal
AGE_SDO DC(pulse)
(ENG to IMAGE)
A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI O 0V/3.3V KSS communication data signal
(IMAGE to ENG) DC(pulse)
A5 KSS_IMAGE_- I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
CLK DC(pulse)
(ENG to IMAGE)
A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN I 0V/3.3V DC Enable signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A8 DRM_EEP_SELO I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
A9 JS_SENS O 0V/3.3V DC JS sensor: On/Off
A10 FRONT_CO_OPE O 0V/3.3V DC Front cover sensor: On/Off
N
A11 JS_SENS_AK O 0V/3.3V DC BR job separator sensor: On/Off
A12 GND - - Ground
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 +3.3V2_FUSE I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
A17 GND - - Ground
A18 GND - - Ground
A19 +5V2 I 5V DC 5V DC power input
A20 +5V0_FUSE I 5V DC 5V DC power input
B1 FSR_OFF- I 0V/3.3V DC Control signal
SET_CNT
T1
B3 GND - - Ground
B4 DRUM_B- O 0V/3.3V DC Drum motor sync signal K
K_MOT_RDY
B5 DRUM_B- I 0V/5V DC(pulse) Drum motor clock signal
K_MOT_CLK
B6 DRUM_B- I 0V/5V DC Drum motor remote signal K
K_MOT_REM
B7 TPC_BK O LVDS T/C sensor detection voltage K
8-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

s age
YC6 B8 FSR_ALARM O 0V/3.3V DC Fuser alarm signal
B9 FSR_TH_MID O Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (mid-
dle)
B10 FSR_TH_PRESS O Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(Fuser pressure roller)
B11 FSR_TH_CENT O Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (cen-
ter)
B12 FSR_TH_EDGE O Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage
(edge)
B13 DF_DET O 0V/3.3V DC Connection detection signal
B14 DF_SYNC O 0V/3.3V DF sync signal
DC(pulse)
B15 DF_RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
B16 DF_SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
B17 DF_SDI O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
B18 DF_SDO I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
B19 DF_CLK I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
B20 DRUM HEAT I 0V/3.3V DC Remote signal
YC12 1 5V2 O 5V DC 5V DC power output

2 3.3V2 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
3 RFID_SCL O 0V/3.3V RFID communication clock signal
DC(pulse)
4 GND - - Ground
5 RFID_SDA I/O 0V/3.3V DC RFID communication data signal
6 CONT_RECOG I 0V/3.3V DC Connection detection signal
7 GND - - -
8 CON- I 0V/3.3V DC Connection detection signal
NECT_RECOG
YC17 A1 EXMOT_1B O 0V/24V Exit reversing motor control signal

DC(pulse)
A2 EXMOT_1A O 0V/24V Exit reversing motor control signal
DC(pulse)
A3 EXMOT_2B O 0V/24V Exit reversing motor control signal
DC(pulse)
A4 EXMOT_2A O 0V/24V Exit reversing motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

s age
YC17 A5 +3.3V2_LED O 1.2V DC LED power output
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 EXMAIN_FULL I 0V/3.3V DC Lower exit full sensor: On/Off
A8 +3.3V2_LED O 1.2V DC LED power output
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 EXINNER_FULL I 0V/3.3V DC Upper exit full sensor: On/Off
A11 +24V2_F1 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
A12 EXSOL1 O 0V/24V DC Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (absorption)
A13 EXSOL1_KEEP O 0V/24V DC Lower exit solenoid: On/Off (retention)
A15 EXSOL2 O 0V/24V DC Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (absorption)
A16 EXSOL2_KEEP O 0V/24V DC Upper exit solenoid: On/Off (retention)
A17 +3.3V2_LED O 1.2V DC LED power output
A18 GND - - Ground
A19 EX_FEED_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Exit sensor: On/Off
A20 N.C. - - Not used
B1 VIB_MOT_REM O 0V/3.3V DC VIBM remote signal
B2 N.C. - - Not used
B3 DLP_FAN_REM O 0V/3.3V DC Developer fan motor (full speed): On/Off
B4 5V0_FUSE O 5V DC 5V DC power output
B5 DRM_HEAT_REM O 0V/3.3V DC Remote signal
B6 ERASER_COL O 0V/5V DC ERASER CMY remote signal
B7 ERASER_BK O 0V/5V DC ERASER K remote signal
B8 +24V2_F1 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 TPC_Y I 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage Y
DC(pulse)
B11 TPC_C I 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage C
DC(pulse)
B12 TPC_M I 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage M
DC(pulse)
B13 TPC_BK I 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage K
DC(pulse)
B14 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
B15 EEP_SDA I/O 0V/3.3V EEPROM data I/O signal
DC(pulse)
B16 EEP_SCL O 0V/3.3V EEPROM clock signal
DC(pulse)
8-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

s age
YC17 B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1 O 0V/3.3V DC Drum EEPROM select signal
B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0 O 0V/3.3V DC Drum EEPROM select signal
B19 3.3V2 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
B20 GND - - Ground
YC19 A1 TNMOT_B- O 0V/24V DC Toner motor control signal K

K_OUT1
A2 TNMOT_B- O 0V/24V DC Toner motor control signal K
K_OUT2
A3 3.3V2_LED O 1.2V DC LED power output
A4 GND - - Ground
A5 THOP_PLS_BK I 0V/3.3V DC Toner motor rotation sensor K: On/Off
A7 THOP_FULL_BK I Analog Toner level sensor detection signal K
A8 THOP_LED_BK O 0V/3.3V Toner level sensor LED emission signal
DC(pulse) K

2 FUSER_SDA I/O 0V/3.3V Fuser EEPROM data I/O signal
DC(pulse)
3 FUSER_SCL O 0V/3.3V Fuser EEPROM clock signal
DC(pulse)
4 +3.3V2 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
5 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (Fuser
pressure roller)
6 FSR_PRESS_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Fuser pressure release sensor: On/Off
ENS
7 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (edge)
8 FSR_JAM_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Fuser sensor: On/Off
9 FSR_ROLL_F_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Front belt rotation sensor: On/Off
ENS
10 +3.3V2_TH_CUT I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
12 GND - - Ground
13 FSR_TH_MIDDLE I Analog Fuser thermistor 1 detection signal (mid-
dle)
14 3.3V2_LED O 1.2V DC LED power output
15 GND - - Ground
8-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

s age
YC22 16 FSR_ROLL_R_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Rear belt rotation sensor: On/Off
ENS
17 GND - - Ground
18 FSR_TH_CEN- I Analog Fuser thermistor 2 detection signal (cen-
TRAL ter)
YC23 1 BLT_- O 0V/24V DC Belt release motor control signal

PRESS_OUT1
2 BLT_- O 0V/24V DC Belt release motor control signal
PRESS_OUT2
3 +24V2_F1 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
4 DLP_BK_- O 0V/24V DC Developer clutch: On/Off
CLT_REM
6 GND - - Ground
7 BLT_4RE- I 0V/3.3V DC Belt release sensor: On/Off
LEASE_SENS
YC24 1 DRM_B- O 0V/5V DC Drum motor rotation switching signal K

K_MOT_DIR
2 DRM_B- I 0V/3.3V DC Drum motor sync signal K
K_MOT_LD
3 DRM_BK_MOT_- O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Drum motor clock signal
CLK
4 DRM_B- O 0V/5V DC Drum motor remote signal K
K_MOT_REM
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V2IL2 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
7 DRM_COL_MOT_ - - Not used
DIR
LD
CLK
REM
11 GND - - Not used
12 +24V2IL2 - - Not used
13 DLP_B- O 0V/3.3V DC Developer motor brake signal K
K_BLT_MOT_BR
K
8-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC24 14 DLP_B- O 0V/3.3V DC Developer motor sync signal K
K_BLT_MOT_DIR
15 DLP_B- I 0V/5V DC Developer motor control signal K
K_BLT_MOT_FG
16 DLP_B- O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
K_BLT_MOT_CLK
17 DLP_B- O 0V/5V DC Developer motor remote signal K
K_BLT_MOT_RE
M
18 GND - - Ground
19 +24V2IL2 24V DC 24V DC power output
20 DLP_COL_MOT_ - - Not used
DIR
LD
22 DLP_COL_MOT_- - - Not used
CLK
REM
24 GND - - Not used
25 +24V2IL2 - - Not used
26 N.C. - - Not used
YC25 1 +24V2_FUSE2 O 24V DC 24V DC power output

2 +24V2_FUSE2 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
YC28 1 DRUM_COL_MO O 0V/3.3V DC Drum motor sync signal CMY

T_RDY
2 DRUM_COL_MO I 0V/5V DC(pulse) Drum motor clock signal CMY
T_CLK
3 DRUM_COL_MO I 0V/5V DC Drum motor remote signal CMY
T_REM
4 DLP_COL_MOT_ O 0V/3.3V DC Developer motor sync signal CMY
RDY
5 DLP_COL_MOT_ I 0V/5V DC Developer motor rotation switching sig-
DIR nal CMY
6 DLP_COL_MOT_- I 0V/5V DC(pulse) Developer motor clock signal CMY
CLK
8-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
7 DLP_COL_MOT_ I 0V/5V DC Developer motor remote signal CMY
REM
YC28 8 TPC_Y O 0V/5V DC(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
9 TPC_C O 0V/5V DC(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
10 TPC_M O 0V/5V DC(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
11 I2C_SDA I/O 0V/24V DC Developer fan motor (half speed): On/
Off
12 I2C_SCL I 0V/24V DC Developer fan motor (full speed): On/Off
13 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
14 DLP_BK_- I 0V/5V DC Developer motor brake signal K
BELT_MOT_BRA
KE
15 DLP_BK_- O 0V/3.3V DC Developer motor sync signal K
BELT_MOT_RDY
16 DLP_BK_- I 0V/5V DC Developer motor rotation switching sig-
BELT_MOT_DIR nal K
17 DLP_BK_- I 0V/5V DC(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
BELT_MOT_CLK
18 DLP_BK_- I 0V/5V DC Developer motor remote signal K
BELT_MOT_REM
2 WTNR_LOCK_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Waste toner full sensor: On/Off
ENS
4 TBLT_- I 0V/5V DC Transfer cleaning motor control signal
CLMOT_PWM
5 TBLT_CLMOT_- O 0V/3.3V DC Transfer cleaning motor control signal
CHA
7 D_VIB_MOT O 0V/3.3V DC Vibration motor: On/Off
8 EXSOL1_REM I 0V/3.3V DC Upper exit solenoid: On/Off(absorption)
9 EXSOL1_KEEP I 0V/3.3V DC Upper exit solenoid: On/Off(retention)
10 EXSOL2_REM O 0V/3.3V DC Lower exit solenoid: On/Off(absorption)
11 EXSOL2_KEEP O 0V/3.3V DC Lower exit solenoid: On/Off(retention)
12 TN_FAN_LOCK I 0V/3.3V DC Toner absorption fan motor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
14 TN_FAN_REM O 0V/24V DC Toner absorption fan motor: On/Off
YC30 1 DF_RDY(DF to I 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
ENG)
8-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
2 DF_SEL(ENG to O 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
DF)
3 DF_SDO(ENG to O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DF) DC(pulse)
YC30 4 DF_SDI(DF to I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
ENG) DC(pulse)
5 DF_SYNC(DF to - - Not used
ENG)
6 DF_DET(DF to I 0V/3.3V DC Connection detection signal
ENG)
7 DF_CLK(ENG to O 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DF) DC(pulse)
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 BRG_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Bridge open detection signal
13 BRG_FEED_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Bridge conveying detection signal 2
ENS2
14 BRG_FEED_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Bridge conveying detection signal 1
ENS1
15 BRG_SET I 0V/3.3V DC Bridge presence detection signal
16 BRG_MOT_CLK O 0V/3.3V Bridge motor clock signal
DC(pulse)
17 BRG_MOT_- O 0V/3.3V DC Bridge motor remote signal
FAN_REM
18 BRG_MOT_PD O 0V/3.3V DC Bridge motor control signal
19 JS_SENS_AK I 0V/3.3V DC Paper presence detection signal
YC32 A1 +24V2_F1 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
A2 N.C. - - Not used
A3 TBLT_- O 0V/3.3V Belt cleaning motor control signal
CLMOT_PWM DC(pulse)
A4 +3.3V2 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A5 TBLT_CLMOT_- I 3.3V DC Belt cleaning motor rotation control sig-
CHA nal
A6 BELT_TH I Analog Belt thermistor voltage
A7 BLT_SCL O 0V/3.3V Belt cleaning motor clock signal
DC(pulse)
A8 GND - - Ground
8-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

s age
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 BLT_SDA I/O 3.3V DC EEPROM data I/O signal
A12 COTN_SOL_BK O 0V/24V DC Container solenoid K: On/Off
YC32 A13 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
A14 COTN_SOL_M - - Not used
A15 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
A16 COTN_SOL_C - - Not used
A17 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
A18 COTN_SOL_Y - - Not used
B1 GND - - Ground
T1
B3 FSR_OFF- O Analog Offset control signal
SET_CNT
B4 PWM - - Not used
B5 CW/CCW - - Not used
B6 3.3V2_LED O 1.2V DC LED power output
B7 GND - - Ground
B8 IH_CORE_HP I 0V/3.3V DC IH position sensor: On/Off
B9 IHMOT_2B O 0V/24V IH core motor control signal
DC(pulse)
B10 IHMOT_2A O 0V/24V IH core motor control signal
DC(pulse)
B11 IHMOT_1A O 0V/24V IH core motor control signal
DC(pulse)
B12 IHMOT_1B O 0V/24V IH core motor control signal
DC(pulse)
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 JS_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC JS sensor: On/Off
B16 GND - - Ground
B17 FRONT_CO_OPE I 0V/3.3V DC Front cover switch: On/Off
N
B18 N.C. - - Not used
YC33 1 TBELT_FAN - - Not used

2 GND - - Not used
8-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

s age
3 TBELT_- - - Not used
FAN_LOCK
4 IH_PWB_- O 0V/24V DC IH PWB fan motor: On/Off
FAN_REM
YC33 6 IHCOIL_FAN1 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
7 GND - - Ground
8 IHCOIL_- I 0V/3.3V DC Lock signal
FAN_LOCK_F
9 IHCOIL_FAN1 O 24V DC 24V DC power output
10 GND - - Ground
11 IHCOIL_- I 0V/3.3V DC Lock signal
FAN_LOCK_C
12 IHCOIL_FAN1 - - Not used
13 GND - - Not used
14 IHCOIL_- - - Not used
FAN_LOCK_R
YC35 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O 24V DC 24V DC power output

T1
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
T2
T2
T2
YC36 1 CONT_MOT_DIR O 0V/5V DC Container motor rotation switching sig-
nal
2 CONT_MOT_LD I 0V/3.3V DC Container motor sync signal
3 CONT_MOT_CLK O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Container motor clock signal
4 CON- O 0V/5V DC Container motor remote signal
T_MOT_REM
5 GND - - Ground
6 24V O 24V DC 24V DC power output
8-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Feed drive PWB

1 YC10 1
YC9 11
14
A1 4
B17
YC11
1 6 YC1
1
YC6
11
B1 YC2
A17
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8
8-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1: Feed image PWB
YC2: Feed image PWB
YC3: Engine PWB
YC4: Feed clutch 1/2, Vertical conveying clutch
YC5: Paper length sensor 1/2, Paper width sensor 1/2, Upper paper level sensor 1/2, Lower paper level
sensor 1/2, Lift motor 1/2, Cassette sensor 1/2
YC6: Registration sensor, Middle clutch, Retard sensor 1/2, Conveying sensor, Lift upper limit sensor 1/2,
Paper sensor 1/2, Right container fan motor, Left container fan motor
YC7: Fuser edge fan motor, Belt roll-up sensor, DU sensor 1/2, Conveying open/close sensor, DU clutch 1/
2. MP clutch, MP paper width sensor, MP tray sensor, MP paper length sensor
YC8: MP lift motor, MP paper sensor, MP conveying sensor, MP position sensor
YC9: Front/Rear ID sensor, Cleaning solenoid, Registration clutch
YC10: Fuser motor, Fuser release motor, Exit fan motor
YC11: Feed motor

s age
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FE I 24V DC 24V DC power input
T2
YC2 1 EXSOL2_KEEP O 0V/24V DC Lower exit solenoid: On/Off(retention)

2 EXSOL2_REM O 0V/24V DC Lower exit solenoid: On/Off(absorption)
3 EXSOL1_KEEP O 0V/24V DC Upper exit solenoid: On/Off(retention)
4 EXSOL1_REM O 0V/24V DC Upper exit solenoid: On/Off(absorption)
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
7 TBLT_CLMOT_- I 0V/3.3V DC Transfer cleaning motor control signal
CHA
8 TBLT_- O 0V/3.3V DC Transfer cleaning motor control signal
CLMOT_PWM
9 N.C. - - Not used
YC3 A1 REG_F_LED I Analog Front ID sensor control signal

A2 ID_SENS_R_P O Analog Rear ID sensor detection signal
A3 ID_SENS_R_S O Analog Rear ID sensor detection signal
A4 REG_R_LED I Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
A5 GND - - Ground
8-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 3.3V2_FUSE I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
B1 GND - - Ground
B2 REG_CL_REM I 0V/24V DC Registration clutch: On/Off
B3 CAS1_2_OPEN O 0V/3.3V DC Cassette open detection sensor: On/Off
B4 MPF_ORG_SENS O 0V/3.3V DC MP paper sensor: On/Off
B5 ATLAS_SDO(DRI O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
to ENG) DC(pulse)
B6 ATLAS_CS(ENG I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication select signal
to DRI)
B7 ATLAS_EN(ENG I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication enable signal
to DRI)
B8 ATLAS_SDI(ENG I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
to DRI) DC(pulse)
B9 ATLAS_- I 0V/3.3V Serial communication clock signal
CLK(ENG to DRI) DC(pulse)
B10 REG_SENS O 0V/3.3V DC Registration sensor: On/Off
B11 ID_SENS_F_P O Analog Front ID sensor detection signal
B12 ID_SENS_F_S O Analog Front ID sensor detection signal
YC4 1 CAS1_FEEDCL O 0V/24V DC Feed clutch 1: On/Off

3 VFEED_CL O 0V/24V DC Vertical conveying clutch: On/Off
5 CAS2_FEEDCL O 0V/24V DC Feed clutch 2: On/Off
7 2WAY_CL - - Not used
8 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
YC5 A1 CAS1_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette sensor 1: On/Off

A2 GND - - Ground
A3 CAS1_LSIZE3 I 0V/3.3V DC Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A4 GND - - Ground
8-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC5 A5 CAS1_LSIZE2 I 0V/3.3V DC Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A6 CAS1_LSIZE1 I 0V/3.3V DC Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A7 CAS1_WSIZE I 0V/3.3V DC Paper width sensor 1: On/Off
A8 GND - - Ground
A10 GND - - Ground
A11 CAS1_QUANT1 I 0V/3.3V DC Upper paper level sensor 1: On/Off
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 CAS1_QUANT2 I 0V/3.3V DC Lower paper level sensor 1: On/Off
A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 O 0V/24V DC Lift motor 1 control signal
A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 O 0V/24V DC Lift motor 1 control signal
B1 LIFTMOT2_OUT1 O 0V/24V DC Lift motor 2 control signal
B2 LIFTMOT2_OUT2 O 0V/24V DC Lift motor 2 control signal
B3 CAS2_WSIZE I 0V/3.3V DC Paper width sensor 2: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 CAS2_QUANT1 I 0V/3.3V DC Upper paper level sensor 2: On/Off
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 CAS2_QUANT2 I 0V/3.3V DC Lower paper level sensor 2: On/Off
B11 CAS2_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette sensor 2: On/Off
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 I 0V/3.3V DC Paper length sensor 2: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground

A2 REGIST_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Registration sensor: On/Off
A4 MIDCL O 0V/24V DC Middle clutch: On/Off
A7 TDRS1_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Retard sensor 1: On/Off
A8 GND - - Ground
8-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC6 A9 3.3V2 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A10 TDRS2_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Retard sensor 2: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 3.3V2 - - Not used
A13 NC - - Not used
A14 GND - - Not used
A15 3.3V2 - - Not used
A16 NC - - Not used
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 FEED_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Conveying sensor: On/Off
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 LIFT1_LIMIT I 0V/3.3V DC Lift upper limit sensor 1: On/Off
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 CAS1_EMPTY I 0V/3.3V DC Paper sensor 1: On/Off
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 LIFT2_LIMIT I 0V/3.3V DC Lift upper limit sensor 2: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 CAS2_EMPTY I 0V/3.3V DC Paper sensor 2: On/Off
B16 EXFAN O 0V/24V DC Right container fan motor/Left container
fan motor: On/Off
B17 GND - - Ground
YC7 A1 DU_CL1 O 0V/24V DC DU clutch 1: On/Off
A3 DUCL2 O 0V/24V DC DU clutch 2: On/Off
A5 MPFCL_REM O 0V/24V DC MP clutch: On/Off
A8 MPF_WSIZE I 0V/3.3V DC MP paper width sensor: On/Off
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 MPF_TRAY I 0V/3.3V DC MP tray sensor: On/Off
8-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 MPF_LSIZE I 0V/3.3V DC MP paper length sensor: On/Off
B1 EDGE_- I 0V/3.3V DC Lock signal
FAN_LOCK
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 EDGE_FAN O 0V/24V DC Fuser edge fan motor: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 TRANSBELT_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Belt roll-up sensor: On/Off
ENS
B6 3.3V2 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 DU_SENS2 I 0V/3.3V DC DU sensor 2: On/Off
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 DU_SENS1 I 0V/3.3V DC DU sensor 1: On/Off
B13 RCOVER_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Conveying open/close sensor: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 MPFLIFT_OUT1 O 0V/24V DC MP lift motor control signal

2 MPFLIFT_OUT2 O 0V/24V DC MP lift motor control signal
3 MPFLIFT_HP I 3.3V DC MP home position sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
8 GND - - Ground
9 MPF_SET I 0V/3.3V DC MP paper sensor: On/Off
11 MPF_FEED I 0V/3.3V DC MP conveying sensor: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 3.3V2 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output

2 REG_F_LED O Analog Front ID sensor control signal
3 GND - - Ground
8-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

s age
YC9 4 ID_SENS_F_S I Analog Front ID sensor control signal
5 ID_SENS_F_P I Analog Front ID sensor control signal
7 REG_R_LED O Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 ID_SENS_R_S I Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
10 ID_SENS_R_P I Analog Rear ID sensor control signal
12 ID_SOL O 0V/24V DC Cleaning solenoid: On/Off
13 REG_CL O 0V/24V DC Registration clutch: On/Off
YC10 1 FSRMOT_DIR O 0V/5V DC Fuser motor rotation switching signal

2 FSRMOT_LD I 0V/3.3V DC Fuser motor sync signal
3 FSRMOT_CLK O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Fuser motor clock signal
4 FSRMOT_REM O 0V/5V DC Fuser fan motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
T2_FUSE
7 FSR_RLS- O 0V/24V DC Fuser pressure release motor control
MOT_OUT2 signal
8 FSR_RLS- O 0V/24V DC Fuser pressure release motor control
MOT_OUT1 signal
9 EXFAN_LOCK I 0V/3.3V DC Lock signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 EXFAN O 24V DC 24V DC power output
YC11 1 CASFEED_DIR O 0V/5V DC Paper feed motor rotation switching sig-

nal
2 CASFEED_LD I 0V/3.3V DC Paper feed motor sync signal
3 CASFEED_CLK O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Paper feed motor clock signal
4 CASFEED_REM O 0V/5V DC Paper feed motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
T2
8-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Drum/Developer relay PWB

1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
20
1
4 YC14
Figure 8-9
Figure 8-10
8-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1: Feed image PWB
YC2: Developer PWB K
YC6: Drum heater
YC10: Drum PWB K
YC14: Developer fan motor K
Connec- Pin Signal I/O Measured volt- Description

tor s age
5 +3.3/V2_FUSE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
6 DRM_EEP_SEL0 I 0V/3.3V DC EEPROM select signal
7 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I 0V/3.3V DC EEPROM select signal
8 EEP_SCL I 0V/3.3V EEPROM clock signal
DC(pulse)
9 EEP_SDA I/O 0V/3.3V EEPROM data I/O signal
DC(pulse)
10 DLP_TH O Analog Developer thermistor voltage
11 TPC_BK O 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage K
DC(pulse)
12 TPC_M O 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage M
DC(pulse)
13 TPC_C O 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage C
DC(pulse)
14 TPC_Y O 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage Y
DC(pulse)
15 GND - - Ground
17 ERASER_BK I 0V/24V DC Eraser K remote signal
18 ERASER_COL I 0V/24V DC Eraser CMY remote signal
19 DRM_HEAT_REM I 0V/3.3V DC Drum heater remote signal
20 5V0_FUSE I 5V DC 5V DC power input
YC2 1 N.C. - - Not used

2 VIB_MOT_REM O 0V/3.3V DC Vibration motor remote signal
3 TPC_BK I 0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage K
DC(pulse)
4 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
5 3.3V2_DLPBK O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
6 EEP_SDA I/O 0V/3.3V EEPROM data I/O signal
DC(pulse)
8-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC2 7 EEP_SCL O 0V/3.3V EEPROMEE clock signal
DC(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 5V0_FUSE O 5V DC 5V DC power output
2 DRUM_HEAT_RE O 0V/5V DC Drum heater: On/Off
M
YC10 1 ERASER2 O 0V/24V DC Eraser K: On/Off

2 ERASER3 O 0V/24V DC Eraser K: On/Off
3 24V2 24V DC 24V DC power output
4 ERASER1 O 0V/24V DC Eraser K: On/Off
5 EEP_SCL O 0V/3.3V EEPROM clock signal
DC(pulse)
6 EEP_SDA O 0V/3.3V EEPROM clock signal
DC(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 REM O 0V/3.3V DC Developer fan motor signal K: On/Off

3 N.C. - - Not used
8-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Main high-voltage PWB

YC1
1
YC2
Figure 8-11
8-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 8-12
8-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1: Engine PWB
YC2: Feed image PWB

tor s age
YC1 1 M_K_I_SENS O Analog Discharge detection voltage K
2 DISCHARGE O Analog Discharge detection voltage
3 M_AC_CLK I 0V/15VDC(pulse) AC charger clock signal
4 B_SLV_AC_CLK I 0V/16VDC(pulse) Sleeve AC clock signal K
5 M_K_AC_CNT I 0V/10VDC(pulse) AC charger control voltage K
6 B_MAG_AC_CLK I 0V/16VDC(pulse) Magnet roller AC clock signal K
7 M_K_DC_CNT I 0V/13VDC(pulse) DC charger control voltage K
8 B_K_SLV_D- I 0V/13VDC(pulse) DC sleeve bias control voltage K
C_CNT
9 B_K_SLV_AC_CN I 0V/10VDC(pulse) AC sleeve bias control voltage K
T
10 B_K_MAG_D- I 0V/13VDC(pulse) DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
C_CNT
11 B_K_MAG_AC_C I 0V/10VDC(pulse) AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
12 HV_REM O 0V/3.3V DC Remote signal
13 SGND - - Ground
YC3 1 PGND - - Ground

2 PGND - - Ground
3 +24V2IL I 24V DC 24V DC power input
4 +24V2IL I 24V DC 24V DC power input
8-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) Transfer high-voltage PWB

1 13
YC1
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
8-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1: Engine PWB, Feed Image PWB

tor s age
YC1 1 SGND - - Ground
2 T_REM I DC0V/14V Transfer remote signal
3 T2_CNT I Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
4 SP_CNT I Analog Separation control voltage
5 T1_K_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
6 T2_OFF_REM O Analog Charger current detection
7 T1_I_SENS O Analog Primary transfer current detection
8 T1_M_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
9 T1_C_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
10 T1_Y_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
11 CL_CNT I Analog Cleaning control voltage
12 +24V2IL O 24V DC 24V DC power output
13 PGND - - Ground
8-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Low power voltage PEB

8
YC2 12
3 1 1 1 2
1 2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 1
YC5
YC3
1 3
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
Figure 8-15
8-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

(100V/120V)
Figure 8-16
(220-240V)
Figure 8-17
8-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-1

Destination
TB1: Inlet
TB2: Inlet
TB3: Inlet
YC1: Main Power Switch
YC2: IH PWB
YC4: Cassette heater
YC5: PF PWB
YC6: Feed image PWB
YC7: Engine PWB
YC8: Main PWB
YC9: Engine PWB

tor s age
TB1 1 LIVE I 100V AC AC power input
120V AC
220V-240V AC
TB2 1 NEUTRAL I 100V AC AC power input

120V AC
220V-240V AC
TB3 1 DH_LIVE I 100V AC AC power input

120V AC
220V-240V AC
YC1 1 LIVE_IN I 100V AC AC power input

120V AC
220V-240V AC
2 LIVE_OUT O 100V AC AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
3 NEUTRAL_IN I 100V AC AC power input
120V AC
220V-240V AC
4 NEUTRAL_OUT 0 100V AC AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
YC2 1 LIVE O 100V AC AC power output

120V AC
220V-240V AC
2 NEUTRAL O 100V AC AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
8-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC4 1 CH_LIVE O 100V AC AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
2 CH_LIVE O 100V AC AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
3 NC - - Not used
4 NC - - Not used
5 CH_NEUTRAL O 100V AC AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC
6 CH_NEUTRAL O 100V AC AC power output
120V AC
220V-240V AC

2 GND - - Ground

5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground

3 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
7 GND - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 SLEEP I 0V/3.3V DC Sleep signal

2 DRM_HEAT_REM O 0V/3.3V DC Drum heater: On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
4 AC DETECTOR - - Not used
8-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Operation panel main PWB

YC9
50 1
YC11
1 5
2
7 1 YC6
1
YC8
4
2 B1 A15 YC7
1
YC4
1
1
YC5 5 1
YC2
5 1
YC1
10 B15 A1
YC10
20
1
YC3
Figure 8-18
Figure 8-19
8-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3: Operation panel sub PWB
YC4: Speaker
YC5: Main PWB
YC6: LCD (backlight)
YC7: Touch panel
YC8: Main PWB
YC9: HDD
YC10: Numeric key (option)
YC11: NFC PWB

tor s age
2 LED0 O 0V/5V DC LED control signal 0
3 NC - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
5 ATTENTION O 0V/3.3V DC Attention LED control signal
6 MEMORY O 0V/3.3V DC Memory LED control signal
7 PROCESSING O 0V/3.3V DC Processing LED control signal
8 ENERGYSAV- O 0V/3.3V DC Energy Saver LED control signal
ERLED
9 INT_ENER- I 0V/3.3V DC Energy Saver key interrupt signal
GYSAVERKEY_N
10 KEY0 I 0V/3.3V Operation panel key scan return signal 0
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
14 SCAN0 O 0V/3.3V Scan signal 0
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
18 JOB_LED I 0V/3.3V DC JS LED control signal
19 NC - - Not used
20 LED2 O 0V/5V DC LED control signal 2
8-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC4 1 SPEAKER_P O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
2 SPEAKER_N O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)
YC5 A1 +5.0V6 I 5V DC 5V DC power output

A2 +5.0V6 I 5V DC 5V DC power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 INT_ANYKEY O 0V/3.3V DC Main recovery signal
A7 DISPLAY_POW- I 0V/3.3V DC LCD backlight lighting-off signal
ERON
A8 C2P_SCK I 0V/3.3V Panel clock signal
DC(pulse)
A9 P2C_SBSY I 0V/3.3V DC Panel busy signal
A10 P2C_SDIR I 0V/3.3V DC Panel communication direction signal
A11 C2P_SDAT O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
A12 P2C_SDAT I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
A13 FPRST I 0V/3.3V DC Operation panel reset signal
A14 VDDDX I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A15 I2C_SCL_NFC I 0V/3.3V I2C clock signal
DC(pulse)
B1 I2C_SDA_NFC I/O 0V/3.3V I2C data signal
DC(pulse)
B2 NIRQ I 0V/3.3V DC NFC interrupt signal
B3 INT_ENER- O 0V/3.3V DC Energy Saver key interrupt signal
GYSAVEKEY
B4 PNL_WKUP_REQ I 0V/3.3V DC Panel recovery signal
B5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
B6 LED_PROCESS- I 0V/3.3V DC Processing LED control signal
ING
B7 LED_ATTENTION I 0V/3.3V DC Attention LED control signal
B8 LED_MEMORY I 0V/3.3V DC Memory LED control signal
B9 BEEP_POW- I 0V/3.3V DC Alert sound recovery signal
ERON
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground
8-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC5 B13 JOB_LED I 0V/3.3V DC JS LED control signal
B14 GND - - Not used
B15 NC - - Not used
YC6 1 LED_A O 0V/5V DC LED control signal

2 LED_C I 0V/5V DC LED control signal
YC7 1 YN_Bottom I Analog Touch panel YN position signal

2 XN_Left I Analog Touch panel XN position signal
3 YP_Top I Analog Touch panel YP position signal
4 XP_Right I Analog Touch panel XP position signal

2 LCD_OFF O 0V/3.3V DC Control signal
3 LOCKN O 0V/3.3V DC Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O 0V/3.3V Transmission data signal
DC(pulse)
6 TX0P O 0V/3.3V Transmission data signal
DC(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 VGH O 19.83V DC LCD High power output

2 VDD O 3.3V DC LCD Driver power output
3 VGL O -9.1V DC LCD Low power output
4 VCOM O 3.67V DC LCD Common power output
5 VCOM O 3.67V DC LCD Common power output
6 AGND - - Ground
7 AVDD O 10.34V DC LCD Analog power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 V1 O 9.55V DC LCD V1 power output
8-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC9 16 V7 O 5.02V DC LCD V7 power output
17 HSD O 0V/3.3V DC Control bit select signal
18 GND_LVDS - - Ground
19 RxIN3+ O LVDS Display data signal
20 RxIN3- O LVDS Display data signal
21 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
30 GND - - Ground
31 RxINCK+ O LVDS Display data signal
32 RxINCK- O LVDS Display data signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 VDD_LVDS O 3.3V DC LVDS power output
40 V13 O 0.83V LCD V13 power output
41 V14 O DC0.5V LCD V14 power output
42 AGND - - Ground
43 AVDD O 10.34V DC LCD Analog power output
44 VDD O 3.3V DC LCD Driver power output
45 MODE O 0V/3.3V DC Mode select signal
46 GBR O 0V/3.3V DC Reset signal
47 SHLR O 0V/3.3V DC Left/Right writing start point setting signal
48 UPDN O 0V/3.3V DC Upper/Lower writing start point setting
signal
49 COM O 3.67V DC LCD Common power output
50 COM O 3.67V DC LCD Common power output
8-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 1 KEY0 I 0V/3.3V Operation panel key scan return signal 0
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
9 10key_detect O
10 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 VDDDX I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 CLK O 0V/3.3V 12C clock signal
DC(pulse)
4 DATA I/O 0V/3.3V 12C data signal
DC(pulse)
5 NIRQ O DC0V/1.8V Interrupt signal
8-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)IH PWB
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC1 YC6
1
Figure 8-20

(100V/120V)
Figure 8-21
(220-240V)
Figure 8-22
8-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC2: IH unit
YC3: IH unit
YC4: Engine PWB
YC5: Engine PWB

tor s age
YC1 1 LIVE I 100V AC AC power input
120V AC
220V-240V AC
2 NEUTRAL I 100V AC AC power input
120V AC
220V-240V AC
YC2 1 VS O 65V to 160V AC Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
YC3 1 COIL_COM O 65V to 160V AC Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
YC4 1 IH_RXD O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal

DC(pulse)
2 IH_TXD I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
3 IH_ERROR O 0V/3.3V DC IH error signal
4 IH_IGBT_- I 0V/3.3V IH Clock signal (LOW)
CLK_LOW DC(pulse)
5 IH_IGBT_- I 0V/3.3V IH Clock signal (HI)
CLK_HIGH DC(pulse)
6 3.3V2_FUSE I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
7 GND - - Ground

2 IH_RELAY I 0V/3.3V DC IH relay signal
3 GND - - Ground
8-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(11)Fuser high voltage PWB

(11-1)Connector position
FSR1
1 3
YC1
Figure 8-23
(11-2)PWB photograph
Figure 8-24

Destination
YC1: Feed image PWB
FSR1: Fuser discharge needle

s age
YC1 1 FSR_OFF- I Analog Fuser high voltage control voltage
SET_CNT
2 +24V3_IL_F1_FE I 24V DC 24V DC power input
T1
3 GND - - Ground
FSR1 SP_CNT O Analog Fuser high voltage output
8-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
8-2 PWB description (Option)

(1) PF PWB (PF-7100)
1 2 1 3
YC11 YC10
1
1
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
17 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-25
8-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Figure 8-26
8-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3: Paper sensor 1, Upper paper level sensor 1, Lower paper level sensor 1, Paper length sensor 1,
Cassette sensor 1
YC4: Lift upper limit sensor 1/2, Conveying sensor 1/2, Right cover switch, Paper width sensor 1/2
YC5: Paper sensor 2, Upper paper level sensor 2, Lower paper level sensor 2, Paper length sensor 2,
Cassette sensor 2
YC6: Lift motor 1/2
YC8: Feed motor
YC9: Conveying clutch 1/2, Feed clutch 1/2
YC10: PF PWB
YC11: Engine PWB
YC12: Engine PWB
YC13: PF PWB
YC14: Retard sensor 1/2

tor s age
YC3 1 3.3V4_LED O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 CAS1_EMPTY I 0V/3.3V DC Paper sensor 1: On/Off
4 3.3V4_LED O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 CAS1_QUANT1 I 0V/3.3V DC Upper paper level sensor 1: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 CAS1_QUANT2 I 0V/3.3V DC Lower paper level sensor 1: On/Off
10 GND - - Not used
11 CAS1_SIZE1_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
ENS
12 GND - - Not used
ENS
14 GND - - Ground
ENS
16 GND - - Ground
17 CAS1_SET_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette sensor 1: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 ULIM_SW_1 I 0V/3.3V DC Lift upper limit sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
8-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC4 6 VER_SENS_1 I 0V/3.3V DC Conveying sensor 1: On/Off
7 COVER_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Right cover switch: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 VER_SENS_2 I 0V/3.3V DC Conveying sensor 2: On/Off
16 CAS1_WSIZE I 0V/3.3V DC Paper width sensor 1: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
19 CAS2_WSIZE I 0V/3.3V DC Paper width switch 2: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
ENS
12 GND - - Not used
ENS
14 GND - - Ground
ENS
16 GND - - Ground
17 CAS2_SET_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette sensor 2: On/Off
18 NC - - Not used
8-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O 0V/24V Lift motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
2 L_MOT1_DR O 0V/24V Lift motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
3 L_MOT2_RET O 0V/24V Lift motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
YC8 1 +24V O 24V DC 24V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 START/STOP O 0V/24V DC Paper feed motor remote signal
4 CLOCK O 0V/24V Paper feed motor clock signal
DC(pulse)
5 LD I 0V/24V DC Paper feed motor ready signal
6 CW/CCW O 0V/24V DC Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
YC9 1 VER_CL1 O 0V/24V DC Conveying clutch 1: On/Off

3 FEED_CL1 O 0V/24V DC Feed clutch 1: On/Off
5 VER_CL2 O 0V/24V DC Conveying clutch 2: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2 O 0V/24V DC Feed clutch 2: On/Off
9 HDR_CL2 - - Not used
10 24V1 - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 VER_SENS O 0V/3.3V DC Conveying sensor: On/Off

2 3.3V3 I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
3 GND - - Ground
8-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC12 4 PF_CAS1_SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette 1 select signal
5 PF_CAS2_SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette 2 select signal
6 EN_CLK I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
7 EN_RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
8 EN_SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
9 EN_SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
10 EN_PAU I 0V/3.3V DC Pause signal
11 PF_CAS_OPEN O 0V/3.3V DC Cassette open/close signal
YC13 1 AN_PF_- I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette open/close signal

CAS_OPEN
2 AN_PF_PAUSE O 0V/3.3V DC Pause signal
3 AN_PF_SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
4 AN_PF_SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
5 AN_PF_RDY I 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
6 AN_PF_CLK O 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
7 PF_CAS2_SEL O 0V/3.3V DC Cassette 2 select signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 AN_VER_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Conveying sensor: On/Off

2 RETARD_- I 0V/3.3V DC Retard sensor 1: On/Off
SENS_1
3 GND - - Ground
SENS_2
6 GND - - Ground
8-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) PF PWB (PF-7110)

1 2 1 3
YC11 YC10
1
1
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
15 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-27
Figure 8-28
8-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3: Paper sensor 1, Lower paper level sensor 1, Upper paper level sensor 1, Cassette sensor 1
YC4: Lift upper limit sensor 1/2, Conveying sensor, Right cover switch, Horizontal conveying sensor
YC5: Paper sensor 2, Lower paper level sensor 2, Upper paper level sensor 2, Cassette sensor 2
YC6: Lift motor 1/2
YC8: Feed motor
YC9: Vertical conveying clutch, Right feed clutch 1, Left feed clutch 2, Horizontal conveying clutch 1/2
YC10: PF PWB
YC11: Engine PWB
YC12: Engine PWB
YC13: PF PWB
YC14: Retard sensor 1/2

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
11 CAS1_SIZE1_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette sensor 1: On/Off
ENS
12 GND - - Not used
13 CAS1_SIZE2_S- - - Not used
ENS
14 GND - - Not used
ENS

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 VER_SENS_1 I 0V/3.3V DC Conveying sensor: On/Off
7 COVER_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Right cover switch: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
8-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 VER_SENS_2 I 0V/3.3V DC Horizontal conveying sensor 1: On/Off
15 3.3V4 - - Not used
16 P0R_SW - - Not used
17 GND - - Not used
18 3.3V5 - - Not used
19 P0L_SW - - Not used
20 GND - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
ENS
12 GND - - Ground
13 CAS2_SIZE2_S- I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette sensor 2: On/Off
ENS
14 GND - - Not used
ENS
16 GND - - Not used

DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
8-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)

2 GND - - Ground
3 START/STOP O 0V/24V DC Paper feed motor remote signal
4 CLOCK O 0V/24V Paper feed motor clock signal
DC(pulse)
5 LD I 0V/24V DC Paper feed motor ready signal
6 CW/CCW O 0V/24V DC Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
YC9 1 VER_CL1 O 0V/24V DC Vertical conveying clutch: On/Off

3 FEED_CL1 O 0V/24V DC Right feed clutch 1: On/Off
5 VER_CL2 O 0V/24V DC Horizontal conveying clutch 1: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2 O 0V/24V DC Left feed clutch 2: On/Off
9 HDR_CL2 O 0V/24V DC Horizontal conveying clutch 2: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 VER_SENS O 0V/3.3V DC Vertical conveying sensor: On/Off

2 3.3V3 I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
3 GND - - Ground
8-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC12 6 EN_CLK I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
7 EN_RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
8 EN_SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
9 EN_SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
10 EN_PAU I 0V/3.3V DC Pause signal
11 PF_CAS_OPEN O 0V/3.3V DC Cassette open/close signal
YC13 1 AN_PF_- I 0V/3.3V DC Cassette open/close signal

CAS_OPEN
2 AN_PF_PAUSE O 0V/3.3V DC Pause signal
3 AN_PF_SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
4 AN_PF_SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
5 AN_PF_RDY I 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
6 AN_PF_CLK O 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
7 PF_CAS2_SEL O 0V/3.3V DC Cassette 2 select signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 AN_VER_SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Vertical conveying sensor: On/Off

SENS_1
3 GND - - Ground
SENS_2
6 GND - - Ground
8-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) PF PWB (PF-7120)

1 YC12 3 1 YC11 4
1 1
YC14
2
1
YC17
4
YC5
1
1
YC15 YC2 19
4
8 1
1
YC8 YC4
2
1
YC10 12
2
1 1
YC7
YC13
4
12
1 1
YC16 YC1
6 5
8 1 13 1
YC18 YC3 YC6

1 12
Figure 8-29
Figure 8-30
8-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC5: Cassette sensor, Feed solenoid, Paper sensor, Lift upper limit sensor, Feed sensor
YC6: Upper paper level sensor 1/Lower paper level sensor 2, Lift lower limit sensor, Deck sensor
YC8: Lift motor
YC11: PF PWB
YC13: PF PWB
YC15: PF feed clutch
YC18: Conveying motor

tor s age
2 CVROP_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Set sensor: On/Off
3 VER_CL - - Not used
4 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
5 VCVSW_3.3V1 - - Not used
6 GND - - Not used
7 VCVSW - - Not used
9 FDR_SOLA O 0V/24V DC Feed solenoid (absorption): On/Off
10 FDR_SOLK O 0V/24V DC Feed solenoid (retention): On/Off
11 EPRSW_3.3V1 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 EPRSW I 0V/3.3V DC Paper sensor: On/Off
14 RULMSW_3.3V1 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
15 3.3V4 - - Ground
16 RULMSW I 0V/3.3V DC Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
18 P0RSW I 0V/3.3V DC Feed sensor: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 LDPSW1_3.3V1 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 LDPSW1 I 0V/3.3V DC Upper paper level sensor 1: On/Off
4 LDPSW2_3.3V1 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 LDPSW2 I 0V/3.3V DC Lower paper level sensor 2: On/Off
7 SZSW2_3.3V1 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 SZSW2 I 0V/3.3V DC Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off
8-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC6 10 DEK_O- - - Not used
PN1_3.3V2
11 GND - - Ground
12 DEK_OPN1 I 0V/3.3V DC Paper Feeder sensor: On/Off
13 NC - - Not used
YC8 1 OUT2 O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 OUT1 O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal
DC(pulse)

2 GND - - Ground
3 24V2 I 24V DC 24V DC power input
YC13 1 SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal

DC(pulse)
2 SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
3 CLK I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
4 SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
5 RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
6 PAUSE I 0V/3.3V DC Pause signal
7 DEK_OPN1 O 0V/3.3V DC Deck open/close signal output
8 DEK_OPN2 - - Not used
9 +3.3V4 O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
10 GND - - Ground
11 SD_FINAL_SENS
12 PF_FINAL_SENS - - Not used
YC15 1 FDR_CL O 0V/24V DC Feed clutch: On/Off

YC18 1 FMOT_CH_A I 0V/24V Paper feed motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 FMOT_CH_B I 0V/24V Paper feed motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC18 3 3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
4 FMOT_DIR O 0V/3.3V DC Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
5 FMOT_PWM O 0V/3.3V Paper feed motor drive signal
DC(pulse)
6 FMOT_BRAKE O 0V/3.3V DC Paper feed motor stop signal
5 GND - - Ground
8-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) DP PWB (DP-7100)

4
1 YC5 3
1 YC10
5 1
5 YC11
16 YC2
YC1
1 12
YC3
4
1 YC12
4
1
YC4 YS1
1
YC17
6 1 16
3 YC8 1 YC7 1 YC6 8 YC16 1 3 1 YC9
12
Figure 8-31
Figure 8-32
8-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3: Engine PWB
YC4: Feed sensor
YC5: Top cover sensor
YC6: Original length sensor, Original width sensor
YC7: Registration sensor, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor, Lift lower limit sensor
YC8: Original sensor
YC9: Feed motor, Conveying motor
YC10: Feedshift motor
YC11: Lift motor, Reversing motor
YC16: LED PWB, Feedshift sensor, Lift upper limit sensor
YC17: Exit sensor

tor s age
YC3 1 ENG_TMG O 0V/3.3V DC Timing signal
2 ENG_RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication ready signal
3 ENG_SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication select signal
4 ENG_CLK I 0V/3.3V Serial communication clock signal
DC(pulse)
5 ENG_SI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
6 ENG_SO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
7 DP_OPEN O 0V/3.3V DC Open/close sensor: On/Off
8 EN_FD_SW O 0V/3.3V DC Feed sensor: On/Off
9 EN_SET_SW O 0V/3.3V DC Original sensor: On/Off
10 +3.3V3 I 0V/3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 +24V I 24V DC 24V DC power input

2 FD_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Feed sensor: On/Off
3 3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
4 NC - - -

2 GND - - Ground
8-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC5 3 +R24V I 0V/24V DC Interlock rear 24V
YC6 1 ANODE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 LNG_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Original length sensor: On/Off
5 HSIZE I Analog Original width sensor
6 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
3 RGST_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Registration sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 CCD_TMG_SW I 0V/3.3V DC CCD sensor: On/Off
6 +3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
7 ANODE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 DP_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC DP open/close sensor: On/Off
10 ANODE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output to sensor
11 GND - - Ground
12 LF_DNSW I 0V/3.3V DC Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off

2 SET_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Original sensor: On/Off
YC9 1 FMOT_CH_A I 0V/3.3V Paper feed motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 FMOT_CH_B I 0V/3.3V Paper feed motor control signal
DC(pulse)
4 FMOT_DIR O 0V/3.3V DC Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
5 FMOT_PWM O 0V/3.3V Paper feed motor drive signal
DC(pulse)
6 FMOT_BREAK O 0V/3.3V DC Paper feed motor stop signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 R24V O 24V DC 24V DC power output
8-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 9 CMOT_CH_A I 0V/3.3V Conveying motor control signal
DC(pulse)
10 CMOT_CH_B I 0V/3.3V Conveying motor control signal
DC(pulse)
12 CMOT_DIR O 0V/3.3V DC Conveying motor rotation switching signal
13 CMOT_PWM O 0V/3.3V Conveying motor drive signal
DC(pulse)
14 CMOT_BREAK O 0V/3.3V DC Conveying motor stop signal
15 GND - - Ground
1 SFT_A1 O 0V/24V Feedshift motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 SFT_B1 O 0V/24V Feedshift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 SFT_A3 O 0V/24V Feedshift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
4 SFT_B3 O 0V/24V Feedshift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
YC11 1 LIFT_A1 O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 LIFT _B1 O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 LIFT _A3 O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
4 LIFT _B3 O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
5 RMOT_CH_A I 0V/3.3V Reversing motor control signal
DC(pulse)
6 RMOT_CH_B I 0V/3.3V Reversing motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8 RMOT_DIR O 0V/3.3V DC Reversing motor rotation switching signal
9 RMOT_PWM O 0V/3.3V Reversing motor drive signal
DC(pulse)
10 RMOT_BREAK O 0V/3.3V DC Reversing motor stop signal
11 GND - - Ground
8-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC16 1 LED_REM I 0V/3.3V DC LED remote signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 SFT_HP_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Feedshift sensor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 LF_UPSW I 0V/3.3V DC Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 EXIT_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Exit sensor: On/Off
8-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) DP PWB (DP-7110)

3
1 YC6
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC3 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4 1
14 B1 1 3
1
B13
YC8
Figure 8-33
Figure 8-34
8-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1: Engine PWB
YC2: Original length sensor, Original sensor, Lift lower limit sensor, Original width sensor
YC4: Lift upper limit sensor, Feed sensor, Exit sensor, LED PWB, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor
YC5: Feed motor, Registration motor, Lift motor
YC6: Top cover sensor
YC7: Drive fan motor
YC8: CIS fan motor
YC10: SHD PWB
YC14: Conveying motor

tor s age
YC1 1 ENG_TMG O 0V/3.3V DC Timing signal
2 ENG RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication ready signal
3 ENG SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication select signal
4 ENG CLK I 0V/3.3V Serial communication clock signal
DC(pulse)
5 ENG_SI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
6 ENG_SO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
7 DP_OPEN O 0V/3.3V DC Open/close sensor: On/Off
8 EN_FD_SW O 0V/3.3V DC Feed sensor: On/Off
9 EN_SET_SW O 0V/3.3V DC Original sensor: On/Off
10 +3.3V3 I 0V/3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 +24V I 24V DC 24V DC power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 LNG_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Original length sensor: On/Off
4 LNG_CLK O 0V/3.3V Sensor LED clock signal
DC(pulse)
5 GND - - Ground
6 SET_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Original sensor: On/Off
9 GND - - Ground
8-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC2 10 LF_DNSW I 0V/3.3V DC Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off
11 WIDE3 I 0V/3.3V DC Original width sensor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
YC4 A01 ANODE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A02 GND - - Ground
A03 LF_UPSW I 0V/3.3V DC Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
A04 GND - - Ground
A05 FD_SW I 0V/3.3V DC Feed sensor: On/Off
A06 +3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A08 RGST_SW(V) - - Not used
A09 +3.3V - - Not used
A10 ANODE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 EXIT_SW(M) I 0V/3.3V DC Exit sensor: On/Off
A13 NC - - Not used
B01 NC - - Not used
B02 +24V O 24V DC 24V DC power output
B03 LED_REM I 0V/3.3V DC LED remote signal
B05 GND - - Ground
B06 CCD_TMG_SW I 0V/3.3V DC CCD sensor: On/Off
B07 +3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
B08 ANODE O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
B09 GND - - Ground
B10 DP_OPEN I 0V/3.3V DC Open/close sensor: On/Off
B11 ANODE - - Not used
B13 SKEW_SW - - Not used
YC5 1 FEED_OUT2B O 0V/24V Paper feed motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 FEED_OUT2A O 0V/24V Paper feed motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 FEED_OUT1A O 0V/24V Paper feed motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC5 4 FEED_OUT1B O 0V/24V Paper feed motor control signal
DC(pulse)
5 RGST_OUT2B O 0V/24V Registration motor control signal
DC(pulse)
6 RGST_OUT2A O 0V/24V Registration motor control signal
DC(pulse)
7 RGST_OUT1A O 0V/24V Registration motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8 RGST_OUT1B O 0V/24V Registration motor control signal
DC(pulse)
9 LIFT_OUT2B O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
10 LIFT_OUT2A O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
11 LIFT_OUT1A O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
12 LIFT_OUT1B O 0V/24V Lift motor control signal
DC(pulse)
2 GND - - Ground
3 +R24V I 0V/24V DC 24V DC power input
YC7 1 R24V O 24V DC 24V DC power output

2 FAN_REM1 I DC0/24V DC Drive fan motor remote signal
YC8 1 R24V O 24V DC 24V DC power output

2 FAN_REM2 I DC0/24V DC CIS fan motor remote signal
YC10 1 CIS_TMG_SW I 0V/3.3V DC CIS sensor: On/Off

2 SHD_CLK O 0V/3.3V Serial communication clock signal
DC(pulse)
3 SHD_SO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
4 SHD_SEL O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication select signal
5 SHD_PAGEST O 0V/3.3V DC Timing input for the sub-scanning effec-
tive range (VSYNC)
6 RESETN O 0V/3.3V DC Reset signal
7 SHD_OVMON I 0V/3.3V DC Monitoring signal for the sub-scanning
effective range signal
8 SHD_SI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal
DC(pulse)
8-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 9 SHD_RDY I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication sync signal
10 NC - - -
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 CNVY4_OUT2B O 0V/24V Conveying motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 CNVY3_OUT2A O 0V/24V Conveying motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 CNVY2_OUT1B O 0V/24V Conveying motor control signal
DC(pulse)
4 CNVY1_OUT1A O 0V/24V Conveying motor control signal
DC(pulse)
5 REVE4_OUT1B O 0V/24V Exit motor control signal
DC(pulse)
6 REVE2_OUT1A O 0V/24V Exit motor control signal
DC(pulse)
7 REVE1_OUT2A O 0V/24V Exit motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8 REVE3_OUT2B O 0V/24V Exit motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) DP Interface PWB (for DP-7110)

7
YC2
1
YC1
1 40
Figure 8-35
Figure 8-36
8-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1: Main PWB
YC2: SHD PWB

tor s age
5 5.0V3 I 5V DC 5V DC power input
6 PCIEN_DP2M O -0.4V/0.4V DC PCIex communication data signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
12 PCIEP_M2DP I -0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
14 PCIEN_M2DP I -0.4V/0.4V DC PCIex communication data signal
16 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
20 PCIEP_REF- O 0V/0.7V DC PCIex reference clock
CLK_DP2M
21 GND - - Ground
22 PCIEN_REF- O 0V/0.7V DC PCIex reference clock
CLK_DP2M
23 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 PCIERC_S- I 0V/3.3V DC PCIex reset input
WRST_N_M2DP
29 GND - - Ground
30 DP_RST_N I 0V/3.3V DC System reset input
31 GND - - Ground
32 GND - - Ground
33 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground
8-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
36 GND - - Ground
37 GND - - Ground
38 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
40 GND - - Ground

2 NC - - Not connected
3 LOCKN O 0V/3.3V DC Control signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RX0N I 1.0V/1.5V DC Image data
6 RX0P I 1.0V/1.5V DC Image data
7 GND - - Ground
8-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) DF PWB (DF-7100)

1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 12 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
6
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC15 YC10
9
1 YC6
1 5
YC14 12
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 4 1
Figure 8-37
Figure 8-38
8-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3: Feed image PWB
YC4: Front cover sensor
YC5: Feed image PWB
YC6: PH PWB
YC7: PH PWB
YC8: Exit motor, Slide motor, Exit release motor, Middle motor, Entry motor
YC9: Paddle motor, Side registration motor 1/2
YC10: Stapler
YC11: Tray motor
YC13: Paper press solenoid
YC14: Paper LED
YC16: Exit paper sensor
YC17: Paddle sensor, Entry sensor
YC19: Side registration sensor 1/2, Tray sensor 1, Bundle exit sensor, Paper press sensor 1/2, Adjusting
sensor, Slide sensor
YC20: DF set sensor

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I 0V/24V DC Front cover sensor: On/Off
3 TOP COV - - Not used
SOURCE
4 TOP COVSIG - - Not used
YC5 1 ENG RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal

2 ENG SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
3 ENG DI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
DC(pulse)
4 ENG DO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
DC(pulse)
5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
7 ENG CLK I 0V/3.3V Serial clock signal
DC(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
8-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC6 1 5V - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM - - Not used
7 PHMOT REM O 0V/3.3V DC PH motor remote signal
8 PU RDY I 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
9 PU SEL O 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
10 PU CLK O 0V/3.3V Serial clock signal
DC(pulse)
11 PU DI O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
DC(pulse)
12 PU DO I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
DC(pulse)

YC8 1 EXIT MOT 2B O 0V/24V Exit motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 EXIT MOT 1B O 0V/24V Exit motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 EXIT MOT 2A O 0V/24V Exit motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
5 STP MOV MOT O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
9 EJE RELS MOT O 0V/24V Exit release motor control signal
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
8-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC8 12 EJE RELS MOT O 0V/24V Exit release motor control signal
1A DC(pulse)
13 MIDDLE MOT 2B O 0V/24V Middle motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
15 MIDDLE MOT 2A O 0V/24V Middle motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
17 ENTRY MOT 2B O 0V/24V Paper entry motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
19 ENTRY MOT 2A O 0V/24V Paper entry motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
YC9 1 PADDLE MOT 2B O 0V/24V Paddle motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 PADDLE MOT 1B O 0V/24V Paddle motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 PADDLE MOT 2A O 0V/24V Paddle motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
5 SIDE REG R MOT O 0V/24V Side registration motor 2 control signal
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
9 SIDE REG F MOT O 0V/24V Side registration motor 1 control signal
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
8-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 1 STP MOT OUT1 O 0V/24V Staple motor control signal
DC(pulse)
2 STP MOT OUT1 O 0V/24V Staple motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
9 GND - - Ground
10 LS I 0V/3.3V DC Staple unit LS signal
11 READY I 0V/3.3V DC Staple unit READY signal
13 HP I 0V/3.3V DC Staple unit HP signal
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O 0V/24V Tray motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 TRY MOT OUT1 O 0V/24V Tray motor control signal
DC(pulse)

2 PAP PRE SOL O 0V/24V DC DFPPSOL: On/Off (absorption)
ACT
3 PAP PRE SOL O 0V/24V DC DFPPSOL: On/Off (retention)
KEEP
YC14 1 5V O 5V DC 5V DC power output

2 LED O 0V/5V DC Paper LED: On/Off
YC16 1 N.C - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
3 PAP SENS SIG I 0V/3.3V DC Exit paper sensor: On/Off
8-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC17 1 PADDLE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PADDLE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
4 GND - - Ground
5 ENTRY SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output to Side registration

A sensor 2
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS I 0V/3.3V DC DFSRS2: On/Off
SIG
A4 SID REG F SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output to Side registration
A sensor 1
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS I 0V/3.3V DC DFSRS1: On/Off
SIG
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 PH ENTRY SENS I 0V/3.3V DC PH paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
A9 3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A10 MTRY FULL O 5V DC 5V DC power output
SENS A
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 MTRY FULL I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor: On/Off
SENS SIG
A13 PADDLE SENS A - - Not used
A15 PADDLE SENS - - Not used
SIG
B1 BUNDLE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
B2 GND - Ground
B3 BUNDLE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
SIG
B4 PAP PRE UP O 5V DC 5V DC power output
SENS A
B5 GND - - Ground
8-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC19 B6 PAP PRE UP I 0V/3.3V DC Paper pressing sensor 1: On/Off
SENS SIG
B7 PAP PRE LOW O 5V DC 5V DC power output
SENS A
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 PAP PRE LOW I 0V/3.3V DC Paper pressing sensor 2: On/Off
SENS SIG
B10 ADJUST SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 ADJUST SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
B13 STP MOV SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 STP MOV SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC20 1 SET SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 SET SENS SIG I 0V/3.3V DC Device sensor: On/Off
8-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) PH PWB (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130)

6 1 11 3 1 1 4
1
YC6 YC8 YC7 YC9
13
3
YC1
YC5
1
1 1
YC2
3
Figure 8-39

Destination
YC1: DF PWB
YC2: DF PWB
YC5: PH motor
YC6: PH solenoid, PH tank solenoid
YC7: PH entry sensor
YC8: PH tank full sensor, PH tank set sensor, PH pulse sensor, PH home position sensor
YC9: PH tank full sensor

tor s age
YC1 1 PH_SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
DC(pulse)
2 PH_SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
DC(pulse)
3 PH_CLK I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
4 PH_SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
5 PH_RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
6 PHMOT_REQ I 0V/3.3V DC Motor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 3.3V I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input
12 PH_EN_SENS O 0V/3.3V DC Paper entry sensor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
8-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC5 1 CCW O 0V/24V Motor control signal (clockwise)

DC(pulse)
2 NC - - Not used
3 CW O 0V/24V Motor control signal (reverse)
DC(pulse)
YC6 1* 24V2 O 24V DC 24V DC power output

2* PHSOL_PUL O 0V/24V DC Punch-hole switching solenoid (absorp-
tion)
3* PHSOL_RET O 0V/24V DC Punch-hole switching solenoid (return)
5 TNKSOL_PUL O 0V/24V DC Tank solenoid (absorption)
6 TNKSOL_HLD O 0V/24V DC Tank solenoid (retention)

2 PH EN SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Paper entry sensor: On/Off

2 TNK FULL PLS O 0V/3.3V DC Tank full sensor (photo transmitter): On/
Off
3 SENS 3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 PHTNK_SET I 0V/3.3V DC PH tank set switch On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 PHMOT PLS I 0V/3.3V DC Pulse sensor: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 PHMOT HP I 0V/3.3V DC Home position sensor: On/Off
2 TNK FULL I 0V/3.3V DC Tank full sensor (photo receptor): On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
4 TNK FULL PLS I 0V/3.3V DC Tank full sensor (photo receptor): On/Off
*Not applied to 100V model
8-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) DF PWB (DF-7110)

1 6 14 1 12 1
30
16
YC19 YC14 YC15 YC22
15
1
YC13
4 1
11 1
1 18
YC6
YC16
6
YC23
1
1
YC17
13
YC18
13
1
5
YC1
1
8
YC12
YC2
1
6 1 10 1
20
YC20 YC4
4
12 1
5 1
YC3 YC7
7 1
YC9
1
19 1
YC11 8 1
YC21 4 YC5 1 2 YC8 1 YC10
Figure 8-40
Figure 8-41
8-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3: Exit cover sensor, Front cover sensor
YC4: Feed image PWB
YC5: Feed image PWB
YC6: MT PWB
YC7: PH PWB
YC8: PH PWB
YC9: BF PWB
YC10: BF PWB
YC12: Slide motor, Exit motor, Middle motor, Entry motor, Exit release motor
YC13: Tray paper full sensor 2
YC14: Shift release motor, Shift motor 1/2, Exit clutch
YC16: Exit fan
YC17: Stapler
YC18: Relief drum motor, Feedshift solenoid 1/2/3
YC19: Tray motor
YC20: Drum sensor, Middle sensor
YC21: Sub exit sensor, Sub tray full sensor, Entry sensor, DF operation PWB, Tray paper full sensor 1
YC22: Slide sensor, Side registration sensor 1/2, Exit paper sensor, Bundle exit sensor, Tray sensor 1/2,
Paddle sensor, Adjusting sensor, Shift set sensor
YC23: Shift sensor 1/2, Tray sensor 3/4/5, Shift release sensor

tor s age
2 EXIT COV SIG I 0V/24V DC Exit cover sensor: On/Off
3 FRONT COV O 24V DC 24V DC power output
SOURCE

2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)

2 GND - - Ground
8-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
7 MT DO O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
8 MT DIN I 0V/5V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
9 MT CLK O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Serial clock signal
10 MT SEL O 0V/5V DC Select signal
11 MT RDY I 0V/5V DC Ready signal

4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM I 0V/3.3V DC PH paper edge sensor: On/Off
7 PHMOT REM O 0V/3.3V DC PH motor: On/Off
10 PU CLK O 0V/3.3V DC Clock signal
11 PU DI I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data signal output

YC9 1 BF DI I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data signal input

2 BF DO O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data signal output
3 BF CLK O 0V/3.3V DC Clock signal
4 BF SEL O 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
5 BF RDY I 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
8-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 ST MOV MOT 2B O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 ST MOV MOT 1B O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 ST MOV MOT 2A O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal
DC(pulse)
4 ST MOV MOT 1A O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
8-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC12 19 EJE RELS MOT O 0V/24V Exit release motor control signal
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
YC13 1 MTRY U SENS K I 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor 1_LED: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
YC14 1 SFT RELS MOT O 0V/24V Shift release motor control signal
2B DC(pulse)
2 SFT RELS MOT O 0V/24V Shift release motor control signal
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
5 SFT R MOT 2B O 0V/24V Shift motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
6 SFT R MOT 1B O 0V/24V Shift motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
7 SFT R MOT 2A O 0V/24V Shift motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
8 SFT R MOT 1A O 0V/24V Shift motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
9 SFT F MOT 2B O 0V/24V Shift motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
10 SFT F MOT 1B O 0V/24V Shift motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
11 SFT F MOT 2A O 0V/24V Shift motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
12 SFT F MOT 1A O 0V/24V Shift motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
13 EXIT CL O 0V/24V DC Exit clutch: On/Off

DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
8-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC15 3 PADDLE MOT 2A O 0V/24V Paddle motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
YC16 1 EXIT FAN O 0V/24V DC Exit fan 1: On/Off

MOT_SIDE
3 EXIT FAN O 0V/24V DC Exit fan 2: On/Off
MOT_SIDE
5 EXIT FAN MOT_- O 0V/24V DC Exit fan 3: On/Off
CENT
YC17 1 STP_MOT OUT2 O 0V/24V Stapler control signal

DC(pulse)
2 STP_MOT OUT2 O 0V/24V Stapler control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
8-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC17 6 STP_MOT OUT1 O 0V/24V Stapler control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
9 GND - - Ground
YC18 1 DRM MOT 2B O 0V/24V Relief drum motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 DRM MOT 1B O 0V/24V Relief drum motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 DRM MOT 2A O 0V/24V Relief drum motor control signal
DC(pulse)
4 DRM MOT 1A O 0V/24V Relief drum motor control signal
DC(pulse)
6 MID_DRM SOL O 0V/24V DC Feedshift solenoid 1 (absorption): On/Off
ACT
7 MID_DRM SOL O 0V/24V DC Feedshift solenoid 1 (retention): On/Off
KEEP
9 DRM_BF SOL O 0V/24V DC Feedshift solenoid 2 (absorption): On/Off
ACT
10 DRM_BF SOL O 0V/24V DC Feedshift solenoid 2 (retention): On/Off
KEEP
12 SUB_MID SOL O 0V/24V DC Feedshift solenoid 3 (absorption): On/Off
ACT
13 SUB_MID SOL O 0V/24V DC Feedshift solenoid 3 (retention): On/Off
KEEP
YC19 1 BRAKE O 0V/5V DC Tray motor control signal

2 DIR O 0V/5V DC Tray motor control signal
3 CLK O 0V/5V DC Clock signal
4 ENABLE O 0V/5V DC Tray motor control signal
8-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC20 1 DRM SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 DRM SENS SIG I 0V/3.3V DC Drum sensor: On/Off
4 MID EJE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 MID EJE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Middle sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC21 1 STRY EJE SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output

A
2 GND - - Ground
3 STRY EJE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Sub exit sensor: On/Off
SIG
5 GND - - Ground
6 STRY FULL I 0V/3.3V DC Sub tray paper full sensor: On/Off
SENS SIG
7 STRY FULL O 0V/3.3V Pulse signal
SENS PLS DC(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
9 ENTRY SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
11 LED1 O 0V/5V DC LED output
15 KEY1 I 0V/3.3V DC Key input
16 KEY2 I 0V/3.3V DC Key input
17 GND - - Ground
19 MTRY U SENS K O 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor 1: On/Off
YC22 1 STAPLE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
8-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
3 STAPLE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG
4 SID REG R SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
5 GND - - Ground
6 SID REG R SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
7 SID REG F SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
8 GND - - Ground
9 SID REG F SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
10 GND - - Ground
11 PAP SENS SIG I 0V/3.3V DC Exit paper sensor: On/Off
13 BUNDLE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 BUNDLE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
SIG
16 MTRY HP1 SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
17 GND - - Ground
18 MTRY HP1 SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
19 MTRY HP2 SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
20 GND - - Ground
21 MTRY HP2 SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
22 PADDLE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
23 GND - - Ground
24 PADDLE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
25 ADJUST SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
26 GND - - Ground
27 ADJUST SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
28 SFT SET SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
29 GND - - Ground
8-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC22 30 SFT SET SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Shift set sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC23 1 SFT F HP SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output

A
2 GND - - Ground
3 SFT F HP SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Shift sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
4 SFT R HP SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
5 GND - - Ground
6 SFT R HP SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Shift sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
7 MTRY HALF O 5V DC 5V DC power output
SENS A
8 GND - - Ground
9 MTRY HALF I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor 3: On/Off
SENS SIG
10 MTRY BF SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
11 GND - - Ground
12 MTRY BF SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor 5: On/Off
SIG
13 MTRY FULL O 5V DC 5V DC power output
SENS A
14 GND - - Ground
15 MTRY FULL I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor 4: On/Off
SENS SIG
16 SFT RELS SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
17 GND - - Ground
18 SFT RELS SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Shift release sensor: On/Off
SIG
8-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10)MT PWB
YC1
YC7 1
13 1
5 1
YC2
20
11
YC6
1 7
YC3
YC4
1
YC5
1 4
Figure 8-42
8-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
Destination
YC1: MT tray sensor 1/2/3, MT exit sensor 2
YC2: MT tray sensor 4/5/6/7, MT exit sensor 1, MT home position sensor
YC3: DF main PWB
YC4: MT right cover switch
YC5: MT conveying motor

tor age
2 OFS1 I 0V/5V DC MT tray sensor 1: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 OFS2 I 0V/5V DC MTMTMT tray sensor 2: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
10 LED O 0V/5V DC LED signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 TEJS I 0V/5V DC(pulse) MT eject sensor 2: On/Off (photo recep-
tor)
4 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
14 LED O 0V/5V DC(pulse) MT eject sensor 1: Off/On (light emission)
15 GND - - Ground
8-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

tor age
YC2 16 HP SIG I 0V/5V DC MT home position sensor: On/Off
18 GND - - Ground
19 NC - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 5V I 5V DC 5V DC power input
7 SDI I 0V/5V DC(pulse) MT serial communication data signal
8 SDO O 0V/5V DC(pulse) MT serial communication data signal
9 SCLK I 0V/5V DC(pulse) MT clock signal
10 SEL I 0V/5V DC MT select signal
11 READY O 0V/5V DC MT ready signal
YC4 1 R24V I 24V DC 24V DC power input
YC5 1 MOTOR_A O 0V/24V MT conveying motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 MOTORA O 0V/24V MT conveying motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 MOTORB O 0V/24V MT conveying motor control signal
DC(pulse)
4 MOTOR_B O 0V/24V MT conveying motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11)BF PWB
30 1 5 YC2 1 5 YC1 1
16
15 YC20 YC18 YC8
1 1
9
1
1 1
YC5
YC7 4
YC11 7
12
1
12
YC3
4
7
1
YC16 YC19
7
1
1
YC4
6 2
1
YC15 YC9
2
1
10 YC13 1
20
2 YC14 1 YC12 1 YC17 3 YC10 4 YC6 1

1 13
1
Figure 8-43
8-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3: Main PWB
YC4: Left cover sensor
YC5: Main PWB
YC6: BF set sensor, Tray open/close sensor
YC7: Main PWB
YC10: Adjustment motor 1/2, Side registration motor 1/2, Entry motor
YC13: Staple motor
YC15: Blade motor
YC16: Main motor
YC17: Feedshift solenoid
YC20: Adjustment sensor 1/2, Side registration sensor 1/2, Tray full sensor, Exit sensor, Conveying sen-
sor, Paper sensor, Blade sensor, Entry sensor

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I 0V/24V DC Left cover sensor: On/Off
YC5 1 3.3V I 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power input

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I 0V/24V DC Set sensor On/Off
4 EXIT COV SIG I 0V/24V DC Tray open/close switch: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG_RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
4 ENG_SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
5 ENG_CLK I 0V/3.3V DC Clock signal
6 ENG_DI I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data signal input
7 ENG_DO O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data signal output
8-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 1 EXTMOT_2B O 0V/24V Adjustment motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
2 EXTMOT_1B O 0V/24V Adjustment motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
3 EXTMOT_2A O 0V/24V Adjustment motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
4 EXTMOT_1A O 0V/24V Adjustment motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
5 MDLMOT_2B O 0V/24V Side registration motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
6 MDLMOT_1B O 0V/24V Side registration motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
7 MDLMOT_2A O 0V/24V Side registration motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
8 MDLMOT_1A O 0V/24V Side registration motor 2 control signal
DC(pulse)
9 CINMOT_2B O 0V/24V Paper entry motor control signal
DC(pulse)
10 CINMOT_1B O 0V/24V Paper entry motor control signal
DC(pulse)
11 CINMOT_2A O 0V/24V Paper entry motor control signal
DC(pulse)
12 CINMOT_1A O 0V/24V Paper entry motor control signal
DC(pulse)
13 EXCMOT_2B O 0V/24V Adjustment motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
14 EXCMOT_1B O 0V/24V Adjustment motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
15 EXCMOT_2A O 0V/24V Adjustment motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
16 EXCMOT_1A O 0V/24V Adjustment motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
17 STMMOT_2B O 0V/24V Side registration motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
18 STMMOT_1B O 0V/24V Side registration motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
19 STMMOT_2A O 0V/24V Side registration motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
20 STMMOT_1A O 0V/24V Side registration motor 1 control signal
DC(pulse)
8-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC13 2 STLS2 I 0V/5V DC Staple unit LS2 signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 STLS1 I 0V/5V DC Staple unit LS1 signal
5 STHP I 0V/5V DC Staple unit HP signal
6 STMOT_OUT1 O 0V/24V Staple motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
8 FGND - - Ground
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
YC15 1 FLDMOT_BRK O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Blade motor control signal

2 FLDMOT_DIR O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Blade motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Blade motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Blade motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC16 1 FLDMOT_DIR O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Main motor control signal

2 FLDMOT_ALM O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Main motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Main motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O 0V/5V DC(pulse) Main motor control signal
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 GND - - Ground

2 3FSOL_ATT O 24V DC Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (absorption)
3 3FSOL_HLD O 24V DC Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (return)
2 GND - - Ground
3 BDLFT_HP I 0V/3.3V DC Adjustment sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 WDL_HP I 0V/3.3V DC Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
8-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
8 GND - - Ground
9 FULL I 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor: On/Off On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
12 OUT I 0V/3.3V DC Exit sensor: On/Off
14 GND - - Ground
15 TRANSPORT I 0V/3.3V DC Conveying sensor: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
18 PAPER I 0V/3.3V DC Paper sensor: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground
21 WDU_HP I 0V/3.3V DC Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
23 GND - - Ground
24 BLD_HP I 0V/3.3V DC Blade sensor: On/Off
25 GND - - Ground
26 BULOW_HP I 0V/3.3V DC Adjustment sensor 2: On/Off
28 GND - - Ground
29 CARRY_IN I 0V/3.3V DC Paper entry sensor: On/Off
8-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(12)PH PWB (PH-7)

YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
Figure 8-44
Figure 8-45
8-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC1: DF PWB
YC2: DF PWB
YC3: Slide motor
YC4: Motor
YC5: Solenoid, Paper edge sensor 1, Tank full sensor
YC6: Slide sensor
YC7: Paper edge sensor 2
YC8: Pulse sensor, Home position sensor
YC9: Tank set switch

tor s age
YC1 1 PH_SDI I 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
DC(pulse)
2 PH_SDO O 0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
DC(pulse)
3 PH_CLK I 0V/3.3V Clock signal
DC(pulse)
4 PH_SEL I 0V/3.3V DC Select signal
5 PH_RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal
6 PHMOT_REQ I 0V/3.3V DC PH motor: On/Off
7 PHPES_REQ I 0V/3.3V DC Paper edge detection: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
12 5.0V I 5V DC 5V DC power input

YC3 1 PHADJ_MOT 2B O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 PHADJ_MOT 1B O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal
DC(pulse)
3 PHADJ_MOT 2A O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal
DC(pulse)
4 PHADJ_MOT 1A O 0V/24V Slide motor control signal
DC(pulse)
8-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC4 1 PHMOT_N O 0V/24V Motor control signal
DC(pulse)
2 NC - - Not used
3 PHMOT_P O 0V/24V Motor control signal
DC(pulse)

2 PHSOL_PUL O 0V/24V DC Solenoid: On/Off (absorption)
3 PHSOL_RET O 0V/24V DC Solenoid: On/Off (return)
4 PHLED_A O 0V/3.3V DC Paper edge sensor 1 A: On/Off
5 PHLED_B O 0V/3.3V DC Paper edge sensor 1 B: On/Off
6 PHLED_C O 0V/3.3V DC Paper edge sensor 1 C: On/Off
7 PHLED_D O 0V/3.3V DC Paper edge sensor 1 D: On/Off
8 PHLED_3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
9 5.0V O 5V DC 5V DC power output
10 PHTNK_FUL I 0V/5V DC Tank full sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 SENS3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 PHADJ_HP I 0V/3.3V DC Slide sensor: On/Off
YC7 1 PHPES_DET I 0V/3.3V DC Paper edge sensor 2: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 SENS3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 PHMOT_PLS I 0V/3.3V DC Pulse sensor: On/Off
4 SENS3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHMOT_HP I 0V/3.3V DC Home position sensor: On/Off
YC9 1 PHTNK_SET I 0V/3.3V DC PH tank set switch On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
8-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(13)DF PWB (DF-7120)

1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 13 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
9
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1 1
YC15 YC10
9 YC12
1 YC6
1 5 6
YC14 12
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 6 1
Figure 8-46
Figure 8-47
8-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

Destination
YC3: Feed image PWB
YC4: Front cover sensor, Top cover sensor
YC5: Feed image PWB
YC6: PH PWB
YC7: PH PWB
YC8: Exit motor, Slide motor, Exit release motor, Entry motor, Middle motor
YC10: Stapler
YC11: Tray motor
YC16: Tray paper full sensor 2
YC17: Entry sensor
YC18: Middle sensor
YC19: Side registration sensor 1/2, Exit sensor, Bundle exit sensor, Paddle sensor, Tray sensor 1/2/3,
Slide sensor

tor s age
2 GND - - Ground

3 TOP COV O 24V DC 24V DC power output
SOURCE
4 TOP COV SIG I 0V/24V DC Top cover sensor: On/Off
YC5 1 ENG RDY O 0V/3.3V DC Ready signal

DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
DC(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
8-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM O 0V/3.3V DC PH paper edge sensor: On/Off
7 PHMOT REM O 0V/3.3V DC PH motor: On/Off
10 PU CLK O 0V/3.3V DC Clock signal
11 PU DI I 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO O 0V/3.3V DC Serial communication data signal output

YC8 1 EXIT MOT 2B O 0V/24V Exit motor control signal

DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
8-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC8 13 ENTRY MOT 2B O 0V/24V Paper entry motor control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)

DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
2B DC(pulse)
1B DC(pulse)
2A DC(pulse)
1A DC(pulse)
8-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC10 1 STPMOT OUT1 O 0V/24V Stapler control signal
DC(pulse)
2 STPMOT OUT1 O 0V/24V Stapler control signal
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
DC(pulse)
9 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O 0V/24V Tray motor control signal

DC(pulse)
2 TRY MOT OUT1 O 0V/24V Tray motor control signal
DC(pulse)
YC16 1 MTRY U SENS K I 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor 1: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
6 MTRY U SENS K O 0V/3.3V DC Tray paper full sensor: On/Off
YC17 1 MID EJE SENS A - - Not used

2 GND - - Not used
3 MID EJE SENS - - Not used
SIG
4 GND - - Ground
8-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC17 5 ENTRY SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC18 1 MID EJE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 MID EJE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Middle sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output

A
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
A4 SID REG F SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 PAP SENS SIG I 0V/3.3V DC Exit paper sensor: On/Off
A9 3.3V O 3.3V DC 3.3V DC power output
A10 BUNDLE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 BUNDLE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Bundle exit sensor: On/Off
SIG
A13 PADDLE SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A14 GND - - Ground
A15 PADDLE SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
B1 MTRY HP SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 MTRY HP SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
B4 MTRY HALF O 5V DC 5V DC power output
SENS A
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 MTRY HALF I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor 2: On/Off
SENS SIG
8-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

tor s age
YC19 B7 MTRY FULL O 5V DC 5V DC power output
SENS A
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 MTRY FULL I 0V/3.3V DC Tray sensor 3: On/Off
SENS SIG
B10 ADJUST SENS A O 5V DC 5V DC power output
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 ADJUST SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
B13 STP MOV SENS O 5V DC 5V DC power output
A
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 STP MOV SENS I 0V/3.3V DC Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG
8-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-6
9 Appendixes
9-1 Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
37.8 mm/ 1.49"ࠉChager roller

39.3 mm/ 1.55"ࠉSleeve roller
64.7 mm/ 2.55"ࠉSecondly transfer roller
94.5 mm/ 3.72" Drum

96 mm/ 3.8" Heat roller (Fuser belt)
110.0 mm/ 4.33"Press roller
845.0 mm/ 33.27"ࠉPrimaly transfer belt
*: The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.
9-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2
9-2 Environmental command

The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. These parameters can be registered or
changed by the prescribe FRPO command and set as the default condition of the printer at power on
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.
Setting environmental command

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as the optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, recommend to print out a service status page, so you will know
the parameter values before the changes are made. It is possible to return all FRPO parameters to the default
condition with the FRPO INIT command. (!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Setting the emulation to PCL6
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Items FRPO Setting value Factory

default set-
ting
Top margin A1 Integer value in inch 0
A2 decimal value in 1/100 inch increments 0
Left margin A3 Integer value in inch 0
Page length A5 Integer value in inch 17
Page width A7 Integer value in inch 17
PRESCRIBE compatible mode B0 0 to 255 0
2 (100V)
Pattern resolution at power-up B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
No. of copy at power-up C0 1 to 999 1
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0
1: Landscape
Default font* C2 Middle 2 digits of start up font number 0
C3 Last 2 digits of start up font number 0
C5 First 2 digits of start up font number 0
PCL font switching C8 0:HP compatible mode 0
32:Compatibility mode
9-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

default set-
ting
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99: Accumulating with the value of FRPO 5
S5 (0:5 K bite)
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
1 (100V)
Reduction ratio (100V model only) J0 0: 100% 0
5: 70 %
6: 81 %
7: 86 %
8: 94 %
9: 98 %
Auto linefeed mode (100V model J7 0: Auto linefeed 0

only) 1: No auto linefeed
(Japanese emulation only)
Horizontal offset (100V model K0 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
only) K1 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Vertical offset (100V model only)* K2 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
K3 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Kanji font number setting K4 0: Same as V7 0
(100V model only) 1: Mincho 40 dots
2: Gothic 40 dots
5: Mincho 48 dots
6: Gothic 48 dots
New/old JIS code switching K6 0: JIS X 0208: 1990 0
(100V model only) 1: JIS X 0208: 1978
8: JIS X 0213: 2004
KIR mode N0 0: OFF 2
2: ON
Selecting duplex printing mode N4 0: OFF 0
1: Long-edge mode (long-edge bind)
2: Short-edge mode (Short-edge bind)
Sleep timer time-out time N5 1 to 240 minutes 10
Eco Print mode N6 0: OFF 0
2: ON
Resolution(35/40 ppm only) N8 0: 300dpi 1
1: 600dpi
3: 1200dpi
Default emulation mode P1 6 : PCL6 (except PCL XL) 6
9 : KPDL 9 (120V)
Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 0x0d 1
1: CR
2: CR+LF
9-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

default set-
ting
Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 0x0d 1
1: LF
2: CR+LF
KPDL auto switching P4 0: None 0
1: Auto switching 1(120V
model)
KPDL auto switching alternate P5 Same as P1 (except 9) 6
emulation
AES option P7 If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor 10

Page exit command and action alternate emulation after the AES is started, it 11 (120V)
when automatic emulation switch- is processed in KPDL.
ing (AES) is triggered 0: All page exit commands
1: None
2: All page exit command and Prescribe EXIT
command
3: Prescribe EXIT command only
4: ^L command only
6: Prescribe EXIT command and ^L command
If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor
alternate emulation after the AES is started, it
is processed in the alternate emulation .
10: Data other than KPDL print data is printed
in the alternate emulation.
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82(R)
Setting stacker at power-up R0 1: Inner tray 1
3: When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed
7: When the 4000-sheet finisher is installed
9-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3

default set-
ting
Paper size(start-up) R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0
1: Envelope Monarch
2: Envelope #10
3: Envelope DL
4: Envelope C5
5: Executive
6: Letter
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
10: ISO A3
11: JIS B4
12: Ledger
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
16: Envelope #9
17: Envelope #6-3/4
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
20: B4toA4(100V model only)
21: A3toA4(100V model only)
22: A4toA4[98%](100V model only)
23: STKtoA4(100V model only)
24: STKtoB4(100V model only)
30: C4
31: Hagaki
32: Oufuku Hagaki
33: Oficio II
38: 12x18
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei type 2
53: Youkei type 4
The default paper feeding source R4 0: Multi purpose tray 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Cassette 5
Sort bin full detection S3 0: Stop at paper full detection 0
1: Changing output tray at paper full detection
9-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

default set-
ting
A4/Letter override S4 0: OFF 1
1: ON 0 (100V)
Host buffer size accumulated S5 0: 10KB 1
value 1: 100KB
(H8 value and integration) 2: 1MB
Wide A4 T6 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Line spacing U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
U1 Lines per inch (decimal value) 0
Character spacing U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
U3 Characters per inch (decimal value) 0
Country code of the resident fonts U6 0: US 41
1: France 0 (100V)
2: Germany
3: U.K.
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multi-lingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
Supported symbol sets U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53

1: IBM 0 (100V)
6: PCL
Default font pitch* U8 Default font pitch/integer 10

U9 Default font pitch/decimal 0
9-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-2

default set-
ting
Initial ANK outline font size* V0 Integer value of ANK outline font / size at 0
power-up
Upper 2-digit/valid value range: 00 to 09
V1 Integer value of ANK outline font / size at 12
power-up
Lower 2-digit/valid value range: 00 to 99
V2 2 digits decimal value of ANK outline font / size 0
at power-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
Initial ANK outline font name* V3 ANK outline font name at start-up Courier
Initial Kanji outline font size (100 V4 Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font 0
V model only)* / size at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 09
V5 2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font / 10
size at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 99
V6 2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font / 0
size at start-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
Initial Kanji outline font name V7 Kanji outline font name at start-up MTHSMIN-
(100V model only)* CHO-W3
Default weight (courier and letter V9 0: Courier = darkness 5
Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular
9-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

default set-
ting
Paper type (MP tray) X0 1: Plain 1
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Labels
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
8: Rough (except 100V model)
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Hagaki
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
18: Index Tab
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8
Paper type (Paper cassettes 1,2) X1 1: Plain 1
X2 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality
Media type X3 1: Plain 1
(Option paper cassette 3 to 5) X4 3: Preprinted
X5 5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality
9-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

default set-
ting
Cassette selection mode (PCL) X9 0: Selecting paper cassette according to an 0
escape sequence compatible with HP-
LJ5Si
2: Selecting paper cassette according to an
escape sequence compatible with HP-
LJ8000
Auto error clear at an error Y0 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Auto error clear timeout time Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
Detecting paper error at duplex Y3 0: Not detected 127
printing 127: Detected
Detecting an error of paper size
and type at fixed paper feeding
source.
Forced duplex printing setting Y4 0: OFF 0
(Media type is Preprinted, 1: ON
Prepunched and Letterhead only)
PDF direct printing Y5 0: Zooming according to paper size 0
1: Selecting paper that paper size specified in
the PDF.
2: Select from Letter or A4 based on the paper
size specified in the PDF, and zoom
(enlarge or reduce) it according to the paper
used.
3: Print from Letter or A4 based on the paper
size specified in the PDF.
8: Printed in full magnification
9: Select from Letter or A4 based on the paper
size specified in the PDF.
10: Select from Letter or A4 based on the
paper size specified in the PDF, and zoom
(enlarge or reduce) it according to the paper
used.
13 to 99: Same action as default value(0)
Job box error control Y6 0: No error control 3
1: Output the error list
2: Display the error
3: Display the error and print the error report
*: Ignored depending on emulation
9-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
9-3 Image adjustment procedure chart
Adjust- Maintenance mode Setting procedures

Reference
ment pro- Item and adjustment contents Image Remark
No. Mode page Procedure Adjustment
cedure
Adjusting the center line of the MP U034 LSU Out Left P.6-42 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tray 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves rightward.
(Adjustment of writing) [LSU Out Left]-[MPT] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the [Duplex].
1 Change the LSU writing start tim- 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
ing.
(Test pattern output)
5. Press the System Menu key. Press the [Stop] key.
6. Execute the adjustment.
Adjusting the center line of the U034 LSU Out Left P.6-42 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
cassettes 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves rightward.
(Adjustment of writing) [LSU Out Left] - change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
[Cassette1] to [Cassette5] 2. Press the Start key to set the [Duplex].
2 Change the LSU writing start tim- 3. Press the System Menu key. setting value.
ing.
4. Press the Start key.
(Test pattern output) Press the [Stop] key.
5. Press the System Menu key.
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U034 LSU Out Top P.6-42 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tration of the MP tray 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves downward.
(Adjustment of writing) [Lsu Out Top] - [MPT(L)] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
3 Change the secondary paper feed 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
timing.
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U034 LSU Out Top P.6-42 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tration of the cassette 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves downward.
(Adjustment of writing) [Lsu Out Top] - [Cassette(L)] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
4 Change the secondary paper feed 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
timing.
Adjusting the leading edge margin U402 Lead P.6-195 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
(Adjustment of writing) 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
[Lead] change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination start 3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
5 timing. 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
9-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

Reference
cedure
Adjusting the trailing edge margin U402 Trail P.6-195 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
(Adjustment of writing) 1. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
[Trail] change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination end 2. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
6 timing. 3. Press the Start key. setting value.
Adjusting the left and right margins U402 A Margin P.6-195 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
(Adjustment of writing) C Margin 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
Select [A Margin] or [C Margin]. change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination 3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
7 start/end timing. 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
Adjusting magnification of the U065 Main Scan P.6-63 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the main scanning 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
direction [Main Scan] change the setting value. get larger.
3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
8 Processes data. 4. Place an original and press the Start key. setting value.
(Test copy output) (Test copy output)
Adjusting magnification of the U065 Sub Scan P.6-63 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the sub scanning direc- P.6-69 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
tion (scanning adjustment) U070 Sub Scan(F) U065: [Sub Scan] change the setting value. get larger.
Sub Scan(B) U070: [Sub Scan(F)], [Sub Scan(B)] or 2. Press the Start key to set the
Changes the original scanning Sub Scan(CIS) [Sub Scan(CIS)] setting value. U070: When using document processor
9 speed. *When the setting value is increased, the image
get longer.
4. Place an original and press the Start key. Press the [Stop] key.
(Test copy output) (Test copy output)
Adjusting the center line U067 Front P.6-66 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U067: When using on the contact glass
(Adjustment of reading) P.6-71 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
U067: [Front] change the setting value. moves leftward.
Changes the original scan start U072 Front U072: [Front], [Back] or [CIS] 2. Press the Start key to set the
10 timing. Back 3. Press the System Menu key. setting value. U072: When using document processor
CIS *Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of
4. Place an original and press the Start key.
duplex mode.
(Test copy output) (Test copy output) Press the [Stop] key.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
moves rightward.
9-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4

Reference
cedure
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U066 Front P.6-65 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U066: When using on the contact glass
tration P.6-69 2. Press the System Menu key. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
(Adjustment of reading) 3. Place an original and press the Start key. change the setting value. moves forward.
U071 Front Head (Test copy output) (Test copy output) 2. Press the Start key to set the
11 Changes the original scan start Back Head 4. Press the System Menu key. setting value. U071: When using document processor
timing. *Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the
5. Select the adjustment content.
Press the [Stop] key. time of duplex mode.
U066: [Front]
*When the setting value is increased, the image
U071: [Front Head] or [Back Head]
moves forward.
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005), the fol-
lowing adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065) 100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Copy: ±1.5%
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Using DP: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction Magnification Copy: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction Using DP: ±2.5%
MTF correction
Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
Input gamma in color mode
Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Color correction matrix
Input gamma in monochrome mode Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
Copy: 2.0mm or less
Using DP: 2.5mm or less
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), the fol- Skewed paper feed Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
lowing adjustments are automatically made: (left-right difference) Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less(table)
*:When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly 1.5mm/100mm or less(document processor)
positioned against the original.
Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
*:DP adjustment original (ChartB)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
Copy: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
5 mm ±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)

Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner: DP Auto Adj) is run using the specified original, the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original the following adjustments are automatically made: (Refer to P.6-202)
Adjusting the printer leading edge registration (U034)
9-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
Adjusting the printer center line (U034)

Adjusting the printer margin (U402)
Adjust-
ment pro- Item and adjustment contents Image Setting procedures Remark
cedure
Main scan direction diagonal 1. Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8).
[Original]
image adjustment A B
2. Remove rib (c) at front side and remove b
(Adjustment of reading) upper right cover (b) in the direction of
P rin tin g d ire ctio n the arrow.
Adjust the height of the scanner 3. Remove the screw (e) that fixes the ISU
unit. C D
a
adjustment plate (d).
4. Shift the ISU adjustment plate (d) in the
[Output image W [Output image X
(A/C side is downward.)] (B/D side is downward.)]
A B A B
adjustment direction. a
*:Ref. of moving amount
c
If you lower it by one step, it changes
by + 0.26 mm on the A / C side and -
C D C D
0.25 mm on the B / D side.
12 When A / C side goes down (output d
Compare the original with the output image and check the image pattern A)
side (A / C side or B / D side) where image shift occurs →Lower the ISU adjustment plate (d) by
*:Please use A3 original. shifting it in the direction of the arrow X
When B / D side goes down (output
image pattern B)
e
X
→Raise the ISU adjustment plate (d) by Y
shifting it in the direction of the arrow Y.
5. Tighten the screw (e) after the adjust-
ment is completed
6. Attach upper right cover (b) to the main
unit and fixed it with two screws (a).
9-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-4 Wiring diagram

(1) Engine PWB / Drive PWB
YC3 YC6 YC40 YC6

3.3V3_FUSE A12 A12 A1 A1 3.3V3_FUSE +5V0 A1 A1 A20 A20 +5V0_FUSE
3.3V2_FUSE A11 A11 A2 A2 3.3V2_FUSE +5V2 A2 A2 A19 A19 +5V2
3.3V2_FUSE A10 A10 A3 A3 3.3V2_FUSE GND A3 A3 A18 A18 GND
3.3V2_FUSE A9 A9 A4 A4 3.3V2_FUSE GND A4 A4 A17 A17 GND
GND A8 A8 A5 A5 GND +3.3V2 A5 A5 A16 A16 +3.3V2_FUSE
GND A5 A5 A8 A8 GND GND A8 A8 A13 A13 GND
REG_R_LED A4 A4 A9 A9 REG_R_LED GND A9 A9 A12 A12 GND
ID_SENS_R_S A3 A3 A10 A10 ID_SENS_R_S JS_SENS_AK A10 A10 A11 A11 JS_SENS_AK
ID_SENS_R_P A2 A2 A11 A11 ID_SENS_R_P FRONT_CO_OPEN A11 A11 A10 A10 FRONT_CO_OPEN
REG_F_LED A1 A1 A12 A12 REG_F_LED JS_SENS A12 A12 A9 A9 JS_SENS
KSS_INT A13 A13 A8 A8 DRM_EEP_SEL0
Relay Relay KSS_EN A14 A14 A7 A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_S B12 B12 B1 B1 ID_SENS_F_S KSS_CS A15 A15 A6 A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_P B11 B11 B2 B2 ID_SENS_F_P KSS_CLK A16 A16 A5 A5 KSS_IMAGE_CLK(ENG to IMAGE)
REG_SENS B10 B10 B3 B3 REG_SENS KSS_SDI A17 A17 A4 A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI(IMAGE to ENG)
ATLAS_CLK(ENG to DRI) B9 B9 B4 B4 ATLAS_CLK KSS_SDO A18 A18 A3 A3 KSS_IMAGE_SDO(ENG to IMAGE)
ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) B8 B8 B5 B5 ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) 3.3V3 A19 A19 A2 A2 3.3V3
ATLAS_EN(ENG to DRI) B7 B7 B6 B6 ATLAS_EN 3.3V_TH_CUT A20 A20 A1 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT
ATLAS_CS(ENG to DRI) B6 B6 B7 B7 ATLAS_CS
ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) B5 B5 B8 B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) Relay Relay
MPF_ORG_SENS B4 B4 B9 B9 MPF_ORG_SENS DRUM HEAT B1 B1 B20 B20 DRUM HEAT
CAS1_2_OPEN B3 B3 B10 B10 CAS1_2_OPEN DF_CLK B2 B2 B19 B19 DF_CLK
REG_CL_REM B2 B2 B11 B11 REG_CL_REM DF_SDO B3 B3 B18 B18 DF_SDO
GND B1 B1 B12 B12 GND DF_SDI B4 B4 B17 B17 DF_SDI
DF_SEL B5 B5 B16 B16 DF_SEL
DF_RDY B6 B6 B15 B15 DF_RDY
DF_SYNC B7 B7 B14 B14 DF_SYNC
DF_DET B8 B8 B13 B13 DF_DET
FSR_TH_EDGE B9 B9 B12 B12 FSR_TH_EDGE
FSR_TH_CENT B10 B10 B11 B11 FSR_TH_CENT
FSR_TH_PRESS B11 B11 B10 B10 FSR_TH_PRESS
FSR_TH_MID B12 B12 B9 B9 FSR_TH_MID
FSR_ALARM B13 B13 B8 B8 FSR_ALARM
TPC_BK B14 B14 B7 B7 TPC_BK
DRUM_BK_MOT_REM B15 B15 B6 B6 DRUM_BK_MOT_REM
DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK B16 B16 B5 B5 DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK
DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY B17 B17 B4 B4 DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY
GND B18 B18 B3 B3 GND
+24V3IL_F2_FET2 B19 B19 B2 B2 +24V3IL_IL_F2_FET2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT B20 B20 B1 B1 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
Engine PWB (1/7) YC42 YC28

DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM 1 1 18 18 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK 2 2 17 17 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK
Feed drive PWB (1/3) DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY
3
4
3
4
16
15
16
15
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE 5 5 14 14 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE
VIB_MOT_REM 6 6 13 13 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DLP_FAN_REM 7 7 12 12 I2C_SCL
DLP_FAN_REM_HALF 8 8 11 11 I2C_SDA
TPC_M 9 9 10 10 TPC_M
TPC_C 10 10 9 9 TPC_C
TPC_Y 11 11 8 8 TPC_Y
DLP_COL_MOT_REM 12 12 7 7 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
DLP_COL_MOT_CLK 13 13 6 6 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
DLP_COL_MOT_DIR 14 14 5 5 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR
DLP_COL_MOT_RDY 15 15 4 4 DLP_COL_MOT_RDY
DRUM_COL_MOT_REM 16 16 3 3 DRUM_COL_MOT_REM
DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK 17 17 2 2 DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK
DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY 18 18 1 1 DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 GND 3 3 1 3 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 Waste toner full sensor Vout 2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 WTNR_LOCK_SENS
NC 9 9 5V 1 1 3 1 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 1 2 1 2 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 2 Relay 1 2 Relay 1 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
ALM 1 3 12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
Toner suction fan motor GND 2
3
Relay 2 13
14
13
14
GND
TN_FAN_REM
24V 1
2 2
Vibration motor BK 1 1
Main drive Feed image PWB (1/6)
9-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection

Engine PWB (2/7)
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K
GND 3 3 3 3 GND DP PWB 16 1 B16
YC16
B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K YC16 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
15 2 B15 B15
+24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
+24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH
+24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
GND 8 8 8 8 GND
GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK
GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY
GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8
Relay 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
BD 12 12 12 12 BD
DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK
DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P2_KC 14 14 14 14 P2_KC
5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P0_KC 15 15 15 15 P0_KC
DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K
DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND
DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
GND 20 20 20 20 GND
DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
GND
SD_CLK
23
24
23
24
23
24
23
24
GND
SD_CLK
DP
P4_M 25 25 25 25 P4_M
CSI_M 26 26 26 26 CSI_M
NC 27 27 27 27 NC YC4 YC1
INT_ST_KM 28 28 28 28 INT_ST_KM +5V2IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V2
SET_KM 29 29 29 29 SET_KM BD 3 3 2 2 BD A16 A16 GND
NC 30 30 30 30 NC TH 2 2 3 3 TH PD PWB A15 A15
Relay A14
GND
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND 3.3V 3 3 A14 3.3V2
DIO_KM 32 32 32 32 DIO_KM Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI_KM 34 34 34 34 DOI_KM
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI_KM 36 36 36 36 SKOI_KM YC5 GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
CSI_M 38 38 38 38 CSI_M P GND 2 2 4 4 GND
GND
DATAP2_M
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
GND
DATAP2_M
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor 3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V3_FUSE
DATAN2_M
GND
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
DATAN2_M
GND
POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK Original sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A7
A6
A7
A6
GND
PLT_OPEN
DATAP1_M 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_M
GND 45 45 45 45 GND YC6 A/ 1 6 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAP4_M 46 46 46 46 DATAP4_M CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1 5 A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
A 3 4 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
DATAN4_M
GND
47
48
47
48
47
48
47
48
DATAN4_M
GND
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor Scanner motor B 4 3 A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3
DATAP3_M 49 49 49 49 DATAP3_M 2 A1 A1 GND
DATAN3_M 50 50 50 50 DATAN3_M B/ 6 1
YC1 YC36
+12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
+12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
+12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
+12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
NC 36 36 5 5 NC
LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
GND 31 31 10 10 GND
GND 28 28 13 13 GND
GND 25 25 16 16 GND
DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 22 22 19 19 GND
GND 19 19 22 22 GND
GND 16 16 25 25 GND
AFE_RD 15 15 26 26 AFE_RD
GND 14 14 27 27 GND
AFE_WD 13 13 28 28 AFE_WD
GND 12 12 29 29 GND
AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
GND 10 10 31 31 GND
AFE_CS 9 9 32 32 AFE_CS
GND 8 8 33 33 GND
APC PWB AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
7
6
7
6
34
35
34
35
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
GND 5 5 36 36 GND
NC 4 4 37 37 NC
YC27 YC3
+5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
GND 3 3 6 6 GND
GND 4 4 5 5 GND
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A
CLN_MOT_B 6 6 3 3 CLN_MOT_B
+24V4
PGND
7
8
7
8
2
1
2
1
+24V4
PGND Laser scanner unit YC1 YC2
㸦4 beam㸧 +12V
+12V
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
+12V
+12V
NC 3 3 3 3 NC
LED PWB LED_PWM
LED_ENA
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
LED_PWM
LED_ENABLE
WTNR_MOT_A 9 9 5 1 3 1 GND 6 6 6 6 GND
2 2 Waste toner motor GND 7 7 7 7 GND
WTNR_MOT_B 10 10 4 2 1 3
Relay
4 4 TH
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT
Weight sensor
CCD PWB
GND 12 12 2 4 2 2 GND
+5V2 13 13 1 5 1 1 5V
Image scanner unit

YC9
AC DETECTOR 14 14 4 AC DETECTOR
GND 15 15 3 3 GND
CAS_HEATER 16 16 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM Power supply PWB (1/2)
SLEEP 17 17 1 1 SLEEP
9-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Feed image PWB (Front side)

Transfer PWB Transfer connect PWB
YC2
TH 2 2 1 1 BELT_TH
Belt thermistor GND 1 1 2 2 GND YC1 YC2 YC3 YC32
+24V2_F1 10 1 +24V2_F1 +24V2_F1 10 10 A1 A1 +24V2_F1
TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK 9 2 TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK 9 9 A2 A2 N.C.
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 A3 A3 TBLT_CLMOT_BWM
3.3V2 7 4 +3.3V2 3.3V2 7 7 A4 A4 +3.3V2
YC3 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 6 A5 A5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
Vm(24V) 1 1 1 1 +24V2_F1 BELT_TH 5 Relay 6 BELT_TH BELT_TH 5 5 A6 A6 BELT_TH
P_GND 2 2 2 2 GND BLT_SCL 4 7 BLT_SCL BLT_SCL 4 4 A7 A7 BLT_SCL
BRAKE 3 3 3 3 TBLT_CLMOT_BRAKE GND 3 8 GND GND 3 3 A8 A8 GND
Belt cleaning motor PWM
CW/CCW
4
5
4
5
4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
9
10
GND
BLT_SDA
GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
2
1
A9
A10
A9 GND
A10 BLT_SDA
3.3V2 6 6 5 5 3.3V2
CHB 7 7
CHA 8 8 6 6 CHA
7 7 GND
- 1 2 1 2 A11 A11 +24V2_F1

Container solenoid K + 2
Relay 1 2 Relay 1 A12 A12 COTN_SOL_BK
A13 A13 +24V2_F1

A14 A14 COTN_SOL_M
A15 A15 +24V2_F1

A16 A16 COTN_SOL_C
A17 A17 +24V2_F1

A18 A18 COTN_SOL_Y
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F1_FET1 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB B5 B5 CW/CCW
3.3V 3 3 B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
IH position sensor GND 2 2 B7 B7 GND
Vout 1 1 B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
B/ 1 4 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
B 2 3 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
IH core motor A 3 Relay 2 B11 B11 IHMOT_1A
A/ 4 1 B12 B12 IHMOT_1B
3.3V 3 3 B13 B13 3.3V2_LED

JS sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
B14
B15
B14 GND
B15 JS_SENS
2 2 B16 B16 GND

Front cover switch 1 1 B17 B17 FRONT_CO_OPEN
B18 B18 N.C.
Eject unit 1
2
12
11
3 10
4 9 YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Switchback motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Eject lower full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Eject upper full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
11
10
A9
A10
A9
A10
GND
EXINNER_FULL
COM 1 3 4 9 A11 A11 +24V2_F1

YC33
Eject lower solenoid ACT
KEEP
2
3
Relay 2
1
5
6
8
7
A12
A13
A12
A13
EXSOL1
EXSOL1_KEEP TBELT_FAN 1 1
GND 2 2
COM 1 3 7 6 A14 A14 +24V2_F1 TBELT_FAN_LOCK 3 3
Eject upper solenoid ACT 2 Relay 2 8 5 A15 A15 EXSOL2
KEEP 3 1 9 4 A16 A16 EXSOL2_KEEP
3.3V 3 3 10 3 A17 A17 +3.3V2_LED 3 1 ALM

Eject sensor GND 2 2 11 2 A18 A18 GND IH_PWB_FAN_REM
+24V2_F1
4
5
4
5
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
24V
IH PWB fan motor
Vout 1 1 12 1 A19 A19 EX_FEED_SENS
A20 A20 N.C.
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F
7
8
7
8
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Eject/IH front fan motor
YC1
VIB_MOT_REM 20 20 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9 3 1 24V
DLP_FAN_REM 18 18 B3 B3 DLP_FAN_REM
5V0_FUSE 17 17 B4 B4 5V0_FUSE
GND 10 10 2 Relay 2 GND Eject/IH center fan motor
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11 1 3 ALM
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2B) 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2_F1
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
Drum-Developer TPC_Y
TPC_C
11
10
11
10
B10
B11
B10
B11
TPC_Y
TPC_C
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13
14
13
14
relay PWB (1/2) TPC_M

TPC_BK
9
8
9
8
B12
B13
B12
B13
TPC_M
TPC_BK
DLP_TH 7 7 B14 B14 DLP_TH
EEP_SDA 6 6 B15 B15 EEP_SDA
EEP_SCL 5 5 B16 B16 EEP_SCL
DRM_EEP_SEL1 4 4 B17 B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DRM_EEP_SEL0 3 3 B18 B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0
3.3V2_FUSE 2 2 B19 B19 3.3V2_FUSE
GND 1 1 B20 B20 GND
9-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
(4) Feed image PWB (Rear side)
Toner container YC1 YC12

5V 5 5 1 1 5V2
3.3V2 4 4 2 2 3.3V2
RFID PWB EEP_SCL
GND
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
EEP_SCL
GND
EEP_SDA 1 1 5 5 EEP_SDA
YC19
TNMOT_BK_OUT1 A1 A1 9 1 3 1
TNMOT_BK_OUT2 A2 A2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor K
6 6 CONT_RECOG
7 7 GND 3.3V2_LED A3 A3 7 3 3 3 3.3V

8 8 CONNECT_RECOG GND A4 A4 6 Relay 4 2 2 GND Toner motor rotation sensor K
THOP_PLS_BK A5 A5 5 5 1 1 Vout
3.3V2 A6 A6 4 6 Collector
THOP_FULL_BK A7 A7 3 7 Emitter
THOP_LED_BK A8 A8 2 8 Cathode Toner level sensor K
YC36 3.3V2_LED A9 A9 1 9 Anode
+24V
GND
1
2
6
5
1
2
6
5
24V
GND
Toner Hopper
START/STOP 3 4 3 4 CONT_MOT_REM
Container motor CLOCK 4 3 4 3 CONT_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 5 2 CONT_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 CONT_MOT_DIR
Main drive unit YC24

26 25 N.C.
25 25 +24V2IL2
24 24 GND
23 23 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
22 22 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
21 21 DLP_COL_MOT_LD
20 20 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR
+24V1 1 11 19 19 +24V2IL2
PGND 2 10 18 18 GND
START/STOP 3 9 17 17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM
VM 4 8 16 16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK
FG 5 7 15 15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG
Developer K CW/CCW 6 6 14 14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR
BRAKE 7 5 13 13 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK
/ Belt motor +5V 8 4
SGND 9 3
SIG1 10 2
SIG2 11 1
12 12 +24V2IL2
11 11 GND
10 10 DRM_COL_MOT_REM
9 9 DRM_COL_MOT_CLK
8 8 DRM_COL_MOT_LD
7 7 DRM_COL_MOT_DIR
+24V 1 6 6 6 +24V2IL2
GND 2 5 5 5 GND
START/STOP 3 4 4 4 DRM_BK_MOT_REM
Drum motor K CLOCK 4 3 3 3 DRM_BK_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 2 2 DRM_BK_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 1 1 1 DRM_BK_MOT_DIR

YC23
1 3 1 1 BLT_PRESS_OUT1
Belt release motor 2
3
2
1 2 2 BLT_PRESS_OUT2
3 3 1 5 3 3 +24V2
Developer clutch 2 2
1 1 2 4 4 4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM
Relay
3.3V 3 3 3 3 5 5 3.3V2_LED
Belt release sensor GND 2 2 4 2 6 6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 1 7 7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS
9-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(5) Feed drive PWB

YC7
EDGE_FAN_LOCK B1 B1 B14 B1 9 1 3 1 ALM
GND
EDGE_FAN
B2
B3
B2
B3
B13
B12
B2
B3
8
7
2
3
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
24V
Fuser edge fan motor
Main unit YC5
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 6 A1 A1 CAS1_LSIZE3
Cassette sensor 1 GND 1 1 2 5 A2 A2 GND GND B4 B4 B11 B4 6 Relay 4 3 1 3 GND
TRANSBELT_SENS
3.3V2
B5
B6
B5
B6
B10
B9
B5
B6
5
4
5
6
2
1
Relay 2
3
2
1
Vout
3.3V
Belt roll-up sensor
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 A3 A3 CAS1_LSIZE3
GND 3 3 4 3 A4 A4 GND
Paper length sensor 1 CN-2 2 2 5 2 A5 A5 CAS1_LSIZE2 3.3V2_LED B7 B7 B8 B7 3 7 3 3.3V
CN-1 1 1 6 1 A6 A6 CAS1_LSIZE1 GND B8 B8 B7 B8 2 8 2 GND Duplex sensor 2
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 A7 A7 CAS1_WSIZE
DU_SENS2 B9 B9 B6 B9 1 9 1 Vout
Conveying
Paper width sensor 1 GND 1 1 2 7 A8 A8 GND
3.3V 3 3 3 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 upper GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 A10 A10 GND 3.3V2_LED B10 B10 B5 B10 5 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 5 4 A11 A11 CAS1_QUANT1 GND B11
DU_SENS1 B12
B11
B12
B4
B3
B11
B12
4
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
Duplex sensor 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 6 3 A12 A12 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 lower GND 2 2 7 2 A13 A13 GND RCOVER_OPEN B13 B13 B2 B13 2 4 2 2
Conveying open/close switch
Vout 1 1 8 1 A14 A14 CAS1_QUANT2 GND B14 B14 B1 B14 1 5 1 1
Relay Relay
2 2 1 2 A15 A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 DU_CL1 A1 A1 A14 A1 3 3
Relay
Lift motor 1 1 1 2 1 A16 A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 2 2 Duplex clutch 1
+24V2 A2 A2 A13 A2 1 1
Relay
DUCL2 A3 A3 A12 A3 3 3
Lift motor 2 2 2 1 Relay 2 B1 B1 LIFTMOT2_OUT1 2 2 Duplex clutch 2

1 1 2 1 B2 B2 LIFTMOT2_OUT2 +24V2 A4 A4 A11 A4 1 1
MPFCL_REM A5 A5 A10 A5 3 3
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 B3 B3 CAS2_WSIZE 2 2 MP clutch
Paper width sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 7 B4 B4 GND +24V2_FUSE A6 A6 A9 A6 1 1
3.3V 3 3 3 6 B5 B5 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 2 upper GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 B6 B6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 4 B7 B7 CAS2_QUANT1
3.3V2_LED A7 A7 A8 A7 8 1 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 6 3 B8 B8 3.3V2_LED MPF_WSIZE A8 A8 A7 A8 7 2 2 2 Vout MP paper width sensor
Paper level sensor 2 lower GND 2 2 7 2 B9 B9 GND GND A9 A9 A6 A9 6 3 1 1 GND
Vout 1 1 8 1 B10 B10 CAS2_QUANT2
MPF_TRAY A10 A10 A5 A10 5 4 2 2
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 6 B11 B11 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A11 A11 A4 A11 4
Relay
5 1 1 MP tray sensor
Cassette sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 5 B12 B12 GND
LED_3.3V2 A12 A12 A3 A12 3 6 3 3 3.3V
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 B13 B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A13 A13 A2 A13 2 7 2 2 GND MP paper length sensor
Paper length sensor 2 GND 3 3 4 3 B14 B14 GND MPF_LSIZE A14 A14 A1 A14 1 8 1 1 Vout MP tray
CN-2 2 2 5 2 B15 B15 CAS2_LSIZE2
CN-1 1 1 6 1 B16 B16 CAS2_LSIZE1
YC8
MPFLIFT_OUT1 1 1 12 1 2 1
YC6 MPFLIFT_OUT2 2 2 11 2 1
Relay
2 MP lift motor
GND 3 3 1 5 A1 A1 GND
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 A2 A2 REGIST_SENS
MPFLIFT_HP 3 3 10 3 2 2
3.3V 1 1 3
Relay
3 A3 A3 3.3V2
GND 4 4 9 4 1 1 MP position switch
3 3 4 2 A4 A4 MIDCL N.C. 5 5 8 5
Middle clutch 2 2
N.C. 6 6 7 Relay 6
1 1 5 1 A5 A5 +24V2_F2
3.3V3 7 7 6 7 6 1 3 3 3.3V
1
2
12
11
GND
MPF_SET
8
9
8
9
5
4
8
9
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
MP paper sensor
3 10 Relay
3.3V2 10 10 3 10 3 4 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 4 9 A6 A6 3.3V2_LED MPF_FEED 11 11 2 11 2 5 2 Vout MP conveying sensor
Retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 5
6
8
7
A7 A7 TDRS1_SENS GND 12 12 1 12 1 6 1 GND
GND 1 1 A8 A8 GND
Relay
Retard sensor 2
3.3V
Vout
3
2
3
2
7
8
6
5
A9
A10
A9
A10
3.3V2_LED
TDRS2_SENS
Coveying cover
GND 1 1 9 4 A11 A11 GND
10 3 A12 A12 3.3V2

11 2 A13 A13 NC
Paper feed 12 1 A14 A14 GND

CASFEED_DIR
YC11
1 6 1 6 CW/CCW
A15 A15 3.3V2
and conveying A16 A16 NC CASFEED_LD
CASFEED_CLK
2
3
5
4
2
3
5
4
LD
CLOCK
A17 A17 GND
CASFEED_REM 4 3 4 3 START/STOP
Paper feed motor
Relay GND 5 2 5 2 GND
+24V2IL2 6 1 6 1 +24V
3.3V 3 3 1 15 B1 B1 3.3V2_LED
Conveying sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
14
13
B2
B3
B2
B3
GND
FEED_SENS
YC4
3.3V 3 3 4 12 B4 B4 3.3V2_LED CAS1_FEEDCL 1 1 3 3
Lift upper limit sensor 1 GND 2 2 5 11 B5 B5 GND 2 2 Paper feed clutch 1

Vout 1 1 6 10 B6 B6 LIFT1_LIMIT +24V2_F1 2 2 1 1
3.3V 3 3 7 9 B7 B7 3.3V2_LED VFEED_CL 3 3 3 3

2 2
Paper sensor 1 GND 2 2 8 Relay 8 B8 B8 GND
+24V2_F1 4 4 1 1
Vertical conveying clutch
Vout 1 1 9 7 B9 B9 CAS1_EMPTY
3.3V 3 3 10 6 B10 B10 3.3V2_LED CAS2_FEEDCL 5 5 3 3

Lift upper limit sensor 2 GND 2 2 11 5 B11 B11 GND
+24V2_F1 6 6
2
1
2
1
Paper feed clutch 2
Vout 1 1 12 4 B12 B12 LIFT2_LIMIT
3.3V 3 3 13 3 B13 B13 3.3V2_LED 2WAY_CL 7 7

Paper sensor 2 GND 2 2 14 2 B14 B14 GND
+24V2_F1 8 8 Paper feed drive
Vout 1 1 15 1 B15 B15 CAS2_EMPTY
B16 B16 EXFAN
24V 1 2 B17 B17 GND
Container fan motor GND 2
Relay
1
24V 1 2 1 2 1 2
Container cooling fan motor GND 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1
YC10
+3.3V2 5 5 1 12 1
YC9
1 3.3V2 FSRMOT_DIR 1 1 1 11 1 6 CW/CCW Fuser drive
LEDREF 4 4 2 11 2 2 REG_F_LED FSRMOT_LD 2 2 2 10 2 5 LD
FSRMOT_CLK 3 3 3 9 3 4 CLOCK
ID sensor front GND 3 3 3 10 3 3 GND
FSRMOT_REM 4 4 4 8 4 3 START/STOP Fuser motor
IDS 2 2 4 9 4 4 ID_SENS_F_S
IDP 1 1 5 8 5 5 ID_SENS_F_P GND 5 5 5 7 5 2 GND
+24V2IL2_FUSE 6 6 6 6 6 1 +24V
+3.3V2 5 5 6 7 6 6 3.3V2
LEDREF 4 4 7 Relay 6 7 7 REG_R_LED
Relay
ID sensor rear GND 3 3 8 5 8 8 GND
FSR_RLSMOT_OUT2 7 7 7 5 1 3
IDS 2 2 9 4 9 9 ID_SENS_R_S
IDP 1 1 10 3 10 10 ID_SENS_R_P
FSR_RLSMOT_OUT1
2 2 Fuser release motor
8 8 8 4 3 1
COM 1 2 11 2 11 11 +24V2_F2
Cleaning solenoid ACT 2 Relay 1 12 1 12 12 ID_SOL
EXFAN_LOCK 9 9 9 3 1 3 ALM
GND
EXFAN
10
11
10
11
10
11
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
24V
Eject fan motor
3 3 13 13 REG_CL
Registration clutch 2 2
1 1 14 14 +24V2_F2 Feed drive PWB (2/3)
9-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Drum/Developer relay PWB
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC10 YC2 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2_F1 1 1 +24V2_F1 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Cleaning lamp K ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2_F1 4 3 24V2_F1 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 DLP_TH or N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor K
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2_DRMBK 5 6 3.3V2_DRMBK 3.3V2_DRMBK 6 6 3 3 3.3V2_DRMBK
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2_DRMBK 8 7 3.3V2_DRMBK EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB K GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC6 Developer PWB K 3.3V2_DRMBK 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum unit K Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer K
YC14
GND 1
Developer fan motor K Relay 2 1 1 REM
24V 2 1 2 2 +24V2
3 3 N.C.
Image process cooling Drum-Developer

relay PWB (2/2)
9-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-3
(7) LVU PWB / High voltage PWB
YC2 YC3 YC1

▷ 1 1 +24V3_IL +24V4 1 1 1 1 +24V4
Right cover switch GND 2 2 2 2 GND
Feed drive PWB (3/3)
㛗 2 2 +24V3 GND 3 3 3 3 GND
+24V3_IL_F2_FET2 4 4 4 4 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2
Transfer high
voltage PWB Feed image PWB (4/6)
YC1
+24V4 1 1
+24V3 2 2
YC35 +24V3 3 3
YC1 1 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FET1 +24V2 4 4 YC6 TB1
PGND 13 13 1 13 2 2 GND +24V2 5 5 1 1 +24V2 LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
+24V2IL 12 12 2 12 GND 6 6 2 2 +24V2 㯮㯮
3 3 GND GND 7 7 3 3 +24V3 TB2 Inlet 1
4 4 GND GND 8 8 4 4 +24V3 NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
5 5 GND GND 9 9 5 5 GND ⓑ ⓑ
6 6 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 GND 10 10 6 6 GND
7 7 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 7 7 GND
8 8 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 8 8 GND
TB3
DH_LIVE 1 1 㟷 1 CH_LIVE
YC1 YC1
Relay 5V0 1 1 YC7 LIVE_IN 1 1 㯤 2 COM➃Ꮚ Power switch
GND 2 2 1 1 +24V4 LIVE_OUT 2 2 ⓑ 3 LIVE_OUT
GND 3 3 2 2 GND NEUTRAL_IN 3 3 㯤 5 COM➃Ꮚ
YC34 GND 4 4 3 3 GND NEUTRAL_OUT 4 4 ⓑ 6 NEUTRAL_OUT
CL_CNT 11 11 3 11 1 1 CL_CNT +24V4 5 5 4 4 +24V4
T1_Y_CNT 10 10 4 10 2 2 T1_Y_CNT +24V4 6 6 5 5 +24V4
T1_C_CNT 9 9 5 9 3 3 T1_C_CNT 6 6 GND
T1_M_CNT 8 8 6 8 4 4 T1_M_CNT
T1_I_SENS 7 7 7 7 5 5 T1_I_SENS
T2_OFF__REM 6 6 8 6 6 Relay 6 T2_OFF__REM
T1_K_CNT 5 5 9 5 7 7 T1_K_CNT
Relay
Triac
SP_CNT 4 4 10 4 8 8 SP_CNT
T2_CNT 3 3 11 3 9 9 T2_CNT
T_REM 2 2 12 2 10 10 T_REM
SGND 1 1 13 1 11 11 SGND
YC2 YC2
LIVE 1 1 1 1 LIVE
NEUTRAL 2 2 2 2 NEUTRAL IH PWB (1/2)
YC2
PGND 1 1
PGND 2 2
+24V2IL 3 3
+24V2IL 4 4
Fuse
Engine PWB (3/7) YC4
CH_LIVE 1 1 1 1
CH_LIVE 2 2 2 2 Cassette heater
NC 3 3
NC 4 4
CH_NEUTRAL 5 5
1 2
CH_NEUTRAL 6 6
PF drawer
1 3
(for Cassette heater)
Power supply PWB (2/2)
YC5
+24V2 1 1 1
GND 2 2 2 PF drawer (PF power supply㸧
YC33
18 18 NC
17 17 NC YC8
16 16 NC 12 12 5V0
YC1 15 15 NC 11 11 GND
M_K_I_SENS 1 1 14 14 M_K_I_SENS
DISCHARGE 2 2 13 13 DISCHARGE
M_AC_CLK 3 3 12 12 M_AC_CLK
B_SLV_AC_CLK 4 4 11 11 B_SLV_AC_CLK YC42
MK_AC_AC_CNT 5 5 10 10 MK_AC_AC_CNT 5V0 1 1 10 10 5V0
B_MAG_AC_CLK 6 6 9 9 B_MAG_AC_CLK GND 2 2 9 9 GND
M_K_DC_CNT 7 7 8 8 M_K_DC_CNT 5V0 3 3 8 8 5V0
B_K_SLV_DC_CNT 8 8 7 7 B_K_SLV_DC_CNT GND 4 4 7 7 GND
BK_SLV_AC_CNT 9 9 6 6 BK_SLV_AC_CNT 5V0 5 5 6 6 5V0
B_K_MAG_DC_CNT 10 10 5 5 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT GND 6 6 5 5 GND
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT 11 11 4 4 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT 5V0 7 7 4 4 5V0
HV_REM 12 12 3 3 HV_REM GND 8 8 3 3 GND
SGND 13 13 2 2 SGND 5V0 9 9 2 2 5V0
1 1 NC GND 10 10 1 1 GND
Main high ࣓࢖ࣥᇶᯈ

Main (1/3)
PWB (1/3)
voltage PWB
9-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(8) Fuser PWB
YC2
3.3V2_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor F
Fuser PWB FSR_ROLL_F 3 3 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 4 4 3 3 3.3V
YC22 YC1
GND 5 5 2 2 GND Fuser sensor
FSR_JAM_SENS 6 6 1 1 Vout
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
FUSER_SDA 2 2 2 2 2 2 EEP_SDA FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 2 1
FUSER_SCL 3 3 3 3 3 3 EEP_SCL GND 8 8 1 2 Thermistor 3 (Edge)
+3.3V2 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.3V2
FSR_TH_PRESS 5 5 5 5 5 5 FSR_TH_PRESS 3.3V2_LED 9 9 3 1 3 3 3.3V
FSR_PRESS_SENS 6 6 6 6 6 6 FSR_PRESS_SENS GND 10 10 2 2 2 2 GND Fuser release sensor
FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 7 7 7 7 FSR_TH_EDGE FSR_PRESS_SENS 11 11 1 3 1 1 Vout
FSR_JAM_SENS 8 8 8 8 8 8 FSR_JAM_SENS
FSR_ROLL_F_SENS 9 9 9 9 9 9 FSR_ROLL_F FSR_TH_PRESS 12 12 2 1
10 10 10 10 NC GND 13 13 1 2 Thermistor 4 (Press roller)
11 11
+3.3V2_TH_CUT 10 10 12 12 3 1
+3.3V2 11 11 13 Relay 13
2
1
Relay 2
3
Thermostat
GND 12 12 14 14 2 1
FSR_TH_MIDDLE 13 13 15 15 1
Relay
2 Thermistor 1 (Middle)
3.3V2_LED 14 14 16 16 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 17 17 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor R
FSR_ROLL_R_SENS 16 16 18 18 1 1 Vout
GND 17 17 19 19 2 1
FSR_TH_CENTRAL 18 18 20 20 1 Relay 2 Thermistor 2 (Center)
Feed image PWB (5/6) Fuser unit
Fuser IH coil
YC2
VS 1 1
YC3
COIL_COM 1 1
FSR1
Fuser charger needle 1 1 1 CHARGE
Fuser high voltage

IH PWB (2/2)
FUSER ZENER PWB (2/2)
YC4 YC29
GND 7 7 1 1 GND
3.3V2_FUSE 6 6 2 2 3.3V2_FUSE
IH_IGBT_CLK_HIGH 5 5 3 3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI
IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW 4 4 4 4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW
IH_ERROR 3 3 5 5 IH_ERROR
IH_TXD
IH_RXD
2
1
2
1
6
7
6
7
IH_TXD
IH_RXD Engine PWB (4/7)
YC5
GND 3 3 8 8 GND
IH_RELAY 2 2 9 9 IH_RELAY
+24V2 1 1 10 10 +24V2
9-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(9) Operation panel PWB / Main PWB
YC43
YC9 YC63 1 1 24V4
1 1 VGH GND 13 13 2 2 GND
2 2 VDD YC8 YC6 DP_WAKEUP_REQ 12 12 3 3 DP_WAKEUP_REQ
3 3 VGL GND 1 1 1 1 GND HLD_SCN_N(E_M) 11 11 4 4 HLD_SCN_N(E_M)
4 4 VCOM LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M) 10 10 5 5 ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M)
5 5 VCOM LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN E2C_SDIR(E_M) 9 9 6 6 E2C_SDIR(E_M)
6 6 AGND GND 4 4 4 4 GND E2C_IR(E_M) 8 8 7 7 E2C_IR(E_M)
7 7 AVDD TX0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N E2C_SBSY(E_M) 7 7 8 8 E2C_SBSY(E_M)
8 8 GND TX0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P C2E_SCLK(M_E) 6 6 9 9 C2E_SCLK(M_E)
9 9 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND C2E_SDAT(E_M) 5 5 10 10 C2E_SDAT(E_M)
10 10 V1 E2C_SDAT(E_M) 4 4 11 11 E2C_SDAT(E_M)
11 11 V2 HLD_ENG_N(M_E) 3 3 12 12 HLD_ENG_N(M_E)
12 12 V3 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E) 2 2 13 13 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E)
13 13 V4 JS_LED_REM 1 1 14 14 JS_LED_REM
14 14 V5 YC12
15 15 V6 2 2 B1 B1 POWER_ON
16 16 V7 Power switch 1 Relay 1 B2 B2 GND
17 17 HSD YC43 YC35
18 18 GND_LVDS GND 60 60 1 1 GND
19 19 RxIN3+ YC5 OS_SAD4P 59 59 2 2 OS_SAD4P
20 20 RxIN3- NC B15 B15 OS_SAD4N 58 58 3 3 OS_SAD4N
21 21 GND GND B14 B14 GND 57 57 4 4 GND
22 22 RxIN2+ JOB_LED B13 B13 B3 B3 JOB_LED OS_SACKP 56 56 5 5 OS_SACKP
23 23 RxIN2- GND B12 B12 B4 B4 GND OS_SACKN 55 55 6 6 OS_SACKN
24 24 GND GND B11 B11 B5 B5 GND GND 54 54 7 7 GND
25 25 RxIN1+ GND B10 B10 B6 B6 GND OS_SAD3P 53 53 8 8 OS_SAD3P
26 26 RxIN1- BEEP_POWERON B9 B9 B7 B7 BEEP_POWERON OS_SAD3N 52 52 9 9 OS_SAD3N
27 27 GND LED_MEMORY B8 B8 B8 B8 LED_MEMORY GND 51 51 10 10 GND
LCD 28 28 RxIN0+ LED_ATTENTION B7 B7 B9 B9 LED_ATTENTION OS_SAD2P 50 50 11 11 OS_SAD2P
29 29 RxIN0- LED_PROCESSING B6 B6 B10 B10 LED_PROCESSING OS_SAD2N 49 49 12 12 OS_SAD2N
30 30 GND AUDIO B5 B5 B11 B11 AUDIO GND 48 48 13 13 GND
31 31 RxINCK+ PNL_WKUP_REQ B4 B4 B12 B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ OS_SAD1P 47 47 14 14 OS_SAD1P
32 32 RxINCK- INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY B3 B3 B13 B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY OS_SAD1N 46 46 15 15 OS_SAD1N
33 33 GND NIRQ B2 B2 B14 B14 NIRQ GND 45 45 16 16 GND
34 34 VDD_LVDS I2C_SDA_NFC B1 B1 B15 B15 I2C_SDA_NFC SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P 44 44 17 17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P
35 35 V8 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N 43 43 18 18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N
36 36 V9 Relay Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P 42 42 19 19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P
37 37 V10 I2C_SCL_NFC A15 A15 A1 A1 PNL_WKUP_REQ SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N 41 41 20 20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N
38 38 V11 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY A14 A14 A2 A2 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P 40 40 21 21 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P
39 39 V12 FPRST A13 A13 A3 A3 FPRST SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N 39 39 22 22 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N
40 40 V13 P2C_SDAT A12 A12 A4 A4 P2C_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P 38 38 23 23 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P
41 41 V14 C2P_SDAT A11 A11 A5 A5 C2P_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N 37 37 24 24 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N
42 42 AGND P2C_SDIR A10 A10 A6 A6 P2C_SDIR SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P 36 36 25 25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P
43 43 AVDD P2C_SBSY A9 A9 A7 A7 P2C_SBSY SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N 35 35 26 26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N
44 44 VDD C2P_SCK A8 A8 A8 A8 C2P_SCK SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P 34 34 27 27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P
45 45 MODE DISPLAY_POWERON A7 A7 A9 A9 DISPLAY_POWERON SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N 33 33 28 28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N
46 46 GBR INT_ANYKEY A6 A6 A10 A10 INT_ANYKEY SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P 32 32 29 29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P
47 47 SHLR GND A5 A5 A11 A11 GND SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N 31 31 30 30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N
48 48 UPDN +5.0V6 A4 A4 A12 A12 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P 30 30 31 31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P
49 49 COM +5.0V6 A3 A3 A13 A13 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N 29 29 32 32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N
50 50 COM +5.0V6 A2 A2 A14 A14 +5.0V6 GND 28 28 33 33 GND
+5.0V6 A1 A1 A15 A15 +5.0V6 SAR_2_VCLK1_P 27 27 34 34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P
SAR_2_VCLK1_N 26 26 35 35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N
GND 25 25 36 36 GND
YC6 YC4
SAR_2_CH13_P 24 24 37 37 SAR_2_CH13_P
1 1 LED_A SPEAKER_N 2 2 1 2 -
Backlight 2 2 LED_C SPEAKER_P 1 1 2
Relay
1 㸩 Speaker SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
23
22
23
22
38
39
38
39
SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
SAR_2_CH12_P 21 21 40 40 SAR_2_CH12_P
SAR_2_CH12_N 20 20 41 41 SAR_2_CH12_N
GND 19 19 42 42 GND
YC7
SAR_2_CH11_P 18 18 43 43 SAR_2_CH11_P
TOP 1 1 YN_Bottom SAR_2_CH11_N 17 17 44 44 SAR_2_CH11_N
Touch panel LEFT
BOTTOM
2
3
2
3
XN_Left
YP_Top
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
16
15
16
15
45
46
45
46
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
RIGHT 4 4 XP_Right SAR_2_VCLK2_N 14 14 47 47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N
GND 13 13 48 48 GND
SAR_2_CH23_P 12 12 49 49 SAR_2_CH23_P
SAR_2_CH23_N 11 11 50 50 SAR_2_CH23_N
GND 10 10 51 51 GND
SAR_2_CH22_P 9 9 52 52 SAR_2_CH22_P
Operation panel sub PWB SAR_2_CH22_N 8 8 53 53 SAR_2_CH22_N
GND 7 7 54 54 GND
YC1 YC3
SAR_2_CH21_P 6 6 55 55 SAR_2_CH21_P
+5V6 1 1 1 1 +5V6 SAR_2_CH21_N 5 5 56 56 SAR_2_CH21_N
LED0 2 2 2 2 LED0 GND 4 4 57 57 GND
LED1 3 3 3 3 LED1 GND 3 3 58 58 GND
LED2 4 4 4 4 LED2 AC_DETECT 2 2 59 59 AC_DETECT
NC 5 5 5 5 NC GND 1 1 60 60 GND
INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N 6 6 6 6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N
ENERGYSAVERLED 7 7 7 7 ENERGYSAVERLED
ATTENTION 8 8 8 8 ATTENTION
MEMORY 9 9 9 9 MEMORY Engine PWB (5/7)
PROMISSING 10 10 10 10 PROMISSING
JOB_LED 11 11 11 11 JOB_LED Main PWB (2/3)
SCAN0 12 12 12 12 SCAN0
SCAN1 13 13 13 13 SCAN1
SCAN2 14 14 14 14 SCAN2 YC5 YC60 YC56
SCAN3 15 15 15 15 SCAN3 +5V7 1 6 1 1 +5V7 3.3V0 1
KEY0 16 16 16 16 KEY0 +5V7 2 5 2 2 +5V7 DBTXD 2
KEY1 17 17 17 17 KEY1 +5V7 3 4 3 3 +5V7 DBRXD 3
KEY2 18 18 18 18 KEY2 GND 4 3 4 4 GND DBCLK 4
KEY3 19 19 19 19 KEY3 GND 5 2 5 5 GND GND 5
GND 20 20 20 20 GND GND 6 1 6 6 GND
YC3 YC59
YC1 YC11 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS
VDDDX 5 5 1 1 VDDDX DATA- 2 2 2 2 DATA-
GND 4 4 2 2 GND DATA+ 3 3 3 3 DATA+ YC23
NFC PWB CLK
DATA
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
CLK
DATA
ID
GND
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
ID
GND
SPEED CONTROL 1 3 1 3 ALM
NIRQ 1 1 5 5 NIRQ
GND
5V2
2
3
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
5V
Controller fan motor
USB hub PWB

Operation panel main PWB
(1/2)
Controller box
YC1 YC10
KEY0 10 10 1 10 1 1 KEY0
KEY1 9 9 2 9 2 2 KEY1
KEY2 8 8 3 8 3 3 KEY2
Numeric Keypad KEY3 7 7 4 7 4 4 KEY3
SCAN4 6 6 5 6 5 5 SCAN4
Relay
(option) SCAN5
SCAN6
5
4
5
4
6
7
5
4
6
7
6
7
SCAN5
SCAN6
SCAN7 3 3 8 3 8 8 SCAN7
10key_detect 2 2 9 2 9 9 10key_detect
GND 1 1 10 1 10 10 GND
Operation unit
9-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-5 Wiring diagram (Options connection)

(1) Paper feeder connection
YC38 YC1
TEMP B11 B11 1 11 1 4 TEMP
GND B10 B10 2 10 2 3 GND
Temperature/humidity sensor
HUMID_OUT B9
HUMID_CLK B8
B9
B8
3
4
9
8
3
4
2
1
HUMID_OUT
HUMID_CLK
(outside machine㸧
LVU_PWB_FAN_REM B7 B7 5 7 1 1 24V
GND
LVU_PWB_FAN_ALM
B6
B5
B6
B5
6
7 Relay
6
5
2
3
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Power source fan motor
SUB_CLK B4 B4 8 4
SUB_SDA B3 B3 9 3
GND B2 B2 10 2
3.3V0 B1 B1 11 1
1 1
2 2
Relay 3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
PF_VER_SENS A11 A11 1 11 10 10 1 PF_VER_SENS
3.3V3_FUSE A10 A10 2 10 11 11 2 3.3V3_FUSE
GND A9 A9 3 9 12 12 3 GND
PF_SEL1 A8 A8 4 8 13 13 4 PF_SEL1
PF_SEL2 A7 A7 5 7 14 Relay 14 5 PF_SEL2
PF_CLK A6 A6 6 Relay 6 15 15 6 PF_CLK
PF_RDY A5 A5 16 16 7 PF_RDY
PF_SDI A4 A4 8 4 17 17 8 PF_SDO
PF_SDO A3 A3 9 3 18 18 9 PF_SDI
PF_PAUSE A2 A2 10 2 19 19 10 PF_PAUSE
PF_CAS_OPEN A1 A1 11 1 20 20 11 PF_CAS_OPEN PF PWB
1 1 1 +24V2 4 4 1 +24V2
LVU YC5 2 2 2 GND 5 5 2 GND
Engine PWB (6/7)

3 3
2 AC_LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
LVU YC4 PF switch

6 AC_NEUTRAL 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
PF switch
PF interlock switch
9-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Conveying unit / Document finisher connection
YC3
3.3V 3 3 1 1 +3.3V3
BR job separator sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
JS_SENS_AK
3.3V 3 3 4 4 3.3V2
BR conveying sensor 1 GND 2 2 5 5 GND BR PWB
Vout 1 1 6 6 BRG_JAM1
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V2
BR conveying sensor 2 GND 2 2 8 8 GND
Vout 1 1 9 9 BRG_JAM2
2 2 10 10 GND YC3 YC30

BR cover sensor 1 1 11 11 BRG_OPEN +3.3V3 13 13 1 1 20 20 +3.3V3
JS_SENS_AK 12 12 2 2 19 19 JS_SENS_AK
BRG_MOT_PD 11 11 3 3 18 18 BRG_MOT_PD
BRG_MOT_FAN_REM 10 10 4 4 17 17 BRG_MOT_FAN_REM
BRG_MOT_CLK 9 9 5 5 16 16 BRG_MOT_CLK
YC1 BRG_SET 8 8 6 6 15 15 BRG_SET
A/ 1 4 1 1 BRG_MOT_1B BRG_FEED_SENS1 7 7 7 7 14 14 BRG_FEED_SENS1
A 2 3 2 2 BRG_MOT_1A BRG_FEED_SENS2 6 6 8 8 13 13 BRG_FEED_SENS2
BR conveying motor B/ 3 2 3 3 BRG_MOT_2B BRG_OPEN 5 5 9 9 12 12 BRG_OPEN
B 4 1 4 4 BRG_MOT_2A GND 4 4 10 10 11 11 GND
GND 3 3 11 11 10 10 GND
+3.3V2 2 2 12 12 9 9 +3.3V2
+24V2 1 1 13 13 8 8 +24V2
5 5 FAN_REM
6 6 +24V2
Relay
A1 A1 14 14 7 7 DF_CLK(ENG to DF)
15 15 6 6 DF_DET(DF to ENG)
16 16 5 5 DF_SYNC(DF to ENG)
7 1 7 1 1 17 17 4 4 DF_SDI(DF to ENG)
6 2 6 2 2 A2 A2 18 18 3 3 DF_SDO(ENG to DF)
5 3 5 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 A3 A3 19 19 2 2 DF_SEL(ENG to DF)
Relay A4 A4
3 5 3 5 5 A5 A5 20 20 1 1 DF_RDY(DF to ENG)
2 6 2 6 6 A6 A6
1 7 1 7 7 A7 A7
YC25
DF PWB 4 4 4
1
2
Relay
1
2
A8
A9
A8
A9
5
4
5
4
1
2
1
2
+24V2
+24V2
3 3 3 A10 A10 3 3
B1 B1 2 2 3 3 GND
1K/4K B2
B3
B2
B3
1 1 4 4 GND
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6
3 3
B7
B8
B7
B8
2 2 2 4 4 B9 B9
1 1 1 B10 B10
Bridge unit (AK)
Document finisher
9-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Other Options connection
YC22
1 GND YC23
2 DC1_SET
+5V0_FUSE A1
3 DC1_COUNT
4 +24V2
+5V0_FUSE A2
+5V0_FUSE A3 USB hub PWB (2/2)
+5V0_FUSE A4
+5V0_FUSE A5
+5V0_FUSE A6 YC1
+5V0_FUSE A7
+5V0_FUSE A8 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
MK2_ENBL A9 DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
+24V2 A10 DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA + IC CARD
MK2_RKEY7 B1 GND 4 4 4 GND
YC21 MK2_RKEY6 B2
1 1 1 1 +24V2 MK2_RKEY5 B3
2 2 2 2 SGND MK2_RKEY4 B4
3 3 3 3 SGND MK2_RKEY3 B5
4 4 4 4 MCV_ENBL MK2_RKEY2 B6
5 5 5 5 FGND MK2_RKEY1 B7
Coin vendor 6 6 6 6 MCV_FED_COUNT MK2_RKEY0 B8
YC2
Reley GND B9 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
㸦option㸧 7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
MCV_EJ_COUNT
MCV_COPY_SIG MK2_COUNT B10 DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
KEY BOARD
DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA +
9 9 9 9 MCV_UART_TXD
GND 4 4 4 GND
10 10 10 10 SGND
11 11 11 11 MCV_UART_RXD
12 12 12 12 SGND
Standard in some markets and some models YC4

VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA + USB memory
Engine PWB (7/7) GND 4 4 4 GND
YC4 YC4
GND 1 1 41 41 GND
SAR_1_CH23_N 2 2 40 40 SAR_1_CH23_N
SAR_1_CH23_P 3 3 39 39 SAR_1_CH23_P
GND 4 4 38 38 GND
SAR_1_CH22_N 5 5 37 37 SAR_1_CH22_N
SAR_1_CH22_P 6 6 36 36 SAR_1_CH22_P
GND 7 7 35 35 GND
SAR_1_CH21_N 8 8 34 34 SAR_1_CH21_N
SAR_1_CH21_P 9 9 33 33 SAR_1_CH21_P
GND 10 10 32 32 GND
SAR_1_VCLK2_N 11 11 31 31 SAR_1_VCLK2_N YC58 YC2
SAR_1_VCLK2_P 12 12 30 30 SAR_1_VCLK2_P 20 USB_- GND 1 1 1 1 GND
GND 13 13 29 29 GND 19 USB_+ TXP 2 2 2 2 A+
SAR_1_CH13_N 14 14 28 28 SAR_1_CH13_N 18 DETECT TXN 3 3 3 3 A-
SAR_1_CH13_P 15 15 27 27 SAR_1_CH13_P 17 RESET GND 4 4 4 4 GND
GND 16 16 26 26 GND 16 GND RXN 5 5 5 5 B-
SAR_1_CH12_N 17 17 25 25 SAR_1_CH12_N 15 HOSTWAKE RXP 6 6 6 6 B+
SAR_1_CH12_P 18 18 24 24 SAR_1_CH12_P 14 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND
GND 19 19 23 23 GND 13 PAVDO
SAR_1_CH11_N 20 20 22 22 SAR_1_CH11_N 12 GND
SAR_1_CH11_P 21 21 21 21 SAR_1_CH11_P 11 VBAT
GND 22 22 20 20 GND WiFi PWB 10 VIO
SAR_1_VCLK1_N 23 23 19 19 SAR_1_VCLK1_N 9 GND 1 1 3.3V
SAR_1_VCLK1_P 24 24 18 18 SAR_1_VCLK1_P 8 SD_D0 2 2 3.3V KUIO relay PWB
GND 25 25 17 17 GND 7 SD_D1 3 3 3.3V
SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 26 26 16 16 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 6 GND 4 4 GND YC2
SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 27 27 15 15 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 5 SD_CLK 5 5 GND VBUS1 20 20 VBUS
SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 28 28 14 14 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 4 GND YC32 6 6 GND USB_DN1 19 19 USB_DN
SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 29 29 13 13 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 3 SD_CMD GND 3 3 7 7 5V USB_DP1 18 18 USB_DP
SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 30 30 12 12 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 2 SD_D2 +5V_HDD 2 2 8 8 5V GND 17 17 GND
SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 31 31 11 11 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 1 SD_D3 GND 1 1 9 9 5V NC 16 16 NC
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 32 32 10 10 SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 10 10 GND NC 15 15 NC
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P
33
34
33
34
9
8
9
8
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P
Standard in some 11
12
11
12
ACT
GND
GND
NC
14
13
14
13
GND
NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N 35 35 7 7 SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N markets and some 13 13 12V NC 12 12 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P 36 36 6 6 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P 14 14 12V GND 11 11 GND
SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N 37 37 5 5 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N models 15 15 12V NC 10 10 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P 38 38 4 4 SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P Main PWB (3/3) NC 9 9 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P
39
40
39
40
3
2
3
2
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P HDD NC
AUDIO1
8
7
8
7
NC
AUDIO
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N 41 41 1 1 SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
(Optional in some markets GND 5 5 GND
VDD5_CUT1 4 4 VDD5_CUT
YC2 YC33
and some models㸧 RESETN1 3 3 RESETN
GND 2 2 GND
+5V 1 1 10 10 5V VDD5 1 1 VDD5
+5V 2 2 9 9 5V
GND 3 3 8 8 SGND
GND 4 4 7 7 SGND
SDI 5 5 6 6 SDI YC8 YC3
SDICLK
GND
6
7
6
7
5
4
5
4
SDICLK
SGND
VBUS1
USB_DN1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
VBUS1
USB_DN1
KUIO PWB
SDO 8 8 3 3 SDO USB_DP1 3 3 3 3 USB_DP1
SDOCLK 9 9 2 2 SDOCLK GND 4 4 4 4 GND YC1
GND 10 10 1 1 SGND AUDIO1 5 5 5 5 AUDIO1 VBUS0 20 20 VBUS
N.C. 11 11 WAKEUP1 6 6 6 6 WAKEUP1 USB_DN0 19 19 USB_DN
RESET1 7 7 7 7 RESET1 USB_DP0 18 18 USB_DP
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 17 17 GND
YC5 VBUS0 9 9 9 9 VBUS0 NC 16 16 NC
1 16 LockPin(2) USB_DN0 10 10 10 10 USB_DN0 NC 15 15 NC
2 15 LockPin(1) USB_DP0 11 11 11 11 USB_DP0 GND 14 14 GND
FIERY relay PWB 3 14 GRLED_K2 GND 12 12 12 12 GND NC 13 13 NC
4 13 GRLED_A2 AUDIO0 13 13 13 13 AUDIO0 NC 12 12 NC
5 12 GRLED_K1 WAKEUP0 14 14 14 14 WAKEUP0 GND 11 11 GND
6 11 GRLED_A1 RESET 15 15 15 15 RESET0 NC 10 10 NC
YC3 7 10 TD4- NC 9 9 NC
CH1_RX0N 1 1 8 9 TD4+ NC 8 8 NC
CH1_RX0P 2 2 9 8 TD3- AUDIO0 7 7 AUDIO
GND 3 3 10 7 TD3+ YC9 YC4 WAKEUP0 6 6 WAKEUP
N.C. 4 4 11 6 CT2 GND 1 6 1 6 GND GND 5 5 GND
N.C. 5 5 Fiery (120V/220-240V model) 12 5 CT1 5V_CUT0 2 5 2 5 5V_CUT0 VDD5_CUT0 4 4 VDD5_CUT
MFP_READYN 6 6 13 4 TD2- GND 3 4 3 4 GND RESETN0 3 3 RESETN
FIERY_READYN 7 7 14 3 TD2+ 5V 4 3 4 3 5V GND 2 2 GND
N.C. 8 8 15 2 TD1- GND 5 2 5 2 GND VDD5 1 1 VDD5
POWER_CONTROLLN 9 9 16 1 TD1+ 5V_CUT1 6 1 6 1 5V_CUT1
N.C. 10 10
GND 11 11
N.C. 12 12
N.C. 13 13
CH1_LOCKN 14 14
GND 15 15
CH1_HTPDN
RESERVE_INN
16
17
16
17
FIERY control PWB
RESERVE_OUTN 18 18
GND 19 19
N.C. 20 20
N.C. 21 21
GND 22 22
UART_TXD_EFI 23 23
UART_RXD_EFI 24 24
9-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-6 Wiring diagram (Options)

(1) Document processor (DP-7100) wiring diagram
YC3 YC6
14 3 1 1 ENG_TMG 3.3V_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
12
2
5
15
2
3
2
3
ENG_RDY
ENG_SEL
GND
LNG_SW
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP original length sensor
16 1 4 4 ENG_CLK
15 2 5 5 ENG_SI 3.3V 4 4 3 3 3.3V
1
13
16
4
6
7
6
7
ENG_SO
DP_OPEN
HSIZE
GND
5
6
5
6
2
1
2
1
Vout
GND
DP original width sensor
11 6 8 8 EN_FD_SW
Engine PWB 10
9
Relay 7
8
9
10
9
10
EN_SET_SW
3.3V3
8 9 11 11 GND
7 10 12 12 GND
6
5
11
12
13
14
13
14
GND
24V
DP PWB
4 13 15 15 24V
3 14 16 16 24V
YC9
FMOT_CH_A 1 1 1 1 CH_A
FMOT_CH_B 2 2 2 2 CH_B
3.3V 3 3 3 3 3.3V
FMOT_DIR 4 4 4 4 DIR
FMOT_PWM 5 5 5 5 PWM DP feed motor
FMOT_BRAKE 6 6 6 6 BRAKE
GND 7 7 7 7 GND
R24V 8 8 8 8 24V
YC7
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V_LED CMOT_CH_A 9 9 1 1 CH_A
DP registration sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
RGST_SW
CMOT_CH_B
3.3V
10
11
10
11
2
3
2
3
CH_B
3.3V
CMOT_DIR 12 12 4 4 DIR
GND 3 3 4 4 GND CMOT_PWM 13 13 5 5 PWM DP conveying motor
DP timing sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
5
6
5
6
CCD_TMG_SW
3.3V
CMOT_BRAKE
GND
14
15
14
15
6
7
6
7
BRAKE
GND
R24V 16 16 8 8 24V
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V_LED
DP open/close sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
8
9
8
9
GND
DP_OPEN
3.3V 3 3 10 10 3.3V_LED
DP lift lower limit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
11
12
11
12
GND
LF_DNSW
YC11
LIFT_A1 1 1 4 1 A
LIFT_B1 2 2 3 2 B
LIFT_A3 3 3 2 3 A/ DP lift motor
LIFT_B3 4 4 1 4 B/
RMOT_CH_A 5 5 1 1 CH_A
YC17 RMOT_CH_B 6 6 2 2 CH_B
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V_LED 3.3V 7 7 3 3 3.3V
DP exit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
EXIT_SW
RMOT_DIR
RMOT_PWM
8
9
8
9
4
5
4
5
DIR
PWM DP reversing motor
RMOT_BRAKE 10 10 6 6 BRAKE
GND 11 11 7 7 GND
R24V 12 12 8 8 24V
YC8
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DP original sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
SET_SW
3.3V YC16
LED_REM 1 1 12 1 1 1 LED_REM
24V 2 2 11 2 2 2 24V DP LED PWB
3.3V_LED 3 3 10 3 3 3 3.3V
GND
SFT_HP_SW
4
5
4
5
9
8
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP feedshift sensor
3.3V_LED 6 6 7 6 3 3 3.3V
Relay
YC4
GND
LF_UP_SW
7
8
7
8
6
5
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP lift upper limit sensor
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DP feed sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
FD_SW
3.3V SFT_A1
YC10
1 1 4 9 4 1 A
4 4 NC SFT_B1 2 2 3 10 3 2 B
SFT_A3 3 3 2 11 2 3 A/ DP feedshift motor
SFT_B3 4 4 1 12 1 4 B/
YC5
1 1 1 1 24V
DP top cover switch 2 2 GND
2 2 3 3 R24V
㸦Interlock switch㸧
9-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) Document processor (DP-7110) wiring diagram

Y C 1ࠉ
14 3 1 1 ENG_TMG Y C 10ࠉ YC 1 YC 2
12 5 2 2 ENG_RDY CIS_TMG_SW 1 1 14 14 CIS_TMG_SW GND A1 1 1 A1 GND
2 15 3 3 ENG_SEL SHD_CLK 2 2 13 13 CPU_SCLK CK1 A2 2 2 A2 CK
16 1 4 4 ENG_CLK SHD_SO 3 3 12 12 CPU_SI GND A3 3 3 A3 GND
15 2 5 5 ENG_SI SHD_SEL 4 4 11 11 CPU_SEL ST1 A4 4 4 A4 SP
1 16 6 6 ENG_SO SHD_PAGEST 5 5 10 10 CPU_PAGEST GND A5 5 5 A5 GND
13 4 7 7 DP_OPEN RESETN 6 6 9 9 RESETN MODE A6 6 6 A6 MODE
11 Relay 6 8 8 EN_FD_SW SHD_OVMON 7 7 8 8 CPU_OVM
Engine PWB 10 7 9 9 EN_SET_SW SHD_SI 8 8 7 7 CPU_SO
GND
VREF
A7 7 7 A7 GND
VREF
A8 8 8 A8
9 8 10 10 3.3V3 SHD_RDY 9 9 6 6 CPU_SRDY GND A9 9 9 A9 GND
8 9 11 11 GND NC 10 10 5 5 NC GND A10 10 10 A10 GND
7 10 12 12 GND 24V 11 11 4 4 24V GND A11 11 11 A11 GND
6 11 13 13 GND 24V 12 12 3 3 24V LED4R_C A12 12 12 A12 LED4_R
5 12 14 14 24V GND 13 13 2 2 GND LED4G_C A13 13 13 A13 LED4_G
4 13 15 15 24V GND 14 14 1 1 GND LED4B_C A14 14 14 A14 LED4_B
3 14 16 16 24V LED4_A A15 15 15 A15 VLED4
LED1_A A16 16 16 A16 VLED1
DP PWB LED1R_C A17 17 17 A17 LED1_R
YC 4 YC 2 YC 3 LED1G_C A18 18 18 A18 LED1_G
Y C 2ࠉ GND 1
ANODE 3 3 A1 A1 ANODE 1 1 1 GND LED1B_C A19 19 19 A19 LED1_B
DP lift upper limit 3.3V 1 1 4 4 3.3V HTPDN 2
GND 2 2 2 HTPDN LED2R_C A20 20 20 A20 LED2_R
2 2 A2 A2 GND GND 2 2 3 3 GND DP original length
sensor LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN LED2G_C A21 21 21 A21 LED2_G
LF_UPSW 1 1 A3 A3 LF_UPSW LNG_SW 3 3 2 2 LNG_SW
A4 A4 GND LNG_CLK 4 4 1 1 LNG_CLK
sensor DP IF PWB GND 4 4 4 4 GND LED2B_C A22 22 22 A22 LED2_B
Rx0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N LED2_A A23 23 23 A23 VLED2
GND 3 3 A5 A5 FD_SW
Rx0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P LED3_A A24 24 24 A24 VLED3
DP feed sensor FD_SW 2 2 A6 A6 3.3V
GND 7 7 7 7 GND
A7 A7 GND LED3R_C A25 25 25 A25 LED3_R
3.3V 1 1 GND 5 5 3 3 GND
LED3G_C A26 26 26 A26 LED3_G
A8 A8 RGST_SW(V) SET_SW 6 6 2 2 SET_SW DP original sensor
A9 A9 3.3V LED3B_C A27 27 27 A27 LED3_B
3.3V 7 7 1 1 3.3V
ANODE GND A28 28 28 A28 GND
3 3 1 9 A10 A10 ANODE
GND A29 29 29 A29 GND
DP exit sensor GND 2 2 2 Relay 8 A11 A11 GND
EXIT_SW(M) 1 1 3 7 A12 A12 EXIT_SW(M) ANODE 8 8 ANODE GND A30 30 30 A30 GND
3 3
A13 A13 NC GND 9 9 2 2 GND DP lift lower limit GND A31 31 31 A31 GND
LF_DNSW 10 10 1 1 LF_DNSW sensor GND A32 32 32 A32 GND
GND A33 33 33 A33 GND
YC 4 GND A34 34 34 A34 GND
B1 B1 NC
3.3V 1 1 3 3 3.3V GND A35 35 35 A35 GND
LED_PW 2 2 1 2 B2 B2 LED_PW WIDE3 11 11 4 4 WIDE3 DP backside timing
DPLED PWB LED_REM 1 1 2
Relay
1 B3 B3 LED_REM WIDE2 12 12 3 3 WIDE2 DP original width sensor
CIS_TMG_SW
GND
2 2 2 2 CIS_TMG_SW GND A36 36 36 A36 GND
3 3 1 1 GND 3.3V_CIS A37 37 37 A37 3.3V
B4 B4 GND GND 13 13 2 2 GND
WIDE1 14 14
sensor 3.3V_CIS A38 38 38 A38 3.3V
1 1 WIDE1
3.3V_CIS A39 39 39 A39 3.3V
GND 3 3 4 6 B5 B5 GND
GND A40 40 40 A40 GND
DP timing sensor CCD_TMG_SW 2 2 5 Relay 5 B6 B6 CCD_TMG_SW
GND B1 41 41 B1 GND
3.3V 1 1 6 4 B7 B7 3.3V
GND B2 42 42 B2 GND
YC 5 2 2 NC OS_1 B3 43 43 B3 OS1
ANODE 3 3 7 3 B8 B8 ANODE
DP open/close FEED3_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/ GND B4 44 44 B4 GND
GND 2 2 8 Relay 2 B9 B9 GND FEED1_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B OS2 OS2
sensor DP_OPEN 1 1 9 1 B10 B10 DP_OPEN FEED2_OUT1A 3 A
DP feed motor B5 45 45 B5
3 1 1 GND B6 46 46 B6 GND
B11 B11 ANODE FEED4_OUT1B 4 A/
4 3 3 OS3 B7 47 47 B7 OS3
B12 B12 GND NC
5 5 GND B8 48 48 B8 GND
B13 B13 SKEW_SW
OS4 B9 49 49 B9 OS4
GND B10 50 50 B10 GND
2 2 NC OS5 B11 51 51 B11 OS5
RGST3_OUT2B 5 5 6 6 B/ GND B12 52 52 B12 GND
RGST1_OUT2A 6 6 4 4 B
DP registration motor OS6 B13 53 53 B13 OS6
RGST2_OUT1A 7 7 1 1 A
RGST4_OUT1B GND B14 54 54 B14 GND
8 8 3 3 A/
Y C 6ࠉ 5 5 NC OS7 B15 55 55 B15 OS7
COM 1 1 1 24V GND B16 56 56 B16 GND
DP top cover switch NO 2 2 2 NC OS8 B17 57 57 B17 OS8
3 3 R24V LIFT3_OUT2B 9 9 4 4 B3 GND B18 58 58 B18 GND
(Interlock switch㸧 LIFT1_OUT2A 10 10 2 2 B1 OS9 B19 59 59 B19 OS9
LIFT2_OUT1A 11 11 1 1 A1 DP lift motor GND B20 60 60 B20 GND
Y C 7ࠉ LIFT4_OUT1B 12 12 3 3 A3 OS10 B21 61 61 B21 OS10
2 1 1 1 R24V GND B22 62 62 B22 GND
DP drive fan motor 1
Relay
2 2 2 FAN_REM1 OS11 B23 63 63 B23 OS11
GND B24 64 64 B24 GND
Y C 14 2 2 NC OS12 B25 65 65 B25 OS12
Y C 8ࠉ
CNVY4_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/ GND B26 66 66 B26 GND
2 Relay 1 1 1 R24V
DP CIS fan motor 1 2 2 2 FAN_REM2
CNVY3_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B
DP conveying motor OS13 B27 67 67 B27 OS13
CNVY2_OUT1B 3 3 3 3 A/ GND B28 68 68 B28 GND
CNVY1_OUT1A 4 4 1 1 A OS14 B29 69 69 B29 OS14
5 5 NC GND B30 70 70 B30 GND
Y C 9ࠉ
OS15 B31 71 71 B31 OS15
1 R24V
GND B32 72 72 B32 GND
2 PRS_SOL_PULL
1 1 NC OS16 B33 73 73 B33 OS16
3 PRS_SOL_RTN
RVRS4_OUT1B 5 5 2 2 A/ GND B34 74 74 B34 GND
4 R24V OS17
RVRS2_OUT1A 6 6 4 4 A B35 75 75 B35 OS17
5 JNC_SOL_PULL DP exit motor GND
RVRS1_OUT2A 7 7 5 5 B B36 76 76 B36 GND
6 JNC_SOL_KEEP
RVRS3_OUT2B 8 8 3 3 B/ OS18 B37 77 77 B37 OS18
6 6 NC GND B38 78 78 B38 GND
GND B39 79 79 B39 GND
GND B40 80 80 B40 GND
Y C 11ࠉ
SCLK 1
SDA 2 DPSHD PWB DPCIS
1Piece_SIG 3
2Piece_SIG 4
GND 5
3.3V 6
GND 7
24V 8
9-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) Paper feeder (PF-7100) wiring diagram
PF PWB
YC9 YC3
3 3 1 10 1 1 VER_CL1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 12 1 3 3 3.3V
PF conveying clutch 1 2
1
2
1 2 9 2 2 24V1
GND
CAS1_EMPTY
2
3
2
3
11
10
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper sensor 1
3 3 3 8 3 3 FEED_CL1 A 9 4 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 1 2
1
2
1 4 7 4 4 24V1
B 8 5 2 2 GND PF paper sensor 2
C 7 6 1 1 Vout
Relay
3 3 5 6 5 5 VER_CL2 D 6 7 3 3 3.3V
PF conveying clutch 2 2
1
2
1 6
Relay
5 6 6 24V1
E 5 8 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 1
F 4 9 1 1 GND
3 3 7 4 7 7 FEED_CL2 G 3 10 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 2 2
1
2
1 8 3 8 8 24V1
H 2 11 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 2
I 1 12 1 1 GND
9 2 9 9 HDR_CL2
10 1 10 10 24V1
3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 3 3 3 3.3V
YC4
GND
CAS1_QUANT1
5
6
5
6
5
4
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF upper paper gauge sensor 1
3.3V 3 3 1 20 1 1 3.3V4_LED
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
19
18
2
3
2 GND
3 ULIM_SW_1
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 6 3 3 3.3V
GND 8 8 2 7 2 2 GND PF lower paper gauge sensor 1
CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 1 8 1 1 Vout
3.3V 3 3 1 6 4 17 4 4 3.3V4_LED
GND 10 10 Relay
PF conveying sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
16
15
5
6
5
6
GND
VER_SENS_1
CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 6 1 1
4 Relay 3
GND 12 12
5 2
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 2 5 2 2 PF Paper length switch 1
GND 14 14 3 Relay 4 3 3
6 1 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 4 3 4 4
2 2 7 14 7 7 COVER_OPEN
PF right cover sensor 1 1 8 13 8 8 GND
GND
CAS1_SET_SW
16
17
16
17
5
6
2
1
2
1
2
1 PF cassette insertion switch 1
8
7
1
2
2
1
2
1 PF paper width sensor 1
Relay
J 2 1
3.3V 3 3 9 12 9 9 3.3V5_LED 1
Relay 2
K
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
11
10
10
11
10
11
GND
ULIM_SW_2
YC5
3.3V5_LED 1 1 A
GND 2 2 B
CAS2_EMPTY 3 3 C
3.3V 3 3 12 9 12 12 3.3V5_LED
PF conveying sensor 2 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
13
14
8
7
13
14
13
14
GND
VER_SENS_2
3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 3 3 3 3.3V
GND 5 5 5 4 2 2 GND
CAS2_QUANT1 6 6 4 5 1 1 Vout PF upper paper gauge sensor 2
15 6 15 15 3.3V4
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 6 3 3 3.3V
16 5 16 16 CAS1_WSIZE
17 4 17 17 GND
GND
CAS2_QUANT2
8
9
8
9
2
1
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF lower paper gauge sensor 2
18 3 18 18 3.3V5
GND 10 10
19 2 19 19 CAS2_WSIZE CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 6 1 1
Relay
20 1 20 20 GND
GND 12 12
J
CAS2_SIZE2_SENS
GND
13
14
13
14
2
3
5
4
2
3
2
3
PF paper length switch 2
Relay
K CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 4 3 4 4
L
GND 16 16 5 2 2 2 8 1 2 2
M CAS2_SET_SW 17 17 6 1 1 1 PF cassette insertion switch 2 7 2 1 1 PF paper width sensor 2
NC 18 18
L 2 1
1 Relay 2
M
YC6
2 2 1 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET
PF lift motor 1 1 1 2 Relay 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR
2 2 1 2 3 3 L_MOT2_RET 1 1 NC
PF lift motor 2 1 1 2 Relay 1 4 4 L_MOT2_DR 2 2 NC
3 3 NC
4 4 NC
5 5 NC
6 6 NC
YC8 7 7 NC
+24V 1 6 1 6 1 1 +24V 8 8 NC
GND 2 5 2 5 2 2 GND YC12 9 9 NC
START/STOP 3 4 3 4 3 3 START/STOP VER_SENS 1 1 10 10 VER_SENS
PF feed motor CLOCK 4 3 4 Relay 3 4 4 CLOCK 3.3V3 2 2 11 11 3.3V3
LD 5 2 5 2 5 5 LD GND 3 3 12 12 GND
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 13 13 PF_CAS1_SEL
PF_CAS2_SEL 5 5 14 14 PF_CAS2_SEL
EN_CLK 6 6 15 15 EH_CLK
EN_RDY 7 7 16 Relay 16 EH_RDY
EN_SDO
EN_SDI
8
9
8
9
17
18
17
18
EH_SDO
EH_SDI Engine PWB
16 EN_PAU 10 10 19 19 PF_PAU
15 PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 20 20 PF_CAS_OPEN
14
13 YC11
9 24V1 1 1 4 4 24V2
8 YC13 GND 2 2 5 5 GND
7 1 1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
6 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
2 3 3 AN_PF_SDI 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
PF main PWB 4 4 4 AN_PF_SDO
Relay 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
1 6 6 AN_PF_CLK 1G 1G AC_LIVE
(Side feeder) 3 7 7 PF_CAS2_SEL
11 8 8 GND 3 3 FG
10 9 9 3.3V3
12 10 10 AN_VER_SENS
1 1
4 YC10 Outlet
3 1 1 GND
2 2
2 2 2 GND
1 3 3 24V2
AC_LIVE 1 1
PF cassette heater AC_NEUTRAL 2 2
YC14
D 1 1 3.3V4_LED
E 2 2 RETARD_SENS_1
F 3 3 GND
G 4 4 3.3V4_LED
H 5 5 RETARD_SENS_2
I 6 6 GND
9-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) Large capacity feeder (PF-7110) wiring diagram
PF main PWB
YC9 YC3
3 3 1 1 VER_CL1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 6 1 A
PF vertical conveying clutch 2
1
2
1 2 2 24V1
GND 2 2 5 2 B
CAS1_EMPTY 3 3 4 3 C
3 3 3 3 FEED_CL1 3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 1 3 3 3.3V

PF feed right clutch 1 2 2 GND 5 5 5 2 2 2 GND
PF upper paper gauge
1 1 4 4 24V1 CAS1_QUANT1 6 6 4 3 1 1 Vout sensor 1
Relay
3 3 5 5 VER_CL2 3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 4 3 3 3.3V
PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 2 2 GND 8 8 2 5 2 2 GND
PF lower paper gauge
1 1 6 6 24V1 CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 1 6 1 1 Vout sensor 1
3 3 7 7 FEED_CL2
PF feed left clutch 2 2
1
2
1 8 8 24V1 Relay
3 3 9 9 HDR_CL2 GND 10 10 2 2
PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 2 2 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 1 PF cassette sensor 1
1 1 10 10 24V1 GND 12 12
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13
GND 14 14
YC4 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15
3.3V 3 3 1 17 1 1 3.3V4_LED GND 16
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
16
15
2
3
2 GND
3 ULIM_SW_1
CAS1_WSIZE 17
YC5
PF vertical conveying 3.3V 3 3 1 6 4 14 4 4 3.3V4_LED 3.3V5_LED 1 1 3 4 9 1 3 3 3.3V
sensor
GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
13
12
5
6
5
6
GND
VER_SENS_1
GND
CAS2_EMPTY
2
3
2
3
2
1
5
6
8
7
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper sensor 2
4 Relay 3
5 2 3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 1 3 3 3.3V
6 1 GND 5 5 5 2 2 2 GND
PF upper paper gauge
CAS2_QUANT1 6 6 4 3 1 1 Vout sensor 2 J 6 4 3 3 3.3V
2 2 7 11 7 7 COVER_OPEN
Relay K 5 5 2 2 GND PF lift upper limit sensor 2
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 4 3 3 3.3V PF lower paper gauge L 4 Relay 6 1 1 Vout
PF right cover sensor 1 1 8 10 8 8 GND GND 8 8 2 5 2 2 GND
CAS2_QUANT2 9 9 1 6 1 1 Vout sensor 2
3.3V 3 3 9 Relay 9 A GND 10 10
PF paper sensor 1 GND 2 2 10 8 B CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 M 3 7 7 1 1 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 11 7 C N 2 8 6 2 2 2 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 2
O 1 9 5 3 3 3 1 1 GND
4 4 Relay 4 4
3.3V 3 3 12 6 D GND 12 12 2 2 3 5 5 5
PF retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 13 5 E CAS2_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 1 1 PF cassette sensor 2 2 6 6 6
GND 1 1 14 4 F GND 14 14 1 7 7 7
CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15
GND 16 16
CAS2_WSIZE 17
3.3V 3 3 15 3 G NC 18
PF zero sensor 1 Vout
GND
2
1
2
1
16
17
2
1
H
I
J 9 9 3.3V5_LED
K 10 10 GND
L 11 11 ULIM_SW_2
3.3V 3 3 1 3 12 12 3.3V5_LED
PF horizontal conveying sensor GND 2 2 2 Relay 2 13 13 GND
Vout 1 1 3 1 14 14 VER_SENS_2 1 1 NC
2 2 NC
G 15 15 3.3V4 3 3 NC
H 16 16 P0R_SW 4 4 NC
I 17 17 GND 5 5 NC
6 6 NC
18 18 3.3V5 7 7 NC
19 19 P0L_SW 8 8 NC
20 20 GND YC12 9 9 NC
VER_SENS 1 1 10 10 VER_SENS
3.3V3 2 2 11 11 3.3V3
GND 3 3 12 12 GND
EN_CLK 6 6 15 15 EH_CLK Engine PWB
EN_RDY 7 7 16 16 EH_RDY
EN_SDO 8 8 17 Relay 17 EH_SDO
YC6 EN_SDI 9 9 18 18 EH_SDI
2 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET EN_PAU 10 10 19 19 PF_PAU
PF lift motor 1 1 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 20 20 PF_CAS_OPEN
YC11
2 2 3 3 L_MOT2_RET 24V1 1 1 4 4 24V2
PF lift motor 2 1 1 4 4 L_MOT2_DR GND 2 2 5 5 GND
YC8
+24V 1 6 1 1 +24V 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
GND 2 5 2 2 GND
START/STOP 3 4 3 3 START/STOP
PF feed motor CLOCK 4 3 4 4 CLOCK 1G 1G AC_LIVE
LD 5 2 5 5 LD
CW/CCW 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW 3 3 FG
16
1 1
15
14
Outlet
13 2 2
9
AC_LIVE 1 1
8
7 1
YC13
1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
6 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
PF PWB 2
4
3
4
3
4
AN_PF_SDI
AN_PF_SDO
Relay 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
1 6 6 AN_PF_CLK
(Side feeder) 3 7 7 PF_CAS2_SEL
11 8 8 GND
10 9 9 3.3V3
12 10 10 AN_VER_SENS
4 YC10
3 1 1 GND
2 2 2 GND
1 3 3 24V2
YC14
D 1 1 3.3V4_LED
E 2 2 RETARD_SENS_1
F 3 3 GND
M 4 4 3.3V4_LED
N 5 5 RETARD_SENS_2
O 6 6 GND
9-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(5) Side feeder (PF-7120) wiring diagram
PF PWB
YC15 YC6
3 3 1 1 FDR_CL LDPSW1_3.3V1 1 1 9 1 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 2 2 GND 2 2 8 2 2 2 GND PF upper paper gauge sensor 1
1 1 2 2 +24V2_F1 LDPSW1 3 3 7 3 1 1 Vout
3 HOR_CL1
LDPSW2_3.3V1 4 4 6 4 3 3 3.3V
4 +24V2_F1 GND 5 5 5 Relay 5 2 2 GND PF lower paper gauge sensor 2
LDPSW2 6 6 4 6 1 1 Vout
5 HOR_CL2
6 +24V2_F1 SZSW2_3.3V1 7 7 3 7 3 3 3.3V

GND 8 8 2 8 2 2 GND PF lift lower limit sensor
7 FDL_CL SZSW2 9 9 1 9 1 1 Vout
8 +24V2_F1
DEK_OPN1_3.3V2 10 10
GND 11 11 2 2
DEK_OPN1 12 12 1 1 PF connection sensor
NC 13 13
YC3
RDPSW1_3.3V1 1
GND 2
YC5 RDPSW1 3
2 2 1 1 GND RDPSW2_3.3V1 4
PF cassette sensor 1 1 2 2 CVROP_SW GND 5
RDPSW2 6
SZSW1_3.3V1 7
3 3 VER_CL GND 8
4 4 +24V2_F1 SZSW1 9
5 5 VCVSW_3.3V1 DEK_OPN2_3.3V2 10
6 6 GND GND 11
7 7 VCVSW DEK_OPN2 12
1 3 1 12 8 8 +24V2_F1
YC4
PF paper feed solenoid 2
3
Relay 2
1
2
3
11
10
9
10
9
10
FDR_SOLA
FDR_SOLK EPLSW_3.3V3 1
GND 2
EPLSW 3
3.3V 3 3 4 9 11 11 EPRSW_3.3V1 LULMSW_3.3V3 4
GND 5
PF paper sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
5
6
8
7
12
13
12
13
GND
EPRSW LULMSW 6
3.3V3 7
Relay P0LSW 8
3.3V 3 3 7 6 14 14 RULMSW_3.3V1 GND 9
HCVSW1_3.3V3 10
PF lift upper limit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
8
9
5
4
15
16
15
16
3.3V4
RULMSW GND 11
HCVSW1 12
3.3V 3 3 10 3 17 17 3.3V1
PF feed sensor Vout 2 2 11 2 18 18 P0RSW
GND 1 1 12 1 19 19 GND
YC13
SDO 1 1 4 4 AN_PF_SDO
SDI 2 2 2 2 AN_PF_SDI
CLK 3 3 1 1 AN_PF_CLK
SEL 4 4 3 3 PF_CAS2_SEL
RDY 5 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
YC8 PAUSE 6 6 6 6 AN_PF_PAUSE
1 2 1 1 OUT2 DEK_OPN1 7 7 7 7 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
PF lift motor 2 1 2 2 OUT1 DEK_OPN2 8 8
+3.3V4 9 9 10 10 3.3V3
GND 10 10 11 11 GND
YC7ࠉ292132-4 SD_FINAL_SENS 11 11 12 Relay 12 AN_VER_SENS
1 OUT1B(L_2) PF_FINAL_SENS 12 12 8 8 NC
2 OUT1A(L_1) 9 9 NC
13 13 NC PF PWB
14 14 NC
3
4
OUT2B(R_2)
OUT2A(R_1)
15
16
15
16
NC
NC 㸦desk㸧
YC11 4 4 NC
GND 1 1 3 3 GND
YC18 GND 2 2 2 2 GND
CH_A 8 8 1 1 FMOT_CH_A 24V2 3 3 1 1 24V2
CH_B 7 7 2 2 FMOT_CH_B 24V2 4 4
3.3V 6 6 3 3 3.3V
DIR 5 5 4 4 FMOT_DIR
PF conveying motor PWM 4 4 5 5 FMOT_PWM
BRAKE 3 3 6 6 FMOT_BRAKE N N AC_NEUTRAL
GND 2 2 7 7 GND
24V 1 1 8 8 +24V2_F1
L Relay L AC_LIVE
G G FG
YC16
1 +24V
2 GND
3 START/STOP
4 CLOCK
5 LD
6 CW/CCW
AC_LIVE 1 1
YC10
LVU_FAN 1
+24V2_F1 2
YC12
GND 1
GND 2
24V2 3
YC14
HOR_UNIT 1
+3.3V1 2
9-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(6) Finisher (DF-7100) wiring diagram
YC8
EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 YC17
EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 PADDLE SENS A 1 1 3 3
EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF exit motor GND 2 2 2 2 DF paddle sensor
EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 PADDLE SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
5 1 GND 4 4 3 3
STP MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 2 4 4 ENTRY SENS SIG 5 5 2 2 DF entry sensor
STP MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 3 3 3.3V 6 6 1 1
STP MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 4 2 2 DF slide motor
STP MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 5 1 1 STRY EJE SENS A 7
GND 8
EJE RELS MOT 2B 9 9 4 4 STRY EJE SENS SIG 9
EJE RELS MOT 1B 10 10 3 3
EJE RELS MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF exit release motor
YC4 EJE RELS MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 YC15
1 1 1 1 24V1 LED1 1
DF front cover sensor 2 2 2 2 FRONT COV SIG MIDDLE MOT 2B 13 13 1 6 LED2 2
MIDDLE MOT 1B 14 14 2 5 LED3 3
3 3 TOP COV SOURCE MIDDLE MOT 2A 15 15 3 4 LED4 4
4 4 TOP COVSIG MIDDLE MOT 1A 16 16 4 3 DF middle motor KEY1 5
5 2 KEY2 6
YC5 ENTRY MOT 2B 17 17 6 1 GND 7
20 20 1 8 1 1 ENG RDY ENTRY MOT 1B 18 18
19 19 2 7 2 2 ENG SEL ENTRY MOT 2A 19 19 1 6 3.3V 8
18 18 3 6 3 3 ENG DI ENTRY MOT 1A 20 20 2 5 MTRY U SENS K 9
17 17 4 5 4 4 ENG DO 3 4
16 16 5 4 5 5 ENG PAU YC21 4 3 DF paper entry motor
15 15 6 3 6 6 DET MIDDLE MOT 1B 1 5 2 YC16
Feed image PWB 14 14 7 2 7 7 ENG CLK 6 1 MTRY U SENS K 1 1 1 1
8 1 8 8 GND MIDDLE MOT 1A 2 GND 2 2 3 3
YC3 MIDDLE MOT 2A 3 PAP SENS SIG 3 3 2 2 DF exit sensor
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND 3.3V 4 4 4 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND MIDDLE MOT 2B 4
4 4 3 3 3 3 24V1 3.3V 5
5 5 4 4 4 4 24V1 YC9 MTRY U SENS K 6
PADDLE MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4
PADDLE MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor YC19
PADDLE MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 SID REG R SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF side registration
SIDE REG R MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 SID REG R SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1 sensor 2
SIDE REG R MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 MT
1 13 1 13 A DF side registration motor 2
SIDE REG R MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 SID REG F SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
2 12 2 12 B YC19 SIDE REG R MOT 1A 8 8 1 1 GND 5 5 2 5 2 2
DF side registration
3 11 3 11 C YC6
SID REG F SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1 sensor 1
1 1 5V
SIDE REG F MOT 2B 9 9 4 4
4 10 4 10 2 2 3.3V A
SIDE REG F MOT 1B 10 10 3 3 GND 7 7 4 1
5 9 5 9 3 3 3.3V
SIDE REG F MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF side registration motor 1 PH ENTRY SENS SIG 8 8 3 2 B PUNCH
6 8 6 8 4 4 GND
7 7 7 7 5 5 GND
SIDE REG F MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 3.3V 9 9 2 3 C
1 4
6 6 PHPES REM
PH PWB 8 6 8 6 7 7 PHMOT REM
EJECT CL 13 MTRY FULL SENS A 10 10 3 3
9 5 9 5 8 8 PU RDY
GND 11 11 2 2 DF tray sensor
24V2 14 MTRY FULL SENS SIG 12 12 1 1
10 4 10 4 9 9 PU SEL
11 3 11 3 10 10 PU CLK
12 2 12 2 11 11 PU DI
YC10 13 13
13 1 13 1 12 12 PU DO
STPMOT OUT1 1 13 14 14
YC7
STPMOT OUT1 2 12 15 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
STPMOT OUT1 3 11 9 9 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 24V2 㸩
STPMOT OUT1 4 10 8 8 2 2 BUNDLE SENS A 16 16 3 1 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 17 17 2 2 2 2 DF bundle exit switch
STPMOT OUT2 6 8 6 6 4 4 BUNDLE SENS SIG 18 18 1 3 1 1
STPMOT OUT2 7 7
STPMOT OUT2 8 6 DF staple PAP PRE UP SENS A 19 19 12 1 3 3
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 20 20 11 2 2 2 DF paper press sensor 1
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 PAP PRE UP SENS SIG 21 21 10 3 1 1
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5 PAP PRE LOW SENS A 22 22 9 4 3 3
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 GND 23 23 8 5 2 2 DF paper press sensor 2
PAP PRE LOW SENS SIG 24 24 7 6 1 1
YC12 DF staple ADJUST SENS A 25 25 6 7 3 3

BRAKE 1 relay PWB GND 26 26 5 8 2 2 DF adjusting sensor
DIR 2 ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 4 9 1 1
CLK 3
ENABLE 4 STP MOV SENS A 28 28 3 10 3 3
GND 5 GND 29 29 2 11 2 2 DF slide sensor
24V2 6 STP MOV SENS SIG 30 30 1 12 1 1
YC11 YC18
TRY MOT OUT1 2 2 1 2 1
TRY MOT OUT2 1 1 2 1 DF tray motor 2
3
YC13
24V2 1 1 3 1
PAP PRE SOL ACT 2 2 2 2 DF paper press solenoid YC20
PAP PRE SOL KEEP 3 3 1 3 SET SENS A 1 1 3 3
GND 2 2 2 2 DF connection sensor
YC14 SET SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
5V 1 2 1 2
LED 2 1 2 1 Paper LED
DF PWB
9-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(7) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) wiring diagram: DF-7100 only
DF PWB PH main PWB

YC7 YC2
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
24V2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24V2 YC5
CCW 1 1
NC 2 2 PH motor
CW 3 3
YC6 YC1
PU_DO 12 12 1 13 1 1 PH_SDI
PU_DI 11 11 2 12 2 2 PH_SDO
PU_CLK 10 10 3 11 3 3 PH_CLK YC6
PU_SEL 9 9 4 10 4 4 PH_SEL 24V2 1 1 3 1
PU_RDY 8 8 5 9 5 5 PH_RDY PHSOL_PUL 2 2 2 2 PH solenoid *Not applied to
PUMOT_EN 7 7 6 8 6 6 PHMOT_REQ PHSOL_RET 3 3 1 3 100V model
PUPES_EN 6 6
GND 5 5 7 7 7 7 GND
GND 4 4 8 6 8 8 GND 24V2 4 4 3 1
3.3V 3 3 9 5 9 9 3.3V TNKSOL_PUL 5 5 2 2 PH tank solenoid
3.3V 2 2 10 4 10 10 3.3V TNKSOL_HLD 6 6 1 3
5.0V 1 1
YC19 YC7
3.3V 9 9 11 3 11 11 3.3V GND 1 1 3 3
PH_EN_SENS 8 8 12 2 12 12 PH_EN_SENS PH_EN_SENS 2 2 2 2 PH entry sensor
GND 7 7 13 1 13 13 GND 3.3V 3 3 1 1
YC9
4 1 4 1 3.3V
3 2 3 2 TNK_FULL YC8 3 1
PH tank full sensor (Receiver) 2 3 2 3 GND 3.3V 1 1 2 2 PH tank full sensor (Emitter)
1 4 1 4 TNK_FULL_PLS TNK_FULL_PLS 2 2 1 3
SENS_3.3V 3 3 3 3
GND 4 4 2 2 PH tank set sensor
PHTNK_SET 5 5 1 1
SENS_3.3V 6 6 3 3
GND 7 7 2 2 PH pulse sensor
PHMOT_PLS 8 8 1 1
SENS_3.3 9 9 3 3
GND 10 10 2 2 PH home position sensor
PHMOT_HP 11 11 1 1
9-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

YC12 YC19
STP_MOV_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 BRAKE 1 1 7 7
STP_MOV_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 DIR 2 2 6 6
STP_MOV_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF slide motor CLK 3 3 5 5
STP_MOV_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 ENABLE 4 4 4 4 DF tray motor
GND 5 5 3 3
EJECT_MOT 1B 5 5 1 6 24V2 6 6 2 2
2 5 1 1
EJECT_MOT 1A 6 6 3 4 YC20
EJECT_MOT 2A 7 7 4 3
DF exit motor DRM_SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
5 2 GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF drum sensor
EJECT_MOT 2B 8 8 6 1 DRM_SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1
MIDDLE_MOT 1B 9 9 1 6 MID_EJE_SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
YC3 2 5 GND 5 5 2 5 2 2 DF middle sensor
1 1 4 4 1 1 24V1 MIDDLE_MOT 1A 10 10 3 4 MID_EJE_SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1
DF exit cover sensor 2 2 3 3 2 2 EJECT_COV_SIG MIDDLE_MOT 2A 11 11 4 3 DF middle motor
5 2 YC21
1 1 2 2 3 3 FRONT _COV_SOURCE MIDDLE_MOT 2B 12 12 6 1 STRY_EJE_SENS A 1 1 3 3
DF front cover sensor 2 2 1 1 4 4 FRONT_COV_SIG GND 2 2 2 2 DF sub exit sensor
ENTRY_MOT 1B 13 13 1 6 STRY_EJE_SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
2 5
YC4 ENTRY_MOT 1A 14 14 3 4
A5 A7 1 7 1 7 1 1 GND ENTRY_MOT 2A 15 15 4 3 DF paper entry motor 3.3V 4 4 4 1 4 4
A3 A6 2 6 2 6 2 2 GND 5 2 GND 5 5 3 2 3 3
A2 A5 3 5 3 5 3 3 ENG RDY ENTRY_MOT 2B 16 16 6 1 STRY FULL SENS SIG 6 6 2 3 2 2
DF sub tray full sensor
A4 A3 4 4 4 4 4 4 ENG SEL STRY FULL SENS PLS 7 7 1 4 1 1
A6 A1 5 3 5 3 5 5 ENG CLK EJE_RELS_MOT 2B 17 17 4 4
A1 A2 6 2 6 2 6 6 ENG DI EJE_RELS_MOT 1B 18 18 3 3 GND 8 8 3 1 3 3
A7 A4 7 1 7 1 7 7 ENG DO EJE_RELS_MOT 2A 19 19 2 2 DF exit release motor ENTRY_SENS SIG 9 9 2 2 2 2 DF entry sensor
EJE_RELS_MOT 1A 20 20 1 1 3.3V 10 10 1 3 1 1
Feed
LED1 11 11 9 1 7 1 7
image PWB YC13 LED2 12 12 8 2 6 2 6
YC5
MTRY_U_SENS K 1 1 4 1 4 1
LED3 13 13 7 3 5 3 5 DF operation
B8 B8 3 3 1 1 1 1 GND LED4 14 14 6 4 4 4 4
GND 2 2 3 2 3 2
B9 B9 4 4 2 2 2 2 GND
MTRY_U_SENS SIG 3 3 2 3 2 3 DF tray upper surface sensor 2 KEY1 15 15 5 5 3 5 3 PWB
A8 A8 1 1 3 3 3 3 24V1 KEY2 16 16 4 6 2 6 2
3.3V 4 4 1 4 1 4
A9 A9 2 2 4 4 4 4 24V1 GND 17 17 3 7 1 7 1
YC14
3.3V 18 18 2 8 3 1
SFT_RELS_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4
1 12 YC6
SFT_RELS_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3
MTRY_U_SENS K 19 19 1 9 2 2 DF tray upper surface sensor 1
2 11 1 1 GND 1 3
3 10 2 2 GND
SFT_RELS_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF shift release motor
SFT_RELS_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
4 9 3 3 GND
YC22
5 8 4 4 5V
SFT_R_MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4 STPLE_SENS A 1 1 3 1 3 3
6 7 5 5 24V1
MT PWB 7 6 6 6 24V1
SFT_R_MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3
DF shift motor 2
GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 DF slide sensor
SFT_R_MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2 STPLE_SENS SIG 3 3 1 3 1 1
8 5 7 7 MT DO
SFT_R_MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1
9 4 8 8 MT DIN
10 3 9 9 MT CLK
SFT_F_MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4 SID_REG_R_SENS A 4 4 12 1 3 3
11 2 10 10 MT SEL
12 1 11 11 MT RDY
SFT_F_MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3
DF shift motor 1
GND 5 5 11 2 2 2 DF side registration sensor 2
SFT_F_MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 SID_REG_R_SENS SIG 6 6 10 3 1 1
SFT_F_MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1
YC7
SID_REG_F_SENS A 7 7 9 4 3 3
12 12 1 1 5V
11 11 2 2 3.3V
GND 8 8 8 5 2 2 DF side registration sensor 1
EJECT_CL 13 13 3 3 SID_REG_F_SENS SIG 9 9 7 6 1 1
10 10 3 3 3.3V
9 9 4 4 GND
2 2 DF exit clutch
24V2 14 14 1 1 GND 10 10 6 7 3 3
8 8 5 5 GND
7 7 6 6 PHPES_REM
PAP_SENS SIG 11 11 5 8 2 2 DF exit sensor
YC15 3.3V 12 12 4 9 1 1
6 6 7 7 PHMOT_REM
PH PWB 5 5 8 8 PU RDY
PADDLE_MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4
PADDLE_MOT 1B 2 2 3 2 3 3 BUNDLE_SENS A 13 13 3 10
4 4 9 9 PU SEL
PADDLE_MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor GND 14 14 2 11 2 2
3 3 10 10 PU CLK
PADDLE_MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 BUNDLE_SENS SIG 15 15 1 12 1 1 DF bundle exit sensor
2 2 11 11 PU DI
1 1 12 12 PU DO
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4
YC8 SIDE_REG_R_MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3
1 1 1 1 GND
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2
DF side registration motor 2 MTRY HP1 SENS A 16 16 6 1 3 3
2 2 2 2 24V2
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1 GND 17 17 5 2 2 2 DF tray sensor 1
MTRY HP1 SENS SIG 18 18 4 3 1 1
YC7 SIDE_REG_F_MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4
1 1
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3 MTRY HP2 SENS A 19 19 3 4 3 3
2 2 YC9
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 DF side registration motor 1 GND 20 20 2 5 2 2
3 3 5 1 5 5 BF RDY
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1 MTRY HP2 SENS SIG 21 21 1 6 1 1
DF tray sensor 2
4 4 4 2 4 4 BF SEL
5 5 3 3 3 3 BF CLK DF staple 4 1
6 6 2 4 2 2 BF DO
7 7 1 5 1 1 BF DI
YC17 relay PWB PADDLE SENS A 22 22 3 2 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 1 13 GND 23 23 2 3 2 2 DF paddle sensor
YC3 STPMOT OUT2 2 12 PADDLE SENS SIG 24 24 1 4 1 1
BF PWB 4 4 8 8 8
YC10
8 24V2
STPMOT OUT2 3 11 9 9 1 1
㸩
STPMOT OUT2 4 10 8 8 2 2 ADJUST SENS A 25 25 3 3
3 3 7 7 7 7 24V2
2 2 6 6 6 6 GND
STPMOT OUT1 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 26 26 2 2 DF adjusting sensor
STPMOT OUT1 6 8 6 6 4 4 ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 1 1
1 1 5 5 5 5 GND
STPMOT OUT1 7 7
YC5 STPMOT OUT1 8 6 DF staple SFT_SET SENS A 28 28 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 5V
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 29 29 2 2 DF shift set sensor
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 SFT_SET SENS SIG 30 30 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 GND
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND YC23
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3V
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 SFT_F HP SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF shift sensor 1
YC18 SFT_F HP SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1
DRM_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4
DRM_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 SFT_R HP SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
DRM_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF relief drum motor GND 5 5 2 5 2 2 DF shift sensor 2
DRM_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 SFT_R HP SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1
24V2 5 5 3 1 MTRY HALF SENS A 7 7 3 3

MID_DRM_SOL ACT 6 6 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 1 GND 8 8 2 2 DF tray sensor 3
YC16 MID_DRM_SOL KEEP 7 7 1 3 MTRY HALF SENS SIG 9 9 1 1
1 2 1 6 1 6 1 1 Eject fan 1
Rear 2 1 2 5 2 5 2 2 24V2 24V2 8 8 3 1 MTRY BF SENS A 10 10 3 3
DRM_BF SOL ACT 9 9 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 2 GND 11 11 2 2 DF tray sensor 5
1 2 3 4 3 4 3 3 Eject fan 2 DRM_BF SOL KEEP 10 10 1 3 MTRY BF SENS SIG 12 12 1 1
Front 2 1 4 3 4 3 4 4 24V2
24V2 11 11 3 1 MTRY FULL SENS A 13 13 3 3
Center
1 2 5 2 5 2 5 5 Eject fan 3 SUB_MID_SOL ACT 12 12 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 3 GND 14 14 2 2 DF tray sensor 4
2 1 6 1 6 1 6 6 24V2 SUB_MID_SOL KEEP 13 13 1 3 MTRY FULL SENS SIG 15 15 1 1
SFT_RELS SENS A 16 16 3 3
GND 17 17 2 2 DF Shift release sensor
DF PWB SFT_RELS SENS SIG 18 18 1 1
9-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK-4
(9) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only
YC1 YC3 1 12 YC7

3 3 1 1 GND GND 1 11 2 11 1 11 1 11 GND
MT tray sensor 1 2 2 2 2 OFS1 GND 2 10 3 10 2 10 2 10 GND
1 1 3 3 5V GND 3 9 4 9 3 9 3 9 GND
5V 4 8 5 8 4 8 4 8 5V
3 3 4 4 GND 24V 5 7 6 7 5 7 5 7 24V
MT tray sensor 2 2 2 5 5 OFS2 24V 6 6 7 6 6 6 6 6 24V
1 1 6 6 5V SDI 7 5 8 5 7 5 7 5 MT DO
SDO 8 4 9 4 8 4 8 4 MT DIN
3 3 7 7 GND SCLK 9 3 10 3 9 3 9 3 MT CLK
MT tray sensor 3 2 2 8 8 OFS3 SEL 10 2 11 2 10 2 10 2 MT SEL
1 1 9 9 5V READY 11 1 12 1 11 1 11 1 MT RDY
10 10 LED DF PWB
11 11 GND
12 12 EJECT
13 13 5V
YC2
3 3 1 1 GND
MT tray sensor 4 2 2 2 2 OFS4 MT PWB
1 1 3 3 5V
3 3 4 4 GND
MT tray sensor 5 2 2 5 5 OFS5
1 1 6 6 5V
3 3 7 7 GND
1 1 9 9 5V
3 3 10 10 GND
1 1 12 12 5V
YC5
MOTOR _A 1 4 1 4
MOTOR A 2 3 2 3
1 4 1 3 MT conveying motor
MOTOR B 3 2 3 2
2 3 2 2 1 6 MOTOR _B 4 1 4 1
2 5 13 13 5V
YC4
3 2
3 1 R24V 1 1 1 3 1 1
4 1 3 4 MT cover switch
MT tray exit sensor 2 14 14 LED 2 2 2 2
MT tray exit sensor 1
(photo emitter) 24V 3 3 3 1
(photo receptor)
3 3 3 3 4 3 15 15 GND
MT home position sensor 2 2 2 2 5 2 16 16 HP SIG
1 1 1 1 6 1 17 17 5V
18 18 GND
19 19 NC
20 20 5V
9-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(10) Folder unit(BF-730) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only
YC1 YC10 YC15 7 7

1 3.3V EXTMOT_ 2B 1 1 4 4 BLDMOT_BRK 1 1 6 6
2 TXD EXTMOT_1B 2 2 3 3 BLDMOT_DIR 2 2 5 5
3 RXD EXTMOT_2A 3 3 2 2 BF adjusting motor 2 BLDMOT_CLK 3 3 4 4 BF blade motor
4 N.C. EXTMOT_1A 4 4 1 1 BLDMOT_EN 4 4 3 3
5 GND GND 5 5 2 2
MDLMOT_ 2B 5 5 4 4 24V2 6 6 1 1
YC2 MDLMOT_1B 6 6 3 3
1 3.3V MDLMOT_2A 7 7 2 2 BF side registration motor 2 YC16
2 SWCLK MDLMOT_1A 8 8 1 1 FLDMOT_DIR 1 1 6 6
3 SWDIO FLDMOT_ALM 2 2 5 5
4 RESET CINMOT_ 2B 9 9 4 4 FLDMOT_CLK 3 3 4 4
5 GND CINMOT_1B 10 10 3 3 FLDMOT_EN 4 4 3 3 BF main motor
CINMOT_ 2A 11 11 2 2 BF paper entry motor N.C 5 5
CINMOT_1A 12 12 1 1 GND 6 6 2 2
24V2 7 7 1 1
YC4 EXCMOT_2B 13 13 8 1 4 4
YC20
2 2 1 1 1 1 24V1 EXCMOT_1B 14 14 7 2 3 3
BF left cover sensor EXCMOT_2A 15 15 6 3 2 2 BF adjusting motor 1 5V 1 6 1 3 1
1 1 2 2 2 2 FRONT COV SIG GND 2 2 2
EXCMOT_1A 16 16 5 4 1 1
5 2 BF adjusting sensor 1
BDLFT_HP 3 4 3 1 3
YC6 17 17 8 1 4 4
STMMOT_2B
2 2 1 1 24V STMMOT_1B 3 3 5V 4 3 4 3 1
BF set sensor 18 18 7 2
1 1 2 2 FRONT COV SIG STMMOT_2A 19 19 6 3 2 2 BF side registration motor 1 GND 5 2 5 2 2 BFside registration sensor 1
WDL_HP 6 1 6 1 3
STMMOT_1A 20 20 5 4 1 1
2 2 1 1 3 3 24V
BF tray sensor 1 1 2 2 4 4 EJECT COV SIG 5V 7 6 1 3 1
GND 8 5 2 2 2 BF tray full sensor
FULL 9 4 3 1 3
YC7 5V 10 3 1
3 4
1 1 GND 2 2
YC9 2 2 GND
GND 11 2 5 BF exit sensor
OUT 12 1 6 1 3
5 5 1 5 3 3 ENG_RDY
4 4 2 4 4 4 ENG_SEL 5V 13 3 1
3 1
3 3 3 3 5 5 ENG_CLK 14 2 2
GND 2 2 BF vertical conveying sensor
2 2 4 2 6 6 ENG_DI 15 1 3 1 3
TRANS PORT
1 1 5 1 7 7 ENG_DO
YC10 YC3 5V 16 3 1 3 1
8 8 8 8 4 4 24V GND 17 2 2 2 2 BF paper sensor
DF PWB 7 7 7 7 3 3 24V PAPER 18 1 3 1 3
6 6 6 6 2 2 GND
5 5 5 5 1 1 YC13 5V 19 3 1 3 1
GND
5V 1 1 10 10 GND 20 2 2 2 2
YC5
2 2
BFside registration sensor 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 5V STLS2 9 9 WDU_HP 21 1 3 1 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 GND 3 3 8 8
GND
2 2 2 2 2 2 STLS1 4 4 7 7 5V 22 22 3 1 3 1
GND
STHP 5 5 6 6 GND 23 23 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3V BF staple motor BF brade sensor
STMOT_OUT1 6 6 5 5 BLD_HP 24 24 1 3 1 3
STMOT_OUT1 7 7 4 4
FGND 8 8 3 3 GND 25 3 1 3 1
STMOT_OUT2 9 9 2 2 BULOW_HP 26 2 2 2 2
STMOT_OUT2 10 10
BF adjusting sensor 2
1 1 3.3V 27 1 3 1 3
YC17 GND 28 3 1 3 1
24V2 1 1 3 1 3 1 CARRY_IN 29 2 2 2 2 BF entry sensor
3FSOL_ATT 2 2 2 2 2 2 BF feedshift solenoid 3.3V 30 1 3 1 3
3FSOL_HLD 3 3 1 3 1 3
BF PWB
9-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(11) Punch unit (PH-7) wiring diagram: DF-7110/7120 only
YC8 YC2 YC4

PGND 1 1 1 1 GND PHMOT_N 1 1 2 2 PHMOT_N
24V2 2 2 2 2 24V2 NC 2 2 PH motor
PHMOT_P 3 3 1 1 PHMOT_P
YC7 YC1 YC3

PU_DO 12 12 1 1 PH_SDI PHADJ_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 PHADJ_MOT_A
PU_DI 11 11 2 2 PH_SDO PHADJ_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 PHADJ_MOT_B
PU_CLK 10 10 3 3 PH_CLK PHADJ_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 PHADJ_MOT_An PH slide motor
PU_SEL 9 9 4 4 PH_SEL PHADJ_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 PHADJ_MOT_Bn
PU_RDY 8 8 5 5 PH_RDY
PUMOT_EN 7 7 6 6 PHMOT_REQ
PUPES_EN 6 6 7 7 PHPES_REQ YC6
SGND 5 5 8 8 GND SENS3.3V 1 1 3 3 SENS3.3V
SGND 4 4 9 9 GND GND 2 2 2 2 GND PH slide sensor
3.3V 3 3 10 10 3.3V PHADJ_HP 3 3 1 1 PHADJ_HP
3.3V 2 2 11 11 3.3V
5.0V 1 1 12 12 5.0V
YC5
24V2 1 1 3 1 24V2
PHSOL_PUL 2 2 2 Relay 2 PHSOL_PUL PH solenoid
PHSOL_RET 3 3 1 3 PHSOL_RET
DF PWB
PHLED_A 4 4 5 5 PHLED_A
PHLED_B 5 5 4 4 PHLED_B
PHLED_C 6 6 3 3 PHLED_C PH paper edge sensor 1
PHLED_D 7 7 2 2 PHLED_D
YC10 PHLED_3.3V 8 8 1 1 PHLED_3.3V
1 3.3V
2 GND
3 RESET 5.0V 9 9 3 3 5.0V
4 MODE PHTNK_FUL 10 10 2 2 PHTNK_FUL PH tank full sensor
GND 11 11 1 1 GND
YC11
1
1 3.3V YC7
2 DBG_TX PHPES_DET 1 1 2 2 PHPES_DET
3 DBG_RX GND 2 2 1 1 GND PH paper edge sensor 2
4 NC
5 GND
YC8
SENS3.3V 1 1 3 3 SENS3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND PH pulse sensor
PHMOT_PLS 3 3 1 1 PHMOT_PLS
SENS3.3V 4 4 3 3 SENS3.3V
GND 5 5 2 2 GND PH home position sensor
PHMOT_HP 6 6 1 1 PHMOT_HP
PH PWB
YC9
PHTNK_SET 1 2 1 1 PHTNK_SET
GND 2 1 2 2 GND PH tank set sensor
9-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
YC8 YC17
EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 MID EJE SENS A 1 1
EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 GND 2 2
EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2
DF exit motor MID EJE SENS SIG 3 3
EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
GND 4 4 3 1 3 3
ST MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 ENTRY SENS SIG 5 5 2 2 2 2 DF entry sensor
ST MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 3.3V 6 6 1 3 1 1
ST MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 DF slide motor
ST MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 1

EJE RELS MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF exit release motor
YC4 EJE RELS MOT 1A 12 12 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 24V1
DF front cover sensor 2 2 2 2 2 2 FRNT COV SIG ENTRY MOT 2B 13 13
ENTRY MOT 1B 14 14 1 6
1 1 3 3 TOP COV SOURCE ENTRY MOT 2A 15 15 2 5
DF top cover sensor 2 2 4 4 TOP COV SIG ENTRY MOT 1A 16 16 3 4
4 3 DF paper entry motor
YC5 MIDDLE MOT 2B 17 17 5 2
A5 A5 3 5 3 5 1 1 ENG RDY MIDDLE MOT 1B 18 18 6 1
A3 A3 4 4 4 4 2 2 ENG SEL MIDDLE MOT 2A 19 19
A2 A2 6 2 6 2 3 3 ENG DI MIDDLE MOT 1A 20 20 1 6
A4 A4 7 1 7 1 4 4 ENG DO 2 5
A6 A6 2 6 2 6 5 5 ENG PAU 3 4
A1 A1 5 3 5 3 6 6 DET 4 3 DF middle motor YC16
Feed A7 A7 1 7 1 7 7 7 ENG CLK 5 2 MTRY U SENS K 1 1 4 3 4 1
8 8 GND 6 1 GND 2 2 3 4 3 2 DF tray upper surface
image PWB YC3 MTRY U SENS SIG 3 3 2 5 2 3
sensor 2
B8 B8 3 3 1 1 1 1 GND 3.3V 4 4 1 6 1 4
B9 B9 4 4 2 2 2 2 GND
A8 A8 1 1 3 3 3 3 24V1 3.3V 5 5 6 1 3 1
A9 A9 2 2 4 4 4 4 24V1 YC9 MTRY U SENS K 6 6 5 2 2 2
DF tray upper surface
PADDLE MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4 1 3 sensor 1
YC6 PADDLE MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor YC19
12 12 1 1 5V PADDLE MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 SID REG R SENS A 1 1 12 1 3 3
11 11 2 2 3.3V GND 2 2 11 2 2 2
DF side registration
10 10 3 3 3.3V SIDE REG R MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4 SID REG R SENS SIG 3 3 10 3 1 1 sensor 2
9 9 4 4 GND SIDE REG R MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3 DF side registration
8 8 5 5 GND SIDE REG R MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2 motor 2 SID REG F SENS A 4 4 9 4 3 3 DF side registration
7 7 6 6 PH PES REM SIDE REG R MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1 GND 5 5 8 5 2 2
6 6 7 7 PH MOT REM SID REG F SENS SIG 6 6 7 6 1 1 sensor 1
PH PWB 5 5 8 8 PU RDY SIDE REG F MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4
4 4 9 9 PU SEL SIDE REG F MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3 DF side registration GND 7 7 6 7 3 3
3 3 10 10 PU CLK SIDE REG F MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 motor 1 PAP SENS SIG 8 8 5 8 2 2 DF exit sensor
2 2 11 11 PU DI SIDE REG F MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1 3.3V 9 9 4 9 1 1
1 1 12 12 PU DO
YC7 BUNDLE SENS A 10 10 3 10
1 1 1 1 GND GND 11 11 2 11 2 2
2 2 2 2 24V2 BUNDLE SENS SIG 12 12 1 12 1 1 DF bundle exit sensor
4 1
YC10 PADDLE SENS A 13 13 3 2 3 3
STPMOT OUT1 1 13 GND 14 14 2 3 2 2 DF paddle sensor
STPMOT OUT1 2 12 PADDLE SENS SIG 15 15 1 4 1 1
STPMOT OUT1 3 11 9 9 1 1
㸩
STPMOT OUT1 4 10 8 8 2 2 MTRY HP SENS A 16 16 9 1 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 17 17 8 2 2 2 DF tray sensor 1
STPMOT OUT2 6 8 6 6 4 4 MTRY HP SENS SIG 18 18 7 3 1 1
STPMOT OUT2 7 7
STPMOT OUT2 8 6 DF staple MTRY HALF SENS A 19 19 6 4 3 3
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 20 20 5 5 2 2 DF tray sensor 2
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 MTRY HALF SENS SIG 21 21 4 6 1 1
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5 MTRY FULL SENS A 22 22 3 7 3 3
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 GND 23 23 2 8 2 2 DF tray sensor 3
MTRY FULL SENS SIG 24 24 1 9 1 1
DF staple
relay PWB ADJUST SENS A 25 25 3 3
GND 26 26 2 2 DF adjusting sensor
ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 1 1
STP MOV SENS A 28 28 3 1 3 3

GND 29 29 2 2 2 2 DF slide sensor
STP MOV SENS SIG 30 30 1 3 1 1
YC11 YC18
TRAY MOT OUT1 2 2 1 2 MID EJE SENS A 1 1 3 1 3 3
TRAY MOT OUT2 1 1 2 1 DF tray motor GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 DF middle sensor
MID EJE SENS SIG 3 3 1 3 1 1
DF PWB
9-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-7 Installation Guide

(1) PF-7100
PF-7100
(Paper Feeder)
Installation Guide
9-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A G* D
E(M4x20) F AA
B C(M3x8)
MFP
G*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.
G*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
G*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
G*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
G*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
G*;
G*;
G*;
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning materials from the parts supplied.
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
9-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
AA
C(M3x8)
AA
C(M3x8)
9-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
RR FL RR FL
1 1 1
RR
FL
D
E(M4x20)
RR FL RR FL
1 1
1 RR
FL
1 1 1
D E(M4x20)
Select holes (1) and install each stopper (D,F) with 3 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (E) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (D,F) avec 3 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (D,F) con los 3 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (D,F) mit den 3 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (E) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (D,F) con le 3 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (E) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
9-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
RR FL RR FL
F D
1 1
1 RR
FL
D
E
D 1 1 1
D
F E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
9-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
ON
9-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1
2
a b c
English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1. Check the gap between the paper leading edge (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according
to the following procedure.
<Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le bord de tête du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence , le régler selon la procédure
suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Español
Ajuste de la sincronización del borde superior
1. Compruebe el espacio entre el borde superior del papel (1) y la línea (2) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajús-
tela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> 20mm±1.5mm
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papier-Vorderkante (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezug-
swert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>20mm±1.5mm
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo superiore
1. Controllare lo spazio tra il bordo superiore del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, rego-
lare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
ㆶ։ѣᮽ
ࢃㄥሯփ䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴࡽㄟ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ
ḷ߶٬ !PPfPP
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW7RS˹!˷&DVVHWWH/˹Ǆ
䚐ạ㛨
㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁG㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㉔␜GOXPGḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨GOPG㢌G⢰㢬GOYPG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘GUG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ YW·XU\
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔGsz|GvG{GeGjOsP ⪰G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U
᪥ᮏㄒ
ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢඛ➃ ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 PPsPP
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW7RS@!>&DVVHWWH/@ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
9-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1
2
a b c
3. Adjust the values. 6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
4. Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5. Print the test pattern.
3. Régler les valeurs. 6. Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (b) : Augm entez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (2) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (c) : Dimi nuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
4. Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5. Imprimez le motif de test.
3. Ajuste los valores. 6. Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (b) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (2) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De 20mm±1.5mm
5. Imprima el patrón de prueba.
3. Die Werte einstellen. 6. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (b) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (2) auf der Test-
Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> 20mm±1.5mm
5. Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.
3. Regolare i valori. 6. Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (b) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (2) nello schema
Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
4. Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5. Stampare lo schema di prova.
䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ E˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵Ǆ
⍻䈅മṸ F˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ḷ߶٬ !PPfPP
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP
᤹ > ᔰ࿻ @ 䭞ˈԕ⺞ᇊ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ
ᢃঠ⍻䈅മṸǄ
㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 OYP 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ YW·XU\
⸩㇠ V 㐐㣅䇘⪰G⌸⪨ḔG㉘㥉㾌⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U
㐐䜌G䑜䉨㡸G㢬㋸䚝⏼␘ U
タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ E タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋ
ࠉ ್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ F タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ ᇶ‽್ !PPsPP
ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP
> ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ @ ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡋࠊタᐃ್ࢆ☜ᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࢆฟຊࡍࡿࠋ
9-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3 4
d e f
Adjusting the center line

1. Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (d). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
<Reference value> within ±0.5mm.
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] or [Cassette4].
Réglage de l'axe
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (d). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le r égler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].
Ajuste de la línea central

1. Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4 ) del patrón de prueba (d). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±0,5mm.
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
Einstellen der Mittenlinie

1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (d). Wenn der Abstand größer als de r Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].
Regolazione della linea centrale

1. Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (d). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±0,5mm.
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
ѣᗹ㓵䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴѝᗳ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄G˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ
ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW/HIW˹!˷&DVVHWWH˹ᡆ˷&DVVHWWH˹Ǆ
㉰䉤⢰㢬G㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㩅㚍 OZP ḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OP 㢌G⢰㢬 O[PG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘 UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·WU\ 㢨⇨
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔGsz|GvGsGeGjZG❄⏈Gj[ 㡸G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U
ࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࣛ࢖ࣥㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮ ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 sPP ௨ෆ
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW/HIW@!>&DVVHWWH@ ࡲࡓࡣ >&DVVHWWH@ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
10
9-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3 4
d e f
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (d) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±0.5mm.

Mire d' essai (e) : Augment ez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (d) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (d) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±0,5mm.

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (d) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (d) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> entro ±0,5mm
䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄G˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ H˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵Ǆ
⍻䈅മṸ I˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 O[P 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·WU\ 㢨⇨
タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ H タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋ
್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ I タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ ᇶ‽್ !sPP ௨ෆ
11
9-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2016. 6
303RB56710-02
9-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(2) PF-7110
PF-7110
(Large Capacity Feeder)
Installation Guide
9-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A G* D
E(M4x20) F AA
B C(M3x8)
MFP
G*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.

G*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
G*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
G*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
G*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
G*;
G*;
G*;
9-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
AA
C(M3x8)
AA
C(M3x8)
9-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
RR FL RR FL
1
1 1
RR
FL
D
E(M4x20)
RR FL RR FL
1 1
1 RR
FL
1 1
1
D E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
9-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
RR FL RR FL
F D
1 1
RR
1
FL
D
E
D 1 1
1
D
E E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
9-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
ON
9-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Changing paper size

A4 B5
Modification du format du papier
Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel
Ändern des Papierformats
Cambio del formato della carta
9-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2
2
9-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.

Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le format du papier.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el tamaño de papel.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen Sie das Papierformat ein.
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e impostare il formato carta.
9-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A4 Letter
10
9-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
11
9-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

12
9-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Letter A4
* Service Parts
Parts No.
* 303RC1008_
*
*
*
13
9-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
14
9-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

15
9-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1
2
a b c
English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1. Check the gap between the paper leading edge (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according
to the following procedure.
<Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le bord de tête du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence , le régler selon la procédure
suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Español
Ajuste de la sincronización del borde superior
1. Compruebe el espacio entre el borde superior del papel (1) y la línea (2) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajús-
tela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> 20mm±1.5mm
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papier-Vorderkante (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezug-
swert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>20mm±1.5mm
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo superiore
1. Controllare lo spazio tra il bordo superiore del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, rego-
lare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
ㆶ։ѣᮽ
ࢃㄥሯփ䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴࡽㄟ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ
ḷ߶٬ !PPfPP
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW7RS˹!˷&DVVHWWH/˹Ǆ
䚐ạ㛨
㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁG㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㉔␜GOXPGḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨GOPG㢌G⢰㢬GOYPG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘GUG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ YW·XU\
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔGsz|GvG{GeGjOsP ⪰G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U
᪥ᮏㄒ
ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢඛ➃ ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 PPsPP
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW7RS@!>&DVVHWWH/@ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
16
9-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1
2
a b c
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm

Mire d' essai (c) : Dimi nuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm

Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De 20mm±1.5mm

Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> 20mm±1.5mm

Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ E˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵Ǆ
⍻䈅മṸ F˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ḷ߶٬ !PPfPP
㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 OYP 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ YW·XU\
タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࠉ ್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ F タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ ᇶ‽್ !PPsPP
17
9-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3 4
d e f

1. Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (d). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
<Reference value> within ±0.5mm.
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] or [Cassette4].
Réglage de l'axe
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (d). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le r égler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].

1. Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4 ) del patrón de prueba (d). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±0,5mm.
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].

1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (d). Wenn der Abstand größer als de r Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].

1. Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (d). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±0,5mm.
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
ѣᗹ㓵䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴѝᗳ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄G˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ
ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW/HIW˹!˷&DVVHWWH˹ᡆ˷&DVVHWWH˹Ǆ
㉰䉤⢰㢬G㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㩅㚍 OZP ḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OP 㢌G⢰㢬 O[PG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘 UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·WU\ 㢨⇨
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔGsz|GvGsGeGjZG❄⏈Gj[ 㡸G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U
⣬ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮ ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 sPP ௨ෆ
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW/HIW@!>&DVVHWWH@ ࡲࡓࡣ >&DVVHWWH@ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
18
9-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
3 4
d e f
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (d) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±0.5mm.

Mire d' essai (e) : Augment ez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (d) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (d) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±0,5mm.

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (d) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (d) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> entro ±0,5mm
䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄G˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ H˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵Ǆ
⍻䈅മṸ I˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 O[P 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·WU\ 㢨⇨
タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ H タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋ
್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ I タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ ᇶ‽್ !sPP ௨ෆ
19
9-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2016. 6
303RC56710-02
9-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(3) PF-7120
PF-7120
(Side Feeder)
Installation Guide
9-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A B
Color MFP Color Printer

25/25ppm,32/32ppm, 60/55ppm
Color MFP
35/35ppm,40/40ppm, 70/65ppm,80/70ppm
50/50ppm,60/55ppm
Black & White MFP Black & White MFP

40ppm,50ppm,60ppm 70ppm,80ppm,90ppm
English
A different procedure is required dependingon the product which is installed with th is unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with the MFP(A) / Printer, see Page 1 to Page 10, Page 16 to Page 24.
For installation with a MFP(B), see Page 11 to Page 24.
Français
1.
Français
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui estinstallé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(A)
/ Imprimante, voir Page 1 à Page 10, Page 16 à Page 24.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimantemultifonction(B), voir Page 11 à Page 24.
1.
Español
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguient es páginas, se describe cada proc edimiento.
Para la instalación con un MFP(A) / Impresora, consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 10, páginas de la 16 a la 24.
Para la instalación con un MFP(B), c onsulte las páginas de la 11 a la 24.
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(A) / Drucker siehe Seiten 1 bis 10, Seiten 16 bis 24.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(B) siehe Seiten 11 bis 24.
1.
Italiano
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto sucui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(A) / stampante, vedere le pagine da 1 a 10, pagine da 16 a 24.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(B), vedere le pagine da 11 a 24.
ㆶ։ѣᮽ

ṩᦞᆹ㻵ሩ䊑ˈᆹ㻵↕僔⮕ᴹн਼Ǆ਴њ↕僔䇠䖭൘л䶒Ⲵ亥䶒Ǆ
ᆹ㻵ࡠ 0)3$ ᢃঠᵪкᰦˈ䈧৲㿱 3333Ǆ
ᆹ㻵ࡠ 0)3% кᰦˈ䈧৲㿱 33Ǆ
䚐ạ㛨 G
㢨G㣙㾌㜄G㉘㾌╌⏈G㥐䖼㜄G♤⢰G㤼㵜ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘ U ␘㢀G䓌㢨㫴㜄㉐GᴵG㤼㵜⪰G㉘⮹䚝⏼␘ U
tmwOhPV 䘸⫤䉤㜄G㉘㾌䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤GX 䓌㢨㫴 ¥XW 䓌㢨㫴 SX] 䓌㢨㫴 ¥Y[ 䓌㢨㫴⪰G㵬㦤䚌㐡㐐㝘 U
tmwOiP 㜄G㉘㾌䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤GXX 䓌㢨㫴 ¥Y[ 䓌㢨㫴⪰G㵬㦤䚌㐡㐐㝘 U
᪥ᮏㄒ
⿦╔ࡍࡿᑐ㇟࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊ ྲྀ௜ᡭ㡰ࡣ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ ࡑࢀࡒࢀࠊ
௨ୗࡢ࣮࣌ࢪ࡟グ㍕ࡋ࡚࠸ࡲࡍࠋ
0)3$ ࣉࣜࣥࢱ࣮࡟タ⨨ࡍࡿሙྜ㸹 ࣮࣌ࢪ㹼 ࣮࣌ࢪࠊ ࣮࣌ࢪ㹼 ࣮࣌ࢪ
0)3% ࡟タ⨨ࡍࡿሙྜ㸹 ࣮࣌ࢪ㹼 ࣮࣌ࢪ
9-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A B C D E(M4x8P)
A
L
M N
G(M4x8) H I J
F
K*
K*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.

K*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
K*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
K*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
AA
K*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
K*;
K*;
K*; MFP
While the illustrations in this installation guide are for the MFP models, contents of the installation work are common
for the MFP and printer models.
Les illustrations de ce guide d’ installation concernent les modèles MFP, mais les interventions d’ installation sont
communes aux modèles MFP et imprimantes.
Aunque las ilustraciones de esta guía de instalación hacen referencia a los modelos MFP, el contenido de los
procedimientos de instalación es el mismo para los modelos MFP y de impresora.
Obwohl die Abbildungen in dieser Installationsanleitung sich auf MFPs beziehen, ist die Vorgehensweise für MFPs
und Drucker die gleiche.
Sebbene le illustrazioni contenute in questa guida di installazione siano relative a modelli MFP, i contenuti della
procedura di installazione sono gli stessi per MFP e stampanti.
9-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(66 mm)
C
18 mm
18 mm
B
B 77mm+0mm
-2mm
B
B
B
77mm+0mm
-2mm
B
9-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
B
77mm+0mm
-2mm
B
9-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
D
D
E(M4x8P)
E(M4x8P)
9-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
9-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J
E(M4x8P)
AA
a=b
MFP
G(M4x8)
PF
G(M4x8) a b
ON
10
9-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A E(M4x8P) F G(M4x8) H
B
B
C
I J K*
K*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.

K*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
K*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
M N
K*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
K*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
K*;
K*;
K*;
OFF
11
9-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
1mm
L
1mm
0mm
1mm
12
9-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
B
E(M4x8P) E(M4x8P)
N
M
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
13
9-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
J
E(M4x8P)
a=b
MFP
G(M4x8)
PF
G(M4x8) a b
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
14
9-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
ON
15
9-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A
A4 B5
B
Changing paper size
16
9-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK

*Proceed to step on page 22.
17.
Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le
format du papier.
*Passer a l'etape de la page 17.
22.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el
tamaño de papel.
*Vaya al paso de la pagina 17.
22.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen
Sie das Papierformat ein.
*Weitergehen zu Schritt auf Seite 17.
22.
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e impostare i
formato carta.
*Procedere al passo a pagina 17.
22.
17
9-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A
Adjusting the cursor width
A4 Letter
B
* Changing paper
A cursor width thatsize
is too small can hinder paper feeding,
while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
Réglage de la largeur du curseur
* Cómo
Une largeur trop el
cambiar faible du curseur
tamaño risque d'empêcher l'entraînement du papier et une largeur trop grande
de papel
risque d'entraîner des problèmes du type entraînement du papier de biais.
Cómo ajustar la anchura del cursor
*Cambio
Una anchura del cursor
del formato demasiado
della carta pequeña puede impedir la alimentación de papel;
una anchura del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
Einstellen der Cursor-Breite

* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern,
wogegen eine zu große Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und ähnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
Regolazione della larghezza del cursore

* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta,
mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande può essere causa di problemi,
come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.
0.5~1.0 mm
18
9-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Service Parts
Parts No.
7BB700408H
Parts No.
303NG1008_

17.
Exécuter
Runle maintenance
mode maintenance U208 and
mode U208 et définir
set thele paper size.
format *Proceed
du papier.to step on page 17.
*Passer à l'étape de la page 22.17.
format du papier.
tamaño de papel.
*Passer à l'étape de la page 17.
*Vaya al paso de la página 22.
17.
tamaño de papel.
17.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 U208 aus und ilstellen
e impostare
formatoSie das Papierformat ein.
carta.
*Weitergehen
*Procedere al passo zu aSchritt
pagina 22.auf Seite 17.
17.
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e impostare il
formato carta.
Service
ServiceParts
Parts
Parts No.
Parts No.
303RC3402_
302ND3413_
KK
19
9-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
B
Letter A4
Changing paper size
20
9-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Service Parts
Parts No.
7BB700408H
Parts No.
303NG1008_

17.
format du papier.
17.
tamaño de papel.
17.
17.
formato carta.
17.
Service Parts
Parts No.
302ND3413_
21
9-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
B Adjusting the cursor width

Adjusting
* A cursorthe cursor
width width
that is too small can hinder paper feeding,
1. Load paper in the cassettes.
while
2. If theagap
cursor width
between that deck
the front is too large
cursor (3)can lead
and the to problems
paper such
(2) is outside astoskewed
the 0.5 paper
1.0 mm range feed.
when the paper (2) is touching up
against the rear deck cursor (1), perform the following adjustment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding,
Réglage de la largeur du curseur
while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empêcher l'entraînement du papier et une largeur trop grande
Réglaged'entraîner
risque de la largeurdes
du curseur
problèmes du type entraînement du papier de biais.
1. Charger les tiroirs en papier.
2. Si l'écartement entre le curseur de platine avant (3) et le papier (2) est hors des limites de 0,5 à 1,0 mm quand le papier (2) touche le
Cómo
curseurajustar laarrière
de platine anchura del cursor
(1), procéder au réglage suivant.
* Una
* Uneanchura
largeur tropdel cursor
faible demasiado
du curseur pequeñal'entraînement
risque d'empêcher puede impedir la alimentación
du papier et une largeur de
troppapel;
grande
una risque d'entraîner
anchura des problèmes
del cursor du type grande
demasiado entraînement du papier
puede de biais.
provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
Cómo ajustar la anchura del cursor
1. Cargue papel
Einstellen en Cursor-Breite
der los cajones.
*2.Eine
Si la separación
zu kleineentre el cursor frontal
Cursor-Breite kannde la plataforma
den (3) y el papel
Papiereinzug (2) está fuera del rango de 0,5 a 1,0 mm cuando el papel (2) toca
behindern,
el cursor trasero de la plataforma (1), haga el siguiente ajuste.
wogegen eine zu große Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequeña puede impedir la alimentación de papel; und ähnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
una anchura del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
Einstellen der Cursor-Breite
*1.Una
Papierlarghezza dei cursori
in die Papierladen troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta,
einlegen.
2. Falls der
mentre Abstand zwischen
unalarghezza deidem vorderen
cursori Konsole-Cursor
troppo grande può (3) und dem causa
essere Papier (2)
diaußerhalb
problemi,des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,0 mm liegt,
wenn das Papier (2) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (1) anliegt, ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern,
wogegen eine zu große Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und ähnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
2. Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (3) e la carta (2) è fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,0 mm quando la carta (2) tocca il cursore
postertiore del deck (1), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta,
mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande può essere causa di problemi,

format du papier.
tamaño de papel.
*Vaya al paso de la página 22. 0.5~1.0 mm
formato carta.
2
0.5~1.0 mm
1
2
Service Parts
Parts No.
303RC3402_
22
9-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2
1
2
a b c
English
1. Check the deviation between the center (1) of a correct image (a) and the center (2) of a test pattern. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust
the gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Français
Réglage de l'axe
1. Vérifier la déviation entre l'axe (1) d'une image correcte (a) et l'axe (2) d'une forme d'essai. Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la
procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Español
1. Compruebe la desviación entre el centro (1) de una imagen correcta (a) y el centro (2) de un patrón de prueba. Si la separación supera el valor de ref-
erencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ± 2,0 mm
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Deutsch
1. berprüfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte (1) eines korrekten Bilds (a) und der Mitte (2) eines Prüfmusters. Wenn der Abs tand größer als der
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ± 2,0 mm
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Italiano
1. Controllare la deviazione tra il centro (1) di un'immagine corretta (a) e il centro (2) di un modello di prova. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferi-
mento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ± 2,0 mm
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
ㆶ։ѣᮽ
ѣᗹ㓵䈹㢸
⺞䇔ḷ߶മ‫ ۿ‬D Ⲵѝᗳս㖞 о⍻䈅മṸⲴѝᗳս㖞 Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬Ǆྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ
ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW/HIW˹!˷&DVVHWWH˹Ǆ
䚐ạ㛨
㉰䉤⢰㢬G㦤㥉
㤵㥉䞈ㇵ OP 㢌G㉰䉤 OXP 㝴G䊀㏘䏬䑜䉨㢌G㉰䉤 OYP 㢌G㵜㢨⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘G·YUW 㢨⇨
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔGsz|GvGsGeGj\ ⪰G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U
᪥ᮏㄒ
㐺ṇ⏬ീ D ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮ ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 sPP ௨ෆࠋ
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW/HIW@!>&DVVHWWH@ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
23
9-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2
1
2
a b c
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern is within the refer-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. ence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm

Mire d' essai (c) : Dimi nuez la valeur de réglage. de test soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max.

Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba esté dentro de los valores de refer-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm encia.
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ± 2,0 mm

Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite sich innerhalb der Referenz befindet.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ± 2,0 mm
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.

Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> Entro ± 2,0 mm
䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐⲴ㓯˄˅Ⲵ

⍻䈅മṸ E˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵Ǆ
⍻䈅മṸ F˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨㜄㉐G⢰㢬 OYP 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G㢨

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG ⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌䚽
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·YUW 㢨⇨
タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್ෆ

ࠉ ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ F タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ ᇶ‽್ !sPP ௨ෆࠋ
24
9-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2017. 12
303RL5671006
9-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
(4) DP-7100
DP-7100
(Document processor:
RADF)
Installation Guide
9-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A B
Color MFP Black & White MFP

25/25ppm,32/32ppm, 30ppm,32ppm,
35/35ppm,40/40ppm, 35ppm,40ppm
50/50ppm,60/55ppm
Black & White MFP

40ppm,50ppm,60ppm
English
A different procedure is required depending onthe product which is installed with thisunit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP(A), see Page 1 to Page 5,Page 10 to Page 28.
For installation with a MFP(B), see Page 6 to Page 28.
Français
1.
Français
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonc
tion(A), voir Page 1 à Page 5,Page 10 à Page 28.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimantemultifonction(B), voir Page 6 à Page 28.
1.
Español
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada proc edimiento.
Para la instalación con un MFP(A), consulte las pági nas de la 1 a la 5,páginas de la 10 a la 28.
Para la instalación con un MFP(B), consulte las páginas de la 6 a la 28.
1.Deutsch
Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(A) siehe Seiten 1 bis 5,Seiten 10 bis 28.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(B) siehe Seiten 6 bis 28.
1.
Italiano
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(A), vedere le pagine da 1 a 5,pagine da 10 a 28.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(B), vedere le pagine da 6 a 28.
ㆶ։ѣᮽ

ṩᦞᆹ㻵ሩ䊑ˈᆹ㻵↕僔⮕ᴹн਼Ǆ਴њ↕僔䇠䖭൘л䶒Ⲵ亥䶒Ǆ
ᆹ㻵ࡠ 0)3$ кᰦˈ䈧৲㿱 3333Ǆ
ᆹ㻵ࡠ 0)3% кᰦˈ䈧৲㿱 33Ǆ
䚐ạ㛨 G
㢨G㣙㾌㜄G㉘㾌╌⏈G㥐䖼㜄G♤⢰G㤼㵜ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘ U ␘㢀G䓌㢨㫴㜄㉐GᴵG㤼㵜⪰G㉘⮹䚝⏼␘ U
tmwOhP 㜄G㉘㾌䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤GX 䓌㢨㫴 ¥\ 䓌㢨㫴 SXW 䓌㢨㫴 ¥Y_ 䓌㢨㫴⪰G㵬㦤䚌㐡㐐㝘 U
tmwOiP 㜄G㉘㾌䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤G] 䓌㢨㫴 ¥Y_ 䓌㢨㫴⪰G㵬㦤䚌㐡㐐㝘 U
᪥ᮏㄒ
⿦╔ࡍࡿᑐ㇟࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊ ྲྀ௜ᡭ㡰ࡣ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ ࡑࢀࡒࢀࠊ ௨ୗࡢ࣮࣌ࢪ࡟グ㍕ࡋ࡚࠸ࡲࡍࠋ
0)3$ ࡟タ⨨ࡍࡿሙྜ㸹 ࣮࣌ࢪ㹼 ࣮࣌ࢪࠊ ࣮࣌ࢪ㹼 ࣮࣌ࢪ
0)3% ࡟タ⨨ࡍࡿሙྜ㸹 ࣮࣌ࢪ㹼 ࣮࣌ࢪ
9-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A B C DD E A
L
F G(M4x10)
G(M4x10) H I(M3x8)
120V (North America / 230V (Europe) 100V

Latin America)
KJ KJ JK K J M
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de
rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes
suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den
gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
9-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
0mm
0mm
BB
1mm
1mm
BB
AA
C
C
DD
9-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
EE
9-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
G(M4x10)
K
J
H I(M3x8)
9-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
9-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A B D
B
E F G(M4x10) H I(M3x8) L
120V (North America / Latin America)

J K
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de
rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes
suministradas. 230V (Europe)
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den
gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden. J K
100V
M
B 0mm
B 1mm
9-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
E
LB
9-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
G(M4x10)
K
J
I(M3x8)
9-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
ON
9-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A 20mm 20mm
c
B 20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1. To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2. Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3. Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1. Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l appareil, préparer un or iginal (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bo rds de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2. Brancher la fiche d alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l appareil sous tension.
3. Placer l original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1. Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2. Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3. Coloque el original (a) en el DP y h aga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1. Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Lini e (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2. Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steck dose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3. Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erste llen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]

1. Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2. Inserire la spina dell alimentazione dell MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posiz ionare l interruttore principale su On.
3. Posizionare l originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l esempio di copia.
> ࣞ֒⺤䇚 @
㤕㾱Ựḕᵪಘࣘ֌ˈ߶༷аᕐ $ ৏は˄D˅ˈ䐍㓨ᕐ䗩㕈 PP ⭫ࠪ ᶑ㓯˄E˅ᒦф൘৏はѝᗳ⭫ࠪ ᶑ㓯˄F˅Ǆ
ሶ 0)3 Ⲵ⭥Ⓚᨂཤᨂ‫້ޕ‬໱ᨂᓗᒦᢃᔰѫ⭥ⓀǄ
൘ '3 к䇮ᇊ৏は˄D˅ᒦ䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠˈ⺞䇔ᵪಘࣘ֌઼༽ঠṧᵜǄ
┍㣅䞉㢬
ὤ᷸G㣅┍G䞉㢬㡸G㠸䚨㉐ SGhZG㟝㫴G㉔␜㜄㉐GYWG⛜㛨㫸Gḧ㜄G[ ᵐ㢌G㉔ OP ḰG㉰䉤㜄GX ᵐ㢌G㉔GOPG㢨GἬ⥘㫸G㠄ḔGOP ⪰G㨴⽸ U
䂌㉰䏬㜄GtmwG㤸㠄䙀⤠Ἤ⪰G⁶ḔG⮈㢬G㤸㠄G㏘㠸㾌⪰Gvu 㡰⦐G䚝⏼␘ U
kwGㇵ㜄G㠄Ḕ OP ⪰G㨴⽸䚌ḔG䊀㏘䏬G㾨䙰⪰G䞉㢬䚌㜠G㣅┍Gㇵ䈐㝴G㾨䙰G㈌䙀⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U
> ືస☜ㄆ @
$ ࢧ࢖ࢬ⏝⣬ࡢ➃࠿ࡽ PP ࡢ఩⨨࡟⥺ E ᮏ࡜ࠊ⏝⣬ࡢ୰ᚰ࡟⥺ F ᮏࢆᘬ࠸ࡓࠊືస☜ㄆ⏝ࡢཎ✏ D ࢆ⏝ពࡍࡿࠋ
0)3 ࡢ㟁※ࣉࣛࢢࢆࢥࣥࢭࣥࢺ࡟ᕪࡋ㎸ࡳࠊ୺㟁※ࢫ࢖ࢵࢳࢆ 21 ࡟ࡍࡿࠋ
ཎ✏ D ࢆ '3 ࡟ࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠸ࠊືస࠾ࡼࡧࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋ
10
9-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
20mm 20mm A
c
20mm B
20mm
4. Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according
to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust theU071 DP
leading edge timing.
4. Comparer l original (a) avec l exemple de copie. Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en f onction du type d écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d entret ien.
REMARQUE: Si l image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d attaque de U071.
4. Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separa ción supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio .
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4. Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswe rt ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG: Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4. Confrontare l originale (a) con l esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull MFP. Per ulteriori dettag li leggere il man-
uale d istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell imm agine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazi one del bordo principale DP U071.
ሩ∄༽ঠṧᵜ઼৏は˄D˅ˈྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬൘ḷ߶٬ԕкᰦˈሩ‫〫ٿ‬৏は䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ
ሯ 0)3 Ⲻഴ‫⺤܅‬䇚ૂ䈹᮪੄߃ሯ '3 Ⲻഴ‫܅‬䘑㺂⺤䇚Ⱦ䈜㓼޻ᇯ䈭৸㿷㔪‫ؤ‬ᢁ߂Ⱦ
δ⌞ᝅεྲ᷌മ‫⧠ࠪۿ‬ᓅ⚠ˈ⭘ 8 ᶕ䈳ᮤ '3 Ⲵᢛ᧿ս㖞Ǆྲ᷌⭘ 8 ᴤ᭩Ҷᢛ᧿ս㖞ˈࡉ޽⭘ 8 ሩ '3 Ⲵࡽㄟᇊᰦ䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ
㠄Ḕ OP 㝴G㾨䙰G㈌䙀㡸G⽸Ẅ䚌㜠G㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌⪰Gⷋ㛨⇌⏈Gᷱ㟤 SG㵜㢨 O 䏼 P 㢌G䝉䈐㜄G♤⢰G␘㢀㡸G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U

tmwG㢌G䞈ㇵ䞉㢬GⵃG㦤㥉㡸G䚌Ḕ⇌㉐Gkw 㢌G䞈ㇵ䞉㢬㡸G䚔Gᶷ UGㇵ㉬⏈G㉐⽸㏘G⬘⎨㛰㡸G㵬㦤䚔Gᶷ U
ஂ㨰㢌ஃG䞈ㇵG㾨⽀⫠ᴴGⵐ㈑䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤 SG|W]_kwG㏘㿈㠸㾌G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ UG|W]_ 㜄㉐G㏘㿈㠸㾌⪰Gⷴᷱ䚐Gᷱ㟤G|W^XkwG㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁG㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
ཎ✏ D ࡜ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࢆẚ㍑ࡋࠊᇶ‽್௨ୖࡢࡎࢀࡀ࠶ࡿሙྜࠊࡎࢀ᪉࡟ᛂࡌ࡚ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
0)3 ࡢ⏬ീ☜ㄆཬࡧㄪᩚࢆ⾜ࡗ࡚࠿ࡽ '3 ࡢ⏬ീ☜ㄆࢆ⾜࠺ࡇ࡜ࠋヲ⣽ࡣࢧ࣮ࣅࢫ࣐ࢽࣗ࢔ࣝࢆཧ↷ࡢࡇ࡜ࠋ
㸦ὀព㸧⏬ീ࢝ࣈࣜࡀⓎ⏕ࡍࡿሙྜࠊ8'3 ㄞࡳྲྀࡾ఩⨨ࡢㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ8 ࡛ㄞࡳྲྀࡾ఩⨨ࢆኚ᭦ࡋࡓሙྜࠊ8'3 ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
11
9-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 14. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0mm; Duplex copying: within ± 4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 17. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within
±4.0 mm
For checking the magnification, see page 21. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossi ble d obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 14. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 17. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 21 <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.
Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo c ontrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.

Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 14. < Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 17. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 21. <Valor de referencia>Dentro de ±1,5 %
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 14. <Bezugs wert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhal
b ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 17. <Bezugs wert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhal
b ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 21. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 14. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia dupl ex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 17. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duple x: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l ingrandimento, vedere pagina 21. <Valore di riferimento>Entro ±1,5%
ᗵ享᤹➗ԕл↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤˈ੖ࡉн㜭䗮ࡠ߶⺞䈳ᮤⲴ㾱≲Ǆ
࣭⺞䇔ࡽㄟ‫ٮ‬ᯌᓖㅜ 亥 ḷ߶٬ !অ䶒˖fPP ԕ޵ˈৼ䶒˖fPP ԕ޵
࣭⺞䇔ਾㄟ‫ٮ‬ᯌᓖㅜ 亥 ḷ߶٬ !অ䶒˖fPP ԕ޵ˈৼ䶒˖fPP ԕ޵
࣭⺞䇔ㅹ‫ؽ‬٬ㅜ 亥 ḷ߶٬ !f ԕ޵
ⵌ☐㐐G䚌ὤ㢌G㍐㉐⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚔Gᶷ UG㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚌㫴G㙾⏈Gᷱ㟤Gⵈ⪬G㦤㥉㡸G䚔G㍌G㛺㏩⏼␘ U
࣭㉔␜ᷱ㇠䞉㢬GGGX[ 䓌㢨㫴G஖ὤ㨴㾌஘␜⮨ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨ SG㛅⮨ஔ·[UW 㢨⇨
࣭䟸␜ᷱ㇠䞉㢬GGGX^ 䓌㢨㫴G஖ὤ㨴㾌஘␜⮨ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨ SG㛅⮨ஔ·[UW 㢨⇨
࣭☥ⵤ⓸G䞉㢬GGGGGYX 䓌㢨㫴G஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·XU\L 㢨⇨
ᚲࡎୗグࡢ㡰ᗎ࡛ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࡇ࡜ࠋ㡰ᗎ㏻ࡾ࡟ㄪᩚࢆ⾜ࢃ࡞࠸ሙྜࠊ ṇࡋ࠸ㄪᩚࡀ࡛ࡁ࡞࠸ࠋ
࣭ඛ➃ᩳࡵ☜ㄆ ࣮࣌ࢪ㸺ᇶ‽್㸼∦㠃㸸sPP ௨ෆࠊ୧㠃㸸sPP ௨ෆ
࣭ᚋ➃ᩳࡵ☜ㄆ ࣮࣌ࢪ㸺ᇶ‽್㸼∦㠃㸸sPP ௨ෆࠊ୧㠃㸸sPP ௨ෆ
࣭➼ಸᗘ☜ㄆ ࣮࣌ࢪ㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 s ௨ෆ
12
9-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 23. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 25. <Refer ence value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be perfo rmed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using theoriginal for adjustment, see page 27.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 23. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 25. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l agrandissemen t, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 27.
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 23. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 25. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde su perior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 27.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 23. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 25. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing u nd Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 27.
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 23. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
P er controlla re la linea centra le, vedere pa gina 25. <Va lore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bor do principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l originale, vedere pagina 27.
࣭⺞䇔ࡽㄟᇊᰦ䈳ᮤㅜ 亥 ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵

࣭⺞䇔ѝᗳ㓯ㅜ 亥 ḷ߶٬ !অ䶒˖fPP ԕ޵ˈ
ৼ䶒˖fPP ԕ޵
֯⭘䈳ᮤ⭘Ⲵ৏はᰦˈਟԕ਼ᰦ㠚ࣘ䘋㹼ㅹ‫ؽ‬٬ˈࡽㄟᇊᰦԕ৺ѝᗳ㓯Ⲵ䈳ᮤǄ
࣭䙊䗷䈳ᮤ⭘৏は䘋㹼㠚ࣘ䈳ᮤㅜ 亥
࣭㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁG䞉㢬GGYZ 䓌㢨㫴G஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·YU\ 㢨⇨

࣭㉰䉤G⢰㢬䞉㢬GGGGGGY\ 䓌㢨㫴G஖ὤ㨴㾌஘G␜⮨ஔ·YUW 㢨⇨ SG
㛅⮨ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨
㦤㥉㟝G㠄Ḕ⪰G㇠㟝䚌⮨G☥ⵤ⓸G㦤㥉 SG㉔␜䇴㢨ⵁG㦤㥉 SG㉰䉤G⢰㢬㦤㥉㢌G㣄┍㦤㥉㢨G䚐ⶼ㜄G㍌䚽╝⏼␘ U
࣭㦤㥉㟝㠄Ḕ㜄G㢌䚐G㣄┍㦤㥉GY^ 䓌㢨㫴
࣭ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢ☜ㄆ ࣮࣌ࢪ㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 sPP ௨ෆ

࣭ࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࣛ࢖ࣥ☜ㄆ ࣮࣌ࢪ㸺ᇶ‽್㸼∦㠃㸸sPP ௨ෆࠊ
୧㠃㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ㄪᩚ⏝ཎ✏ࢆ౑⏝ࡍࡿ࡜ࠊ➼ಸᗘㄪᩚࠊඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢㄪᩚࠊࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࣛ࢖ࣥㄪᩚࡢ⮬ືㄪᩚࡀ୍ᗘ࡟࠾ࡇ࡞࠼ࡿࠋ
࣭ㄪᩚ⏝ཎ✏࡟ࡼࡿ⮬ືㄪᩚ ࣮࣌ࢪ
13
9-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Checking the angle of leading edge]

1. Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line(2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the refere nce value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
[Vérification de l angle du bord avant]

1. Vérifier l écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l exemple de copie. Si l écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l écart horiz ontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]

1. Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posici ones del ejemplo de copia. S i la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la sepa ración horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]

1. Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wennder Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mi t dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand derLinie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
[Controllo dell angolo del bordo principale]

1. Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell originale (a) e la linea (2) delle po sizioni dell esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
> ⺤䇚ࢃㄥ‫ٴ‬ᯒᓜ @
⺞䇔৏は˄D˅кⲴ㓯˄˅઼༽ঠṧᵜкⲴ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤ
ḷ߶٬ ! অ䶒༽ঠᰦˈ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵Ǆ
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉৼ䶒༽ঠᰦˈ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵Ǆ
㉔␜Gᷱ㇠䞉㢬
㠄Ḕ OP 㢌G㉔ OXP ḰGⷜ䆠⦐㢌G㉔ OYP 㢌G㧀㟤G㵜㢨⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㷨஘␜⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉔ OYP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGG㛅⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉔ OYP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·[UW 㢨⇨
> ඛ➃ᩳࡵ☜ㄆ @
ཎ✏ D ࡢ⥺ ࡜ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼∦㠃ࡢሙྜࠊ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ୧㠃ࡢሙྜࠊ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
14
9-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2.
2. 3.
3. A
444
B
333
4.
4.
555
Adjust
Adjustthe
Adjust theposition
the positionof
position ofthe
of theDP
the DPunit
DP unit(A).
unit (A).
(A). Regolare
Regolarela
Regolare lalaposizione
posizionedell'unità
posizione dell'unitàDP
dell'unità DP(A).
DP (A).
(A).
Loosen
Loosenthe
Loosen theadjusting
the adjustingscrew
adjusting screw(5).
screw (5).
(5). Allentare
Allentarela
Allentare lalavite
vitedi
vite diregolazione
di regolazione(5).
regolazione (5).
(5).
For
Forcopy
For copyexample
copy example(d):
example (d):Slide
(d): Slidethe
Slide theDP
the DPunit
DP unit(A)
unit (A)to
(A) tothe
to themachine
the machinerear
machine rear((( ).).).
rear Per
Perun
Per unesempio
un esempiodi
esempio dicopia
di copia(d):
copia (d):
(d):
For
Forcopy
For copyexample
copy example(e):
example (e):Slide
(e): Slidethe
Slide theDP
the DPunit
DP unit(A)
unit (A)to
(A) tothe
to themachine
the machinefront
machine front((( ).).).
front Far
Farscivolare
Far scivolarel'unità
scivolare l'unitàDP
l'unità DPDP(A)(A)verso
(A) versoilililretro
verso retrodella
retro dellamacchina
della macchina((( ).).).
macchina
Tighten
Tightenthe
Tighten theadjusting
the adjustingscrew
adjusting screw(5).
screw (5).
(5). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di
di copia
copia
Per un esempio di copia (e): (e):
(e):
Perform
Performaaatest
Perform testcopy.
test copy.
copy. Far
Farscivolare
Far scivolarel'unità
scivolare l'unitàDP
l'unità DPDP(A)(A)verso
(A) versola
verso lalaparte
parteanteriore
parte anterioredella
anteriore dellamacchina
della macchina((( ).).).
macchina
Stringere
Stringerela
Stringere lalavite
vitedi
vite diregolazione
di regolazione(9).
regolazione (5).
(5).
Eseguire
Eseguireuna
Eseguire unacopia
una copiadi
copia diprova.
di prova.
prova.
Régler
Réglerla
Régler laposition
la positionde
position del'unité
de l'unitéCD
l'unité CD(A).
CD (A).
(A).
Desserrez
Desserrezla
Desserrez lavis
la visde
vis deréglage
de réglage(5).
réglage (5).
(5).
Pour
Pourl’exemple
Pour l’exemplede
l’exemple decopie
de copie(d):
copie (d):
(d):
Faire
Faireglisser
Faire glisserl'unité
glisser l'unitéCD
l'unité CD(A)
CD (A)àààl'arrière
(A) l'arrièrede
l'arrière dela
de lamachine
la machine((( ).).).
machine
Pour
Pourl’exemple
Pour l’exemplede
l’exemple decopie
de copie(e):
copie (e):
(e):
Faire
Faireglisser
Faire glisserl'unité
glisser l'unitéCD
l'unité CD(A)
CD (A)àààl'avant
(A) l'avantde
l'avant dela
de lamachine
la machine((( ).).).
machine
Serrez
Serrezla
Serrez lavis
la visde
vis deréglage
de réglage(5).
réglage (5).
(5).
Effectuer
Effectuerune
Effectuer unecopie
une copiede
copie detest.
de test.
test.
Ajuste
Ajustela
Ajuste laposición
la posiciónde
posición dela
de launidad
la unidadDP
unidad DP(A).
DP (A).
(A).
Afloje
Aflojeel
Afloje eltornillo
el tornillode
tornillo deajuste
de ajuste(5).
ajuste (5).
(5).
Para
Parala
Para lacopia
la copiade
copia demuestra
de muestra(d):
muestra (d):
(d):
Deslice
Deslicela
Deslice launidad
la unidadDP
unidad DP(A)
DP (A)hacia
(A) haciala
hacia laparte
la parteposterior
parte posteriorde
posterior dela
de lamáquina
la máquina((( ).).).
máquina
Para
Parala
Para lacopia
la copiade
copia demuestra
de muestra(e):
muestra (e):
(e):
Deslice
Deslicela
Deslice launidad
la unidadDP
unidad DP(A)
DP (A)hacia
(A) haciael
hacia elfrente
el frentede
frente dela
de lamáquina
la máquina((( ).).).
máquina
Apriete
Aprieteel
Apriete eltornillo
el tornillode
tornillo deajuste
de ajuste(5).
ajuste (5).
(5).
Haga
Hagauna
Haga unacopia
una copiade
copia deprueba.
de prueba.
prueba.
Stellen
StellenSie
Stellen Siedie
Sie diePosition
die Positionder
Position derDP-Einheit
der DP-Einheit(A)
DP-Einheit (A)ein.
(A) ein.
ein.
Lösen
LösenSie
Lösen Siedie
Sie dieEinstellschraube
die Einstellschraube(5).
Einstellschraube (5).
(5).
Für
Für Kopienmuster
Kopienmuster
Für Kopienmuster (d):(d):
(d):
Schieben
SchiebenSie
Schieben Siedie
Sie dieDP-Einheit
die DP-Einheit(A)
DP-Einheit (A)zur
(A) zurGeräterückseite
zur Geräterückseite((( ).).).
Geräterückseite
Für
FürKopienmuster
Für Kopienmuster(e):
Kopienmuster (e):
(e):
Schieben
SchiebenSie
Schieben Siedie
Sie dieDP-Einheit
die DP-Einheit(A)
DP-Einheit (A)zur
(A) zurGerätevorderseite
zur Gerätevorderseite((( ).).).
Gerätevorderseite
Die
DieEinstellschraube
Die Einstellschraube(5)
Einstellschraube (5)festziehen.
(5) festziehen.
festziehen.
Eine
EineTestkopie
Eine Testkopieerstellen.
Testkopie erstellen.
erstellen.
15
9-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
5. Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
6. After the adjustment, install the inner cover (4) which is removed in step 3.Close the DP cover (3).
7. A Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 9 on page 2).
B Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 4 on page 6).
5. Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu à ce que l écart de la li gne (2) de l exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suiv antes.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l écart horiz ontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
6. Après l'ajustement, installez le capot interne (4) qui a été retiré à l'étape 3.Refermez le capot du DP (3).
7. A Retirez le tapis d original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 9 à la page 2.)
B Retirez le tapis d original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 4 à la page 6.)
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la lí nea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de ref erencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la sepa ración horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
6. Después del ajuste, instale la cubierta interna (4) que se quitó en el paso 3.Cierre la cubierta del DP (3).
7. A Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 9 en la página 2).
B Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 4 en la página 6).
5. Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie(2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand derLinie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
6. Nach der Einstellung installieren Sie die innere Abdeckung (4), die in Schritt 3 entfernt wurde.Schließen Sie die Abdeckung des DP (3).
7. A Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 9 auf Seite 2).
B Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 4 auf Seite 6).
5. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell esempio di copia riporterà i valori diriferimento seguenti.
<Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
6. Al termine della regolazione, installare il coperchio interno (4), rimosso al punto 3.Chiudere il coperchio del DP (3).
7. A Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 9 a pagina 2).
B Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 4 a pagina 6).
䟽༽к䘠↕僔ⴤ㠣༽ঠṧᵜкⲴ㓯˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬㤳ത޵Ǆ
ḷ߶٬ ! অ䶒ᰦˈ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵
ৼ䶒ᰦˈ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵
䈳ᮤ㔃ᶏਾˈ䟽ᯠᆹ㻵൘↕僔 ѝਆлⲴ޵䜘ⴆᶯ Ǆ‫ޣ‬䰝 '3 ⴆᶯ˄˅Ǆ
A ᣶л৏はෛ˄&˅ˈ৲➗ㅜ 亥Ⲵ↕僔 ޽⅑㻵кǄ
B ᣶л৏はෛ˄&˅ˈ৲➗ㅜ 亥Ⲵ↕僔 ޽⅑㻵кǄ
ⷜ䆠⦐G㉔ OYPG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴G㦤㥉㡸Gⵌ⸩䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘␜⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉔ OYP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨
ଝଝଝଝଝ㛅⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉔ OYP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·[UW 㢨⇨
㦤㥉G䟸㜄G㍐㉐GZ 㜄㉐G⺸⫠䚐G⇨⺴G䀘ⶸ O[P ⪰G㉘㾌䚝⏼␘ UkwG䀘ⶸ OZP ⪰G␟㏩⏼␘ U
A 㠄Ḕ⬘䏬 OjP ⪰G㥐ᶤ䚌ḔGY 䓌㢨㫴G㍐㉐G` 㡸G㵬Ḕ⦐G␘㐐G⺴㵝䚝⏼␘ U
B 㠄Ḕ⬘䏬 OjP ⪰G㥐ᶤ䚌ḔG] 䓌㢨㫴G㍐㉐G[ 㡸G㵬Ḕ⦐G␘㐐G⺴㵝䚝⏼␘ U
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ࠊㄪᩚࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼∦㠃ࡢሙྜࠊ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ୧㠃ࡢሙྜࠊ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ㄪᩚ⤊஢ᚋࠊ ᡭ㡰 ࡛እࡋࡓ࢖ࣥࢼ࣮࢝ࣂ࣮ ࢆྲྀࡾ௜ࡅࡿࠋ'3 ࢝ࣂ࣮ ࢆ㛢ࡵࡿࠋ
A ཎ✏࣐ࢵࢺ & ࢆྲྀࡾእࡋࠊ
࣮࣌ࢪࡢᡭ㡰 ࢆཧ⪃࡟෌ᗘྲྀࡾ௜ࡅࡿࠋ
B ཎ✏࣐ࢵࢺ & ࢆྲྀࡾእࡋࠊ
࣮࣌ࢪࡢᡭ㡰 ࢆཧ⪃࡟෌ᗘྲྀࡾ௜ࡅࡿࠋ
16
9-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]

1. Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
[Vérification de l angle du bord arrière]

1. Vérifiez l écart entre la ligne (1) de l original (a) et la li gne (2) de l exemple de copie. Si l écart est supérieur à la vale ur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]

1. Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el v alor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]

1. Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzuführen.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
[Controllo dell angolo del bordo di uscita]

1. Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
<Valore di riferimento>Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
> ⺤䇚੄ㄥ‫ٴ‬ᯒᓜ @
⺞䇔৏は˄D˅кⲴ㓯˄˅઼༽ঠṧᵜкⲴ㓯˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆྲ᷌䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ᰦˈᗵ享䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ
ḷ߶٬ ! অ䶒ᰦ˖fPP ԕ޵
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉৼ䶒ᰦ˖fPP ԕ޵
䟸␜Gᷱ㇠䞉㢬
㠄Ḕ OP 㢌G㉔ OXP ḰGⷜ䆠⦐G㉔ OYP 㢌G㵜㢨⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤㜄⏈G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘␜⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGG㛅⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ·[UW 㢨⇨
> ᚋ➃ᩳࡵ☜ㄆ @
ཎ✏ D ࡢ⥺ ࡜ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࡣㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼∦㠃ࡢሙྜ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ୧㠃ࡢሙྜ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
17
9-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A 2.
2. 3.
3.
44. . 55. .
4
4
3
3
Adjust
Adjust the
the height
height of
of DP.
DP. Regolazione
Regolazione dell’altezza
dell’altezza del
del DP
DP
Loosen
Loosen the
the nut
nut (3).
(3). Allentare
Allentare ilil dado
dado (3).
(3).
For
For copy example (f): Loosen
copy example (f): Loosen the
the adjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4).
(4). Per
Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la
un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
(4).
For
For copy
copy example
example (g):
(g): Tighten
Tighten the
the adjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4).
(4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di di copia
copia (g):
(g): Stringere
Stringere la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
(4).
Retighten
Retighten the
the nut
nut (3).
(3). Stringere
Stringere di di nuovo
nuovo ilil dado
dado (3).
(3).
Réglez
Réglez la
la hauteur
hauteur du
du DP.
DP.
Desserrez
Desserrez l’écrou
l’écrou (3).
(3).
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (f):
l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez
Desserrez la
la vis
vis de
de réglage
réglage (4).
(4).
Pour
Pour l’exemple
l’exemple dede copie
copie (g):
(g): Serrez
Serrez la
la vis
vis de
de réglage
réglage (4).
(4).
Resserrez l’écrou (3).
Resserrez l’écrou (3).
Ajuste
Ajuste la
la altura
altura del
del DP.
DP.
Afloje
Afloje la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3).
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (f):
(f): Afloje
Afloje el
el tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4).
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (g):
(g): Apriete
Apriete elel tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4).
Vuelva
Vuelva a a apretar
apretar la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3).
Die
Die Höhe
Höhe des
des DP
DP einstellen.
einstellen.
Lösen
Lösen Sie
Sie die
die Mutter
Mutter (3).
(3).
Für
Für Kopienmuster
Kopienmuster (f)
(f) :: Lösen
Lösen Sie
Sie die
die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4).
(4).
Für
Für Kopienmuster
Kopienmuster (g):
(g): Die
Die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4)
(4) festziehen.
festziehen.
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (3) wieder fest.
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (3) wieder fest.
18
9-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
6. 7.
A
8. 9.
10. 11.
19
9-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
12. Make a proof copy again.

13. Repeat steps 1 to 12 until line (2) of copy ex ample shows the following the reference values.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
12. Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.

13. Répétez les étapes 1 à 12 jusqu à ce que la ligne (2) de l ex emple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
12. Haga otra copia de prueba.

13. Repita los pasos 1 a 12 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
12. Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.

13. Die Schritte 1 bis 12 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
12. Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.

13. Ripetere i passi da 1 a 12 fino a che la linea (2) dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
޽⅑䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ
৽༽᫽֌↕僔 aˈⴤ㠣༽ঠṧᕐⲴ㓯˄˅Ѫḷ߶٬޵Ǆ
ḷ߶٬ ! অ䶒ᰦ˖fPP ԕ޵
ǂǂǂǂǂৼ䶒ᰦ˖fPPԕ޵
␘㐐Gⷜ䆠⦐⪰G䚝⏼␘ U
ⷜ䆠⦐G㉔ OYP 㢨Gὤ㨴㾌⇨⦐G╔G⚀ᾀ㫴G㍐㉐GX ං XY 㡸Gⵌ⸩䚝⏼␘ U
GGGG஖ὤ㨴㾌஘␜⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG㛅⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ·[UW 㢨⇨
෌ᗘࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ⥺ ࡀᇶ‽್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ࠊᡭ㡰㹼 ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼∦㠃ࡢሙྜ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ୧㠃ࡢሙྜ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
20
9-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
B
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1. Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
[Vérification de l agrandissement] Pour la direction du balayage principal, l écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est
1. Vérifier l écart entre la ligne (1) de l original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l exem- de ±1,5%
ple de copie. Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
procédure suivante. Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
<Valeur de référence> ner(surface)
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l écart vertical de la ligne (2) est Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandi ssement du balayage secondaire du scan-
de ±1,5% ner (arrière)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1. Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la sepa ración supera el valor de referencia, ación secundaria del escáner(anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan(B): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
<Valor de referencia> ación secundaria del escáner(reverso).
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2. Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070
1. Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) verwenden.
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der S ubscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Su bscan-Vergrößerung (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
[Controllo dell ingrandimento] Per l orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
dell esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
<Valore di riferimento> ner (superficie)
Per l orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della Sub Scan(B): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% ner(lato posteriore)
> ⺤䇚ㅿ‫@ ٲك‬ ֯⭘㔤‫⁑؞‬ᔿ 8 䈳ᮤㅹ‫ؽ‬٬Ǆ

⺞䇔৏は˄D˅кⲴ㓯˄˅઼༽ঠṧᵜкⲴ㓯˄˅ǃ˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆ 6XE6FDQ)˖䈫ਆ࢟ᢛ᧿ㅹ‫ؽ‬ᓖⲴ䈳ᮤ˄↓䶒˅
ྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ 6XE6FDQ%˖䈫ਆ࢟ᢛ᧿ㅹ‫ؽ‬ᓖⲴ䈳ᮤ˄৽䶒˅
ḷ߶٬ !
ሩҾ࢟ᢛ᧿ᯩੁˈ㓯˄˅Ⲵкл‫〫ٿ‬٬˖f ԕ޵
ሩҾѫᢛ᧿ᯩੁˈ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖f ԕ޵
☥ⵤ⓸䞉㢬 ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|W^W 㡸G㉬䏬䚌ḔG㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U

㠄Ḕ OPG㉔ OXP ḰGⷜ䆠⦐㢌G㉔ OYPOZP 㢌G㵜㢨⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U zGzOmPஔ㏘㿈G⺴㨰㇠☥ⵤ⓸㢌G㦤㥉ஂ䖐⮨ஃ
㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㢨㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤 SG␘㢀G㍐㉐⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U zGzOiPஔ㏘㿈G⺴㨰㇠☥ⵤ⓸㢌G㦤㥉ஂ◫⮨ஃ
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘
⺴㨰㇠Gⵝ䛙㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉔ OYP 㢌Gㇵ䚌㵜㢨ஔ·XU\L 㢨⇨
㨰㨰㇠Gⵝ䛙㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉔ OZP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·XU\L 㢨⇨
> ➼ಸᗘ☜ㄆ @ ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ

ཎ✏ D ࡢ⥺ ࡜ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋ 6XE6FDQ)㸸ㄞࡳྲྀࡾ๪㉮ᰝ➼ಸᗘࡢㄪᩚ ⾲㠃㸧
ࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ 6XE6FDQ%㸸ㄞࡳྲྀࡾ๪㉮ᰝ➼ಸᗘࡢㄪᩚ ⿬㠃㸧
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼
๪㉮ᰝ᪉ྥࡢሙྜࠊ ⥺ ࡢୖୗࡎࢀ㸸s ௨ෆ
୺㉮ᰝ᪉ྥࡢሙྜࠊ ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸s ௨ෆ
21
9-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
X X'
A X' X
B 3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.02 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4. Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3. Régler les valeurs. 5. Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu à ce que l écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l exemple de copie dont la longueurest plus courte (h)(j) : l exemple de copie indiquela valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d échelle : 0,02 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4. Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
3. Ajuste los valores. 5. Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más la rgo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,02 % Para la dirección de exploración se cundaria, separación vertical de la
4. Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3. Die Werte einstellen. 5. Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbei spiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,02 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
3. Regolare i valori. 5. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento

Per l esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dell esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
Per l esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,02 % Per l orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4. Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ 䟽༽к䘠↕僔 ࡠ ˈⴤ㠣༽ঠṧᵜкⲴ㓯˄˅ǃ˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮

൘䮯ᓖ‫⸝ٿ‬ᰦ༽ঠṧᵜ˄K˅˄M˅˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬ ࡠḷ߶٬㤳ത޵Ǆ
൘䮯ᓖ‫ٿ‬䮯ᰦ༽ঠṧᵜ˄L˅˄N˅˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬ ḷ߶٬ !
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖ ሩҾ࢟ᢛ᧿ᯩੁˈ㓯˄˅Ⲵкл‫〫ٿ‬٬˖f ԕ޵
䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ ሩҾѫᢛ᧿ᯩੁˈ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖f ԕ޵
㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U ⷜ䆠⦐G㉔ OYPOZP 㢌G㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ං [ ⪰Gⵌ⸩䚝⏼␘

Ὤ㢨ᴴG㬛㡴Gᷱ㟤Gⷜ䆠⦐ OPOPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ U U
Ὤ㢨ᴴGὨGᷱ㟤Gⷜ䆠⦐ OPOPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUWYL ⺴㨰㇠Gⵝ䛙㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉔ OYP 㢌Gㇵ䚌㵜㢨ஔ·XU\L 㢨⇨
ⷜ䆠⦐⪰G䚝⏼␘ U 㨰㨰㇠Gⵝ䛙㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉔ OZP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·XU\L 㢨⇨
タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼

㛗ࡉࡀ▷࠸ሙྜࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ KM㸸タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿ ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
㛗ࡉࡀ㛗࠸ሙྜࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ LN㸸タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿ 㸺ᇶ‽್㸼
ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸 ๪㉮ᰝ᪉ྥࡢሙྜࠊ⥺ ࡢୖୗࡎࢀ㸸s ௨ෆ
ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ ୺㉮ᰝ᪉ྥࡢሙྜࠊ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸s ௨ෆ
22
9-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A
2.5mm
2.5mm B
2
1 2
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1. Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)
<Reference value> Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing(rear side)
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1. Vérifier l écart entre la ligne (1) de l original (a) et la ligne (2) de l exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l écart excède la val eur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)
<Valeur de référence> Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2. Para ajustar la sincronización ut ilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1. Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincroni zación del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separaci ón supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincroniza ción del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Back Head: Ajusta la sincroniza ción del borde superior (reverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back Tail: Ajusta la sincroniza ción del borde inferior (reverso).
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2. Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1. Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vo rderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert> Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteri-
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm ore)
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteri-
ore).
> ⺤䇚ࢃㄥᇐᰬ䈹᮪ @ ֯⭘㔤‫⁑؞‬ᔿ 8 䈳ᮤᇊᰦǄ
⺞䇔৏は˄D˅кⲴ㓯˄˅઼༽ঠṧᵜкⲴ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆྲ᷌‫ٿ‬ )URQW+HDG˖䈳ᮤࡽㄟሩս ↓䶒
〫٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ )URQW7DLO˖䈳ᮤਾㄟሩս ↓䶒
ḷ߶٬ ! %DFN+HDG˖䈳ᮤࡽㄟሩս ৽䶒
㓯˄˅Ⲵкл‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵ %DFN7DLO˖䈳ᮤਾㄟሩս ৽䶒
㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁ䞉㢬 ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|W^X 㡸G㉬䏬䚌ḔG㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U

㠄Ḕ OPG㉔ OXP ḰGⷜ䆠⦐G㉔ OYP 㢌G㵜㢨⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G mGoGஔ㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁ O 䖐⮨ P 㡸G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U
㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀G㍐㉐⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U mG{Gஔ䟸␜G䇴㢨ⵁ O 䖐⮨ P 㡸G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ iGoGஔ㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁ O ◫⮨ P 㡸G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U
㉔ OYP 㢌Gㇵ䚌㵜㢨ஔ·YU\ 㢨⇨ iG{Gஔ䟸␜G䇴㢨ⵁ O ◫⮨ P 㡸G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U
> ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢ☜ㄆ @ ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ

ཎ✏ D ࡢ⥺ ࡜ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀ )URQW+HDG㸸ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢ ⾲㠃 ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿ
ࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ )URQW7DLO㸸ᚋ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢ ⾲㠃 ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 %DFN+HDG㸸ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢ ⿬㠃 ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿ
⥺ ࡢୖୗࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ %DFN7DLO㸸ᚋ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢ ⿬㠃 ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿ
23
9-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A
2.5mm
B 2.5mm
1 2
a l m
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the shorter leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the longer leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.21 mm
4. Perform a test copy.
3. Régler les valeurs. 5. Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu à ce que l écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l exemple de copie indiquela valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d échelle : 0,21 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,21 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.
3. Die Werte einstellen. 5. Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,21 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3. Regolare i valori. 5. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-

Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dell esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
Entità modifica per passo: 0,21 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova
䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ 䟽༽к䘠↕僔 ࡠ ˈⴤ㠣༽ঠṧᵜкⲴ㓯˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬㤳

൘ࡽㄟᇊᰦ‫ٿ‬ᘛᰦ༽ঠṧᵜ˄O˅˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬ ത޵Ǆ
൘ࡽㄟᇊᰦ‫ٿ‬ធᰦ༽ঠṧᵜ˄P˅˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬ ḷ߶٬ !
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP 㓯˄˅Ⲵкл‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵
䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ
昪洛獞庂͑浶洛穯城埪 ⷜ䆠⦐G㉔ OYP 㢌G㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ං [ ⪰Gⵌ⸩䚝⏼␘ U

㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁ㢨G⾔⪬Gᷱ㟤Gⷜ䆠⦐ OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘
㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁ㢨G⏚㡴Gᷱ㟤Gⷜ䆠⦐ OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G㝠⫱⏼␘ U ㉔ OYP 㢌Gㇵ䚌㵜㢨ஔ·YU\ 㢨⇨
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUYX
ⷜ䆠⦐⪰G䚝⏼␘ U
タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼 ࢆ⧞

ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢࡀ▷࠸ሙྜࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ O㸸タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢࡀ㛗࠸ሙྜࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ P㸸タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋ 㸺ᇶ‽್㸼
ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP ⥺ ࡢୖୗࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
24
9-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
B
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2. Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1. Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line(2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line(2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2. Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1. Vérifier l écart entre l axe (1) de l or iginal (a) et l axe (2) de l exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
dure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1. Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2. Para ajustar la línea central util ice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso).
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2. Zum Einstellen der Mittellinieden Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1. Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
> ⺤䇚ѣᗹ㓵 @ ֯⭘㔤‫⁑؞‬ᔿ 8 䈳ᮤѝᗳ㓯Ǆ

⺞䇔৏は˄D˅ѝᗳ㓯˄˅઼༽ঠṧᵜѝᗳ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬Ǆྲ᷌‫ٿ‬ )URQW˖ѝᗳս㖞˄↓䶒˅Ⲵ䈳ᮤ
〫٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤǄ %DFN˖ѝᗳս㖞˄৽䶒˅Ⲵ䈳ᮤ
ḷ߶٬ ! অ䶒༽ঠᰦˈѝᗳ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉৼ䶒༽ঠᰦˈѝᗳ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵
㉰䉤G⢰㢬G䞉㢬 ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|W^Y 㡸G㉬䏬䚌ḔG㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U

㠄Ḕ OPG㉰䉤⢰㢬 OXP ḰGⷜ䆠⦐G㉰䉤⢰㢬 OYP 㢌G㵜㢨⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ UG mஔ㉰䉤G㠸㾌ஂ䖐⮨ஃ㢌G㦤㥉
㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀G㍐㉐⦐G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U iஔ㉰䉤G㠸㾌ஂ◫⮨ஃ㢌G㦤㥉
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘␜⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉰䉤⢰㢬 OYP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·YUW 㢨⇨
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGG㛅⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉰䉤⢰㢬 OYP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨
> ࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࣛ࢖ࣥ☜ㄆ @ ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ

ཎ✏ D ࡢ୰ᚰ⥺ ࡜ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ୰ᚰ⥺ ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍ )URQW㸸ࢭࣥࢱ࣮఩⨨㸦⾲㠃㸧ࡢㄪᩚ
ࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ %DFN㸸ࢭࣥࢱ࣮఩⨨㸦⿬㠃㸧ࡢㄪᩚ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼∦㠃ࡢሙྜࠊ୰ᚰ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ୧㠃ࡢሙྜࠊ୰ᚰ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
25
9-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
B
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copyexample (n): Decreases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Increases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line(2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
3. Régler les valeurs. 5. Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu à ce que l écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour l exemple de copie (n) dont l axe se déplace davantage vers l exemple de copie indiquela valeur de référence.
l avant : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l exemple de copie (o) dont l axe se déplace vers l intérieur : aug- Différence horizontale de l axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
menter la valeur. Différence horizontale de l axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Changement par graduation d échelle : 0,085 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): dis- (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
minuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro , ejemplo de copia (0): aumenta el Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4. Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
3. Die Werte einstellen. 5. Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
verringern. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
erhöhen. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,085 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3. Regolare i valori. 5. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo

Se il centro si sposta più avanti, es empio di copia (n): riduce il valore. scostamento della linea (2) dell esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
Se il centro si sposta verso l interno, esempio di copia (o): aumenta il riferimento.
valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬Ǆ 䟽༽к䘠↕僔 ࡠ ˈⴤ㠣༽ঠṧᵜкⲴ㓯˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬㤳

ᖃѝᗳੁࡽ‫〫ٿ‬ᰦ༽ঠṧᵜ˄Q˅˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬ ത޵Ǆ
ᖃѝᗳੁ޵‫〫ٿ‬ᰦ༽ঠṧᵜ˄R˅˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬ ḷ߶٬ !
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP অ䶒༽ঠᰦˈѝᗳ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵
䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ ৼ䶒༽ঠᰦˈѝᗳ㓯˄˅Ⲵᐖਣ‫〫ٿ‬٬˖fPP ԕ޵
㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U ⷜ䆠⦐G㉰䉤⢰㢬 OYPG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴G㍐㉐GY ං [ ⪰Gⵌ⸩

㉰䉤ᴴGⵈ⦐G㚒㡰⦐G䏴⥘G㢼⏈Gᷱ㟤G㈌䙀G㾨䙰 OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚝⏼␘ U
㉰䉤ᴴG㙼㡰⦐G䏴⥘G㢼⏈Gᷱ㟤G㈌䙀G㾨䙰 OPGaG㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ U ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUW_\ ␜⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉰䉤⢰㢬 OYP 㢌G㧸㟤㵜㢨ஔ·YUWG㢨⇨
ⷜ䆠⦐⪰G䚝⏼␘ U 㛅⮨㢌Gᷱ㟤G㉰䉤⢰㢬 OYP 㢌G㧀㟤㵜㢨ஔ·ZUW 㢨⇨
タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝࡢ୰ᚰ⥺ ࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼 ࢆ

ࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࡀᡭ๓࡟ࡎࢀ࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ Q㸸タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆ ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࡿࠋ 㸺ᇶ‽್㸼
ࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࡀዟ࡟ࡎࢀ࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ R タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋ ∦㠃ࡢሙྜࠊ୰ᚰ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP ୧㠃ࡢሙྜࠊ୰ᚰ⥺ ࡢᕥྑࡎࢀ㸸sPP ௨ෆ
ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
26
9-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 3. Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out
If there is no DP auto adjustment origina surface adjustment.
1. Set the maintenance mode U411 and press [DP Auto Adj] to output the 4. If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2. Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 3 until "OK" appears.
For details, see t he service manual.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l original pour effectuer le réglage] 3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la tou-
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'origi- che Start pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
nal du DP 4. Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affi che, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
l'original de réglage. fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 3 jusqu'à
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'êtreimprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
appuyer sur la touche Start. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d entretien.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP realizar un ajuste de anverso.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U411 y pulse [DP Auto Adj] para imprimir el 4. Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
original de ajuste. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 3 hasta que aparezca "OK"
de Start. en la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und dieStart-Taste
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhan- betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
den ist 4. Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. lung fehlgeschlagen. ÜberprüfenSie die Originalpositionierung und
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start - wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 3, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste betätigen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l originale] 3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP Start per eseguire la regolazione della superficie.
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 4. Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 3
tasto di Start. fino a quando appare "OK" .
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d istruzioni.
> 䙐䗽䈹᮪⭞৕ふ䘑㺂㠠ࣞ䈹᮪ @ ሶ৏は䶒ᵍк᭮൘ '3 ѫᵪкˈ᤹ 6WDUW 䭞ԕ䘋㹼↓䶒Ⲵ䈳ᮤǄ

⋗ᴿ '3 䈹᮪⭞৕ふᰬ ྲ᷌ቿᒅкࠪ⧠ 2.˄ᆼᡀ˅ˈࡉ㺘⽪䈳ᮤᆼᡀǄ
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈ䘹ᤙ˷'3$XWR$GM˹ˈ䗃ࠪ⍻䈅৏はǄ ྲ᷌ࠪ⧠ (5525;;˄䭉䈟 ;;˅ˈࡉ㺘⽪䈳ᮤཡ䍕ǄỰḕ৏は䇮ᇊս㖞ᒦ
ሶ䗃ࠪⲴ৏は᭮൘はਠкˈ᤹6WDUW䭞Ǆ 䟽༽↕僔 ઼ ˈⴤࡠ 2.˄ᆼᡀ˅ࠪ⧠Ǆ
䈖㓶޵ᇩ䈧৲➗㔤‫؞‬᡻޼Ǆ
㦤㥉㟝G㠄Ḕ⪰G㢨㟝䚐G㣄┍㦤㥉㠄Ḕ⪰Gm| 㡰⦐GkwG⸬㷨⦐G㉬䏬䚌ḔGG㐐㣅G䇘⪰G⍀⤠G䖐⮨㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼

kwG㦤㥉㟝G㠄ḔᴴG㛺⏈Gᷱ㟤 ␘U
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|[XX 㡸G㉘㥉䚌ḔGkwGhGh ⪰G⍀⤠G㦤㥉═G㠄Ḕ⪰G ♈㏘䙀⤼㢨㜄GIvrI ᴴG䖐㐐╌⮨G㦤㥉㝸⨀ᴴG╝⏼␘ U
㻐⥙䚝⏼␘ U lyyvyG ᴴG䖐㐐═Gᷱ㟤㜄⏈G㦤㥉㐘䑜㢹⏼␘ UG㠄ḔG㣙㵝㠸㾌⪰G䞉
㻐⥙䚐G㠄Ḕ⪰G㠄ḔG㡔⫠㜄G㣙㵝䚌ḔGG㐐㣅G䇘⪰G⌸⪹⏼␘ U 㢬䚌ḔGIvrI ᴴG䖐㐐╔G⚀ᾀ㫴G㍐㉐GY ං Z ⪰Gⵌ⸩䚝⏼␘ U
ㇵ㉬⏈G㉐⽸㏘G⬘⎨㛰㡸G㵬㦤
> ㄪᩚ⏝ཎ✏࡟ࡼࡿ⮬ືㄪᩚ @ ཎ✏ࢆ )DFH8S ࡛ '3 ࡬ࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ6WDUW ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡋࠊ⾲㠃ࡢㄪᩚࢆ⾜

'3 ㄪᩚ⏝ཎ✏ࡀ↓࠸ሙྜ ࠺ࠋ
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>'3$XWR$GM@ ࢆᢲࡋཎ✏ࢆฟ ࢹ࢕ࢫࣉࣞ࢖࡟ ࠕ2.ࠖࡀ⾲♧ࡉࢀࢀࡤㄪᩚ᏶஢࡜࡞ࡿࠋ
ຊࡍࡿࠋ (5525;; ࡀ⾲♧ࡉࢀࡓሙྜࡣㄪᩚኻᩋ࡛࠶ࡿࠋཎ✏ࡢࢭࢵࢺ఩⨨ࢆ☜
ฟຊࡋࡓཎ✏ࢆࢥࣥࢱࢡࢺ࢞ࣛࢫୖ࡟ࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ6WDUW ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡍࠋ ㄆࡋࠊ ࠕ2.ࠖࡀ⾲♧ࡉࢀࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰㹼 ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ヲ⣽ࡣࢧ࣮ࣅࢫ࣐ࢽࣗ࢔ࣝࢆཧ↷ࡢࡇ࡜ࠋ
27
9-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2SA/2RJ/2NK
A
5mm
B
F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3. If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1. Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until "OK" appears.
2. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FU(ChartB)] and the For details, see t he service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3. Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1. Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affi che, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l original à partir de l emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
2. Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d entretien.
FU(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la sur-
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3. Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1. Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca "OK"
2. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP en la pantalla.
FU(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3. Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1. F und R der automatischen Einstell ung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. ÜberprüfenSie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
2. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FU(ChartB)] und die Start- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung
ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3. Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1. Orientare F e R dell autoregolazione originale DP verso l alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'

Service Manual CS4002i-5002i-6002i PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Service Manual CS4002i-5002i-6002i PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

[CONFIDENTIAL]

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BAT-

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE

Notation of products in the manual

Product name Print speed 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

This page is intentionally left blank.

Safety warnings and precautions

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

Always ground the copier.

2. Precautions for Maintenance

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

This page is intentionally left blank.

(1-19)IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" ........................................................... 1-22

(18)Image adjustment......................................................................................................... 2-43

(1-1)(Machine rear side)........................................................................................... 3-14

(2-2)Laser scanner unit ............................................................................................ 3-69

(1)Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 4-1

(1-6)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover................................................... 4-62

(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover................................................. 4-223

(2-7)Horizontal black streaks.................................................................................... 7-11

(4-15)Skewed image ................................................................................................ 7-61

(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection.................................................... 7-122

(2)Sending Errors (Error Codes) ...................................................................................... 7-483

7-8Abnormal Noise ................................................................................................................ 7-523

7-10Connector troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 7-551

(11-1)Connector position.......................................................................................... 8-65

(13-3)Connector lists .............................................................................................. 8-125

(2) Copy Functions

Continuous Copy 1 to 999 sheets

(3) Printer Functions

(4) Scanner Functions

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.

(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2)

Dimension (W × D × H) 23.62" × 26.18" × 12.72" / 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm

(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,650-sheet × 2)

Paper Size A4, B5, Letter

(5-4) Side Feeder (3000-sheet)

(5-5) Inner Finisher

Weight 25.4 lbs. or less/ 11.5 kg or less

(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher)

(5-7) 1000-sheet Finisher

Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

(5-8) 4000-sheet Finisher

Dimension (W × D × H) 23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"/ 607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm

(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher)

(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Saddle Stitch 16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

Tri-folding 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

Maximum Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more

Tri-folding 1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more

Tri-folding Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated,

%) 3) 3)

1.1. '7% )$;6\VWHP &DUG

: Initial setting time: approx. 2 minutes